GEK105061

GE Industrial AeroDerivative
Gas Turbines
LM6000 Dry Low GEK 105061

Volume I
Emissions Series
Model - PD
GEK 105061
Volume I
0 ON-SITE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR
GENERAL ELECTRIC LM6000 PD SERIES
GAS TURBINES
GE INDUSTRIAL
AERODERIVATIVE
GAS TURBINES
GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS GE PROPRIETARY

INFORMATION AND IS DISCLOSED IN CONFIDENCE. IT IS THE PROPERTY OF GE AND
SHALL NOT BE USED, DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE
EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF GE, INCLUDING, BUT WITHOUT LIMITATION, IT IS
NOT TO BE USED IN THE CREATION, MANUFACTURE, DEVELOPMENT, OR DEVIATION
OF ANY REPAIRS, MODIFICATIONS, SPARE PARTS, DESIGN, OR CONFIGURATION
CHANGES OR TO OBTAIN FAA OR ANY OTHER GOVERNMENT OR REGULATORY
APPROVAL TO DO SO. IF CONSENT IS GIVEN FOR REPRODUCTION IN WHOLE OR IN
PART, THIS NOTICE AND THE NOTICE SET FORTH ON EACH PAGE OF THIS
DOCUMENT SHALL APPEAR IN ANY SUCH REPRODUCTION IN WHOLE OR PART. THE
INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT MAY ALSO BE CONTROLLED BY U.S.
EXPORT CONTROL LAWS. UNAUTHORIZED EXPORT OR REEXPORT IS PROHIBITED.
COPYRIGHT (2001) GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, USA
GE INDUSTRIAL AERODERIVATIVE GAS TURBINES

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45215-6301
01 September 1997
Change 5 30 May 2003
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Volume I GE Industrial AeroDerivative Gas Turbines
4 Foreword
This two-volume technical manual provides on-site operation instructions and general maintenance
procedures for the LM6000 Dry Low Emissions Gas Turbine. These instructions are not intended to
cover all details or variations in equipment, or to provide for every contingency connected with
installation, replacement, and maintenance. If more information is desired, or if problems arise
which are not covered herein, contact General Electric Customer Service.
1 List of Effective Pages

Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:
Original .......... 0 .......... 01 September 1997 Change .......... 3 .......... 30 September 2000
Change .......... 1 .......... 30 June 1998 Change .......... 4 .......... 30 September 2001
Change .......... 2 .......... 30 June 1999 Change .......... 5 .......... 30 May 2003
Interim Change Notices (ICN) GEK 105061-16, dated 20 February 2002, GEK 105061-17, dated
18 April 2002, and GEK 105061-18, dated 1 August 2002, are incorporated in this change.
Total number of pages in this volume is 368 consisting of the following:
Page No. Change No. Page No. Change No.

Title 5 9-1 to 9-5/(9-6 Blank) 0
A 5 10-1 to 10-109/(10-110 Blank) 5
i to xviii 5 11-1 to 11-44 4
1-1 to 1-13/(1-14 Blank) 5 12-1 to 12-7/(12-8 Blank) 0
2-1 to 2-7/(2-8 Blank) 0 A-1/(A-2 Blank) 5
3-1 to 3-3/(3-4 Blank) 2 A-3 to A-13/(A-14 Blank) 5
4-1 to 4-14 0 A-15 to A-19/(A-20 Blank) 5
5-1 to 5-31/(5-32 Blank) 2 A-21/(A-22 Blank) 5
6-1 to 6-16 3 A-23 to A-29/(A-30 Blank) 5
7-1 to 7-32 3 A-31 to A-33/(A-34 Blank) 5
8-1 to 8-22 4
A Change 5
GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
GE Industrial AeroDerivative Gas Turbines Volume I
Table of Contents
Page
Chapter 1 Introduction...................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1 Purpose and Scope of Technical Manual........................................................... 1-1
1-2 Arrangement and Use of Technical Manual ...................................................... 1-1
1-3 Notes, Cautions, and Warnings.......................................................................... 1-2
1-4 Changes to Technical Manual............................................................................ 1-2
1-5 Measurement Units ............................................................................................ 1-2
1-6 Glossary of Terms.............................................................................................. 1-7
1-7 Safety Precautions.............................................................................................. 1-7
1-7.1 Health Hazards .................................................................................... 1-7
1-7.2 Fire Hazards......................................................................................... 1-10
1-7.3 Compressed Air Hazards ..................................................................... 1-10
1-7.4 Heated/Chilled Part Hazards ............................................................... 1-10
1-7.5 Electrical Hazards................................................................................ 1-10
1-7.6 Paints and Finishes Hazards ................................................................ 1-11
1-7.7 Procedural Hazards.............................................................................. 1-11
1-7.8 Tooling Hazards .................................................................................. 1-11
1-7.9 Gas Turbine Operational Hazards ....................................................... 1-11
1-7.10 Environmental Hazards ....................................................................... 1-13
1-8 Special Inspections............................................................................................. 1-13
Chapter 2 Gas Turbine General Description and Model Summary ............................. 2-1
2-1 Purpose and Scope ............................................................................................. 2-1
2-2 General Description and Features ...................................................................... 2-1
2-2.1 General Description............................................................................. 2-1
2-2.2 Model Summary .................................................................................. 2-1
2-2.3 Summary of Changes from the LM6000 PB ....................................... 2-4
2-2.4 Standard and Optional Equipment....................................................... 2-4
2-2.5 Standard and Optional Instrumentation ............................................... 2-5
Chapter 3 Gas Turbine Package....................................................................................... 3-1
3-2 Package Description........................................................................................... 3-1
3-3 Gas Fuel Analysis and Equipment Installation .................................................. 3-1
Chapter 4 Gas Turbine Assembly Description................................................................ 4-1
4-2 General Description ........................................................................................... 4-1
4-2.1 Main Components................................................................................ 4-1
4-2.2 Engine Airflow .................................................................................... 4-7
Change 5 i

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table of Contents (Continued)

Page
4-3 Variable Inlet Guide Vanes ................................................................................ 4-7
4-4 Low Pressure Compressor .................................................................................. 4-7
4-4.1 General Description ............................................................................. 4-7
4-4.2 LPC Rotor ............................................................................................ 4-8
4-4.3 LPC Stator............................................................................................ 4-8
4-5 Front Frame and Air Collector ........................................................................... 4-8
4-5.1 Front Frame.......................................................................................... 4-8
4-5.2 Bypass Air Collector ............................................................................ 4-9
4-6 High Pressure Compressor ................................................................................ 4-9
4-6.2 HPC Rotor............................................................................................ 4-9
4-6.3 HPC Stator ........................................................................................... 4-9
4-7 Compressor Rear Frame .................................................................................... 4-9
4-8 Combustion System............................................................................................ 4-10
4-8.2 Triple Annular Combustor ................................................................... 4-10
4-8.3 Ignition System .................................................................................... 4-10
4-9 High Pressure Turbine ........................................................................................ 4-10
4-9.2 HPT Rotor ............................................................................................ 4-10
4-9.3 Stage 1 HPT Nozzle ............................................................................. 4-11
4-9.4 Stage 2 HPT Nozzle ............................................................................. 4-11
4-10 Low Pressure Turbine......................................................................................... 4-11
4-10.2 LPT Rotor ............................................................................................ 4-11
4-10.3 LPT Stator ............................................................................................ 4-12
4-11 Turbine Rear Frame............................................................................................ 4-12
4-12 Accessory Gearbox Assembly............................................................................ 4-13
4-13 Bearings .............................................................................................................. 4-13
4-14 Low Pressure Rotor Balance Piston System ...................................................... 4-13
Chapter 5 LM6000 PD Model System Descriptions ........................................................ 5-1
5-1 Purpose and Scope.............................................................................................. 5-1
5-2 Variable-Geometry Control System ................................................................... 5-1
5-2.1 VIGV System ....................................................................................... 5-1
5-2.2 VBV System ........................................................................................ 5-2
5-2.3 VSV System ......................................................................................... 5-4
5-3 Fuel Systems....................................................................................................... 5-4
5-3.1 Gas Fuel Systems ................................................................................. 5-4
5-3.1.1 Gas Manifold and Fuel Hoses ............................................. 5-6
ii Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

Page
5-3.1.2 Air/Gas Premixers............................................................... 5-6
5-3.1.3 Fuel Staging Valves ............................................................ 5-6
5-4 Gearbox Assemblies .......................................................................................... 5-7
5-5 Starter System .................................................................................................... 5-7
5-5.1 GE Starter Usage ................................................................................. 5-7
5-5.2 Starter Duty Cycles.............................................................................. 5-9
5-5.2.1 Air and Gas Starters............................................................ 5-9
5-5.2.2 Hydraulic Starter................................................................. 5-9
5-5.2.3 Gas Turbine Airflow During Starter Operation .................. 5-12
5-6 Lube System....................................................................................................... 5-12
5-6.1 General Description............................................................................. 5-12
5-6.2 System Flows, Pressures, and Temperatures....................................... 5-15
5-6.3 Oil Specification .................................................................................. 5-15
5-6.4 Lube Subsystems ................................................................................. 5-15
5-6.4.1 Lube Supply Circuit............................................................ 5-15
5-6.4.2 Scavenge Oil Circuit........................................................... 5-17
5-6.4.3 Engine Drains ..................................................................... 5-17
5-6.4.4 Sump Vent Circuit .............................................................. 5-17
5-6.4.5 Lube and Scavenge Line Cooling....................................... 5-19
5-6.5 Sump Pressurization ............................................................................ 5-20
5-6.6 Oil Mixing ........................................................................................... 5-20
5-6.7 Oil Consumption.................................................................................. 5-20
5-7 Sensors and Indicating Systems......................................................................... 5-20
5-7.1 Speed Indication .................................................................................. 5-20
5-7.1.1 LP Rotor Speed................................................................... 5-20
5-7.1.2 HP Rotor Speed .................................................................. 5-20
5-7.2 Acoustic Sensors.................................................................................. 5-20
5-7.3 Vibration Sensors ................................................................................ 5-20
5-7.4 Temperature Sensors ........................................................................... 5-21
5-7.4.1 LPC Inlet Air Temperature (T2)......................................... 5-21
5-7.4.2 HPC Inlet Air Temperature (T25) ...................................... 5-21
5-7.4.3 HPC Discharge Temperature (T3)...................................... 5-21
5-7.4.4 LPT Inlet Gas Temperature (T48) ...................................... 5-21
5-7.4.5 Lube Supply and Scavenge Temperature ........................... 5-21
5-7.5 Pressure Sensors .................................................................................. 5-21
5-7.5.1 LPC Inlet Pressure (P2) ...................................................... 5-21
5-7.5.2 HPC Inlet Pressure (P25).................................................... 5-21
5-7.5.3 LPT Inlet Gas Total Pressure (P48).................................... 5-22
5-7.5.4 Additional Pressure Parameters .......................................... 5-22
Change 5 iii

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

Page
5-7.6 Chip Detectors...................................................................................... 5-22
5-7.7 Variable-Geometry Position ................................................................ 5-23
5-7.8 Flame Sensors ...................................................................................... 5-23
5-7.9 Bleed Air Control System .................................................................... 5-23
5-7.10 Thrust Balance Control System ........................................................... 5-23
5-8 Electrical System ................................................................................................ 5-23
5-8.1 Ignition System .................................................................................... 5-23
5-8.2 Cabling ................................................................................................. 5-25
5-8.3 Electrical Panels ................................................................................... 5-25
5-9 Bleed System ...................................................................................................... 5-25
5-10 High Pressure and Low Pressure Recoup System .............................................. 5-25
5-11 Engine Control Unit ........................................................................................... 5-25
5-12 Low Pressure Rotor Balance Piston System ...................................................... 5-25
5-13 Water-Wash System ........................................................................................... 5-26
5-14 Engine Airflow ................................................................................................... 5-26
5-15 Air System Tubing and Frame Strut Functions.................................................. 5-26
5-15.1 A-, B-, C-, D-, and E-Sump Vents ....................................................... 5-31
5-15.2 B- and C-Sump Pressurization ............................................................. 5-31
5-15.3 Balance Piston...................................................................................... 5-31
5-15.4 HPC Stage 8 Bleed............................................................................... 5-31
5-15.5 Compressor Discharge Pressure Bleed ................................................ 5-31
5-15.6 High Pressure and Low Pressure Recoup ............................................ 5-31
5-15.7 HPT Cooling ........................................................................................ 5-31
5-15.8 LPT Cooling......................................................................................... 5-31
5-15.9 Passive Clearance Control ................................................................... 5-31
Chapter 6 Service and Support Requirements ................................................................ 6-1
6-2 Shipping.............................................................................................................. 6-1
6-2.1 Engine Shipment .................................................................................. 6-1
6-2.2 Low Pressure Turbine Module Shipping ............................................. 6-1
6-2.3 Engine Shipping Container .................................................................. 6-2
6-2.4 Enclosure Shipping .............................................................................. 6-2
6-2.5 Highway Shipping................................................................................ 6-2
6-2.6 On-Site Transportation......................................................................... 6-2
6-3 Storage................................................................................................................ 6-2
6-4 Installation/Removal........................................................................................... 6-5
6-4.1 Installation/Removal Methods ............................................................. 6-5
6-4.2 Size/Weight .......................................................................................... 6-5
6-4.3 Engine Mount Attachments ................................................................. 6-5
iv Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

Page
6-4.4 Engine Power Output Shafts................................................................ 6-7
6-4.5 Flange Interfaces.................................................................................. 6-7
6-5 Auxiliary Systems .............................................................................................. 6-9
6-5.1 Inlet System ......................................................................................... 6-9
6-5.1.1 Air Filtration ....................................................................... 6-9
6-5.1.2 Anti-Icing............................................................................ 6-12
6-5.2 Exhaust System.................................................................................... 6-12
6-5.3 Secondary Cooling Air ........................................................................ 6-13
6-6 Support Services ................................................................................................ 6-13
6-7 Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 6-14
Chapter 7 Installation and Startup................................................................................... 7-1
7-2 General ............................................................................................................... 7-1
7-3 Installation.......................................................................................................... 7-1
7-4 Pre-Startup Inspections ...................................................................................... 7-1
7-5 Operational Checkout ........................................................................................ 7-31
7-6 Verification Test ................................................................................................ 7-32
Chapter 8 Engine Operation ............................................................................................. 8-1
8-2 General ............................................................................................................... 8-1
8-3 Safety ................................................................................................................. 8-1
8-3.1 Gas Turbine Maintenance/Inspection Precautions .............................. 8-2
8-4 Equipment Protection......................................................................................... 8-3
8-4.1 Inlet Cover ........................................................................................... 8-3
8-4.2 Bleed Air Collector Cover ................................................................... 8-3
8-4.3 Exhaust Cover...................................................................................... 8-3
8-4.4 Electrical, Fluid, and System Interface Covers ................................... 8-3
8-5 Engine Protection............................................................................................... 8-3
8-5.1 Lubricating Oil .................................................................................... 8-4
8-5.2 Air........................................................................................................ 8-6
8-5.3 Gas Fuel ............................................................................................... 8-6
8-6 Records and Running Log.................................................................................. 8-6
8-7 Inlet/Enclosure Inspection.................................................................................. 8-7
8-8 Prestart Checks................................................................................................... 8-7
8-9 Motoring Procedures.......................................................................................... 8-7
8-9.1 Dry Motoring....................................................................................... 8-7
8-10 Starting and Operation ....................................................................................... 8-8
8-10.1 Normal Starting Sequence ................................................................... 8-8
Change 5 v

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

Page
8-10.1.1 Hot Starts............................................................................. 8-10
8-11 Shutdown ............................................................................................................ 8-18
8-11.1 Normal Shutdown ................................................................................ 8-18
8-11.2 Emergency Shutdown .......................................................................... 8-18
8-11.3 Post-Shutdown Fire .............................................................................. 8-19
8-12 Restart................................................................................................................. 8-19
8-12.1 Hot Restarts.......................................................................................... 8-19
8-12.1.1 Restart Within 10 Minutes After Shutdown ........................ 8-20
8-12.1.2 Restart More Than 10 Minutes After Shutdown ................. 8-20
8-13 Windmilling........................................................................................................ 8-21
8-14 Engine Performance ........................................................................................... 8-21
8-14.1 Performance Measurement .................................................................. 8-21
8-14.2 Performance Data Recording ............................................................... 8-21
8-14.3 Component Life/Repair Intervals......................................................... 8-22
Chapter 9 Abnormal Operation ........................................................................................ 9-1
9-2 General Definitions ............................................................................................ 9-1
9-3 Control Actions .................................................................................................. 9-1
9-3.1 Alarms .................................................................................................. 9-1
9-3.2 Power Cutback ..................................................................................... 9-1
9-3.2.1 Slow Decel to Minimum Load ............................................ 9-1
9-3.3 Shutdowns ............................................................................................ 9-2
9-3.3.1 Shutdown............................................................................. 9-2
9-3.3.2 Emergency Shutdown ......................................................... 9-2
9-3.3.3 Step-Decel to Idle/Shutdown .............................................. 9-2
9-3.3.4 Slow Decel to Minimum Load/Shutdown........................... 9-3
9-3.3.5 Aborted Start ....................................................................... 9-3
9-4 Operator Action .................................................................................................. 9-3
9-5 Hot Restarts ........................................................................................................ 9-4
9-6 Post-Shutdown Fire ............................................................................................ 9-4
9-7 Special Inspections ............................................................................................. 9-4
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting................................................................................................ 10-1
10-2 Arrangement and Use ......................................................................................... 10-1
10-2.1 Troubleshooting Reference Table ........................................................ 10-1
10-2.2 Numbered Troubleshooting Procedures............................................... 10-1
10-2.3 Using This Chapter .............................................................................. 10-2
10-3 Troubleshooting Procedures ............................................................................... 10-2
vi Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

Page
10-3.1 Low Pressure Turbine Speed Sensor (XNSD) Testing ........................ 10-2
10-4 Troubleshooting Reference Table...................................................................... 10-4
10-5 Troubleshooting Procedures............................................................................... 10-20
TS-1: Hot Start............................................................................................... 10-20
TS-2: Post-Shutdown Fire ............................................................................. 10-21
TS-3: Inlet Screen Differential Pressure........................................................ 10-21
TS-4: Flameout .............................................................................................. 10-22
TS-5: Power Supply Failure .......................................................................... 10-22
TS-6: Fuel Supply Temperature..................................................................... 10-23
TS-7: Staging Valve ....................................................................................... 10-23
TS-8: Stage 8 and CDP Bleed Valves............................................................ 10-24
TS-9: Stall .................................................................................................... 10-25
TS-10: T3 (High Pressure Compressor Discharge Temperature) .................... 10-26
TS-11: T48 (Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature) ................................ 10-27
TS-12: Lube Supply/Scavenge and VG Hydraulic Filter Differential
Pressure................................................................................................ 10-28
TS-13: Chip Detector....................................................................................... 10-29
TS-14: Lube Scavenge Temperature ............................................................... 10-30
TS-15: Lube Scavenge Pressure ...................................................................... 10-31
TS-16: Lube Supply Temperature ................................................................... 10-31
TS-17: Lube Supply Pressure ........................................................................ 10-32
TS-18: Lube System - Miscellaneous ............................................................ 10-35
TS-19: Not Applicable..................................................................................... 10-36
TS-20: XN25/HPC Speed................................................................................ 10-37
TS-21: Overspeed ............................................................................................ 10-38
TS-22: Miscellaneous Liquid or Gas Fuel System Problems ........................ 10-39
TS-23: Variable-Geometry Systems (VBVs, VIGVs, and VSVs) ................ 10-40
TS-24: LVDTs and Torquemotors................................................................... 10-42
TS-25: Miscellaneous Starting Problems ...................................................... 10-42
TS-26: Engine Vibration.................................................................................. 10-52
TS-27: Temperature Sensors ........................................................................... 10-53
TS-28: Speed Sensors ...................................................................................... 10-54
TS-29: Flame Sensor ....................................................................................... 10-54
TS-30: Thrust Balance System ........................................................................ 10-55
TS-31: Miscellaneous Problems .................................................................... 10-56
TS-32: Emissions............................................................................................. 10-60
TS-33: High/Low Combustor Acoustics ......................................................... 10-67
TS-34: Acoustic Sensing Problems ................................................................. 10-68
TS-35: Shift in Fuel System Flow Parameters................................................. 10-69
Change 5 vii

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

Page
Chapter 11 Maintenance Considerations ........................................................................... 11-1
11-2 Levels of Maintenance ....................................................................................... 11-1
11-3 Standard Maintenance Practices......................................................................... 11-1
11-3.1 Points of Reference .............................................................................. 11-1
11-3.2 Maintenance Within an Enclosure ....................................................... 11-2
11-3.3 Electrical Bonding Straps..................................................................... 11-2
11-3.4 Torque .................................................................................................. 11-3
11-3.4.1 Tightening Procedures......................................................... 11-7
11-3.4.2 Running Torque................................................................... 11-9
11-3.4.3 Loose Fasteners ................................................................... 11-9
11-3.4.4 Standard Torque .................................................................. 11-9
11-3.5 Tri-Wing Fasteners .............................................................................. 11-11
11-3.5.1 Installation........................................................................... 11-11
11-3.5.2 Extraction ............................................................................ 11-11
11-3.6 Marking of Parts................................................................................... 11-12
11-3.7 Safety-Wiring....................................................................................... 11-13
11-3.7.1 Safety-Wiring General Practices ......................................... 11-13
11-3.7.2 Safety Wire Installation....................................................... 11-16
11-3.8 Safety Cable ......................................................................................... 11-17
11-3.8.1 Safety Cable General Practices ........................................... 11-17
11-3.8.2 Crimping Tool Verification................................................. 11-18
11-3.8.3 Safety Cable Installation ..................................................... 11-18
11-3.9 Correction of Leaks.............................................................................. 11-19
11-3.10 Unpacking and Repacking ................................................................... 11-21
11-3.11 Jackscrews............................................................................................ 11-21
11-3.12 Protective Closures and Caps............................................................... 11-22
11-3.13 Universal Fittings ................................................................................. 11-22
11-3.14 Cleanliness ........................................................................................... 11-23
11-3.15 Gaskets and Packing ............................................................................ 11-23
11-3.16 Tubes .................................................................................................... 11-23
11-3.17 Hoses .................................................................................................... 11-25
11-3.18 Clamps ................................................................................................. 11-26
11-3.19 Electrical Cables and Connectors ........................................................ 11-26
11-3.20 Bearing Handling ................................................................................. 11-29
11-3.20.1 Preservation ......................................................................... 11-29
11-3.20.2 Heating and Chilling ........................................................... 11-30
11-3.21 Spray Shields........................................................................................ 11-31
11-3.22 Blending ............................................................................................... 11-31
viii Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

Page
11-3.22.1 Blending General Practices................................................. 11-31
11-3.22.2 Hand Blending .................................................................... 11-31
11-3.22.3 Power Blending................................................................... 11-32
11-3.22.4 Component Specific Requirements .................................... 11-32
11-3.23 Swab Etching Procedure...................................................................... 11-36
11-3.24 Spot-Fluorescent-Penetrant Inspection................................................ 11-37
11-3.24.1 Spot-Fluorescent-Penetrant Inspection
Equipment/Materials .......................................................... 11-37
11-3.24.2 Spot-Fluorescent-Penetrant Inspection Procedure.............. 11-38
11-3.25 Miscellaneous Procedures ................................................................... 11-39
11-3.26 V-Band (Coupling) Clamps................................................................. 11-41
11-3.26.1 Preinstallation Checks......................................................... 11-41
11-3.26.2 Installation .......................................................................... 11-43
Chapter 12 Preventive Maintenance .................................................................................. 12-1
12-2 General Checks and Inspections ........................................................................ 12-1
12-3 Motoring............................................................................................................. 12-1
12-3.1 Dry Motoring....................................................................................... 12-1
12-4 Rigging and Idle Checks .................................................................................... 12-1
12-4.1 Rigging Checks.................................................................................... 12-1
12-4.2 Idle Checks .......................................................................................... 12-2
Appendix A Fuel/Water Requirements ............................................................................... A-1
A1 Natural Gas Fuel for GE Aircraft Derivative Gas Turbines in
Industrial Applications....................................................................................... A-3
A1-1 Applicable Documents ........................................................................ A-3
A1-2 Fuel Gas Classification........................................................................ A-5
A1-2.1 Natural and Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) ..................... A-5
A1-2.1.1 Pipeline Natural Gas .......................................... A-5
A1-2.1.2 Medium Btu Natural Gas ................................... A-5
A1-2.1.3 Liquefied Petroleum Gases ................................ A-6
A1-2.2 Gasification Fuels ............................................................... A-6
A1-2.2.1 Oxygen Blown Gasification............................... A-6
A1-2.2.2 Air Blown Gasification ...................................... A-6
A1-2.3 Process Gases...................................................................... A-7
A1-2.3.1 Blast Furnace Gases ........................................... A-7
A1-2.3.2 Coke Oven Gases ............................................... A-7
A1-2.3.3 COREX Gases.................................................... A-7
A1-2.3.4 Hydrocarbons ..................................................... A-7
Change 5 ix

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

Page
A1-2.4 Refinery Gases .................................................................... A-8
A1-3 Fuel Properties .....................................................................................
A-8
A1-3.1 Heating Value...................................................................... A-8
A1-3.2 Modified Wobbe Number Index Range .............................. A-8
A1-3.3 Superheat Requirement ....................................................... A-9
A1-3.4 Flammability Ratio.............................................................. A-9
A1-3.5 Gas Constituent Limits........................................................ A-10
A1-3.6 Gas Fuel Supply Pressure.................................................... A-10
A1-4 Contaminants .......................................................................................
A-10
A1-4.1 Particulates .......................................................................... A-10
A1-4.2 Liquids................................................................................. A-11
A1-4.3 Sulfur ...................................................................................
A-11
A1-4.3.1 Hot Gas Path Corrosion...................................... A-11
A1-4.3.2 HRSG Corrosion ................................................ A-12
A1-4.3.3 SCR Deposition .................................................. A-12
A1-4.3.4 Exhaust Emissions.............................................. A-12
A1-4.3.5 Elemental Sulfur Deposition .............................. A-12
A1-5 Definitions............................................................................................
A-13
A1-5.1 Dew Point ............................................................................ A-13
A1-5.2 Dry Saturated Condition...................................................... A-13
A1-5.3 Gas Hydrates ....................................................................... A-13
A1-5.4 Gas Hydrates Formation Line ............................................. A-13
A1-5.5 Glycol ..................................................................................A-13
A1-5.6 Superheat ............................................................................. A-13
A1-5.7 Saturation Line .................................................................... A-13
A1-5.8 Wet Saturated Condition ..................................................... A-13
A2 Liquid Fuel Requirements for GE AeroDerivative Gas Turbines ...................... A-15
A2-1 Fuel Specifications ...............................................................................
A-15
A2-2 Additional Requirements ..................................................................... A-16
A2-2.1 Composition ........................................................................ A-16
A2-2.2 Additives.............................................................................. A-16
A2-2.3 Viscosity .............................................................................. A-16
A2-2.4 Wax......................................................................................A-16
A2-2.5 Fuel Temperature Requirements ......................................... A-16
A2-3 Property Requirements......................................................................... A-17
A2-3 Fuel Handling.......................................................................................
A-17
A2-5 Fuel Sampling ......................................................................................
A-19
A3 NOx Suppression Water Purity Specification for GE Aircraft
Derivative Gas Turbines in Industrial Applications ........................................... A-21
x Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

Page
A3-2 Sampling Requirements....................................................................... A-21
A3-3 Property Requirements ........................................................................ A-21
A3-4 Filtration Requirements ....................................................................... A-21
A4 Compressor Cleaning Water Purity Specification for GE Aircraft
Derivative Gas Turbines in Industrial Applications .......................................... A-23
A4-2 Sampling Requirements....................................................................... A-23
A4-3 Chemical Requirements....................................................................... A-24
A4-4 Filtration Requirements ....................................................................... A-24
A5 Liquid Detergent for Compressor Cleaning for GE Aircraft Derivative
Gas Turbines in Industrial Applications ............................................................ A-25
A5-2 Detergent Properties ............................................................................ A-25
A5-2.1 Composition........................................................................ A-25
A5-2.2 Biodegradability.................................................................. A-25
A5-2.3 Toxicity............................................................................... A-25
A5-2.4 Health and Safety Information............................................ A-25
A5-2.5 Solids .................................................................................. A-25
A5-2.6 Physical and Chemical Properties....................................... A-26
A5-3 Test Requirements ............................................................................... A-26
A5-3.1 Liquid Detergent ................................................................. A-26
A5-3.1.1 Residue or Ash Content ..................................... A-26
A5-3.1.2 Low-Temperature Stability ................................ A-26
A5-3.1.3 Cold Weather Solution Compatibility ............... A-26
A5-3.1.4 Hard Water Compatibility.................................. A-26
A5-3.1.5 Acid and Alkali Acceptance .............................. A-26
A5-3.1.6 Salt Water Tolerance.......................................... A-26
A5-3.1.7 Viscosity ............................................................ A-26
A5-3.1.8 pH....................................................................... A-26
A5-3.2 Cleaning Solution ............................................................... A-26
A5-3.2.1 Corrosive Elements ............................................ A-26
A5-3.2.2 pH....................................................................... A-26
A5-4 Test Methods ....................................................................................... A-27
A5-4.1 Residue or Ash Content ...................................................... A-27
A5-4.2 Hard Water Compatibility .................................................. A-27
A5-4.2.1 Preparation of Synthetic Hard Water ................. A-27
A5-4.2.2 Hard Water Test ................................................. A-27
A5-4.3 Acid and Alkali Acceptance ............................................... A-27
Change 5 xi

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

Page
A5-4.4 Salt Water Tolerance........................................................... A-27
A5-4.5 Elemental Content ............................................................... A-28
A5-5 Compatibility ....................................................................................... A-28
A5-5.1 Engine Materials ................................................................. A-28
A5-5.2 Titanium Stress Corrosion................................................... A-28
A5-6 Cold Weather Usage ............................................................................ A-28
A6 Specification for Lubricating Oil for GE Aircraft Derivative Gas Turbines...... A-31
A6-1 Oil Specifications ................................................................................. A-31
A6-2 Applicable Documents ......................................................................... A-31
A6-2.1 U.S. DOD Specifications .................................................... A-31
A6-2.2 American Society of Testing and Materials ........................ A-31
A6-3 Requirements ....................................................................................... A-31
A6-3.1 Material Compatibility ........................................................ A-31
A6-4 Qualification......................................................................................... A-32
A6-4.1 Performance Tests ............................................................... A-32
A6-4.2 Service Evaluation Tests ..................................................... A-32
A6-4.3 Qualification Report............................................................ A-32
A6-4.4 Approved Lubricating Oils.................................................. A-33
xii Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
List of Illustrations
Page
1-1 Publication Change Request ........................................................................................ 1-3
2-1 LM6000 PD Gas Turbine Section Identification (Sheet 1 of 2) .................................. 2-2
2-1 LM6000 PD Gas Turbine Section Identification (Sheet 2 of 2) .................................. 2-3
3-1 Gas Analysis Equipment Installation .......................................................................... 3-3
4-1 LM6000 PD Gas Turbine Airflow Cross Section (Sheet 1 of 2)................................. 4-2
4-1 LM6000 PD Gas Turbine Airflow Cross Section (Sheet 2 of 2)................................. 4-3
4-2 LM6000 PD Gas Turbine Major Components (Sheet 1 of 3)...................................... 4-4
4-3 Sump Areas and Bearing Locations ............................................................................ 4-14
5-1 VIGV System .............................................................................................................. 5-2
5-2 VBV System ................................................................................................................ 5-3
5-3 VSV System ................................................................................................................ 5-4
5-4 Natural Gas Fuel System ............................................................................................. 5-5
5-5 LM6000 PD Model Operating Modes......................................................................... 5-7
5-6 Transfer Gearbox Assembly ........................................................................................ 5-8
5-7 Hydraulic Starter.......................................................................................................... 5-10
5-8 Hydraulic Starter Performance .................................................................................... 5-10
5-9 Typical Hydraulic Starter Schematic ........................................................................... 5-11
5-10 Subidle Airflow ........................................................................................................... 5-13
5-11 LM6000 PD Model Lube System Schematic .............................................................. 5-14
5-12 LM6000 PD Engine Sumps and Main Bearing Locations .......................................... 5-18
5-13 Sump Function Diagram.............................................................................................. 5-19
5-14 LM6000 PD Model Electrical Panel Locations........................................................... 5-24
5-15 Low Pressure Rotor Balance Piston System................................................................ 5-27
5-16 LM6000 PD Model Gas Turbine - Left Side View...................................................... 5-28
5-17 LM6000 PD Gas Turbine - Right Side View............................................................... 5-29
5-18 LM6000 PD Model Gas Turbine - Strut Functions ..................................................... 5-30
6-1 Engine Shipping Container.......................................................................................... 6-3
6-2 Maintenance Dolly ...................................................................................................... 6-4
6-3 Engine Mount Diagram ............................................................................................... 6-8
6-4 Radial Inlet Duct Interface........................................................................................... 6-10
6-5 Radial Inlet Duct.......................................................................................................... 6-11
6-6 Axial Inlet Duct Interface ............................................................................................ 6-12
6-7 Temperature/Humidity Limits ..................................................................................... 6-13
6-8 Radial Exhaust Diffuser............................................................................................... 6-14
6-9 Axial Exhaust Diffuser ................................................................................................ 6-15
6-10 Diffuser/Piston Ring Interface ..................................................................................... 6-16
7-1 Site Information Checklist (Sheet 1 of 5) .................................................................... 7-2
Change 5 xiii

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
List of Illustrations (Continued)

Page
7-2 Prestart-up and Operability Review Checklist (Sheet 1 of 13) ................................... 7-7
7-2 Prestart-up and Operability Review Checklist (Sheet 10 of 13) ................................. 7-16
7-3 Distillate Fuel Systems (Including D/F Systems) Checklist (Sheet 1 of 7) ................. 7-20
7-4 Gaseous Fuels Systems Checklist (Sheet 1 of 3) ......................................................... 7-27
8-1 Typical LM6000 PD Gas Turbine Lube Oil Supply Pressure...................................... 8-5
8-2 LM6000 Performance Data Sheet (Sheet 1 of 5) ......................................................... 8-12
8-3 Typical LM6000 PD Gas Turbine Start-to-Load Time Sequence................................ 8-17
8-4 Thrust Balance Pressure Limits ................................................................................... 8-17
10-1 LM6000 PD Control System Component Schematic (Sheet 1 of 2) ........................... 10-71
10-1 LM6000 PD Control System Component Schematic (Sheet 2 of 2) ........................... 10-72
10-2 Engine Electrical Interface Panels................................................................................ 10-73
10-3 LM6000 PD T48 Distributions - Gas Engines ............................................................. 10-74
xiv Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

Page
10-4 Roadmap to Troubleshoot Nozzles Based on Abnormal T48 ..................................... 10-74
10-5 Troubleshooting LM6000 High Oil Consumption Due to Gas Turbine Leaks ........... 10-75
10-6 Interface ES7/E7.......................................................................................................... 10-76
10-7 Interface ES8/E8.......................................................................................................... 10-77
10-8 Interface ES16/E16...................................................................................................... 10-78
10-9 Interface ES21/E21...................................................................................................... 10-79
10-10 Interface ES5/E5.......................................................................................................... 10-80
10-11 Interface ES6/E6.......................................................................................................... 10-81
10-12 Interface ES44/E44...................................................................................................... 10-82
10-13 Interface ES45/E45...................................................................................................... 10-83
10-14 T48 Sensor and Harness Layout .................................................................................. 10-84
10-15 Interfaces ES54/E54 and ES55/E55 ............................................................................ 10-85
10-16 Interfaces ES1/E1 and ES9/E9 (Standard) and ES2/E2 and ES14/E14 (Optional)..... 10-86
10-17 Interface ES19/E19...................................................................................................... 10-87
10-18 Interface ES20/E20...................................................................................................... 10-88
10-19 Interface ES17/E17 (Optional) .................................................................................... 10-89
10-20 Interface ES18/E18 (Optional) .................................................................................... 10-90
10-23 Thrust Balance Valve Interface ES56/E56 .................................................................. 10-93
10-24 Interfaces E27 and E28................................................................................................ 10-94
10-25 Interfaces ES22/E22, ES23/E23, ES32/E32, and ES35/E35....................................... 10-95
10-26 Interfaces ES12/E12 and ES13/E13 (Optional)........................................................... 10-96
10-27 Interface ES40A/E40B ................................................................................................ 10-97
10-28 Interface ES41A/ES41B .............................................................................................. 10-98
10-29 Interface ES48/E48...................................................................................................... 10-99
10-30 Interface ES49/E49...................................................................................................... 10-100
10-31 Interface E57A/E57B................................................................................................... 10-101
11-1 Tightening Sequence for Threaded Fasteners.............................................................. 11-6
11-2 Torque Wrench Correction Factor Determination ....................................................... 11-8
11-3 Universal Fittings Installation...................................................................................... 11-10
11-4 Tri-Wing Fastener Drive .............................................................................................. 11-11
11-5 Safety-Wiring Practices (Sheet 1 of 2) ........................................................................ 11-14
11-5 Safety-Wiring Practices (Sheet 2 of 2) ........................................................................ 11-15
11-6 Safety Cable Flex Limits ............................................................................................. 11-20
11-7 Flexible Coupling Assembly ....................................................................................... 11-24
11-8 Hose Assemblies Installation....................................................................................... 11-27
11-9 Factory Preformed Hoses ............................................................................................ 11-28
11-10 Routing and Clamping Techniques.............................................................................. 11-28
Change 5 xv

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

Page
11-11 Cushion Clamps Installation ........................................................................................ 11-29
11-12 Airfoil Leading Edge Blending.................................................................................... 11-34
11-13 Airfoil Defect Measurement ........................................................................................ 11-35
11-14 Blending and High Metal Removal.............................................................................. 11-36
11-15 V-Band Clamps and Safety-Wiring Techniques........................................................... 11-44
xvi Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
List of Tables
Page
1-1 Metric and SI Unit Conversion Factors ....................................................................... 1-4
1-2 Temperature Conversion Chart .................................................................................... 1-5
1-3 Conversion Table - Fractions to Decimals................................................................... 1-6
1-4 Abbreviations ............................................................................................................. 1-8
2-1 LM6000 PD Model Summary ..................................................................................... 2-4
2-2 Standard Instrumentation ........................................................................................... 2-6
2-3 Optional Instrumentation............................................................................................. 2-7
5-1 Gas Turbine Lube/Scavenge System ........................................................................... 5-16
5-2 LM6000 PD Electrical Cable Panel Nomenclature ..................................................... 5-26
6-1 Engine Preservation Summary (Refer to WP 3011 00)............................................... 6-6
6-2 LM6000 PD and Major Component Weight and Center of Gravity............................ 6-7
8-1 Typical Operating Levels Base Load Generator Efficiency 98%,
Inlet Loss = 4"H2O; Exhaust Loss 10"H2O ............................................................... 8-9
8-2 Fuel System Parameters............................................................................................... 8-11
8-3 Limits and Operating Requirements............................................................................ 8-11
8-4 Protective Function Causes Requiring Resolution Prior to Restart or Motoring ........ 8-19
10-1 LVDT/Torquemotor Resistance Values for T48 ........................................................ 10-102
10-2 Flame Detector Resistance Values............................................................................... 10-103
10-3 Accelerometer Resistance Values ................................................................................ 10-104
10-4 Chip Detector Resistance Values ................................................................................. 10-104
10-5 Staging Valves Resistance Values................................................................................ 10-104
10-6 Temperature Sensor Resistance Values for TS-27 ..................................................... 10-105
10-7 Cable Circuit Resistance Values at Room Temperature (or as Specified in Table) ..... 10-107
10-8 T2 and T25 RTD Resistance Values for TS-27 ........................................................... 10-107
10-9 Lube RTD Resistance Values for TS-27...................................................................... 10-108
10-10 Speed Sensor Resistance Values for TS-28 ................................................................. 10-108
10-11 Maximum Allowable Instrumentation and Accessory Temperatures.......................... 10-109
11-1 Torque Wrench Ranges and Requirements.................................................................. 11-3
11-2 Torque Values for Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Self-Locking Nuts ...................................... 11-4
11-3 Torque Values for Engine Plugs and Unions ............................................................... 11-4
11-4 Torque Values for Tubing Nuts and Hose Fittings....................................................... 11-5
11-5 Torque Values for Plugs and Unions Used in Bosses and for Universal Bulkhead
Fitting Locknuts........................................................................................................... 11-6
11-6 Minimum Running Torque for Self-Locking Nuts ...................................................... 11-9
11-7 Tri-Wing Drivers and Standard-Thread Fasteners....................................................... 11-12
11-8 Installed Safety Wire Flex Limit ................................................................................. 11-17
11-9 Hose Minimum-Bend Radii......................................................................................... 11-25
12-1 Preventive Maintenance and Servicing Checks ......................................................... 12-3
12-2 Definition of Terms .................................................................................................... 12-4
A1 Liquid Fuel Property Requirements ............................................................................ A-10
Change 5 xvii

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
List of Tables (Continued)

Page
A2 Maximum Corrosives Level ......................................................................................... A-19
A3 Water-Wash Antifreeze Mixtures ................................................................................. A-21
xviii Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
5 CHAPTER 1
Introduction
1-1 Purpose and Scope of Volume II contains the individual work pack-
Technical Manual ages for on-site maintenance, including engine
changeout. Volume II also contains the recom-
Volumes I and II of this manual contain mended tooling and consumables provisioning
information to be used for the on-site for on-site maintenance, as well as, storage
installation, operation, and maintenance of and shipment preparation procedures.
the GE LM6000 PD Series Gas Turbine.
Level 1 maintenance covers all work on the
1-2 Arrangement and Use of exterior of an installed gas turbine, including
Technical Manual scheduled inspections, compressor cleaning
(water-wash), and engine changeout. Level 2
This manual consists of two volumes, each modular maintenance covers removal and
arranged to provide easy access to all required reinstallation of one or more major sections of
information. Volume I provides general the engine, including, but not limited to, the
descriptions of the engine and associated sys- low pressure turbine (LPT) and high pressure
tems, as well as, operating and troubleshoot- turbine (HPT) modules, the combustor, the
ing information. low pressure compressor (LPC) module, and
the variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) module.
The chapters in Volume I are numbered with
Arabic numerals. Figures, tables, and pages Each work package in Volume II (or subordi-
are each numbered sequentially, starting with nate work package, as required) is numbered
the number one (1), preceded by the chapter and arranged in the following general
number and a dash, for each chapter; e.g., fig- sequence:
ure 1-1. Paragraphs are identified and layered 1. Introduction
in the following manner: 2. Reference Material
3. Support Equipment
1-1 Main Topic/Paragraph 4. Consumable Material
1-1.1 First-level subordinate paragraph 5. Expendable Material
1-1.1.1 Second-level subordinate paragraph 6. Component Removal
1-1.1.1.1 Third-level subordinate paragraph 7. Component Installation
1-1.1.1.1.1 Fourth-level subordinate paragraph
Change 5 1-1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
1-3 Notes, Cautions, and dispose of superseded pages. Page changes are
Warnings designated by the change number of the effec-
tive change at the bottom of each affected
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings will be found page. Refer to the list of effective pages for
throughout this publication. It is important that current change page applicability.
the significance of each is thoroughly under-
stood by personnel using this technical man- Illustrations (line art and photographs) repre-
ual. Their definitions are as follows: sent the equipment configuration at time of
inclusion in this technical manual. They will
WARNING Warnings refer to procedures
not necessarily be changed to represent all
or practices that may result in injury or
death if not followed correctly. and/or the latest equipment or configuration.
They are to be used only as an aid to supple-
CAUTION Cautions refer to procedures or ment the text and the parts list.
practices that may damage or destroy equip-
ment if not followed correctly. Changes or additions deemed necessary for
proper operation, maintenance, and safety
NOTE Notes highlight an essential proce-
dure or a condition that requires emphasis. improvements should be submitted to:
1-4 Changes to Technical GE Aircraft Engines

Manual Marine & Industrial Customer Service
Mail Drop S-155,
A manual change is defined as the reissue of 1 Neumann Way
selected pages of the manual. A revision is Cincinnati, Ohio
defined as the reissue of the entire manual. 45215-6301 USA
Attention: Documentation Programs
Changes are indicated by a vertical bar | in the
margin, alongside the text change. Changes to The sample form shown in figure 1-1 may be
illustrations, diagrams, and schematics are reproduced and used for this purpose.
indicated in the same manner. Since previous 1-1
change symbols are deleted when a page is 1-5 Measurement Units
subsequently changed, the symbols show the
latest changes only. The Système International d'Unités (SI) or
metric system is being adopted throughout the
Manual changes and revisions are mailed to all world. For this reason, SI unit conversion
authorized LM6000 manual holders at the tables are shown in tables 1-1 and 1-2. Frac-
time the issues are published. When changes tions and decimal equivalents are shown in
are received, insert the latest change pages and table 1-3.
1-2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 1-1 Publication Change Request
Change 5 1-3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 1-1 Metric and SI Unit Conversion Factors
1-4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table 1-2 Temperature Conversion Chart
Change 5 1-5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 1-3 Conversion Table - Fractions to Decimals
1-6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
The introduction of torque wrenches cali- This section describes general safety precau-
brated in newton-meters has been commensu- tions that are not related to specific procedures
rate with the adoption of the SI system. These and therefore do not appear elsewhere in this
will eventually replace torque wrenches cali- manual. The precautions should be clearly
brated in kilogram-meters (kgm). Although understood and applied wherever appropriate
the following values are not mathematically in all phases of installation, operation, and
precise (3.5 kgm equals 34.2 N·m), they are maintenance.
considered adequate. To convert kilogram-
meters (kgm) to newton-meters, (N·m) move 1-7.1 Health Hazards
the decimal point one place to the right. For
example, 3.5 kgm would become 35 N·m. To WARNING Use all cleaning solvents, fuels,
convert kilogram-centimeters (kg cm) to new- oils, adhesives, epoxies, and catalysts in a
ton-meters, move the decimal point one place well-ventilated area. Avoid frequent and
to the left. For example, 50 kg cm would prolonged inhalation of fumes. Concentra-
become 5.0 N·m. tions of fumes of many cleaners, adhesives,
and esters are toxic and will cause serious
The SI units shown in this manual are direct adverse health effects and possible death if
mathematical conversions and may be inhaled frequently. Avoid frequent or pro-
rounded off, in most instances, at the user's longed exposure to the skin. Wear protec-
discretion. Examples of units that may be tive gloves and wash thoroughly with soap
rounded off are those used for temperatures, and warm water as soon as possible after
torque values, pressures, etc. Examples of SI exposure to such materials. Take special
units that may not be rounded off are those precautions to prevent materials from
used for drop checks, rigging adjustments, entering the eyes. If exposed, rinse the eyes
runouts, etc. in an eye bath fountain immediately and
report to a physician. Avoid spilling freon
1-6 Glossary of Terms or similar solvents on the skin. Extremely
rapid evaporation of these solvents has a
Table 1-4 lists and defines the abbreviations refrigerating effect and may cause serious
most commonly used in this manual. frostbite. Do not allow adhesive to contact
the skin. Rapid bonding of certain adhe-
1-7 Safety Precautions sives will cause instant adhesion to body
members or objects. Do not attempt to
This technical manual is designed to provide forcefully separate body members if
safe procedures and processes for accomplish- bonded together. Consult the area supervi-
ing the installation, operation, and mainte- sor or a physician for procedures for sepa-
nance tasks required for the LM6000 It is ration. Carefully review the hazard
therefore very important that all Warnings and information on the appropriate material
Cautions be clearly understood and observed safety data sheet and follow all applicable
by users of this manual. personal protection requirements.
Change 5 1-7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 1-4 Abbreviations
1-8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table 1-4 Abbreviations (Continued)
Change 5 1-9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
1-7.2 Fire Hazards 1-7.4 Heated/Chilled Part Hazards
WARNING Keep all cleaning solvents, WARNING Use thermally insulated gloves
fuels, oils, esters, and adhesives away from when handling heated or chilled parts to
open flame space heaters, exposed-element prevent burning or freezing hands. Parts
electric heaters, sparks, or flame. Do not chilled to supercold temperatures (-40°F to
smoke when using flammables, in the vicin- -65°F [-40°C to -53°C]) can cause instant
ity of flammables, or in areas where flam- freezing of hands if handled without protec-
mables are stored. Provide adequate tive gloves.
ventilation to disperse concentrations of
potentially explosive fumes or vapors. Pro- 1-7.5 Electrical Hazards
vide approved containers for bulk storage
of flammable materials and approved dis- WARNING Use extreme care when work-
pensers in the working areas. Keep all con- ing with electricity. Electricity can cause
tainers tightly closed when not in use. shock, burns, or death. Electrical power
shall be off before connecting or disconnect-
1-7.3 Compressed Air Hazards ing electrical connectors. Lethal output
voltages are generated by the ignition
WARNING Air pressure used in work exciter. Do not energize the exciter unless
areas for cleaning or drying operations the output connection is properly isolated.
should be regulated to 29 psi (200 kPa) or Be sure all leads are connected and the plug
less. Use approved safety equipment (gog- is installed or all personnel are cleared to at
gles/face shield) to prevent injury to the least 5 feet (2 m) before firing the exciter. If
eyes. Do not direct the jet of compressed air the exciter is removed, fire it only in the iso-
at yourself or other personnel, or so that lation chamber of the tester.
refuse is blown onto adjacent work stations.
If additional air pressure is required to dis- WARNING When using equipment pro-
lodge foreign materials from parts, ensure vided with, or associated with, high-fre-
that approved safety equipment is worn quency power generators, be sure that all
and move to an isolated area. Be sure that components are adequately isolated to pre-
the increased air pressure is not detrimen- vent serious injury to the operator. Be sure
tal or damaging to the parts before apply- the generator power is off when connecting
ing high-pressure jets of air. or positioning connectors and cables and
when adjusting heater elements.
1-10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
1-7.6 Paints and Finishes Hazards WARNING When a torque multiplier is to

be used, it must have adequate capacity to
WARNING Apply paints, finishes, and pre- meet the specified torque requirement of
servatives in approved spray booths or iso- the operation. The torque multiplier manu-
lated areas equipped with air cleaning and facturer's instructions and the instructions
spray-evacuation equipment. Ensure that contained herein must be followed exactly
all lighting and electrical gear is of the in order to guard against the possibly haz-
explosion-proof type. Wear appropriate ardous results of tool misuse.
breathing filters, eye protection, and such
clothing as is required to protect the skin. 1-7.9 Gas Turbine Operational
Consult the material safety data sheet for Hazards
specific personal protection requirements.
The outside surfaces of the engine are not
1-7.7 Procedural Hazards insulated. Adequate precautions should be
taken to prevent operating personnel from
WARNING Observe all specified and logi- inadvertently coming in contact with these hot
cal safety practices when assembling or dis- surfaces.
assembling the gas turbine. Wear safety
glasses or other appropriate eye protection The LM6000 Gas Turbine is a source of con-
at all times. Do not allow safety wire or wire siderable noise. It is necessary for personnel
clippings to fly from the cutter when working on the gas turbine or in its vicinity to
removing or installing wire. Do not use fin- wear proper ear protection equipment when it
gers as guides when installing parts or to is operating.
check alignment of holes. Use only correct
tools and fixtures and always use only as The LM6000 is a high-speed machine. In the
recommended. Avoid short cuts such as remote case of component failure, the casing
using fewer than recommended attaching would contain compressor blade and turbine
bolts or using shorter, or inferior-grade blade failures, but might not contain major
bolts. Heed all warnings in the manual text compressor or turbine disk failures. Operating
to avoid injury to personnel or damage to personnel should not be permanently stationed
gas turbine parts. in or near the plane of the rotating parts.
1-7.8 Tooling Hazards Rotating parts of the starter operate at a very

high speed. Personnel should not be stationed
WARNING Improperly maintained tools in the plane of the starter during start cycle.
and support equipment can be dangerous
to personnel and can damage gas turbine Low-pressure, high-velocity airflow created
parts. Observe recommended inspections by the compressor can draw objects and/or
and schedules for inspections to avoid personnel into the engine. Although use of an
unanticipated failures. Use tooling only for inlet screen or other protective measure is
the purpose for which it was designed and required, personnel should not stand in front
avoid abuse. Be constantly alert for dam- of the inlet while the engine is operating.
aged equipment and initiate appropriate
action for approved repair immediately.
Change 5 1-11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Suitable fire protection equipment should be compressor bore. This may result in unbalance
provided for the installation. Carbon dioxide, and subsequent damage to the turbine.
halides, fog, water, or chemical fire extin-
guishing systems may be used. In the event Do not override any engine control permis-
that the fire protection system is discharged sives. Overriding permissives can cause
while personnel are inside the enclosure, all engine operational problems, damage to the
personnel should immediately exit the enclo- engine, and, in certain cases, injury to
sure to prevent ingestion of the extinguishing personnel.
medium. Discharge of fine chemical or water WARNING When entering the gas turbine
mists directly on gas generator casings is per- enclosure, the following requirements shall
missible. The use of chemical fire extinguish- be met:
ing media will require the disassembly of the
engine for cleaning. • The gas turbine shall be shut down.
Suitable explosive mixture sensing devices • Module entry during engine operation
should be provided to sense any leakage of is prohibited in general. If entry should
fuel (both into the packager's enclosure and be required during engine operation,
into the fuel manifold). These devices should contact GE Field Service for a represen-
also shut down the gas turbine if leakage is tative who is trained to enter the module
present. If this occurs, determine and correct under such conditions.
the cause of the leakage before continuing
operation. The enclosure and surrounding area • The fire extinguishing system shall be
should also be properly ventilated to clear any made inactive according to the cus-
explosive fumes prior to restarting. tomer's procedures.
The engine is provided with various sensors • Secondary air to the enclosure shall be
and monitoring systems that are necessary for shut off, since high secondary airflow
proper operation, engine health, and safety. may prevent opening or closing the
Bypassing, disabling in any way, or running enclosure door.
with sensors/monitoring systems inoperative • The enclosure door should be kept open.
can result in engine damage. This includes the If the gas turbine is operating, an
bypassing of any individual sensor when more observer should be stationed at the
than one sensor is provided for a given enclosure door and confined space entry
parameter. For example, bypassing one T4.8 procedures shall be followed.
sensor could result in damage to the HPT
system. • Allow gas turbine to cool down. Avoid
contact with hot parts, and wear ther-
Do not bypass any of the protective control mally insulated gloves as necessary.
features found in the SPRINT™ system. Spe-
cifically, do not turn on the SPRINT™ water • Ear protection shall be worn if gas tur-
spray to rinse the compressor during a crank bine is operating.
soak. The system is not designed to rinse the
• Do not remain in the enclosure or in the
compressor at crank speed and the poorly
atomized water entering the rotor cooling cir- plane of rotation of the starter when
starting or motoring the gas turbine.
cuit can cause accumulation of water in the
1-12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
• When performing maintenance on elec- 1-8 Special Inspections

trical components, avoid shocks and
burns by turning off electrical power to The maintenance of the gas turbine requires
those components, except when power is that inspection checks be made periodically.
required to take voltage measurements. The inspection requirements and limits
throughout this manual are based on operation
• Lock out all controls and switches, if within specified limits. In addition to the regu-
possible; otherwise, tag electrical lar inspections, there are those necessary when
switches out of service to prevent inad- the gas turbine has been operated outside of
vertent activation. Tag the engine oper- the specified limits, for example, off-schedule
ating controls do not operate to prevent variable geometry operation, overspeed, or
starting during a desired shutdown con- overtemperature. There are also special
dition. inspections necessary for gas turbines exposed
to abnormal conditions. These may include,
1-7.10 Environmental Hazards for example, failures with significant damage
and other abnormal exposure such as an instal-
WARNING The disposal of many cleaning lation fire or mishap during transportation,
solvents, fuels, oils, adhesives, epoxies, and handling, or storage. This manual includes
catalysts are regulated and, if mismanaged,
routine inspection requirements to be accom-
could cause environmental damage. Review
plished for preventive maintenance and for
the material safety data sheet, other prod-
troubleshooting. It also includes criteria for
uct information, and applicable local, state,
determining if special inspections are neces-
and federal disposal requirements for
sary because of exposure to abnormal
proper waste management practices.
conditions.
Change 5 1-13/(1-14 Blank)

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
0 CHAPTER 2
Gas Turbine General Description and Model Summary

2-1 Purpose and Scope LPC through concentric drive shafts.
This chapter provides a general description of Air enters the gas turbine at the VIGV and
the LM6000 PD Gas Turbine figure 2-1 and passes into the LPC. The LPC compresses the
its design features. It also summarizes the var- air by a ratio of approximately 2.4:1. Air leav-
ious model configurations available. Standard ing the LPC is directed into the HPC. Variable
and optional equipment lists are also provided. bypass valves (VBV) are arranged in the flow
passage between the two compressors to regu-
2-1
2-2 General Description and late the airflow entering the HPC at idle and at
low power. To further control the airflow, the
Features
HPC is equipped with variable stator vanes
2-2.1 General Description (VSVs). The HPC compresses the air to a ratio
of approximately 12:1, resulting in a total
The LM6000 PD is a dual-rotor gas turbine compression ratio of 30:1, relative to ambient.
that consists of a variable inlet guide vane From the HPC, the air is directed into the tri-
assembly (VIGV), a 5-stage low pressure ple annular combustor section, where it mixes
compressor (LPC), a 14-stage variable-geom- with the fuel from the 75 air/gas premixers
etry high pressure compressor (HPC), a triple that are packaged in 30 externally removable
annular combustor, a 2-stage high pressure modules. The fuel/air mixture is initially
turbine (HPT), a 5-stage low pressure turbine ignited by an igniter and, once combustion is
(LPT), an accessory gearbox assembly (AGB), self-sustaining, the igniter is turned off. The
and accessories. hot gas that results from combustion is
directed into the HPT which drives the HPC.
The low pressure (LP) rotor consists of the This gas further expands through the LPT,
LPC and the LPT that drives it. Attachment which drives the LPC and the output load.
flanges are available on both the front and/or
rear of the LP rotor for connection to the pack- 2-2.2 Model Summary
ager-supplied power shaft and load. The high
pressure (HP) rotor consists of the 14-stage The information in this manual covers
HPC and the 2-stage HPT that drives it. The HP LM6000 PD Gas Turbine models listed in
core consists of the HPC, the combustor, and table 2-1. Additional model designations will
the HPT. The HPT and LPT drive the HPC and be assigned based on configuration require-
ments for future applications.
2-1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 2-1 LM6000 PD Gas Turbine Section Identification (Sheet 1 of 2)
2-2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 2-1 LM6000 PD Gas Turbine Section Identification (Sheet 2 of 2)
2-3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 2-1 LM6000 PD Model Summary
Model Designation Description
7LM6000-PD-NGD Gas fuel; equipped with gas fuel manifold and 75 air/gas premixers that are
packaged in 30 externally removable modules; 11 staging valves
7LM6000-PD-NDD Dual fuel; equipped with gas fuel manifold and 75 air/gas premixers that are
7LM6000-PD-NLD Liquid fuel; equipped with gas fuel manifold and 75 air/gas premixers that are
2-2.3 Summary of Changes from the The LM6000 PD turbine rear frame is longer
LM6000 PB and has a larger diameter. The frame has 14
struts rather than the original 10. Exit flanges
The latest configuration of the LM6000 DLE for both inner and outer flowpath are modified
is designated the PD model and incorporates which requires a unique exhaust diffuser.
changes to the LPC, fuel system, LPT, and
balance piston system. The LM6000 PD thrust balance valve is
located off-gas turbine. Compressor bleed air
The LM6000 PD LPC employs redesigned from the 11th stage compressor bleed mani-
stator vanes and a new shaft material. fold is directed to the base mounted valve and
the valve discharge is piped back to the bal-
The LM6000 PD combustion system (fuel sys- ance piston manifold on the turbine rear
tem) includes a new fabricated gas manifold frame.
with 11 staging valves. A new 5/5/1 staging
valve (A/B/C) configuration also requires a 2-2.4 Standard and Optional
different set of gas interfaces, as well as Equipment
mounting structure. Minor internal modifica-
tion to the combustor liner and dome to The LM6000 PD Gas Turbine comes fully
accommodate the dual fuel system were also assembled with the following standard equip-
included. ment installed and tested at the factory:
LM6000 PD LPT uses a unique LPT to permit • Single-stage VIGV system or inlet frame
additional exhaust expansion and power
extraction. Changes include a new casing, • Five-stage LPC
changes to stages 3 through 5 blades, stages 4
and 5 disks and vanes, and rear frame. In addi- • LPC discharge bypass air collector and
tion, the aft drive shaft is unique, with an actuators
optional coupling flange for rear drive units.
• 14-stage HPC
The casing is cooled by a cooling manifold
using LPC discharge air. The turbine is larger • Triple annular combustor
in diameter and slightly longer.
• Fuel system (premixers, connectors, mani-
folds, and staging valves)
2-4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
• Eighth stage and compressor discharge 2-2.5 Standard and Optional

bleed valve (off engine) Instrumentation
• Ignition system (igniter and exciter) The LM6000 PD gas turbine is equipped with
the standard sensors shown in table 2-2.
• Two-stage HPT Optional sensors are listed in table 2-3
• Five-stage LPT Pressure taps are provided at the following

locations for packager-supplied pressure
• Output shaft coupling adapter sensors:
• AGB assembly, transverse gearbox, and • Lube oil supply line
accessories
• Lube oil scavenge return line
• AGB assembly, consisting of the transfer
gearbox and the AGB • HPC discharge static pressure (PS3)
(2 locations)
• AGB-driven lube oil supply and scavenge
pumps and gas turbine-mounted intercon- • LPC inlet pressure (P2)
necting piping
• HPC inlet pressure (P25)
• Forward side-mount trunnions
• HPC inlet static pressure (PS25 - front
• Aft-mount clevises frame)
• Variable-geometry (VG) control systems • LPT inlet total pressure (P48)

for the VIGV, VBV, and VSV systems
• Thrust balance cavity pressure (PTB)
• Hydraulically actuated LP balance system
• VG pump filter inlet and outlet pressure
Certain items of optional equipment, not listed taps
above, are provided as packager-installed kits.
The specific configuration of the LM6000 PD • Balance piston pressure reference (PBPV)
and installation will determine which of these
kits are installed. For additional information, • Gas manifold supply pressures (GP3A,
refer to the packager's manual. GP3B, GP3C, GP3E).
2-5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 2-2 Standard Instrumentation
Qty/Engine Parameter/Sensor Description
2 HP rotor speed (XN25) sensors - magnetic pickup type - located on AGB.
2 LPT rotor (XNSD) speed sensors - magnetic pickup type - located in the turbine rear
frame.
8 LPT inlet temperature (T48) sensors - dual-element chrome/alumel thermocouples -

located on LPT case.
2 Accelerometers - located on the compressor rear frame and turbine rear frame.
7 Resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) - dual-element lube oil supply and scavenge -
located in on-engine lube line (redundant dual - element RTD is optional).
3 Chip detectors - remote-indicating type - located in transverse gearbox (TGB) sump, A-

sump, B-sump, and common lube oil scavenge lines (AGB, C-, D-, and E-sump chip
detectors optional).
1 LPT inlet pressure (P48) probe - total pressure - located on the LPT casing.
1 LPC inlet temperature and total pressure (T2/P2) probe - dual element RTD and P2
sensing port - located on the VIGV case (redundant probe optional).
1 HPC inlet temperature and total pressure (T25/P25) probe - dual-element RTD and P25
sensing port - located on front frame (redundant probe optional).
2 VSV position sensors - linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) - located in both
VSV actuators.
2 VBV position sensors - LVDT - located in two of the actuators.
2 VIGV position sensors - LVDT - located in both VIGV actuators (VIGV assemblies only).
2 HPC discharge temperature (T3) sensor - dual-element chromel/alumel thermocouple

mounted on the compressor rear frame.
2* Stage 8 bleed valve position sensor - LVDT - located on actuator.
2* Compressor discharge (CDP) bleed valve position sensor - LVDT.
2* Balance piston control valve position sensor - LVDT.
2 Combustor acoustic sensor - located on combustion case.
* Mounted off-gas turbine.
2-6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table 2-3 Optional Instrumentation
Qty/Engine Parameter/Sensor Description
2 Accelerometers - located on the compressor rear frame (CRF) and LPT rear frame.
7 RTDs - dual-element lube oil supply and scavenge - located in on-engine lube line.
3 Chip detectors - remote-indicating type - located in TGB sump, B-sump, and common
lube oil scavenge lines - AGB, C-, D-, and E-sump chip detectors optional.
1 LPC inlet temperature and total pressure (T2/P2) probe - dual element RTD and P2
sensing port - located on the VIGV case.
1 HPC inlet temperature and total pressure (T25/P25) probe - dual-element RTD and
P25 sensing port - located on front frame.
2 Ultraviolet flame detectors (UVFD) for flame sensing - mounted on compressor rear
frame.
2-7/(2-8 Blank)
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
2-8 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
2 CHAPTER 3
Gas Turbine Package

3-1 Purpose and Scope • Fuel, lube, and hydraulic systems
This chapter provides a brief general descrip- • Instrumentation and condition-monitoring

tion of the LM6000 gas turbine package and systems
its packager-supplied major components.
Since individual packages will vary according • Cooling systems
to customer installation requirements, detailed
• Front and/or rear drive interfaces
information is not provided in this chapter. For
more specific information, contact the pack- • Noise and emission suppression systems
ager. Additional information is provided in
other chapters of this manual and in the pack- • Interconnecting wiring and piping
ager’s manual.
• Fire and safety systems
3-2 Package Description
• Anti-icing and water-wash systems
The gas turbine package comprises a complete
electrical generating or mechanical drive sys- • Compressor bleed air discharge
tem built around the LM6000 gas turbine. The
package provides the structure, interfaces, ser- 3-3 Gas Fuel Analysis and
vice connections, and controls necessary to Equipment Installation
operate the LM6000 and to utilize its energy
and/or shaft output. This package needs only For proper DLE operation, the gas lower heat-
to be installed or erected at the customer’s site ing value (LHV) and specific gravity (SG)
and connected to the appropriate interfaces inputs to the fuel control must be within 1.0
and services (fuel, electric, etc.). percent of the actual values. If the properties
of the particular site gas supply could change
Typical package components include: by more than this amount, gas analysis equip-
ment must be supplied to ensure the fuel con-
• Gas turbine base trol is supplied with data of sufficient accuracy
for proper operation.
• Mounting structure
When selecting and installing the gas analysis
• Sound enclosure
equipment, the total system response time
• Inlet and exhaust systems should be considered. The total response time
is defined as the time it takes for the gas sam-
• Controls and electrical systems ple to travel from the main supply line to the
gas analysis equipment plus the time for the
• Drains and vents gas LHV and SG to be determined for input to
the fuel control.
Change 2 3-1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
To minimize the total system response time, it pressure in line B of approximately

is necessary to minimize the mass of gas 1.5 to 2.0 atmospheres (1.52 to 2.03
between the sampling point and the measure- bar), or just above the minimum pres-
ment device. A schematic of typical gas analy- sure required by the gas analysis
sis equipment is shown in figure 3-1. Key equipment.
elements of this installation are:
(2) Make sure the sampling point of line
(1) The location of the pressure regulator A is positioned so that it will not be
influenced by gas stratification,
(2) The volume of gas in supply lines A boundary layers, or condensation.
and B, and
(3) Use 0.125 inch (3.18 mm) inside
(3) Analysis equipment update time. diameter tubing for all sample lines.
The most important element in the design of (4) Locate gas analysis equipment no
the sampling pipe work is location of the pres- more than 15 feet (4.6 m) from pres-
sure regulator, which should be located as sure regulator.
close as possible to the main gas supply line.
(5) Select gas analysis equipment based
To ensure quality sampling from the line, a on expected gas property changes and
pressure regulator probe should be installed in the installation. Data gathered from
the main gas supply line itself. The volumes Original Equipment Manufacturer
for supply lines A and B also impact total sys- (OEM’s) indicates that gas chromato-
tem response time and should be kept to a graphs have update times between 3
minimum. and 8 minutes. Gas calorimeters have
update times between 20 and 40 sec-
The following recommendations are not new onds.
installation requirements. The recommenda-
tions provide guidelines to help meet the GE (6) Total system response time should be
IAD requirements for LHV and SG update calculated. Updates to the fuel control
times. should be frequent enough to accom-
modate the rate of change of gas prop-
(1) Install a pressure regulator in the form erties such that control input is within
of a pressure regulator probe located 1 percent of the actual values during
within the main gas supply line itself. steady state operation and within 3
In no case should the regulator be percent of actual values during gas
located more than 3 feet (91.4 cm) property changes.
from the main gas supply line. The
regulator should be set to maintain a 3-1
3-2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 3-1 Gas Analysis Equipment Installation

3-4 Blank Change 2

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
0 CHAPTER 4
Gas Turbine Assembly Description

4-1 Purpose and Scope • Turbine rear frame (TRF) assembly
This chapter describes the LM6000 PD • Accessory gearbox (AGB) assembly and
Gas Turbine assembly, equipment, and accessories
systems.
• Bearings
4-2 General Description
The high pressure rotor (HPR) system is
4-2.1 Main Components comprised of a 14–stage HPC, a triple
annular combustor, and a 2–stage HPT.
The LM6000 PD gas turbine is a dual- The HPC and the HPT are connected by
rotor, concentric drive shaft gas turbine, mating splines. The HPR turns clockwise
capable of driving a load from the front when viewed from aft, looking forward.
and/or rear of the low pressure (LP) The high pressure stator system consists
rotor. Figure 4-1 is a cross section of the of the HPC and turbine stators.
engine, showing the significant design
features of the LM6000 PD gas turbine. The LP system is comprised of a five-stage
Figure 4-2 identifies the principal LPC and a five-stage LPT, both connected
LM6000 PD gas turbine components, as to a concentric drive shaft. The low pres-
listed below: sure rotor (LPR) turns clockwise when
viewed from aft, looking forward. The LP
• Variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) stator system consists of the LPC and tur-
assembly bine stators. Drive adapters are provided on
both the front and rear of the LPR for con-
• Five-stage low pressure compressor nection to the customer-supplied power
(LPC) shaft and load.
• Front frame assembly and air collector Three structural frames provide bearing
support for the two rotors used in the
• 14-stage variable-geometry (VG) high LM6000 PD gas turbine. These include
pressure compressor (HPC) the front frame, the CRF, and the TRF.
This configuration provides excellent
• Compressor rear frame (CRF) assembly dynamic and mechanical stability and
allows more precisely controlled com-
• Triple annular combustor assembly
pressor and turbine blade and vane tip
clearances.
• High pressure turbine (HPT)
4-1
4-2
• Low pressure turbine (LPT)
4-1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 4-1 LM6000 PD Gas Turbine Airflow Cross Section (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 4-1 LM6000 DLE Gas Turbine Airflow Cross Section (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 4-2 LM6000 PD Gas Turbine Major Components (Sheet 1 of 3)
4-4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
4-5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
4-6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
4-2.2 Engine Airflow edge vanes and variable trailing flaps. The
variable flaps can be rotated from -10
Air enters the engine at the inlet of the degrees open to +60 degrees closed by
VIGV and passes into the LPC. Engine air- means of an actuator ring (unison ring)
flow is shown in figure 4-1. The LPC com- driven by twin hydraulic actuators at the
presses the air by a ratio of approximately 3:00 and 9:00 o’clock positions. Both actu-
2.4:1. Air leaving the LPC is directed into ators are equipped with linear variable dif-
the HPC and is regulated at idle and low ferential transformers (LVDTs).
power by variable bypass valves (VBV)
arranged in the flow passage between the Normal engine operation range is approxi-
two compressors. mately -5 degrees open (full power) to +35
degrees closed (idle). The flaps will also close
The airflow in the 14-stage HPC is regulated during large power reductions to reduce the
by VIGV and five stages of variable stator LPC flow rate quickly in order to maintain the
vanes (VSV). The HPC compression ratio is LPC stall margin. The VIGV system improves
approximately 12:1. HPC discharge and performance for both simple cycle and heat
stage 8 bleed air are extracted, as necessary, recovery cycles. It also helps minimize VBV
for emissions control. Compressor discharge bypass flow and pressure levels, thereby
air is then directed to the combustor section. reducing associated flow noise. A pressurized
rotating seal between the VIGV hub and the
Air entering the combustor is mixed with LPC rotor prevents ingestion of unfiltered air
the fuel provided by 75 air/gas premixers into the flowpath.
that are packaged in 30 externally remov-
able modules. The fuel/air mixture is ignited The air intake section is designed to interface
by an igniter that deactivates once combus- with a radial inlet duct (which allows inlet air
tion becomes self-sustaining. Combustion to be drawn from the side or top, rather than
gases then exit to the HPT. from the front) or an axial inlet system. The
radial inlet duct is compatible with either for-
Hot gases from the combustor are directed ward or rear drive installations; the axial inlet
into the HPT, which drives the HPC. The can be used only in rear drive installations.
exhaust gases exit the HPT and enter the
LPT, which drives both the LPC and the out- 4-4 Low Pressure Compressor
put load. The exhaust gases pass through the
LPT and enter the exhaust duct. 4-4.1 General Description
4-3 Variable Inlet Guide Vanes The LM6000 LPC is a five–stage, axial–flow
compressor. The LPC features a five–stage
The air intake section of the engine con- fixed stator.
sists of an axial flow section containing a
VIGV system. The VIGV assembly is Provision is made for LPC discharge flow to
located at the front of the LPC and allows be bypassed through modulating bypass doors
flow modulation at partial power, resulting to assure adequate LPC stall margin at lower
in increased engine efficiency. The VIGV power settings and during large power reduc-
system consists of 43 stationary leading tion transients.
4-7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
4-4.2 LPC Rotor by a support structure that is bolted to the

engine front frame.
Individual disks are used in stages 0 and
1. Stages 2 through 4 of the LPC rotor are 4-5 Front Frame and Air
an integral spool. Stages 0 through 3 Collector
blades have squealer tips.
4-5.1 Front Frame
Stage 0 blades are individually retained
in the axial dovetail slots of the disk by a The front frame is a major structure that
one–piece blade retainer. Stages 1 provides support for the LPC rotor and
through 4 LPC blades are retained in cir- the forward end of the HPC rotor through
cumferential slots in the stage 1 disk and the No. 1B, No. 2R, and No. 3R bearings.
stages 2 through 4 spool. The blade– The frame also forms an airflow path
retention features permit individual blade between the LPC and the HPC inlet.
replacement. Blades in stages 1 through 3 Front engine mount provisions are
can be removed without removing the located on the front frame 3:00 and 9:00
rotor. o'clock positions. Two pads are included
on the frame outer case for mounting
4-4.3 LPC Stator HPC inlet temperature sensors.
The stages 0 through 3 titanium stator The front frame is made from a high-
vanes are individually replaceable. The strength steel casting. Twelve equally
vanes are shrouded to reduce vane spaced radial struts are used between the
response to aerodynamic forces. Wear hub and outer case to provide support for
strips are utilized between the vane dove- the inner hub. Twelve variable-position
tails and the LPC casing slots. bypass valve doors are located on the
outer wall for LPC discharge bleed.
The Teflon-lined stages 0 through 3 case
is horizontally split to allow top-casing. The front frame contains the engine A-
The feature facilitates vane and blade sump, which includes a thrust bearing
replacement, and allows removal without (1B) and roller bearing (2R) that support
affecting the front frame air collector. the LPC rotor, and a roller bearing (3R)
The stages 0 through 3 shrouds are axi- that supports the forward end of the HPC
ally split to aid in vane removal. Bores- rotor. Lubrication oil supply and scavenge
cope ports are located at stages 1, 2, and lines for the A-sump are routed inside the
3 for diagnostic inspection without disas- frame struts. The inlet gearbox is located
sembly. in the A-sump with the radial drive shaft
extending outward through the strut
The stage 4 stator vanes are mounted in located at the 6:00 o'clock position.
the front frame and supported on the ID
4-8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
4-5.2 Bypass Air Collector 4-6.3 HPC Stator
The LPC bypass air collector is a duct The HPC stator consists of a cast stator
attached to the front frame. It collects LPC case that contains the compressor stator
discharge air, vented through the LPC vanes. The inlet guide vanes and the stages
bypass doors, and directs it overboard 1 through 5 vanes can be rotated about the
through packager-provided ducting. axis of their mounting trunnions to vary the
pitch of the airfoils in the compressor flow
4-6 High Pressure path. Vane airfoils in the remaining stages
Compressor are stationary. All fixed and variable vanes
are non-interchangeable with other stages
4-6.1 General Description to prevent incorrect assembly. The casing
is split along the horizontal split-line for
The LM6000 PD HPC is a 14-stage, ease of assembly and maintenance. The
axial–flow compressor. It incorporates stages 1 and 2 vane shrouds also support
VIGVs and variable stators in stages 0 interstage rotor seals. The shrouds are
through 5 to provide stall-free operation designed to allow the removal of either half
and high efficiency throughout the start- of the compressor casing. There are 14
ing and operating range. axial stations provided for borescope
inspection of blades and vanes.
Stage 8 and compressor discharge air are
used for combustor flame temperature 4-7 Compressor Rear Frame
control. Seventh and eleventh stage bleed
air and compressor discharge air are The CRF consists of an outer case, 10
extracted for cooling and pressurization struts, and the B- and C-sump housings.
of the engine and bearing sump compo- The outer case supports the combustor and
nents. premixers. The hub provides support for a
ball bearing and two roller radial bearings
4-6.2 HPC Rotor to support the midsection of the high pres-
sure (HP) rotor system.
The HPC rotor consists of 14 stages. The
stage 2 disk has an integral forward shaft Bearing axial and radial loads and a portion
and the stages 11 through 14 spool has an of the first stage nozzle load are transmit-
integral rear shaft. ted through the hub and 10 radial struts to
the case. The hub, struts, and outer casing
Stages 1 and 2 blades are individually retained are a one-piece casting. The casting is
in axial dovetail slots and the remaining blades welded to the fuel embossment ring and
are held in circumferential dovetail slots. bolted to the aft case. This serves as the
These features allow individual blade replace- structural load path between the compres-
ment without disassembly of the rotor. sor casing and the HPT stator case. Seven
borescope ports are provided for inspection
Stage 1 blades are shrouded at mid-span for
of the combustor, premixers, and HPT. B-
the purpose of reducing vibratory stress. All
and C-sump service lines are contained in,
other blades are cantilevered from the rotor
and pass through, the CRF struts.
structure.
4-9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
4-8 Combustion System leads, and spark igniter. Once ignition

occurs, combustion becomes self-sustain-
4-8.1 General Description ing and continues without the spark
igniter.
The LM6000 PD gas turbine utilizes a lean
premix combustion system designed for 4-9 High Pressure Turbine
operation on natural gas fuel.
4-9.1 General Description
The triple annular configuration enables
the combustor to operate in uniformly The LM6000 HPT is an air-cooled, two-
mixed, lean fuel to air ratio (premix mode) stage design with demonstrated high effi-
across the entire power range, minimizing ciency. The HPT system consists of the
emissions even at low power. HPT rotor and the stages 1 and 2 HPT noz-
zles.
4-8.2 Triple Annular Combustor
4-9.2 HPT Rotor
The forward end or dome of the
combustor supports 75 segmented heat The HPT rotor assembly consists of the
shields that form the three annular stage 1 disk and integral shaft, a conical
burning zones in the combustor, known impeller spacer with cover, a thermal
as the outer or A dome, the pilot or B shield, and a stage 2 disk. Forward and aft
dome, and the inner or C dome. In rotating air seals are assembled to the HPT
addition to forming the three annular rotor and provide air-cooled cavities
domes, the heat shields isolate the around the rotor system. An integral cou-
structural dome plate from the hot pling nut and pressure tube are used to
combustion gases. The heat shields are an form and seal the internal cavity. The rotor
investment-cast superalloy and are disks and blades are cooled by a continuous
impingement and convection cooled. The flow of compressor discharge air. This air
combustion liners are front mounted with is directed to the internal cavity of the rotor
thermal barrier coating (TBC) and no through diffuser vanes that are part of the
film cooling. forward seal system.
Gas fuel is introduced into the combustor The stage 1 disk/shaft design combines the
via 75 air/gas premixers packaged in 30 rotor forward shaft and stage 1 disk into a
externally removable and replaceable one-piece unit. Torque is transmitted to the
modules. Half of these modules have two compressor rotor through an internal spline
premixers and the other half have three. at the forward end of the disk/shaft. The
The premixers produce a very uniformly stage 1 blades fit into axial dovetail slots in
mixed, lean fuel/air mixture. the disk. The stage 2 disk incorporates a
flange on the forward side for transmitting
4-8.3 Ignition System torque to the stage 1 disk. An aft flange
supports the aft air seal and the integral
The ignition system produces the high- coupling nut and pressure tube. Stage 2
energy sparks that ignite the fuel/air mix- blades fit into axial dovetail slots in the
ture in the combustor during starting. The disk.
system consists of an ignition exciter,
4-10
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Internally cooled turbine blades are used in The turbine shrouds form a portion of the
both stages. Both stages of blades are outer aerodynamic flow path through the
cooled by compressor discharge air flowing turbine. They are axially aligned with the
through the blade shank into the airfoil. turbine blades and form a pressure seal to
minimize HP gas leakage around tips of the
The cone-shaped impeller spacer serves as blades.
the structural support between the turbine
disks. The spacer also transmits torque The interstage seal is composed of six
from the stage 2 disk to the stage 1 disk. segments bolted to the inner flange at the
The catenary-shaped thermal shield forms nozzle segments. The sealing surface
the outer portion of the turbine rotor cool- consists of a two-step honeycomb seal
ing air cavity and serves as the rotating that mates with the rotating thermal
portion of the interstage gas path seal. shield. The interstage seal is designed to
minimize leakage of core gas flow
4-9.3 Stage 1 HPT Nozzle around the stage 2 nozzle.
The stage 1 HPT nozzle consists of 23 two- 4-10 Low Pressure Turbine
vane segments bolted to a nozzle support
attached to the hub of the CRF. 4-10.1 General Description
Compressor discharge air is used to cool The LPT drives the LPC and load device
the nozzle vanes and support bands to using the core gas turbine discharge gas
maintain the metal temperatures at the lev- flow for energy. The principal compo-
els required for extended operating life. nents of the LPT module are a five-stage
stator, a five-stage rotor supported by the
4-9.4 Stage 2 HPT Nozzle No. 6R and No. 7R bearings, and a cast
TRF supporting the stator casing and the
The stage 2 HPT nozzle assembly consists No. 6R and No. 7R bearings.
of 24 two-vane stage 2 nozzle segments,
stages 1 and 2 HPT shrouds and shroud 4-10.2 LPT Rotor
supports, HPT stator support (case), and
interstage seals. The nozzle vanes are inter- The LPT rotor assembly drives the LPC
nally cooled by HPC eleventh-stage air. through the LP mid-shaft and drives a
load through either the mid-shaft or from
The stage 2 nozzles are supported by the an aft drive adapter on the rear of the
stage 1 shroud support. They are also LPT rotor. The LPT rotor assembly con-
bolted to the stage 2 shroud support for- sists of five stages of bladed disks and a
ward leg, which is attached, by a flange, to shaft subassembly. The rotor is supported
the outer structural wall. The stage 1 by the No. 6R and No. 7R bearings in the
shroud system features segmented supports D- and E-sump of the TRF.
and shroud segments to maintain turbine
clearance.
4-11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Each LPT rotor stage consists of a bladed disk The stage 1 nozzle vanes provide capability
subassembly comprised of a disk, turbine for LPT inlet instrumentation. Holes are pro-
blades, blade retainers, interstage air seals, vided for thermocouple probes and a single
assembly bolts, and balance weights. Integral pressure probe can be inserted. There are eight
flanges on each disk provide assembly bolt nozzles to provide for thermocouples, one for
holes in a low stress area of the disk. Blade a pressure probe, and four nozzle segments
retainers hold the turbine blades in the axial without instrumentation holes.
dovetail slots.
Seals minimize the air leakage around the
The turbine shaft assembly is a torque cone inner ends of the nozzles and shrouds mini-
coupled to the mid-shaft through a spline and mize air leakage over the tips of the turbine
is bolted to the stage 2 and stage 3 turbine disk blades.
flanges. It also provides the journal for the D-
and E-sump air oil seal and the No. 6R and 4-11 Turbine Rear Frame
No. 7R bearing interfaces. The rotating por-
tion of the balance piston system mounts on The TRF is a one-piece casting which pro-
the shaft, aft of the No. 7R bearing seals. vides the gas turbine exhaust flow path and the
Additionally, the aft shaft spline provides for supporting structure for the D- and E-sump,
driving the output load from the rear through the LPT rotor thrust balance assembly, the
the aft drive adapter. LPT rotor shaft, and the aft drive adapter.
Fourteen radial struts function as outlet guide
4-10.3 LPT Stator vanes to straighten the exhaust air flow into
the exhaust diffuser for enhanced perfor-
The five-stage stator assembly consists of a mance. Lubrication oil supply and scavenge
one-piece tapered 360° casing, five stages of lines for the D- and E-sumps and LPT rotor
interlocking tip shrouds, and a 12 segment speed sensors are routed through the struts.
LPT case external cooling manifold. Air-
cooled first stage nozzle segments with a bolt- The LPT rotor thrust balance system is
on pressure balance seal, four additional designed to maintain the axial thrust loading
stages of nozzle segments with bolt-on inter- on the No. 1B thrust bearing within design
stage seals, and instrumentation and borescope limits. The balance piston static seal is
ports also comprise the stator assembly. mounted to the TRF hub. Stage 11 HPC bleed
air is routed through three TRF struts to gener-
The LPT casing is the load-carrying structure ate the required axial loading through the rotor
between the HPT stator case and the TRF. The thrust balance system.
casing contains internal machined flanges that
provide hooks to support the nozzle segments
and stops to assure nozzle alignment and seat-
ing. Borescope inspection ports are provided
along the right side, aft looking forward (ALF)
from 2:30 to 4:30 o'clock positions at nozzle
stages 1, 2, and 4.
4-12
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
4-12 Accessory Gearbox of the HPCR. The No. 4B bearing carries the
Assembly thrust loads for the HPR (HPC and HPT). The
No. 5R bearing supports the high pressure tur-
The accessories are driven from the high pres- bine rotor (HPTR) at its forward shaft.
sure rotor system by the inlet gearbox, a radial
drive shaft, and the transfer gearbox (TGB) The D- and E-sump houses the No. 6R and
assembly. The TGB is attached to the air col- No. 7R bearings. The No. 6R bearing supports
lector at the 6:00 o’clock position. The AGB the forward end of the low pressure turbine
(the accessory drive portion of the TGB rotor (LPTR) shaft. The No. 7R bearing sup-
assembly), located below the HPC casing, is ports the aft end of LPTR shaft and the bal-
driven from TGB by a short horizontal shaft. ance piston system.
The starter, lube and scavenge pump, VG
hydraulic pump, and other accessories are Labyrinth-type seals control the flow of air
mounted on, and driven by, the AGB. into the sump areas to prevent excess oil con-
sumption. The A-sump drains into the TGB
4-13 Bearings through the same front frame strut that houses
the gearbox shaft. Oil is then scavenged
Eight bearings support the rotating compo- through the gearbox. The No. 4R/4B and No.
nents and the aerodynamic loads in the 5R bearing zones of the B- and C-sump are
LM6000 PD. Each rotating mass (the com- individually scavenged, as are the No. 6R and
pressor, turbine, and balance-piston system) is No. 7R bearing zones of the D- and E-sumps.
supported by roller bearings and axial thrust All sumps emit mist-carrying air and are
loads are carried by ball bearings. These bear- vented to a packager-supplied air/oil separator.
ings are located in the A-, B-, C-, D-, and E- 4-3
sump areas. Sump areas and bearing locations 4-14 Low Pressure Rotor Balance
are shown in figure 4-3. Piston System
The A-sump houses the No. 1B, No. 2R, and The balance piston system is designed to con-
No. 3R bearings. The No. 1B bearing is a ball- trol thrust loading on the No. 1B bearing.
type thrust bearing that carries the thrust loads These loads are imposed by LPC and LPT and
for the LPR (LPC and LPT). The No. 2R bear- vary with output power. Forward axial loads
ing supports the low pressure compressor rotor are applied by varying air pressure in the bal-
(LPCR) and the No. 3R bearing supports the ance piston air cavity to maintain thrust loads
high pressure compressor rotor (HPCR) for- within the capability of the bearing. Air pres-
ward shaft. sure at the balance piston air cavity is main-
tained at the correct level by the off-engine
The B- and C-sump houses the No. 4R bear- electronic control and the hydraulically acti-
ing, the No. 4B bearing, and the No. 5R bear- vated balance piston valve.
ing. The No. 4R bearing supports the aft shaft
4-13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 4-3 Sump Areas and Bearing Locations
4-14
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
2 CHAPTER 5
LM6000 PD Model System Descriptions

5-1 Purpose and Scope • Variable bypass valve (VBV) system
This chapter provides physical and functional • Variable stator vane (VSV) system
descriptions of the various secondary systems
that are part of the LM6000 PD Model gas The VG control system consists of the VG
turbine. hydraulic pump, a hydraulic control unit
(HCU) which houses torque motor-positioned
Systems described in this chapter include: hydraulic servos for porting fluid at regulated
pressure, two VIGV actuators, six VBV actua-
• Variable-geometry (VG) systems tors, and two VSV actuators. The VG hydrau-
lic pump is a fixed-displacement design which
• Fuel systems supplies pressurized lube oil to the HCU for
delivery to the actuators.
• Gearbox assemblies
Positioning of the VIGVs, VSVs, and VBVs is
• Starter system scheduled by packager-supplied control sys-
tem electrical inputs to three separate servo
• Lube system valves in the HCU, which is mounted on the
VG hydraulic pump. Position feedback to the
• Sensors and indicating systems
control is provided by linear variable differen-
• Bleed system tial transformers (LVDTs) integral to the indi-
vidual system actuators.
• Engine control unit (ECU)
5-2.1 VIGV System
• Low pressure rotor (LPR) balance piston
system The VIGV assembly is located at the front of
the low pressure compressor (LPC). It allows
• Water-wash system flow modulation at partial power, resulting in
increased engine efficiency. The VIGV system
• Air system tubing and frame strut func- consists of 43 stationary leading edge vanes
tions. and variable trailing flaps. See figure 5-1. The
variable flaps can be rotated from -10 degrees
5-2 Variable-Geometry Control open to +60 degrees closed by means of an
System actuation ring, which is driven by twin hydrau-
lic actuators at the 3:00 and 9:00 o’clock posi-
The VG control system includes the tions. Normal engine operation is
following: approximately -5 degrees open (full power) to
+35 degrees closed (idle power). The flaps
• Variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) system will also close during large power reductions
to quickly reduce the LPC flow rate in order to
Change 2 5-1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
maintain the LPC stall margin. Both actuators six actuator bellcranks, 12 VBV door
are equipped with LVDTs. The packager-sup- bellcranks, and an actuation ring; see
plied control is designed to provide excitation figure 5-2.
and signal conditioning for both LVDTs and to
control VIGV position by means of closed- Actuators are installed at the 1:00, 3:00, 5:00,
loop scheduling of VIGV actuator position, 7:00, 9:00, and 11:00 o’clock positions on the
based on LPC inlet temperature (T2) and high engine. The six actuators are positioned with
pressure compressor (HPC) discharge static one VBV door on each side of each actuator.
pressure, (PS3) corrected to gas turbine inlet The actuators, the actuation ring, and the VBV
pressure conditions (P0). doors are mechanically linked by bellcranks
and pushrods. The actuator positions the actu-
5-2.2 VBV System ation ring, which opens and closes the VBV
doors. The 5:00 and 11:00 o’clock actuators
The VBV system is located in the front frame are equipped with integral LVDTs for position
assembly. This system is used to vent LPC dis- indication. The packager-supplied control is
charge air overboard through the LPC bleed designed to provide excitation and signal con-
air collector in order to maintain LPC stall ditioning for both LVDTs, and to control VBV
margin during starting, partial power opera- position by means of closed loop scheduling
tion, and large power transients. The VBV of VBV actuator position, based on LPC inlet
system consists of 12 variable-position bypass temperature (T2) and HP rotor speed corrected
valves, six VBV actuators (two with LVDTs), to inlet conditions (XN25R2).
5-1
Figure 5-1 VIGV System

5-2
5-2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 5-2 VBV System
Change 2 5-3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
5-2.3 VSV System 5-3 Fuel Systems

The VSV system is an integral part of the HPC This section provides functional descriptions
stator, consisting of two VSV actuators and of the fuel systems included as standard equip-
levers, actuation rings, and linkages for each ment with the LM6000 PD model.
VSV stage. See figure 5-3.
5-3.1 Gas Fuel Systems
The LM6000 PB/PD model is equipped with
two actuators on the VSV system, one at the Natural gas fuel systems are available for use
3:00 o’clock position and one at the 9:00 in low emission applications. A simplified
o’clock position. Each actuator incorporates an schematic of a natural gas fuel system is pro-
integral LVDT. The packager-supplied control vided in figure 5-4.
is designed to provide excitation and signal
conditioning for both LVDTs, and to control The LM6000 PD model fuel system includes
VSV position by means of closed-loop sched- three fuel manifolds, flexible fuel hoses, air/
uling of VSV actuator position, based on HP gas premixers, and 11 fuel staging valves.
rotor speed corrected to HPC inlet conditions 5-3
(T25).
Figure 5-3 VSV System

5-4
5-4 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 5-4 Natural Gas Fuel System
Change 2 5-5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
The minimum temperature of the gas fuel sup- integral with 15 premixer.
plied to the gas turbine shall be 20°F (11°C)
greater than the saturated vapor temperature of 5-3.1.2 Air/Gas Premixers
the gas supply pressure. The temperature of
the gas fuel should not exceed 300°F (149°C) Gas fuel is introduced into the combustor via
at the gas manifold inlet. 75 air/gas premixers packaged in 30 externally
removable and field replaceable modules. Half
The requirements for gas fuel are provided in of the modules have two premixers and the
Appendix A1 in Volume I of this manual. The other half have three premixers. The premixers
combination of entrained alkali metals enter- produce a very uniformly mixed, lean fuel/air
ing the engine through inlet air and fuel con- mixture.
tamination must not exceed 0.2 ppm. The use
of unapproved fuels can cause severe damage 5-3.1.3 Fuel Staging Valves
to the engine. Inquiries concerning fuels that
don't meet the requirements as outlined in One of the key controlling parameters in the
Appendix A1 in Volume 1 should be directed LM6000 PD model gas turbine is combustor
to the packager. flame temperature. Flame temperature control
is required to limit NOx emissions and control
The LM6000 PD model gas turbine requires hot section component lives. To maintain
accurate metering of the total mass flow rate flame temperature control in a narrow temper-
of gas fuel. As part of the requirements to ature range during all gas turbine operating
determine fuel metering valve demand posi- conditions, it is necessary to stage the combus-
tion, the fuel system must include provisions tor, i.e. it is necessary to turn sections of the
for providing signals to the electronic control combustor on and off. The 11 fuel staging
unit reflecting the following gas properties: valves control fuel distribution to the three
specific gravity, ratio of specific heats, lower combustor rings as scheduled by the electronic
heating value, and compressibility. The rec- control unit. Five staging valves control the A
ommendations for gas analysis and equipment or outer ring, five staging valves control the C
installation are included in Chapter 3 of this or inner ring, and one staging valve controls
manual. Rapid gas properties fluctuations will increase flow to the B or pilot ring. The B ring
require more frequent updates. Improper prop- dome has fuel available to it at all operating
erties can result in combustor flameout, acous- conditions. The operating modes over the
tics, or reduced hot section life. LM6000 PD model power range are schemati-
cally represented in Figure 5-5. The combus-
5-3.1.1 Gas Manifold and Fuel Hoses tor modes go from B mode at core idle (not
shown) to ABC at full power. During ABC
Gas fuel is metered to three on-engine fuel mode, all staging valves are open and supply-
manifolds. The three gas manifolds, one for ing fuel to each premixer cup. During B mode,
each combustor ring, supply high pressure fuel no staging valves are open and fuel is only
to the premixers via 90 flexible fuel hoses. burning in the B ring premixer cups. The stag-
The primary fuel supply to the premixers uses ing valves are mounted on brackets attached to
75 fuel hoses. The other 15 fuel hoses are used the gas manifolds.
for the enhanced lean blow-out (ELBO) circuit 5-5
5-6 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 5-5 LM6000 PD Model Operating Modes
5-4 Gearbox Assemblies rotation of the HP rotor system during

borescope inspection
The LM6000 PD model transfer gearbox 5-6
assembly consists of the transfer gearbox 5-5 Starter System
(TGB) and accessory gearbox (AGB). It is an
accessory drive system that is driven from the The starter drives the engine HP rotor system
HP rotor system by the inlet gearbox and through the TGB assembly starter drive pad
radial drive shaft. The TGB assembly is sup- (Figure 5-6). The starter is required for start-
ported by the bypass air collector and provides ing, water-wash, and when required, for
mounting and drive provisions for the follow- motoring the engine. The gear ratio of the
ing (figure 5-6): starter to the HP rotor is approximately 0.96:1.
Optional air, gas, and hydraulic starters are
• Pneumatic or hydraulic starter that drives available from the packager. For information
the high pressure (HP) rotor through the on non-GE starters, refer to the packager’s
TGB assembly manual.
• Lube and scavenge pump 5-5.1 GE Starter Usage
• VG hydraulic pump and HCU For GE-supplied starters, it is recommended
the starter not be engaged unless the HPC
• Packager-supplied accessories, optional shaft is at rest. If necessary, engagement can
GE-supplied fuel pump, and for manual occur at normal windmilling speeds not to
Change 2 5-7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 5-6 Transfer Gearbox Assembly
5-8 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
exceed 300 rpm. Engagement of the starter at The GE-supplied air/gas starter duty cycles are
XN25 speed of 300 rpm to 1,700 rpm must be as follows:
avoided to prevent damage to the starter or
TGB assembly. • Starting
Nominal cutout speed for the GE-supplied – 45 seconds On, 2 seconds Off for any
starter is 4,600 rpm (XN25). During engine number of cycles or
starting, minimum acceptable starter output – 2 minutes On, 5 minutes Off for a
speed is 4,100 rpm. Maximum acceptable maximum of two cycles or
starter output speed is 4,900 rpm.
– 2 minutes On, 21 minutes Off for any
If air is used to drive the starter, it can be dis- number of cycles.
charged directly from the starter with no addi- • Motoring
tional piping. If natural gas is used, the
exhausted natural gas must be vented to a safe – 5 minutes On, 2 minutes Off for a
location. For either type of pneumatic starter maximum of two cycles or
supplied by GE, the starter lube system is part
of the engine system, allowing constant oil – 5 minutes On, 18 minutes Off for any
flow through the starter. For all other starters, number of cycles or
refer to the packager’s manual. – 10 minutes On, 20 minutes Off for any
number of cycles. For 10 minutes of
5-5.2 Starter Duty Cycles motoring, maximum starter air inlet
temperature is 200°F (93.3°C).
For information on starter types other than
those described here, contact the packager. 5-5.2.2 Hydraulic Starter
5-5.2.1 Air and Gas Starters The hydraulic starter consists of a variable dis-
placement type hydraulic motor. Piston stroke
During a normal start, the starter is energized is controlled by a wobble plate, while dis-
for approximately 40-70 seconds. Air/gas con- placement is controlled by means of a pressure
sumption per start is approximately compressor. The starter is equipped with an
120-250 lb (54.4-113.3 kg), depending on the over-running clutch to prevent the motor from
medium and conditions. being driven by the HP rotor when the hydrau-
lic supply pressure and flow are reduced to
The maximum supply temperature is 475°F
zero. Physical arrangement and starter perfor-
(246.1°C). Air or gas must be dry and filtered
mance are shown in Figures 5-7 and 5-8
to 40 micrometers nominal. To purge and go respectively.
directly into a start cycle without stopping, the 5-7
5-8
engine may be motored at 1,200 rpm (approxi- 5-9
The hydraulic supply and control system is
mately 15 psig [103.4 kPa gage]) for 2 min- supplied by the gas turbine packager.
utes. The pressure can then be increased to Figure 5-9 is a simplified schematic of a
38 psig (262.0 kPa gage) and fuel and ignition typical packager supplied system. The starter
systems can be energized at 1,700 rpm. interfaces are identified as B1 through B5
figures 5-7 and 5-9. The starter requires a flow
capacity of 0 to 55 gal/min (0 to 208.2 l/min)
Change 2 5-9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 5-7 Hydraulic Starter
Figure 5-8 Hydraulic Starter Performance
5-10 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 5-9 Typical Hydraulic Starter Schematic
minimum of hydraulic fluid, MIL-L-17672, at between the starting circuit and the cooling
a minimum allowable pressure of 4,200 psid circuit once the starting circuit is pressurized.
(28,598 kPa differential). The maximum Filtration requirements are the same as the
allowable pressure is 5,300 psig (36,542 kPa supply circuit. The starter torque characteristic
gage). The oil temperature to the start circuit is shown in Figure 5-8.
shall be between 32°F and 200°F (0 and
93.3°C). The oil shall be filtered to Cooling flow to lubricate the internal clutch is
10 micrometer (µm) nominal (25 µm required during over-running conditions (once
absolute). The maximum allowable the start circuit flow is stopped). Supply shall
backpressure on oil return from the starter is be to the cooling supply interface and return
350 psig (2,413.3 kPa gage). The supply from the cooling return interface shown in
pressure shall be reduced to zero after the gas Figure 5-7. The circuit uses the same hydrau-
turbine attains 4,000 to 4,600 rpm (XN25). lic fluid used in the supply circuit.
Drive input power for the hydraulic supply
pump is approximately 180-200 horsepower. There are no duty cycle limitations on the
hydraulic starter, as long as the oil temperature
The maximum flow through the starter cooling is maintained under 140°F (59.9°C). The max-
circuit is 3.5 gal/min (13.25 l/min) and the imum cooling circuit oil temperature limit is
maximum allowable backpressure is 25 psig 200°F (93.3°C).
(172.4 kPa gage). The minimum allowable
backpressure is 1.0 psig (6.9 kPa gage). A For starting, a minimum pressure drop of
maximum 2.0 gal/min (7.6 l/min) flows 4,200 psi (28,958 kPa) is supplied. As starter
Change 2 5-11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
speed increases, the flow will increase from 0 5-5.2.3 Gas Turbine Airflow During
to 55 gal/min (0 to 208.2 l/min). At 55 gal/min Starter Operation
(0 to 208.2 l/min) flow, an internal pressure
compensator in the starter maintains starter When operating on the starter, airflow through
inlet pressure and accelerates the starter while the gas turbine for exhaust duct purge can be
the hydraulic supply system maintains the estimated using figure 5-10.
55 gal/min (208.2 l/min) flow. When the gas 5-10
5-11
turbine is fired, it will eventually attempt to 5-6 Lube System
drive the starter above its maximum speed. At
this point, an internal over-running clutch 5-6.1 General Description
allows the gas turbine to continue to run at its
maximum speed without driving the hydraulic Figure 5-11 is the lube system schematic. The
starter. The hydraulic supply system for the engine uses lubrication oil to:
hydraulic starter should be shut down and
• Lubricate and cool the high-pressure and
cooling flow initiated. If the gas turbine is
low-pressure rotor bearings, sumps, and
unfired, such as for purge or compressor
the inlet, transfer, and accessory gear-
cleaning, the starter speed will approach the
boxes.
steady state speed of 1,900 to 2,200 rpm, by
decreasing the pressure drop across the starter • Operate the actuators for the VIGV, VBV,
or limiting fluid flow to less than 55 gal/min and VSV systems; 8th stage and compres-
(208.2 l/min). sor discharge pressure (CDP) bleed valves,
and LP rotor thrust balance control valve.
The seal drain connection allows hydraulic
fluid that has leaked across the starter carbon • Maintain a supply of oil to the optional
seal between the starter and the AGB to be pneumatic starter.
ported outside the package. The drain is
redundant with the AGB drain at the starter The standard engine lube system components
location. The maximum flow through the include the gearbox-driven engine lube oil
starter seal drain is 5.0 cc/hr and the maximum supply and scavenge pump and the necessary
allowable backpressure is 1.0 psig (6.9 kPa on-engine piping for the HP and low pressure
gage). (LP) system bearings and sumps, for the inlet
gearbox, and for the TGB assembly. Oil sup-
For new installations or where the start system ply and scavenge temperature sensors are
has had maintenance performed, the hydraulic included. The oil temperature sensors are
system supply and cooling lines should be dual-element resistance temperature detectors
flushed until clean without the starter installed (RTD). Three chip detectors are also included.
in the circuit. This should be accomplished by One monitors the thrust bearing in the A-sump
circulating fluid through the system, including and one the thrust bearing in the B-sump. The
filters, at operating temperatures, pressure, third or common detector monitors the
and flows until the system is free of debris. remaining bearings.
The filter elements should then be changed
and the starter installed.
5-12 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 5-10 Subidle Airflow
Change 2 5-13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 5-11 LM6000 PD Model Lube System Schematic
5-14 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
The packager provides air/oil separator(s), 5-6.3 Oil Specification

lube oil, lube conditioning and storage mod-
ule, and the necessary flexible lines to inter- Type II oil (MIL-L-23699) is the preferred
face with the engine at two locations. The lube lubricant for the LM6000 PB/PD gas turbine.
conditioning and storage system includes the This class of synthetic oil has a coking tem-
lube oil supply filter(s), scavenge oil filter(s), perature advantage of 20°F (-6.6°C) to 50°F
oil cooler, check valves, and the storage tank. (29.9°C) over Type I (MIL-L-7808). Improved
film effectiveness of MIL-L-23699 at higher
The lubrication oil may be used with a transfer temperatures also improves bearing life. Type
gearbox assembly-mounted hydraulic pump to I lubricant is not recommended for general use
provide hydraulic pressure to operate pack- in the LM6000 PD Model. In applications
ager-supplied fuel, water, and steam metering where very low temperature starting capability
valves, required by the system as supplied. is required, Type I oil may be used provided
the ambient temperature is consistently lower
For new installations, following lube system than 68°F (19.9°C). Any use of Type I oil
maintenance, or after lube system component requires approval of M&IED for the specific
failure, the package lube system lines should site. Reference Appendix A for further guid-
be flushed until free of contamination. The ance on acceptable lubrication oils.
flushing should occur without the gas turbine
installed in the circuit. Flushing is accom- 5-6.4 Lube Subsystems
plished by circulating fluid through the system
and filters at operating temperatures and pres- 5-6.4.1 Lube Supply Circuit
sures. Continue circulation until system filters
are free of debris. The filter elements should The oil flow from the supply element of the
then be changed and the lube system con- engine lube pump is approximately propor-
nected to the gas turbine. See Chapter 7 for tional to the engine HP rotor speed. The pump
specific recommendations. internal relief valve for the lube supply ele-
ments is set to open at 300 psid (2,068.4 kPa
Use of engine lubrication oil for purposes differential) and bypass full flow (at maximum
other than described in this section must be speed) at 400 psid (2,757.9 kPa differential).
reviewed by GE M&IED. The pump requires a flooded inlet to maintain
prime. Immediately following cold starts, oil
5-6.2 System Flows, Pressures, and pressure at the pump inlet may be as low as
Temperatures 5.0 psia (34.5 kPa absolute). Oil pressure at
the pump inlet shall not be less than atmo-
Table 5-1 provides the parameter values for spheric pressure when the oil temperature is at
the oil supply and scavenge, actuator drain, normal operating conditions. Oil from the lube
and air/oil vents for use in troubleshooting and scavenge pump shall be filtered to 3.0
possible operational problems. Total flow micrometers absolute by packager-supplied
from the oil tank to the engine and return is off-engine filters before being returned to the
approximately 17 gal/min (1.7 l/sec) at rated engine lube system. Filters include bypass
power. relief valve with an alarm to alert the operator
to impending bypass. Oil filter pressure drop
shall not exceed 40 psid (275.8 kPa differen-
tial) at full oil flow.
Change 2 5-15
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 5-1 Gas Turbine Lube/Scavenge System
Description Fluid Flow Pressure Temperature
Lube Pump Inlet Oil 10-18 gal/min 0-1.0 psig 100 to 120°F
(0.63-1.13 I/sec) (0-6.9 kPa gage) (37.7 to 48.8°C)
Lube Supply to Filter Oil 10-18 gal/min 32-110 psig 140 to 160°F
(0.63-1.13 I/sec) (220.6-75.4 kPa gage) (59.9 to 71.1°C)
Engine Lube Supply Oil 10-18 gal/min 27-68 psig 140 to 160°F
(0.63-1.13 I/sec) (186.1-488.8 kPa gage) (59.9 to 71.1°C)
Scavenge Discharge to Oil 10-18 gal/min 20-80 psig 175 to 275°F

Filter (0.63-1.13 I/s) (137.8-551.5 kPa gage) (79.4 to 134.9°C)
Air 0.1-.27 lb/min 0-1.0 psig 175 to 275°F

(0.045-0.12 kg/min) (0-6.9 kPa gage) (79.9 to 134.9°C)
A-, B-, and C-Sump Vents Oil 0.1-0.5 gal/min

(6-31 ml/sec)
Air 75-225 ft3/m 0-1.0 psig 175 to 275°F

(0-6.9 kPa gage) (79.9 to 134.9°C)
(2.12-6.37 m3/min)
D- and E-Sump Vents Oil 0.1-0.5 gal/min

(6-31 ml/sec)
Air 15-40 ft3/m 0-1.0 psig 175 to 275°F

0-6.9 kPa gage) (79.9 to 134.9°C)
(0.42-1.13 m3/min)
Combined Actuators Oil 0-30 ml/hr 0-2 in. H2O 140 to 160°F
Drain (0-0.5 kPa) (59.9 to 71.1°C)
VG Servo Drain Oil 0-30 ml/hr 0-2 in. H2O 140 to 160°F
(0-0.5 kPa) (59.9 to 71.1°C)
Combined Accessory Pad Oil 0-10 ml/hr 0-2 in. H2O 140 to 160°F
Drain (0-0.5 kPa) (59.9 to 71.1°C)
D- and E-Sump Drains Oil 0-25 ml/hr
Air 0-65 ft3/m 0-3 psig 225 to 860°F

0-20.7 kPa gage) (107.2 to 459.9°C)
(0-0.03 m3/sec)
Stage 8 Bleed Valve Drain Oil 0-30 ml/hr 0-2 in. H2O 140 to 160°F
(0-0.5 kPa) (59.9 to 71.1°C)
Compressor Discharge Oil 0.30 ml/hr 0-2 in. H2O 140 to 160°F
Bleed Valve Drain (0-0.5 kPa) (59.9 to 71.1°C)
Thrust Balance Valve Oil 0-30 ml/hr 0-2 in. H2O 140 to 160°F
Drain (0-0.5 kPa) (59.9 to 71.1°C)
Note: Data provided are normal expected values from idle to maximum power.
5-16 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Oil supplied to the engine should not contain The B- and C-sump drains into the LP recoup
more than 10 percent entrained air on a vol- vent line. Under normal conditions, insignifi-
ume basis. cant amounts of oil will be entrained in the LP
recoup air. In the event of-sump seal oil leak-
An oil pressure measurement fitting is pro- age, the LP recoup vent line may contain
vided in the engine lube oil supply system. entrained oil. The D- and E-sump drains are
Limits in Chapter 10 apply to pressures mea- expected to carry insignificant amounts of oil
sured at this fitting. An on-engine temperature during normal operation. The sump drains are
sensor is provided for oil supply temperature sized to handle full air/oil flow in the event of
measurement. Engine oil pressure is a function seal oil leakage.
of HP rotor speed and oil supply temperature.
Refer to Chapter 8 for oil supply characteris- A fluid drain collector system should be pro-
tic. Chapter 10 provides requirements for vided as part of the installation and should
pressure and temperature instrumentation and comply with all applicable regulations relating
operation limits. to environmental contamination or pollution.
It is strongly recommended that provisions be
An antistatic leak check valve is provided in made to isolate the drain lines, when neces-
the packager’s system to prevent oil drainage sary, to enable troubleshooting for excessive
from the tank into the engine during shut- drain fluid flow. The collector system must not
down. permit fluids to siphon back into the engine.
5-6.4.2 Scavenge Oil Circuit The TGB assembly drive pad seal drain is a
manifold drain for the fuel pump, the starter,
Scavenge flow, an air/oil mixture, is approxi- the lube/scavenge pump, the external shaft
mately proportional to HP rotor speed. Scav- seal on end of the lube/scavenge pump, and
enge pump capacity is approximately three the forward accessory pad.
times that of the oil supply element.
The TGB assembly drain manifold fluid may
Oil returning to the tank is cooled and filtered be lube oil, fuel, or starter hydraulic oil and
to 3.0 µm absolute to maintain a clean tank. cannot be returned to the lube storage tank.
The filter should include a bypass relief valve
and bypass alarm as described for the lube 5-6.4.4 Sump Vent Circuit
supply circuit. The tank must be vented to
ambient through an air/oil demister. The engine A-, B-, C-, D-, and E-sumps vent
to the packager-supplied air/oil separator sys-
An oil pressure measurement fitting is pro- tem. The allowable vent pressures into the air/
vided in the engine lube oil scavenge system. oil separator at full power should not exceed
Limits in Chapter 10 apply to pressures mea- 2.3 psig (15.85 kPa gage). See figure 5-12 for
sured at this fitting. sump locations and figure 5-13 for a sump-
function diagram.
5-6.4.3 Engine Drains 5-12
5-13
Oil entrained in the vent air is normally com-
In normal operation, the drains will have little
posed primarily of liquid oil droplets. These
or no oil flow. oil droplets may constitute as much as 0.5 gal/
min (32 ml/sec) from each sump vent inter-
face.
Change 2 5-17
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 5-12 LM6000 PD Engine Sumps and Main Bearing Locations
5-18 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 5-13 Sump Function Diagram
The amount of oil vapor discharging from the tings near internal lube piping and provides a
air/oil separator exhaust will vary with separa- cool air film around these lines and sump
tor efficiency. The air/oil separator exhaust walls.
should be located to minimize oil vapor inges-
tion into the engine inlet system. Oil mist will Cooling flow at the gas turbine should be
cause compressor fouling and engine perfor- 120°F (48.9°C) or less and 25 psig (172.3 kPa
mance loss. gage). The cooling flow must be supplied for a
minimum of 1.5 hours after shutdown from
The drain lines from the air/oil separator and idle to provide sufficient time for the frames to
the oil collector, if present, should be sepa- cool below the lube oil coking temperature.
rately routed back to the lube storage tank Emergency shutdown from high power
without any traps in the lines. requires a longer cooling period.
5-6.4.5 Lube and Scavenge Line Post-shutdown cooling air supply for the tur-
Cooling bine rear frame struts and the low pressure
recoup line should conform to the same air
After engine shutdown, the turbine rear frame quality requirements of gas turbine inlet air.
(lube supply and scavenge lines) and compres- Discharge from the fan or blower may be
sor rear frame (LP recoup line) will require water vapor saturated air but no water droplets
packager-supplied vent air cooling to prevent or slugs are permitted. Entrained oil is not to
oil line coking. This cooling air flow enters fit- exceed 3.0 lb/min, by weight.
Change 2 5-19
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
5-6.5 Sump Pressurization 5-7.1 Speed Indication
All sumps are pressurized by LPC discharge Two pairs of speed sensors (two per system)
static air pressure. This airflow is of sufficient are provided to monitor low pressure turbine
volume and pressure to maintain a positive air- (LPT) rotor speed (XNSD) and HP rotor speed
flow inward across the inner seals to the inner (XN25).
sump cavity. This positive airflow carries with
it any oil on the seals, thus retaining the oil 5-7.1.1 LP Rotor Speed
within the inner cavity.
The engine is equipped with two reluctant-
Sump pressurization air enters the outer sump type speed sensors, mounted in the turbine
cavity through a pressurizing port. This air rear frame at struts No. 4 and 12. These sen-
then passes across the oil seals into the inner sors detect and measure the tooth-passing fre-
sump cavity, where it is vented to the air/oil quency of a toothed sensor ring attached to the
separator. LPT rotor shaft. Each sensor has an integral
lead which terminates on the No. 4 electrical
Sump pressurization air also passes outward panel.
across the outer seals to the engine cavity.
5-7.1.2 HP Rotor Speed
5-6.6 Oil Mixing
The engine is equipped with two reluctance-
Mixing of MIL-L-23699 and MIL-L-7808 oils type speed sensors mounted in the AGB sec-
should be avoided. If mixing does occur, the tion of the TGB assembly for sensing HP rotor
tank should be drained and serviced as soon as speed. The speed signal is produced by sens-
possible. Mixing of different brands of oil to ing passing gear teeth frequency on a spur
the same specification should be accomplished gear in the AGB section. Harnesses are routed
by topping off the tank with new brand. to the No. 2 electrical panel.
5-6.7 Oil Consumption 5-7.2 Acoustic Sensors
Oil consumption is not expected to exceed 0.4 The gas turbine is equipped with two combus-
gal/hr (1.5 l/hr). Additional oil may be lost tor dynamic pressure sensors. These sensors
overboard through the engine sump vents, are mounted on the compressor case. The GE
depending upon the efficiency of the air/oil supplied dynamic pressure sensors control and
separator(s). monitor combustor dynamic pressure. These
pressure transducers are piezoelectric charge
5-7 Sensors and Indicating devices similar to vibration monitoring accel-
Systems erometers. Each sensor has an integral lead
with connector.
This section describes the various engine-
mounted sensors and indicating systems 5-7.3 Vibration Sensors
required for normal operation of the LM6000
PD Model. The engine is equipped with two accelerome-
ters, one on the compressor rear frame and one
on the turbine rear frame. These accelerome-
ters provide protection against self-induced
5-20 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
synchronous vibration. Each sensor is capable perature. Each dual-element T48 sensor reads
of monitoring both high-speed and low-speed an average of the two elements for a total of
rotor vibration levels. Each accelerometer sen- eight control readings. Two flexible harnesses,
sor has an integral lead that is routed to one of each connected to four of the probes, are
the electrical panels (CRF accelerometer to routed to connectors on the No. 4 electrical
the No. 3 electrical panel; TRF accelerometer panel.
to the No. 4 electrical panel).
5-7.4.5 Lube Supply and Scavenge
Optional redundant engine accelerometers Temperature
may also be included.
Seven dual-element platinum RTDs are pro-
5-7.4 Temperature Sensors vided as standard equipment on the engine for
measurement of the lube oil supply and scav-
5-7.4.1 LPC Inlet Air Temperature (T2) enge oil temperatures. These RTDs sense tem-
peratures of the bearing lube supply and
The engine is equipped with a probe to mea- scavenge from the individual sumps (AGB,
sure the LPC inlet total temperature (T2) and TGB/A, B, C, D, and E). The cables for these
inlet total pressure (P2). The probe contains a RTDs are routed to the No. 2 electrical panel.
dual-element, RTD with an integral lead ter- Optional redundant RTDs may also be
minating at the No. l electrical panel. included.
5-7.4.2 HPC Inlet Air Temperature 5-7.5 Pressure Sensors
(T25)
5-7.5.1 LPC Inlet Pressure (P2)
The engine is equipped with a probe to mea-
sure the HPC inlet total temperature (T25) and The engine is equipped with a probe which
the inlet total pressure (P25) of the HPC. The measures LPC inlet total temperature (T2) and
probe contains a dual-element RTD with an which provides a tap to measure LPC inlet
integral lead terminating at the No. 2 electrical total pressure (P2). The P2 tap is a threaded
panel. boss that may be connected by a tube or hose
(supplied by the packager or user) to a trans-
5-7.4.3 HPC Discharge Temperature ducer. The probe is located in the VIGV case
(T3) which also contains provisions for a second
optional probe.
Two T3 sensors are included as standard
equipment. The T3 sensor is a dual-element 5-7.5.2 HPC Inlet Pressure (P25)
chromel-alumel thermocouple with readout
capability for each element. The integral leads The engine is equipped with a probe which
are routed to the No. 3 electrical panel. measures HPC inlet total temperature (T25)
and which provides a tap to measure HPC
5-7.4.4 LPT Inlet Gas Temperature inlet total pressure (P25). The P25 tap is a
(T48) threaded boss that may be connected by means
of a tube or hose (supplied by the packager or
Eight separate shielded chromel-alumel (type
user) to a transducer. This probe is located in
K) thermocouple probes are installed on the
the front frame which also contains provisions
LP turbine stator case to sense LPT inlet tem-
for a second optional probe.
Change 2 5-21
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
NOTE • Balance piston pressure reference (PBPV)
• The 17 cu in (278 cu cm) line volume lim- Of these, PS25 and PBPV can be used for con-
its exist on the PS3 and P48 sensors. dition monitoring or troubleshooting. The
Changes to the tubing should not be made remaining two (PS3 and PTB) are vital to
without consultation with the packager. engine operation and are an integral part of the
packager-supplied control system. For these
• The P48 sensing lines for flowpath pres- parameters, the packager is responsible for
sure measurement must include provision sensor leads and readout devices.
for preventing water accumulation in the
line. Contact your packager for the correct Other critical parameters are measured at loca-
configuration. tions off the gas turbine. Gas supply pressures
GP1, GP2A, GP2B, and GP23 (see figure 5-4)
5-7.5.3 LPT Inlet Gas Total Pressure are critical to the controlling of the low emis-
(P48) sions combustor system properly. P0, which is
located in the inlet to the gas turbine, is critical
The engine includes an LPT inlet gas total to the scheduling of the VIGV system and
pressure (P48) probe located on the right side load limiting. The sensor reads slightly less
of the LPT stator case. than ambient when functioning properly in a
clean inlet. Failure to calibrate this reference
5-7.5.4 Additional Pressure
using a calibrated ambient pressure gauge will
Parameters
result in performance loss.
Additionally, the LM6000 PD Model includes
It is critical that proper attention is given to a
provisions for measurement of the following
process that calibrates and maintains calibra-
pressure parameters:
tion of all pressure transducers. Incorrect cali-
• HPC inlet static pressure (PS25) bration of pressure transducers can lead to
performance loss, poor emission characteris-
NOTE tics, and potentially damaged gas turbine com-
ponents.
• The 17 cu in (278 cu cm) line volume lim-
its exist on the PS3 and P48 sensors. 5-7.6 Chip Detectors
Changes to the tubing should not be made
without consultation with the packager. The engine is equipped with electrical/ mag-
netic remote-reading chip detectors in the
• The PS3 sensing lines for flowpath pres- TGB/A-sump, B-sump, and common scav-
sure measurement must include provision enge return lines. Optional chip detectors are
for preventing water accumulation in the available for use on the C-, D-, and E-sump
line. Contact your packager for the correct scavenge lines.
configuration
Each standard or optional chip detector indi-
• HPC discharge static pressure (PS3); two cates chip collection when resistance across
locations the detector drops. Chip detector leads are
connected to the No. 2 electrical panel.
• Thrust balance cavity pressure (PTB)
5-22 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
5-7.7 Variable-Geometry Position 5-7.10 Thrust Balance Control System
The positions of the LPC variable inlet guide The thrust balance control system consists of
vanes, the LPC variable bypass valves, and the the on-engine VG hydraulic pump and an off-
HPC VSV are provided to the control and engine mounted thrust balance control valve
monitoring systems by independent pairs of and actuator. Positioning of the thrust balance
linear variable differential transformers. Two control valve is scheduled by a purchaser-sup-
actuators in each VG system are equipped plied control system electrical input to the
with LVDTs. valve mounted servo valve. Position feedback
is provided by two LVDTs integral with the
5-7.8 Flame Sensors actuator.
An ultraviolet flame detector indicates the 5-8 Electrical System
presence or loss of flame in the engine com-
bustion system for engine control system logic The engine electrical system consists of the
use in sequencing and monitoring. The flame ignition system and the cabling for the control
detector hardware consists of two ultraviolet and instrumentation. The system is designed
sensor assemblies and two flame viewing win- for high reliability and ease of maintenance by
dow assemblies mounted on two holes in the utilizing integral lead sensors or on-engine
compressor rear frame. The flame sensors harnesses, which are terminated at four electri-
come equipped with cooling cans and integral cal connector panels and the two staging valve
leads, which are connected directly to the mounting brackets mounted on the engine. See
packager-supplied signal conditioner. Cooling figure 5-14 for electrical panel locations.
air for the system is packager-supplied and
must be kept on for a minimum of 30 minutes 5-8.1 Ignition System
following a normal shutdown.
The ignition system consists of a high-energy
5-7.9 Bleed Air Control System igniter, a high-energy capacitor-discharge
ignition exciter, and an interconnecting cable.
The bleed air control system consists of the A redundant ignition system that replaces a
on-engine VG hydraulic pump and two off- plug in the compressor rear frame is also avail-
engine HPC bleed valves stage 8 and CDP and able. The ignition cables interconnect directly
valve actuators. The bleed valves each house a between the package-mounted exciters and the
torque-motor positioned hydraulic servo for igniters, which are mounted on the engine
porting fluid at regulated pressure. The pur- compressor rear frame.
chaser is required to supply hydraulic piping
between the supply and return connections to During the start sequence, fuel is ignited by
the HCU and the servos on the two off-gas tur- the igniter, which is energized by the ignition
bine bleed air control valve actuators. Posi- exciter. Once combustion becomes self-sus-
tioning of the bleed air control valves is taining, the igniter is deenergized. The maxi-
scheduled by purchaser-supplied control sys- mum duty cycle is a maximum of 90 seconds
tem electrical inputs to the servo valves. Posi- ON and two start cycles within a 30 minute
tion feedback is provided by LVDTs integral period.
with the actuators. 5-14
Change 2 5-23
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 5-14 LM6000 PD Model Electrical Panel Locations
5-24 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
5-8.2 Cabling 5-10 High Pressure and Low

Pressure Recoup System
The LM6000 PD model is optionally supplied
with electrical cables for interconnection The compressor rear frame B- and C-sump
between the package-mounted junction boxes pressurization system is isolated from the
and the engine. Each of the cables connects to HPC by the CDP and vent labyrinth seals.
the engine at one of four electrical panels, as These seals serve to form HP recoup and LP
indicated in figure 5-14. Instrumentation leads recoup chambers. The HP recoup airflow
must be shielded isolated from power leads, results from compressor discharge air leaking
and run in conduits carrying only other very across the CDP seal. The LP recoup airflow
low level leads. figure 5-14 provides the iden- develops from the HP recoup air leaking
tification and panel designation for the cables across the vent seal.
supplied as standard. Table 5-2 defines the
abbreviated nomenclature used in figure 5-14. 5-11 Engine Control Unit
5-8.3 Electrical Panels The ECU, supplied by the packager, performs
the fuel, bleed, VG and scheduling, engine
The LM6000 PD Model is equipped with five start and stop sequencing, and data acquisition
electrical panels mounted on the engine. These for support of the engine monitoring system.
panels provide a convenient intermediate Alarm and shutdown logic is included in
interface point between the engine Chapter 10, Troubleshooting.
instrumentation sensors and the enclosure
interface figure 5-14 illustrates the five panel 5-12 Low Pressure Rotor Balance
locations. The advantages of these interface
panels are listed as follows:
Piston System
A balance piston system has been included in
• Simplified installation and removal of the
engine the aft end of the engine. See figure 5-15. The
system is designed to provide the required
• Keyed or sized connectors to prevent thrust load on the No. lB bearing.
incorrect mating
The balance piston system consists of the bal-
• The positive-lock threaded connectors ance piston disk, the balance piston casing,
specified eliminate the need for safety wir- their associated seals, and the dome-shaped
ing the connectors. cavity formed by these parts. This cavity is
pressurized by stage 11 HPC bleed air, con-
5-9 Bleed System trolled by a modulating valve mounted off
engine inside the package. The valve is posi-
Stage 8 and HPC discharge air (CDP) are used tioned by the electronic control unit based on
for combustor flame temperature control. P0, P25, P48, corrected LP speed, VIGV and
Extraction of HPC bleed air affects the perfor- VBV position, and burner demand. Some air-
mance, component life, and available power flow bypasses the valve at all times to main-
output of the engine. Bleed air is not available tain bearing load within the allowable range in
for use by the customer. the event of valve malfunction. The balance
piston casing is attached to the aft inner hub of
the TRF; the balance piston disk is attached to
the LPT shaft.
Change 2 5-25
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 5-2 LM6000 PD Electrical Cable Panel Nomenclature
Abbreviation Nomenclature
AGB Accessory Gearbox
CRF Compressor Rear Frame
LVDT Linear Variable Differential Transformer
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector
TC Thermocouple
T/M Torque Motor
TGB Transfer Gearbox
TRF Turbine Rear Frame
T48 Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature
T2 Low Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature
T25 High Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature
T3 High Pressure Compressor Discharge Temperature
VBV Variable Bypass Valve
VIGV Inlet Guide Vane
VSV Variable Stator Vane
XNSD Low Pressure Turbine Rotor Speed
XN25 High Pressure Rotor Speed
5-15
5-13 Water-Wash System 5-14 Engine Airflow
A water-wash system can be provided by the A schematic representation of the internal and
packager to remove contaminants that accu- external gas turbine air flows is shown in
mulate in the LPC and HPC, resulting in a loss Chapter 4, figure 4-1.
of performance.
5-15 Air System Tubing and
There are two methods of water-washing Frame Strut Functions
available: crank-soak and on-line cleaning.
Technique associated with a working water- The LM6000 PD model has 11 major external
wash system that maintains compressor effi- pneumatic tubing designs and three strut loca-
ciency is very much dependent on site conditions. The struts are located in the front frame,
tions. Each operator should, by testing, choose CRF, and turbine rear frame. See figures 5-16
the proper fluid and wash frequency based on and 5-17 for tubing locations and figure 5-18
their plant economics. Water-wash recommen- for strut functions.
dations and procedures are covered in 5-16
5-17
5-18
WP 4014 00.
5-26 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 5-15 Low Pressure Rotor Balance Piston System
Change 2 5-27
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 5-16 LM6000 PD Model Gas Turbine - Left Side View
5-28 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 5-17 LM6000 PD Gas Turbine - Right Side View
Change 2 5-29
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 5-18 LM6000 PD Model Gas Turbine - Strut Functions
5-30 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
5-15.1 A-, B-, C-, D-, and E-Sump Vents The purchaser is required to provide the inter-
connecting piping between this interface and
Two interfaces are provided to the customer the CDP bleed valve.
for venting the three bearing sumps. These
vents direct the sump air/oil mixtures over- 5-15.6 High Pressure and Low
board so the customer can reclaim lubrication Pressure Recoup
oil.
The HP recoup air is connected by manifolds
5-15.2 B- and C-Sump Pressurization from the compressor rear frame struts 4 and 10
to the LPT stage 1 nozzle area on the LPT
LPC discharge air from the front frame is case. HP recoup air is used for cooling of the
directed through a single manifold to the CRF aft position of the LPT stage 1 nozzle vanes.
where it supplies pressurization air for the B- LP recoup air is bled overboard from CRF
and C-sump. struts 6 through 8.
5-15.3 Balance Piston 5-15.7 HPT Cooling
Stage 11 HPC air is extracted near 12:00 Stage 11 HPC bleed air is used for cooling the
o’clock on the HPC case. This air is directed stage 2 HPT nozzle. Four external tubes
aft through a control valve into the TRF at extract stage 11 air from the compressor and
struts 3 and 8 for supplying the balance piston are branched into two ports on the HPT case.
system cavity.
5-15.8 LPT Cooling
5-15.4 HPC Stage 8 Bleed
Stage 8 HPC air is routed through two mani-
Stage 8 bleed air is extracted through holes folds to the stage 1 LPT nozzle for cooling its
bored in the stator casing aft of the stage 8 leading edge cavity.
vane dovetails. A manifold combines the two
HPC case ports into a single interface. The 5-15.9 Passive Clearance Control
purchaser is required to provide the intercon-
necting piping between this interface and the LPC discharge air is extracted at the front
stage 8 bleed valve. frame and discharged through small holes in
tubing that surrounds the LPT case. The cool-
5-15.5 Compressor Discharge ing air reduces LPT clearance resulting in
Pressure Bleed increased turbine efficiency.
The CDP bleed manifold combines two com-

pressor case bleed ports into a single interface.

5-32 Blank Change 2

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
3 CHAPTER 6
Service and Support Requirements

6-1 Purpose and Scope shock mounts to avoid damage to the
engine bearings during shipment. It has a
This chapter defines the following service and pressure relief valve for controlled breath-
support requirements associated with the ing, humidity indicators, and a desiccant
LM6000 PD gas turbine. container for a controlled environment.
• Shipping b. Weight of the container and engine assem-

bly, as shipped from the factory, is approx-
• Storage imately 29,000 pounds (13,154 kg).
• Installation/Removal c. In the event that the engine requires repair

at a designated repair facility, it should be
• Auxiliary systems shipped to the facility in the shipping con-
tainer. Installation of the engine in the
• Support services shipping container is covered in
WP 3014 00.
• Maintenance
6-2.2 Low Pressure Turbine Module
The information provided is general but not
Shipping
all-inclusive. References are made to other
sections of this manual and to specific mainte- a. The low pressure turbine (LPT) module,
nance work packages (WP) that cover these consisting of the LPT rotor, LPT stator,
topics in detail. turbine rear frame, and aft drive adapter,
can be transported in a unique reusable
6-2 Shipping metal shipping container. This container is
The engine is shipped from the factory as a 95 inches (241.3 cm) long by 88 inches
complete assembly, including the engine, fuel (223.5 cm) wide by 80 inches (203.2 cm)
manifold, engine-mounted accessories, exter- high. Similar to the engine assembly con-
nal configuration hardware, and engine tainer, it is equipped with shock mounts to
mounted sensors. The engine is shipped on an avoid damage to the No. 6R and No. 7R
air-ride tractor trailer only. bearings during shipment. It has a pressure
relief valve for controlled breathing,
6-2.1 Engine Shipment humidity indicators, and a desiccant con-
tainer for a controlled environment.
a. The engine assembly is shipped in a metal
container that measures 219 inches b. The weight of the container is
(556.3 cm) long by 102 inches (259.1 cm) 4,500 pounds (2,041 kg) empty and
wide by 99.25 inches (252.1 cm) high. The 10,470 pounds (4,749 kg) loaded. Installa-
empty container weighs 11,000 pounds tion of the LPT module in the shipping
(4,990 kg). The container is equipped with container is covered in WP 3017 00.
Change 3 6-1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
NOTE Both the engine and LPT module con- • Shipping of the engine/container system
tainers can be air-shipped on the 747F, L1011, requires the use of a pneumatic
or C130. The LPT module can also be air- suspension tractor and trailer for
shipped on DC10CF, C130, A300C, and highway shipment. The engine container
A310C/F aircraft. shall be secured to the trailer in such a
manner that the shock-absorbing
6-2.3 Engine Shipping Container capability of the container is not disabled.
Tie-down points are provided on both
a. The shipping container described in para- sides of the lower portion of the
graph 6-2.1 and shown in figure 6-1 is container, fore and aft. Failure to comply
equipped with a vibration-attenuation sup- with this requirement may result in
port system. It protects the engine from damage to the engine bearings.
damage when subjected to repetitive or
nonrepetitive loads at the container mount 6-2.6 On-Site Transportation
interface locations during transportation CAUTION If the engine is removed from
and handling. the container or enclosure and transported
using the LM6000 PD maintenance dolly,
CAUTION Maximum allowable sustained
speed during that movement should be lim-
vibration or repetitive shock load on a nonop-
erating engine is 0.5 G at any frequency, in ited to a maximum of 2 mph. Failure to com-
ply with this requirement may result in
any direction.
damage to the engine bearings.
b. The container will limit the loads imparted Figure 6-2 illustrates the LM6000 PD mainte-
to the engine to a maximum of 2.0 G verti- nance dolly. Use of the maintenance dolly is
cal, 1.0 G fore and aft, and 1.0 G lateral covered in WP 3012 00. A ground handling
providing that input loads to the container dolly is available for transportation on-site.
do not exceed 3.5 G vertically upward, 2.5 Contact GE M&IED for details of use.
G vertically downward, 2.0 G fore and aft, 6-2
and 1.5 G laterally. 6-3 Storage
6-1 The engine is prepared for long-term storage
6-2.4 Enclosure Shipping
when shipped from the factory or from a
In the event that the engine is to be shipped repair facility. Long-term storage includes the
already mounted in the enclosure (package), following elements:
the design of that enclosure shall meet the
requirements listed above for the shipping • Lubrication system is flushed with rust
container. preventative
• Inlet is covered
6-2.5 Highway Shipping
• Air collector is covered
CAUTION
• Exhaust is covered
• Shipment by rail transportation is not
• Lines are connected or capped
acceptable.
• Container is hermetically sealed and pro-
vided with desiccant for humidity control
6-2 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 6-1 Engine Shipping Container
Change 3 6-3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 6-2 Maintenance Dolly
6-4 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Should temperature, pressure, and/or humidity 6-4.2 Size/Weight

conditions be such that the desiccant seen
The following information is provided for
through the container inspection port is blue,
installation, removal, and on-site movement
then the container must be serviced in accor-
planning.
dance with WP 3014 00.
• Engine Length: 193.5 inches (491.5 cm),
When an LM6000 gas turbine is to be stored Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) forward
for an extended period of time, precautions flange to aft drive adapter
must be taken to preserve the gas turbine in
order to minimize exposure to atmospheric • Engine Width: 84.7 inches (215.1 cm), air
corrosion. Details of preservation depend on collector upper flange
the duration of nonoperation and whether the • Engine Height: 80.7 inches (205 cm), LPT
gas turbine is being stored in an engine enclo- piping to Accessory Gearbox (AGB) low
sure or in a shipping container. Table 6-1 pro- point
vides a summary of these details. Refer to
WP 3011 00 for details of precautions and The estimated weight and center of gravity of
preservation procedures. the engine offered are 17,827 pounds
(8,086 kg) and axial station 233 inches
6-4 Installation/Removal (5.92 m), respectively, without the fuel sys-
tem. The fuel system weight is 920 pounds
This section provides general descriptions of (417 kg). See table 6-2 for weights and centers
procedures and elements requiring consider- of gravity of the major components. Centers of
ation during installation and removal of the gravity are axial station numbers; for refer-
engine. ence, the VIGV forward flange station is
140.44 inches (3.567 m). All dimensions are
6-4.1 Installation/Removal Methods measured in the aft direction from the VIGV
forward flange.
Installation of the engine into, or removal
from, the enclosure will normally be accom- 6-4.3 Engine Mount Attachments
plished by one of two methods listed below.
Installation and removal procedures are cov- Mounting attachments are provided in five
ered in WP 3010 00. places on the engine. The forward two mount
points are located aft of the Low Pressure
• Overhead installation/removal through an Compressor (LPC) bypass air collector at the
opening in the top of the enclosure 3:00 and 9:00 o'clock positions.
requires the use of an on-site or mobile
crane and an adjustable beam. a. The forward mount connections are
accomplished by uniballs and pillow
• Side installation/removal requires the blocks supported by stanchions or a simi-
engine to be lifted using an adjustable lar design, as shown in figure 6-3. These
beam and the ground handling points, so it mounts are designed to provide support in
can be moved laterally into/from the all directions and are sized to accommo-
enclosure. date axial thrust, operating torque, and
vibratory loads. The two engine-mounted
trunnions are not to be removed from the
engine; all hardware is packager-supplied.
Change 3 6-5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 6-1 Engine Preservation Summary (Refer to WP 3011 00)
Timing: Less Than 60 Days Greater Than 60 Days

Inspection Requirement Inspection Requirement
Installed engine Inspect inlet Inspect inlet
Inspect exhaust Inspect exhaust
Inspect VBV duct (if accessible) Inspect VBV duct (if accessible)
Add preservation oil (BRAYCO 483,
or equivalent, required)
Water-wash Water-wash
or or
Oil wet bearings Oil wet bearings
Cover inlet (optional) Cover inlet (optional)
Cover exhaust (optional) Cover exhaust (optional)
Cover VBV (optional) Cover VBV (optional)
Motor every 60 days
or
Oil wet bearings every 60 days
(BRAYCO 483, or equivalent
optional)
Engine in container Oil wet bearings Add preservation oil (BRAYCO 483,
Install desiccant or equivalent, required)
Inspect desiccant every 30 days Oil wet bearings
If blue: Install desiccant
No action required Inspect desiccant every 30 days
If pink: If blue:
Oil wet bearings within 14 days No action required
Install new desiccant If pink:
Oil wet bearings within 14 days
Install new desiccant
Oil wet bearings every 60 days
6-6 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table 6-2 LM6000 PD and Major Component Weight and Center of Gravity
Center of Gravity
Weight Engine Station
Item Component lb (kg) in. (m)
- Engine, Complete without Fuel System 17,827 (8,086) 233 (5.9)
- Engine, Complete with Fuel System 18,747 (8,504) 233 (5.9)
1. VIGV Module (see Note) 580 (263) 145 (3.7)
2. LPC Module (see Note) 2,700 (1,225) 159 (4.0)
3. Front Frame Assembly 2,150 (975) 190 (4.8)
4. Air Collector 1,000 (454) 190 (4.8)
5. Accessory Gearbox 580 (263) 190 (4.8)
6. Midshaft Assembly 280 (127) 232 (5.9)
7. Core Module (does not include item 8) 3,517 (1,595) 240 (6.1)
8. HPT Module 800 (363) 267 (6.8)
9. LPT Module (less items 10 and 11) 5,970 (2,708) 297 (7.5)
10. Miscellaneous External Attachments 250 (113) 153 (3.9)
11. Fuel System (Manifold, Hoses, and Valves) 920 (417) 240 (6.1)
b. The turbine rear frame is equipped with 6-4.5 Flange Interfaces

three mount attachments, as shown in
figure 6-3. These mounts are designed to a. The VIGV case forward outer flange
mates with the outer flowpath structure of
provide for vertical and lateral support of
the packager's inlet system.
the engine.
6-3 b. The VIGV forward inner flange mates
6-4.4 Engine Power Output Shafts
with either the packager-supplied radial air
The engine is equipped with flanged drive inlet system or the centerbody (bullet
adapters at both the forward and aft ends to nose) supplied with the engine for axial air
accommodate forward or aft drive arrange- inlet system. Refer to the appropriate sec-
ments. The packager-supplied coupling shaft, tion of the packager's manual for details.
which mates with the engine drive adapter,
incorporates a close-tolerance rabbet-fit and c. For installations with an axial inlet, a
must be dynamically balanced and aligned in packager-supplied air inlet bellmouth is
accordance with packager-supplied instruc- independently supported at the forward
tions. This must be done during initial installa- enclosure bulkhead. The flowpath between
tion and subsequent to any removal or the bellmouth and the engine is formed by
replacement of the engine. a liner following the contour of the bell-
mouth. Any gap outboard of this liner
must be sealed to prevent inflow of ambi-
ent air.
Change 3 6-7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 6-3 Engine Mount Diagram
6-8 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
d. The aft or exhaust interface flanges are on f. After 1000 hours of operation in which no
the turbine rear frame. The outer and inner debris is found in the inlet plenum or cap-
flanges mate with the packager's exhaust tured by the screen, the operator/user may
outer and inner flowpath diffuser. These find it advantageous to replace the 800-
joints normally incorporate a piston ring micron screen with a coarser 1200-micron
assembly to accommodate thermal growth mesh to reduce the rate of screen fouling.
of the engine. A 55-60 porosity rating is recommended.
6-5 Auxiliary Systems 6-4
6-5
6-6
6-5.1.1 Air Filtration
Provision is made in the packager's design to
accommodate the following conditions and a. The air entering the inlet of the engine
auxiliary requirements. must meet the following conditions:
6-5.1 Inlet System • 95 percent of the time: must not con-

tain solid particles exceeding
There are two basic inlet system designs for
0.004 grains/1,000 ft3 (0.0097 grams/
the engine. A radial inlet is required for a front
1,000 m3)
drive application and may be used with a rear
drive configuration. An axial inlet with a bell- • 5 percent of the time: must not contain
mouth and centerbody can only be used with a solid particles exceeding 0.04 grains/
rear drive configuration. These two arrange- 1,000 ft3 (0.097 grams/1,000 m3)
ments are shown schematically in figure 6-4,
6-5, and 6-6. b. For operation in marine environments,
sodium entering the engine should not
CAUTION Ensure the clearance between exceed 0.00045 ppm average or 0.003 ppm
the inlet baffles and the VIGV forward flange maximum. These limits apply to both air
is correct or engine damage could result. entering the engine and to the cooling air
Refer to the packager's manual for the supply. Depending on fuel characteristics,
proper clearance dimension. inlet air contamination may require restric-
tion below the levels stated above. The
e. The air inlet system provides for the fol-
combination of entrained alkali metals
lowing:
entering the engine through inlet air and
• Clean airflow with minimum pressure fuel contamination must not exceed
loss in order to minimize any effect on 0.2 ppm. See Appendix A.
engine performance.
c. The maximum allowable liquid water con-
• An inlet screen forward of the VIGV tent in the inlet air is 0.5 percent of the
and LPC to protect compressor flow- inlet airflow weight (approximately
path components from ingesting for- 350 lb/s [159 kg/s]) at air inlet tempera-
eign objects. tures of 42°F (5.6°C) and above. At tem-
peratures below 42°F (5.6°C), no liquid
• Mounting of a nylon mesh screen (on water content is allowed due to the poten-
the inlet described above) with open- tial for icing.
ings that do not exceed 800 microns
and a porosity rating of 55-60 percent
open area.
Change 3 6-9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 6-4 Radial Inlet Duct Interface
6-10 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 6-5 Radial Inlet Duct
• Because of possible ice formation, Inlet cleanliness must be maintained at all

evaporation coolers or inlet chillers are times. In particular, emphasis must be placed
not to be operated when the tempera- on ensuring that no foreign material is present
ture measured at the gas turbine low between the perforated sheet and acoustic
pressure compressor inlet or in the batts. All weld slag and weld splatter should
inlet plenum is 45°F (7.2°C) or less. be removed from the flowpath with a chipping
hammer and grinder. Weld splatter is the most
CAUTION Care should be taken so that no persistent cause of foreign damage. Stringent
gas turbine component such as air/oil sepa- inspections should be arranged prior to first
rators, gas blowoff valves, gas turbine gas turbine startup or after each entry/mainte-
exhausts, or plant equipment have the poten- nance of the inlet. All loose material must be
tial to discharge into the inlet. These events, removed from the duct and the low-point
whether continuous or sporadic, due to pre- drains flushed clean.
vailing winds, can cause inlet distortion
resulting in compressor stall, fouling of the
compressor equipment, or other damage to
the gas turbine.
Change 3 6-11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 6-6 Axial Inlet Duct Interface
6-5.1.2 Anti-Icing An alternate method, which eliminates the

need for a humidity sensor, is to heat the inlet
Under certain conditions, as a function of tem- air 10°F (5.6°C) above ambient temperature
perature and humidity, ice can form at the when ambient temperatures are less than 30°F
engine inlet, be ingested into the flow path, (-1.1°C) and to heat the inlet air to 40°F
and cause foreign object damage (FOD). The (4.4°C) when ambient temperatures are
engine is not equipped with an integral anti- between 30°F and 40°F (-1.1°C and 4.4°C).
icing protection system. GE does recommend, No heating is required for ambient tempera-
however, that such a system be installed and tures above 40°F (4.4°C).
operational for any installation operating in a
6-7
climate where the temperature can fall below 6-5.2 Exhaust System
40°F (4.4°C).
To recover the greatest amount of exhaust total
The anti-icing system, whether installed by the pressure, a rear diffuser is used to decelerate
operator/user or the packager, must ensure that the flow. Figure 6-8 shows a radial diffuser
the humidity and temperature measured at the arrangement. An axial design diffuser is
engine inlet are within the limits shown in shown in figure 6-9. The inner and outer dif-
figure 6-7. fuser walls connect to the turbine rear frame
through piston ring seals. Figure 6-10 shows
the diffuser/piston ring interface.
6-12 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 6-7 Temperature/Humidity Limits

6-8
6-9
6-10 6-6 Support Services
6-5.3 Secondary Cooling Air
The following packager/operator-supplied
During operation, heat is released by the
support services are required for operation of
engine through radiation and convection from
the engine as part of the overall system.
hot surfaces, by hot air leakage, and by vent
air. In order to maintain enclosure and engine • Unloading and installation of all equip-
component temperatures at acceptable limits, ment
secondary cooling air must be provided.
• Fuel supply to the engine in accordance
Secondary cooling air must be filtered so that with the applicable GE specification
solid material in the air does not exceed
0.2 grains per 1,000 ft3 (0.013 grams per • Verification of site conditions, including
28.32 m3) of air and the size and density dis- inlet air quality and fuel quality
tribution should be such that no more than
5 percent (by weight) of the solid particles are • Lubrication system external to the engine
10 micrometers or greater in size. Air contain-
ing salts, or other corrosive elements, have a • Fuel metering and control systems; engine
harmful effect on the engine and must be fil- speed-governing and protection systems
tered or washed from secondary cooling air
circuits.
Change 3 6-13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 6-8 Radial Exhaust Diffuser
• Engine base, mounting structure, sound • Air, natural gas, or hydraulic supply to the
enclosure, inlet system, exhaust system, starter and discharge ducting or piping
and front or rear flexible drive coupling from the starter
• Fire detection and protection system • Personnel safety protection features
• Water supply and control system for • Condition-monitoring systems

water-washing of the engine
6-7 Maintenance
• Engine cooling and post-shutdown frame
cooling The engine is designed and mounted in the
enclosure with consideration of site
• Anti-icing system (as applicable) maintenance requirements. Maintenance
activity on the engine falls into the three
• Vent and drain systems following categories:
• Electric power supply Level 1: Any maintenance activity associated
with the exterior of the engine, up to, and
• Control and instrument panel, including all including, removal and reinstallation of the
interconnecting wiring and piping complete engine assembly.
6-14 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 6-9 Axial Exhaust Diffuser
Level 2: Any maintenance activity associated Depot: Any activity that requires detailed
with the interior or flowpath of the engine. teardown and/or test verification that can only
This includes removal and replacement of be accomplished in a designated repair
complete module assemblies, such as, the facility.
VIGV, LPC, AGB, High Pressure Turbine
(HPT), and other components. All level 1 and 2 maintenance activities are
detailed in individual work packages con-
tained in Volume II of this manual.
Change 3 6-15
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 6-10 Diffuser/Piston Ring Interface
6-16 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
3 CHAPTER 7
Installation and Startup

7-1 Purpose and Scope For specific details on installation, refer to
WP 3010 00 and WP 3014 00 and to the pack-
This chapter covers the installation procedure ager’s manual.
references, pre-startup inspections, and verifi-
cation tests for the engine following initial 7-4 Pre-Startup Inspections
installation and/or subsequent removal, and
replacement or maintenance of the engine, The engine and package should undergo a
major components, or supporting systems. thorough pre-startup inspection, during instal-
lation or after maintenance, to ensure a trou-
7-2 General ble-free transition from installation to full
operation. This inspection will help to detect
The following procedures are intended to pro- potential installation problems. Record the
vide operating personnel with the information results of the prestartup inspecton checklists
required to operate the engine safely and reli- provided in Figure 7-1 through Figure 7-4 to
ably. Some of the information contained in ensure a complete prestart inspection was per-
this chapter is also provided, in whole or part, formed. The following inspections should be
in other chapters. Redundancy is used to pro- performed during installation of the engine in
vide as much specific detail as required. Some the enclosure:
material is generic in nature and may not
apply to a specific engine model or installa- a. Perform an external inspection per
tion. It is also likely that the information may WP 4012 00. Ensure that all air tube, hose,
not provide for every variation in installation and electrical harness and cable connec-
equipment, or contingency to be found in con- tions are tight and that no binding or chaf-
junction with engine operation. Customer’s ing is evident. Shake all air tubes and hard
should comply with that which is applicable to leads to ensure that they are secure and
their model or configuration. Additional infor- clamps are tight. Ensure that gas turbine
mation can be provided by the packager or by components do not contact package com-
GE. ponents (at noninterface locations). Failure
to do so will result in accelerated compo-
The material provided in Chapter 8 on Safety nent wear.
Equipment and Engine Protection should be
previewed prior to proceeding. b. Ensure all electrical harnesses, cables, and
leads are properly routed and connected.
7-3 Installation Verify interfaces are correct.
If not already installed in the package, the

engine should be installed according to the
packager’s requirements and specifications. 7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
Change 3 7-1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 7-1 Site Information Checklist (Sheet 1 of 5)
7-2 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 3 7-3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
7-4 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 3 7-5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
7-6 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 7-2 Prestart-up and Operability Review Checklist (Sheet 1 of 13)
Change 3 7-7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
7-8 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 3 7-9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
7-10 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 3 7-11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
7-12 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 3 7-13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
7-14 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 3 7-15
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
7-16 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 3 7-17
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
7-18 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 3 7-19
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 7-3 Distillate Fuel Systems (Including D/F Systems) Checklist (Sheet 1 of 7)
7-20 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 3 7-21
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
7-22 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 3 7-23
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
7-24 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 3 7-25
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
7-26 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 7-4 Gaseous Fuel Systems Checklist (Sheet 1 of 3)
Change 3 7-27
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
7-28 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 3 7-29
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
c. Inspect the engine inlet area per sump component failure, or on-site repair
WP 4010 00. Thoroughly clean inlet ple- of the gas turbine lube supply system (ref-
num of dirt and foreign objects. Vacuum erence Chapter 8, Lube Oil).
and/or wash the area as necessary. In addi-
tion, GE strongly recommends that all h. Inspect lube and scavenge pump screens,
inlet areas upstream of the engine interface and remove and clean or replace all system
be thoroughly inspected and cleaned. No filters to avoid engine contamination. GE
fasteners, loose or trapped material, or also recommends that an oil sample be
weld slag/spatter is allowed. Weld splatter taken per WP 4016 00 to verify oil quality,
that is attached to or trapped behind the and that it is free of contamination.
inlet plenum perforated plate must be
completely removed. Remove weld splat- i. Ensure that the air/oil separator system
ter by mechanical means, as required. Fail- and all vents and drains are free and clear.
ure to remove all loose or weakly Remove any restrictions, and clean as
constrained material will likely result in required.
gas turbine damage from material ingested
j. Ensure that the gas turbine fuel meets GE
through the gas turbine inlet.
specification requirements. Based on
d. Inspect bleed air ducting to ensure the sys- experience, GE strongly urges customers
tem is free of blockage and the exhaust to regularly check fuel samples, particu-
area is clear as specified in Chapter 8, larly given the damaging effects of non-
Equipment Protection. Inspect bleed air compliant fuel on gas turbine components.
ducting including potential traps for GE also recommends that particular atten-
debris. No weld slag/splatter or loose tion be given to the Fuel Forwarding Rec-
material is allowed. Clean using mechani- ommendations provided in the Liquid Fuel
cal means as required. Specification and Chapter 5 to assure that
fuel remains continuously free of contami-
e. Perform an exhaust system inspection per nation.
WP 4013 00. Ensure that exhaust compo-
nents are aligned with the turbine rear k. Verify packager fuel and hydraulic system
frame, that there are no obstructions, and for correct installation. Reference the
that the flowpath is smooth. appropriate packager’s manual.
f. Ensure that lube, fuel, and purge systems l. Verify bleed valve operation. Calibrate
are properly routed and connected. Assure eighth and compressor discharge pressure
that gas manifolds are aligned properly per (CDP) bleed valves per appropriate pack-
WP 3015 00. ager’s manual. Visually confirm that valve
opens (100 percent stroke). A slot on the
g. Ensure that the lube system is properly end of the valve shaft should be parallel to
serviced. Engine oil should be MIL-L- the air flow when open. Visually confirm
23699 per the requirements of Chapter 5. that the valve closes (zero percent stroke).
GE recommends that the lube system be The shaft slot should be perpendicular to
flushed prior to gas turbine installation for air flow when closed.
a new plant, prior to installation of engine
or module replacement due to lube or m. Calibrate the acoustic sensor signal condi-
tioning system per WP 1611 00.
7-30 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
n. Verify natural gas properties input to con- r. Verify emissions equipment per appropri-
trol. Obtain recent gas properties from the ate packager’s manual. Measurement of
fuel supplier and compare to the site gas NOx, CO, and O2 is required for combus-
properties device output. The device must tor mapping. NOx provides a check on
be calibrated. Specific gravity (SG), lower average flame temperature. If NO and
heating valve (LHV), and ratio of specific NO2 are measured, then the ratio of NO to
heats (K) are required. Some fuel systems NO2 should be a range of 80:20. Trouble-
require mole percent of N2; mole percent shoot the emissions equipment if ratios of
CO2 . Unstable gas properties can present 60:40 or lower are obtained. CO is used to
difficulties for controlling the gas turbine. determine combustor blowout. Unburned
Contact GE M&I if gas supply properties hydrocarbons can also be used. A value of
are unstable. 20 lb/min or greater indicates the blowout
point. O2 is required to correct NOx and
o. Verify high pressure compressor (HPC) CO to 15 percent O2.
discharge temperature (T3) and low pres-
sure turbine (LPT) inlet temperature (T48) 7-5 Operational Checkout
thermocouples. Confirm proper thermo-
couple wiring. All gas turbine thermocou- CAUTION If a questionable condition
ples are type K and can be verified by wire exists, do not attempt to motor or operate the
color. Input the proper type K voltage at engine until a thorough investigation of the
the gas turbine electrical panel for T3 and condition has been made. Do not repeat hot
T48 and readout on the engine control to starts, compressor stalls, load–shedding, or
confirm proper system setup. other problems that initiate emergency shut-
downs or aborted operation without thorough
p. Verify pressure measurement systems. investigation. Failure to do so can result in
Calibrate the gas turbine pressure sensors undue stress on engine components that may
and check gas turbine to transducers to result in damage or subsequent destructive
verify no leaks. Verify proper control wir- failure of the engine.
ing by reading out control output during
calibration. Hook up the sense lines to The initial startup procedures described in this
their proper interfaces per the packager’s section should be followed after any LM6000
appropriate manual. Confirm HPC dis- PD gas turbine installation or internal mainte-
charge static pressure (PS3) and LPT inlet nance.
pressure (P48) are not switched. Assure
that inlet pressure (P0) is accurately cali- a. Inspect the enclosure per the packager’s
brated using an absolute pressure refer- instructions.
ence.
b. Perform normal prestart checks
q. Verify variable-geometry. Calibrate vari- (Chapter 8, Starting and Operation).
able inlet guide vanes (VIGVs), variable
bypass vanes (VBVs), and variable stator c. Perform an ignition system functional
vanes (VSVs). Visually verify that vari- check per WP 4023 00. Verify that proper
able-geometry slews to the proper position igniter is selected by the control. Verify
during calibration. that adjacent staging valve opens on igni-
tion.
Change 3 7-31
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
d. Dry motor the engine for 2 minutes per the NOTE Combustor mapping is required prior
packager’s instructions and per dry motor- to increasing load beyond idle. Combustor
ing in Chapters 8 and 12 of this manual. mapping is the process of measuring opera-
During motoring, check for the following: tional boundaries such as acoustic zones,
blowout regions, and emission requirements,
• Oil supply and scavenge pressure indi- and translating the data into control sched-
cation ules. Each burner mode must be mapped from
idle to base load. Mapping is required at ini-
• Lube oil leaks tial engine installation, following installation
of a new engine, or after combustor or pre-
• Unusual noise during coastdown mixer hardware changes. Contact GE M&I for
mapping assistance.
WARNING When working inside or near
the engine enclosure during operation, a. Make a start (Chapter 8, Starting and
observe the safety precautions described in Operation), if required.
Chapter 8.
b. Slowly advance to full power. If the accel
e. Make a start (Chapter 8, Starting and
follows a cold start, it should be at a rate
Operation) and set power at idle. When the
not to exceed zero to maximum load in
engine is stabilized at idle, do the
less than 5 minutes (approximately 8 mW/
following:
minute, or less). A ramped (constant rate)
• Check engine and supply systems for load increase should be maintained during
leaks. the accel.
• Check for loose parts, tubing, cabling, c. Stabilize at full power for at least 3 min-
etc. utes, then observe and record the data
specified in Chapter 8, Engine Perfor-
• Observe and record all results. mance.
f. If any discrepancies are noted, make a nor- d. Reduce power to idle, if required.
mal or emergency shutdown, as required,
e. Perform a normal shutdown, if required
(Chapter 8, Shutdown). Otherwise, pro-
(Chapter 8, Shutdown).
ceed to the verification test paragraph 7-6,
if required. f. Inspect for leakage and loose parts and
take any corrective action required.
g. Correct any discrepancies noted during the
initial startup. g. Check lube and scavenge pump screens for
evidence of contamination per
7-6 Verification Test WP 4020 00.
If no verification test is specified by the pack- h. Check inlet/fine mesh screen for any
ager, the verification test, described below, debris per WP 4020 00. If any debris is
should be performed after the initial startup found, its source must be identified and
procedure has been completed. eliminated.
7-32 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
4 CHAPTER 8
Engine Operation
8-1 Purpose and Scope • The outside surfaces of the engine are not
insulated. Adequate precautions should be
This chapter covers general operating taken to prevent personnel from inadvert-
procedures for the LM6000 PD. The ently coming in contact with hot surfaces.
procedures discussed are typical of any
LM6000 PD-powered package but should not • The engine is a source of considerable
be considered totally comprehensive for any noise. It will be necessary for personnel
specific installation. Configuration and system working on it, or in its vicinity, to wear
procedures may vary from package to package proper ear protection equipment when the
and with the packager-supplied control engine is operating.
system. Prior to operation of the engine, the
site operators should be thoroughly schooled • The LM6000 PD is a high-speed machine.
in both normal and abnormal (emergency) In the remote case of parts failure, the cas-
operation and the control system action/ ing may not contain major compressor or
reaction to these conditions. turbine disk failures. Personnel should not
be permanently stationed in, or near, the
8-2 General plane of the rotating parts.
The following procedures are intended to pro- • Rotating parts of the starter operate at a
vide operating personnel with the information very high speed. In the remote case of a
required to operate the engine safely and reli- parts failure, personnel should not be sta-
ably. Some of the information contained in tioned near the starter during start, motor-
this chapter is also provided, in whole or part, ing, or purge cycles.
in other chapters. Redundancy is used to pro-
• The low pressure (LP), high-velocity air-
vide as much specific detail as required. It is
flow created by the compressor in the
also possible that the information may not pro-
LM6000 PD can draw objects and person-
vide for every variation in installation, equip-
nel into the engine. The use of an inlet
ment, or contingency to be found in
screen or other protective measure is man-
conjunction with engine operation. Additional
datory.
information can be provided by the packager
or by GE. • In the event that the fire extinguishing sys-
tem is activated, care must be taken to
8-3 Safety ensure that all personnel are clear of the
enclosure prior to activation. Due to lack
General safety precautions are defined in
of oxygen, failure to comply may result in
Chapter 1. The following safety consider-
injury or death to personnel remaining
ations should be observed by operators and
inside the enclosure.
support personnel working on the engine:
Change 4 8-1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
• Suitable fire protection equipment should • The enclosure door should be kept open.
be provided for the installation. Carbon If the gas turbine is operating, an
dioxide, halides, fog, water, or chemical observer should be stationed at the
fire extinguishing systems may be used. enclosure door and confined space entry
Discharge of fine chemical or water mists procedures shall be followed.
directly on engine casings is permissible.
The use of chemical fire extinguishing • Allow gas turbine to cool down. Avoid
media will require the disassembly of the contact with hot parts, and wear ther-
engine for cleaning. mally insulated gloves as necessary.
• Ear protection shall be worn if gas tur-
• Suitable explosive mixture sensing devices bine is operating.
should be provided to sense any leakage of
fuel (both into the enclosure and into the • Do not remain in the enclosure or in the
fuel manifold) and to shut down the engine plane of rotation of the starter when
if leakage is present. starting or motoring the gas turbine.
• Personnel entry into the engine enclosure • When performing maintenance on elec-
during operation at engine speeds above trical components, avoid shocks and
core idle should be prohibited. This prohi- burns by turning off electrical power to
bition should include operation at synchro- those components, except when power is
nous idle. Signs or placards should be required to take voltage measurements.
posted at the enclosure access doors and
• Lock out all controls and switches, if
should clearly state the hazardous condi-
possible; otherwise, tag electrical
tions that exist in the enclosure during
switches out of service to prevent
operating above core idle.
inadvertent activation. Tag the engine
8-3.1 Gas Turbine Maintenance/ operating controls do not operate to
Inspection Precautions prevent starting during a desired
shutdown condition.
WARNING When entering the gas turbine • The Component Life/Repair Intervals
enclosure, the following requirements shall section of this chapter provides mainte-
be met:
nance guidelines for certain compo-
nents, based on total equivalent base
• The gas turbine shall be shut down or
load and peak load hours. For contin-
limited to idle power.
ued safe operation, it is essential that
• The fire extinguishing system shall be these guidelines be followed.
made inactive according to the cus- • Do not use engine piping, cables, instru-
tomer's procedures. mentation leads, or other external hard-
ware as hand or footholds when
• Secondary air to the enclosure shall be
performing maintenance activity on the
shut off, since high secondary airflow
engine. These hardware items are not
may prevent opening or closing the
designed to support loads other than
enclosure door.
those associated with engine operation.
8-2 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
8-4 Equipment Protection until the ductwork has been blown down
or otherwise cleaned of all debris.
The engine is provided with covers that
protect various operational interfaces during 8-4.3 Exhaust Cover
shipping, handling, installation, and main-
tenance activity. These covers are used to The engine is shipped with an exhaust cover
protect the engine from potential foreign which should be left in place until the engine
object damage (FOD) caused by handling and is mated with the exhaust duct.
objects such as dirt, weld beads, tools, and
Similar to the inlet and bleed air collector cov-
rags. Should an object be dropped during
maintenance it should be found at once to ers, this cover should also be retained by the
operator and installed any time the engine is
preclude having objects inadvertently dropped
disconnected from the enclosure/ site exhaust
into the gas turbine.
duct.
8-4.1 Inlet Cover
8-4.4 Electrical, Fluid, and System
The engine is shipped with an inlet cover that Interface Covers
should only be removed when the variable
The engine is shipped with protective covers
inlet guide vane (VIGV) forward flange is to
over all electrical, fluid, and system interfaces.
be mated with the radial inlet or bellmouth.
These covers are in place to prevent handling
This cover should be retained by the operator
damage (threads, pins, etc.) and fluid or sys-
and installed for engine protection any time
tem piping contamination.
the VIGV flange to inlet or bellmouth connec-
tion is broken. A supply of these covers should be maintained
by the operator for use during maintenance
8-4.2 Bleed Air Collector Cover
activities that require electrical leads, fluid
The bleed air collector discharge is covered piping, or system piping to be disconnected.
during shipment. This cover should not be
removed until a clean, uncontaminated envi- 8-5 Engine Protection
ronment downstream of this flange can be
The LM6000 PD is a reliable, durable engine
assured.
designed to operate in an industrial atmo-
Similar to the inlet cover, this cover should sphere for extended periods of time. However,
also be retained by the operator and installed the operator needs to follow certain basic pro-
under the following conditions: cedures in order to enhance the engine's opera-
tional capability.
• When maintenance activity dictates that
this connection be broken. In other portions of this manual, specifically
Chapters 5, 6, and 7, information is included
• When maintenance activity is performed on safety, equipment, protection, records,
in the bleed air ducting. In this case, the inlet/enclosure inspections, pre-start checks,
cover should be installed and left in place and operations. These topics are all directed at
ensuring that the operating, maintenance, and
Change 4 8-3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
support personnel have a source of technical c. Mixing of MIL-L-23699 oils from

information associated with the engine and its different supply sources should be done by
operation as installed in an enclosure. It pro- topping off the lube tank rather than
vides the operator with specific requirements complete replacement. Reference the lube
concerning the air, oil, and fuel used during oil supplier for additional
normal operation. The guidelines are designed recommendations. Refer to Chapter 5 for
to ensure that the engine is operating in the additional information.
environment, and under conditions, for which
it was designed. CAUTION Failure to properly maintain a
clean lube system will likely result in failure
8-5.1 Lubricating Oil of the gas turbine or components.
Lubricating oil is used to lubricate bearings, d. Flushing of the off-engine lube oil system
sumps, and gearboxes. Additionally, lube oil should be performed prior to connecting
actuates the variable geometry control system, the off-engine lubrication system to the
bleed valves, and thrust balance valve. Lubri- LM6000 or any time that particulate con-
cating oil flows at a rate of 10 to 18 gal/min tamination is suspected (including lube
(0.63 to 1.14 l/sec). The oil must be tempera- system maintenance). The flush system
ture-controlled and kept clean per the follow- uses an off-engine flush pump and filter to
ing requirements in order to adequately clean particulate contaminates from the oil
perform its function. system prior to connecting it to an engine.
The flush system should consist of a pump
NOTE Typical lube oil pressure is affected by which can produce approximately 30 gpm
lube oil supply temperature. (113.5 lpm) flow. Flow should be filtered
using a 3 micron cleanup filter.
At the full power settings, typical maximum
oil supply pressures are shown, in figure 8-1 (1) Inspect the inside of supply oil tank
for an oil supply temperature as low as 100°F for contamination. Wipe all tank sur-
(37.7°C). Oil supply pressures outside the faces clean and then install tank cover.
bounds of figure 8-1 may indicate a problem.
Refer to Chapter 10, Troubleshooting, for cor- (2) Connect a flush cart (see note on
rective action. figure 8-1) to the lube system supply
and return interface connections (see
8-1 figure 8-1 for typical system). Each
a. Minimum temperature at start is 20°F
supply and return may be flushed
(-6.7°C) for type II (MIL-L-23699) oil.
separately or a manifold arrangement
b. Minimum allowable temperature for oper- can be used to flush all circuits
ation at synchronous idle or above is 90°F simultaneously (include stator and
(32.2°C). hydraulic pump circuits if applicable).
(3) Start flush pump and monitor system
cleanliness. Oil should be sampled
periodically.
8-4 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 8-1 Typical LM6000 PD Gas Turbine Lube Oil Supply Pressure
Change 4 8-5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
(4) Actual required flush time will vary (0.000204 kg/min) average, or 0.003 lb/
depending on the initial system con- sec (0.0014 kg/min), maximum.
tamination level and the actual system
volume. It is expected that a minimum • The maximum allowable liquid water con-
of 8 hours of continuous flushing will tent in the inlet air is 0.5 percent of the
be required to clean-up a typical facil- inlet airflow weight at inlet air tempera-
ity oil system. tures of 42°F (5.6°C) and above. Below
42°F (5.6°C), no liquid water content is
(5) When oil sample meets cleanliness allowed.
standards outlined in WP 4016 00, the
engine may be installed. 8-5.3 Gas Fuel
NOTE Following this flushing, the system fil- Gas fuel should be what is known in industry
ters should be removed and cleaned or as dry gas. That is, the gasoline vapor in
replaced to avoid engine contamination. 1,000 ft3 of gas at standard conditions (60°F
and 30 in. Hg abs) should not exceed 0.1 gal-
e. In the event of a failure during site opera- lon of liquid.
tion that involves the engine lube system,
the system should be disconnected, Liquid hydrocarbons in gas fuel can cause
drained, and cleaned as described in surges in operation or engine damage. There-
step d. This procedure should be followed fore, gas fuel mixtures must be maintained at
whether the engine is removed and temperatures well above their dewpoint at the
replaced or repaired on-site. engine fuel manifold inlet.
f. Engine oil is filtered to 3 micrometers, 8-6 Records and Running Log

absolute.
A log should be kept of all engine operation
8-5.2 Air and/or running time. It is recommended that,
as a suggested minimum, site operators should
Maximum airflow through the LM6000 PD record the following:
engine is approximately 350 lb/sec (159 kg/
sec) and is filtered by the inlet system to meet • Time of all starts and shutdowns
the following requirements:
• Total time for engine and site
• 95 percent of the time: must not contain
solid particles exceeding 0.004 grains/ • Reading of all engine instrument record-
1,000 ft3 (0.0097 grams/1,000 m3) ings, taken twice daily at the set-load point
• 5 percent of the time: must not contain • All changes of engine speed and load
solid particles exceeding 0.04 grains/
1,000 ft3 (0.097 grams/1,000 m3) • Brief statement of action taken in response
to alarms or emergencies
• When operating in a marine environment,
sodium (from air or water) entering the • Any system modifications, adjustments, or
engine should not exceed 0.00045 lb/sec parts removal/replacement
8-6 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
• Preventive or corrective maintenance • Fuel valve at start position

activity
• High pressure compressor (HPC) rotor
• Lease pool, running time, change dates speed (XN25) and low pressure turbine
(LPT) rotor speed (XNSD) governor refer-
8-7 Inlet/Enclosure Inspection ences at lowest point
Ensure that the inlet and enclosure have been • VIGVs, variable bypass vanes (VBVs),
inspected and cleaned in accordance with and variable stator vanes (VSVs) on
instructions in the packager's manual. Refer to schedule
Chapter 7 of this volume and Volume II, work
packages 4010 00, 4012 00, and 4013 00. • 8th stage and compressor discharge pres-
sure (CDP) bleed valves on schedule
8-8 Prestart Checks
• Thrust balance valve on schedule
Consult the packager's manual for mandatory
prestart procedures specifying that the pack- • Fuel drain valve closed (if applicable)
ager-furnished lube supply subsystem is acti-
vated and operational. • Flameout detection circuit OK
Prior to any motoring or start sequence, GE • Flame detection cooling air on

suggests the following checks as a minimum:
• Gas lower heating value within range
• All maintenance requirements or discrep-
• Gas vent valves set for gas startup
ancies cleared and signed off
• Staging valves in proper position
• Fuel shutoff valves closed
Although not required as part of normal start-
• Fuel boost pump on
ing procedures, dry motoring is frequently
used following maintenance to check the
• Lube tank level full
engine prior to making a start. Dry motoring is
• Lube supply valves open performed with the fuel shutoff valves closed.
• Water-wash solenoid (if applicable) deen- 8-9 Motoring Procedures

ergized
8-9.1 Dry Motoring
• All switches and interlocks set for proper
sequence to allow motoring Any dry motoring check should be made with
the ignition system deenergized.
Change 4 8-7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
CAUTION Be certain that checklists have • The starter will rollback the core speed
been established for packager-furnished to approximately 1,700 rpm.
equipment. Consult the packager's manual
for mandatory prestart procedures and make • The ignition system will be energized
certain that the packager-furnished lube sup- and the fuel shutoff valves will open.
ply subsystem is activated and operational
prior to any motoring or start sequence. • Lightoff should occur in approxi-
mately 10-12 seconds.
a. Check all switches and interlocks for
proper motoring settings. • The engine will accelerate to core idle
(starter-assisted to 4,600 rpm, where
b. With the fuel shutoff valves closed, acti- starter-cutout occurs).
vate the motoring or start sequence and
allow the engine to motor to maximum • In power generation applications, after
motoring speed for 30 seconds. Observe a brief pause of no more than 1 minute
and record the following: at core idle, during which rotation of
the LP system must be indicated, the
• Engine high pressure rotor speed engine will continue to accelerate to
synchronous idle.
• Starter air or hydraulic inlet pressure
• Finish 5 minute warmup prior to load-
• Inlet air temperature ing (5 minutes total time at idle speed).
• Lube supply and scavenge pressure • Maintain a constant rate of load

increase during acceleration (8 mW/
c. After 30 seconds, deenergize the starter. minute). Stepped accel rate should be
avoided. If the packager-supplied con-
8-10 Starting and Operation trol requires a stepped accel rate, the
rate shall not exceed specified limits.
8-10.1 Normal Starting Sequence
c. At a minimum, record the levels for the
CAUTION It is critical that the cold restart compressor rear frame (CRF) and turbine
procedure be followed; otherwise, major rear frame (TRF) accelerometers, acoustic
engine damage can result. sensors, the operating parameters desig-
nated in table 8-1, and the additional fuel
a. Ensure that all prestart checks have been
system parameter in table 8-2. A sample
completed.
data sheet is shown in figure 8-2. If all
b. Open the starter shutoff valve or initiate parameters shown in table 8-1 are normal,
engine operation to load may continue. If
the start sequence. The following should
engine parameters are outside the normal
occur:
operating limits shown in tables 8-1, 8-2
• The engine will begin to rotate for a and 8-3, troubleshoot and correct the prob-
predetermined period to purge the lem per Chapter 10 before continuing.
exhaust system.
8-8 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table 8-1 Typical Operating Levels

Base Load
Generator Efficiency 98%, Inlet Loss = 4"H2O; Exhaust Loss 10"H2O
Maximum
Maximum Base Operating
Parameter Core Idle Synchronous Idle Power Limit
Power MW 0 0 41.5-43.3 N/A
WF, (Fuel Flow), 2,200-2,300 4,400-4,600 19,000-20,000 21,800

lb/hr (kg/hr) (998-1,043) (1,996-2,086) (8,618-9,072) (9,888)
T2 (Inlet Temperature), 58 48 48
F (C) (14) (9) (9) N/A
P0 (Ambient Inlet Pressure), psia 14.42 14.6

(kPa) (99.4) 14.55(100.3) (100.7) N/A
T25 (HPC Inlet Temperature), 100 to 120 160 to 180 205 to 225
F (C) (38 to 49) (71 to 82) (96 to 107) N/A
XN25 (HPC rpm) 7,500-7,700 8,300-8,600 10,225-10,425 10,800
XN2 (LPC rpm) 2,300-2,600 3,595-3,605 3,595-3,605 4,050
XNSD (LPT rpm) 2,300-2,600 3,595-3,605 3,595-3,605 4,050
PS3 (HPC Discharge Pressure), 79-83 139-143 441-455 442*

psia (kPa)** (545-572) (958-986) (3,041-3,137) (3,050)
T3 (HPC Discharge Temp), 457 to 477 620 to 640 990 to 998 998
F (C) ** (236 to 247) (327 to 338) (532 to 537) (537)
P48 (LPT Inlet Pressure), psia 22-26 37-41 100-110

(kPa) (152-179) (255-283) (689-758) N/A
T48 (LPT Inlet Temp) 830 to 870 1,000 to 1,060 1,530 to 1,592 1,592
F (C) ** (443 to 466) (538 to 571) (832 to 866.7) (866.7)
PTB (Thrust Balance Pressure), 18-22 30-35 100-110

psia (kPa) ** (124-152) (207-241) (689-758) See figure 8-4
Lube System Oil Supply 40-50 45-58 63-75 15 (103)

Pressure, psig (kPa) (276-345) (310-400) (434-517) Min
Lube System Oil Supply 140 to 160 140 to 160 140 to 160 170
Temp, F (C) (60 to 71) (60 to 71) (60 to 71) (77)
Lube Scavenge Pressure, 17-21 18-22 18-23 100

psig (kPa) (117-145) (124-152) (124-159) (689)
Lube Scavenge Temp 190 to 220 220 to 250 240 to 270 310
(A/TGB-Scav), F (C) (88 to 104) (104 to 121) (115 to 132) (154)
Change 4 8-9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 8-1 Typical Operating Levels

Base Load
Generator Efficiency 98%, Inlet Loss = 4"H2O; Exhaust Loss 10"H2O (Continued)
Maximum
Maximum Base Operating
Parameter Core Idle Synchronous Idle Power Limit
(B/Scav), F (C) (93 to 110) (104 to 121) (121 to 143) (165)
(C-Scav), F (C) (102 to 118) (113 to 129) (143 to 160) (171)
(D-Scav), F (C) (68 to 91) (99 to 121) (110 to 143) (157)
(E-Scav), F (C) (68 to 91) (93 to 110) (110 to 143) (157)
(AGB-Scav), F (C) (68 to 91) (85 to 102) (85 to 102) (124)
VIGV Position (percent of stroke) 27-29 28-30 92-94 102
VSV Position (percent of stroke) 33-35 42-44 87-89 102
VBV Position (percent of stroke) 98-102 98-100 0-2 102
Stage 8 Bleed Valve Position 72-74 TBP 0 102

(percent of stroke)
CDP Valve Position (percent of 0 0 0 102

stroke)
* Engine Limited by PS3/(P0/14.696).
** Record all sensors.
d. A typical power generation start-to-load b. Starts indicating a T48 value in excess of

sequence is shown in figure 8-3. Upon 1,300°F (704.4°C) are considered to be hot
reaching the desired load condition, record starts. Normal starts are 1,000° to 1,200°F
the data indicated in paragraph 8-14. (537.7° to 648.8°C).
8-10.1.1 Hot Starts c. If a hot start occurs, the startup procedure

should not be repeated without investigat-
a. Hot starts are normally the result of insuf- ing the cause of the hot start. For trouble-
ficient starter power, excess starting fuel shooting procedures, refer to Chapter 10.
flow, excessively high acceleration fuel
8-2
8-3
flow rate, or open VSVs. 8-4
8-10 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table 8-2 Fuel System Parameters

Parameter Description
TH Total hours, all operation
TFS Total fired starts
TT Total trips (emergency shutdowns and step decels to idle)
T3 Measured HP compressor discharge temperature
T3BH Total hours for which (T3B-30°F)<T3<T3B (base region)
T3CH Total hours for which T3< (T3B-30°F) (sub-base region)
T3B T3 base load limit (set-point only; log not required)
BRNDMD Burner Demand
TFLAMEPCT Percent zero
TFLMAX Maximum bluk flame temperature schedule
TFLCYCS Calculated bulk flame temperature
TFLMIN Minimum bulk flame temperature schedule
TFODFS Calculated outer (A-ring) flame temperature
TFLOREF Demanded (control) outer flame temperature
TFLPDFS Calculated pilot (B-ring) flame temperature
TFLIDFS Calculated inner (C-ring) flame temperature
TFLIREF Demanded (control) inner flame temperature
WPQPERRCOR Blowout parameter
GP1PSEL Fuel metering valve supply pressure
GP2OSEL Outer ring metering valve downstream pressure
GP2PSEL Pilot ring metering valve downstream pressure
GP2ISEL Inner ring metering valve downstream pressure
TFUEL Fuel temperature
LHVSEL Fuel lower heating valve
SGSEL Fuel specific gravity
TBV Thrust balance valve position
Table 8-3 Limits and Operating Requirements

Event/Item Max Limits/Requirements
Max Time Allowed for Ignition XN25 > 1,700 rpm at t ≥ 20 sec (gas fuel)
Max Time to Reach Starter Cutout XN25 > 4,600 rpm at t ≥ 90 sec
Max Time to Reach Core Idle XN25 ≥ 6,050 rpm and XN25R ≥ 6,400 rpm at t ≥ 120 sec
LP Rotor Vibrations 1.4 in/sec (3.6 cm/sec)
HP Rotor Vibrations 2.0 in/sec (5.1 cm/sec)
Fuel Supply Temperature (Gas) < Tsv +20°F (11°C) min; > 300°F (149°C)
Air Inlet Screen Differential Pressure Commissioning pressure +1.0 in. H2O (0.249 kPa)
Change 4 8-11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 8-2 LM6000 Performance Data Sheet (Sheet 1 of 5)
8-12 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 4 8-13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
8-14 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 4 8-15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
8-16 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 8-3 Typical LM6000 PD Gas Turbine Start-to-Load Time Sequence
Figure 8-4 Thrust Balance Pressure Limits
Change 4 8-17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
8-11 Shutdown NOTE After shutdown, natural circulation of

air through the engine must not be inter-
The following types of engine shutdowns may rupted. This includes site air supply to the
occur: compressor rear frame and turbine rear frame
lube lines/sump walls to avoid coking. Also,
Normal shutdown: engine is taken off line flame detector cooling can air circuit airflow
for a specific reason not necessarily related to is required for a period of at least 30 minutes
the engine. (temperature must be 175°F [79.4°C] or
lower).
Emergency shutdown: engine is taken off
line by the operator or the control system due 8-11.2 Emergency Shutdown
to an engine or system fault.
In an emergency, the engine can be shut down
Other: annunciated fault or other indication from any power setting. This action can be ini-
of problem which operator interprets as a rea- tiated by the operator or by the packager-sup-
son for taking the engine off line. plied control system. An emergency shutdown
automatically initiates the following actions:
8-11.1 Normal Shutdown
NOTE The information presented herein
Under normal operating conditions, the describes a typical sequence of events. How-
LM6000 PD is shut down in the sequence ever, for specific control sequencing modes,
described below. and site operation information, see the pack-
ager's manual.
a. Power is retarded to minimum load or the
control sequencer is activated to accom- a. The fuel shutoff valves and metering valve
plish the shutdown. The following should are closed.
occur:
b. The 8th stage and CDP bleed valves are
• High pressure rotor speed decreases to closed.
approximately 8,400 rpm over a 2-3
minute period. c. The staging valves are closed.
• T48 decreases. d. The gas blowoff valve is opened (on an
XN2/XNXD speed difference only).
b. The engine should then decelerate to core
idle speed, approximately 7,600 rpm, e. The VBVs are opened (closed later during
where it should be allowed to cool for 5 coastdown).
minutes. After 5 minutes, the fuel shutoff
valves should be closed and the drain f. Underspeed and oil pressure alarms are
valves opened. bypassed.
g. Drain and vent valves are opened per con-

trol sequencing.
8-18 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
h. Alarms, interlocks, sequence timers, and In the case of a post-shutdown fire caused by
operating timers are reset. fuel leaking through the lower air/gas premix-
ers, a rise in T48 will be noticed. With fuel
The emergency shutdown will not allow reset valves closed, the engine should be motored
until core speed (XN25) is less than 300 rpm. on the starter (refer to paragraph 8-9.1 and
Table 8-4 outlines the protection functions that Chapter 10) until T48 starts to drop, at which
require root cause resolution prior to engine point the operator can discontinue motoring.
motoring.
8-12 Restart
Table 8-4 Protective Function Causes Requiring
Resolution Prior to Restart or Motoring
CAUTION If a questionable condition
• Excessive vibration step decel to idle exists, do not attempt to motor or operate the
• Fire system shutdown and/or Halon engine until a thorough investigation of the
release condition has been made. Do not repeat hot
starts, compressor stalls, load-shedding, or
• GT lube oil supply pressure low decel to other problems that initiate emergency shut-
idle downs or aborted operation without thorough
• Overspeed shutdown (XN25/XN2/ investigation. Failure to do so can result in
XNSD) undue stress on engine components that may
result in damage or subsequent destructive
• Enclosure high combustion gas level failure of the engine.
shutdown
• Starter system failure This section addresses requirements for
restarts after operation at power. Restarts may
• Fail to crank indication be initiated at any time if the prior shutdown
• LPC (XN2)/LPT (XNSD) speed differ- sequence included a cool-down period of 5
ence shutdown minutes or more at idle speed, or if cool-down
motoring has been initiated or completed.
• dPS3/dT shutdown (stall indication)
• Inlet screen ∆P Restarts following an emergency shutdown or
step decel to idle action from operation at
8-11.3 Post-Shutdown Fire power may be restricted, depending on cause
and if motoring has been initiated within 10
During a normal shutdown, exhaust gas tem- minutes of HP rotor coastdown. Refer to para-
perature should decrease following closure of graph 8-12.1.
the fuel shutoff valves. Under both normal and
emergency shutdowns, a temperature increase 8-12.1 Hot Restarts
(T48) may occur while the engine is coasting
down. This indicates that combustion is con- A restart following an emergency shutdown or
tinuing, due to either a leaking fuel valve or step decel to idle action from a power level
residual fuel trapped in the engine fuel system. where T48 is higher than 1,200°F (648.8°C) is
To correct this problem, follow the procedures considered a hot restart sequence and should
described in paragraph 8-9.1 and Chapter 9. not be attempted until the fault or circum-
stance triggering the shutdown is resolved. It
Change 4 8-19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
is critical that the hot restart procedure follows b. Energize the starter to crank the HP rotor
a specific sequence to avoid major engine to a speed not to exceed 2,400 rpm. If the
damage. HP rotor rotates freely, make a normal
start.
An emergency shutdown must be followed by
a restart or motoring cycle, if possible, to com- c. If circumstances allow the HP rotor to be
mence no more than 10 minutes after gas tur- cranked within 10 minutes after shutdown,
bine high pressure rotor speed decreases a manual purge, if available, will enable a
below 300 rpm. Conditions may not allow restart purge cycle to be initiated. The
restarting or motoring in some situations, restart purge cycle motors the engine high
depending on the cause of the emergency shut- pressure rotor to prevent thermal bowing
down or the status of the starting system. Rea- of the HP rotor. Starter use for motoring
sons for not restarting or motoring the gas the engine HP rotor must be consistent
turbine following an emergency shutdown are with limitations specified in Chapter 5.
listed in table 8-4. If restart or motoring can-
not be accomplished within 5 minutes, a man- d. By selecting the restart purge option, the
datory lockout of 4 hours is enacted by the operator preserves capability to restart the
control system to allow sufficient component engine any time after the fault or system
cooling to prevent possible damage to the problem has been cleared.
engine.
8-12.1.2 Restart More Than 10 Minutes
If the fault causing the emergency shutdown is After Shutdown
fully understood, resolved, and cleared, and it
has been verified that no damage to the engine CAUTION Bypassing this logic and crank-
has occurred, a restart or motoring sequence ing the HP rotor may result in severe HP
can be initiated if the 10 minute limit has not compressor rubs and may damage the com-
been exceeded. pressor blades and vanes.
8-12.1.1 Restart Within 10 Minutes If it is not possible, or desirable, to initiate the

After Shutdown restart purge cycle or a cool-down motoring
cycle within 10 minutes after the HP rotor has
If circumstances permit the shutdown problem coasted to below 300 rpm, the control system
to be cleared within 10 minutes or less and the will then lock out any further attempts to
high pressure (HP) rotor speed is less than 300 restart or motor the engine for a period of 4
rpm, the restart procedure is as follows: hours.
a. Start the restart timer and initiate a manual After 4 hours, a normal start sequence may be
restart purge. Reset all other timers as initiated.
required.
8-20 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
8-13 Windmilling performance for the specific installation. Refer

to paragraph 8-10.1c., table 8-1, and
Windmilling is generally caused by air forced table 8-3.
through the inlet, causing the rotors to turn at
relatively low speeds of less than 100 rpm. 8-14.1 Performance Measurement
Windmilling also occurs during shutdown as
the kinetic energy of the rotor is dissipated by A log of all LM6000 PD running time should
the pumping and rolling-element friction. The be kept. The following minimum data should
windmilling limits below should be observed be recorded:
to avoid rolling element life reduction.
• Time of all fired and unfired starts and
• There is no provision for unrestricted shutdowns
windmilling operation. However, the flow
• Total time since installation for all engines
of air through the engine must not be
restricted during the engine cool-down installed
period. • Twice daily log of all instrument readings,
• Both engine rotors may windmill for up to taken at the set-load point
7 days at speeds up to 100 rpm, provided Daily log data is invaluable for engine trend-
each period is preceded by normal engine ing and troubleshooting
operation.
• All changes in speed or load
• Both engine rotors may windmill for peri-
ods of up to 20 minutes at speeds between • Adjustments and part changes, including
100 rpm and 1,000 rpm, provided each those done at a repair facility
period is preceded by normal engine
operation. • Preventive maintenance action
• Unlimited windmilling of the engine • Lease pool gas turbine installation,
rotors is allowed at HP rotor speeds above removal, run time
1,000 rpm, provided supply oil tempera-
ture is maintained above 90°F (32.2°C) 8-14.2 Performance Data Recording
and scavenge oil temperature is kept below
340°F (171.1°C). At this speed, the lube For diagnosing performance or emissions
supply and scavenge system operates nor- issues, best results are obtained when all the
mally, provided positive oil pressure is parameters in the Performance Data Sheet,
maintained and oil cooling is provided. figure 8-2, are recorded and the data is
recorded to the indicated level of precision.
8-14 Engine Performance Also for best accuracy in the analysis, the
engine should be stabilized for at least 5 min-
Following installation and checkout, the utes prior to data recording and several (3-5)
engine should be operated at various speed/ readings should be taken at a given power
load conditions in order to establish baseline level.
Change 4 8-21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
The Performance Data Sheet shows typical • High power data readings should be taken
parameters and precision levels which would with VBV closed
normally be required for a performance evalu-
ation by GE. The same data should be used for periodic
trending of engine performance.
Other considerations for best accuracy:
8-14.3 Component Life/Repair
• Instrumentation should be recently Intervals
calibrated
Safe operation of the LM6000 PD is depen-
• VG systems should be rig checked and dent on properly scheduled maintenance,
calibrated repairs, and component replacement. In order
to properly track these conditions, packager-
• Crank soak washing should be performed supplied time and event counters provide data
prior to test for the parameters listed in table 8-2.
• Fuel sample should be collected and The operator is responsible for maintaining a
analyzed for lower heating value (LHV) log of the operating data parameters for gas
and specific gravity (SG) to assist in expe- turbine components. This will require that the
dited analysis of performance data. Liquid operator track components that are removed
fuels are to be analyzed for contaminants during field or depot maintenance.
and compliance with fuel specification
8-22 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
0 CHAPTER 9
Abnormal Operation
9-1 Purpose and Scope • Shutdowns
This chapter covers abnormal operating condi- 9-3.1 Alarms

tions and procedures, and control-provided
auto-protective features. It provides defini- Alarms are used to alert the operator to a con-
tions, descriptions, and operator actions dition that requires operator intervention.
required for abnormal conditions resulting in Some alarms may simply indicate that a con-
alarms or protective action. It also covers other dition has been reached that will require main-
conditions that do not trigger alarms or protec- tenance in a short time. Other alarms indicate
tive action, but which require special action by that a condition has been reached that may
the operator. lead to the initiation of a protective function if
positive corrective action is not taken immedi-
9-2 General Definitions ately. Reference the Trouble shooting Refer-
ence Table in Chapter 10 for the problem
Abnormal operation is defined as any type of events and system conditions that trigger
LM6000 PD operating condition that: alarms and protective functions.
• Deviates from normal operating limits 9-3.2 Power Cutback
• Exceeds normal operating limits A power cutback is accompanied by an alarm.

There is one power cutback function that can
• Causes an alarm or other protective action be initiated by the control:
to be initiated
• Slow decel to minimum load
A protective function is defined as any action
initiated automatically by the packager’s con- 9-3.2.1 Slow Decel to Minimum Load
trol in order to:
A slow decel to minimum load (min-load) is
• Prevent damage to the LM6000 PD engine
a controlled deceleration at a rate that
or installation
allows all engine schedules and engine cool-
• Prevent injury to personnel ing to be maintained at a controlled rate.
9-3 Control Actions The decel rate for a slow decel is

approximately 100 rpm/s (XN25). Rather
There are three levels of protection initiated by than decel all the way to core idle, the
the LM6000 PD packager-supplied control engine decels to the min-load point. This
system when abnormal conditions are sensed: allows the condition to be investigated
without requiring a shutdown. There is
• Alarms (alarm-only conditions) no time limitation for remaining at min-
load, unless the condition requiring this
• Power cutbacks
9-1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
decel still persists, in which case a nor- • The 8th stage and compressor discharge
mal shutdown sequence is initiated. pressure (CDP) bleed valves are closed
9-3.3 Shutdowns • The staging valves are closed
All shutdowns are accompanied by an alarm. • The gas blowoff valve is opened
There are four shutdown functions that can be
initiated by the control: • The variable bypass valves (VBVs) are
opened (closed later during coastdown)
• Emergency shutdown (gas turbine motor-
ing allowed) • Underspeed and oil pressure alarms are
bypassed
• Emergency shutdown (gas turbine motor-
ing not allowed) • Drain and vent valves are opened per con-
trol sequencing
• Step decel to idle
• Alarms, interlocks, sequence timers, and
• Abort start operating timers are reset
All alarm and protective function setpoints are The emergency shutdown will not allow reset
based on typical applications with driven until core speed (XN25) is less than 400 rpm.
equipment rated for continuous duty operation Table 8-4 outlines the protection functions that
at 3,600 rpm. require root cause resolution prior to engine
motoring.
9-3.3.1 Shutdown
9-3.3.3 Step-Decel to Idle/Shutdown
A control initiated shutdown is a controlled
decel to idle, a 5 minute stabilization period, A step-decel to idle is an immediate rapid
and a shutoff of the fuel valves and opening of (max decel rate) deceleration to idle followed
the fuel staging valves. by a 10 second pause, and then by a shutdown.
A step-decel provides a more controlled and
9-3.3.2 Emergency Shutdown orderly way of shutting down the engine than
does an immediate shutdown at power. The 10
An emergency shutdown is initiated by the second pause at core idle allows various
control when the engine must be shut down scheduled engine systems, such as variable
immediately in order to prevent severe damage inlet guide vanes (VIGVs) and VBVs, to reach
to the engine or installation. a stabilized condition before shutdown occurs.
When an emergency shutdown occurs, the When a step-decel occurs, the control initiates
control initiates the following events: the following sequence of events:
• The fuel shutoff valves and metering valve a. Power is immediately reduced to core idle,
are closed causing the engine to decel as rapidly as
possible.
9-2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
b. When the engine reaches core idle speed, • The VBVs are closed during coastdown
the control holds it at idle for 10 seconds
and then initiates a shutdown. The hold at • Underspeed and oil pressure alarms are
core idle allows the engine to be shut down bypassed
from an on-schedule, stabilized condition.
• Drain and vent valves are opened per con-
c. When the control initiates the shutdown trol sequencing
after the 10 second idle hold, the following
events occur: • Alarms, interlocks, sequence timers, and
operating times are reset
• The fuel shutoff valves are closed
• A purge cycle is initiated by the control, if
• The VBVs are closed during coast- applicable
down
9-4 Operator Action
• Underspeed and oil pressure alarms
are bypassed In order to avoid more severe protective
action, the operator must address the causes of
• Drain and vent valves are opened per all alarms and determine corrective actions
control sequencing necessary to clear abnormal conditions.
Before resuming normal engine operation
• Alarms, interlocks, sequence timers, after a power cutback or shutdown, positive
and operating timers are reset action to correct the cause is necessary. For
any alarm or protective action, the following
9-3.3.4 Slow Decel to Minimum Load/ general procedures should be followed:
Shutdown
a. Acknowledge the alarm in the manner
A slow decel to minimum load involves the specified in the packager’s manual.
fuel control controlling gas turbine decelera-
tion at a rate of core speed equal to 100 rpm/ b. Reduce power, if necessary, and take what-
sec. or low pressure rotor speed equal to 9 ever steps possible to prevent further
rpm/sec. After core idle is reached, the alarms or more severe protective action.
sequence of events is the same as a step-decel Reducing power to eliminate an alarm
to idle/shutdown. without investigation of alarm root cause
is unacceptable. Significant damage to the
9-3.3.5 Aborted Start engine can occur if alarms are bypassed.
An abort is initiated at any time during the c. Consult the troubleshooting procedures in
start sequence when certain parameters exceed Chapter 10 of this manual.
limits. During an aborted start, the control ini-
tiates the following events: d. During an alarm-only condition, correct
the problem, if possible, and resume nor-
• The fuel shutoff valves are closed mal operation. If recovery is not possible,
shut down and correct the problem; refer
• The ignition system and starter are de- to the packager’s manual for more specific
energized information.
9-3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
e. After a power cutback, correct the problem When T48 returns to normal, discontinue
before resuming operation at power. If motoring. Refer to post-shutdown fire in
recovery is not possible, shut down and Chapter 8 and troubleshooting procedures in
correct the problem. Chapter 10.
f. After a shutdown, correct the problem 9-7 Special Inspections

before attempting a restart.
a. The maintenance of the gas turbine
CAUTION If motoring within 10 minutes requires that inspection checks be made
after the HP rotor (XN25) is rotating at less periodically. The inspection requirements
than 300 rpm is not possible, do not attempt and limits throughout this manual are
to motor the engine for at least 4 hours. Any based on operation within specified limits.
attempt to motor the engine sooner may In addition to the regular inspections, there
result in severe damage to the engine. are special inspections necessary when the
gas turbine has been operated outside of
g. If possible without causing damage, motor the specified limits, for example, off-
the engine for cooling within 10 minutes schedule variable-geometry operation,
of the time the high pressure (HP) rotor overspeed, or overtemperature. There also
(XN25) is rotating at less than 300 rpm. may be special inspections necessary if the
Refer to Chapter 8. gas turbine has been exposed to abnormal
conditions. These events include failures
h. Enter appropriate comments in the engine
with significant damage and other abnor-
run log (Chapter 8) concerning any prob-
mal exposure such as an installation fire or
lems and corrective action.
mishap during transportation, handling, or
storage. Some of the abnormal conditions
9-5 Hot Restarts to which an engine may be exposed are:
A hot restart is defined as any attempt to start • Shock loading, collision impact, expo-
the engine immediately following emergency sure to explosion, handling or trans-
shutdown or a trip-from-power shutdown. A portation mishap
hot restart should not be attempted until the
fault or circumstance triggering the shutdown • Structural overstress, mounting sys-
is resolved. It is critical that the hot restart pro- tem overload to gas turbine interface
cedure follows a specific sequence to avoid (e.g., earthquake, installation error)
major engine damage. Refer to Chapter 8 for
hot restart procedures. Refer to Chapter 10 for • Any equipment failure where parts are
troubleshooting procedures. not contained within the gas turbine, or
where a major rotating component sep-
9-6 Post-Shutdown Fire arates
During a normal shutdown, T48 should • Sudden seizure or stoppage of the gas
decrease. An increasing T48 during coast- turbine rotor(s) or driven equipment
down is an indication of continued combus- rotors
tion, possibly due to a leaking fuel valve. To
correct this condition, shut off the fuel supply • Excess G-loading during operation in
and motor the engine to blow out the fire. excess of packager manual limits
9-4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
• Significant inlet ingestion events (e.g., facturing, operation within defined limits, and
foreign objects causing significant maintenance within defined limits and pro-
flowpath damage, ice ingestion, inlet cesses, as well as by inspection. Parts exposed
system failure) to abnormal conditions may appear to be ser-
viceable when, in fact, the actual state of the
• Exposure to external fire, involving material cannot be ascertained even by the
inlet system, exhaust system, base most advanced non-destructive testing and
enclosure, and equivalent inspection methods. Parts which have been
• Exposure to external fire in storage or involved in an abnormal event must be for-
transport mally reviewed for severity of operation
beyond the normal working environment and
• Internal fire dispositioned as to the necessity for a special
inspection workscope. The operator has the
• Thermal quench by water or other responsibility for the continued safe operating
agent, local overheating by fuel or condition of the gas turbine. Since used
steam system failure replacement parts may be available which
have operated in abnormal events, the operator
• Exposure to corrosive chemicals, fire- should verify that the service histories of these
fighting agents, salt water, or sewage parts are known and that, when applicable, the
required special inspections and part disposi-
These events are highly variable and the expo-
tion following exposure to abnormal condi-
sure and associated damage which a gas tur-
tions have been completed and the part is
bine experiences is unpredictable. This
serviceable.
prevents establishing a single, all-inclusive
inspection and repair procedure. Depending a. Similarly, many components or assemblies
upon the circumstances of the event, instances from aircraft engines which have experi-
of localized, limited damage can often be dis- enced previous flight service are not
positioned by normal channels. For abnormal usable in LM engines. In addition, gas tur-
events, such as the events listed above, execu- bine components which have experienced
tion of a special inspection workscope is nec- an extremely high number of start/stop
essary for proper restoration of serviceability. cycles may not be usable. Specifically, use
In some extreme cases, repair may not be pos- of used-serviceable flight or high-cycle
sible or economical, and, therefore, further engine parts in the following categories is
repair effort may not be advisable. Before pro- prohibited:
ceeding with inspection or repair action to
restore serviceability after a mishap, contact (1) Rotating components
the following for guidance:
(2) Stator cases and stator vanes
GE Aircraft Engines
Marine & Industrial Customer Service (3) Frame assemblies, including sump
components
Mail Drop S-155
1 Neumann Way (4) Main shaft bearings
Cincinnati, Ohio 45215-1988 USA
Prior to use of other components, contact
Assurance of a part’s serviceability is derived Marine & Industrial Engines Customer Ser-
from control of material processing and manu- vice about usability.
9-5/(9-6 Blank)
9-6 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
5
CHAPTER 10
Troubleshooting
10-1 Purpose and Scope alarms, control actions, and the setpoints that
trigger these alarms or control actions. These
This chapter provides general troubleshooting are grouped by major engine/facility systems.
procedures for the LM6000 PD gas turbine. Each event also lists a numbered Trouble-
shooting Procedure (TS-) or a SPAM (See
10-2 Arrangement and Use Packager"s Appropriate Manual) reference.
This chapter includes two major segments: a At the end of the Troubleshooting Reference
Troubleshooting Reference Table and a set of Table, items in the Miscellaneous category
numbered Troubleshooting Procedures. For either (1) do not trigger an alarm or control
ease of use, the Troubleshooting Reference action or (2) are a combination of conditions,
Table and Troubleshooting Procedures fol- some of which may or may not trigger an
low these introductory and explanatory sec- alarm or control action on their own, that must
tions. Figures and tables are presented at the also be looked at in combination with others.
end of the section.
10-2.2 Numbered Troubleshooting
Figure 10-1 provides a control system compo- Procedures
nent schematic as an aid to troubleshooting.
The numbered Troubleshooting Procedures
Engine/package electrical interface panels are (TS-1 through TS-34) are referred to in the
illustrated in figure 10-2. Engine interface Troubleshooting Reference column of the
connectors are indicated in the schematics of Troubleshooting Reference Table. These pro-
figures 10-6 through 10–31 and cited in the cedures show symptoms for each engine or
numbered Troubleshooting Procedures. facility condition, possible causes for each, the
troubleshooting procedure to isolate the cause
Tables 10-1 through 10-10 are cited in, and of the problem, and the recommended correc-
provide supplementary information for, some tive action. Events or conditions in the Trou-
of the numbered Troubleshooting Proce- bleshooting Reference Table that have only a
dures. SPAM reference are not discussed in the num-
bered troubleshooting procedures.
10-2.1 Troubleshooting Reference
Table Table 10-11 shows maximum allowable
instrumentation and accessory temperatures.
The Troubleshooting Reference Table shows
various problem events and system conditions,
Change 5 10-1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
10-2.3 Using This Chapter These instructions may not provide for every
possible variation in equipment or conting-
The steps shown below illustrate how to use ency to be met in connection with the opera-
this chapter for troubleshooting. tion of the engine. Refer requests for
additional information to the packager.
NOTE Symptoms, possible causes, trouble-
shooting procedures, and corrective actions 10-3.1 Low Pressure Turbine Speed
are grouped horizontally across each page, Sensor (XNSD) Testing
allowing each symptom or set of symptoms to
have more than one possible cause. Each pos- NOTE
sible cause may also have more than one trou-
bleshooting procedure, and each trouble- • This procedure is only for the XNSD speed
shooting procedure may have more than one sensor, PN L44684.
corrective action.
• XNSD speed sensor, PN L44684, can only
Example - Alarm received for air inlet differ- be tested on the secondary winding. This
ential pressure high: test cannot confirm a good sensor, but it
can confirm a bad sensor. The evaluation
a. Find the air inlet differential pressure high that follows is only for determining that a
entry on the first page of the Trouble- sensor is bad.
shooting Reference Table.
WARNING Alcohol is flammable and toxic
b. Refer to troubleshooting procedure TS-3, to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin
as listed in the Troubleshooting Reference and eye protection is required. Avoid
column. repeated or prolonged contact. Use in a
well-ventilated area.
c. Follow the appropriate procedure for each
possible cause listed in TS-3. a. Ensure the inside of the sensor connector
is not dirty or wet before performing the
10-3 Troubleshooting Procedures following tests. If dirt or fluids are seen
inside connector, this may explain an
WARNING If a questionable condition improper XNSD signal indication. Use
exists, do not operate the engine until a only denatured alcohol to rinse and clean
thorough investigation has been made. Do inside of connector.
not repeat hot starts, compressor stalls, or
other recognized problems without prior b. Using an ohmmeter, measure resistance
thorough investigation, root cause determi- across two pins. Resistance should be
nation, and corrective action. Failure to do same measuring in either direction. Resis-
so can result in undue stress being imposed tance value between pins of a good XNSD
on engine components, with immediate or sensor should be 500-2000 ohms. If read-
subsequent destructive failure of the engine ing is outside these limits, ensure a good
and injury to personnel. connection exists between ohmmeter leads
and pins, and repeat reading. If indication
is still outside limits, replace sensor.
10-2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
c. Measure resistance from each pin to case, If first indication is above 350 rpm, repeat
one at a time. Both measurements should steps b. and c. to validate sensor. If values
indicate above 500,000 ohms. If either are in range per steps b. and c., reseat sen-
indication is less than 500,000 ohms, sor, using a slight twisting action to fully
replace sensor. The actual reading could seat sensor. If control continues to give
be over 5 megohms. first indications above 350 rpm, switch
positions of the two sensors in LPT to
d. When starting engine, note speed at which determine if the first indication speed is
control begins to display engine speed. reduced to a better value. If not, the defec-
Speed indication should appear before tive sensor should indicate out-of-range in
engine reaches 350 rpm, with 200 rpm both positions and should be replaced.
being nominal highest (worst case) value.
Change 5 10-3

10-4 Troubleshooting Reference Table
10-4
Except where otherwise indicated, each event shown in this table is accompanied by an alarm, regardless of whether it is accom-
Volume I
panied by a control action. Limits are shown in the alarm column for events resulting in an alarm only. Events that have both an
GEK 105061
alarm and an accompanying control action will show the limits in the appropriate action column and an X in the alarm column.
In cases where one limit triggers an alarm only and a higher limit triggers both an alarm and control action, the limits for each
will be shown in the appropriate columns. In any case that has no particular limits and is simply an either/or condition, the alarm
and/or control action will be indicated by X in the appropriate columns.
Change 5
Air Inlet System
Step Decel to
Shutdown or Core–Idle,
Emergency Shutdown Slow Decel to Troubleshooting
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
Air Inlet Differential X <0, >10 in H2O 1 SPAM

Pressure, Sensor Failure (<0, > 2.49 kPa)
Air Inlet Differential dP > dPi +1.0 in H2O dP > dPi +2.0 in H2O 1, 9 TS-3
Pressure, High (dP >dPi + 0.25 kPa) (dP >dPi + 0.50 kPa)
P0 Sensor Failure < 8, >16 psia 6 SPAM

(<55.1, >110.3 kPa)

GE Industrial AeroDerivative Gas Turbines
LM6000 PD
Bleed System
Step Decel to
LM6000 PD
CDP Bleed Valve LVDT One Sensor: Both Sensors: 4, 7, 22, TS-8
Failure <-2%, >102% <-2%, >102% 40
CDP Bleed Valve LVDT >3% >6% for 0.5 sec 37, 38, 40 TS-8
Difference
CDP Bleed Valve Position X Demanded/Actual Diff 7, 22 TS-8

Error >6% for >0.5 sec
CDP Bleed Valve Schedule Position >schedule 22 TS-8

Limits Exceeded for >1.0 sec and
dXN25/dt <+/-150
rpm/sec
CDP Bleed Valve X Open or short 7 TS-8

Torquemotor Failure >0.5 sec
CDP Bleed Valve Null >Null +/- 5 mA for >Null +/- 15 mA for TS-8
Current Shift 5.0 sec and dXN25/dt 5.0 sec and dXN25/dt
<+/- 150 rpm <+/- 150 rpm
Stage 8 Bleed Valve LVDT >3% > 6% 37, 38, 40 TS-8

Difference
Stage 8 Bleed Valve LVDT One Sensor: Both Sensors: 4, 7, 22 TS-8

Failure <-2%, >102% <-2%, >102%
Stage 8 Bleed Valve Position Demanded/Actual Diff 7, 22 TS-8

X
Error > 10% for >0.5 sec
Stage 8 Bleed Valve Position >Schedule 22 TS-8

Schedule Limits Exceeded for >1.0 sec and
dXN25/dt <150 rpm/
sec
Stage 8 Bleed Valve X Open or short 7 TS-8
Change 5
Torquemotor Failure >0.5 sec
Stage 8 Bleed Valve Null >null +/- 5 mA for >null +/- 15 mA for TS-8
Current Shift 5.0 sec and dXN25/dt 5.0 sec and dXN25/dt
<+/- 150 rpm <+/- 150 rpm

Bleed Valve(s) Slew Open or TS-8
Closed During Small Power
Change
Volume I
GEK 105061
10-5
Combustion System
10-6
Step Decel to
Volume I
GEK 105061
Flame loss, One or Both One sensor Both sensors 3 TS-4

Sensors, XN25 >9,500 rpm X SPAM
Flame Temperature High Max Schedule 22 TBP
Change 5
+ 150°F (-83.3°C) for
>2.0 sec
Flame Temperature Low Max Schedule 22 TBP

+ 150°F (-83.3°C) for
>2.0 sec
Combustor Dynamic One sensor Both sensors 39 TS-33

Pressure Failed Sensor <0 psi, >40 psi <0 psi, >40 pai
(0 kPa, 275.7 kPa) (0 kPa, 275.7 kPa)
Combustor Dynamic >4 psi (27.5 kPa) for >6 psi (41.4 kPa) for 10 TS-33
Pressure Over Limit 10 seconds sec
Combustor Dynamic TS-33

Pressure Difference

LM6000 PD
Fuel System
Step Decel to
LM6000 PD
Gas Fuel Shutoff Valve X X 5, 9 TS-22

Cycling or Slewing Wide SPAM
Open at Start
Fuel Supply Temperature, Gas Fuel: 2 TS-6

Below Limit <TSV + 20°F SPAM
(< TSV + 11°C)
Fuel Supply Temperature, Gas Fuel: 33 TS-6

Sensor Failure < -40°, >380°F SPAM
(<-39.9°, >193.3°C)
Fuel Supply Temperature, X Gas Fuel: TS-6

High >300°F (148.8°C)
Fuel Manifold Pressure Too <10, >800 psia 32 TS-22

High or Too Low (<68.9, >5516 kPa)
Fuel Supply Temperature X SPAM

Difference
Fuel Metering Valve Position X X SPAM
Fuel Metering Valve X X SPAM

Difference
Staging Valve Failure X 3 or More Valves 1 Valve TS-7

Current <320 mA Current <320 mA
for 350 msec for 350 msec
Change 5

Volume I
GEK 105061
10-7
HPC System
10-8
Step Decel to
Volume I
GEK 105061
PS3 A/B Difference Over > 10 psia >15 psia 9, 33 SPAM

Limits (>68.9 kPa) (>103 kPa)
for >100 msec
Change 5
PS3 Sensor Failure, One or One Sensor: Both Sensor: 4, 9, 36 SPAM
Both Sensors <10, >480 psia <10, >480 psia
(<69, >3,309 kPa) (<69, >3,309 kPa)
Stall X -dPS3/dt> Threshold 9, 21, 22 TS-9

for > 20 msec
Starting Stall 32 TS-1 andTS-9
T25 A/B Difference Over >18°F 32 TS-27

Limits (>-8°C)
T25 Sensor Failure, One or One Element: Both Elements: 4, 13, 18 TS-27
Both Elements <-40°, >300°F <-40°, >300°F
(<-40°, >148.8°C) (<-40°, >149°C)
T3 A/B Difference Over Limit >20°F 33 TS-27

(>-7°C)
T3 Sensor Failure, One <-40°, >1,200°F 34 TS-27

Element (<-40°, >649°C)
T3 Sensor Failure One Pair: Both Pair: 4, 9, 14 TS-27

<-40°, >1200°F <-40°, >1200°F
(<-40°, >649°C) (<-40°, >649°C)
T3 Reads Low/High 37 TS-27

Decreases or Goes Negative
During Lightoff
T3 Pair Difference Over Limit >40°F 33 TS-27

(>4°C)
XN25 Sensor Failure, One or One Sensor: Both Sensors: 4, 9, 35 TS-28

Both Sensors <300, >11,500 rpm <300, >11,500 rpm

XN25 A/B Sensor Mismatch |A-B|>100 rpm 33 TS-28
No XN25 Indication 32 TS-28

LM6000 PD
HPC System (Continued)
Step Decel to
LM6000 PD
XN25 Failure to Reach Core X XN25 <6,050 TS-25

Idle Speed on Start rpm, XN25R
(Hung Start) <6,400 rpm at
t>120 sec
XN25 Failure to Reach Fuel X X For Gas Fuel: TS-25

and Ignition Speed on Start <1,700 rpm at
t>90 sec
XN25 Failure to Reach <4,600 rpm at TS-25

Starter Cutout Speed t> 90 sec
Idle Speed Too High or Too 22, 32 TS-20

Low (XN25)
Idle Speed Instability 32 TS-20
Accel to Maximum Power 32 TS-20

(XN25) Not Possible
Slow Accel to Maximum 32 TS-20

Power with High or Low T48
XN25 Overspeed >10,750 rpm >10,800 rpm 9 TS-21
Change 5

Volume I
GEK 105061
10-9
LPT System
10-10
Step Decel to
Volume I
GEK 105061
Post-Shutdown Fire 32 TS-2
P48 Sensor Failure X <10, >140 psia 30 TS-30

(<69, >965 kPa) SPAM
Change 5
T48 Temperature Average X >1,850°F (1,010°C) >1,750°F 9, 23, 24 TS-11
(T48 Avg) Over Limit for ≥ 1.0 sec (>954°C)
Hot Start: T48 Start X T48 >schedule 22, 23 TS-1

Temperature Over Limit + 200°F (93°C)
for >3 sec
T48 Temperature Average X <400°F (<204°C) 9, 23, 24, TS-11

(T48 Avg) Under Limit for >10 sec 29
With Fuel On
Loss of Any Four T48 Probes X <350°, >1,900°F 23, 24, TS-11
or Loss of Three Adjacent (<177°, >1,038°C) 25, 26
T48 Probes (Loss of T48 or T48 Difference
Avg) >200°F (>93°C)
Loss of Any Individual T48 <350°, >1,900°F 24, 25 TS-11

Probe (<177°, >1,038°C)
T48 Difference |T local-T 23, 25 TS-11

Average|>1,000°F
(538°C)
T48 Overshoot or 32 TS-11

Fluctuation at High-Power
Steady-State
XNSD Sensor Failure One Sensor: Both Sensors: 4, 9, 17, TS-28

<350, >4,500 rpm <350, >4,500 rpm 20, 36
XNSD Sensor Mismatch |A-B|>40 rpm 33 TS-28
XNSD Overspeed X >4,300 rpm 9, 19, 34 TS-21

LP Failure to Rotate XNSD <1,250 rpm for SPAM
>60 sec at Core Idle
LM6000 PD
Lube System
Step Decel to
LM6000 PD
Chip Detector Alert <100 Ohms TS-13

(Any Sump, TGB Assy) >2.56 sec
Chip Detector Failure <0, >300 Ohms 32 TS-13
Oil Contamination 32 TS-18
High Oil Consumption 32 TS-18
Lube Scavenge, Lube >20 psid (>138 kPa) 19 TS-12

Supply, or VG Filter Diff.
Pressure High (Impending
Bypass)
Lube Scavenge Overtemp >300°F >340°F TS-14

(Any sump, TGB Assy) (>149°C) (>171°C)

(AGB) (>115°C) (>129°C)

(A/TGB) (>140°C) (>154°C)

(B Sump) (>151°C) (>165°C)

(C Sump) (>159°C) (>171°C)

(D Sump) (>143°C) (>157°C)

(E Sump) (>143°C) (>157°C)
Change 5
Fluctuating Lube Scavenge 32 TS-14
Temp
Lube Scavenge or Supply One Element: Both Elements: 4, 18, 36 TS-27

Temp, Sensor Failure, Any <-45°,>390°F <-45°,>390°F
Sensor (Any Sump, TGB (-43°, >199°C) (-43°, >345°C)
Assy)
Volume I
GEK 105061
10-11
Lube System (Continued)
10-12
Step Decel to
Volume I
GEK 105061
Lube Scavenge, Lube <0, >50 psid 19, 30 SPAM

Supply, or VG Filter Diff. (<0, >345 kPa)
Pressure Sensor Failure
Change 5
Lube Scavenge Pressure >100 psig TS-15
High (>689 kPa)
at XN25 >7,800
Lube Scavenge Pressure <0, >150 psig 30 SPAM

Sensor Failure (<0, >1,034 kPa)
Lube Supply >170°F TS-16

Overtemperature (>77°C) SPAM
Lube Supply Pressure High TS-17

See figure 8-1 for Typical Oil SPAM
Supply Pressure
Lube Supply Pressure Low X <6 psig (<41 kPa) at <15 psig (<103 kPa) 9, 30 TS-17
(With/Without Fluctuation) 4,500 <XN25 at XN25 >7,800 rpm SPAM
<7,800 rpm
Normal Lube Oil Pressure 32 TS-17

With Fluctuations >±5 psi
No Oil Pressure 32 TS-17
Lube Supply Pressure X <0, >100 psig 9, 30 SPAM

Sensor Failure (<0, 689 kPa)
Lube Supply Temp Sensor One Sensor: Both Sensors: 4 TS-27

Failure <-40°, 380°F -40°, 380°F
(<-40°, 193°C) (<-40°, 193°C)
Lube Supply Temp Below <90°F (<32°C) at 39 TS-16

Minimum XN25 >6,050 rpm SPAM

LM6000 PD
Thrust Balance System
Step Decel to
LM6000 PD
PTB Demand Error Position >Schedule Position >Schedule Position >Schedule 22 TS-30
+15 psi for +50 psi for +25 psi for
>10 sec 1.0 sec >10 sec
or
>Schedule +25 psi
for >2.0 sec
PTB Demand Check Position >Schedule Position >Schedule 22 TS-30

+25 psi for +50 psi for
>5.0 sec >2.0 sec
PTB and PTBV Sensor |PTB-PTBV|> 15 psi |PTB-PTBV|> 25 psi TS-30

Difference for 5.0 sec for 2.0 sec
PTB Sensor Failure X <10, >140 psia 30 TS-30

(69>966 kPa)
PTBV Sensor Failure X <10, >140 psia 30 TS-30

(<69, >966 kPa)
Thrust Balance Valve LVDT One Sensor: Both Sensors: 4, 7, 37, TS-30
Failure <-2, >102% <-2, >102% 40
Thrust Balance Valve LVDT >3% of stroke 16 TS-30

Difference
Thrust Balance Valve Position Schedule for Demanded/Actual Diff. 7, 22 TS-30

Position Error >1.0 sec and dXN25/ >10% for
dt <±150 rpm/sec >0.5 sec
Thrust Balance Torquemotor X Open or short 7 TS-30

Failure >0.5 sec
Thrust Balance Null Current >null +/-5mA for 5.0 >null +/-15mA for 5.0 TS-30
Change 5
Shift sec and dXN25/dt sec and dXN25/dt <+/-
<+/-150 rpm 150 rpm

Volume I
GEK 105061
10-13
Variable Geometry Systems
10-14
Step Decel to
Volume I
GEK 105061
VBV A/B Difference Out of LVDT A/B Difference LVDT A/B Difference 15, 40 TS-23
Limits >9% of Stroke >12% of Stroke
VBV Torquemotor Null >null +/-5mA for 5.0 >null +/-15mA for 5.0 TS-23
Change 5
Current Shift sec and dXN25/dt sec and dXN25/dt <+/-
<+/-150 rpm/sec 150 rpm/sec
VBV LVDT Failure One Sensor: Both Sensors: 4, 7, 21, TS-23

<-2%, >102% <-2%, >102% 22, 40
VBV Position Error X Demanded/Actual Diff. 7, 21, 22 TS-23

>10% for >0.5 sec
VBV Schedule Limits Position >Schedule 21, 22 TS-23

Exceeded for >1.0 sec and
dXN25/dt <+/-150
rpm/sec
VBV Torquemotor Failure X Open or short 7 TS-23

>0.5 sec
VIGV A/B Difference Out of LVDT A/B Difference 16, 37 TS-23

Limits >3.0% of Stroke
VIGV Torquemotor Null >null +/-5mA for 5.0 >null +/-15mA for 5.0 TS-23
VIGV LVDT Failure One Sensor: Both Sensors: 4, 7, 21, TS-23

<-2%, >102% <-2%, >102% 22
VIGV Position Error X Demanded/Actual 7, 21, 22 TS-23

Diff. >10% for
>0.5 sec
VIGV Schedule Limits Position >Schedule 21, 22 TS-23

dXN25/DT <150 rpm/
sec

VIGV Torquemotor Failure X Open or short 7 TS-23
>0.5 sec
LM6000 PD
Variable Geometry Systems (Continued)
Step Decel to
LM6000 PD
VSV A/B Difference Out of LVDT A/B Difference 16, 37 TS-23

Limits >3.7% of Stroke
VSV Torquemotor Null >null +/-5mA for 5.0 >null +/-15mA for 5.0 TS-23
VSV LVDT Failure One Sensor: Both Sensors: 4, 7, 21, TS-23

<-2%, >102% <-2%, >102% 22
VSV Position Error X Demanded/ Actual 7, 21, 22 TS-23

Diff.>10% for >0.5
sec
VSV Schedule Limits Position >Schedule 21, 22 TS-23

dXN25/dt >+/-150
rpm/sec
VSV Torquemotor Failure X Open or Short 7 TS-23

>0.5 sec
Facility Systems
Step Decel to
MW Sensor Failure <0, >48 MW SPAM
PGAS Sensor Failure <10, >800 psia 8 SPAM
Change 5
(<68.9, >5,515.8 kPa)
Power Supply Failure (ECU X X 9 TS-5

or Staging valve) SPAM
High Enclosure Temperature 37 TS-31

Volume I
GEK 105061
10-15
LPC System
10-16
Step Decel to
Volume I
GEK 105061
T2 A/B Difference Over Limit > 18°F 33 TS-27

(-8°C)
T2 Sensor Failure One Element: Both Elements: 4, 11, 18 TS-27
Change 5
<-40°, >120°F <-40°, >120°F
(<-40°, >49°C) (<-40°, >49°C)
Vibration Monitoring System

Step Decel to
Vibes High, HP Rotor >2.0 in/sec (>5.1 cm/ >3.0 in/sec (>7.6 cm/ TS-26
sec) at 100-200 Hz sec) at 100-200 Hz
(Tracked Core (Tracked Core
Speed) Speed)
Vibes High, LP Rotor >1.4 in/sec (3.6 cm/ >2.0 in/sec (5.1cm/ TS-26
sec) peak at sec) peak at
N2ROTOR < 3,000 or N2ROTOR < 3,000 or
N2ROTOR ≥ 3,590 or N2ROTOR ≥ 3,590 or
N25SEL ≥ N25MAX N25SEL ≥ N25MAX
or or
>1.75 in/sec (4.45 >2.5 in/sec (6.35 cm/

cm/sec) peak at sec) peak at 3,000 ≤
3,000 ≤ N2ROTOR < N2ROTOR < 3,590
3,590 and N25SEL < and N25SEL <
N25MAX N25MAX
High Wideband Rotor >3.0 in/sec >4.0 in/sec TS-26

Vibrations (7.6 cm/sec) (10.2 cm/sec)
peak at 25-350 Hz peak at 25-350 Hz

LM6000 PD
Acoustic Sensing System
Step Decel to
LM6000 PD
PX36A or PX36B high TS-34

(sensors read different)
PX36 SEL Low <1.2 in ABC TS-34

mode
Miscellaneous
Step Decel to
The events listed in this section are conditions that are not specifically handled by the engine control system or which are not part of any of the specific engine or package
systems shown previously in the table. These events are either a single symptom or combination of symptoms with no specific set of setpoints that can be monitored by the
control. These events and conditions must be monitored by the operator and corrected as they occur.
The combinations of conditions shown in this section do not cause any sort of alarm or control action to be initiated; however, individual symptoms that are part of any of the
combinations shown here may cause an alarm or control action, just as they normally would when occurring alone (such as low pressure).
Loss of Performance TS-31
High HP Rotor Speed, Low TS-31

Power, and High or Low T48
Engine Fails to Motor/No TS-31

Indication of Motoring
Post-Shutdown Fire 35 TS-2
Random Shutdowns or TS-31

Failure to Start
Change 5

Volume I
GEK 105061
10-17
Notes
10-18
1. dPi is defined as the FOD screen pressure drop (dP) value measured at site commissioning.
Volume I
2. Not used.
GEK 105061
3. Flameout signal is ignored by the control if XN25 is greater than 9,500 rpm; if a flameout has actually occurred, the loss-of-
flame logic will initiate a shutdown when XN25 drops below the 9,500 rpm threshold and a delay of 320 msec.
4. Control system defaults to remaining sensor/element.
Change 5
5. Defaults to fully closed, zero fuel flow position.
6. Defaults to 14.69 psia (101.3 kPa).
7. Torquemotor current is set to zero.
8. Defaults to 665 psia (4,585 kPa).
9. Emergency Shutdown: Close fuel and bleed valves, VBV to kicker schedule. No motoring of engine allowed.
10. Core VIGV torquemotor current defaults to 0mA (VIGVs closed).
11. Control system defaults to T2 = 115°F (46°C), if both sensors fail.
12. I means Absolute Value - The value of a number, regardless of a prefix plus or minus sign e.g. I -100I= 100.
13. Defaults to T25 = 200°F (93°C), if both sensors fail.
14. Defaults to 200°F (93°C), if both pairs fail.
15. Defaults to higher signal (more closed position).
16. Defaults to higher signal (more open position).
17. Sensor loss overridden at less than core idle plus 60 seconds.
18. Contact the packager if optional redundant temperature sensors (four elements per parameter) are used.
19. Alarm limits are based on component capability and may be reduced, consistent with the characteristics of each installation.
For application and site conditions that have the potential for reaching alarm limits under normal load conditions, active
controls must be available to limit fuel flow before operating limits are exceeded.
20. This alarm/shutdown is enabled 60 seconds after reaching core idle during the starting sequence.
21. Shutdowns caused by stall detection or variable geometry system faults require borescope inspection of the compressors.

Refer to Volume II of this manual for inspection procedures.
22. Refer to the appropriate packager’s manual for control schedules, logic, and limits.
LM6000 PD
Notes (Continued)
23. T48 is the average of individual T48 probe outputs, subject to rejection criteria of Note 25.
24. Limits shown are for the two individual signals from any of the eight probes, as specified.
LM6000 PD
25. Any T48 thermocouple probe reading is rejected from the T48 average calculation if it is:
(1) out of range; T48 <350°F (177°C) or >1,900°F (>1,038°C)
(2) 1,000°F (538°C) > or < 1,000°F (538°C) from T48 average.
26. Reject from spread calculations any thermocouple probe reading that is out of range.
27. These limits apply only at steady state conditions above 9,000 rpm XN25.
28. Alarm is triggered only if the condition persists for 10 seconds or more after initial detection.
29. Emergency shutdown: Close fuel and bleed valves, open gas blowoff valve, VBV to kicker schedule.
30. Defaults to last good value.
31. LP rotor conditions are assessed by use of the highest speed signal from the speed sensors (XN2a, XN2b, XNSDa,
XNSDb).
32. This condition or combination of conditions requires operator intervention, but does not, by itself, cause the control system
to initiate any sort of action.
33. Defaults to higher signal.
34. Sensor removed from pair average.
35. Defaults to 2,000 rpm if both sensors fail.
36. Defaults to last good value if both sensors fail.
37. XN25>4,600 rpm for 0.5 seconds.
38. Defaults to minimum select.
39. Load addition inhibited by control at lube supply temperature less than 90°F (32°C).
Change 5
40. Normal shutdown following decel to minimum load.

Volume I
GEK 105061
10-19
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
10-5 Troubleshooting Procedures

TS-1: Hot Start
Symptoms Possible Causes Troubleshooting Corrective Action
Starting stall; slow T48 Excess starting fuel flow SPAM: check calibration
increase plus XN25 hangup of fuel flow
or dropoff
T48 high after lightoff and Acceleration fuel flows SPAM: check PS3 sensor
during first portion of start too high or too low system
cycle VSVs off schedule TS-23
T48 start temperature over
limit VIGVs off schedule TS-23
T48 start temperature over
backup start schedule limit VBVs off schedule TS-23
NOTE Also see TS-9 HPT/HPT degradation Borescope engine per Replace engine if out of
for starting stalls WP 4015 00 specified limits
Dirty compressor Borescope engine per Water-wash engine per

WP 4015 00 WP 4014 00
Fuel metering valve SPAM
supply pressure
exceeds upper/lower
limits
Starter cutout speed too SPAM

low
Starter air/gas/hydraulic TS-25

supply pressure too low SPAM: check starter
system
Premixer failure Inspect premixers Repair or replace as

required per
WP 1510 00
Any of the above Perform engine Replace engine if out of
overtemperature specified limits
inspection per
WP 4026 00
10-1
10-2 10-17
10-18
10-3
10-4 10-19
10-20
10-5
10-6 10-21
10-22
10-7
10-8 10-23
10-24
10-9
10-10 10-25
10-26
10-11
10-12 10-27
10-28
10-13
10-14 10-29
10-30
10-15
10-16 10-31
10-20 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-2: Post-Shutdown Fire

T48 rise during normal Leaking fuel shutoff SPAM: close valves, one Turn fuel off
shutdown valve(s) at a time, to isolate faulty Motor engine as
T48 >1,000°F (>538°C) valve required to blow out fire
after shutdown Motor gas generator
with starter and ignition
off until T48 indicates
400°F (204°C) or less.
Do not exceed starter
duty cycle
Replace valves as
required
Borescope HPT per
WP 4015 00 if T48
exceeds 1,000°F
(538°C)
Sensor system failure TS-27
TS-3: Inlet Screen Differential Pressure

Pressure high Inlet screen clogged Inspect inlet screen Clean screen
with dirt or debris Replace nylon sock
Inlet screen restricted Inspect inlet screen Deice screen; provide

by ice anti-icing
Reduce power until
screen is free of ice
NOTE If any debris
has passed through or
around the screen,
remove the debris and
inspect the engine
inlet for possible
damage. Also, bores-
cope the HPC and
LPC for possible
damage per
WP 4015 00
Sensor system failure Sensor failure SPAM
Change 5 10-21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-4: Flameout
Flame loss, XN25 >9,500 Sensor system failure TS-29

rpm SPAM
Flame loss, XN25 >9,500
rpm Low or no fuel flow or SPAM: check fuel system Clean/replace as
fuel pressure SPAM: check PS3 sensor required
system
VG system off schedule Check T2 sensor system;
TS-27
Check all VG system
linkages
SPAM: troubleshoot
control
(FMV) failure
Staging valves failed TS-7

open
Bleed valves failed TS-8

close
TS-5: Power Supply Failure

No control indications Electrical power supply Inspect engine for loose SPAM: repair/replace
loss piping/joints that may power supply as
have been jarred loose if required
high-power stall occurred
Engine shutdown with Component failure in TS-9 if stall occurred

possible stall power supply SPAM
10-22 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-6: Fuel Supply Temperature

Gas fuel below TSV limit Sensor system failure SPAM SPAM: inspect fuel
metering valve for
hydrates
Fuel supply temperature Sensor system failure If temperature exceeds SPAM

high Fuel cooler system 700°F (371°C), fuel Replace hoses and
failure system hose life may be other temperature-
affected sensitive fuel system
SPAM components per
appropriate work
package
TS-7: Staging Valve

Staging Valve Failure Coil failure Check resistance per Replace per
table 10-5 WP 1510 00
Internal mechanisms Replace per
WP 1510 00
Signal conditioning or SPAM SPAM
display failure
Cable Check continuity Replace cable
Change 5 10-23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-8: Stage 8 and CDP Bleed Valves

Bleed valve LVDT failure or LVDT sensor system TS-24 Replace valve per
difference failure WP 1610 00
Control system failure SPAM
Torquemotor failure or null LVDT sensor system TS-24 Replace valve per
current shift failure WP 1610 00
Torquemotor failure Replace valve per
WP 1610 00
Bleed valve position error LVDT sensor system TS-24 Replace valve per
failure WP 1610 00
Low or no hydraulic Check VG pump and HCU Clean or replace filters/
pressure system filters and screens screens as required
Check for air in hydraulic Bleed system

system
Bleed valve slews open or Miswiring Calibrate bleed valves Correct wiring
closed during stall power (while motoring) and
change observe valve position
Thrust balance pressure off Any of the above

schedule
Valve internal damage Replace valve per
WP 1610 00
10-24 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-9: Stall
NOTE A starting stall is characterized by a hung start, slow acceleration to idle, lower than
normal fuel manifold pressure (or fuel flow), and higher than normal power turbine inlet temper-
ature (T48). Occasionally, the stall will continue at idle power. A stall at idle can be recognized
by one or a combination of any of the following symptoms: higher than normal T48, higher than
normal fuel manifold pressure, or XN25 does not increase or is sluggish when power is advanced
from idle.
Stall Borescope engine per Replace engine if out of
Starting stall WP 4015 00 borescope inspection
limits
VG system(s) off Inspect VSVs, VIGVs, CAUTION Bores-
schedule and VBVs check rigging cope engine before
per WPs 1411 00, water-washing.
1113 00, and 1312 00
Washing before bore-
TS-23
SPAM (Control System) scope may cause
additional damage if
FOD already exists
Check VG pump Replace VG pump per
WP 1812 00
Starting system failure TS-25

FOD Borescope engine per Replace engine if out of
WP 4015 00 limits
Determine source of FOD CAUTION Bores-
Inspect inlet system per cope engine before
WP 4010 00
water-washing.
Washing before bore-
scope may cause
additional damage if
FOD already exists
Binding or loose VIGV Check linkages Replace parts as
or VSV linkage required per
WPs 2412 00 and
2413 00
Change 5 10-25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-9: Stall (Continued)

Stall Ice on inlet screen Inspect inlet screen Activate deicing system
Starting stall (cont'd) Inspect engine for Melt ice with portable
damage from ice on heater
VIGVs Repair compressor if
Borescope engine for ice damage is within
damage per WP 4015 00 acceptable limits
Replace engine if out of
borescope inspection
limits
Inlet restricted by Remove obstructions; if Repair compressor or

foreign objects other screen integrity has been replace engine if FOD
than ice damaged or if there is a exceeds repair limits
possibility that objects Clean inlet and collector
have passed through the
screen into the
compressor, borescope
the engine for FOD per
WP 4015 00
High or low fuel TS-22
manifold pressure
Dirty compressor Inspect inlet per Water-wash engine per

WP 4010 00 WP 4014 00
Borescope HPC per
WP 4015 00
Unknown All of the above If all procedures above
TS-1 fail to show the cause of
the problem, the engine
must be replaced
TS-10: T3 (High Pressure Compressor Discharge Temperature)

High/over limits Dirty HPC Inspect inlet per Water-wash engine per
WP 4010 00 WP 4014 00
Borescope HPC per
WP 4015 00
Damaged HPC Borescope engine per Repair or replace
WP 4015 00 engine as required
Control system failure SPAM: check to see if SPAM: replace T3

engine is operating on sensor as required per
PS3 on a hot day WP 1517 00
10-26 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-10: T3 (High Pressure Compressor Discharge Temperature) (Continued)

A/B difference over limit Sensor system failure TS-27

Sensor failure
TS-11: T48 (Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature)

T48 average over limit Sensor system failure TS-27
Single probe temp over Nozzle failure Determine hot or cold T48 Repair or replace, as
limit based on known good required, per
Over spread limits T48 distributions (figure WP 1510 00
10-3). Determine suspect If hot T48, borescope
premixers based on HPT per WP 4015 00
figure 10-4
Staging valve failed Check for malfunctioning Replace staging valve,
closed staging valve as required
HPT degradation Borescope HPC and HPT

per WP 4015 00
Fuel supply pressure SPAM
low (starting only)
Excess fuel flow
(starting only)
T48 average under limit Flameout TS-4

SPAM

Loss of average reading Sensor failure TS-27
Loss of any individual Turbine rotor and/or Borescope turbine per
probe stator damage WP 4015 00
Loss of three adjacent
probes
Loss of any four probes
Change 5 10-27

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-11: T48 (Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature) (Continued)

Higher T48 reading than VG system off schedule Check VG systems per
previous reading at 100% WPs 1411 00, 1113 00,
power under same 1312 00, and 1313 00
operating conditions; all SPAM
other parameters changed
with T48 T2 sensor failure TS-27
WP 4010 00 WP 4014 00
Borescope HPC per Repair/replace as
WP 4015 00 required
FOD Borescope engine per Repair/replace as
Hot section WP 4015 00 required
deterioration
T48 overshoot or Sensor system or TS-27

fluctuation at high power indicator failure SPAM
steady-state
Fuel supply system Check fuel pressure SPAM
failure
Worn or unstable fuel SPAM

metering valve
TS-12: Lube Supply/Scavenge and VG Hydraulic Filter Differential Pressure

High differential pressure Contaminated filter Inspect filter Clean/replace filter

element element as required (for
VG pump/HCU filter,
see WP 4021 00)
Locate source of Correct source of

contamination contamination
SPAM
Check pump screens per

WP 4020 00
Check chip detectors per TS-13
WP 4017 00
Sensor failure: pressure Sensor system failure SPAM
less than zero or over
sensor limits
10-28 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-13: Chip Detector

Chip detector alert Sensor system failure Check chip detector per Replace chip detector
WP 4017 00 per WP 1910 00 as
SPAM required
Engine bearing failure Check all scavenge Flush lube and

screens, chip detectors, hydraulic systems
and system filters for Replace engine as
debris (bearing debris required
plus increased engine
vibration) per
WPs 4017 00, 4020 00,
and 4021 00
Lube or VG hydraulic Check lube and hydraulic Flush lube and

pump failure screens and system filters hydraulic systems
for debris per Replace defective VG or
WPs 4020 00 and lube/scavenge pump
4021 00 per WP 1812 00 or
1813 00 as required
Chip detector failure Sensor system failure Check chip detector per Replace chip detector
WP 4017 00 per WP 1910 00 as
Clean chip detector required
SPAM
Change 5 10-29

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-14: Lube Scavenge Temperature

Overtemperature: dark oil Low oil level in lube tank Check oil level Drain, flush clean, and
in tank samples; burned service tube/hydraulic
odor; sludge and varnish system and all filters
on oil filter; sludge on chip Clean chip detector as
detector required per SPAM
Refill tanks to correct
level; monitor scavenge
temperature when
operation resumes
Low oil flow in sumps Flow-check supply jets Replace engine as

per WP 4027 00 required
Check lube/scavenge Replace pump per

pump discharge pressure WP 1813 00 as
required
Check filter Clean/replace oil filter

as required
Scavenge pump inlet Clean scavenge pump

screens clogged inlet screens per
WP 4020 00
Determine and
eliminate cause of
contamination
High oil supply TS-16 SPAM

temperature
Sump air/oil seal failure Check individual sump Repair or replace
temperatures to isolate engine as required
area of failure
Fluctuating lube scavenge Sensor system failure TS-27

temperature
Control valve cycling SPAM
Fluctuating lube supply SPAM
temperature
10-30 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-15: Lube Scavenge Pressure

High pressure Lube scavenge filter Check lube and scavenge Replace filter as
contaminated filter per WP 4020 00 required
SPAM Determine and correct
cause of contamination
Piping, check valve, SPAM SPAM

heat exchanger, or
other components
between lube and
scavenge pump outlet
and oil tank are too
restrictive due to
contamination or failure
Cold oil Warm oil with heater or

by operating engine
Sensor failure Sensor system failure SPAM
TS-16: Lube Supply Temperature

Overtemperature Oil cooler fouled SPAM

Improper oil cooler
temperature control
High lube scavenge oil TS-14

temperature
Below minimum Lube heater failure SPAM
Sensor failure Sensor system failure TS-27

SPAM
Change 5 10-31

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-17: Lube Supply Pressure

High pressure Low oil temperature Run engine long enough

CAUTION Do not to warm oil
operate engine if oil SPAM: check operation of
lube oil cooler and/or lube
pressure is more than
tank heater
30 psig (206.8 kpa)
above normal after Sensor system failure SPAM
engine reaches stabi- Oil line blockage or kink Check for crimped or Replace or clean oil
lized temperature. Con- blocked oil supply tubes lines as required
tinued operation under downstream of pressure
these conditions may tap
damage the engine SPAM
Clogged oil lines and Monitor scavenge oil Clean oil lines
jets, often indicated by temperature and record (Pulling vacuum is one
tendency of pressure to any abnormal acceptable method)
creep upward temperature to isolate Replace engine
problem area. Check all
chip detectors and record
locations of chips before
replacing engine
Flow-test bearing sumps
per WP 4027 00
Low pressure with Low oil tank level SPAM

fluctuation
Oil leak Check external Replace leaking
components for leakage components
Check torque on all oil Retighten all loose
lines fittings
Sensor failure SPAM
Oil/water contamination Check oil sample for milky SPAM

appearance or for dilution Repair source of water
with water. Isolate and entry into tank. Drain,
remove source of water, if flush, and refill oil
found system and clean or
replace oil filters
Lube/scavenge pump Check pump relief valve Replace lube/scavenge

relief valve failure pump per WP 1813 00
10-32 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-17: Lube Supply Pressure (Continued)

Low pressure with Obstructed or collapsed Disconnect supply line at Replace supply line
fluctuation oil supply line to pump pump and check flow
(cont'd)
Check oil-in flex hose for Replace oil-in hose
deterioration
Check for obstruction in Remove obstruction

pump inlet from pump
Replace lube/scavenge
pump per WP 1813 00
as required
Clogged oil filter Check oil filter ∆P SPAM: service filter
Low pressure without External oil leak Inspect for large oil leaks Repair leaks
fluctuation
Internal oil leak Check for high oil Repair or replace
(possible damage to oil consumption engine as required
seals)
Lube/scavenge pump Check lube or scavenge Replace lube/scavenge

failure discharge for oil flow pump per WP 1813 00
Sensor system failure SPAM
Normal lube oil pressure Low oil tank level SPAM

with fluctuations > ±5 psi
Oil/water contamination Check oil sample for milky Repair source of water
NOTE Oil pressure
appearance or for dilution entry into oil tank. Drain,
fluctuation during tran- with water flush, and refill oil
sients is considered nor- system with fresh oil.
mal; however, the Clean or replace oil
fluctuations should stop filters
within 1 minute after a Clogged filter Check oil filter ∆P SPAM
steady-state condition is
established Sensor system failure SPAM
Blocked or defective Check pump screen per
pump inlet line WP 4020 00
SPAM
Defective lube/ Replace lube/scavenge

scavenge pump relief pump per WP 1813 00
valve as required
Defective oil tank vent SPAM
Air in system lines Run engine to purge air
Change 5 10-33

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-17: Lube Supply Pressure (Continued)

No oil pressure Sheared pump shaft Check for XN25 indication Replace pump if XN25
while motoring engine indication is present
Verify lube supply to with no oil pressure and
pump normal oil supply to
pump
Low oil tank level SPAM

Faulty oil pressure SPAM
indication; faulty
transmitter or pressure
line
Obstructed oil supply Disconnect supply line Continue

line to pump and check for presence of troubleshooting
oil
Check oil supply flex hose Replace hose
for deterioration
(collapsed or kinked)
Check for obstruction in Remove obstruction
pump inlet and clean tank
Check for improperly Correct problem
connected lines or
reversed check valve
Obstructed tank inlet Remove inlet strainer and Remove obstruction

strainer inspect for obstructions and clean oil strainer
and tank
Lube/scavenge pump Check lube or scavenge Replace lube/scavenge

failure discharge for oil flow pump per WP 1813 00
Loss of pump prime Check pump inlet line for Fill oil line with oil as
presence of oil required
10-34 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-18: Lube System - Miscellaneous

Oil contamination Maintenance error; lube Contact GE M&I Flush lube and
tank serviced with Customer Service before hydraulic systems
contaminated oil continuing operaton Completely drain oil
CAUTION If engine tank and as many
is operated for more service lines as
possible. Service with
than 200 hours with
fresh MIL-L-23699 oil
MIL-L-23699 oil con- and operate the engine
taining more than 5% for 5 minutes at core
mineral oil, significant idle. Shut down the
internal coking may engine, drain the oil
occur tank and lines, and refill
with fresh oil
Lube/scavenge or VG Check lube and hydraulic Flush lube and

pump failure screens and system filters hydraulic systems
for debris per Replace defective VG or
WPs 4020 00 and lube/scavenge pump
4021 00 per WP 1812 00 or
WP 1813 00 as
required
Engine bearing failure Check all scavenge Flush lube and

screens, chip detectors, hydraulic systems
and system filters for Replace engine as
debris (bearing debris required
plus increased engine
vibration) per
WP 4017 00, 4020 00,
and 4021 00
Dirty engine Borescope engine per Water-wash engine per
WP 4015 00 WP 4014 00
Tighten coupling nuts or
replace defective parts
as required
Liquid fuel in lube oil Check lube to fuel heat SPAM

tank exchanger for leaks
SPAM
Change 5 10-35

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-18: Lube System - Miscellaneous (Continued)

High oil consumption Records in error Verify records Correct records
Oil leak in combined See figure 10-5 See figure 10-5

actuator drain,
combined accessory
drive pad drains,
combined drain-sumps,
starter drain, or external
lines
Oil pump seal drain See figure 10-5 See figure 10-5
leakage
TGB assembly See figure 10-5 See figure 10-5
Internal engine damage See figure 10-5 See figure 10-5
Front frame strut See figure 10-5 See figure 10-5

leakage
Air/oil separator Inspect lines and drains Clean or replace as

blockage SPAM required
Extended engine SPAM: control system SPAM

operation with no LPT
rotation
Sump pressurization Inspect tubes and vents Clean or replace as

tube or vent line required
blockage or damage
Lube pump failure Inspect pump and check Replace lube/scavenge

(flooded sump) discharge pressure pump per WP 1813 00
TS-19: Not Applicable
10-36 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-20: XN25/HPC Speed

Sensor mismatch Sensor system failure TS-28

No speed indication SPAM
Idle speed too high/low Stall TS-9

T2 sensor failure TS-27
Control failure SPAM
Speed sensor system TS-28

failure

failure
Fuel system failure TS-25
Idle speed instability Water in fuel Check fuel filters SPAM
SPAM

failure
Fuel inlet pressure SPAM
fluctuation
Intermittent T25, XN25, TS-27

or PS3 sensor output TS-28
SPAM: PS3
Accel to maximum power Low fuel flow or no fuel SPAM: check SPAM
not possible flow and fuel pressure - PS3 line to sensor
- PS3 sensor circuit
- Fuel flow vs PS3
schedule
Fuel filter blocked Check fuel filters Replace filters
VG system off schedule TS-23
Change 5 10-37

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-21: Overspeed
XN2 overspeed Control failure (without Perform overspeed Replace engine if

XNSD overspeed shutdown) inspection per damage exceeds limits
XN25 overspeed WP 4025 00 SPAM
SPAM

SPAM
Worn or unstable fuel SPAM
metering valve
Radial drive shaft failure Attempt manual engine Isolate and replace
rotation from defective drive
maintenance crank pad component per
on aft end of TGB Assy. WPs 2810 00,
View HPC rotor through 2811 00, or 2812 00
borescope port
(WP 4015 00) to see if
HPC rotates
High-speed coupling SPAM SPAM

shaft failure
Any of the above Perform overspeed Replace engine if

inspection per damage exceeds limits
WP 4025 00
10-38 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-22: Miscellaneous Liquid or Gas Fuel System Problems

Shutoff valve cycling Control failure SPAM

Valve failure
Valve power failure
Fuel manifold pressure too Fuel shutoff valve failure SPAM

low at start
Fuel manifold pressure too Premixer Check fuel flow; if within Replace premixers per
high or too low at power limits, check premixers WP 1510 00 as required
SPAM
Fuel supply system SPAM

failure
Fuel metering valve slewing Incorrect gas supply

wide open during start pressure
Improper wiring SPAM SPAM

between valve and
control
Improper piping SPAM SPAM

between fuel supply and
valve
Change 5 10-39

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-23: Variable-Geometry Systems (VBVs, VIGVs, and VSVs)

A/B difference out of limits LVDT sensor system Check resistance per Replace actuator per
failure table 10-1 WPs 1112 00, 1311 00,
SPAM: check or 1410 00
instrumentation and
control systems
Loose/damaged Check system linkages for Adjust or replace as

actuation system loose, missing, or binding required
hardware
Torquemotor failure LVDT sensor system Check resistance per Replace actuator per
failure table 10-1 WPs 1112 00, 1311 00,
instrumentation and
control systems
Torquemotor/servovalve Check resistance per Replace HCU per

failure table 10-1 WP 1811 00 (servos not
SPAM: check individually replaceable)
instrumentation and
control systems
SPAM: check schedule by
motoring engine
10-40 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-23: Variable-Geometry Systems (VBVs, VIGVs, and VSVs) (Continued)

Position error LVDT sensor system Check resistance per Replace actuator per
Schedule limits exceeded failure table 10-1 WPs 1112 00, 1311 00,
instrumentation and
control systems
Low or no hydraulic Check VG and HCU Clean or replace filters/

pressure system filters/screens screens as required
Check pressure at idle Replace VG pump per
WP 1812 00
system
Incorrect rigging Check rigging and VBV Correct rigging as

door seals per required
WPs 1411 00, 1311 00, Replace door seals per
1312 00, and 1313 00 1313 00 as required
HCU torquemotor null Check lube supply RTD Replace HCU per
current shift: Check drains WP 1811 00
- Contamination Replace HCU per
- Mechanical failure WP 1811 00 operate
- Low/high lube oil with lube temperature
temperature bewteen 140°F to
- Leaking actuator(s) 160°F (59.9°C to
71.1°C)
Replace actuator(s) per
WPs 1112 00, 1311 00,
or 1410 00
Short or open in secondary Sensor system or LVDT TS-24 Replace defective

windings failure SPAM actuator per
WPs 1112 00, 1311 00,
or 1410 00
Off schedule Any of the above
VIGVs too closed P0 or PS3 transducer SPAM SPAM: calibrate

calibration transducers to absolute
scale
P0 sensor line leakage Tighten fittings; blow out

or trapped fluid
Change 5 10-41

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-24: LVDTs and Torquemotors

LVDT failure LVDT sensor failure Table 10-1 Table 10-1

Torquemotor failure Torquemotor coil failure Table 10-1 Table 10-1
TS-25: Miscellaneous Starting Problems

No start SPAM
NOTE Deenergize
ignition system, place
start selector switch
in ON position, and
motor engine per
packager"s instruc-
tions to purge any fuel
vapor. Do not exceed
starter duty cycle
SPAM: check gas
properties system
PS3 and P48 sensor SPAM: trace lines or apply Switch lines
swapped pressure and check SPAM
readout at ECU
No start: XN25 and fuel Faulty ignition circuit Perform ignition system Repair or replace as
pressure OK (rpm and fuel pressure functional check per required
OK) WP 4023 00 SPAM
SPAM (wrong igniter
selected)
Incorrect fuel SPAM
Fuel metering valve

(FMV) minimum stop
incorrectly set
FMV failure SPAM
Fuel system piping SPAM

leaks or restrictions
10-42 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-25: Miscellaneous Starting Problems (Continued)

No start: XN25 and ignition Fuel supply pressure SPAM: check vent and SPAM
OK, but low or no fuel failure drain valve positions
manifold pressure
Check fuel shutoff valve Open fuel inlet valve
position
Check fuel system SPAM: correct as

pressures required
Fuel contamination Disconnect supply lines Bleed air from fuel

and check for clogged supply lines
upstream filters or air and/ Flush contaminants
or contamination in supply from fuel supply lines
lines Clean upstream filters
No start: XN25 rises rapidly Sheared radial drive Crank engine from Isolate and replace
to starter cutout speed shaft, PTO gear, or maintenance pad on aft defective drive
input gearing end of TGB Assy. View component per
rotor through borescope WPs 2810 00, 2811 00,
port (WP 4015 00) to see and 2812 00
if HPC rotates
Failure to light off - T48 not Same as above Same as above

rising on start
Ignition system failure Perform ignition system Replace igniters per
functional check per WP 1516 00
WP 4023 00 SPAM
SPAM
Change 5 10-43

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

Failure to light - T48 not Gas pressure GP1 too Check shutoff valves in SPAM
rising on start low during start upstream fuel system;
(GP1 < 250 psi during should be open. Check
start) vent valve; should be
closed
Wrong igniter selected Check control to ensure Change tunables if

IGN1DMD = T and required
IGN2DMD = F
GP2 ≥ GP1 Wiring or plumbing Fix wiring or plumbing

problem
Verify that A-ring With engine shut down, Replace per

staging valve (staging manually toggle staging WP 1510 00
valve No. 4) is operating valve No. 4 from control.
Listen to hear if valve is
clicking or check that
valve is magnetized
Incorrect LHV value Check with gas supplier

and correct equipment
problem or input value
manually

and check for clogged supply lines, flush
upstream filters, or air contaminants from fuel
and/or contamination in supply lines, and clean
supply line upstream filters
Acoustics trip - N25 < 6,300 PD starting software Get software updates
adjustments not up to off support central or
date the LM6000 QuickPlace
and load into core
central
Acoustics trip - N25 > 6,300 High TFLMAX Reduce TFLMAX
Emergency shutdown GP2 > GP1 during start Check wiring. Check Repair or replace as
during start while fuel is flowing pressure sense lines required
(GP1, GP2). Check
transducers
10-44 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

Shutdown due to loss of Dirty flame detector Clean lens and retry Clean or replace per
flame during start - (T48 lens WP 1515 00 as
rising during start, N25DOT required
positive during start)
Flame sensing SPAM: check flame SPAM
parameters not set recognition delay setting
properly (RS flame detectors)
Signal conditioner Sensing TS-29
failure
Metering valve blocked Check fuel line upstream

of FMV for debris
PS3 leak Check PS3 lines for leak
Change 5 10-45

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

Hung start - failure to reach PS3 leak Check for leak Repair or replace
idle, T48 rising, and flame sensing line as required
is detected; N25 > 6,300
Incorrect LHV Check value Fix value in control if
incorrect
Incorrect specific gravity Check value Fix value in control if
(SG) incorrect
Acceleration inhibited Review data is Increase TFLMAX at

by max fuel flow Regulator = 10 or point of hang by 25°F
regulator WF_CTRL = 10 (13.9°C) and update
TFLMAX schedule if
IDLE is achieved
Speed sensor system TS-28 SPAM

failure
Radial drive shaft or Check drive shaft and Service, repair, or

starter failure starter replace starter (GE
SPAM only) per WPs 1814 00,
1815 00, and 4022 00.
Repair or replace radial
drive shaft per
WP 2810 00
Low fuel flow or no fuel SPAM: check PS3 lines to
flow and fuel pressure sensor and sensor circuit

VG position off TS-23

schedule
Excessive compressor Borescope HPC per Replace engine

rotor rub WP 4015 00. Rolled-over
blade tips indicate heavy
rubs
HPC damage Borescope HPC per Repair or replace

Start stall/hot start TS-1 or TS-9
10-46 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

Hung start - failure to reach PS3 leak Check for leak Repair or replace
idle, T48 rising, and flame sensing line as required
is detected;
4,800 < N25 < 6,300 Incorrect LHV or Check value Fix value in control if
incorrect SG incorrect
Engine dirty or out of Borescope engine per Repair or replace

limits WP 4015 00 and inlet per engine if out of limits
WP 4010 00. Ensure
there is no FOD and
water-wash per
WP 4014 00
VG problem TS-23
failure SPAM

1815 00, and 4022 00.
drive shaft per
WP 2810 00


schedule

rubs

Change 5 10-47

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

Hung start - failure to reach Starter Check starter

idle, T48 rising, and flame WPs 1814 00, 1815 00,
is detected; N25 < 4,800 and 4022 00
Engine dirty or out of Borescope engine per Replace engine if out of

limits WP 4015 00 and inlet per limits. If dirty, ensure
WP 4010 00 there is no FOD and
water-wash per
WP 4014 00
VG problem TS-23
Low starter output SPAM
Low starter air, gas, or SPAM

hydraulic pressure
Speed sensor system TS-28 SPAM

failure

1815 00, and 4022 00.
drive shaft per
WP 2810 00

schedule

rubs

10-48 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

No start, no XN25 Starter air, gas, or SPAM: check starter air, Increase pressure to
indication, no oil pressure hydraulic pressure gas, or hydraulic supply proper limit, or replace
below limits pressure starter if pressure is OK
Starter inoperative
Faulty starter gas, air, or SPAM: check starter gas, Restore power supply
hydraulic shutoff valve air, or hydraulic valve or replace faulty
control voltage and valve component
pressure
Faulty start selector SPAM: check start Replace switch and/or

switch or open circuit selector switch and circuit reset circuit breaker
breaker breaker
failure SPAM
Low starter air, gas, or SPAM

hydraulic pressure

1815 00, and 4022 00
drive per WP 2810 00
Low fuel flow or no fuel - PS3 line to sensor

flow and fuel pressure - PS3 sensor circuit
- Fuel flow vs PS3
schedule
SPAM: check
- PS3 line to sensor
- PS3 sensor circuit
- Fuel flow vs PS3
schedule

and check for clogged supply lines
upstream filters or air and/ Flush contaminants
or contamination in supply from fuel supply lines
lines Clean upstream filters

schedule

rotor rub WP 4015 00. Rolled–over
rubs
Change 5 10-49

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

No start, no XN25 HPC damage Borescope per Repair or replace

indication, no oil pressure WP 4015 00 engine as required
(cont'd)
Start stall/hot start TS-1
TS-9
Seized engine For a cold engine, check Attempt another start
engine rotation with after cool-down period
starter or with ratchet and/or rotation check
wrench on TGB Assy Repair or replace
maintenance crank pad engine as required
For a hot engine, any
attempt to motor the
engine must be made
within 5 minutes after
shutdown. If the engine
cannot be motored within
5 minutes, wait for the
required 4-hour cooling
period before attempting
to motor again. If the
engine turns, make a
normal start. If LP rotor
does not turn by the time
the HP rotor reaches idle
speed, shut down and try
a second start. If this fails
to produce LP rotor
rotation, shut down and
investigate
Check for binding, rubs,
etc
Borescope engine per
WP 4015 00
Check chip detectors per
WP 4017 00
10-50 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

No start, no XN25 Seized engine (cont'd) Check VSV system for If vane has become
indication, no oil pressure mechanical integrity; disengaged or rotated
(cont'd) verify that there is no vane and has grooved the
rotation and that no vane HPC rotor, the vane
tip is digging into HPC must be removed and
rotor replaced. The depth of
the HPC rotor groove
must also be measured.
If the groove is through
the alumina coating, the
engine must be
replaced
Repair or replace as
required per
WPs 2411 00,
2412 00, or 2413 00
Borescope LPC, HPC, Repair or replace as
and HPT for FOD or required per
temperature damage WPs 2411 00,
2412 00, or 2413 00
Check cold engine Replace engine if it
rotation with ratchet cannot be made to
wrench on TGB Assy rotate with ratchet
maintenance crank pad wrench
No start, no XN25 XN25 sensor system TS-28

indication failure
Change 5 10-51

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-26: Engine Vibration

High vibes, HP rotor Sensor system failure Perform functional check Repair or replace
High vibes, LP rotor per WP 4024 00 accelerometers as
SPAM required per
WP 1911 00
SPAM
Rotor imbalance: LP Check and eliminate all Balance rotor per

rotor other possibilities WP 3016 00
Rotor imbalance: HP Check and eliminate all Replace engine
rotor other possibilities
Engine not mounted SPAM: check engine SPAM: realign and
securely mount system tighten mounts
Bearing failure Check chip detector for Repair or replace

metal particles engine as required
Check oil scavenge inlet Repair or replace
screens for metal engine as required
particles
FOD Borescope engine per Repair or replace

Rotor shift Determine if vibrations Replace engine as

are 1/rev for the HP rotor required
Compressor or turbine Inspect compressor inlet Repair or replace

damage area perWP 4010 00 engine as required
WP 4015 00
Dirty compressor Inspect inlet area per Water-wash engine per
WP 4010 00 WP 4014 00
Borescope HPC per
WP 4015 00
Loose sensor Inspect sensor mounting Repair or replace per
WP 1911 00
10-52 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-27: Temperature Sensors

T48 - Loss of average Sensor or cabling Table 10-6, Group 2 Repair or replace as
reading failure, type K Table 10-7 required per
T48 - Cold sensor thermocouple WP 1711 00
SPAM
T48 - Loss of three Signal-conditioning or SPAM

adjacent probes display failure
T48 - Loss of four probes System ground loop Table 10-6, Group 2 Repair or replace as
T48 - Loss of any probe Table 10-7 required per
T48 - High or over limit SPAM WP 1711 00
SPAM
T3 sensor failure Sensor or cabling Table 10-6, Group 3 Repair or replace as

T3 A/B difference over limit failure, type K Table 10-7 required per
thermocouple WP 1517 00
SPAM
Signal-conditioning or SPAM
display failure
T25 A/B difference over failure, resistance Table 10-8 required per
limit temperature detector WP 1310 00
(RTD), see table 10-8 SPAM
display failure

T2 A/B difference over limit failure, RTD, see Table 10-8 required per
table 10-8 WP 1111 00
SPAM
display failure
Lube supply or scavenge Sensor or cabling Table 10-6, Group 6 Repair or replace as
temperature sensor failure failure, RTD, see Table 10-8 required per
table 10-9 WP 1817 00
display failure
Change 5 10-53

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-28: Speed Sensors

XN25 sensor failure Sensor system failure Paragraph 10-3.1, table Repair or replace as
XNSD sensor failure 10-8, and required per
XN25 sensor mismatch table 10-10 WPs 1210 00, 1816 00,
XNSD sensor mismatch Check sensor, wiring, and or 1710 00
sensor installation per
WPs 1210 00, 1816 00,
and 1710 00
display failure
TS-29: Flame Sensor

Flame loss, one sensor (no Dirty sight glass lens Inspect lenses Clean or replace per
flameout) Dirty sensor lens WP 1515 00 as required
Sensor failure Verify operation with UV Replace sensor per
(overtemperature) light source. Verify WP 1515 00 as
temperature (table 10-11) required
Wiring Check package Repair or replace as

connections from sensor required
to package signal
conditioner
Signal conditioner SPAM: check system SPAM
failure voltages
Switch sensor inputs at
the amplifier to determine
whether the problem
follows the sensor
T48 is rising but no flame is Dirty flame detector Clean lenses and retry
detected lens
10-54 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-30: Thrust Balance System

Thrust balance pressure External line leak/ SPAM

sensors difference or obstruction
sensor failure
Internal line leak/ Replace gas turbine
obstruction
Transducer calibration/ SPAM
failure
Thrust balance pressure P0, P25, or P48 SPAM: check for leaks
demand check sensors system failure SPAM: check transducer
calibration
XN2 TS-19
T2 TS-27
VBV or VIGV TS-23
Thrust balance valve LVDT LVDT sensor system TS-24 Replace valve per
failure or difference failure WP 1713 00
Torquemotor failure or null LVDT sensor system TS-24 Replace valve per
current shift failure WP 1713 00
Torquemotor failure TS-24 Replace HCU per
WP 1713 00
Thrust balance valve LVDT sensor system TS-24 Replace valve per
position error failure WP 1713 00
Low or no hydraulic Check VG pump and HCU Clean or replace filters/
pressure system filters and screens screens as required
system
Thrust balance pressure off Any of the above

schedule
Valve internal damage Change valve per
WP 1713 00
Change 5 10-55

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-31: Miscellaneous Problems

Reduced Power Dirty or damaged low or Trending equation, Water-wash (or hand
Use trending equations to high pressure compressor efficiency clean) and confirm
aid determination of power compressors Borescope per effectiveness with
loss, or compare power VIGVs too close WP 4015 00 borescope inspection
output on similar inlet per WP 4014 00
condition
(P2 and T2 days) 1. Improper Check rigging per Rig per WP 1113 00
rigging WP 1113 00
2. Improper con- SPAM: check calibration SPAM: calibrate VIGV
trol calibration drives
3. Mechanical Visually inspect per Determine root cause
malfunction WP 4012 00 and replace hardware
as required
4. PS3 sensor Plot P53 versus P48; Calibrate sensor to

reading too low check for leaks absolute scale;
eliminate leaks
5. P0 sensor Compare P0 to ambient Calibrate sensor using

reading too pressure. P0 ~ 2 to 6 in. accurate barometric
high (upstream water less than ambient gauge
of inlet screen/ pressure
sock)
6. T2 reading too Compare to other inlet Replace sensor per
low temperatures; check WP 1111 00
resistance per table 10-4
VBVs too open (should

close by ~ 33 MW)
1. Bad T2 or Check T2 resistance per Replace sensors as

XN25 signal table 10-8 required per
(2 sensors) Check XN25 per WP 1111 00 (T2) and
table 10-10 WP 1816 00 (XN25)
2. Improper Check rigging per Rig per WP 1312 00
rigging WP 1312 00
3. Miscalibrated SPAM: control system Calibrate VBV driver
calibration
10-56 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-31: Miscellaneous Problems (Continued)

Reduced Power VSVs too closed

Use trending equations to
aid determination of power 1. Bad T25 or Check T25 resistance per Replace sensors as
loss, or compare power XN25 signal table 10-8 required per
output on similar inlet (2 sensors) Check XN25 per WP 1310 00 (T2) and
condition table 10-10 WP 1816 00 (XN25)
(P2 and T2 days) (cont'd) 2. Improper Check rigging per Rig per WP 1411 00
rigging WP 1411 00
3. Miscalibrated SPAM: control system Calibrate VBV driver
calibration
Bad T3 or T48 system
1. Individual sen- Check probes resistance Replace probes per

sor or harness per WP 1711 00 WP 1711 00
failure Check harness resistance Replace harness per
per table 10-7 (visual for WP 1913 00
broken wires)
2. Control system Input type K SPAM: calibrate control

calibration or thermocouple equivalent system or correct wiring
miswiring of 1,000°F voltage and
system confirm control readout
High inlet loss Check loss across inlet Change filters

filters
Nonrecoverable engine Borescope gas turbine Hot section or overhaul

deterioration Trending equations required
High HP rotor speeds at VG system(s) off TS-23

high power and high or low schedule
T48
WP 4010 00 WP 4014 00
Borescope HPC per
WP 4015 00
FOD Borescope engine per Repair or replace
Engine fails to motor, but Radial drive shaft failure Attempt manual rotation Isolate and replace
control indicates motoring; through maintenance defective drive
rapid increase in indicated crank pad on aft end of component per
motoring speed TGB Assy. View rotor WPs 2810 00,
through borescope port 2811 00, and 2812 00
(WP 4015 00) to see if
HPC rotates
Change 5 10-57

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

Engine fails to motor/no Seized engine For cold engine, check Attempt another start
indication of motoring rotation with starter or and/ or rotation check
with ratchet wrench on after cool down period
TGB Assy maintenance Repair or replace
crank pad engine as required
For a hot engine, any
attempt to motor must be
made within 5 minutes
after shutdown. If the
engine cannot be motored
within 5 minutes, wait the
required 4-hour cooling
period before attempting
again. If the engine turns,
make a normal start. If LP
rotor does not turn by the
time the HP rotor reaches
idle speed, shut down and
try a second start; if the
LP rotor still does not
rotate, shut down and
investigate
Check for binding, rubs,
etc
WP 4015 00
Check chip detectors per
WP 4017 00
Speed sensor system TS-28 Repair or replace as
failure necessary
Low starter supply SPAM

pressure
Starter exhaust
blockage
Starter failure Attempt manual engine Service, repair, or
rotation through the replace starter per
gearbox; if engine rotates, WPs 1814 00, 1815 00,
the problem is in the and 4022 00 (GE starter
starter system only)
Accessory failure Remove gearbox-driven If engine will rotate after

accessories one at a time removal of an
and attempt manual accessory, replace the
engine rotation after each failed accessory
accessory is removed
10-58 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

Engine fails to motor/no Transfer gearbox failure If engine will not turn after Replace the transfer
indication of motoring removal of all gearbox per
(cont'd) accessories, remove the WP 2811 00
radial drive shaft per
WP 2810 00. Rotate the
transfer gearbox
FOD If starter and drive drain Repair or replace

operate properly, but engine as required
engine will not rotate,
borescope the engine per
WP 4015 00
Bearing or seal failure Check chip detectors for Repair or replace
debris; check sump engine as required
scavenge screen in lube
and scavenge pump for
evidence of bearing or
seal failure
Random shutdowns or Wiring ground faults SPAM: check engine to
failure to start contol wiring for inproper
shielding or grounding
Check for faulty control SPAM: correct shielding

circuit boards an/or routing of wiring.
Reseat/replace circuit
boards
High enclosure Package ventilation SPAM SPAM

temperature system failure
Broken gas turbine air Inspect external

tube configuration per
WP 4012 00
Power very low. Leak in P48 sensing Inspect sensing lines for Tighten fittings and
Hung on system loose fittings or cracks replace cracked lines
Regulator 7 (P3 Regulator)
Bad P48 transducer Calibrate transducer Replace if not
functioning properly
Change 5 10-59

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-32: Emissions
High CO2 or unburned Natural gas ingested Using appropriate

hydrocarbons into inlet hydrocarbon detection
equipment, sniff for gas
around inlet
Incorrect emissions Use independent

measurement measurement. Check CO
versus NOx
characteristics
Duct burner Measure downstream of

gas turbine or turn off
duct burner
Combustor damage Borescope combustor per Replace engine per
WP 4015 00 WP 3010 00 or
combustor per
WP 2510 00
Partial blowout of A/B/C Adjust flame temperature Remap combustor
ring Contact GE Customer
Service
Combustor damage Borescope combustor per Replace engine per

WP 4015 00 WP 3010 00 or
combustor per
WP 2510 00
High flame Adjust flame temperature Remap combustor
temperatures contact GE customer
service
Corrected NOx > 25 PPM Oxygen concentration Oxygen concentration in Recalibrate oxygen
at baseload power measurement problem exhaust should be at 15% sensing system
± 0.25% at baseload
Emissions equipment Check sensing system Calibrate system per

out of calibration with calibration gas manufacturer specs
Emissions sensing Traverse stack per EPA 40 Relocate sensing probe
location is improper CFR part 60 as required
Leak in emissions Check for leaks. Calibrate Repair/replace as

sensing lines system by introducing necessary
calibrated gas at probe
Fuel properties Check LHVSEL and If difference is >2%

incorrect SGSEL, compare to gas recalibrate system
analysis
10-60 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-32: Emissions (Continued)

Corrected NOx > 25 PPM Flame temperatures too Check mapping per Input new schedule. If
at baseload power (cont.) high manual system has been
operating satisfactory,
and large adjustments
(>100 F) are needed,
further efforts should be
made to determine root
cause. On new
installations large
adjustments from
typical schedules may
also indicate need for
further root cause
determination
Incorrect PS32 reading Check for broken lines, Replace broken sense
loose fitting, transducer line, tighten fitting,
calibration SPAM calibrate
transducers to absolute
scale
Plugged fuel nozzle Check fuel filters for Replace contaminated

(large T48 spread) contamination. Flow- premixers, determine
check premixers per source of contamination
WP 4030 00 and eliminate
Missing or broken leaf Borescope stage 1 nozzle Replace nozzle

seals outer leaf seals (table 4, assembly
WP 4015 00)
Air leakage Check PS3, and check for Repair/replace as
leaks around bleed piping necessary
and other possible
sources of air flow
leakage (enclosure
temperature increase may
indicate developing leak)
Fuel metering valve or SPAM Repair/replace as

trim valve problem necessary
Fuel metering valve Check for software and Input new schedule
tables incorrect (shift FMV match then check
after FMV or software mapping manual
change)
Change 5 10-61

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

Corrected NOx > 25 PPM Engine deterioration Check VIGV rigging per Repair/replace as
at baseload power (cont.) WP 1113 00, water-wash necessary
engine per WP 4014 00.
Collect performance data
per Section 8 of O&M
Manual. Borescope
combustor per
WP 4015 00
ELBO Valve Check ELBO valve Troubleshoot and
(staging valve 6 PD and replace valve as
staging valve 18 PB) necessary
CO > 25 PPM at baseload Oxygen concentration Oxygen concentration in Recalibrate oxygen

power measurement problem exhaust should be at 15% sensing system

Leak in emissions Check for leaks Repair/replace as

sensing lines necessary
Plugged premixers Check for fuel Replace contaminated
(large T48 spread) contamination. Flow- fuel nozzles, determine
check fuel nozzles per source of
WP 4030 00 contamination, and
eliminate
Low P3 Check instrumentation Repair/replace as

necessary

analysis
Leaking fuel nozzles Flow-check fuel nozzles Replace fuel nozzles as
(internal or external per WP 4030 00 necessary
leaks)
Flame temperatures too Check mapping per Input new schedule

low manual
SPRINT™ water Check SPRINT™ Repair/replace as

injection rate too high system necessary
10-62 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

CO > 25 PPM at baseload Gas ingested into inlet Using appropriate Repair/replace as
power (cont.) hydrocarbon detection necessary
equipment, sniff for gas
around inlet
Gas leak down stream Review operating data for Replace leaking hoses
of FMV increase in any of and torque joints as
following parameters appropriate
(while unit was operating
at BRNDMD=15 and
DWB36PCT=0):
WFNOZINRFF,
WFNOZOTRFF, or
WFNOZPILFF. If
decrease is noted, check
applicable WFNOZxxxFF
parameter in
troubleshooting
table TS-35
Staging valve failed Check T48 spread and Repair/replace as

closed or fails to open check staging valve necessary
feedback
FMV contamination Review operating data for Remove contamination
increases in any of the from fuel system
following parameters:
WFNOZINRFF,
WFNOZOTRFF,
WFNOZPILFF. If changes
are seen refer to
table TS-35
Inspect inlets to fuel Remove debris

metering valves for debris upstream of FMV
Inspect FMV metering Heat fuel to proper

section for contamination temperature
(like sulfur)
Cracked heat shield or Borescope combustor per Repair/replace as
holes burnt in hot WP 4015 00 necessary
section
Missing fuel nozzle Borescope combustor per Repair/replace as

ferrule or igniter/flame WP 4015 00 to ensure necessary
detector seal seal is in place
Change 5 10-63

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

CO > 25 PPM at baseload Dome air leakage too Replace combustor Replace combustor
power (cont.) high

change)
NOx and CO > 25 PPM at Oxygen concentration Oxygen concentration in Recalibrate oxygen
baseload power measurement problem exhaust should be at 15% sensing system


Leak in emissions Check for leaks Repair/replace as
sensing lines necessary

analysis
LHV or SG input error Check values Correct values if

necessary
Flame temperatures too Check mapping per Input new schedule

low or too high manual
Leaking fuel nozzle Flow-check fuel nozzles Replace fuel nozzles as

(internal or external per WP 4030 00 necessary
leaks)
Staging valve failed Check T48 spread and Repair/replace as

closed or fails to open check staging valve necessary
feedback
10-64 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

NOx and CO > 25 PPM at Gas leak down stream Review operating data for Replace leaking hoses
baseload power (cont.) of FMV increase in any of and torque joints as
following parameters appropriate
(while unit was operating
at BRNDMD=15 and
DWB36PCT=0):
WFNOZINRFF,
WFNOZOTRFF, or
WFNOZPILFF. If
decrease is noted, check
applicable WFNOZxxxFF
parameter in
troubleshooting
table TS-35
LHV sensing lag Check LHVSEL and Repair/replace as

compare to gas analysis necessary
Fuel skid pressure taps Repair/replace as

plumbed incorrectly necessary
Blocked fuel passages Review operating data for Replace fuel nozzles as
in fuel nozzles decrease in any of necessary. Remove fuel
following parameters system blockage and
(while unit was operating contamination
at BRNDMD=15 and
DWB36PCT=0):
WFNOZINRFF,
WFNOZOTRFF,
WFNOZPILFF. If increase
is noted, check applicable
WFNOZxxxFF parameter
in troubleshooting
table TS-35
Failed PX36 (causing TS-34 Per TS-34

inappropriate flame
temperature
adjustments ABAL
action)

change)
Change 5 10-65

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

NOx and CO > 25 PPM at Dome air leakage too Change combustor Change combustor
baseload power (cont.) high
Non-uniform air flows Borescope compressor, Repair/replace as

diffuser and forward face necessary
of fuel nozzles for
possible blockage
Plug/tape on fuel Visually inspect fuel Remove blockage
nozzles nozzles and fuel hoses for
blockage
High CO (>50) AB mode Leak in one or more Blank pilot manifold at Repair/replace as
and normal CO in other C-ring valve(s) (valve engine interface. Ensure necessary
modes stuck open or dirty seat) that primary and
secondary SOV's remain
closed. Pressurize with
inert gas (Nitrogen) gas
system up to 500 PSIF
(3,447 kPa) then isolate
supply. Monitor gas
pressures on GP1 & GP2
sensors. If leak exists,
pressure rapidly drops.
Note that external fuel gas
system leaks will have
similar results on GP1 &
GP2 so snoopy leak
tester is required at this
time to verify integrity of
FG components
Mapping incorrect for Check mapping per Input new schedule

AB-mode manual
10-66 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

High CO (>100) BC mode Leak in one or more Blank pilot manifold at Repair/replace as
and normal CO in other A-ring valve(s) (valve engine interface. Ensure necessary
modes stuck open or dirty seat) that primary and
secondary SOV's remain
closed. Pressurize with
inert gas (Nitrogen) gas
system up to 500 PSIG
(3,447 kPa) then isolate
supply. Monitor gas
pressures on GP1 & GP2
sensors. If leak exists,
pressure rapidly drops.
Note that external fuel gas
system leaks will have
similar results on GP1 &
GP2 so snoopy leak
tester is required at this
time to verify integrity of
FG components
Mapping incorrect for Check mapping per Input new schedule

BC-mode manual
TS-33: High/Low Combustor Acoustics

High or low combustor Incorrect calibration of Verify calibration per SPAM

acoustics acoustic sensor signal WP 1611 00
conditioning system
Failed sensor Replace sensor per

WP 1611 00
Failed combustor Borescope per Replace combustor per
WP 4015 00 WP 2510 00
Improper fuel system Remap combustor
mapping Contact GE Customer
Service
Change 5 10-67

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-34: Acoustic Sensing Problems

PX36A differs from PX36B: Miscalibrated signal Check calibration and See WP 4029 00
One sensor suspected, conditioning correct per WP 4029 00
reading high or erratically
Loose sensor Check torque on sensor Retorque if loose
adaptor
Failed or failing sensor Swap sensors from side If high or erratic reading
to side follows sensor replace
suspect sensor
Electromagnetic With sensors in original If high or erratic reading

interference or shielding position, swap lead wires persists on same
problem from side to side so "A" channel, reading is
sensor will read out likely caused by EMI or
through "B" channel shielding problem.
signal conditioning and Contact OEM for further
vice versa. (May require technical assistance
short jumper wires
depending on wiring
routing)
PX36 SEL reads low (less Miscalibrated signal Check calibration and See WP 4029 00. If
than 1.2 psi at full power conditioning correct per WP 4029 00 problem persists,
ABC mode) contact GE
10-68 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
TS-35: Shift in Fuel System Flow Parameters

WFNOZINRFF shift high* Leak between inner ring Leak-check Replace leaking hoses
FMV and fuel line and torque joints as
appropriate
Plugged inner ring FMV Check FMV for blockage Remove contamination
blockage
Sulfur contamination At constant power Increase gas
(should affect all rings F_TFLCYC will rise then temperature
but may not be equal engine will run on fuel
effect) flow regulator and when
fuel flow reaches
maximum power will drop
WFNOZINRFF shift low* Plugged fuel nozzle Flow-check nozzles per Clean out
(inner ring) WP 4030 00 contamination and
replace necessary fuel
nozzles
WFNOZOTRFF shift high* Leak between outer ring Leak-check Replace leaking hoses
FMV and fuel line and torque joints as
appropriate
Plugged outer ring FMV Check FMV for blockage Remove contamination/
blockage
Sulfur contamination At constant power Increase gas
(should affect all rings F_TFLCYC will rise then temperature
effect) flow regulator and when
fuel flow reaches
maximum power will drop
WFNOZOTRFF shift low* Plugged fuel nozzle Flow-check nozzles per Clean out
(outer ring) WP 4030 00 contamination and
nozzles
WFNOZPILFF shift high* Leak between middle Leak-check Replace leaking hoses
ring FMV and fuel line and torque joints as
appropriate
Plugged FMV (middle Check FMV for blockage Remove contamination/
ring) blockage
Change 5 10-69

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
TS-35: Shift in Fuel System Flow Parameters

WFNOZPILFF shift high* Sulfur contamination At constant power Increase gas

(cont) (should affect all rings F_TFLCYC will rise then temperature
effect) flow regulator (regulator
10) and when fuel flow
reaches maximum power
will drop
WFNOZPILFF shift low* Plugged fuel nozzle Flow-check nozzles per Clean out
(middle ring) WP 4030 00 contamination and
nozzles
* Based on trending, if the parameter WFNOZXXXFF changes by more than 0.05, this shift may be
significant and may be indicative of a fuel system problem. The values for each WFNOZXXXFF
parameter may vary with combustor operating mode; hence trending should be done for each
operating mode separately.
10-70 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 10-1 LM6000 PD Control System Component Schematic (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 5 10-71

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 10-1 LM6000 PD Control System Component Schematic (Sheet 2 of 2)
10-72 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 10-2 Engine Electrical Interface Panels
Change 5 10-73

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 10-3 LM6000 PD T48 Distributions - Gas Engines
Figure 10-4 Roadmap to Troubleshoot Nozzles Based on Abnormal T48
10-74 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 10-5 Troubleshooting LM6000 High Oil Consumption Due to Gas Turbine Leaks
Change 5 10-75

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 10-6 Interface ES7/E7
10-76 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 5 10-77

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
10-78 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 5 10-79

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
10-80 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 5 10-81

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
10-82 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 5 10-83

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 10-14 T48 Sensor and Harness Layout
10-84 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 10-15 Interfaces ES54/E54 and ES55/E55
Change 5 10-85

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 10-16 Interfaces ES1/E1 and ES9/E9 (Standard) and ES2/E2 and ES14/E14 (Optional)
10-86 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 5 10-87

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
10-88 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 10-19 Interface ES17/E17 (Optional)
Change 5 10-89

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 10-20 Interface ES18/E18 (Optional)
10-90 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 5 10-91

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
10-92 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 10-23 Thrust Balance Valve Interface ES56/E56
Change 5 10-93

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 10-24 Interfaces E27 and E28
10-94 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 10-25 Interfaces ES22/E22, ES23/E23, ES32/E32, and ES35/E35
Change 5 10-95

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 10-26 Interfaces ES12/E12 and ES13/E13 (Optional)
10-96 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 10-27 Interface ES40A/E40B
Change 5 10-97

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 10-28 Interface ES41A/ES41B
10-98 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Change 5 10-99

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
10-100 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 10-31 Interface E57A/E57B
Change 5 10-101

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 10-1 LVDT/Torquemotor Resistance Values for T48
Resistance*
(Ohms ±10%)
Reference Component Unless Corrective
Component Figure Interface Pins Specified Action
VIGV LVDT 10-6 ES7/E7 2-3 88-140 Primary Replace actuator
4-5 66-90 Sec 1 per WP 1112 00
6-7 76-112 Sec 2
VIGV LVDT 10-7 ES8/E8 2-3 88-140 Primary Replace actuator

4-5 66-90 Sec 1 per WP 1112 00
6-7 76-112 Sec 2
VBV LVDT 10-8 ES16/E16 2-3 127 Primary Replace actuator

4-5 75 Sec 1 per WP 1311 00
6-7 85 Sec 2
VBV LVDT 10-9 ES21/E21 2-3 127 Primary Replace actuator

4-5 75 Sec 1 per WP 1311 00
6-7 85 Sec 2
VSV LVDT 10-8 ES16/E16 2-3 88-140 Primary Replace actuator

4-5 66-90 Sec 1 per WP 1410 00
6-7 76-112 Sec 2
VSV LVDT 10-9 ES21/E21 2-3 88-140 Primary Replace actuator

4-5 66-90 Sec 1 per WP 1410 00
6-7 76-112 Sec 2
Stage 8 Bleed 10-30 ES49/E49 3-4 90 Primary Replace bleed

Valve LVDT 5-6 70 Sec 1 valve per
6-7 70 Sec 2 WP 1610 00
Stage 8 Bleed 10-30 ES49/E49 10-11 90 Primary Replace bleed
Valve LVDT 12-13 70 Sec 1 valve per
13-14 70 Sec 2 WP 1610 00
CDP Bleed Valve 10-29 ES48/E48 3-4 90 Primary Replace bleed
LVDT 5-6 70 Sec 1 valve per
6-7 70 Sec 2 WP 1610 00
CDP Bleed Valve 10-29 ES48/E48 10-11 90 Primary Replace bleed
LVDT 12-13 70 Sec 1 valve per
13-14 70 Sec 2 WP 1610 00
TBV LVDT 10-23 ES56/E56 1-2 90 Primary Replace valve per
3-4 70 Sec 1 WP 1713 00
4-5 70 Sec 2
Thrust Balance 10-23 ES56/E56 6-7 90 Primary Replace valve per

Valve LVDT 8-9 70 Sec 1 WP 1713 00
9-10 70 Sec 2
10-102 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table 10-1 LVDT/Torquemotor Resistance Values for T48 (Continued)
Resistance*
(Ohms ±10%)
Reference Component Unless Corrective
Component Figure Interface Pins Specified Action
VIGV T/M Coil 10-10 ES5/E5 A-B, C-D 40 (coil only) Replace HCU per
WP 1811 00
VBV T/M Coil
VSV T/M Coil
VIGV T/M Coil

VBV T/M Coil
VSV T/M Coil
Stage 8 Bleed 10-30 ES49/E49 1-2 32 Max Replace bleed
Valve T/M Coil valve per
WP 1610 00
Stage 8 Bleed 10-30 ES49/E49 8-9 32 Max Replace bleed
Valve T/M Coil valve per
WP 1610 00
CDP Bleed Valve 10-29 ES48/E48 1-2 32 Max Replace bleed
T/M Coil valve per
WP 1610 00
CDP Bleed Valve 10-29 ES48/E48 8-9 32 Max Replace bleed
T/M Coil valve per
WP 1610 00
TBV TM Coil 10-23 ES56/E56 1-2 32 Max Replace valve per
WP 1713 00
* At room temperature or as specified in tables
Table 10-2 Flame Detector Resistance Values
Reference Component Resistance* Corrective

Component Figure Interface Pins (Ohms ±10%) Action
Flame Detectors 10-24 E27/E28 1-2 511 Replace flame
dectectors per
WP 1515 00
Change 5 10-103

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 10-3 Accelerometer Resistance Values

LPC/CRF/TRF 10-25 ES22/E22 1-2 N/A Perform functional
Accelerometers ES23/E23 1-case check per
ES32/E32 2-case WP 4024 00
ES35/E35
Table 10-4 Chip Detector Resistance Values

Chip Detectors 10-26 ES12/E12 1-2 Open Replace chip

ES13/E13 1-case Open detector per
2-case Open WP 1910 00
Table 10-5 Staging Valves Resistance Values

Staging Valve 10-27 ES40A/ES40B 1-4 <5 Replace staging

10-28 ES41A/ES41B 3-3 150-340 valve per
10-29 ES42A/ES42B 4-5 Open WP 1510 00
All pins to case @ 70°F (21°C)
Open
10-104 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table 10-6 Temperature Sensor Resistance Values for TS-27
Reference Component Resistance* Comments

Sensor Component Figure Interface Pins (Ohms)
Group 2 Sensor 10-13 ES45/E45 Al-Cr See WP 1711 00 See

Type K Terminal See WP 1711 00 figure 10-14
Thermo- Case Measure both
couple terminals to
case
On-engine 10-13 ES45/E45 1-2 Table 10-7 May be

harness 3-4 Table 10-7 measured at
5-6 Table 10-7 either end of the
7-8 Table 10-7 on-engine
harness (at
connector)
Off-engine 10-13 ES45/E45 1-1 Table 10-7

cabling 2-2 Table 10-7
3-3 Table 10-7
4-4 Table 10-7
5-5 Table 10-7
6-6 Table 10-7
7-7 Table 10-7
8-8 Table 10-7
Group 3 Sensor 10-15 ES54/E54 A-B 4.3-6.0
Type K ES55/E55 C-D 4.3-6.0
Thermo-
couple Off-engine 10-15 ES54/E54 A-A Table 10-7 May be
cabling ES55/E55 B-B Table 10-7 measured at
C-C Table 10-7 either end of the
D-D Table 10-7 on-engine
harness (at
connector)
Group 4 Sensor 10-16 ES9/E9 (Std) 1-2 Table 10-8 Standard and
RTD or ES14/E14 3-4 Table 10-8 optional sensors
(Opt) each hour, two
200-ohm at 32°F
(0°C) RTDs in
each probe.
Each probe has
an integral lead
Off-engine 10-16 ES9/E9 (Std) Any Lead Continuity May be

cabling or ES14/E14 measured at
(Opt) either end of the
on-engine
harness (at
connector)
Change 5 10-105

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 10-6 Temperature Sensor Resistance Values for TS-27 (Continued)
Reference Component Resistance* Comments

Sensor Component Figure Interface Pins (Ohms)
Group 5 Sensor 10-16 ES1/E1 (Std) 1-2 Table 10-8 Standard and
RTD or ES2/E2 3-4 Table 10-8 optional sensors
(Opt) each hour, two
200-ohm at 32°F
(0°C) RTDs in
each probe.
Each probe has
an integral lead
Off-engine 10-16 ES1/E1 (Std) Any Lead Continuity May be

cabling or ES2/E2 measured at
(Opt) either end of the
on-engine
harness (at
connector)
Group 6 Sensor 10-17 and ES19/E19 1-2 Table 10-9 Standard and
RTD 10-19 (Std) or 3-4 Table 10-9 optional sensors
ES17/E17 each hour, two
(Opt) 200-ohm at 32°F
(0°C) RTDs in
each probe.
Each probe has
an integral lead
Off-engine 10-17 and ES19/E19 Any Lead Continuity May be

cabling 10-19 (Std) or measured at
ES17/E17 either end of the
(Opt) on-engine
harness (at
connector)
10-106 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table 10-7 Cable Circuit Resistance Values at Room Temperature (or as Specified in Table)
Cable Length Resistance (Ohms)

(ft) Chromel Alumel
10 1.3 - 2.1 0.5 - 0.9
20 2.6 - 4.3 1.1 - 1.8

30 4.0 - 6.4 1.7 -2.7
40 5.3 - 8.6 2.2 - 3.6
50 6.7 - 10.7 2.8 - 4.4
60 8.0 - 12.9 3.4 - 5.3
Table 10-8 T2 and T25 RTD Resistance Values for TS-27
Temperature Temperature Resistance

(°C) (°F) (Ohms ±10%)
-40 -40 163
-20 -4 184
0 32 200
20 68 215
40 104 232
60 140 250
NOTE All listed pins to ground > 100 kilo-ohm
Change 5 10-107

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 10-9 Lube RTD Resistance Values for TS-27
Temperature Temperature Resistance

(°C) (°F) (Ohms ±10%)
-40.0 -40.0 84
-17.8 0.0 92
0.0 32.0 100
10.0 50.0 104
37.8 100.00 115
35.6 150.00 126
93.3 200.00 137
121.00 250.00 150
148.9 300.00 159
176.7 350.00 170
204.4 400.00 181
Table 10-10 Speed Sensor Resistance Values for TS-28
Reference Component Resistance

Component Figure Interface Pins (Ohms)
XN25 10-21 ES10/E10 1-2 200 ±10%

ES11/E11 1-2 200 ±10%
XNSD 10-22 ES30/E30 A-B Greater than 500 ohms

ES31/E31 A-B and less than 2,000 ohms
XNSD 10-22 ES30/E30 A-Case >500,000

ES31/E31 B-Case >500,000
10-108 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table 10-11 Maximum Allowable Instrumentation and Accessory Temperatures
Component Temperature
Lube Oil RTDs 220°F (104°C)
XN2 Speed Sensors 140°F (60°C)
XN25 Speed Sensors 225°F (107°C)

XNSD Speed Sensors (Connector) 600°F (316°C)
Variable Stator Vane Actuators 350°F (177°C)
LPC Bleed Valve Actuators 300°F (149°C)
Accelerometer 500°F (260°C)

T48 Sensor (At Lugs) 600°F (316°C)
T3 Sensor (At Connector) 600°F (316°C)
VIGV Actuators 350°F (177°C)
VG Hydraulic Pump and Control Unit 220°F (104°C)
Lube Pump 300°F (149°C)
Starter 250°F (121°C)
Electrical Cable Panel No. 1 400°F (204°C)
Chip Detectors 350°F (177°C)

Thrust Balance Valve 250°F (121°C)
UV Flame Detectors (GE Supplied) 302°F (150°C)
Stage 8 Bleed Valve 250°F (121°C)

CDP Bleed Valve 250°F (121°C)
Staging Valve 300°F (149°C)
Change 5 10-109/(10-110 Blank)

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
4 CHAPTER 11
Maintenance Considerations
11-1 Purpose and Scope 11-3 Standard Maintenance
Practices
This chapter covers basic maintenance and
inspection practices and procedures to be fol- 11-3.1 Points of Reference
lowed during maintenance operations.
The following points of reference are used
11-2 Levels of Maintenance throughout this manual: forward, aft, right,
left, top, bottom, and clock position. These
The workscope for level 1 corrective mainte- points of reference are defined as follows:
nance allows replacement of external parts,
adjustments, and other work (preventive and Forward - the air intake end of the engine
corrective) up to and including removal and
replacement of the entire engine. Aft - the turbine end of the engine
The workscope for level 2 corrective mainte- Right - the right side of the engine when
nance permits the replacement of major viewed from the aft end and when the engine
engine sections (modules) and the replace- is in the normal operating position (gearbox
ment or repair of certain internal parts. Level 2 down)
maintenance is performed on-site on a nonin-
stalled engine or on an installed engine in the Left - the side opposite the right side
enclosure, as permitted by the enclosure
design. Maintenance is performed with the Top - the side of the engine that is up when the
engine horizontal. See Volume II. engine is in the normal operating position
Bottom - the side of the engine on which the

gearboxes are mounted
Clock Positions - the positions of the numbers

on a clock face as seen from aft, looking for-
ward. The 12:00 o'clock position is at the top,
3:00 o'clock is on the right side, 6:00 o'clock is
at the bottom, and 9:00 o'clock is on the left
side.
Change 4 11-1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
11-3.2 Maintenance Within an a. Wear protective clothing, gloves, safety

Enclosure glasses, etc. as required by the mainte-
nance to be performed.
WARNING
b. Ensure the engine will not be started while
• The following steps must be performed personnel are inside the enclosure.
before entering the enclosure. These
conditions must be maintained while c. Post an observer at the exit while mainte-
inside the enclosure to prevent injury to nance is being performed inside the enclo-
personnel. sure.
• The fire extinguishing system must be WARNING Electrical power to system on
deactivated before personnel enter the which maintenance is being performed
enclosure. Suffocation can occur if the must be turned off to prevent arcing and
fire extinguishing system is activated. possible injury to personnel or damage to
CAUTION All hardware items have been components. Tag the switch “Out of Service
manufactured to English measurement units. for Maintenance” to prevent inadvertent
Use of substitute metric sizes is not recom- activation.
mended and will void the warranty for inter-
d. Turn off all electrical power, liquid, and air
facing parts. Tools in metric sizes should be
service to system on which maintenance is
furnished with suitable adapters to mate with
to be performed. Allow the engine to cool.
English measurement unit sizes given. Lim-
its, fits, and clearances may be interpreted in e. The following steps must be performed
either English or metric units, as shown in upon exiting the enclosure after comple-
the tables. tion of maintenance:
NOTE Most of the tasks outlined can be done
(1) Ensure no personnel are inside the
within the enclosure if the horizontal mainte-
nance option is selected, provided that tooling enclosure.
is available. Deviations from the procedures in (2) Close the enclosure door.
the Volume II work packages are permitted as
necessary to adapt to the needs dictated by the (3) Remove tag and turn on electrical
enclosure design, provided that these devia- power, and liquid and air services.
tions do not compromise the intent of the
instruction. Some modular change-out may be 11-3.3 Electrical Bonding Straps
done within the enclosure and some outside,
whichever is more convenient. Consult the Electrical bonding strap contact surfaces shall
packager for planning assistance when ques- be prepared by removing all anoxic film,
tions arise. grease, paint, lacquer, or other high-resistance
material from an area at least one and one-half
Observe all safety precautions listed below, as times the bonding surface contact area. Bonds
well as those listed in Chapters 1 and 8. shall be installed and contact surfaces sealed
within 4 hours of cleaning. The area shall then
be painted to match the surrounding area.
11-2 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
11-3.4 Torque b. It is important to use the correct torque

wrench for the amount of torque being
In these maintenance procedures, it is assumed applied. See table 11-1 for torque wrench
that all threaded parts on the engine will be ranges and requirements.
tightened to a specific torque value. Special
torque values, if required, will be stated in the CAUTION If torque should increase signifi-
text; otherwise, standard torque values should cantly prior to final seating of any threaded
be used. fastener, remove and inspect the fastener for
the cause of the torque increase.
a. Torque values are expressed in lb in.
(pound-inches) or lb ft. (pound-feet). One c. Never over-torque any fastener. Torque
pound-inch (or one pound-foot) is the limits are provided in the text and in
twisting force of one pound applied to a tables 11-2 through 11-5; these limits must
twist-type fastener (such as a bolt or nut) be observed. Refer to paragraph 11-3.4.4
with 1 inch (or one foot) of leverage. This for application information.
twisting force is applied to the fastener to
secure the components. d. Do not use lubricant on bolt threads unless
specified in assembly procedures. Start
threads at least two turns by hand to ensure
proper engagement.
Table 11-1 Torque Wrench Ranges and Requirements
Torque Range Torque Wrench Capacity
0 - 25 lb in. (0 - 2.8 N·m) 0 - 30 lb in. (0 - 3.4 N·m)
25 - 140 lb in. (2.8 - 15.8 N·m) 0 - 150 lb in. (0 - 16.8 N·m)
140 - 550 lb in. (15.8 - 62.1 N·m) 0 -600 lb in. (0 - 67.2 N·m)
30 - 140 lb ft (40.7 - 190 N·m) 0 - 150 lb ft (0 - 203 N·m)
140 - 240 lb ft (190 - 325 N·m) 0 - 250 lb ft (0 - 339 N·m)
240 - 1000 lb ft (325 - 1356 N·m) 0 - 1000 lb ft (0 - 1356 N·m)
Change 4 11-3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 11-2 Torque Values for Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Self-Locking Nuts
Torque Value
Size Threads Per Inch lb in. N·m
8 32 13-16 1.5-1.8
10 24 20-23 2.3-2.5
1/4 20 40-60 4.5-6.8
5/16 18 70-110 7.9-12.4
3/8 16 160-210 18.1-23.7
7/16 14 250-320 28.2-36.2
1/2 13 420-510 47.5-57.6
8 36 16-19 1.8-2.1
10 32 33-37 3.7-4.2
1/4 28 55-70 6.2-7.9
5/16 24 100-130 11.3-14.7
3/8 24 190-230 21.5-26.0
7/16 20 300-360 33.9-40.6
1/2 20 480-570 54.2-64.4
Table 11-3 Torque Values for Engine Plugs and Unions
Tube OD Fitting
(inches) Dash No. Torque Value
1/8 2 40-50 lb in. (4.5-5.6 N·m)
3/16 3 90-100 lb in. (10.2-11.3 N·m)
1/4 4 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m)
5/16 5 155-175 lb in. (17.5-19.8 N·m)
3/8 6 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m)
1/2 8 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.9 N·m)
5/8 10 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m)
3/4 12 45-50 lb ft (61.0-67.8 N·m)
1 16 58-70 lb ft (78.6-94.9 N·m)
1-1/4 20 75-87 lb ft (102-118 N·m)
1-1/2 24 83-100 lb ft (113-136 N·m)
11-1
11-4 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table 11-4 Torque Values for Tubing Nuts and Hose Fittings
Hose Aluminum Female Steel Female Sealing

Tube OD Dash No. Sealing Surfaces Surfaces
(Inches) (Size) (See Note 1) (See Note 2)
lb in. N·m lb in. N·m
0.125 (1/8) 2 - - 40-50 (4.5-5.6)
0.1875 (3/16) 3 30-50 (3.4-5.6) 90-100 (10.2-11.3)

0.250 (1/4) 4 40-65 (4.5-7.3) 135-150 (15.3-16.9)
0.3125 (5/16) 5 60-80 (6.8-9.0) 180-200 (20.3-22.6)
0.375 (3/8) 6 75-125 (8.5-14.1) 270-300 (30.5-33.9)
0.500 (1/2) 8 150-250 (16.9-28.2) 450-550 (50.8-62.1)
0.625 (5/8) 10 200-350 (22.6-39.5) 650-770 (73.4-87.0)
lb ft N·m lb ft N·m
0.750 (3/4) 12 25-41 (33.9-55.6) 75-91 (102-123)
1.000 (1) 16 41-58 (55.6-78.6) 112-128 (152-174)
1.250 (1-1/4) 20 50-75 (67.8-101) 133-150 (180-203)
1.500 (1-1/2) 24 50-75 (67.8-101) 158-183 (214-248)

Notes: 1. These values apply when female sealing surface is aluminum. Male connector and nut
may be either steel or aluminum.
2. These values apply when female sealing surface is steel. Male connector and nut may be
either aluminum or steel.
Change 4 11-5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 11-5 Torque Values for Plugs and Unions Used in Bosses and for Universal Bulkhead Fitting Locknuts
Dash No. Threads Torque
(Size) Size Per Inch lb in. lb ft N·m
2 0.3125 24 40-50 5.2-5.6
3 0.375 24 90-100 10.2-11.3
4 0.4375 20 135-150 15.3-16.9
5 0.500 20 155-175 17.5-19.8
6 0.5625 18 180-200 20.3-22.6
8 0.750 16 270-300 30.5-33.9
10 0.875 14 360-400 40.7-45.2
12 1.0625 12 540-600 45-50 61.0-67.8
16 1.3125 12 700-850 58-70 78.6-94.9

20 1.635 12 900-1050 75-87 102-118
24 1.875 12 1000-1200 83-100 113-136
Figure 11-1 Tightening Sequence for Threaded Fasteners
11-6 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
11-3.4.1 Tightening Procedures e. Washers are installed beneath the part that
turns when tightening, unless otherwise
CAUTION When chilling or heating an specified.
engine part during assembly, do not torque
spanner nuts, locknuts, or retaining bolts f. The torque wrenches listed in table 11-1
until the part has returned to room tempera- are recommended for use within the indi-
ture. The fastener may loosen as the part cated ranges. Larger wrenches have too
cools or may be overstressed as the part great a tolerance and can result in inaccu-
warms and expands. racies.
a. If possible, tighten at a uniformly increas- g. Torque values specified in this manual are
ing rate until the desired torque is actual values to be applied to fasteners.
obtained. In cases where gaskets or other Whenever an adapter (crowfoot, spanner
parts cause a slow permanent set, be sure wrench, etc.) is used with a torque wrench,
to hold the torque at the desired value until torque must be calculated per figure 11-2.
the material is seated.
h. Inspect all nuts and bolts after tightening
b. Apply uniform torque to a series of bolts to make sure they are seated. If any nut or
that have different diameters and are bolt is not seated after the required torque
installed on one flange or in one area. has been applied, remove and inspect for
Torque shall be less than the final torque thread damage.
required for the smallest diameter bolt.
This prevents shearing or breaking of tight i. Lubricate tube/hose connector threads and
bolts due to force concentrations. between the B-nut and ferrule of a connec-
tor. Run B-nuts onto fittings by hand to
c. It is not desirable to tighten to the final ensure that tubes and hoses are aligned and
torque value during the first drawdown; threads are free of burrs. Two wrenches
uneven tension can cause distortion or must be used when loosening or tightening
overstressing of parts. Torque mating parts B-nuts, one on the fitting to which the tube
by tightening the bolts or nuts gradually or hose is being connected to hold it sta-
until the parts are firmly seated. Loosen tionary and one on the B-nut for torquing.
each fastener by one-quarter turn, then This not only prevents twisting the tube,
apply final tightening. Tightening in a dia- but also prevents loosening or overtighten-
metrically opposite (staggered) sequence ing the fitting. When using an extension on
is desirable in most cases (figure 11-1). a torque wrench, calculate the correct
Do not exceed listed maximum torque val- torque input before applying torque per
ues. figure 11-2.
11-2
d. All bolts are installed with heads forward
and up with nuts aft and down, unless oth-
erwise specified.
Change 4 11-7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 11-2 Torque Wrench Correction Factor Determination
11-8 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
11-3.4.2 Running Torque 11-3.4.3 Loose Fasteners
Refer to table 11-6 for minimum breakaway Prior to retightening, examine the fastener for
torque on self-locking nuts. This table applies the cause of the looseness. If safety wire is
to silver-plated, lubricated, and nonlubricated missing, tighten to the required torque and
self-locking nuts. Values given are for nuts safety-wire the fastener. If the fastener has a
with no axial load. To check minimum break- self-locking feature, check breakaway torque
away torque, screw the nut onto a bolt until per the preceding step. Replace defective fas-
two to five threads are exposed beyond the teners as required.
nut. Measure the amount of torque required to
turn the nut on or off the bolt. Nuts that do not 11-3.4.4 Standard Torque
meet these minimum frictional requirements Use the following standard torque tables,
should be replaced. unless otherwise directed in the text.
Table 11-6 Minimum Running Torque for Self-
a. Use the torque values given in table 11-2
Locking Nuts
for steel bolts and nuts (including self-
Minimum Breakaway Torque locking nuts). Values given are for clean
bolts and nuts that are free of nicks and
Threads/
Size Inch lb in. N·m burrs.
0.136 (6) 32/40 1.0 0.1 b. Use half the value given in table 11-2 for
the following applications:
0.164 (8) 32/36 1.5 0.2
0.190 (10) 32 2.0 0.2 (1) Thin steel hex nuts - These nuts have a
height of less than 0.60 inch (15.2
1/4 28 3.5 0.4
mm) of the inside diameter for plain
5/16 24 6.5 0.7 nuts and less than 0.80 inch (20.3
mm) of the inside diameter for self-
3/8 24 9.5 1.1
locking nuts.
7/16 24 14.0 1.6
(2) Nonsteel nuts and bolts except
1/2 20 18.0 2.0
titanium.
9/16 18 32.0 3.6
(3) All bolts threaded directly into alumi-
5/8 18 50.0 5.6 num, magnesium, or other non-steel
3/4 16 50.0 5.6 parts.
c. Use the torque values given in tables 11-3
and 11-4 for gasketed fittings. Install fit-
tings as illustrated in figure 11-3. Torque
values given in tables 11-3 and 11-4 are
for packing made of synthetic material,
asbestos compounds, or soft metal (cop-
per, aluminum, etc.). These values do not
apply to steel gaskets or special boss seals.
Change 4 11-9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
11-3
Figure 11-3 Universal Fittings Installation
11-10 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
11-4
Figure 11-4 Tri-Wing Fastener Drive
11-3.5 Tri-Wing Fasteners wing recess identification numbers.
Tri-wing recessed-head fasteners are available b. Ensure the axis of the drive is aligned with
in a wide range of sizes, and each size requires the axis of the fastener when installing or
the use of a matched driver. See figure 11-4. removing the fastener. If the head of the
When properly used, the tri-wing design per- fastener has been coated with paint or
mits a higher ratio of torque to end-pressure other material, use a driver one size
than is possible with slotted-head or cross- smaller than that indicated, to compensate
head designs, minimizing burring and mutila- for the thickness of material on the walls
tion. The following procedures should be used of the recess.
for tri-wing fasteners.
11-3.5.2 Extraction
11-3.5.1 Installation
a. There is no slope to the walls of mating
a. Select the correct driver. The driver num- surfaces of either fastener or driver, so that
the tendency of the driver to slip out of the
ber should match the recess number of the
recess is minimized. Normal extraction by
fastener head as shown in figure 11-4. applying counterclockwise torque is usu-
Table 11-7 lists a range of standard fas- ally successful.
tener sizes with their corresponding tri-
Change 4 11-11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 11-7 Tri-Wing Drivers and Standard-Thread 11-3.6 Marking of Parts

Fasteners
a. Parts or assemblies designated as matched
Tension Shear
Screw Thread Size sets must be maintained as matched sets
Head Head
throughout maintenance activity. Set num-
0 - 80 0 -
bers, part numbers, and serial numbers
2 - 56 1 - shall be protected during cleaning or
4 - 40 2 1 rework to prevent removal. When identifi-
6 - 32 3 2
cation markings are removed or are no
longer legible, the item must be re-marked
8 - 32 4 3 per the original marking method and at the
10 - 32 5 4 location specified on the applicable draw-
1/4 - 28 6 5 ing. Do not use electrochemical etch
5/16 - 24 7 6
method to re-mark part.
3/8 - 24 8 7 CAUTION Whenever it is necessary to mark
7/16 - 20 9 8 any engine parts, only approved marking
1/2 - 20 10 9 compounds shall be used. Use of unautho-
rized marking compounds can cause damage
9/16 - 18 11 10
to engine parts.
5/8 - 18 12 11
3/4 - 16 13 12 b. Permanent marking of parts should be
done in the area of lowest stress, as speci-
7/8 - 14 14 13
fied on the applicable drawing. Methods
1 - 12 15 14 are listed below in order of preference
(unless otherwise specified). Electric etch
b. If corrosion or other factors have caused is not approved.
the fastener to seize so that failure of the
recess occurs, select the proper drill and c. Marking methods are:
screw extractor for the size of fastener
involved. The bottom of the fastener recess (1) Dot peen - preferred - optical charac-
is shaped so that the drill centers itself nat-
ter recognition (OCR) is DM3. The
urally and no special drilling procedure is
required. Drill into the fastener deep OCR requirement defines the charac-
enough to provide sufficient working ter height, width, and spacing.
depth for the screw extractor. Tap the
extractor to seat it firmly, then apply coun- (2) Vibropeen - acceptable
terclockwise torque to remove the fastener.
(3) Metal stamp - special use only
11-12 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
CAUTION Grease or lead (graphite) pencils NOTE

must not be used to mark combustion-section
or hot-section parts. These materials plus • Although not every possible combination
heat can cause parts material damage. of safety-wiring is shown in figure 11-5,
all safety-wiring must, in general, corre-
d. Lead- and sulfur-containing materials spond to the examples shown.
should not be used for marking any parts.
Preferred materials are listed below: • GE gas turbines use special locking cables
at some locations. When removed for
• Sharpie T.E.C. maintenance, these should be replaced
with equivalent cables or safety wire using
• Chalk standard safety-wiring procedures in this
chapter.
• Dykem - red, yellow, black
11-5
11-3.7.1 Safety-Wiring General
• Ink - Justrite Slink Black; Marco Practices
S-1141, black
The following rules for safety-wiring shall be
• March Stencil Ink observed, unless specific instructions to the
contrary are given in the text.
• Carters Marks-A-Lot - black
• Safety wire shall consist of two strands of
• Carters Marks-A-Lot - blue
wire twisted together (so called double-
• Dixon - black twist method), where one twist is defined
as being produced by twisting the strands
• Dixon - yellow through an arc of 180°, equivalent to half a
complete turn. Use the single-strand
• Dykem Steel Blue DX100 method only when specified.
• Soapstone • Safety wire shall not be installed in a man-

ner to cause the wire to be subjected to
11-3.7 Safety-Wiring chafing, fatigue through vibration, or addi-
tional tension other than the tension
Safety-wiring is the securing of two or more imposed on the wire to prevent loosening.
parts with a wire installed in such a manner
that any tendency for a part to loosen will be • In all cases, safety-wiring must be done
counteracted by additional tightening of the through the holes provided. If no wire hole
wire. This is not a means for obtaining or is provided, safety-wiring shall be to a
maintaining torque, but rather a safety device neighboring part in a manner not to inter-
used to prevent the disengagement of parts. fere with the function of the parts and in
See figure 11-5 for general safety-wiring accordance with the basic principles
practices. described.
Change 4 11-13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 11-5 Safety-Wiring Practices (Sheet 1 of 2)
11-14 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 11-5 Safety-Wiring Practices (Sheet 2 of 2)
Change 4 11-15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
• The maximum span of safety wire was not previously in place or specified in
between tension points shall be 6 inches text.
(152 mm), unless otherwise specified.
Where multiple groups are safety-wired • When removing safety wire, identify
either by the double-twist or the single- safety-wiring holes on parts.
strand method, the maximum number in a
series shall be determined by the number 11-3.7.2 Safety Wire Installation
of units that can be safety-wired with a 24-
inch (610 mm) length of wire. When The following safety-wiring procedures are to
safety-wiring widely spaced multiple be used throughout the engine:
groups with the double-twist method, the
a. Insert the safety wire through the first part
maximum number in a series shall be three
and bend the upper end either over the
units.
head of the part or around it. If bent around
• Both 0.020-inch (0.51 mm) and 0.032-inch it, the direction of wrap and twist of the
(0.81 mm) safety wires are used through- strands shall be such that the loop around
out the engine. The application is deter- the part comes under the strand protruding
mined by the size of the hole in the unit to from the hole. Done this way, the loop will
be safety-wired. Whenever possible, use not tend to slip upward and become slack.
the 0.032 inch (0.813 mm) safety wire.
b. Twist the strands while taut until the
Only new safety wire shall be used in each
twisted portion is just short of the nearest
application.
hole in the next part. The twisted portion
• The safety wire shall be pulled taut while should be within 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) of the
being twisted, and shall have 9 to 12 twists hole in each part.
per inch (25 mm) for 0.020 inch (0.51
c. If the free strand is to be bent around the
mm) diameter wire and 7 to 10 twists per
head of the second part, insert the upper
inch for 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) diameter
strand through the hole in this part, then
wire.
repeat the previous step. If the free strand
• Hose and electrical coupling nuts shall be is to be bent over the unit, the direction of
safety-wired in the same manner as tube twist is unimportant. If there are more than
coupling nuts. two units in the series, repeat the preced-
ing steps.
• Caution must be exercised while twisting
to keep the wire tight without overstress- d. After wiring the last part, continue twist-
ing it or allowing it to become nicked, ing the wire to form a pigtail of three to
kinked, or otherwise mutilated. eight twists (1/4-1/2 inch [6-13 mm] long)
and cut off the excess wire. Bend the pig-
• Only existing safety wire should be tail inward toward the part in such a man-
replaced; do not add safety wire which ner as to prevent it from becoming a
hazard to personnel.
11-16 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
NOTE Apply light finger pressure at the mid- h. When removing safety wire, ensure that all
point of the safety wire span, and flex the wire pieces are removed to prevent them from
in both directions to check for tautness. entering engine parts or otherwise causing
damage.
e. If the safety wire is not taut after safety-
wiring per the preceding instructions, use 11-3.8 Safety Cable
the limits shown in table 11-8 to determine
its acceptability. Safety cable is an alternative to safety wire.
Safety cable is installed through two or more
f. If the safety wire fails to meet the limits parts in such a way that as the fastener or part
shown in table 11-8, remove it and install loosens the safety cable will tighten. When the
new safety wire. safety cable tightens, it will not permit the fas-
tener to part or turn.
Table 11-8 Installed Safety Wire Flex Limit
Length of Safety Wire Total Flexing at 11-3.8.1 Safety Cable General

Between Parts Center Practices
in. mm in. mm The safety cable system has three compo-
1/2 13 1/8 3 nents: safety cable, ferrules, and crimping
tool.
1 25 1/4 6
2 51 3/8 10 • The safety cable is available in one size,

0.032 inch (0.81 mm). One end of the
3 76 1/2 13
cable will have a cable end fitting swaged
4 102 3/4 19 to it. The strands of the cable on the oppo-
site end of the cable are fused together to
5 127 3/4 19
prevent the cable from fraying.
6 152 3/4 19
• The ferrules have spring-loaded, dispos-
g. Always cut, rather than break, safety wire able magazine. When the safety cable is
so that safety wire holes are not torn or installed, the ferrule will be crimped on the
pulled out. Instructions for dismantling open end of the cable.
and disassembly do not include safety wire • The hand operated crimping tool operates
removal because of the obvious necessity in one direction only and has a cycle end
for removing safety wire. dead stop to tell the operator when the fer-
rule is fully crimped. The crimping pres-
WARNING Use extreme caution in moni-
toring the safe and complete removal of all sure of the tool is set by the manufacturer.
excess safety wire. Care must be taken If necessary, the crimping pressure can be
when cutting off the ends of installed wire adjusted with standard hand tools. The
to ensure complete retrieval in order to pre- Snap-On tool has a spring-loaded crimp
vent injury to personnel and/or subsequent rod to hold the ferrule in place during the
engine damage. crimping procedure. Cable tension is done
automatically by the internal retraction
mechanism.
Change 4 11-17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
• Where possible, install the safety cable so NOTE Keep the safety cable as straight as
it does not touch other parts. possible when you safety cable the fasteners
or parts together.
• Make sure the cable is not damaged or
bent when installing safety cable through b. Put the end of the cable without the cable
the holes in the fastener or part. Frayed end fitting into the hole in the part. Pull the
cable assemblies are not permitted. cable through the hole until the cable end
fitting is against the part.
• Install the safety cable through existing
holes only. c. Insert the end of the cable through the sec-
ond part. Choose the hole in the part that
• Unless specified differently in the pack- permits the cable to be as straight as possi-
ager's manual: ble. Pull the cable through the second part.
If three parts must be safety cabled, do the
The maximum length of the safety cable same procedure for the third part.
between safety cabled parts is 6.0 inches
(152.4 mm). NOTE On a two bolt pattern, do not cable in
a negative pull direction. Make sure the cable
No more than three bolts can be safely tied has a positive or neutral pull.
with one safety cable.
d. Put the end of the safety cable coming out
Safety cable can not be used on titanium of the last part to be safety cabled through
fasteners. a ferrule in the ferrule magazine. Pull the
safety cable through the ferrule and use the
11-3.8.2 Crimping Tool Verification safety cable to pull the ferrule out of the
ferrule magazine.
Do a pulloff load test as necessary to make
sure the crimp done by the crimping tool e. Put the end of the safety cable through the
meets the necessary requirements. GE Aircraft crimping head of the crimping tool. Make
Engines recommends the pulloff load test be sure the large hole in the crimping head is
done at the beginning, middle, and end of each on the same side as the ferrule. Move the
shift. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for crimping tool along the safety cable until
pulloff load test procedure. the crimping head is against the ferrule.
Pull back on the retraction knob. Put the
11-3.8.3 Safety Cable Installation
ferrule in the crimping head and release
a. Do a visual inspection of the holes to be the retraction knob. Make sure the ferrule
safety cabled to find all damage. If the is fully in the crimping head.
hole is damaged, replace the part, or if
possible, use another hole to safety cable.
11-18 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
CAUTION Do not put too much tension on m. Push against the safety cable with light fin-
the safety cable. The crimping tool will auto- ger pressure halfway between the safety
matically set the tension. Too much tension cabled parts. If the cable feels loose, do a
will break the safety cable. dimensional check to make sure the safety
cable is serviceable as follows (see
f. Pull the safety cable to the tension post on figure 11-6):
the crimping tool. Wrap the cable com-
pletely around the post. Make sure the (1) Measure the distance between the
cable is in the groove at the top of the post. safety cabled parts. Write this mea-
Pull the cable toward the drive handle until surement down as Dimension A. If
the cable goes behind the locking ball. three parts are safety cabled together,
measure the distance between each of
g. Hold the crimping tool perpendicular to the parts and add the two measure-
the cable in the bolt head. Make sure the ments together to get Dimension A.
ferrule is tightly against the bolt head.
Lightly pull on the end of the safety cable (2) Push against the safety cable with
to remove slack. light finger pressure halfway between
two safety cabled parts. Measure the
h. Push the start cycle button and turn the distance the safety cable moves later-
drive handle clockwise. At the start of the ally. Write this measurement down as
cycle, the tension block will move back- Dimension C.
wards. This movement backwards pro-
vides the cable tension. When the drive (3) Compare the dimensions that were
handle is turned, release the start cycle written down to the limits given in
button. Turn the drive handle until it stops figure 11-6.
(approximately two full turns).
CAUTION Do not try to break the safety
i. Pull up on the safety cable end to remove it cable. If the safety cable must be removed,
from the tension block. cut the safety cable to avoid damage to the
holes in the parts.
j. Pull back on the retraction knob and
remove the crimping tool from the n. If the safety cable is not in the limits given
crimped ferrule and the remaining safety in figure 11-6, cut the safety cable with
cable. wire cutters and remove the installed
safety cable. Install new safety cable.
k. Cut the unused safety cable even with the
11-6
crimped ferrule. Use the side cushioned 11-3.9 Correction of Leaks
cutters. Discard the unused safety cable.
CAUTION Do not over-torque threaded fas-
l. Visually inspect safety cable for kinks, teners as a method of correcting leaking con-
frayed wires, or improper crimps. Remove nections. Over-torquing could result in part
and replace safety cable if a problem failure.
exists.
a. Disassemble the connection.
Change 4 11-19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 11-6 Safety Cable Flex Limits
11-20 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
b. Discard the seal, gasket, or packing, if Make sure all ports, openings, connec-
present. tions, and mating surfaces are capped or
covered, and that the part is protected from
c. Inspect mating surfaces for contamination, potential handling or environmental dam-
scratches, dents, or other surface defects. age.
d. Inspect threaded fasteners for thread dam- f. Bearings shall be handled per
age and ensure that fasteners seat properly paragraph 11-3.20 in this chapter.
when torqued to specified values.
11-3.11 Jackscrews
e. Replace nonserviceable parts and assem-
ble the connection, using new seals, gas- a. When using jackscrews to remove compo-
kets, or packing as required. nents, do not bend flanges or strip threads.
Lubricate jackscrews with engine lube oil
11-3.10 Unpacking and Repacking before installing. Turn jackscrews inward
evenly and in small increments. Always
The following general instructions apply dur- check for and remove burrs or rough edges
ing unpacking and repacking to minimize pos- before using jackscrews. If regular bolts
sible part damage and contamination. are used as jackscrews, the tips must be
blunt and polished. Do not allow compo-
a. Initially, remove only that portion of the
nents to fall free as jackscrews are tight-
packing material necessary to mount the
ened.
part. Where possible, remove the remain-
der of the packing material, including b. Jackscrew holes are often in flanges that
protective caps and plugs, one at a time as are only thick enough for three or four
each connection (fluid, air, or electrical) is threads. The ends of most standard bolts
made. are chamfered, and the first couple of
threads are missing or incomplete. These
b. Retain protective caps and plugs and reus- should not be used as jackscrews without
able packing components for repacking modification, since only one or two
purposes. threads will engage and the threads in the
flange are likely to strip.
c. Install a cap or plug on each connection
(fluid, air, or electrical) as it is discon-
c. Jackscrews, frequently designed as spe-
nected.
cial tools and identified as such, are not
chamfered and full thread engagement will
d. When possible, repack the part for storage
occur. If specially manufactured jack-
or shipment, using the same packing mate-
screws are not available and must be man-
rial in which the replacement part was
ufactured locally, be sure that the ends are
received.
ground to remove the chamfer and the
e. When original packing components are incomplete thread so that the maximum
not available, use locally available packing number of threads may be engaged.
materials and containers to pack the part.
Change 4 11-21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
11-3.12 Protective Closures and Caps f. Reinstall the fitting and screw it down to
its final position.
a. Preventing foreign material from lodging
in drilled passages, fuel lines, oil lines, air Union
lines, and open engine ports is extremely
important. Machined surfaces must be a. Lubricate the packing and roll it over the
properly protected to prevent damage. threads into the groove in the union.
b. Wrap precision parts and cap or plug all b. Screw the union into the boss until the
openings and connections. It is most packing contacts the surface of the boss.
important that all engine parts be kept
clean and free of corrosion. All instruc- c. Tighten the union to the proper torque
tions that specify special handling of parts value.
must be followed without exception.
Bulkhead fitting
c. Accessories, tubes, and hoses may contain
a. Lubricate the fitting end. Screw the nut
fuel or oil at the time of removal. Drain
onto the fitting until the washer face of the
these fluids from the accessory being
nut is aligned with the upper corner of the
removed and cap all connecting hoses or
seal groove.
tubes. Do not use tape.
b. Lubricate the packing and roll it over the
d. Do not remove plugs, caps, etc., until the
threads into the groove in the fitting so that
part is ready for assembly. Check both
it contacts the nut.
seating surfaces for removal of plugs, etc.
prior to assembly. c. Screw the fitting and nut simultaneously
into the boss until the seal contacts the
11-3.13 Universal Fittings
chamfer at the face of the boss and the nut
Universal fittings should be installed accord- contacts the boss.
ing to the procedures described below
d. Position the fitting either by turning in as
(figure 11-3).
much as three-quarters of a turn (270°
Pipe fitting clockwise) or turning out as much as one-
quarter turn (90° counterclockwise).
a. Inspect the fitting visually. Attach the line to the fitting and check the
alignment of the fitting. Tighten the nut to
b. Clean if necessary. the proper torque.
c. Lubricate mating fittings. Fittings with backup rings
d. Install the fitting, screwing it down to a. Lubricate the male threads of the fitting,
within one-half turn of final position. the backup ring, and the packing.
e. Remove the fitting, clean, inspect, and b. Screw the nut onto the fitting, with the
lubricate the male thread. counterbore side facing the fitting end.
11-22 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
c. Put the backup ring on the fitting and seat d. Mating flanges, tube flanges, and cou-
it in the counterbore of the nut, with its plings shall be wiped clean to make sure
convex side facing the fitting end. that a good seal will be obtained.
d. Roll the packing over the threads into the e. Hands and gloves must be clean when han-
groove in the fitting. dling machined surfaces.
e. Adjust the nut so the backup ring forces f. The engine shall not be used as a shelf for
the packing firmly against the lower holding tools or parts while maintenance is
threaded portion of the fitting. being performed.
f. Screw the fitting and nut simultaneously g. After performing any maintenance, the
into the boss until the packing contacts the work area shall be thoroughly inspected
chamfer at the face of the boss. for loose parts, rags, tools, and other mate-
rials. The area shall be cleaned to remove
g. Hold the nut and turn the fitting one-and-a- grit, dust, chips, safety wire, and other
half turns into the boss. The fitting may be small objects.
positioned further by one additional turn.
11-3.15 Gaskets and Packing
h. Attach the line to the fitting and check the
alignment of the fitting. a. Gaskets, packing, key washers, and cotter
pins shall not be reused, unless otherwise
i. Hold the fitting and tighten the nut to the specified.
proper torque.
b. Gaskets and packing shall be lightly lubri-
11-3.14 Cleanliness cated with engine lube oil prior to installa-
tion, unless otherwise specified. Ensure
Cleanliness is important for equipment life parts are properly seated. When a fitting
and proper operation. The major cause of pre- with a jamnut and packing is used, see
mature engine removal is foreign object dam- figure 11-3 for the proper installation pro-
age (FOD). cedure. See figure 11-7 for packing used
with flexible sleeve type fittings.
a. The enclosure must be kept clean and free
of dirt and loose objects. It is recom- 11-7
11-3.16 Tubes
mended that small FOD containers be kept
in the work area or in tool boxes. When installing tubes, the following precau-
tions and instructions apply. See figure 11-7.
b. All parts shall be inspected for cleanliness
before being installed. a. As tubes are installed, tighten all end fit-
tings and clamps finger-tight. After a com-
c. Gaskets and packing shall be free from
plete system is installed, torque clamps
dirt, lint, and/or grit.
first and then end-fittings.
Change 4 11-23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 11-7 Flexible Coupling Assembly
11-24 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
• Maintain a minimum clearance of tion, be sure that no hose is twisted or

0.125 inch (3.2 mm) between tubes stretched. Never over-torque connectors.
and adjacent parts. When hoses are removed, cap the open
ends. Do not use tape to cover open ends.
• Tubes and manifolds must fit within
0.063 inch (1.6 mm) radius in a free Table 11-9 Hose Minimum-Bend Radii
state during assembly or be replaced. Dash Minimum-Bend Radius
• Coupling nuts shall thread freely by Size in. mm

hand. 3 1.50 38
• Mating flanges on tubes shall seal 4 2.00 51

flush within 0.005 inch (0.13 mm). 5 2.00 51
• The distance between faces of mating 6 4.00 102

surfaces or flanges shall not exceed 8 4.62 117
0.063 inch (1.6 mm).
10 5.50 140
• If tubes are reworked, the bend radii 12 6.50 165
shall not be less than twice the tube
diameter and the bend angle shall not 16 7.38 187
be changed by more than 3 degrees. 20 11.00 279
No kinks or wrinkles are permitted.
24 14.00 356
• Do not bend tubes at fitting or weld 32 22.00 559
areas.
CAUTION Natural gas fuel hoses and fuel
• Original bends in a tube may be bent in nozzle steam hoses have different and more
the same direction, but reverse bending restrictive requirements. Refer to the appro-
is not allowed. priate work package in Volume II for details.
• Bend tubes in existing straight sec- b. Fluid fittings shall be tightened gradually
tions, if possible. to the required torque value, backed off
one-quarter turn, and then tightened again.
Use bending tools on any tube 1 inch or more
Do not attempt to correct leaks by exces-
in diameter to prevent the tube from collaps-
sive tightening. Always use two wrenches
ing.
when tightening swivel coupling nuts on
11-3.17 Hoses hoses, tubes, or fittings. Hold the station-
ary part with one wrench while applying
a. No hose should be bent more than the torque with second wrench. Apply engine
bend radius specified in table 11-9, espe- lube oil between the tube/hose coupling
cially when parts are cold, because of pos- nut and the ferrule prior to tightening. See
sible damage to Teflon liners. Kinked figure 11-8.
hoses must not be used. During installa-
Change 4 11-25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
c. Preformed hoses or hoses of large diame- a. Remove the unserviceable seal.

ter shall not be bent or straightened. See
figure 11-9. When hoses are removed, cap b. Engage the new seal over the barrel of the
the open ends. Do not use tape to cover connector.
open ends.
CAUTION Do not allow the seal to tip and
d. Before installing preformed hoses, visu- flatten. An incorrectly installed seal could
ally inspect the hose interior to assure that affect the usefulness of the seal and/or
the Teflon lining has not been damaged. If connector.
damaged, replace the hose.
c. Push the seal to its seated position against
11-8
11-9 the internal shoulder in the connector
11-3.18 Clamps using a mating connector or blunt screw-
driver.
a. Chafing of hoses and tubes must be
avoided. Clamp parts loosely in place, CAUTION Do not force the connectors
shift the hoses until the best clearance is
together. If the pins are not aligned, they will
obtained, and then tighten the clamps
be bent or distorted and will not make
(figure 11-10).
contact.
b. Clamps must be of the proper size for the
d. Inspect electrical connector pins for
piping to permit slippage during engine
straightness before connecting. Insert the
thermal growth. The cushion clamp liner
mating cable connector, hand-tighten the
position should also be checked before
retaining nut, push the mating parts
tightening the clamp (figure 11-11).
together until seated, and tighten the
Clamps must be positioned over the wear retaining nut as required.
sleeves on the tube.
11-10
11-11 e. If the connector is a locking connector,
11-3.19 Electrical Cables and engage the connector and wiggle the back-
Connectors shell while tightening the coupling ring
hand-tight. A clicking sound is produced
During electrical cable installation, adjust the during tightening of the connector. Ensure
cable through the clamps to get the smoothest that the full coupling color band on the
and largest radius. Sharp bends, twists, and receptacle is not visible and that the back-
kinks must be avoided. Minimum clearance shell has no movement.
between the electrical cable and any compo-
nent other than hoses or other electrical cables f. Electrical connectors on flexible harnesses
is 0.125 inch (3.18 mm). and leads shall be hand-tightened beyond
finger-tight (20° maximum) until connect-
A seal ring is located in the coupling nut of ing parts are in solid contact without dam-
each electrical connector. Inspect to ensure the age. Safety-wire the connectors only when
seal is present and serviceable before attach- specified in the procedure.
ing the connector. Replace unserviceable seals
as follows:
11-26 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 11-8 Hose Assemblies Installation
Change 4 11-27

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 11-9 Factory Preformed Hoses
Figure 11-10 Routing and Clamping Techniques
11-28 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 11-11 Cushion Clamps Installation
g. Do not sharply bend, kink, or twist rigid 11-3.20.1 Preservation

leads. When tightening the connection,
always hold both mating connectors to WARNING Lubricating oil, MIL-L-6085,
prevent damage to the leads. is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and
respiratory tract. Skin, eye, and respiratory
11-3.20 Bearing Handling protection is required.
CAUTION Ball and roller bearings require At the point where bearings are accessible in
special care to prevent corrosion. Bearings the disassembly cycle, the bearings shall be
must not be handled with bare hands nor thoroughly covered with lubricating oil, MIL-
with any device that might cause contamina- C-6085.
tion. Clean rubber or nylon gloves or a pro-
tective hand cream shall be used at all times Use of engine lubricating oil as a lubricant or
when handling bearings. preservative is specifically prohibited.
Personnel handling bearings must wear either

synthetic rubber or nylon-mesh gloves with
polyethylene palms and fingers.
Change 4 11-29

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WARNING Corrosion preventive, MIL-C- CAUTION

11796, is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes,
and respiratory tract. Skin, eye, and respi- • Immediately after installing or removing
ratory protection is required. a chilled bearing, use a heat gun to
restore the bearing and any adjacent cold
Bearings returned to storage shall be preserved area to room temperature so that conden-
with corrosion preventive, MIL-C-11796, sation of moisture will be minimized.
Class 3, and wrapped in barrier paper, MIL-B- Check carefully for evidence of moisture
121, Grade A, Type 2, Class 2, glossy side and continue heating until the bearing is
toward bearing. completely dry. Apply corrosion preven-
tive, MIL-C-6529, Type III, at once to the
After installation, bearings shall be returned to bearing after complete drying.
room temperature and be preserved with lubri-
cating oil, MIL-C-6085. • When heat is required to relieve shrink
fits of bearings, use heat guns or ovens.
11-3.20.2 Heating and Chilling Do not use direct-heat sources to apply
the heat and do not heat the bearings to a
WARNING temperature higher than 350°F (175°C).
Apply corrosion preventive, MIL-C-6529,
• Corrosion preventive, MIL-C-6529, is Type III, to the bearings before heating
toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. and after they have cooled to room tem-
Skin, eye, and respiratory protection is perature.
required.
NOTE Heating and chilling are defined as
• Dry ice, BB-C-104: Do not let this mate- any temperature 10°F (6°C) or more above or
rial touch you. Low-temperature skin below room temperature.
damage. Can decrease available air.
Asphyxiant. Personal protective equip- a. When it is necessary to chill a bearing in
ment required, especially insulated dry ice, coat the bearing thoroughly with
gloves and eye protection when han- corrosion preventive, MIL-C-6529, Type
dling material. Use in a well-ventilated III, and place in a plastic bag prior to chill.
area.
• Use thermal gloves when you move or b. Immediately after installation of a chilled
touch hot or cold parts. Hot or cold bearing, apply heat with a heat gun until
parts can cause injury. bearing and adjacent parts are brought to
room temperature. Remove any moisture
• When using compressed air for clean- using clean, dry shop air, and coat the
ing, cooling, or drying, do not exceed 30 bearing with corrosion preventive, MIL-C-
psig. Wear eye protection and do not 6529, Type III.
direct compressed air at self or others.
11-30 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
c. Heat bearings using ovens or heat guns. CAUTION Do not repair titanium parts
No direct heat source, such as a blow with tools, such as grinding wheels, files,
torch, may be used. When the bearing stones, or emery cloth, that have been used to
returns to room temperature, coat with cor- repair other types of metal. Damage to parent
rosion preventive, MIL-C-6529, Type III. metal could occur.
11-3.21 Spray Shields • Defects more than 0.25 inch (6.4 mm)
apart shall be blended separately. Those
Spray shields shall be positioned on tubing so less than 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) apart (except
as to prevent fluid from spraying on the engine splines) shall be blended together. Splines
if a leak occurs at the shielded area of a tube. that are closer together than 0.25 inch (6.4
mm) and defects shall be repaired sepa-
11-3.22 Blending rately.
NOTE Refer to specific engine manual sec- • The finish on the blended area must be as
tion or service bulletin for blend limits for the close as possible to the original finish of
piece part under review. Use the limits in this the part.
procedure only when no specific limits are 11-3.22.2 Hand Blending
specified for the component in the engine man-
ual or appropriate service bulletin. Sharp edges can be blended out using abrasive
stones or papers, files, or crocus cloth. Coarse
Blending is a repair procedure that is used to grades of abrasives or files may be used for
remove stress concentrations caused by nicks, fast metal removal, but the parts must then be
scratches, or other sharp-edged damage marks given a smooth surface finish with fine grades
on critical parts. Removal of the material sur- of abrasives or crocus cloth.
rounding the stress concentration, so that the
WARNING Do not breathe the particles
sharp edges are blended into smooth contour,
from grinding or let the particles touch you.
relieves the stress concentration and permits
The particles can cause damage, injury, or
further use of the part by lessening the danger
irritation to you. Use personal protection
of cracking.
equipment. Use local mechanical exhaust
ventilation or an approved respirator.
Blending is also used to remove sharp edges
resulting from machining, drilling, etc., and to NOTE Refer to the inspection and repair lim-
restore the original contour and/or surface fin- its for specific instructions on blending limits
ish to parts that have been repaired by weld- applicable to each part of the engine.
ing, brazing, etc.
a. When blending compressor rotor blades,
11-3.22.1 Blending General Practices stator vanes, turbine blades, and similar
parts, blend in a radial direction in relation
The following rules for blending shall be
to the engine. Avoid removing metal from
observed, unless specific instructions to the
leading and trailing edges of airfoil sec-
contrary are given in the text:
tions in such a way that the edges become
thin or sharp; blend so as to maintain
approximately the original contour.
Change 4 11-31

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
b. When blending a cylindrical part, blend in a. Rough out defects using coarse grades of
a circumferential direction, not along the resilient flexible abrasive impregnated
axis of the part. wheels, brushes, or points. Use fine or
extra fine grades to finish the blend areas.
c. The finish on the blended area shall be as
close to the original finish as possible. b. Follow the requirements described-in
d. When blending on a part involving a paragraph 11-3.22.2 when doing power
radius, keep the radius as specified in the blending.
repair section. If the radius is not specified,
keep it as close as possible to the original c. Etch reworked area per paragraph 11-3.23
contour. Refer to a similar part, if neces- and inspect by spot fluorescent-penetrant
sary, to determine original radius. method, per paragraph 11-3.24, after
blending.
e. Etch reworked area per paragraph 11-3.23
and inspect by spot fluorescent-penetrant 11-3.22.4 Component Specific
method, per paragraph 11-3.24, after Requirements
blending
NOTE Requirements in specific engine man-
11-3.22.3 Power Blending ual section or appropriate service bulletin take
precedence over the following procedures. The
Blending on most parts may be done by using requirements in this section should be used
a power-driven polishing wheel or rubber- with engine manual or service bulletin criteria
bonded abrasive points, and any special or when no criteria are specified.
instructions for the individual part must be
followed. a. Blending Airfoils.
WARNING Do not breathe the particles (1) The types of airfoil damage described
from grinding or let the particles touch you. below may be repaired by hand blend-
The particles can cause damage, injury, or ing or by power blending. Always
irritation to you. Use personal protection refer to applicable part inspection
equipment. Use local mechanical exhaust paragraph for a description of airfoil
ventilation or an approved respirator. defect limits as follows:
CAUTION Power blending of airfoil sec-
tions may be done only when specified by (a) Nick – A V-shaped depression in
individual part instructions. When doing the airfoil made by a sharp-edge
power blending, be sure to avoid building up object pushing the metal inward.
excessive heat and resulting thermal stresses
(b) Pit – A round sharp-edged hole
in the part.
with a rounded bottom caused by
NOTE After power blending of a titanium corrosion.
part is completed, hand-blend the same area
approximately 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) deeper to (c) Scratch – A V-shaped line or fur-
remove any residual stresses in the surface row in the airfoil such as would
material. be made by dragging a sharp
object across the surface.
11-32 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
(d) Dent – A smooth rounded depres- (c) Defects more than 0.25 inch
sion in the airfoil made by impact (6.4 mm) apart shall be blended
with a rounded object. If there is separately; those 0.25 inch
any noticeable sharp discontinu- (6.4 mm) or less apart may be
ity in the depression, it should be blended together. All blends must
considered as a nick. Waviness of have a minimum radius of 0.25
leading or trailing edges is to be inch (6.4 mm). The total reduc-
treated as a dent. tion in chord width may be taken
on either side or divided between
(e) Erosion – A sand- or shot-blast- the sides. The amount of rework
ing effect on the leading edges or is controlled by the minimum
the leading portion of the concave chord width limit. The minimum
side caused by sand or dust going allowable chord is given for root
through the engine. and tip of airfoil, the minimum
chord at other points is propor-
(f) Torn Metal – A separation or tional. To minimize the possibil-
pulling apart of material by force, ity of an engine stall, keep the
leaving jagged edges. shape of the blended airfoil lead-
ing edge as close as possible to
(2) Hand-blending of airfoils may be
the original contour (see
done as specified below:
figure 11-12).
(a) Blending is done to remove stress
(d) Blending limits are given as
caused by nicks, pits, and
depth dimensions to make it eas-
scratches to prevent blade failure.
ier to see how much can be
Remove high metal and
repaired. Experience has shown
straighten dents (where permit-
that depth limits are used for
ted) to restore the airfoil shape as
most rework. However, the mini-
closely as possible to its' original
mum chord limit is the most
aerodynamic contour.
important dimension; it should be
(b) Blending shall be finished with checked in borderline cases or
fine stone or crocus cloth. where previous rework is evident
Coarser tools may be used for ini- in the same area. For conve-
tial removal of material. Finish nience, the depth limits and mini-
blending in a direction along the mum chord limits are given in
length of the blade or vane and both decimals and fractions. In
remove all evidence of marks borderline cases where depth lim-
across the airfoil that may have its and minimum chord limits
been made during initial blend- conflict with one another, use the
ing. decimal minimum chord dimen-
sion to decide if the part is usable.
11-12
Change 4 11-33

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 11-12 Airfoil Leading Edge Blending
(e) Defect limits are given as depth swab on penetrant where air pas-
dimensions since this is the sages are present to prevent
dimension that affects strength. excessive penetrant entrapment.
However, accurate depth mea-
surements require special equip- (3) Power-blending of rotor blades, vari-
ment not normally available. able vanes, and vane segments may be
Comparing the depth of a defect done as follows:
with the thickness of a leaf of
thickness gage or with the thick- (a) To avoid damaging the airfoil,
ness of a piece of safety wire is a use masking tape and mask off
reasonably accurate way of mea- the airfoil next to the rework area.
suring depth (see figure 11-13).
(b) Use coarse grade, silicon-carbide
11-13 impregnated rubber wheels and
(f) Swab etch reworked area per
points for the initial benching of
paragraph 11-3.23 and spot-fluo-
the blades and vanes.
rescent-penetrant inspect per
paragraph 11-3.24. Brush or
11-34 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Figure 11-13 Airfoil Defect Measurement
NOTE During finish blending of defects, (f) Carefully inspect the blades and
make a radius on both the leading and trailing vanes.
edges of the airfoil. To do this, apply light
pressure with the rubberized abrasive wheel, b. Blending Minor Indications in Tubing.
and let the cushion action of the wheel do both
(1) Use a fine abrasive stone, a small file,
the blending of the radius and the buffing of
emery cloth, or crocus cloth for blend-
the defect.
ing.
(c) Finish blending the defects, using (2) Blend around the circumference of the
the fine and extra fine grade of tubing. The finished blend shall be as
rubberized abrasive wheels. close as practical to the original finish
Remove only enough material to of the part.
repair the defect.
c. Removing High Metal. High metal is
(d) Swab etch reworked areas per caused by the displacement of metal above
paragraph 11-3.23 and spot-fluo- a surface. It is found around defects like
rescent-penetrant inspect per nicks and scratches. Remove high metal as
paragraph 11-3.24. follows:
(e) Place the repaired blades and (1) Use a fine abrasive stone, a small file,
vanes in separate containers to emery cloth, or crocus cloth to remove
prevent damage during handling. high metal.
Change 4 11-35

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
(2) Remove only the material that is pro- WARNING Etching solution contains acid
jecting above the original surface con- and is highly toxic to skin, eyes, and respi-
tour (see figure 11-14). ratory tract. Skin and eye protection, and
vapor control are required. Avoid all con-
(3) Swab etch reworked area per tact.
paragraph 11-3.23 and spot-fluores-
cent-penetrant inspect per CAUTION Refer to the Material Safety
paragraph 11-3.24. Data Sheets (MSDS) for storage and han-
dling instructions for etchant solution.
11-3.23 Swab Etching Procedure Etchant solutions can become hazardous to
personnel if not handled appropriately.
This procedure describes the materials and
process for swab etching used as a preliminary a. All surfaces to be etched must be free from
step before fluorescent-penetrant inspection. oil, grease, scale, or other extraneous
Etching solutions are used as described herein material.
or with exceptions as specified for individual
parts in the Shop Manual. 11-14
Figure 11-14 Blending and High Metal Removal
11-36 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
b. Pour a small quantity of stock solution into 11-3.24 Spot-Fluorescent-Penetrant

a clean plastic beaker or dish. This quan- Inspection
tity will be the working solution, and is not
to be returned to the stock bottle. The spot-fluorescent-penetrant inspection pro-
cess is intended for inspections at remote loca-
c. Saturate a cotton swab with the working tions. It is a localized process, limited to small
solution, and swab the surface to be etched specific areas for inspection. It is not intended
for 60-90 seconds, all Classes, except as a substitute for normal inspection. It is con-
Class G. Class G etching time is 3-4 min- venient to use for inspection of welded or
utes. (Refer to MSDS for classification of other localized repair areas.
etchant being used.) Keep the etching
solution within defined boundaries of the Personnel performing this inspection must be
area to be etched. Masking may be certified in accordance with MIL-STD-410,
required to contain etchant to areas for American Society of Non-Destructive Testing
etching. (ASNT-TC-IA), Air Transport Association
Specification No. 105 (ATA 105), or locally
NOTE Keep fresh solution in contact with the approved certification program.
metal surface at all times by dipping the swab
into the working solution periodically. Rub the Any training which may be provided by GE
swab continuously over the surface of the for a technique requiring the performance of
metal being etched, to prevent the formation of this inspection method does not imply that the
an inert sludge. personnel who receive that training have met
the requirements for inspector certification in
d. After etching, blot up etching solution accordance with MIL-STD-410, ASNT-TC-
from the metal surface with a clean paper IA, or ATA 105.
towel or cloth.
11-3.24.1 Spot-Fluorescent-Penetrant
e. Gently wipe the etched area at least three Inspection Equipment/
times with a cloth or paper towel saturated Materials
with clean water. Blot dry with clean cloth
or paper towel. a. Equipment required:
CAUTION Do not pour working solution (1) Inspection booth, darkroom, or black
back into stock container. Although the small cloth hood (for remote locations) to
quantities involved do not ordinarily consti- prevent excessive admission of white
tute an environmental hazard, flush away light.
discarded solutions with several volumes of (2) Compressed air supply for drying
water to ensure adequate dilution. parts. Air supply must have filters to
remove oil and moisture which can
f. Discard used working solution, rinse, and
contaminate parts or inspection
dry plastic container for future use.
materials.
Change 4 11-37

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
(3) Ultraviolet lamp to detect fluorescent (4) Non-Aqueous Wet Developers

indications. The ultraviolet (black) (NAWD): ZP9B, C, E, F, or D499C
light source used for the detection of (Magnaflux Corporation)
fluorescent indications shall have an
intensity no less than 1,000 micro- (5) Halogen-free solvents: Isopropyl
watts per sq. centimeter when mea- Alcohol (TT-I-735) or Acetone
sured at 15 inches. (381.0 mm). The (O-A-51)
black light should be checked on a
weekly basis or before use, whichever 11-3.24.2 Spot-Fluorescent-Penetrant
is less frequent. Inspection Procedure
(4) White light lamp for visual inspection This procedure is to be used wherever the shop
of parts. manual calls out specific classes using either
waterwashable or post-emulsifiable penetrant
(5) Time piece for timing operations. systems.
(6) Tools for inspection personnel:
NOTE
(a) Three power and 10 power mag- • If visible color dye penetrant has been
nifying lenses used on parts which are to be subsequently
(b) Cotton swabs or small fine hair inspected with fluorescent penetrants, the
art brush to apply solvents for contamination by the dye may prevent reli-
evaluating questionable indica- able fluorescent penetrant inspection. Any
tions color dye indications evident by white
light visual inspection shall be considered
b. Materials required: valid indications even if not detectable by
ultraviolet light.
NOTE Qualified Products listed in MIL-I-
25135 QPL (Qualified Products List) as Level • Excessive white light may interfere with
3, Method D, are considered acceptable alter- detection of a rejectable size indication. A
nates to the products listed. test part having a known defect can be
used to evaluate effectiveness of white
(1) Post-Emulsification Fluorescent-Pen- light shielding.
etrant Oils: ZL22A, B, or C, ZL27 or
ZL27A (Magnaflux Corporation) a. Parts must be cleaned of all traces of oil,
grease, carbon, and rust scale prior to pen-
(2) Hydrophilic Removers: ZR10A or etrant application.
ZR10B (Magnaflux Corporation)
b. Apply penetrant oil with soft-bristle brush,
(3) Dry Powders: ZP4A or ZP4B cotton swab, or spray application. Allow a
(Magnaflux Corporation) minimum of 30 minutes for penetration.
11-38 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WARNING onds contact time. If remover is

applied manually, do not scrub the
• Acetone, O-A-51: Explosive. Flamma- surface of the part with the applicator.
ble. Avoid sources of ignition, sparks, or Use applicator only to deliver fluid to
flames. Do not inhale, ingest, or let this the part surface.
material touch you. Asphyxiant. Cen-
tral nervous system damage/adverse WARNING Nonaqueous developer is
effects. Liver and kidney damage. mixed in a solvent base containing acetone
Allergen. Irritant. Personal protective or isopropyl alcohol. Solvents are flamma-
equipment required. Do not use in an ble and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
enclosed space. Use in a well-ventilated tract. Skin, eye, and respiratory protection
area or with local mechanical exhaust is required. Avoid repeated or prolonged
ventilation - if not available, use an contact. Avoid breathing vapors and use in
approved respirator. a well-ventilated area.
• Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, d. Apply either dry powder or NAWD as a
eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin and eye fine thin coating at ambient temperature to
protection is required. Avoid repeated a dry surface. Allow a minimum of 10
or prolonged contact. Use in a well-ven- minutes for developer to absorb penetrant
tilated area. before inspecting part.
CAUTION Titanium alloy parts are subject e. Evaluate any indication to the required
to stress corrosion cracking when residues of inspection standards.
halogen containing compounds remain on a
part that is subsequently subjected to elevated f. Remove all residues by spraying, wiping,
temperatures typical of welding, heat treat- or soaking with approved solvents.
ing, or engine operation. These parts must be
thoroughly cleaned with nonhalogen com- 11-3.25 Miscellaneous Procedures
pounds after exposure to any halogen con-
taining compound to prevent the cracking CAUTION Use of motor-driven hydraulic
and possible failure of parts. pumps to operate hydraulically actuated spe-
cial support equipment other than torque
NOTE Indications of defects can be lost by multipliers is not recommended. Equipment
use of excessive solvent. damage can result from improper power
application.
c. Wipe off excess penetrant with a clean
cloth using a solvent. a. Use hand-operated hydraulic pumps to
operate hydraulically actuated special sup-
(1) Alternate. Remove excess penetrant port equipment such as pushers or pullers,
with a hydrophilic remover, provided unless otherwise specified.
it belongs to the same family as the
penetrant used. Do not exceed 90 sec-
Change 4 11-39

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
b. Exercise extreme care during assembly or i. When installing or removing body-bound

disassembly operations to prevent entrance bolts, tap them straight through the holes.
of pieces of safety wire, nuts, washers, or Do not turn them.
any other objects into the engine or assem-
bly. If anything is dropped into the engine j. Verify identification of all mating parts.
during assembly or disassembly, stop and
remove the object before proceeding. k. Observe tagged parts for proper location.
c. Do not store tools or maintenance equip- l. During assembly, align matchmarks on all
ment on or against the engine. Account for parts that were marked during disassem-
and properly store all tools after use. bly.
d. Clean fittings of contamination before m. Keep all protectors, plugs, and caps
making or breaking connections. installed until removal is required.
WARNING Do not use external engine pip- n. Prior to final assembly, inspect all cavities
ing as a ladder or hand-hold while perform- and openings for foreign material.
ing maintenance. Serious damage or
o. Inspect all mating flanges for foreign
personal injury could result. Use only
authorized work stands and platforms. material prior to final assembly. Remove
any high metal with a fine stone.
e. Handle all parts carefully. Lift heavy parts
with proper lifting fixtures and a hoist to CAUTION Do not mix plated hardware with
unplated hardware. Do not use silver or cad-
prevent damage to parts and physical harm
mium-plated tools or hardware on titanium
to personnel.
parts. Plating contains small quantities of
f. Always use fiber or plastic blocks and chlorine salts that are harmful to titanium.
hammers with plastic, rawhide, or nylon
p. Three types of tools (common, impro-
heads for driving operations.
vised, and special) are used to perform
g. Tie related parts together when they are maintenance. Common tools are identi-
removed. Tag or mark parts for identifica- fied only when used in special applica-
tion. tions. Drawings for improvised tools are
incorporated in the text when such tools
h. Coat parts, that are to be stored for any are required. Special tools are identified
length of time, with an appropriate preser- both by name and part number when they
vative. are required.
11-40 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WARNING Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF- place or temporarily reinstalled until the

23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not inhale, replacement component is installed.
ingest, or let this material touch you. Irri-
tant. Personal protective equipment w. Parts or assemblies designated as matched
required. Use mechanical exhaust ventila- sets elsewhere in this manual or by the
tion - if not available, use an approved parts list shall be maintained as a matched
respirator. set throughout the maintenance cycle. Set
numbers, part numbers, and serial num-
CAUTION Engine lubricating oil may bers shall be protected during cleaning or
soften paint or stain clothing. Clean spilled repair to prevent removal. When identifi-
oil from painted surfaces. cation is removed, or is no longer legible,
the item shall be re-marked per the origi-
q. Accessories, tubes, and hoses may have oil nal marking method and location for the
or fuel in them at time of removal. Drain part.
these fluids from accessory being removed
and cap all connecting hoses or tubes. x. When discrepancies are found during
maintenance, refer to inspection tables for
r. Lubricate all gears and splines with engine limits and corrective action.
lube oil before installing them, unless oth-
erwise specified. Petrolatum, Fed Specification VV-P-236, shall
be used as an assembly aid for tight-fitting
s. Prior to the installation of any part, a parts, bearings, and packing, unless otherwise
visual check should be made and any obvi- specified.
ous signs of handling damage or abnormal
wear should be noted and reported so that NOTE Mobile Assembly Fluid 403C may be
corrective action can be taken. used in place of soft petrolatum.
t. Always read the complete operation and 11-3.26 V-Band (Coupling) Clamps
be sure you understand it fully. It is better
to stop and ask than to continue and cause 11-3.26.1 Preinstallation Checks
unnecessary work and/or damage.
a. Check alignment of tube ends, unre-
u. Do not disassemble any component any strained, to the following maximum limits
further than necessary to perform the prior to installing V-band clamps:
required maintenance, even though com-
plete disassembly instructions may be (1) Parallelism: no angle (centerlines of
given. Remove piping and electrical leads tubes or fittings parallel).
only as required to perform maintenance
tasks. (2) Offset between fittings or tube center-
lines: no more than 0.060 inch (1.52
v. Attaching hardware (bolts, nuts, plain mm) circumferential, axial, or
washers, brackets, clamps, etc.) is gener- combined.
ally reusable. When possible, it is recom-
mended that attaching hardware be left in (3) Gaps: no more than 0.060 inch
(0.15 mm) space between fitting seats.
Change 4 11-41

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
(4) If tube ends do not align within the for tool marks and cracks. V-band cou-
above limits, readjust mounting until plings in poor condition should be
proper alignment is attained. replaced.
b. Ensure flange faces are free of dirt, grease, f. Check the threads on the T-bolt for wear
corrosion, distortion, deformation, and and condition. If there is any sign of wear,
scratches. galling, or deformation, install a new T-
bolt or coupling clamp.
c. Use protective flange caps on the ends of
all ducts until the installation progresses to g. Check the T-bolt for straightness; however,
the point where removal of the cap is if it is bent it will be necessary to deter-
essential to continuing with the mine if the bend is intentional. Some small
installation. diameter couplings have curved T-bolts.
Check the applicable illustrated parts
d. Use care during the installation of ducts breakdown for part identification. If in
and tubes to ensure mating and alignment doubt, install a new T-bolt or coupling
of flanges. A poorly fitted joint requires clamp.
excessive torque on the T-bolt to close the
joint and imposes structural loads on the h. Check the trunnion and latch for freedom
V-band clamp. Adjacent support clamps or of movement or other overloading.
brackets should remain loose until installa-
tion of the coupling has been completed. i. Avoid twisting, spreading, or bending of
When connections are by V-band cou- the coupling when positioning the cou-
plings, the weight of the components pling on the joint.
should be fully supported during the fit-up
and installation of the couplings. j. When gaskets are used in the joint, exer-
cise care in handling to avoid nicks and
e. When reinstalling a used coupling, check burrs on the gasket surfaces. Whenever a
it for twist or distortion. Visually check the joint is disassembled after service opera-
V-section for spreading at the open ends or tions, a new gasket should be used when
other signs of distortion. Check spot welds reassembling to ensure maximum sealing
or rivets for condition and security. The efficiency. Exercise care to ensure that the
corner radii should be carefully checked gasket is properly seated.
11-42 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
11-3.26.2 Installation b. Install gasket, if required, and mate both

flanges.
The following procedures should be followed
to ensure proper V-band clamp installation: c. Relocate clamp over both flanges and
press clamp closed.
CAUTION
d. Install nut. Ensure T-bolt is properly
• Do not use pliers on V-band clamps to seated, and tighten nut to approximately
force alignment of tube ends while one-half of required torque marked on
engaging V-band bolts and nuts. Residual strap.
stress in the tubes and nicks, scratches, or
deformation in the clamps, can cause e. Tap clamp lightly around circumference
premature failure of these parts. with a rubber mallet to equally distribute
load.
• Coupling T-bolt nuts shall not be reused.
Do not substitute any other coupling nut f. Alternate tightening and tapping until
for the type nut supplied with the cou- torque stabilizes at the specified value.
pling. The correct nut (ESNA Z1200J Avoid overtorquing.
series) is identified by the letter “J”
stamped on a wrench flat. Failure to com- g. Inspect clamp for even seating.
ply may result in duct joint failure.
h. See figure 11-15 for safety wiring the V-
a. Place the V-band clamp over one of tube band clamp. Use 0.041-0.051-inch
ends far enough to clear flange. (NOVN) (1.0-1.3 mm) safety wire.
11-15
Change 4 11-43

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Figure 11-15 V-Band Clamps and Safety-Wiring Techniques
11-44 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
5 CHAPTER 12
Preventive Maintenance
12-1 Purpose and Scope 12-3.1 Dry Motoring
This chapter defines the requirements and Any dry motoring check should be made with
frequency for performing preventive main- the ignition system deenergized.
tenance checks, inspections, and servicing.
Dry motoring procedures, generally assoc- a. Check all switches and interlocks for
iated with maintenance, are also provided, as proper motoring settings.
are definitions of terms used to evaluate
b. With the fuel shutoff valves closed, acti-
equipment condition and damage during
vate the motoring or start sequence and
inspections.
allow the engine to motor to maximum
12-2 General Checks and motoring speed for 30 seconds. Observe
and record the following:
Inspections
• Engine high pressure rotor speed
This section provides general guidelines, con-
ditions, and definitions for conducting engine • Starter air or hydraulic inlet pressure
checks and inspections.
• Inlet air temperature
Preventive maintenance and servicing inspec-
tions and checks are performed to reduce • Lube supply pressure
unscheduled shutdown time. If the frequency
of inspection/service requires change, coordi- c. Deenergize the starter.
nate with the packager. Table 12-1 lists checks
and service intervals. For terminology and def- 12-4 Rigging and Idle Checks
initions, refer to table 12-2.
12-4.1 Rigging Checks
12-3 Motoring
In addition to the preventive maintenance and
Although not required as part of normal start- servicing checks listed in table 12-1, any vari-
ing procedures, wet and/or dry motoring is fre- able–geometry system (variable inlet guide
quently used following maintenance to check vane [VIGV], variable bypass valve [VBV], or
the engine before making a start. Wet motor- variable stator vane [VSV]) that has had main-
ing (liquid fuel only) is performed with the tenance performed on it since the engine was
fuel metering valve (FMV) open and the fuel last operated, should undergo a rigging check.
shutoff valve open. Dry motoring is performed Rigging check procedures are described in
with both the FMV and the fuel shutoff valve WP's 1113 00, 1312 00, and 1411 00 in Vol-
closed. ume II of this manual.
Change 5 12-1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
12-4.2 Idle Checks b. Deactivate the enclosure fire extinguishing

system. Open enclosure access door. Turn
Idle power functional checks are usually per- off enclosure secondary ventilation sys-
formed following any maintenance on the tem, if applicable.
engine, lube, or fuel systems that involve the
breaking of connections, the separation of c. Station personnel outside the enclosure as
flanges, or any action that could possibly a safety measure before permitting entry to
affect operation of the gas turbine system. Idle the enclosure.
checks should be performed as follows:
d. Wear ear protection and thermally insu-
WARNING lated gloves when entering the enclosure.
• The fire extinguishing system must be e. Make a thorough inspection of the entire
deactivated before personnel enter the gas turbine system and correct all discrep-
enclosure. Suffocation can occur if the ancies before continuing operation.
fire extinguishing system is activated.
f. Exit the enclosure and close the access
• The following steps must be performed door.
before entering the enclosure. These
conditions must be maintained while g. Reactivate the enclosure fire extinguishing
inside the enclosure to prevent injury to system and secondary ventilating system,
personnel. if applicable.
NOTE See appropriate packager's manual h. Accelerate to the desired power level.
for additional cautions and inspections. Observe all operating limits specified in
Chapter 8.
a. With the engine operating at idle, permit
speed to stabilize for 2 minutes.
12-2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table 12-1 Preventive Maintenance and Servicing Checks
Semiannually
(Note 2) (unless As Procedure
Maintenance Item (Note 1) noted otherwise) Required Reference
Borescope Inspection X WP 4015 00
Inlet and Coupling Inspection X (Note 3) WP 4010 00
Enclosure Inspection X (Note 3) Packager's Manual
External Engine Inspection X (Note 3) WP 4012 00
Lube and Scavenge Pump Inlet X WP 4020 00
Screen and Filter Inspection
Lube Oil Test X WP 4016 00
Chip Detector Check X WP 4017 00
Variable Inlet Guide Vane Rig Check X WP 1113 00
Variable Stator Vane Rig Check X WP 1411 00
Variable Bypass Door Rig Check X WP 1312 00
Variable-Geometry System Filter X WP 4021 00
Check
Ignition System Functional Check X WP 4023 00
Igniter Plug Inspection X WP 4023 00
T48 Thermocouple Inspection X WP 1711 00
P48 Inlet Probe Inspection X WP 1712 00
Fuel Metering Valves - Functional X Packager's Manual
Check
Fuel Shutoff Valves - Functional X Packager's Manual
Check
Fuel/Purge and Solenoid Valves X Packager's Manual
System Check
Compressor Cleaning (Water-Wash) (Note 3) WP 4014 00
Vibration Monitoring System Check X (Note 3) WP 4024 00
Exhaust and Coupling Inspection X (Note 3) WP 4013 00
Stage 1 HPC blade replacement Every 16,000 hours of WP 2413 00
TM only) SPRINTTM operation
(systems with HPC SPRINT
Stage 2, 3, and 4 HPC blade chord At same time as WP 2413 00
length checks (systems with HPC stage 1 HPC blade
SPRINTTM only) replacement
Change 5 12-3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Table 12-1 Preventive Maintenance and Servicing Checks (Continued)
Semiannually
(Note 2) (unless As Procedure
Maintenance Item (Note 1) noted otherwise) Required Reference
Stage 1 HPC blade replacement Every 16,000 hours of WP 2413 00
TM
(systems with LPC+HPC SPRINT HP SPRINTTM
only) operation or 25,000
hours of total
SPRINTTM operation,
whichever comes first
Stage 2, 3, and 4 HPC blade chord At same time as WP 2413 00
length checks (systems with stage 1 HPC blade
LPC+HPC SPRINTTM only) replacement
Stage 1 LPC blade inspection Every 25,000 hours of TBD

LP SPRINTTM
operation
NOTES:
1. Inspections within the enclosure shall not be made with engine operating above idle speed.
2. Semiannual inspections shall be made with the engine shut down.
3. “As Required” is defined as anytime maintenance is performed in the area or when the area is
accessible.
Table 12-2 Definition of Terms
Manual Terms Associated Terms

Abrasion Wearing, grinding, or rubbing away of small Chafing, Fretting, Rub, Scuff, Wear.
amounts of material. Surface may be smooth or rough.
Blister A raised portion of a surface caused by separation of Bubble, Flaking, Oxide formation, Peeling, Scale, Slag
the outer layers of the parent material or of a coating. inclusion (Weld).
Brinell (True) Often related to ball and roller bearings having Dent.
been improperly installed or subjected to extremely high shock
or impact loads at zero revolutions per minute. Usually occurs
as a series of shallow depressions in the load area of the
raceway.
Brinell (False) A specialized form of fretting recognized by
the occurrence of a series of shallow indentations in the race
at each roller position on the loaded side of the bearing. Often
red oxide of iron may be found where this has occurred.
Brittle A change in the resiliency of the parent material, Cold-worked, Hard (like an old preformed packing–ring),
usually due to aging, extreme heat, extreme cold, chemical Stiff.
action, or cold-working (metal).
12-4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table 12-2 Definition of Terms (Continued)

Buckle A large–scale deformation of the original contour of a Ballooning, Bend, Blister (incorrect: see Blister), Bulge,
part, usually due to pressure or impact from a foreign object, Crease, Curl, Dent (not to be confused with small area
structural stresses, excessive localized heating, high pressure defect in heavy material: see Dent), Depression,
differentials, or a combination of these. Distortion (usually refers to heavy material), Elongated
(usually refers to out of round), Fold, Indentation, Kink
(usually results in crack: see Crack), Protrusion (hollow),
Rupture (result of excessive buckling), Uneven,
Warpage, Wrinkle.
Bulge A raised portion or outward swelling on a surface, as Hump, Protuberance.
from pressure.
Burn A rapid, destructive, oxidizing action usually caused by Bum out (see Missing piece), Erosion (chemical or grit),
higher temperatures than the parent material can structurally Guttered, Heat–check, Heat-curled, Heat deterioration,
withstand. Change in color and appearance often indicates Hole (burn), Hot spot, Overheated, Oxidation.
this condition.
Burr A rough edge or a sharp on the edge or surface of the
parent material.
Chafing A rubbing action between parts having limited Abrasion, Fretting, Rub, Wear.
relative motion (as in vibration).
Chip A breaking away of the edge of the parent material, Break, Nick (similar to Chip, but no parent material is
usually caused by heavy impact from a foreign object. removed: see Nick).
Coking An accumulation of carbon. Carbon buildup.
Corrosion The gradual conversion of material to another
compound due to chemical attack. It appears as a mass of
small pits due to the loss of the formed compound from the
affected surface which cumulatively creates a cavity (usually
shallow) in the surface of the parent material.
Crack A parting of the parent material. Break, Crater (usually found in castings), Fatigue
damage, Fissure, Fracture, Inclusion (usually found in
castings), Lap (usually found in forgings), Rupture,
Separation, Shear (not usually considered a crack: see
Missing Piece), Slit, Tear.
Craze A mesh of fire cracks on a surface or glaze defined as Fine cracks around bolt holes or surface edges that are
numerous superficial surface cracks which have no usual subject to stresses or pressure. Fine cracks in metal,
width or depth. paint surfaces, seal edges, plastics, windows, sight
glasses, etc.
Dent A completely smooth surface depression caused by Peen.
pressure or impact from a smooth, ball–like foreign object. The
parent material is displaced, but usually not is separated.
Deviation A condition which causes a port to differ from the Damage, Defect, Flow, Imperfection, Irregularity.
manufacturer's blueprint.
Erosion The gradual wearing away of material caused by the
hot flow of gases or foreign particles. An eroded surface may
appear similar to a corroded surface.
Flake A thin, chiplike, or scalelike layer of metal.
Fretting Wear, in a rippled pattern, caused by friction. Chafing, Abrasion.
Change 5 12-5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD

Gall A defect caused by the movement of two surfaces in See Pickup.
contact with each other. In most cases an accumulation of
foreign material is deposited on the parent material.
Gouge A wide, rough scratch or group of scratches, usually
with one or more sharply impressed corners and frequently
accompanied by deformation or removal of parent material.
Groove A long, narrow, continuous cavity or impression If impression is shallow and smooth, see Wear.
caused by pressure of a moving surface in contact with the
parent material.
Imbalance The state of being out of balance. An unequal
distribution of weight about the axis of rotation.
Loose Abnormal movement of a part. Backed out, Excessive movement, Excessive play,
Insecure, Leaks, Loose fit, Not tight, Not torqued,
Shakes, Sloppy, Rattles, Unbottomed, Unpinned.
Misaligned Mismatch or malformation of any parts that either Eccentric, Not axial, Not concentric, Out–of–round,
prevent perfect assembly or results in faulty operation and/or Unmatched, Unsquared.
ultimate part failure.
Missing Piece Removal or loss of a portion of parent material Break (two or more pieces), Burn (burned away), Burn–
due to a combination of defects or damage. out, Corrosion (eaten away), Erosion (worn away),
Guttered, Hole, Rusted (rusted away), Sheared,
Smashed, Torn (torn away).
Nick A surface impression with sharp corners or bottom, Chip (see Chip), Dent (see Dent), Notch (see Chip).
usually caused by pressure or impact from a sharp–edged
foreign body. The parent material is displaced, but usually not
is separated.
Noisy An abnormal sound condition of moving parts, usually Bumps (sound), Chatters, Clicks, Grates (usually gears),
an increase in volume or a change of pitch. Grind, Hums, Loud, RattIes (usually loose parts), Rubs
(sound of rubbing), Scrapes (sound of scraping),
Screeches, Squeals, Thumps (sound), Whistles.
Obstructed Prevention of free flow of a fluid (air, oil, fuel, and Clogged, Contaminated, Plugged, Restricted.
water) because of foreign material in the flowpath or
malformation in the flow member.
Oxidation A surface deterioration by the chemical reaction
between oxygen in the air and the metal surface. Attack is
manifested as red rust in iron and low alloy steels when
formed at ambient temperature. The oxides which form on
superalloys are complex and can be green or black depending
on material composition and the temperature at which it is
formed.
Pickup Transfer of one material into or upon the surface of Burr (usually tool–rub leaving high parent material), Gall,
another, caused by contact between moving parts or deposits High spot, Embedment, Inclusion (usually pickup of a
of molten material on a cooler material. dissimilar foreign material), Pile–up, Protrusion (deposit
on parent material), Metallization.
12-6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061

Pinched Distortion of one or more surfaces of the parent Bound, Compressed, Flattened, Seized (see Seizure),
material, caused by pressure. Smashed (without separation into pieces), Squashed,
Squeezed, Tight.
Pit A minute depression or cavity with no sharp, high–stress Corrosion, Crater (usually in weld or casting), Dent
corners in the surface of the material. Pits are usually caused (incorrect: see Dent), Electrolytic cavity, Erosion (usually
by chemical reaction (rusting or chemical corrosion). results in hole: see Burns), Fretting (see Wear), Inclusion
(as in sand castings), Oxidation (usually in weld), Pock–
marked, SpaIled, Roughness.
Rub A surface cavity or impression caused by two surfaces If impression is shallow and smooth, see Wear. If
moving against each other. impression is sharp, see Scratch.
Scratch A long, narrow, sharp–cornered impression caused Abrasion, Chafe, Furrow, Groove, Rub, Scarf, Score.
by the movement of a sharp object across the surface of the
parent material.
Scuff A surface roughened by wear. Scrape, Scratch.
Seizure A welding or binding of two surfaces that prevents Bound up, Frozen, Tight (see Pinched), Tight (fit),
further movement. Wedged, Welded (without external assistance).
Sheet–Metal Dent A large–area, smooth depression in the See Buckle.
parent material.
Shingling Two adjacent surfaces overlapping when normal
position is edge–to–edge or face–to–face contact.
Spall Broken or crushed material due to heat, mechanical, or Chip.
structural causes. Chipping of small fragments under the
action of abrasion.
Spatter A thin deposit of molten metal, usually on airfoil Splatter, Splash.
surface downstream from a burn area.
Sulfidation A form of hot corrosion in heat–resistant alloys by
the reaction at the metal surface of sodium chloride (sea air)
and sulfur (from fuel). Attack usually occurs over a broad front
and can be identified as gray to black blisters (early stage) or
surface delamination (advanced stages).

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
5
APPENDIX A
Fuel/Water Requirements
This appendix contains specifications for the following:
A1 Natural Gas Fuel
A2 Liquid Fuel
A3 Not Applicable
A4 Water Purity - Compressor Cleaning
A5 Liquid Detergent - Compressor Cleaning
A6 Lubricating Oil
Change 5 A-1(A-2 Blank)

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-1
November 2001
5 MID-TD-0000-1November 2001
Appendix A1
Natural Gas Fuel for GE Aircraft Derivative Gas Turbines in Industrial
Applications
GE Industrial AeroDerivative gas turbines while protecting the gas turbine and support-
have the ability to burn a wide range of gas- ing hardware.
eous fuels, as shown in Table A1-1. These
gases present a broad spectrum of properties A1-1 Applicable Documents
due to both active and inert components. This
specification is designed to define guide-lines Table A1-2 identifies the acceptable test meth-
that must be followed in order to burn these ods to be used for determining gas fuel
fuels in an efficient, trouble-free manner, properties.
Table A1-1 Fuel Gas Usability

LHV
Btu/scf (kJ/ Wobbe Operational Applicability
Fuel Type NM3) Number Major Components Comments SAC DLE
Pipeline Natural 850-1200 45-60 Methane No restrictions Yes Yes
Gas (33383-
47128)
Medium British 400-850 20-45 Methane, Requires >700 Btu/scf Yes No,
Thermal Unit (Btu) (15709- Hydrocarbons (27492 kJ/NM3) for See
Natural Gas 33838) (HC), Carbon starting. May require Note 8
Dioxide, Nitrogen modified fuel nozzles.
Contact GE
Liquefied Petroleum 2300-3200 70-75 Propane, Butane May require specific Yes No
Gas (LPG) (90330- fuel nozzles.
125676) Contact GE
Gasification Gases
- Oxygen Blown 200-400 8-20 Carbon Monoxide, Contact GE Yes No
(7855- Hydrogen, HC,
15709) Water Vapor
- Air Blown 150-200 6-8 Carbon Monoxide, Contact GE Yes No
(5891- Hydrogen, HC,
7855) Nitrogen, Water
Vapor
Process Gases 300-1000 15-50 Methane, Hydro- Requires >700 Btu/scf Yes See
(11782- gen, Carbon Monox- (27492 kJ/NM3) for Note 8
39274) ide, Carbon Dioxide starting. Restricted
transient operation
Change 5 A-3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
MID-TD-0000-1
November 2001
Table A1-1 Fuel Gas Usability (Continued)

LHV
Btu/scf (kJ/ Wobbe Operational Applicability
Fuel Type NM3) Number Major Components Comments SAC DLE
Refinery Gases 1000-1300 45-60 Methane, Hydro- No restrictions. Yes See
(39274- gen, Carbon Monox- Hydrogen content Note 8
51056) ide, Ethylene, should be reviewed
Propylene, Butylene by GE
Notes:
1. When considering the use of alternate fuels, provide details of the fuel constituents, fuel temperature,
and expected engine usage conditions and operating characteristics to GE for evaluation and recom-
mendations.
2. Values and limits apply at the inlet of the gas fuel control module.
3. Heating value ranges shown are provided as guidelines. Specific fuel analysis must be furnished to
GE for evaluation. The standard configured single annular combustor (SAC) gas turbines require a fuel
with an LHV no less than 6,500 Btu/pound. The Dry Low Emissions (DLE) combustion system requires
minimum LHV of 18,000 Btu/pound. (Reference paragraph A1-3.1.)
4. The quantity of sulfur in gas fuels is not limited by this specification. Experience has shown that oxida-
tion/corrosion rates are not significantly affected by fuel sulfur levels up to 1.3% sulfur. Hot corrosion of
hot gas path parts is affected by the presence of the specified trace metals. Sulfur levels shall be con-
sidered when addressing heat recovery steam generator (HRSG) corrosion, selective catalytic reduc-
tion (SCR) deposition, exhaust emissions, system material requirements, elemental sulfur deposition,
and iron sulfide. (Reference paragraph A1-4.3.)
5. The fuel gas supply shall be 100% free of liquids. Admission of liquids can result in combustion and/or
hot gas path component damage. (Reference paragraph A1-4.2.)
6. Wobbe Number, or modified Wobbe Number Index, is described in paragraph A1-3.2.
7. Gases with Wobbe Number Index greater than 40 may be applicable for DLE. Contact GE.
8. Process and refinery gases with less than five percent hydrogen content and low carbon monoxide
(CO) and carbon dioxide (CO2 ) content may be acceptable for DLE application. Contact GE.
9. NM3 is at 0°C, 101.325 kPa (sea level).
A1-2 Test Methods for Gaseous Fuels

Property ASTM Methods
Gas Composition to C6+ D1945 - Standard method for constituents of gases by gas
chromatography
Heating Value D3588 - Procedure for calculating calorific value and specific
gravity of gaseous fuels
Specific Gravity D3588 - Procedure for calculating calorific value and specific
Compressibility Factor D3588 - Procedure for calculating calorific value and specific
A-4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-1
November 2001
A1-2 Test Methods for Gaseous Fuels (Continued)

Property ASTM Methods
Dew Point (See Note 1) D1142 - Water vapor content of gaseous fuels by measur-
ment of dew point temperature
Sulfer D1072 - Test for total sulfur in fuel gases (See Note 2)
D3246 - Test for total sulfur in fuel gases
Chemical Composition D2250 - Standard method for chemical composition of gases
by mass spectrography
Notes:
1. Hydrocarbon and water dew points shall be determined by direct dew point measurements (Chilled Mir-
ror Device). If dew point cannot be measured, an extended gas analysis, which identifies hydrocarbon
components from C1 through C14, shall be performed. This analysis must provide an accuracy of
greater than 10 parts per million by volume. A standard gas analysis to C6+ is normally not acceptable
for dew point calculation unless it is known that heavier hydrocarbons are not present, as is most often
the case with liquefied natural gases.
2. This test method will not detect the presence of condensable sulfur vapor. Specialized filtration equip-
ment is required to measure sulfur at concentrations present in vapor form. Contact GE for more
information.
A1-2 Fuel Gas Classification Actual calorific heating values are dependent
on the percentages of hydrocarbons and inert
A1-2.1 Natural and Liquefied Petro- gases contained in the gas.
leum Gas (LPG)
A1-2.1.2 Medium Btu Natural Gas
Natural gases are predominately methane with
much smaller quantities of the slightly heavier Natural gases are found and extracted from
hydrocarbons, such as ethane, propane, and underground reservoirs. These "raw gases"
butane. Liquefied petroleum gas is propane may contain varying degrees of nitrogen, car-
and/or butane with traces of heavier bon dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and contain
hydrocarbons. contaminants such as salt, water, sand, and
dirt. Processing by the gas supplier normally
A1-2.1.1 Pipeline Natural Gas reduces and/or removes these constituents and
contaminants prior to use in the gas turbine. A
Natural gases normally fall within the calorific gas analysis must be performed to ensure that
heating value range of 850 to 1200 Btu/scf the fuel supply to the gas turbine meets the
(33383-47128 kJ/NM3) lowest heating value requirements of this specification.
(LHV).
Change 5 A-5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
MID-TD-0000-1
November 2001
A1-2.1.3 Liquefied Petroleum Gases Oxygen blown gasification fuels are often
mixed with steam for thermal nitrous oxide
The heating values of LPGs normally fall (NOx) control, cycle efficiency improvement,
between 2300 and 3200 Btu/scf (90330- and/or power augmentation. When utilized,
125676 kJ/NM3)(LHV). Based on their high the steam is injected into the combustor by an
commercial value, these fuels are normally independent passage.
utilized as a backup fuel to the primary gas
fuel for gas turbines. Since LPGs are nor- The current guideline for hydrogen plus CO
mally stored in a liquid state, it is critical that constituent is limited to 75 percent for
the vaporization process and gas supply sys- LM6000 gas turbines. Due to high hydrogen
tem maintains the fuel at a temperature above content of these fuels, oxygen blown gasifica-
the minimum required superheat value. Fuel tion fuels are normally not suitable for DLE
heating and heat tracing are required to ensure applications, for which the hydrogen content
above minimum temperature is maintained. is limited to 5 percent by volume. The high
flame speeds resulting from high hydrogen
A1-2.2 Gasification Fuels fuels can result in flashback or primary zone
reignition on DLE premixed combustion sys-
Other gases that may be utilized as gas turbine tems. Utilization of these fuels shall be
fuel are those formed by the gasification of reviewed by GE.
coal, petroleum, coke, or heavy liquids. In
general, the heating values of gasification A1-2.2.2 Air Blown Gasification
fuels are substantially lower than other fuel
gases. These lower heating value fuels require Gases produced by air blown gasification nor-
that the fuel nozzle gas flow passages be larger mally have heating values between 150 and
than those utilized for fuels of higher heating 200 Btu/scf (5891-7855 kJ/NM3) (LHV). The
values. H2 content of these fuels can range from 8 per-
cent to 20 percent by volume and have a H2/
Gasification fuels are produced by either an CO mole ratio of 0.3 to 3:1. The use and treat-
Oxygen Blown or Air Blown gasification ment of these fuels are similar to that identi-
process. fied for oxygen blown gasification.
A1-2.2.1 Oxygen Blown Gasification For gasification fuels, a significant part of the
total turbine flow comes from the fuel. In
The heating values of gases produced by oxy- addition, for oxygen blown fuels, there is a
gen blown gasification fall in the range of 200 diluent addition for NOx control. Careful
to 400 Btu/scf (7855-15709 kJ/NM3). The integration of the gas turbine with the gasifica-
hydrogen (H2) content of these fuels is nor- tion plant is required to assure an operable
mally above 30 percent by volume and have system. Due to the low volumetric heating
H2/CO mole ratio between 0.5 and 0.8. value of both oxygen and air blown gases, spe-
cial fuel systems and fuel nozzles are required.
A-6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-1
November 2001
A1-2.3 Process Gases removed from the fuel prior to delivery to the
gas turbine.
Many chemical processes generate surplus
gases that may be utilized as fuel for gas tur- A1-2.3.3 COREX Gases
bines (i.e. tail or refinery gases). These gases
often consist of methane, hydrogen, carbon COREX gases are similar to oxygen blown
monoxide, and carbon dioxide that are normal gasified fuels, and may be treated as such.
byproducts of petrochemical processes. Due They are usually lower in H2 content and have
to the hydrogen and carbon monoxide content, lower heating values than oxygen blown gas-
these fuels have large rich-to-lean flammabil- ified fuels. Further combustion related guide-
ity limits. These types of fuels often require lines can be found in Bureau of Mines
inerting and purging of the gas turbine gas fuel Circulars 503 and 622.
system upon unit shutdown or transfer to a
more conventional fuel. When process gas A1-2.3.4 Hydrogen
fuels have extreme flammability limits such
The presence of gaseous hydrogen in the fuel
that the fuel will auto ignite at turbine exhaust
can present special problems due to the high
conditions, a more conventional startup fuel,
flame speed and high temperatures associated
such as methane, is required.
with combustion, and the very wide flamma-
Additional process gases utilized as gas tur- bility limits of this gas. Treatment of fuels
bine fuels are those which are by-products of containing hydrogen are separated into three
steel production. These are: categories: less than 5 percent by volume, 6
percent to 30 percent by volume, and over 30
A1-2.3.1 Blast Furnace Gases percent. If the hydrogen fuel content is 5 per-
cent or less, no special precautions are neces-
Blast Furnace Gases (BFGs), alone, have heat- sary and starting on this fuel mixture can be
ing values below minimal allowable limits. permissible, assuming there are no other
These gases must be blended with other fuel to restrictive substances in the mix.
raise the heating value to above the required
limit. Coke oven and/or natural gases or For fuels containing more than 5 percent, and
hydrocarbons such as propane or butane can up to 30 percent hydrogen, an alternative start-
be utilized to accomplish this. ing fuel may be required by local safety codes,
and a special exhaust system purge cycle is
A1-2.3.2 Coke Oven Gases incorporated into the gas turbine start
sequence to eliminate accumulated fuels from
Coke oven gases are high in H2 and H4C and an aborted start. In addition, special high
may be used for SAC systems, but are not suit- point venting is required for both the fuel gas
able for DLE combustion applications. These and turbine compartments since the fuel con-
fuels often contain trace amounts of heavy stituents are normally lighter than air. The
hydrocarbons which, when burned, could lead vents hold the compartment at a slight vacuum
to carbon buildup on the fuel nozzles. The relative to local ambient conditions. Special
heavy hydrocarbons must be "scrubbed" or precautions must also be taken to completely
Change 5 A-7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
MID-TD-0000-1
November 2001
seal the fuel delivery system from leaks. Con- heat generated by complete combustion is a
sult the local authorities for specific local constant for a given combination of combusti-
safety codes. ble elements and compounds.
If the fuel contains more than 30 percent For most gaseous fuels, the heating value is
hydrogen, electrical devices used in the fuel determined by using a constant pressure, con-
gas and turbine compartments should be certi- tinuous-type calorimeter. This is the industry
fied for use in Group B (explosive) atmo- standard. In these units, combustible sub-
spheres. Consult the local authorities for stances are burned with oxygen under essen-
specific local safety codes. tially constant pressure conditions. In all fuels
that contain hydrogen, water vapor is a prod-
A1-2.4 Refinery Gases uct of combustion, which impacts the heating
value. In a bomb calorimeter, the products of
Many hydrocarbon fuels contain olefin hydro- combustion are cooled to the initial tempera-
carbon compounds which have been thought ture and all of the water vapor formed during
to prohibit their use in aeroderivative gas combustion is condensed. The result is the
turbines. HHV, or higher heating value, which includes
the heat of vaporization of water. The LHV, or
Fuel temperature is also a consideration in
lower heating value, assumes all products of
order to use standard fuel nozzles and to avoid
combustion, including water, remain in the
the possibilities of fuel polymerization. Maxi-
gaseous state, and the water heat of vaporiza-
mum fuel temperature of 125°F (52°C) is rec-
tion is not available.
ommended. It may be possible to go as high
as 190°F (88°C), but this may require non- A1-3.2 Modified Wobbe Number Index
standard fuel nozzle sizing and should be con- Range
sidered on a case-by-case basis. Please con-
tact GE for assistance. While gas turbines can operate with gases hav-
ing a very wide range of heating values, the
Because refinery gas fuels usually have signif- amount of variation that a single specific fuel
icantly higher hydrocarbon and olefin content, system can accommodate is much less. Varia-
the combustor flame temperatures are typi- tion in heating value as it affects gas turbine
cally higher, resulting in higher than normal operation is expressed in a term identified as
(high methane gas) NOx emissions. Contact Modified Wobbe Number Index (Natural Gas,
GE for effect on emissions. E. N. Tiratsoo, Scientific Press, Ltd., Beacons-
field, England, 1972). This term is a measure-
A1-3 Fuel Properties ment of volumetric energy and is calculated
using the LHV of the fuel, specific gravity of
A1-3.1 Heating Value
the fuel with respect to air at International
A fuel's heat of combustion, or heating value, Standards Organization (ISO) conditions, and
is the amount of energy, expressed in Btu, gen- the fuel temperature, as delivered to the gas
erated by the complete combustion, or oxida- turbine.
tion, of a unit weight of fuel. The amount of
A-8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-1
November 2001
The mathematical definition is as follows: fuel gas temperature profiles, shall be submit-
ted to GE for proper evaluation.
Modified Wobbe Number Index
A1-3.3 Superheat Requirement
=LHV/(SGgas x T)1/2
The superheat requirement is established to
This is equivalent to: ensure that the fuel gas supplied to the gas tur-
bine is 100 percent free of liquids. Dependent
Modified Wobbe Number Index on its constituents, gas entrained liquids could
cause degradation of gas fuel nozzles and, for
=LHV/[(MWgas/28.96) x T]1/2
DLE applications, premixed flame flashbacks
Where: or reignitions.
LHV = Lower Heating Value of the Gas A minimum of 50°F (10°C) of superheat is
Fuel (Btu/scf) required and is specified to provide enough
margin to compensate for temperature reduc-
SGgas = Specific Gravity of the Gas Fuel tion due to pressure drop across the gas fuel
Relative to Air control valves.
MWgas = Molecular Weight of the Gas Fuel A1-3.4 Flammability Ratio
T = Absolute Temperature of the Gas Fuel gases containing hydrogen and/or carbon
Fuel (Rankine) monoxide will have a ratio of rich-to-lean
flammability limits that is significantly larger
28.96 = Molecular Weight of Dry Air than that of natural gas. Typically, gases with
greater than 5 percent hydrogen by volume fall
The allowable Modified Wobbe Number Index into this range and require a separate startup
range is established to ensure that required fuel. Consult the local authorities for specific
fuel nozzle pressure ratios are maintained dur- local safety codes.
ing all combustion/turbine modes of opera-
tion. When multiple gas fuels are supplied Fuel gases with a large percentage of an inert
and/or if variable fuel temperatures result in a gas such as nitrogen or carbon dioxide will
Modified Wobbe Number Index that exceeds have a ratio of rich-to-lean flammability limits
the ±10 percent limitation, independent fuel less than that of pure natural gas. Flammabil-
gas trains, which could include control valves, ity ratios of less than 2.2 to 1, as based on vol-
manifolds, and fuel nozzles, may be required ume at ISO conditions [14.696 psia and 59°F
for standard combustion systems. For DLE (101.325 kPa and 15°C)], may experience
applications, the Modified Wobbe Number problems maintaining stable combustion over
Index range must be between 40 and 60. An the full operating range of the turbine.
accurate analysis of all gas fuels, along with
Change 5 A-9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
MID-TD-0000-1
November 2001
A1-3.5 Gas Constituent Limits 6. Scrubber oil or liquid
Gas constituents are not specifically limited 7. Compressor lube oil

except to the extent described in paragraph
A1-2, FUEL GAS CLASSIFICATION. These 8. Naphthalene
limitations are set forth to assure stable com-
bustion through all gas turbine loads and 9. Gas hydrates
modes of operation. Limitations are more
stringent for DLE combustion systems where It is critical that the fuel gas is properly condi-
premixed combustion is utilized. A detailed tioned prior to being utilized as gas turbine
gas analysis shall be furnished to GE for fuel. This conditioning can be performed
proper evaluation. using a variety of methods. These include, but
are not limited to, media filtration, inertial sep-
A1-3.6 Gas Fuel Supply Pressure aration, coalescing, and fuel heating. Trace
metal, particulate, and liquid contamination
Gas fuel supply pressure requirements are limits are provided in the following para-
dependent on the gas turbine model and com- graphs. These limits are given in parts per
bustion design, the fuel gas analysis, and unit million by weight (ppmw) corrected to the
specific site conditions. Minimum and maxi- actual heating value of the fuel. It is critical
mum supply pressure requirements can be that fuel gas conditioning equipment be
determined by GE for specific applications. designed and sized so that these limits are not
exceeded.
A1-4 Contaminants
A1-4.1 Particulates
Dependent on the type of fuel gas, the geo-
graphical location, and the forwarding means, Contamination limits for particulates are
there is the potential for the "raw" gas supply established to prevent fouling and excessive
to contain one or more of the following con- erosion of hot gas path parts, erosion and plug-
taminants: ging of combustion fuel nozzles, and erosion
of the gas fuel system control valves. The uti-
1. Tar, lampblack, coke lization of gas filtration or inertial separation
is required. The filtration level should be a
2. Water, salt water beta ratio of 200 minimum (efficiency of
99.5%) at 5µ or less. The total particulate
3. Sand, clay should not exceed 30 ppmw. GE requires the
use of stainless steel piping downstream of
4. Rust this last level of filtration.
5. Iron sulfide
A-10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-1
November 2001
A1-4.2 Liquids to form the equivalent of 0.6 ppm of alkali

metal sulfates in the fuel. Unless sulfur levels
No liquids are allowed in the gas turbine fuel are extremely low, alkali levels are usually
gas supply. Liquids contained in the fuel can limiting in determining hot corrosion of hot
result in nuisance and/or hardware damaging gas path materials. For low Btu gases, the fuel
conditions. These include rapid excursions in contribution of alkali metals at the turbine
firing temperature and gas turbine load, pri- inlet is increased over that for natural gas, and
mary zone reignition and flashback of pre- the alkali limit in the fuel is, therefore,
mixed flames, and when liquids carry over decreased. The total amount of alkali met-
past the combustion system, melting of hot gas als(a) in gas fuels used with engines having
path components. When liquids are identified marinized (corrosion-resistant) coatings on the
in the gas supply, separation and heating is high pressure turbine blading shall not exceed
employed to achieve the required superheat 0.2 ppm(b).
level.
(a) Sodium, potassium, lithium.
A1-4.3 Sulfur Experience has shown that
sodium is by far the preponderant
There is no specific limit on natural gas fuel alkali metal, if any, found in gas-
sulfur content if the engine is used in an appli- eous fuels.
cation where both the fuel and environment
are free of alkali metals. There are several (b) This limit assumes zero alkali
concerns relative to the levels of sulfur con- metals in the inlet air or injected
tained in the fuel gas supply. Many of these water or steam. When actual lev-
concerns are not directly related to the gas tur- els are above zero, the maximum
bine, but to associated equipment and emis- allowable sodium content of the
sions requirements. These concerns include fuel must be reduced in accor-
but are not limited to: dance with the following
relationship:
A1-4.3.1 Hot Gas Path Corrosion
Typically, use of sulfur bearing fuels will not ppm sodium inlet air × air/fuel ratio =
be limited by concerns for corrosion in the tur-
ppm sodium in water or steam ×
bine hot gas path unless alkali metals are water or steam ratio =
present. Sodium, potassium, and other alkali fuel
metals are not normally found in natural gas ppm sodium in fuel =
fuels, but are typically found to be introduced
in the compressor inlet air in marine environ- Total fuel equivalence for sodium
______
from all sources not to exceed
ments, as well as in certain adverse industrial 0.2 ppm
environments. The total amount of sulfur and
alkali metals from all sources shall be limited
Change 5 A-11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
MID-TD-0000-1
November 2001
A1-4.3.2 HRSG Corrosion A1-4.3.4 Exhaust Emissions
If heat recovery equipment is used, the con- Sulfur burns mostly to sulfur dioxide, but 5
centration of sulfur in the fuel gas must be percent to 10 percent oxidizes to sulfur triox-
known so that the appropriate design for the ide. The latter can result in sulfate formation,
equipment can be specified. Severe corrosion and may be counted as particulate matter in
from condensed sulfuric acid results if an some jurisdictions. The remainder will be dis-
HRSG has metal temperatures below the sul- charged as sulfur dioxide. To limit the dis-
furic acid dew point. Contact the HRSG sup- charge of acid gas, some localities may restrict
plier for additional information. the allowable concentration of sulfur in the
fuel.
A1-4.3.3 SCR Deposition
A1-4.3.5 Elemental Sulfur Deposition
Units utilizing ammonia injection downstream
of the gas turbine for NOx control can experi- Solid elemental sulfur deposits can occur in
ence the formation of deposits containing gas fuel systems downstream of pressure
ammonium sulfate and bisulfate on low tem- reducing stations or gas control valves under
perature evaporator and economizer tubes. certain conditions. These conditions may be
Such deposits are quite acidic and, therefore, present if the gas fuel contains elemental sul-
corrosive. These deposits, and the corrosion fur vapor, even when the concentration of the
they cause, may also decrease HRSG perfor- vapor is a few parts per billion by weight.
mance and increase back pressure on the gas Concentrations of this magnitude cannot be
turbine. Deposition rates of ammonium sul- measured by commercially available instru-
fate and bisulfate are determined by the sulfur mentation, and deposition cannot, therefore,
content of the fuel, ammonia content in the be anticipated based on a standard gas analy-
exhaust gas, tube temperature, and boiler sis. Should deposition take place, fuel heating
design. Fuels having sulfur levels above those will be required to maintain the sulfur in vapor
as odorants for natural gas should be reported phase and avoid deposition. A gas tempera-
to GE. In addition, the presence of minute ture of 130°F (54.4°C) or higher may be
quantities of chlorides in the inlet air may required at the inlet to the gas control valves to
result in cracking of AISI 300 series stainless avoid deposition, depending on the sulfur
steels in the hot gas path. Contact the SCR vapor concentration. The sulfur vapor concen-
supplier for additional information. tration can be measured by specialized filter-
ing equipment. If required, GE can provide
further information on this subject.
A-12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-1
November 2001
A1-5 Definitions less. The hydrate line is always below or at

the moisture dew point, as free water must
A1-5.1 Dew Point exist in order for the hydrates to form. Main-
taining 50°F (28°C) of superheat above the
This is the temperature at which the first liquid moisture dew point will eliminate hydrate for-
droplet will form as the gas temperature is mation problems.
reduced. Common liquids found in gas fuel
are hydrocarbons, water, and glycol. Each has A1-5.5 Glycol
a separate and measurable dew point. The
dew point varies considerably with pressure, Glycol is not a natural constituent of natural
and both temperature and pressure must be gas, but is introduced during the dehydration
stated to properly define the gas property. process. Various forms of glycol are used,
Typically, the hydrocarbon dew point will diethylene and triethylene glycol being two
peak in the 300 to 600 psia (2068 to 4137 kPa) most common. In some cases, glycol is
range. injected into the pipeline as a preservative. In
most cases, glycol may only be a problem dur-
A1-5.2 Dry Saturated Condition ing commissioning of a new pipeline or if an
upset has taken place in an upstream dehydra-
The gas temperature is at, but not below or tion station.
above, the dew point temperature. No free liq-
uids are present. A1-5.6 Superheat
A1-5.3 Gas Hydrates This is defined as the difference between the

gas temperature minus the liquid dew point.
Gas hydrates are semisolid materials that can The difference is always positive or zero. A
cause deposits that plug instrumentation lines, negative value implies that the value is being
control valves, and filters. They are formed measured at two different states of pressure
when free water combines with one or more of and temperature and is not valid. A measured
the C1 through C4 hydrocarbons. Typically, gas temperature below the theoretical dew
the formation will take place downstream of a point means that the gas is in a wet saturated
pressure reducing station where the tempera- state with free liquids present.
ture drop is sufficient to cause moisture con-
densation in a region of high turbulence. A1-5.7 Saturation Line
Because hydrates can cause major problems in
the gas distribution network, the moisture con- This is the same as the dew point line.
tent is usually controlled upstream at a dehy-
dration process station. A1-5.8 Wet Saturated Condition
A1-5.4 Gas Hydrate Formation Line This is a point at which the mixture consists of
both vapor and liquids.
This is similar to the dew point line except the
temperature variation with pressure is much
Change 5 A-13/(14 Blank)

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-2
June 2000
5 MID-TD-0000-2November 1991
Appendix A2
Liquid Fuel Requirements for GE AeroDerivative Gas Turbines
This document lists specifications and MIL-F-16884 Fuel Oil - Diesel Marine
describes application guidelines for liquid (NATO F-75, F-76)
fuels that can be fired satisfactorily in GE VV-F-800 Fuel Oil - Diesel, Grades
aeroderivative gas turbines. It is recommended DF-A, DF-1, and DF-2
that a complete specification analysis of all (NATO F-54)
liquid fuels proposed for use in GE aeroderiv-
ative gas turbines be reviewed by GE prior to ASTM D396 Grades No. 1, 2, 4, and
use. 4 (Light)
A2-1 Fuel Specifications ASTM D2800 Gas Turbine Fuel Oils,

Grades No. O-GT1,2,
Fuels conforming to the following military No. 1-GT, No. 2-GT
and industry specifications are acceptable for
use in GE aeroderivative gas turbines in indus- Other:
trial and shipboard applications, except as The pure hydrocarbon combustibles [e.g., pro-
noted below, and provided they also meet the pane (C2H8) and butane (C4H10), both nor-
additional criteria described in A2-2. How- mal and iso] are acceptable either alone or in
ever, their use should be reviewed against various mixtures with other liquid fuels, pro-
applicable safety and regulatory requirements. vided that fuel manifold pressures are suffi-
cient to maintain the fuel in the liquid state2.
D50TF2 GEAE Aviation Fuel Alternate fuels may be required for starting
Specification and low-power operation. Contact GE for spe-
ISO 8217 ISO-F-DMA (MGO) cific applications.
MIL-DTL-5624 Grades JP-41, JP-5 (NATO Light distillate fuels, such as Naphtha (C10
F-40, F-44) down to C4 hydrocarbons), gasoline (C7 to C5
MIL-DTL-83133 Grades JP-8 (NATO hydrocarbons), and D2880 Grade No. 0-GT,
F-34/F-35) are acceptable as fuels in GE aeroderivative
ASTM D975 Diesel Fuel Oil, Grades gas turbines provided that fuel manifold pres-
1-D and 2-D, 1-D Low Sul- sures are sufficient to maintain fuel as a liquid,
fur, and 2-D Low Sulfur especially in hot climates2. Alternative fuels
may be necessary for starting the engines and
ASTM D1655 Aviation Turbine Fuels
low-power operation. Contact GE for specific
(Jet-A, Jet-A1, and Jet-B1)
applications.
1. Highly volatile wide-cut fuels (such as MIL-

DTL-5624 JP-4, ASTM D1665 Jet-B, and 2. Liquefied gas, light distillates, and alcohols, and
ASTM D2880 Grade No. 0-GT) are generally liquefied gas fuels may have inadequate
acceptable for industrial, but not shipboard lubricity, requiring the use of a fuel pump/
applications. system specifically designed to handle these
types of fuels. See paragraph A2-2.3.
Change 5 A-15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
MID-TD-0000-2
June 2000
Various alcohols [e.g., hydroxyl derivatives of The purchaser may refer to the Qualified Parts
hydrocarbons, such as methanol (CH3OH) List (QPL-53021) for a summary of approved
and ethanol (C2H5OH)] can burn in GE aero- stabilizer additives used in the long-term stor-
derivative gas turbines2. Contact GE for spe- age of diesel and distillate fuels. This publica-
cific applications. tion is periodically revised, and is available
from the U.S. Government Printing Office.
A2-2 Additional Requirements
A2-2.3 Viscosity
The following requirements supplement and
supersede, where there is a conflict, the speci- The viscosity of the fuel, as supplied to the
fications listed in A2-1. However, if the speci- inlet connection on the gas turbine, shall be a
fication is more restrictive, it applies. minimum of 0.5 centistoke3, and shall be up to
6.0 centistokes maximum for starting and 12.0
A2-2.1 Composition centistokes maximum during operation. The
fuel may be heated to meet this requirement.
The fuel shall consist of hydrocarbon com-
pounds only and must be compatible between A2-2.4 Wax
brands and batches.
Wax can be present in fuel oil, especially the
While there is no specific requirement or limit distillates with higher pour points. It may be
on the amount of fuel bound nitrogen (FBN) necessary to determine the percent of wax and
contained in a liquid fuel, it is recommended its melting point and to provide a suitable
that the amount of liquid fuel FBN be under- method to keep the wax dissolved at all times.
stood for those applications that are sensitive
to levels of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the A2-2.5 Fuel Temperature Require-
gas turbine exhaust. FBN is the amount of ments
nitrogen in the fuel that is chemically bound.
During the combustion process, the FBN is The minimum temperature of liquid fuel sup-
converted, at least partially, to NOx (called plied to the gas turbine shall be the greater of:
organic NOx) and adds to the total amount of
a. 20°F (11°C) above the wax point tempera-
NOx that is contained in the gas turbine
ture of the fuel.
exhaust. GE emissions data provided for liq-
uid fuels assumes an FBN content of less than
or
0.015 percent by weight unless otherwise
noted. b. The temperature required to remain within
maximum fuel viscosity requirements or
A2-2.2 Additives
35°F (2°C).
The use of any dyes or additives requires
approval of GE, unless such additives are spe-
cifically approved in the fuel specifications 3. Required for adequate GE aeroderivative gas turbine
(A2-1) or they conform to MIL-S-53021A. fuel pump lubrication and to prevent pump cavitation
when using light fuels.
A-16 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-2
June 2000
The maximum temperature of liquid fuel sup- When liquid fuel is supplied by barges or other
plied to the gas turbine should not exceed bulk modes of transportation, it should be
150°F (65.6°C). For liquid fuels with high pumped directly into raw fuel storage tanks,
vapor pressure constituents (naphtha, NGL, and must be conditioned/treated before being
etc.), the fuel temperature in the manifold placed in one of two clean fuel day storage
should be at least 100°F (55.6°C) below the tanks from which gas turbine will be sup-plied.
bubble point temperature of the lightest com- Redundant, clean day fuel storage tanks are
ponent at high pressure compressor discharge recommended to provide a primary settled fuel
static pressure (PS3). supply and to allow tank repair and/or cleaning
with minimum downtime. Storage tanks must
A2-3 Property Requirements be constructed of corrosion-resistant materials
or appropriately lined to minimize internally
Property requirements are listed in Table A1.
formed contaminants. Fuel shall not be trans-
Contaminant limits apply to fuel samples
ported, stored, or handled in system compo-
taken at the gas turbine fuel manifold flange. It
nents containing copper, e.g., ships that have
cannot be assumed that specification fuel sup-
copper heating coils, or storage tanks coated
plied by a refinery still meets those specifica-
with zinc. Neither copper nor zinc is normally
tions once it is delivered to the gas turbine.
found in refined fuels such as diesel and naph-
tha, but should either be present, it can cause
A2-4 Fuel Handling fuel degradation and additional engine mainte-
True distillate fuel as refined has low water, nance. No fuel should be used that contains
dirt, and trace metal contaminant levels that detectable amounts of copper or zinc.
can be maintained with careful transportation, Duplex, primary strainers (150-200 micron
handling, and storage methods. Most contami- absolute) should be located between the off-
nation occurs during transportation of fuel. loading facility and the raw fuel storage tanks.
Duplex, secondary filters (50-100 micron
Since fuel can be contaminated during trans-
absolute) should be located between the raw
portation from the refinery to the site, auxil-
fuel storage tanks and the final fuel treatment
iary fuel cleanup equipment should be
system. All fuel storage tanks must have inlets
available to restore the fuel quality. Available
at the bottom of the tank. All fuel day storage
purification equipment includes centrifuges
tanks should be provided with a floating suc-
and electrostatic dehydrators. In addition to
tion. The distance between the inlet and outlet
potential hot corrosion from salt in the water,
should be maximized.
water accumulated in the bottom of a storage
tank can also cause problems. Microorgan- After filling any tank or adding fuel to it, a set-
isms tend to grow at the water/fuel interface, tling time of 24 hours should be allowed
generating both chemicals corrosive to metals before taking fuel from that tank. Initially,
in the fuel system and also slime that can plug water and sludge should be drained from all
fuel filters. In marine applications, shipboard storage tanks on a daily basis. After experi-
systems that allow recycling of fuel from the ence is gained with a given fuel and fuel
service tanks through the centrifugal purifiers source, the frequency of draining may be
are recommended. adjusted by the customer.
Change 5 A-17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
MID-TD-0000-2
June 2000
Table A1 Liquid Fuel Property Requirements

Property Limit ASTM Method
Ash, %, maximum 0.01 D482
Sulfur, %, maximum 1.0a D129b
Vanadium, ppm, maximum 0.5 D3605
Sodium, Potassium, and Lithium, ppm, maximum 0.2c, d D3605e
Lead, ppm, maximum 1.0 D3605
Calcium, ppm, maximum 2.0 D3605
Hydrogen content, %, minimum 12.7f D1018, D3701
Demulsification, minutes, maximum 20.0 D1401 and Note 3 therein
Carbon residue, %, maximum (100% sample) 1.0 D524
Carbon residue, %, maximum (10% Ramsbottoms) 0.25 D524
Particulates, mg/gal., maximum 10.0g D2276
Water and Sediment, volume %, maximum 0.10h D2709
Flash Point, °F, maximum See i Below D93
Copper corrosion, maximum No. 1j D130
Notes
a. Fuels with a higher sulfur content can be burned. Impact on Hot Section Repair Interval (HSRI) will be dependent
upon alkali metals present in the fuel, inlet air, and injected water and upon engine operating temperature. Consult
GE for review of higher sulfur fuels.
b. The following alternate methods are acceptable: ASTM D1552, ASTM D2622, and ASTM D1266.
c. This limit is considered to include all alkali metals, e.g., potassium and lithium, as well as sodium. Experience,
however, has shown that sodium is generally the predominant alkali metal. This limit also assumes zero alkali met-
als in the inlet air or injected water or steam. When actual levels are above zero, the maximum allowable sodium
content of the fuel must be reduced in accordance with the following relationship:
ppm Na in Inlet Air x Air/Fuel Ratio
+ ppm Na in Water or Steam x Water or Steam/Fuel Ratio
+ ppm Na in Fuel
Total fuel equivalence for sodium from all sources not to exceed 0.2 ppm
d. For nonmarinized engines (except for LM6000), the total amount of alkali metal from all sources shall not exceed
0.1 ppm.
e. To achieve the level of sensitivity for detection of sodium to the level required, an atomic absorption spectrometer
or a rotating disk spectrometer may be necessary.
f. Care must be taken with the more viscous fuels to ensure that the minimum hydrogen content is met.
g. Maximum particle size is 20 micrometers.
h. For marine gas turbines using a hydromechanical main fuel control, the limit is 40 ppm.
i. Legal limits and applicable safety regulations must be met; however, it should be noted that use of fuels having a
flash point in excess of 200°F (93.3°C) may result in unsatisfactory starting characteristics. Blending for enhance-
ment of spark ignition or use of alternate fuels may be required for starting.
j. Copper corrosion test conditions are 2 hours at 212°F (100°C).
A-18 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-2
June 2000
A2-5 Fuel Sampling ensure that the fuel discharged from these
tanks and at a practical location at, or just
A well-thought-out fuel sampling protocol upstream of, the gas turbine fuel manifold
will ensure that quality fuel is delivered to the flange meets the specification.
engine. For each delivery, fuel samples should
be taken and analyzed at the following For all fuel sampling, sufficient samples (min-
locations: imum of three) must be taken to ensure that a
representative sample is obtained. Samples
• At the refinery before loading. should be taken at different levels in large vol-
ume tanks and at equally spaced time intervals
• At the port where the fuel is delivered during fuel delivery or fuel treatment. To avoid
before unloading. contamination, all samples should be obtained
in clean plastic bottles. Fuel samples taken
• From the pipeline just upstream of the raw should be analyzed to meet all GE liquid fuel
fuel storage tanks as the fuel is being requirements. If fuel samples taken after the
added to the tanks. above recommendations have been imple-
mented indicate that the fuel system does not
After the fuel is treated/conditioned, samples
provide fuel per the requirements, the cus-
should be taken and analyzed at both the inlet
tomer must change his fuel source or modify
and outlet of the fuel treatment system. Fuel
the fuel treatment system. The end user is
exiting the system must meet the fuel specifi-
responsible for ensuring that the fuel meets the
cation. This should be confirmed before the
requirements.
fuel is placed in clean fuel day storage tanks.
Fuel samples should be taken and analyzed to
A3
Change 5 A-19/(A-20 Blank)

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-3
July 1988
5 MID-TD-0000-3July 1988
Appendix A3
NOx Suppression Water Purity Specification for GE Aircraft Derivative
Gas Turbines in Industrial Applications
This specification establishes the requirements ASTM D1293 Tests for pH of Water
for purified water for NOx suppression in gas
turbine engines. ASTM D3370 Practices for Sampling
Water
For the purpose of this specification, the fol-
lowing definition shall apply: ASTM D4191 Tests for Sodium in Water
by Atomic Absorption
NOx Suppression Water - Water introduced Spectography
into the engine combustor for the purpose of
suppressing the oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in ASTM D4192 Tests for Potassium in
the engine exhaust gases. Water by Atomic Absorp-
tion Spectography
A3-1 Applicable Documents
ASTM D5907 Test for Filterable and Non-
Available from American Society for Testing Filterable Matter in Water
and Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia,
PA 19103. A3-2 Sampling Requirements
ASTM D512 Tests for Chloride Ion in The sampling shall be in accordance with
Water and Waste ASTM D3370. A minimum of 1 gallon or 4
liters shall be supplied. Equipment needed for
ASTM D516 Tests for Sulfate Ion in sampling water and steam is listed in ASTM
Water and Waste D1192.
ASTM D859 Tests for Silica in Water A3-3 Property Requirements

and Waste
The water, when tested in accordance with the
ASTM D1125 Tests for Electrical Con- designated methods, shall meet the require-
ductivity and Resistivity of ments listed.
Water
A3-4 Filtration Requirements
ASTM D1192 Equipment for Sampling
Water and Steam The water shall contain no particles larger than
20 micrometers absolute.

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-4
May 1996
5 MID-TD-0000-4May 1996
Appendix A4
Compressor Cleaning Water Purity Specification for GE Aircraft
Derivative Gas Turbines in Industrial Applications
This specification establishes the requirements A4-1 Applicable Documents
for purified water for use in cleaning the com-
pressor of gas turbine engines where the intent The following documents shall form a part of
is to restore performance by removing depos- this specification to the extent defined herein.
its from compressor components. The water Unless an issue is stipulated, the latest revision
quality defined in this specification applies to shall apply.
water used in both on-line compressor clean-
ing and crank-soak compressor cleaning. Available from American Society for Testing
and Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia,
For the purpose of this specification, the fol- PA 19103.
lowing definitions shall apply:
ASTM D1192 Equipment for Sampling
On-line Compressor Cleaning - A method of and Steam
removing the buildup of deposits on compres-
sor components while the engine is operating. ASTM D1293 Tests for pH of Water
On–line cleaning is accomplished by spraying
cleaning solution into the inlet of the engine ASTM D4191 Test for Sodium in Water by
while the engine is operating. Atomic Absorption Spec-
tography
Crank-Soak Compressor Cleaning - A
method of removing the buildup of deposits on ASTM D4192 Tests for Potassium in
compressor components while the engine is Water by Atomic Absorp-
motored by the starter. Crank-soak cleaning is tion Spectography
accomplished by spraying cleaning solution
ASTM D5907 Tests for Filterable and
into the inlet of the engine while the engine is
Non-Filterable Matter in
operating unfired at crank speed.
Water
Liquid Detergent - A concentrated solution
ASTM D3370 Practices for Sampling
of water-soluble surface active agents and
Water
emulsifiable solvents.
Cleaning Solution - A solution of emulsion of A4-2 Sampling Requirements

liquid detergent and water or a water and anti-
Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM
freeze mixture for direct engine application.
D1192 and ASTM D3370. A minimum sam-
The recommended dilution of liquid detergent
ple of 1 gallon or 4 liters shall be supplied.
and water shall be specified by the liquid
detergent manufacturer.
Change 5 A-23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
MID-TD-0000-4
May 1996
A4-3 Chemical Requirements A4-4 Filtration Requirements

The water shall meet the following require- The water shall contain no particles larger than
ments when tested in accordance with the des- 100 micrometers absolute.
ignated test method below.
Property Requirements Limit ASTM Test Method

Total matter, max. 100 ppm D5907
pH 6.5-8.5 D1293
Sodium + potassium, max. 25 ppm D4191 and D4192
A-24 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-5
July 1989
5 MID-TD-0000-5July 1989
Appendix A5
Liquid Detergent for Compressor Cleaning for GE Aircraft Derivative Gas
Turbines in Industrial Applications
This specification establishes the requirements ARP 1795 Stress-Corrosion of Tita-
for liquid detergents used to prepare solutions nium Alloys, Effect of
for cleaning the compressors of gas turbine Cleaning Agents on Air-
engines, where the intent is to restore perfor- craft Engine Materials
mance by removing deposits on compressor
components. Such deposits include salt, soils, AMS 1424 Deicing/Anti-Icing Fluid,
and oils that may be ingested from the atmo- Aircraft (Newtonian - SAE
sphere. Type I)
The cleaning process shall be carried out by A5-2 Detergent Properties

spraying the cleaning solution into the bell-
A5-2.1 Composition
mouth of the engine while the engine is run-
ning at power (on-line cleaning) or while the The chemical composition of the detergent is
engine is being cranked (crank-soak cleaning). not limited, other than as specified herein.
For the purposes of this specification, the fol- A5-2.2 Biodegradability
lowing definitions shall apply:
Use of detergent/cleaning solution shall con-
Liquid Detergent - A concentrated solution form to local regulations for water pollution.
of water-soluble surface active agents and Biodegradable ingredients are recommended.
emulsifiable solvents.
A5-2.3 Toxicity
Cleaning Solution - A solution or emulsion of
liquid detergent in water or water and anti- Use of the liquid detergent/cleaning solution
freeze mixture for direct engine application. shall conform to local regulations for indus-
Recommended dilution of detergent and water trial hygiene and air pollution. Use of nontoxic
shall be determined by the detergent manufac- ingredients is recommended.
turer.
A5-2.4 Health and Safety Information
The liquid detergent manufacturer shall make
The following documents shall form a part of available health and safety information for the
this specification to the extent defined herein. liquid detergent as required by applicable
Unless an issue is stipulated, the latest revision local, state, and federal regulations.
shall apply.
A5-2.5 Solids
ASTM D88 Standard Test Method For
The liquid detergent shall contain no particles
Saybolt Viscosity
larger than 20 micrometers.
Change 5 A-25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
MID-TD-0000-5
July 1989
A5-2.6 Physical and Chemical Proper- A5-3.1.4 Hard Water Compatibility

ties
The liquid detergent shall show no separation
The liquid detergent shall meet the following or layering when mixed with synthetic hard
test requirements. water prepared in accordance with A5-4.2.
A5-3 Test Requirements A5-3.1.5 Acid and Alkali Acceptance
Requirements are defined for liquid detergents The liquid detergent shall show no separation,
and for cleaning solutions. layering, or precipitation when tested in acidic
or alkali media in accordance with A5-4.3.
A5-3.1 Liquid Detergent
A5-3.1.6 Salt Water Tolerance
A5-3.1.1 Residue or Ash Content
The liquid detergent shall show no separation
Residue or ash content shall not exceed 0.01% or gelling when mixed with 3.5% salt water in
when tested in accordance with A5-4.1. accordance with A5-4.4.
A5-3.1.7 Viscosity
A5-3.1.2 Low-Temperature Stability
The liquid detergent shall have a viscosity of
The liquid detergent shall show no evidence of
50 to 200 SUS at 77°F (25°C) when tested in
separation of component parts when main-
accordance with ASTM D88.
tained at 37 to 43°F (2.8 to 6.1°C). It is highly
desirable although not mandatory that the A5-3.1.8 pH
fluid shall remain liquid below 32°F (0°C).
The pH of the liquid detergent as received
A5-3.1.3 Cold Weather Solution Com- shall be from 6.5 to 8.5 when measured with a
patibility suitable pH meter employing a glass electrode.
The liquid detergent shall show no separation, A5-3.2 Cleaning Solution
layering, or precipitation when mixed to the
liquid detergent manufacturer's recommended A5-3.2.1 Corrosive Elements
dilution in one or more of the following anti-
freeze solutions after 2 hours at 7 to 13°F Maximum levels of elements in the cleaning
(-13.9 to -10.6°C): solution, which may promote various types
of corrosion, shall be no greater than as
• Isopropyl alcohol shown in Table A2 when analyzed by methods
in A5-4.5.
• Monopropylene glycol (PG)
A5-3.2.2 pH
See A5-6 for more information regarding liq-
uid detergent and antifreeze mixtures. The pH of the cleaning solution shall be from
6.5 to 8.5 when measured with a suitable pH
meter employing a glass electrode.
A-26 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-5
July 1989
Table A2 Maximum Corrosives Level A5-4.2 Hard Water Compatibility

Total Alkali Metals (Sodium + A5-4.2.1 Preparation of Synthetic Hard
25 ppm
Potassium + Lithium, etc.)
Water
Magnesium + Calcium 5 ppm
A hard water solution is prepared by dissolv-
Vanadium 0.1 ppm
ing the following in 1 liter of just boiled and
Lead 0.1 ppm cooled distilled water:
Tin + Copper 10 ppm a. 0.20 ± 0.005 gram calcium acetate, reagent
Sulfur 50 ppm grade Ca(C2H3O2)2 H2O.
Chlorine 40 ppm b. 0.15 ± 0.005 gram magnesium sulfate,
reagent grade MgSO4 7 H2O.
A5-4 Test Methods
A5-4.2.2 Hard Water Test
A5-4.1 Residue or Ash Content
Add 5 ml of liquid detergent to a clean 50-ml
Weigh 10 ± 0.1 gram sample of liquid deter- cylinder. Add 45 ml of synthetic hard water
gent in a weighed 30 ml porcelain crucible. and mix well. Examine the solution for com-
Heat gently to volatilize any water or solvents. patibility after 16 hours at 72 to 82°F (22.2 to
(Crucible may be placed in air oven at 217 to 27.8°C).
225°F (102.8 to 107.2°C) for 24 hours, fol-
lowed by 460 to 468°F (237.8 to 242.2°C) for A5-4.3 Acid and Alkali Acceptance
24 hours to ensure all volatile matter is evapo-
The liquid detergent shall be mixed with dis-
rated.) Finally, ignite contents over Bunsen
tilled water in accordance with the liquid
Burner, first at low temperature under good
detergent manufacturer's recommended dilu-
oxidizing conditions until all ignitable mate-
tion. To 50 ml of the solution, add 1 ml of 75%
rial is consumed, then place a crucible in a
phosphoric acid. To another 50 ml of the solu-
muffle furnace at 1904 to 2012°F (1040° to
tion, add 5 ml of 75% phosphoric acid. To
1100°C) for 2 hours, cool in a desiccator, and
another 50 ml of the solution, add 1 ml of 50%
weigh.
potassium hydroxide. Let all three mixtures
Percent residue or ash = (100 x A) / W stand for 1 hour at 72 to 82°F (22.2 to 27.8°C)
and then examine for acid or alkali accep-
Where: A = grams of residue tance.
W = grams of sample
A5-4.4 Salt Water Tolerance
Prepare a 3.5% by weight solution of sodium

chloride in distilled water. Add 15 ml of salt
solution to 35 ml of liquid detergent and let
stand for 1 hour at 72 to 82°F (22.2 to 27.8°C).
Examine for salt water tolerance.
Change 5 A-27

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
MID-TD-0000-5
July 1989
A5-4.5 Elemental Content A5-6 Cold Weather Usage

Elemental content shall be determined using In cold weather, liquid detergent must be
the following methods: added to antifreeze mixture rather than to
water alone. At present, the only acceptable
Element Method antifreeze solutions are:
Sulfur, Phosphorus Inductively Coupled
• Isopropyl alcohol
Plasma Spectroscopy -
Spectroscopy (ICP-AES)
• Monopropylene glycol
Chlorine Microcoulometric
filtration Monopropylene glycol (PG) must be per AMS
Sodium, Potassium Atomic Absorption (AA) 1424 and may be used down to 20°F (-6.7°C).
Other metals ICP-AES or AA Antifreeze mixtures are shown in Table A3.

The liquid detergent manufacturer must spec-
A5-5 Compatibility ify which, if any, of the antifreezes specified
above (also specified in A5-3.1.3) is not com-
A5-5.1 Engine Materials patible with the liquid detergent.
Use of the detergent gas turbine cleaner shall Use of nonisopropyl alcohol, ethylene glycol,
not have adverse effects on engine system or additives containing chlorine, sodium, or
materials such as titanium stress corrosion, hot potassium is not permitted since they may
corrosion of turbine components, or damage to attack titanium and other metals.
lubrication system components.
It is extremely important that the liquid deter-
A5-5.2 Titanium Stress Corrosion gent and antifreeze solution be a homoge-
neous mixture when sprayed into the
A titanium stress corrosion test in accordance bellmouth of the gas turbine. If after 2 hours
with ARP 1795, or equivalent, may be run on the liquid detergent and antifreeze solution
the liquid detergent at the discretion of GE separates (see A5-3.1.3), agitation of the mix-
M&IE. ture in the water-wash tank is permissible.
However, the liquid detergent manufacturer
shall specify that agitation is required.
A-28 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-5
July 1989
Table A3 Water-Wash Antifreeze Mixtures
Outside Air Monopropylene Isopropyl

Temperature, Glycol (PG) H2 O Alcohol H2 O
°F (°C) % Vol % Vol % Vol % Vol
Compressor Washing Antifreeze Mixtures
+20 to +50 21 79 22 78
(-7 to 10)
+10 to +20 N/A N/A 34 66

(-12 to -7)
0 to +10 N/A N/A 47 53
(-18 to -12)
-10 to 0 N/A N/A 72 28

(-23 to -18)
-20 to -10 N/A N/A 88 12

(-29 to -23)
-30 to -20 N/A N/A 97 3
(-34 to -29)
Compressor Rinsing Antifreeze Mixtures
+20 to +50 14 86 18 82
(-7 to 10)
+10 to +20 N/A N/A 27 73

(-12 to -7)
0 to +10 N/A N/A 39 61

(-18 to -12)
-10 to 0 N/A N/A 58 42

(-23 to -18)
-20 to -10 N/A N/A 70 30
(-29 to -23)
-30 to -20 N/A N/A 77 23

(-34 to -29)

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-6
July 1996
5 MID-TD-0000-6July 1996
Appendix A6
Specification for Lubricating Oil for GE Aircraft Derivative Gas Turbines
This document provides the requirements and A6-2.2 American Society of Testing
application guidelines for selection of lubri- and Materials
cating oils that can be satisfactorily used in
GE M&IE applications. It is recommended The following documents are available from
that the selected lubricating oil be reviewed American Society for Testing and Materials,
with GE M&IE prior to use. Customer Service, 100 Barr Harbor Drive,
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959:
A6-1 Oil Specifications
ASTM D2532 Low Temperature Viscosity
Oils conforming to the US Department of
Defense (DOD) Specifications listed in Sec- ASTM D97 Pour Point
tion A6-2.1 are acceptable for use in GE Air-
ASTM D445 Kinetic Viscosity
craft Derivative gas turbines, provided they are
listed on the Qualified Product List (QPL) for
the specification.
A6-3 Requirements
Lubricating oil shall conform to
Commercially available synthetic-based lubri-
cating oils are acceptable for use in GE air- MIL-L-23699; however, exceptions to the fol-
lowing requirements will be considered:
craft derivative gas turbines, provided they are
listed in Section A6-4. Such oils largely con- • Low-temperature viscosity when tested
form to the primary requirements of the oils in per ASTM D2532
Section A6-2.1, but certain variations have
been approved. Such oils have been qualified • Pour point when tested per ASTM D97
by the supplier to meet the requirements of
this specification. • Viscosity at 40°C and 100°C when tested
per ASTM D445
• Base stock composition
The following documents form a part of this
specifications to the extent defined herein. Specific variations to MIL-L-23699 shall be
Unless a particular issue is stipulated, the lat- provided by the oil supplier, along with perfor-
est revision shall apply. mance difference impacts, for review by GE
M&IE.
A6-2.1 U.S. DOD Specifications
A6-3.1 Material Compatibility
MIL-L-23699 - Lubricating Oil, Aircraft Tur-
bine Engines, Synthetic Base The lubricating oil shall be compatible with
the same elastomer seal and metallic materials
MIL-L-7808 - Lubricating Oil, Aircraft Tur- as the MIL-L-23699 compliant lubricating
bine Engines, Synthetic Base, Type 1 oils.
Change 5 A-31

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
MID-TD-0000-6
July 1996
The lubricating oil shall be mixable with ing in a GE M&IE LM series gas turbine
MIL-L-23699 or MIL-L-7808 compliant oil in application(s). The sponsoring operator will
a ratio up to 5% of either, without adversely accept total responsibility for all results
affecting the property integrity of the majority, related to operating with the candidate lubri-
or operating, oil. Mixing of oils is not intended cating oil. The service evaluation engine shall
but will result due to engine location changes. have a known hardware condition baseline,
based on depot inspection or new delivery,
A6-4 Qualification immediately prior to the service evaluation
test.
Lubricating oil shall be considered qualified
and acceptable for use in GE M&I Aircraft Service evaluation testing shall be conducted
Derivative gas turbines after demonstrating on a minimum of three LM series gas turbines,
conformance to the requirements and after each accumulating at least 8,000 operating
being listed in paragraph A6-4.4. The qualifi- hours at a baseload operating site prior to
cation program shall be carried out by the oil inspection. During operation, periodic oil
supplier in conjunction with a sponsoring gas samples shall be tested and trended for physi-
turbine owner/operator. GE M&I's participa- cal and chemical property changes. Inspection
tion will be limited to technical consultation, shall be performed at an authorized depot and
review, and final approval. be in accordance with the applicable repair
manual.
A6-4.1 Performance Tests
Inspection shall focus on the oil-wetted parts,
The oil supplier shall conduct tests in accor- including the bearings, gears, elastomer seals,
dance with MIL-L-23699 and compare the sump oil seals, actuators, and lube/hydraulic
results with the requirements stated therein. pumps. GE M&I will be permitted to witness
All results, particularly variations to any of the inspections, at the discretion of GE.
MIL-L-23699 requirements, shall be reviewed
with GE M&I prior to service evaluation test- A6-4.3 Qualification Report
ing. The material presented for review shall
include, as a minimum, the following: The oil supplier and/or operator shall prepare
and submit a Final Qualification Report to GE
• Physical chemical properties and varia- M&I. The report shall include, as a minimum:
tions to MIL-L-23699
• Oil brand description including the com-
• Expected impact to operating systems due plete formulation
to property variations
• Certified physical, chemical, and perfor-
• Material compatibility lists and test results mance test results
• Oil-coking test results • Material safety data sheets
A6-4.2 Service Evaluation Tests • Service evaluation test history including
all significant operational and maintenance
The oil shall undergo service evaluation test- events
A-32 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
MID-TD-0000-6
July 1996
• Service evaluation oil sample trending with GE M&IE to assess potential impact on
results qualification results.
• Final depot engine inspection results A6-4.4 Approved Lubricating Oils
Upon review and approval of the Final Quali- In addition to those listed on QPL-23699 and
fication Report by GE M&IE, the candidate QPL-7808 (Qualified Products list), the fol-
oil will be included on the approved oils list. lowing lubricating oils are approved for use in
GE M&I gas turbines and gas generators:
Formulation changes affecting any approved
performance characteristics must be reviewed a. None at this time.

Gas Turbines
LM6000 PD GEK 105061

Volume II
Series
GEK 105061
Volume II
ON-SITE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR
GENERAL ELECTRIC LM6000 PD SERIES
GAS TURBINES
GE INDUSTRIAL
AERODERIVATIVE
GAS TURBINES
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS GE PROPRIETARY

INFORMATION AND IS DISCLOSED IN CONFIDENCE. IT IS THE PROPERTY OF GE AND
SHALL NOT BE USED, DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE
EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF GE, INCLUDING, BUT WITHOUT LIMITATION, IT IS
NOT TO BE USED IN THE CREATION, MANUFACTURE, DEVELOPMENT, OR DEVIATION
OF ANY REPAIRS, MODIFICATIONS, SPARE PARTS, DESIGN, OR CONFIGURATION
CHANGES OR TO OBTAIN FAA OR ANY OTHER GOVERNMENT OR REGULATORY
APPROVAL TO DO SO. IF CONSENT IS GIVEN FOR REPRODUCTION IN WHOLE OR IN
PART, THIS NOTICE AND THE NOTICE SET FORTH ON EACH PAGE OF THIS
DOCUMENT SHALL APPEAR IN ANY SUCH REPRODUCTION IN WHOLE OR PART. THE
INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT MAY ALSO BE CONTROLLED BY U.S.
EXPORT CONTROL LAWS. UNAUTHORIZED EXPORT OR REEXPORT IS PROHIBITED.
COPYRIGHT (2001) GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, USA
GE INDUSTRIAL AERODERIVATIVE GAS TURBINES

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45215-6301
01 September 1997
Change 5 30 May 2003
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
Volume II GE Industrial AeroDerivative Gas Turbines
NOTE
These instructions are not intended to cover all details or variations in

equipment, or to provide for every contingency connected with instal-
lation, replacement, and maintenance. If more information is desired,
or if problems arise which are not covered herein, contact General
Electric Customer Service.
NUMERICAL INDEX OF EFFECTIVE PAGES AND WORK PACKAGES

List of Current Changes
Original ............. 0................ 01 September 1997

Change .............. 1................ 30 June 1998
Change .............. 2................ 30 June 1999
Change .............. 3................ 30 September 2000
Change ............... 4................ 30 September 2001
Chagne ................ 5................ 30 May 2003
Interim Change Notices (ICN) GEK 105061-16, dated 20 February 2002, GEK 105061-17, dated
18 April 2002, and GEK 105061-18, dated 1 August 2002, are incorporated in this change.
Total number of pages in this volume is 1424 consisting of the following:
Page No. Change No.

Title ....... 5
A to B/(C Blank) ....... 5
i to iv ....... 5
WP/SWP No. Change No. WP/SWP No. Change No. WP/SWP No. Change No.
WP 0001 00 ........ 5 WP 1511 00 ........ 4 WP 1815 00 ......... 0
WP 1110 00 ........ 0 WP 1515 00 ........ 3 WP 1816 00 ......... 0
WP 1111 00 ........ 0 SWP 1515 01 ........ 3 WP 1817 00 ......... 0
WP 1112 00 ........ 0 WP 1516 00 ........ 5 WP 1910 00 ......... 0
WP 1113 00 ........ 0 WP 1517 00 ........ 0 WP 1911 00 ......... 5
WP 1114 00 ........ 0 WP 1610 00 ........ 0 WP 1913 00 ......... 0
WP 1210 00 ........ 5 WP 1611 00 ........ 2 SWP 1913 01 ......... 3
WP 1310 00 ........ 0 WP 1710 00 ........ 5 SWP 1913 02 ......... 4
WP 1311 00 ........ 0 WP 1711 00 ........ 5 SWP 1913 03 ......... 5
WP 1312 00 ........ 0 WP 1712 00 ........ 5 SWP 1913 04 ......... 5
WP 1313 00 ........ 5 WP 1713 00 ........ 0 WP 1915 00 ......... 2
WP 1410 00 ........ 5 WP 1811 00 ........ 0 WP 2110 00 ......... 0
WP 1411 00 ........ 5 WP 1812 00 ........ 0 WP 2210 00 ......... 2
WP 1412 00 ........ 5 WP 1813 00 ........ 0 WP 2211 00 ......... 5
WP 1510 00 ........ 4 WP 1814 00 ........ 0 WP 2212 00 ......... 0
A Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
GE Industrial AeroDerivative Gas Turbines Volume II
WP/SWP No. Change No.

WP 2213 00 ......... 1 WP 4021 00 ......... 0
WP 2214 00 ......... 5 WP 4022 00 ......... 0
WP 2215 00 ......... 0 WP 4023 00 ......... 0
WP 2216 00 ......... 0 WP 4024 00 ......... 0
WP 2217 00 ......... 5 WP 4025 00 ......... 0
WP 2310 00 ......... 0 WP 4026 00 ......... 0
WP 2410 00 ......... * WP 4027 00 ......... 4
WP 2411 00 ......... 3 WP 4028 00 ......... 0
SWP 2411 01 ......... 3 WP 4029 00 ......... 2
WP 2412 00 ......... 5 WP 4030 00 ......... 5
WP 2413 00 ......... 5 WP 4031 00 ......... 4
WP 2510 00 ......... 3
WP 2511 00 ......... 5 * - To be provided
WP 2610 00 ......... 4
WP 2611 00 ......... 2
WP 2612 00 ......... 2
WP 2613 00 ......... 5
WP 2614 00 ......... 5
WP 2710 00 ......... 4
WP 2711 00 ......... 5
WP 2810 00 ......... 2
WP 2811 00 ......... 2
WP 2812 00 ......... 2
WP 2813 00 ......... 0
WP 3010 00 ......... 4
WP 3011 00 ......... 3
WP 3012 00 ......... 3
WP 3013 00 ......... 2
WP 3014 00 ......... 0
WP 3015 00 ......... 2
SWP 3015 01 ......... *
WP 3016 00 ......... *
WP 3017 00 ......... 2
WP 4010 00 ......... 0
WP 4011 00 ......... 4
WP 4012 00 ......... 5
WP 4013 00 ......... 0
WP 4014 00 ......... 4
WP 4015 00 ......... 5
WP 4016 00 ......... 0
WP 4017 00 ......... 0
WP 4020 00 ......... 0
Change 5 B/(C Blank)

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
Table of Contents
WP/SWP Number Title
Level 1 Maintenance
WP 0001 00 Numerical List of Support Equipment, Consumables, and Expendables
WP 1110 00 Axial Inlet Centerbody Assembly Replacement
WP 1111 00 Low Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T2/P2) Sensor
Replacement
WP 1112 00 Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Actuator Replacement
WP 1113 00 Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) System Check
WP 1114 00 Forward Seal Cover Plate Replacement
WP 1210 00 Low Pressure Compressor Speed (XN2) Sensor Replacement
WP 1310 00 High Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T25/P25) Sensor
Replacement
WP 1311 00 Variable Bypass Valve (VBV) Actuator Replacement
WP 1312 00 Variable Bypass Valve (VBV) System Check
WP 1313 00 Bypass Valve, Bellcrank, and Actuating Ring Replacement
WP 1410 00 Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Actuator Components Replacement
WP 1411 00 Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Rigging
WP 1412 00 Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Stages 3 to 5 Bushing Replacement
(High-Boss HPC Stator Case)
WP 1510 00 Fuel System Replacement
WP 1511 00 Dual Fuel System Replacement
WP 1515 00 Ultraviolet Flame Sensor, L28490, Flame Sensor Sight Glass, and Flame
Sensor Bracket Replacement
SWP 1515 01 Ultraviolet Flame Sensor, L44819, Flame Sensor Sight Glass, and Flame
Sensor Bracket Replacement
WP 1516 00 Igniter Plug Replacement
WP 1517 00 High Pressure Compressor Discharge Temperature (T3) Sensor Replacement
WP 1610 00 Compressor Discharge Pressure (CDP) and Stage 8 Bleed Valves
Replacement
WP 1611 00 Acoustic Sensor Replacement
WP 1710 00 Low Pressure Rotor Speed (XNSD) Sensor Replacement
WP 1711 00 Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature (T48) Thermocouple
Replacement/Inspection
WP 1712 00 Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Pressure (P48) Probe Replacement
WP 1713 00 Thrust Balance Valve (TBV) Assembly Replacement
WP 1811 00 Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) and Hydraulic Filter Assembly Replacement
Change 5 i

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP/SWP Number Title
WP 1812 00 Variable Geometry Hydraulic Pump Replacement

WP 1813 00 Lube and Scavenge Pump Replacement
WP 1814 00 Pneumatic Starter Replacement
WP 1815 00 Hydraulic Starter and Distributor Assembly Replacement
WP 1816 00 High Pressure Compressor Speed (XN25) Sensor Replacement
WP 1817 00 Lube Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Replacement
WP 1910 00 Magnetic Chip Detector Replacement
WP 1911 00 Accelerometer Replacement
WP 1913 00 External Piping, Hoses, and Electrical Harness Replacement
SWP 1913 01 Front Frame Module External Tubing, Harnesses, and Clamping
SWP 1913 02 Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and Clamping
SWP 1913 03 Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module External Tubing, Harnesses, and
Clamping
SWP 1913 04 Engine Assembly External Tubing, Harnesses, and Clamping
WP 1915 00 Heat Shields Replacement
Level 2 Maintenance
WP 2110 00 Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Assembly Replacement
WP 2210 00 Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Module Replacement
WP 2211 00 Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Stage 0 Rotor Blades Replacement
WP 2212 00 Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Stages 0-3 Upper and Lower Stator Case
Replacement
WP 2213 00 Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Stages 0-3 Stator Vanes Replacement
WP 2214 00 Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Stages 1-3 Rotor Blades Replacement
WP 2215 00 Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Aft Fan Case Replacement
WP 2216 00 Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Stage 4 Stator Vanes Replacement
WP 2217 00 Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Stage 4 Rotor Blades Replacement
WP 2310 00 Front Frame Air Collector Replacement
WP 2410 00 Core Module Replacement
WP 2411 00 High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Upper and Lower Stator Case Replacement
SWP 2411 01 High Pressure Compressor Upper/Lower Stator Case Opening/Closing
WP 2412 00 High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Stator Vanes Replacement
WP 2413 00 High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Rotor Blades Replacement
WP 2510 00 Combustion Chamber Replacement
WP 2511 00 Stage 1 High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Nozzle Replacement
ii Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP/SWP Number Title
WP 2610 00 High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Module Replacement

WP 2611 00 Stage 2 High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Nozzle (On Engine) Replacement
WP 2612 00 Stage 2 High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Nozzle (Off Engine) Replacement
WP 2613 00 Stage 1 High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Rotor Blades Replacement
WP 2614 00 Stage 2 High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Rotor Blades Replacement
WP 2710 00 Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module Replacement
WP 2711 00 Rear Drive Adapter or Aft Seal Spacer Replacement
WP 2810 00 Radial Drive Shaft Replacement
WP 2811 00 Transfer Gearbox Assembly Replacement
WP 2812 00 Spur Gearshaft Assemblies Replacement
WP 2813 00 Accessory Gearbox Carbon Seals Replacement
Preservation, Handling, Storage, and Balance
WP 3010 00 Gas Turbine in Enclosure Replacement
WP 3011 00 Preservation/Depreservation
WP 3012 00 Gas Turbine Maintenance Dolly Removal and Installation
WP 3013 00 Gas Turbine/Support Pedestal Removal and Installation
WP 3014 00 Gas Turbine in Shipping Container Replacement
WP 3015 00 Gas and Dual Fuel Manifold Support Fixture Replacement
WP 3016 00 Installed Gas Turbine Trim Balance
WP 3017 00 Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module in Shipping Container Replacement
Periodic Inspections/Maintenance
WP 4010 00 Gas Turbine Inlet Inspection
WP 4011 00 External Engine Cleaning
WP 4012 00 Gas Turbine External Inspection (Visual)
WP 4013 00 Gas Turbine Exhaust System Inspection
WP 4014 00 Gas Turbine Water-Wash
WP 4015 00 Borescope Inspection
WP 4016 00 Lube Oil Sampling
WP 4017 00 Lube and Scavenge Pump Chip Detector Inspection
WP 4020 00 Lube and Scavenge Pump Screen Check
WP 4021 00 Variable Geometry Pump/Hydraulic Control Unit Filter Check
WP 4022 00 Pneumatic Starter Servicing
WP 4023 00 Ignition System Functional Check
WP 4024 00 Vibration Monitoring System Functional Check
Change 5 iii

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP/SWP Number Title
WP 4025 00 Overspeed Inspection

WP 4026 00 Overtemperature Inspection
WP 4027 00 Bearing Sump Flow Tests
WP 4028 00 Variable Stator Vane Off-Schedule Inspection
WP 4029 00 Acoustic Signal Conditioner Calibration and Checkout Procedure
WP 4030 00 Individual Fuel Nozzle Flow Test
WP 4031 00 Fuel System Pressure Check
iv Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00
4WP 0001 00
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
NUMERICAL LIST OF SUPPORT EQUIPMENT,
CONSUMABLES, AND EXPENDABLES
(LEVEL 1 AND 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PD GAS TURBINE MODELS
LIST OF EFFECTIVE WP PAGES

Total Number of Pages in this WP is 36
Page Change Page Change Page Change

No. No. No. No. No. No.
1 - 36 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Introduction................................................................................................................................. 2
List of Consumables.................................................................................................................... 23
Mechanic's Hand Tools ............................................................................................................... 2
On-Site Expendables................................................................................................................... 32
Special Tools ............................................................................................................................... 14
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains a numerical list of special support equipment required to maintain
the LM6000 DLE gas turbine models covered in this manual. This work package also contains a
list of recommended mechanic's hand tools, consumables, special tools, and on-site expendables
to support level 1 and 2 maintenance.
2. Mechanic's Hand Tools.
See table 1.
NOTE
The following table represents a breakdown of the recommended

mechanic's hand tools needed to perform routine and corrective on-
site maintenance of the LM6000 DLE gas turbine. The hand tools
listed herein are buyer local purchase.
Table 1. Recommended Mechanic's Hand Tools
Part Vendor
Tool Type Size Qty Number Code
Wrench, Box-12 pt 1/4 × 5/16 2 GXDH810B A
3/8 × 7/16 2 GXDH1214A A
1/2 × 9/16 2 GXDH1618A A
Wrench, Box - 12 pt 7/32 × 1/4 2 66069 A
(thin wall) 5/16 × 3/8 2 66040 A
7/16 × 1/2 2 66042 A
Wrench, Box - 12 pt 7/16 × 1/2 1 CX1416 A
(half - moon)
Wrench, Box - 12 pt 1/4 × 5/16 2 GR810A A
(ratchet) 3/8 × 7/16 2 GR1214A A
1/2 × 9/16 2 GR1618A A
Wrench, Box - Offset 3/16 × 7/32 2 GSX67 A
1/4 × 5/16 2 GXS0810 A
3/8 × 7/16 2 GXS01214 A
1/2 × 9/16 2 GXS01618 A
5/8 × 3/4 2 GXS02024 A
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00
Table 1. Recommended Mechanic's Hand Tools (Continued)
Part Vendor
Wrench, Open-End 5/32 2 DS1010 A
3/16 2 DS1212 A
1/4 × 5/16 1 GV0810 A
5/16 × 3/8 1 GV01012 A
3/8 × 7/16 1 GV01214 A
7/16 × 1/2 1 GV01416 A
1/2 × 9/16 1 GV01618 A
9/16 × 5/8 1 GV01820 A
5/8 × 11/16 1 GV02022 A
5/8 × 3/4 1 GV02024 A
3/4 × 13/16 1 GV02426 A
13/16 × 7/8 1 GV02628 A
7/8 × 15/16 1 GV02830 A
1 × 1-1/16 1 GV03234 A
1-1/16 × 1-1/4 1 GV03440 A
1-1/8 × 1-3/16 1 GV03636 A
Wrench, Flare Nut - 6 pt 3/8 × 7/16 2 RXF1214B A
1/2 × 9/16 2 RXFS1618B A
5/8 × 11/16 2 RXFS2022A A
3/4 × 13/16 2 RXFS246A A
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00
Part Vendor
Wrench, Combination - 1/4 2 G0EX80 A
12 pt 5/16 2 G0EX100 A
11/32 2 G0EX110 A
3/8 4 G0EX120 A
7/16 2 G0EX140 A
1/2 2 G0EX160 A
9/16 2 G0EX180 A
5/8 2 G0EX200 A
11/16 1 G0EX220 A
3/4 2 G0EX240 A
13/16 1 G0EX260 A
7/8 1 G0EX280 A
15/16 1 G0EX300 A
1 1 G0EX320 A
1-1/16 1 G0EX34 A
1-1/8 1 G0EX36 A
1-3/16 1 G0EX38 A
1-1/4 1 G0EX40 A
1-5/16 1 G0EX42 A
1-3/8 1 G0EX44 A
2-1/4 1 N7829B-2 1/4 A
Wrench, Spline 1/4 × 5/16 2 GXDES810A A
3/8 × 7/16 2 GXDES1214 A
1/2 × 9/16 1 GXDES1618 A
9/16 × 5/8 1 GXDES1820A A
13/16 × 15/16 1 GXDES2630 A
Wrench, Adjustable 6″ 1 DA26 A
12″ 1 DA212 A
Socket - Spline 1/4 2 GTES8 A
(1/4 drive) 5/16 2 GTES10 A
5/16 Deep 2 GTEL10 A
5/16 Universal 2 GTESU10 A
Socket, Universal - 12 pt 1/4 2 GTMU81 A
(1/4 drive) 5/16 2 GTMU101 A
3/8 2 GTMU121 A
7/16 2 GTMU141 A
1/2 2 GTMU161 A
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00
Part Vendor
Socket - 12 pt 3/16 2 GTMD6 A
(1/4 drive) 3/16 Deep 2 GSTMD6 A
7/32 2 GTMD7 A
7/32 Deep 2 GSTMD7 A
1/4 2 GTMD8 A
1/4 Deep 2 GSTMD8 A
9/32 2 GTMD9 A
5/16 2 GTMD10 A
11/32 2 GTMD11 A
3/8 2 GTMD12 A
7/16 2 GTMD14 A
1/2 2 GTMD16 A
9/16 2 GTMD18 A
Socket - 12 pt No. 3 Phillips 1 FP32A A
(3/8 drive) 5/16 2 GF101 A
5/16 Deep 2 GSF101 A
3/8 2 GF121 A
3/8 Square Female 2 PP412 A
3/8 Deep 2 GSF121 A
7/16 2 GF141 A
1/2 2 GF161 A
1/2 Deep 2 GSF161 A
9/16 2 GF181 A
5/8 2 GF201 A
5/8 Deep 2 GSF201 A
11/16 2 GF221 A
3/4 1 GF241 A
13/16 1 GF261 A
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00
Part Vendor
Socket - Swivel - 6 pt 3/8 2 IPF12 A
(3/8 drive) 7/16 2 IPF14 A
Socket - Torx (1/4 drive) No. 10 1 GTTX10 A
Socket - Torx (3/8 drive) No. 30 2 GFTX30A A
No. 40 6 TX40 F
Socket, Universal - 12 pt 5/16 2 GFU10A A
(3/8 drive) 3/8 2 GFU12A A
7/16 2 GFU14A A
1/2 2 GFU16A A
9/16 2 GFU18A A
5/8 2 GFU20A A
11/16 2 GFU22A A
3/4 1 GFU24A A
Socket - Spline 3/8 2 GFES120 A
(3/8 drive) 3/8 Deep 2 GFEL120 A
3/8 Universal 2 FESU120 A
7/16 2 GFES140 A
7/16 Deep 2 GFEL140 A
Socket - Spline 9/16 1 GSES181 A
(1/2 drive) 5/8 1 GSES201 A
No. 18 1 SES181 A
No. 20 1 SES201 A
No. 26 1 SES261 E
No. 30 1 SES301 C
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00
Part Vendor
Socket - 12 pt 9/16 1 GSW181 A
(1/2 drive) 5/8 1 GSW201 A
11/16 1 GSW221 A
3/4 1 GSW241 A
13/16 1 GSW261 A
7/8 1 GSW281 A
15/16 1 GSW301 A
1 1 GSW321 A
1-1/16 1 GSW341 A
1-1/8 1 GSW361 A
Socket - 12 pt 1-1/16 1 GLDH342 A
(3/4 drive) 1-1/8 1 GLDH362 A
1-3/16 1 GLDH382 A
1-1/4 1 GLDH402 A
1-7/16 1 GLDH462 A
1-1/2 1 GLDH482 A
1-5/8 1 GLDH522 A
1-3/4 1 GLDH562 A
2 1 LDH642 A
2-1/4 1 GLDH722 A
2-3/8 1 LDH762 A
Socket - 6 pt (1″ drive) 2-5/8 1 L843 A
Crowsfoot - 12 pt 1/4 1 TMRX8 A
(1/4 drive) 5/16 1 TMRX10 A
3/8 1 AN8508-6A A
7/16 1 AN8508-7A A
1/2 1 AN8508-8A A
9/16 1 AN8508-9A A
Crowsfoot - Open-End 3/8 2 GFC012 A
(3/8 drive)
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00
Part Vendor
Crowsfoot - 12 pt 5/8 1 GAN8508-10A A
(3/8 drive) 11/16 1 GAN8508-11A A
3/4 1 GAN8508-12A A
13/16 1 GAN8508-13A A
7/8 1 GAN8508-14A A
15/16 1 GAN8508-15A A
1 1 GAN8508-16A A
1-1/16 1 GAN8508-17A A
Crowsfoot - Flare Nut - 9/16 1 FRH180S A
6 pt (3/8 drive) 5/8 1 FRH200S A
11/16 1 FRH220S A
3/4 1 FRH240S A
13/16 1 FRH260S A
7/8 1 FRH280S A
15/16 1 FRH300S A
1 1 FRH320S A
Crowsfoot - 12 pt 1-1/8 1 GAN8508-18A A
(1/2 drive) 1-3/16 1 GAN8508-19A A
1-1/4 1 GAN8508-20A A
1-5/16 1 GAN8508-21A A
1-3/8 1 GAN8508-22A A
1-7/16 1 GAN8508-23A A
1-1/2 1 GAN8508-24A A
1-9/16 1 GAN8508-25A A
1-5/8 1 GAN8508-26A A
1-11/16 1 GAN8508-27A A
1-3/4 1 GAN8508-28A A
1-13/16 1 GAN8508-29A A
1-7/8 1 GAN8508-30A A
1-15/16 1 GAN8508-31A A
2 1 GAN8508-32A A
2-1/16 1 GAN8508-33A A
2-1/8 1 GAN8508-34A A
2-1/4 1 GAN8508-36A A
2-1/2 1 GAN8508-40A A
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00
Part Vendor
Crowsfoot - Open-End 1-1/16 1 GSC034 A
(1/2 drive) 1-1/4 1 GSC040 A
1-1/2 1 GSC048 A
1-3/4 1 GSC056 A
2 1 GSC064 A
Speed Handle 1/4 Drive 2 GTMS4D A
1/4 Drive 2 GTMS4E A
3/8 Drive 2 GF4LA A
1/2 Drive 1 KB4 A
Ratchet Head 3/4 Drive 1 GL72T A
Ratchet Handle 1/4 Drive 2 GM70T A
1/4 Drive 5″ Long 2 TM75A A
3/8 Drive 2 GFL720A A
3/8 Drive 7″ Long 2 F720B A
1/2 Drive 10″ Long 2 GS710A A
3/4 Drive 20″ Long 1 GL72H A
3/4 Drive 24″ Long 1 GL72TH A
Breaking Bar 1/4 Drive 1 GTM10F A
3/8 Drive 1 GF10M A
1/2 Drive 1 GSN18A A
3/4 Drive 36″ Long 1 L112EL A
Extension (1/4 drive) 2″ 1 GTMX2 A
4″ Wobble 1 GTMXW4 A
6″ 1 GTMX60 A
6″ Wobble 1 GTMXW60 A
10″ 1 GTMX100 A
14″ 1 GTMX140 A
Extension (3/8 drive) 3″ Wobble 1 GFXW3 A
6″ 1 GFX6 A
12″ 1 GFX11A A
Extension (1/2 drive) 5″ 1 GS5 A
10″ 1 GS10 A
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00
Part Vendor
Extension (3/4 drive) 3″ 1 GL32 A
8″ 1 GL62 A
8″ 1 GS62 A
16″ 1 GS122 A
Adapter, Torque 1/4F × 3/8M 1 GTA3 A
3/8F × 1/4M 1 GTM1 A
3/8F × 1/2M 1 GAF2 A
1/2F × 3/8M 1 GAX1 A
1/2F × 3/4M 1 GLA12A A
3/4F × 1/2M 1 GLA62 A
1F × 3/4M 1 GLA124A A
Adapter, Torque - 12 pt 1/4 2 GFRDH081 A
(3/8 drive) (thin wall) 5/16 2 GFRDH101 A
3/8 2 GFRDH121 A
7/16 2 GFRDH141 A
1/2 2 GFRDH161 A
9/16 2 GFRDH181 A
Adapter, Torque - Spline 5/16 2 GFRES10 A
(3/8 drive) 3/8 2 GFRES12 A
7/16 2 GFRES14 A
9/16 2 GFRES16 A
5/8 2 GFRES18 A
Universal Joint 1/4 Drive 1 GTMU8 A
3/8 Drive 1 GFU8A A
1/2 Drive 1 GU8 A
Torque Wrench 1/4 Drive 30-200 lb in 1 AJR117E A
3/8 Drive 150-1000 lb in 1 QJR248E A
1/2 Drive 30-250 lb ft 1 QJR3250A A
3/4 Drive 0-600 lb ft 1 TEC602FUA A
Strap Wrench 1-6″ 1 A91C A
1-3/4 × 29-1/4″ 1 No. 5 D
Allen Wrench Set 3/64 - 3/8 2 AW1013AK A
0.028 - 3/8 2 GAW1015AK A
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00
Part Vendor
Hammer
- Compothene 24 oz 1 BC1A A
- Plastic Tip 16 oz 1 BE116 A
- Soft-Faced 13″ 1 BH232-2 A
- Ball Peen 16 oz 1 BPN16B A
32 oz 1 BPN32A A
Punch
- Nylon 3/4″ dia × 12″ long 1 A
- Bronze 3/4″ dia × 12″ long 1 PPC1002 A
- Pin Set 1/4″ dia 1 PPC108A A
- Pin Set 5/16″ dia 1 PPC110A A
- Starter 1/4″ dia 1 PPC208A A
- Tapered Set 1 PPC905A A
Screwdriver
- Common 4″ × 1/4″ Blade Tip 2 GSSD44 A
6″ 2 SDD6 A
6″ × 5/16″ Blade Tip 2 SDD46 A
8″ 2 SDD8 A
8″ × 3/8″ Blade Tip 2 SDD48 A
- Phillips No. 1 Pocket Size 2 SDDP204 A
6″ 2 SDDP61 A
- Phillips No. 2 6″ 2 SDDP62 A
- Torx Tip No. 30 2 STDTX430 C
- Magnetic Set 1 SSDM40B A
- Miniature Set 1 CM6551 A
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00
Part Vendor
Pliers
- Bent Needle Nose 1″ 1 497ACP B
- Safety-Wire Twister 10 1/2″ 2 GA311C A
- Wire Twister/Cutter 2 PR311 A
- Diagonal Cutting 5-1/16″ 2 86ACP A
2 E710CG A
- Retaining Ring Set 1 PR36 A
- Electrical Connector, PWC50 A
Vinyl/Jaws
- Needle Nose 1 196ACP A
1 95ACP A
- Flat Nose 1 61CP B
- Standard 6″ 1 46C B
- Adjustable Joint 1 91CP A
- Water Pump 12″ 1 HL112P A
- Line Clamp 1 SWE82 A
Crimping Tool, Safety 1 CTK8V32A A
Cable
Test Block, Safety Cable 1 CTK202 A
Tester, Safety Cable 1 MPT-200ASC F
Measuring
- Micrometer, Depth 0-6″ 1 445AZ6RL C
- Micrometer, Outside 0-1″ 1 230RL C
Depth Gage
- Vernier Depth 0-18″ 1 448-18 C
Gage
- Steel Rule 6″ 1 622R A
- Pocket Rule 6″ 1 PMF131 A
- Feeler Gage 26 blade 1 FB335 A
Inspection Mirror 1-1/4″ dia 1 CF143A A
2-1/4″ dia 1 GA295 A
Oval Pocket Mirror 1 CF157A A
Mechanical Fingers 17-3/4″ 1 GA265A A
Magnetic Pickup 17-27″ 1 PT30B A
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00
Part Vendor
Pry Bar 16″ 1 1650 A
Pinch Bar 16″ 1 1658B A
Scriber 1 PTS5 A
Flashlight 2 Cell 1 ECF35 A
Drop Light 2 EC691 A
India Stone - Fine 1 FF156 B
FF214 B
FF24 B
Parallel Bars 6″ 1 - -
12″ 1 - -
Tool Box 33 × 18 × 13 1 KR547B A
Vendor Code: A = Snap-On Tools

B = Utica/Triangle
C = Starrett
D = Ridgid
E = Cole Manufacturing
F = Apex
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00
3. Special Tools.
Refer to table 2.
NOTE
• For GE designed tooling, equivalent tooling may be furnished by

the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM).
• Consult GE for current tool configuration prior to ordering.
Table 2. Special Tools

Work
Part No. Nomenclature Category Package
106C7158P02 Container, Shipping - LPT – 3017 00
– Software Program, Blade Plot – 2413 00
18932 Drive Motor, Pneumatic – 3011 00
1C3569G2 Pressurizer, Hydraulic Unit Recommended 3011 00
1C3569G3 Hydraulic Actuator Unit Recommended 1112 00
1113 00
1311 00
1312 00
1313 00
1410 00
1411 00
2110 00
3011 00
1C5654G03 Jack, Lowering - Engine Components Optional 2310 00
2811 00
1C6119G01 Guide, Expandable Bushing Recommended 2811 00
1C6361G01 Tool Set, Radial Drive Shaft Recommended 2810 00
1C6804G04 Tool Set, Jackscrew Recommended 2511 00
2710 00
1C6812G01 Tool Fixture, Instl/Removal - Access Recommended 2811 00
Gearbox, Horiz
1C6892G01 Pusher, Bolt - Front Frame TGB Recommended 2811 00
Forward, MTG Bracket
1C6986G01 Tool Set, Assy/Disassy - Gearbox Recommended 2812 00
1C8182G01 Fixture Set, Mating Seal Removal Recommended 2813 00
1C8208G01 Spline Adapter, Fuel Pump Drive Pad Optional 3011 00
1C8208G02 Spline Adapter, Manual or Front Drive Optional 3011 00
Pad 4015 00
1C9052G01 Dolly, LPC Rotor and Stator - Vertical Optional 2210 00
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00
Table 2. Special Tools (Continued)

Work
1C9053G01 Fixture, Lift and Turn - LPC Rotor and Recommended 2210 00
Stator
1C9054G02 Fixture, Lift - LPC Rotor and Stator, Recommended 2210 00
Horiz
1C9116G01 Fixture, Lift - LPC Rotor and Stator, Recommended 2210 00
Fwd
1C9150G02 Tool Set, Jackscrew Recommended 1412 00
2210 00
2412 00
2511 00
2710 00
1C9300G01 Fixture, Lift - Air Collector Optional 2310 00
1C9316G02 Adapter, Sleeve - LPT Rotor Shaft Recommended 2710 00
1C9317G01 Adapter, Support/Lift - LPC Recommended 2210 00
1C9327G03 Puller, LPT Module - Mid-Shaft Recommended 2710 00
1C9329G02 Puller Plate, Aft Drive Adapter – 2711 00
1C9336G01 Fixture Assembly, Install/Remove - Aft Recommended 2710 00
Drive Shaft Nut
1C9338G02 Fixture, Forward Restrain - LPT Recommended 2710 00
Rotor/Stator 3017 00
1C9353G02 Tool Set, Rigging, VBV Doors Recommended 1312 00
1313 00
1C9354G03 Dolly Assembly, Gas Turbine Recommended 3014 00
Changeout
1C9358G02 Fixture Assy, Lift - HPT Rotor Recommended 2610 00
Horizontal
1C9359G02 Rigging Set, VIGV Recommended 1113 00
1C9362G02 Adapter, Lift - Combustor, Stage 1 or 2 Recommended 2510 00
HPT Nozzle 2511 00
1C9365G01 Protractor Assy, Electronic, Portable - Alternate 1411 00
VSV
1C9371G02 Ring Assembly, VIGV Case Support Recommended 3012 00
3013 00
1C9372G06/G07 Maintenance Dolly, External Engine Recommended 3012 00
1C9375G01 Adapter Set, Air Collector Support Recommended 3012 00
3013 00
3014 00
1C9376G01 or G02 Jack Assembly, CRF Support Recommended 2411 01
Change 5 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00

Work
1C9377G01 Adapter Set, LPC Support Recommended 3012 00
3013 00
1C9378G03 Adapter Assy, Engine External Maint Recommended 3012 00

Dolly
1C9384G03/G04 Support Pedestals, Storage and Alternate 3013 00
Maintenance
1C9385G02 Fixture, LPC Rotor and Stator Support Recommended 2210 00
1C9390G01 Fixture Assembly, Lift & Turn - VIGV Recommended 2110 00
1C9393G01 Adapter Set, Pressure Test/Rig - VIGV, Recommended 1112 00
VBV, VSV 1113 00
1311 00
1312 00
1313 00
1410 00
1411 00
2110 00
1C9397G01 Holder, Shim - HPT Pressure Tube Recommended 2610 00
Adapter
1C9400G01 Fixture Set, Raise & Hinge - Upper – 2411 01
Compressor Case
1C9403G01 Fixture, Check VSV/VIGV Actuator – 1112 00
1410 00
1C9408G02 Fixture Set, VSV Torque Measuring Recommended 1412 00
2412 00
1C9412P01 Fixture, Retention, HPC Variable Stator – 1412 00
Vane
1C9413G01 Fixture, HPC Dummy Stator Case Optional 2411 00
1C9414G01 Retainer, HPC Bottom Stator Case, Optional 2411 00
6-12 Vanes
1C9417G01 Stand - HPT Rotor Stage 2 Nozzle - – 2610 00
Horiz
1C9419G01 Jack Assembly, CRF Support – 2411 00
1C9422G01 Fixture, Installation/Removal - CRF – 2510 00
Aft Case
1C9423G04 Guide, Installation/Removal - – 2510 00
Combustion Chamber Assembly
1C9427G01 Tool, Remove/Install - Premixer – 1510 00
1511 00
16 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00

Work
1C9428G01 Wrench, VSV Locknut Torque Break – 1412 00
2412 00
1C9429G01 Tool Set, Removal - CRF Aft Case – 2510 00
1C9439G01 Test Stand, Flow - Fuel Nozzle Recommended 4030 00
1C9444G01 Fixture, Clamp - HP Turbine Rotor Recommended 2613 00

Disks 2614 00
1C9447G01 Jack Assembly, Support - Compressor Recommended 2710 00
Rear Frame 3012 00
3013 00
1C9449G01 Adapters, Test Stand - Flow Fuel Nozzle Recommended 4030 00
1C9449G02 Adapters, Test Stand - Flow Fuel Nozzle – 4030 00
1C9450G01 Set, Closure – 4031 00
1C9602G01 Fixture, Lift - LPC Case, Stages 0-3 – 4030 00
1C9609G01 Assembly, Rear Drive Adapter – 2711 00
1C9609P01 Adapter Assembly, Drive - Rear – 2710 00
1C9610G01 Pilot, LP Mid-Shaft - Aft – 2610 00
2710 00
1C9613G01 Strongback, Lift, Turn and Restrain - – 2710 00
LPT Module 3017 00
1C9616G01 Fixture, Seat Check - Coupling Nut, – 2710 00
Shaft, LPT Rotor
1C9617G01 Fixture, Start - LPT Coupling Nut – 2710 00
1C9618G01 Fixture, Install/Remove - Retainer Ring – 2710 00
LPT/Mid-Shaft
1C9619G01 Fixture, Torque - LPT Shaft Coupling – 2710 00
Nut
1C9620G01 Gage Inspection - Fan Shaft to HPT – 2710 00
Stator Case
1C9621G01/G02 Fixture, Support - Dual Fuel Manifold – 1510 00
1511 00
3015 00
1C9622P01 Collar Mid-Shaft, Centering and – 2710 00
Support
Change 5 17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00

Work
1C9625G01 Fixture Assembly, Horizontal Lift – 3010 00
3012 00
3013 00
3014 00
1C9626G01 Torque Adapter, Pressure – 2610 00
Tube/Coupling Nut-HPT Rotor
1C9627G01 Fixture, Adjustable C.G. Horizontal Lift – 2710 00
- Heavy Purpose 3017 00
1C9632G01 Dolly, Storage - LPT Module – 2710 00
3017 00
1C9642G01 Lift and Remove Fixture, Aft Seal – 2711 00
Spacer
1C9643G01 Lift and Remove Fixture, Aft Seal – 2711 00
Spacer
1C9632G01 Dolly, Storage - LPT Module – 2710 00
3017 00
1C9650G01 Puller, High Force - LPT Module Mid Recommended 2710 00
Shaft (Alternate for 1C9327G03)
1C9651G01 Pusher, LPT Shaft Bushing – 2710 00
2C14025P08 Pusher – 2610 00
2C14038G01 Fixture, Lift - High Pressure Turbine Recommended 2613 00
Rotor, Aft
2C14049G01 Truck - HP Turbine Rotor, Horizontal Recommended 2613 00
2C14094G06 Fixture, Seat Check - No. 4B Bearing Recommended 2610 00
and Seal
2C14131G02 Fixture, Seat Check - HPT Rotor Recommended 2610 00
2C14193G03 Stand, Shipping/Storage - HPT Module Optional 2610 00
2612 00
2C14198G02 Removal Tool, HPC Stage 1 Blade Recommended 2413 00
Retainer
2C14199G06 Fixture, Install/Remove - HPT Module Recommended 2610 00
Assembly
2C14290G01 Adapter, Torque – 2511 00
2C14664G01 Wrench Set, No. 5R Bearing Inner Race Recommended 2610 00
Nut
2C14679P01 Sleeve, Retaining - No. 4B Bearing Recommended 2610 00
Stack-Up
2C14684G02 Removal Tool, Vane Spring Retainers 2412 00
18 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00

Work
2C14688G05 Puller, Races and Seals - HPT Rotor Recommended 2610 00
Stage 1
2C14693G01 Guide Clamps Recommended 2710 00
2C14695G01 Fixture, Lift - Stage 1 HPT Nozzle Recommended 2511 00
Assembly
2C14699G02 Fixture, Lift - Compressor Stator Case, – 2411 00
Upper
2C14703G01 Adapter, Lift - Stage 2 HPT Nozzle Recommended 2611 00
2612 00
2C14754G01 Fixturing Clamps – 1913 03
2C14764G05 Drive Motor, Electric (115 VAC 50/60 Optional 3011 00
and 400 Hz, 28 VDC) 4015 00
2C14764G06 Drive Motor, Electric (220 VAC 50 Hz Optional 3011 00
and 28 VDC) 4015 00
2C14779G02 Tool Set, Alignment - Compressor Optional 2411 00
Horizontal Flange 2411 01
2C14784G01 Fixture, Remove - HPT Rotor Aft Outer Optional 2610 00
Air Seal
2C14785G01 Fixture, Pull - HPT Rotor Aft Air Seals Recommended 2610 00
2C14796G01 Gage, Length - Blade HP Turbine Rotor, – 2613 00
Stage 1 and 2 2614 00
2C6018G01 Tool Set, Holding VSV Recommended 2412 00
2C6019G03 Driver Set, Compressor Stator Vane Optional 2412 00
2C6171G02 Holder Set, VSV Optional 2412 00
2C6259G05 Fixture, Holding - Variable Stator Arms, Optional 2411 00
Stages 3-6 2411 01
2C6348P02 Guide Pin - Fan Rotor Installation Recommended 2210 00
2C6388G06 Borescope Set Recommended 4015 00
2C6486G02 Tester, Lube Jet Flow – 4027 00
2C6599G01 Prebend Tool, HPC Stage 1 Blade Recommended 2413 00
Retainer
2C6600G03 Seating Tool, HPC Stage 1 Blade Recommended 2413 00
Retainer
2C6613G01 Gage, Immersion Depth - Igniter Plug Recommended 1516 00
2C6647G01 Wrench, VSV Spacer Spanner – 1412 00
2C6925G02 Gage Set, VSV Clevis Recommended 1411 00
2C6948P06 Flex Borescope Guide Tube Recommended 4015 00
2C6962G05 Gage, Sight - VSV Actuation Arms – 4028 00
Change 5 19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00

Work
2C6966G07 Gage, Sight - VSV Actuation Arms – 4028 00
2C6967G06 Stop Install Tool, HPC Stage 2 Blade Recommended 2413 00
Retainer
2C6968G02 Stop Removal Tool, HPC Stage 2 Blade Recommended 2413 00
Retainer
2C8016G02 Gage, Sight - VSV Stage 5 Actuation – 4028 00
Arms
856A1321 Fiberscope – 4015 00
9470M55G01 Program, Balance - Blade Replacement – 2211 00
2214 00
2217 00
2413 00
2613 00
2614 00
AN919-10 Reducer – 3011 00
AN919-6 Reducer – 3011 00
AN960C516 Washer, Flat – 2613 00
Local Mfg. Bushing Rework Tool – 2412 00
Local Mfg. Depth Gage – 2412 00
Local Mfg. Drilling Jig – 2412 00
Local Mfg. Fixture, Holding – 2413 00
Local Mfg. Handle, Stator Vane Tang Extension – 1412 00
Local Purchase 7/32 inch Diameter Drill (case rework) – 2412 00
Local Purchase HSS 0.250-28 UNJF-3B Tap Set – 2412 00
(Taper, Plug and Bottoming Taps)
Local Purchase 7 mm or 9/32 inch Diameter Drill – 2412 00
(bushing rework)
Local Purchase 8492A102 Drill Guide (Ref. McMaster) – 2412 00
Local Purchase 8492A176 Drill Guide (Ref. McMaster) – 2412 00
Local Purchase Adjustable Drill Stop (7/32 Inch – 2412 00
Diameter)
Local Purchase 3374A21 Transfer Punch (Ref. – 2412 00
McMaster)
Local Purchase Bottle Jack – 1313 00
2310 00
Local Purchase Detector, Gas - Hand-Held – 4031 00
Local Purchase Driver, No. 10 Torq-Set Recommended 1110 00
Local Purchase Dynamometer, 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) – 2710 00
Capacity
20 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00

Work
Local Purchase Heat Gun – 1711 00
2510 00
2511 00
Local Purchase Lifteye (0.500-13UNC-2B Thread) – 2710 00
Local Purchase Load Cell, 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) – 2710 00
Capacity (Alternate to Dynamometer)
Local Purchase Lubricating Stand – 3011 00
Local Purchase Megohmmeter – 4024 00
Local Purchase Pliers, Soft Jaw – 1412 00
Local Purchase Pliers, Teflon-Jawed – 1111 00
1112 00
1310 00
1311 00
1510 00
1511 00
1517 00
1610 00
1710 00
1713 00
1811 00
1813 00
1814 00
1816 00
1817 00
1910 00
1911 00
1913 01
1913 02
2110 00
2212 00
Local Purchase Pull Scale, Calibrated 0-50 lb – 1412 00
2412 00
Local Purchase Rivet Squeezer – 2511 00
Local Purchase Slave Nuts (Qty 12, 0.375-24 thread) – 2511 00
Locally Fabricated Guide Pins (Qty 3, 0.190-32 by 1.0 inch – 2813 00
bolt with head removed)
MS51525B6-8S Reducer – 3011 00
MS51525B8-10S Reducer – 3011 00
MS51525B8-12S Reducer – 3011 00
MS51525B8S Union – 3011 00
Change 5 21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00

Work
MS51532B10S Cap – 3011 00
MS51532B6S Cap – 3011 00
MSE-28 Wrench Recommended 2413 00
MSE-53 Sling, Lift – 1313 00
2612 00
3012 00
3013 00
MSE-64 Back-Lighted Conformation Tool – 4015 00
P802 (ENERPAC) Pump, Hand Recommended 2710 00
Sweeney Model 8100 Torque Multiplier Recommended 2610 00
2710 00
TSU 109 Generator Recommended 4029 00
22 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00
4. List of Consumables.
Refer to table 3 for a list of consumables recommended to support on–site level 1 and 2 correc-
tive maintenance tasks. For consumable materials required to support an individual maintenance
task, refer to the specific work package covering that task.
Table 3. Consumable Materials

GEK 9250
Reference Work
Nomenclature Specification Manufacturer Number Package
Adhesive Scotch Grip 77 3M Company C02-027 2611 00
2612 00
2613 00
2614 00
Anti-Seize Compound Milk-of-Magnesia Local Purchase C02-061 1412 00
(Unflavored) 2412 00
4015 00
ARDROX 6322 N/A Local Purchase N/A 4011 00
4014 00
B&B 3100 N/A B&B Tritech Inc. C04-140 4011 00
P.O. Box 660-776 4014 00
Miami, FL 33266-0776
USA
Barrier Paper (Kraft) Grade A, Type II, Ludlow Corp. C10-009 3011 00
Class II Packaging Div.
111 Mosher St.
Holyoke, MA 01040
USA
Corrosion Preventive Oil MIL-L-6085 Local Purchase C02-050 4021 00
Desiccant MIL-D-3464 Local Purchase C10-001 3014 00
3017 00
3017 02
Desiccant MIL-P-116 Local Purchase C10-001 3011 00
Dry Cleaning Solvent Fed Spec P-D-680, Local Purchase C04-002 4017 00
Type II 4021 00
Dry Film Lubricant GE Spec A50TF192, Sandstrom Products Co. C02-004 2710 00
CL-B 224 Main St.
Port Byron, IL 61275
USA
Dry Ice Fed Spec BB-C-104 Local Purchase N/A 2611 00
2612 00
2613 00
2614 00
European Loctile 275 MIL-S-46163A, 1313 00
Type I, Grade A
Change 5 23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00
Table 3. Consumable Materials (Continued)

GEK 9250
Reference Work
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735 Local Puchase C04-035 1410 00
1412 00
1711 00
1712 00
1816 00
2213 00
2216 00
2411 00
2411 01
2412 00
2413 00
2610 00
2710 00
2711 00
4011 00
4014 00
4020 00
Loctite 271 MIL-S-46163A, 1313 00
Type I, Grade A
24 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00

GEK 9250
Reference Work
Lubricating Oil MIL-PRF-23699F Local Purchase C02-023 1112 00
(C/I) 1311 00
1312 00
1410 00
1510 00
1511 00
1811 00
1813 00
1814 00
1815 00
1817 00
1910 00
1913 01
1913 04
2110 00
2210 00
2511 00
2710 00
2711 00
2810 00
2812 00
2813 00
3011 00
4017 00
4020 00
4022 00
4030 00
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-7808 Local Purchase – 1510 00
Change 5 25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00

GEK 9250
Reference Work
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C. Sanford Corp. C05-003 1110 00
(Black or Blue) 2740 Washinton Blvd. 1313 00
Bellwood, IL 60104 1410 00
USA 1411 00
1412 00
1510 00
1511 00
1915 00
2110 00
2210 00
2211 00
2212 00
2214 00
2217 00
2310 00
2411 00
2411 01
2412 00
2413 00
2510 00
2511 00
2610 00
2611 00
2612 00
2613 00
2614 00
2710 00
2711 00
2812 00
3010 00
Molybdenum Disulfide MIL-L-25681 Royal Lubricant Co., Inc C02-020 1210 00
Lubricant P.O. Box 298 1311 00
Royco 81MS East Hanover, NJ 07936 1312 00
USA 1313 00
1913 01
2210 00
2211 00
2214 00
2217 00
2310 00
2413 00
26 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00

GEK 9250
Reference Work
Molybdenum Disulfide A50TF79CL-A Royal Lubricant Co., Inc N/A 2811 00
Lubricant P.O. Box 298
East Hanover, NJ 07936
USA
Monopropylene Glycol AMS 1424 Local Purchase N/A 4011 00
4014 00
Penetrating Oil GE Spec Radiator Specialty Co. C02-026 1913 03
A50TF54, CL-A P.O. Box 34689 2214 00
1900 Wilkerson Blvd. 2217 00
Charlotte, NC 28234 2413 00
USA 2510 00
2610 00
2612 00
2613 00
2614 00
2710 00
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236 Local Purchase C02-008 1111 00
1310 00
1710 00
1812 00
2210 00
2413 00
2511 00
2610 00
2812 00
2813 00
RMC Turbine/Engine Cleaner N/A Local Purchase C04-140 4011 00
(Rivenaes) 4014 00
Rochem FYREWASH N/A Local Purchase N/A 4011 00
4014 00
Rust Preventative Concentrate GE Spec D50TF6 or Bray Oil Company C02-051 3011 00
Brayco 599 Div. of Burmah Castrol
16715 Von Karmen Ave.
Suite 230
Irvine, CA 92714
USA
Change 5 27

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00

GEK 9250
Reference Work
Safety Cable 736L680G01 Bergen Cable – 1111 00
Technologies, Inc. 1112 00
Gregg St. 1310 00
P.O. Box 1300 1311 00
Lodi, NJ 07644 1313 00
USA 1410 00
Daniels Mfg. Corp. 1411 00
526 Thorpe Road 1412 00
Orlando, FL 32824 1510 00
USA 1511 00
1515 00
1516 00
1517 00
1611 00
1710 00
1712 00
1816 00
1910 00
1913 01
1913 02
1913 03
1913 04
1915 00
2310 00
2411 00
2411 01
2412 00
2510 00
2610 00
2710 00
2711 00
2810 00
2812 00
3010 00
3011 00
3015 00
4015 00
4020 00
4021 00
4023 00
28 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00

GEK 9250
Reference Work
Safety Wire (0.020 in.) R297P02 Adams Industries C10-071 1412 00
Box 291 1510 00
Windsor Locks, CT 06096 1511 00
USA 1913 01
1913 02
1915 00
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 Adams Industries C10-071 1111 00
Box 291 1112 00
Windsor Locks, CT 06096 1310 00
USA 1311 00
1313 00
1410 00
1411 00
1515 00
1516 00
1517 00
1611 00
1710 00
1712 00
1816 00
1910 00
1911 00
1913 01
1913 02
1913 03
1913 04
2310 00
2411 00
2411 01
2412 00
2510 00
2610 00
2710 00
2711 00
2810 00
2812 00
3010 00
3011 00
4015 00
4020 00
4021 00
4023 00
Change 5 29

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00

GEK 9250
Reference Work
Sharpening Stone Fed Spec Local Purchase N/A 2211 00
SS-S-736C 2214 00
2412 00
Silicone Rubber Adhesive GE Spec A15F6B6 GE Company Silicone C01-007 1410 00
(RTV 106) Products Division 1816 00
260 Hudson River Rd. 2213 00
Waterford, NY 12188 2216 00
USA 2412 00
Dow Corning Corp 2413 00
P.O. Box 994 4012 00
Midland, MI 48686-0994
USA
Silicone Tape MIL-I-46852 Local Purchase C10-125 1511 00
1913 01
1913 02
1913 03
1913 04
Soap Solution N/A Local Purchase – 1112 00
1311 00
1410 00
2110 00
Solid Film Lubricant GE Spec A50TF147, – – 2710 00
CL-A
Spray Lubricant GE Spec A50TF192, Sandstorm Products Co. C02-004 1313 00
CL-B 224 Main St.
Port Byron, IL 61275
USA
Tape N/A Local Purchase N/A 1510 00
2413 00
2611 00
Tapping Fluid N/A Trim Tap NC (Masters N/A 2412 00
Chemical Co.)
30 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00

GEK 9250
Reference Work
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201 Acheson Colloids Co. C02-058 1112 00
6315 Warren-Sharon Rd. 1113 00
P.O. Box 120 1114 00
Brookfield, OH 44403 1410 00
USA 1510 00
1511 00
1516 00
1611 00
1711 00
1713 00
1913 02
1913 04
1915 00
2110 00
2210 00
2211 00
2212 00
2215 00
2511 00
2610 00
2611 00
2612 00
2613 00
2614 00
2711 00
4015 00
Thread Lubricant GP460 Acheson Colloids Co. C02-058 1410 00
6315 Warren-Sharon Rd. 1411 00
P.O. Box 120 1412 00
Brookfield, OH 44403 1913 03
USA 2411 00
2411 01
2412 00
2413 00
2510 00
2710 00
2711 00
4031 00
Thread Lubricant MIL-T-5544 Local Purchase C02-001 1915 00
Zinc Chromate Primer Fed Spec Local Purchase C03-001 1913 01
TT-P-1757 2212 00
2213 00
2215 00
2711 00
Change 5 31

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00
5. On-Site Expendables.
See table 4.
NOTE
Due to the variety of gaskets, packings, seals, etc., used during instal-
lation of external tubing, expendable materials are not listed. Refer to
the individual maintenance task (Reference SWP 1913 01,
SWP 1913 02, SWP 1913 03, and SWP 1913 04.) and Illustrated
Parts Breakdown GEK 105062 for required parts.
Table 4. On-Site Expendables

Qty Per Work
Part No.* Nomenclature Engine Recommended Qty Package
0946 Seal, Ring 2 – 1610 00
1375M50P03 Seal, O-ring (A/O seal) 1 – 2511 00
1375M50P04 Seal, O-ring (5R housing) 1 – 2511 00
1474M25P01 Seal Plug (Stage 5) 45 – 2413 00
1538M42P01 Gasket 1 – 1712 00
1538M42P02 Gasket 1 (ALT) – 1712 00
1754M91P01 Ring, Piston 6 – 2511 00
1754M91P02 Ring, Piston 6 (ALT) – 2511 00
2873-400 E-Seal 2 – 1713 00
2873-600 Seal, Ring 2 – 1610 00
4058T39P04 Seal Ring, Metal 6 – 1511 00
9009M32P01 Keywasher 9 – 2813 00
9011M60P01 Gasket, Seal - Fuel Filter 1 – 1811 00
9013M28P01 Gasket, Seal 1 (ALT) – 1813 00
9013M28P02 Gasket, Seal 1 – 1813 00
9013M29P01 Gasket, Seal 1 (ALT) – 1813 00
9013M29P02 Gasket, Seal 1 – 1813 00
9013M30P02 Gasket, Seal 1 – 1813 00
9107M23P01 Gasket 2 – 1814 00
1815 00
9107M55P01 Shim, Laminated AR – 1210 00
9186M93G04 Screw, Machine 132 – 2511 00
9219M19P05 Shim 1 – 2610 00
9232M78P03 Nut, Plain Round 54 – 2511 00
32 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00
Table 4. On-Site Expendables (Continued)

Qty Per Work
9232M90P17 Nut Assembly, Self-locking 6 – 2511 00
(nozzle support)
9232M90P18 Nut Assembly, Self-locking 6 – 2511 00
(mini nozzle)
9234M17P05 Bolt, Slab-Head 54 – 2511 00
9283M41P04 Nut, Self-locking 24 – 2610 00
9365M41P117 Packing, Preformed 7 – 1112 00
1311 00
2110 00
1311 00
2110 00
9379M93P01 Gasket 1 – 1711 00
9382M94P02 Spring Retainer, Stages 6 and 8 127 – 2412 00
9382M95P05 Spring Retainer, Stages 9, 10, 12, 300 – 2412 00
and 13
9608M12P04 Gasket, Round 2 – 1813 00
2813 00
9693M18P06 Ring, Piston 6 (ALT) – 2511 00
AC-B244F-2440 Element, Filter 1 – 4021 00
AN123631 Rivet, Solid 18 – 2511 00
J1128P24 Seal Ring, Metal 2 – 1713 00
J1215P17 Gasket, Seal Flange 11 – 1510 00
1511 00
J219P02 Gasket, Seal 1 – 1813 00
J219P03 Gasket, Seal 4 – 1311 00
1312 00
1313 00
1811 00
J219P04 Gasket, Seal 7 – 1311 00
1312 00
1313 00
1811 00
1812 00
1813 00
1816 00
Change 5 33

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00

Qty Per Work
J219P05 Gasket, Seal ALT – 1510 00
1511 00
1812 00
1813 00
J219P05A Gasket, Seal 2 – 3011 00
J219P07 Gasket, Seal 2 – 1812 00
J221P010 Packing, Preformed (lube nozzle) 1 – 2511 00
J221P014 Packing, Preformed 1 – 3011 00
24 – 1511 00
4015 00
1815 00
1310 00
1311 00
1813 00
1814 00
1815 00
4020 00
3011 00
4022 00
1814 00
3011 00
1813 00
J626P04 Nut (After Shaft Cover) 7 – 2710 00
34 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 0001 00

Qty Per Work
J626P09 Nut (Rear Drive Adapter Cover) 28 – 2710 00
J646P61B Bolt (5R A/O seal) 6 – 2511 00
J979P06 Nut (mini nozzle support) 54 – 2511 00
L22281P02 Gasket 1 – 1814 00
L28004P01 Gasket, Seal 1 – 1811 00
L28004P03 Gasket, Seal 1 (ALT) – 1811 00
L42602P01 Seal, Manifold Valve 11 – 1510 00
1511 00
L42602P02 Seal, Manifold Valve ALT – 1510 00
1511 00
L42604P01 Seal, Case Hose 30 – 1510 00
1511 00
4031 00
L42604P02 Seal, Case Hose ALT – 1510 00
1511 00
4031 00
L43073P01 Gasket 2 – 1515 00
L45017G05 Nut, Adapter 1 – 2710 00
L45045P01 Bolt (Rear Drive Adapter Cover) 28 – 2710 00
L45066P01 Ring, Shaft 1 – 2710 00
L47372P01 Packing, Preformed 58 – 2412 00
(Stage 5 Hi-Boss Case)
L47372P02 Packing, Preformed 96 – 2412 00
(Stages 3 and 4 Hi-Boss Case)
L47494P01 Seal, Plug, Fuel Manifold 30 – 1510 00
L47618P01 Seal, Fuel Nozzle 30 – 1510 00
1511 00
L47804P01 Nut, Coupling 1 – 2710 00
L47805P01 Ring, Retainer 1 – 2710 00
L47865P03 Spacer, Ring (Shim) 1 – 2710 00
Change 5 35

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 0001 00

Qty Per Work
L52068P01 Seal Ring, Metal, C 60 – 1511 00
L54659P01 Gasket 5 – 1510 00
1511 00
M83248/1-009 Packing, Preformed AR – 4017 00
M83248/1-243 Packing, Preformed 1 – 4021 00
4020 00
MS9202-042 Gasket 1 – 1517 00
NAS1593-121 Packing, Preformed 1 – 4020 00
Packager-Supplied Gasket 3 – 1813 00
TBD Gasket TBD – 1510 00
TBD Gasket TBD – 1510 00
TBD Seal Ring, Metal TBD – 1611 00
* Latest active part number shown. Check interchangeability issues in Illustrated Parts Break-
down for alternate parts that may be applicable to specific engine configurations.
36 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1110 00
0WP 1110 00
WORK PACKAGE
AXIAL INLET CENTERBODY ASSEMBLY
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)


1-4 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Axial Inlet Centerbody Assembly Installation............................................................................ 3

Axial Inlet Centerbody Assembly Removal ............................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1110 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the axial inlet centerbody
assembly. (Reference kit, P/N 682L204.)
2. Reference Material.
None required.
3. Support Equipment.
Nomenclature Part No.

Driver, No. 10 Torq-Set Local Purchase
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105059
WP 1110 00
6. Axial Inlet Centerbody Assembly Removal.
See figure 1.
NOTE
Forward and aft centerbody are matched parts and are kept together
as an assembly.
A. Using marking pen, matchmark aft centerbody to forward centerbody.
B. Using No. 10 Torq-Set driver, remove 13 screws that secure forward centerbody (detail A).
Remove forward centerbody.
C. Remove 46 nuts, 92 washers, and 46 bolts that secure aft centerbody to inlet frame or variable
inlet guide vane (VIGV) forward inner casing (detail B). Remove aft centerbody.
1
7. Axial Inlet Centerbody Assembly Installation.
See figure 1.
NOTE
Forward and aft centerbody are matched parts and are kept together
as an assembly.
A. Using 46 bolts, 92 washers, and 46 nuts (detail B) install aft centerbody onto inlet frame or
VIGV forward inner casing. Boltheads face forward. Position one washer under bolthead,
and one washer under nut. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
B. Align matchmarks and install forward centerbody onto aft centerbody. Secure with 13 screws
(detail A). Using No. 10 Torq-Set driver, tighten screws to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of
torque.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1110 00
Figure 1. Axial Inlet Centerbody Assembly
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1111 00
0WP 1111 00
WORK PACKAGE
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR INLET
TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE (T2/P2) SENSOR
REPLACEMENT


1-5 ...... 0
6 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Low Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T2/P2) Sensor Installation .................. 3

Low Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T2/P2) Sensor Removal...................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1111 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the low pressure compressor
inlet temperature/pressure (T2/P2) sensor.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105062

Pliers, Teflon - Jawed Local Purchase
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Reference GEK 105062, Illustrated Parts Breakdown (IPB).
Nomenclature Part No. Qty

Packing, Preformed J221P903 1
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1111 00
6. Low Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T2/P2) Sensor Removal.
See figure 1.
A. If installed, disconnected pressure sensing tube from T2/P2 sensor pressure port per pack-
ager's manual.
NOTE
If same T2/P2 sensor will be reinstalled, proceed to step C.
B. Remove plug or fitting from T2/P2 sensor pressure port. Discard preformed
packing.
1
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or disconnecting

electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock, burns, and death.
CAUTION
Ensure location of electrical connector is noted to aid at installation.
Failure to comply may cause unreliable engine operation.
C. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from T2/P2 sensor integral lead.
D. Remove jamnut that secures T2/P2 sensor integral lead to electrical interface panel.
E. Remove integral lead from spring clips.
F. Remove bolts that secure T2/P2 sensor to variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) assembly case.
Remove T2/P2 sensor.
7. Low Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T2/P2) Sensor Installation.
See figure 1.
A. Install T2/P2 sensor onto VIGV assembly case. Using two bolts, secure T2/P2 sensor onto
VIGV assembly case. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
B. Using jamnut, secure T2/P2 sensor integral lead to electrical interface panel. Tighten jamnut
to 25-35 lb in. (2.9-3.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire jamnut.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1111 00
Figure 1. Low Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T2/P2) Sensor
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1111 00
C. Connect electrical connector to T2/P2 sensor integral lead as follows:
WARNING

(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while wiggling
backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using Teflon-
jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no movement with
respect to mating connector.
NOTE
It may be necessary to loosen lead clamps that restrict mating.
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead clamps that
restrict mating.
D. Install integral lead into spring clips.
NOTE
If plug or fitting is already installed, proceed to step G.
E. Lubricate preformed packing, P/N J221P903, with petrolatum, and install onto plug or fitting.
F. Install plug or fitting into T2/P2 sensor pressure port. Tighten plug or fitting to 90-100 lb in.
(10.2-11.3 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire plug.
G. If present, connect pressure sensing tube to fitting in T2/P2 sensor pressure port per pack-
ager's manual.
5/(6 Blank)
6 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1112 00
0WP 1112 00
WORK PACKAGE
VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE (VIGV) ACTUATOR
REPLACEMENT


1 - 10 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Installation ......................................................................... 7

Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Length Preset Adjustment Using Check Fixture, 1C9403 6
Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Removal ............................................................................. 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1112 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the variable inlet guide vane
(VIGV) actuators.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105061
Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) System Check WP 1113 00

Hydraulic Actuator Unit 1C3569G3
Adapter Set, Pressure Test/Rig - VIGV, 1C9393G01
VBV, VSV
Fixture, Check VSV/VIGV Actuator 1C9403G01
Pliers, Teflon-Jawed Local Purchase
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Soap Solution Local Purchase
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201

Packing, Preformed 9365M41P117 2
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1112 00
6. Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Removal.
WARNING

CAUTION

A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from VIGV actuator.
NOTE
Ensure that lube oil supply is shut off before disconnecting tubing.
B. Disconnect tubing as follows (figure 1):
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respira-
tory tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(1) Position a waste fluid container beneath VIGV actuator. Disconnect drain line from drain
adapter.
(2) Disconnect drain adapter from VIGV actuator. Slide drain adapter away from VIGV
actuator port to expose coupling nut.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when loosening coupling nut.
Failure to comply may result in part damage.
(3) Disconnect coupling nut from VIGV actuator fitting.
(4) Remove and discard preformed packing from drain adapter.

1
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1112 00
Figure 1. Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Tubing
CAUTION
Do not change adjustment of actuator rod end. Any movement or

adjustment requires that paragraph 7. of this work package be per-
formed and VIGV actuation system rigging be checked per WP 1113
00.
C. If actuator-to-ring bracket must be removed, reference WP 1113 00. Remove actuator-to-ring

brackets.
D. Remove nut, bolt, and bushings that secure VIGV actuator rod end (figure 2).
E. Remove nut and bolt that secure VIGV actuator to bearing block. Remove VIGV actuator.
F. Remove fittings from VIGV actuator. Remove and discard preformed packings.
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1112 00
2
Figure 2. Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Actuator
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1112 00
7. Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Length Preset Adjustment Using Check Fixture,
1C9403.
WARNING
Serious injury can occur when applying hydraulic pressure. Eye

protection is required. Relieve pressure before disconnecting lines
and fittings.
CAUTION
• Maintain 250.0 psi (1,724 kPa) on actuator, at the fully extended

position, when adjusting rod end, or preset adjustment will be
incorrect.
• Use hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569G3, with engines that use

lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699. Do not intermix lubricating oils,
MIL-L-7808 and MIL-L-23699, or damage will occur.
NOTE
This procedure is to be performed before installing a new actuator or

in the event actuator rod-end adjustment is disturbed during
removal/installation.
A. Connect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, to actuator. Supply 250.0 psi (1,724 kPa) to extend
actuator to fully extended position. Maintain pressure throughout adjustment procedure.
B. Loosen jamnut that secures actuator rod end.
C. Adjust rod end so that actuator slides freely onto fixture, 1C9403. See figure 3.
D. Tighten jamnut to secure rod end. Safety-wire jamnut.
E. Release pressure and remove hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569.
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1112 00
Figure 3. Actuator Length Preset Using Check Fixture, 1C9403
8. Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Installation.
WARNING
NOTE
If installing a new actuator, or in the event actuator rod-end adjust-

ment is disturbed during removal/installation, perform paragraph 7.
of this work package.
A. Lubricate preformed packings, P/N J221P904 and P/N 9365M41P122 (figure 1), with lubri-
cating oil and install into groove of fitting.
B. Install fitting into VIGV actuator. Tighten fitting to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1112 00
C. Apply thread lubricant to threads of bearing actuator block bolt and secure VIGV actuator
onto actuator bearing block with nut and bolt. See figure 2, view B. Bolthead faces aft.
Tighten nut to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
D. Install actuator-to-ring brackets per WP 1113 00.
E. Apply thread lubricant to threads of VIGV actuator rod-end bolt, detail A. Using bolt
(bolthead outboard) and nut, secure actuator-to-ring brackets onto VIGV actuator rod end.
WARNING

F. Lubricate preformed packing, P/N 9365M41P117 (figure 1), with lubricating oil and install
into drain adapter.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
G. Connect tubing coupling nut onto VIGV actuator fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
H. Leak-check head- and rod-end fittings as follows:
CAUTION
Use hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569G3, with engines that use

lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699. Do not intermix lubricating oil,
(1) Install reducers from pressure test adapter set, 1C9393, onto hydraulic actuator unit,
1C3569. Tighten reducers to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Position waste fluid container under hydraulic control unit (HCU).
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1112 00
WARNING

CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when loosening or tightening

coupling nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
(3) Disconnect head tube from HCU. Install head tube on -4 to -10 reducer. Tighten coupling
nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
(4) Disconnect rod tube from HCU. Install rod tube on -4 to -8 reducer. Tighten coupling nut
to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
and fittings.
(5) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) to head tube and hold for a minimum of 2 minutes.
Check head tube/actuator connection for leakage.
(6) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) to rod tube and hold for a minimum of 2 minutes.
Check rod tube/actuator connection for leakage.
(7) If required, check VIGV actuation system per WP 1113 00.
(8) Disconnect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569. Remove reducers.
(9) Connect head tube onto HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of
torque.
(10) Connect rod tube onto HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of
torque.
I. Slide drain adapter over coupling nut and connect onto VIGV actuator port. Hand-tighten
drain adapter.
J. Leak-check drain adapters as follows:
(1) Connect source of clean, dry, regulated shop air or nitrogen onto drain line fitting on
drain adapter.
9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1112 00
WARNING
• Serious injury can occur when applying pneumatic pressure.

Eye protection is required. Relieve pressure before disconnect-
ing lines and fittings.
• Nitrogen, BB-N-411, can displace oxygen in enclosed areas.

Use in a well-ventilated area.
(2) Apply 50-55 psi (345-379 kPa) to drain adapter. Shut off pressure and monitor. Pressure
shall not drop off more than 10 psi (69 kPa) in 2 minutes.
(3) If pressure drop limit is exceeded, use soap solution to detect leak. Repair, as required,
and repeat leak check.
(4) Disconnect test equipment from drain adapter.
(5) Connect drain line to drain adapter. Tighten coupling nut to 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
K. Connect electrical connector to VIGV actuator as follows:
WARNING

back shell assembly.
NOTE
restrict mating.
10
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1113 00
0WP 1113 00
WORK PACKAGE
VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE (VIGV) SYSTEM CHECK


1-9 ...... 0
10 Blank . . . . . . 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Variable Inlet Guide Vane System Check ................................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1113 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for checking the variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) sys-
tem. Before performing this work package, ensure the following conditions exist:
• VIGV flaps are installed.
• Lever arms are installed in actuating rings.
• VIGV actuating ring is installed.
• VIGV actuators are installed and connected.
None required.

Rigging Set, VIGV 1C9359G02
VBV, VSV
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1113 00
6. Variable Inlet Guide Vane System Check.
CAUTION
Use hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569G3, with engines that use

A. Connect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, as follows (figures 1 and 2):
(1) Install reducers from adapter set, 1C9393, onto hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569
(figure 1). Tighten to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Position waste fluid container under hydraulic control unit (HCU) (figure 2).
1
Figure 1. Hydraulic Actuator Unit, 1C3569

2
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1113 00
Figure 2. HCU Tube Locations
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1113 00
WARNING

CAUTION

(3) Disconnect head tube from HCU. Install head tube onto -4 to -10 reducer. Tighten cou-
pling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
(4) Disconnect rod tube from HCU. Install rod tube onto -4 to -8 reducer. Tighten coupling
B. Check VIGV system as follows:
WARNING
• When actuating VIGV system, keep hands clear of moving

parts, or serious injury may result.
• Serious injury can occur when applying hydraulic

pressure. Eye protection is required. Relieve pressure
before disconnecting lines and fittings.
(1) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VIGV system to full
open and full closed positions several times. System shall operate smoothly throughout
entire range of travel in both directions.
(2) Check all fittings for leaks through VIGV system to full travel. Correct, as required.
NOTE
VIGV position indication is read at indicator on control panel. Control

panel shall be powered up to read VIGV position indication.
(3) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VIGV system to full
open position. VIGV position indicator shall read 100 ± 1 percent (full open).
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1113 00
CAUTION
VIGV actuating ring mount bolts are anodized. Do not disturb

mount bolts, or coating damage may occur.
(4) Insert actuator locating pin, 1C9359P03, through rig fixture -10 degree hole. Actuator
locating pin, P03, shall slide freely. See figure 3. If difficulty is encountered, loosen both
actuator-to-ring brackets at actuator rod ends as follows:
(a) Release hydraulic pressure from system.
(b) Loosen nuts that secure both VIGV actuator rod ends to actuation-to-ring brackets.
See figure 4.
(c) Insert pin so that actuator locating pin, figure 3, slides freely into rig fixture -10
degree hole.
4
3
(5) Release hydraulic pressure from system.
(6) Remove bolts and nuts that secure actuator rod ends to actuator-to-ring brackets. See
figure 4, detail A.
(7) Apply hydraulic pressure so both actuator rod ends are fully extended.
(8) Position actuator-to-ring brackets onto actuation ring so holes align with actuator rod
ends. If required, loosen nuts that secure actuator-to-ring brackets to actuation ring.
(9) Apply thread lubricant to threads of actuator rod-end bolts, detail A. Using bolts and
nuts, secure actuator rod-ends onto actuator-to-ring brackets. Boltheads are outboard.
Tighten nuts to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
(10) Tighten nuts that attach actuator-to-ring brackets onto actuation ring to 380-420 lb in.
(43.0-47.4 N·m) of torque.
(11) Remove actuator locating pin, 1C9359P03. See figure 3.
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1113 00
Figure 3. VIGV Rig Pin Installation
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1113 00
Figure 4. VIGV Actuators and Mount Brackets Removal/Installation
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1113 00
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when loosening or

tightening coupling nut. Failure to comply may result in part
damage.
C. Disconnect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569. Remove reducers. See figure 1.
D. Connect head tube onto HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of
torque. See figure 2.
E. Connect rod tube onto HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of
torque.
9/(10 Blank)
10 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1114 00
0WP 1114 00
WORK PACKAGE
FORWARD SEAL COVER PLATE REPLACEMENT


1-4 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Forward Seal Cover Plate Installation......................................................................................... 3

Forward Seal Cover Plate Removal ............................................................................................ 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1114 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the forward seal cover plate.
Some gas turbines are configured with a forward seal carrier rather than a forward seal cover
plate. Reference SWP 1114 01.
None required.
Title Number
Forward Seal Carrier Replacement SWP 1114 01
None required.
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1114 00
6. Forward Seal Cover Plate Removal.
Remove two bolts (figure 1) and forward seal cover plate from inlet frame at 6:00 o'clock posi-
tion.
7. Forward Seal Cover Plate Installation.
A. Position variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) or inlet frame inner case so that forward seal open-
ing is at 6:00 o'clock position. See figure 1.
B. Using thread lubricant, coat washer faces and threads of two bolts.
C. Position cover plate over opening in VIGV or inlet frame inner case at 6:00 o'clock position
(figure 1).
D. Install two bolts. Tighten bolts to 105-115 lb in. (11.9-12.9 N·m) of torque.
1
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1114 00
Figure 1. Forward Seal Cover Plate Replacement
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1210 00
5WP 1210 00
WORK PACKAGE
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR SPEED (XN2)
SENSOR REPLACEMENT


1-7 ...... 5
8 Blank ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
LPC Rotor Speed Sensor Plug Installation (Interim Configuration) .......................................... 5

LPC Rotor Speed Sensor Plug Removal (Interim Configuration) .............................................. 5
LPC Rotor Speed Sensor Plug Installation (Interim Configuration) .......................................... 5
LPC Rotor Speed (XN2) Sensor Removal (Initial Configuration) ............................................. 3
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1210 00
1. Introduction.
NOTE
There are three possible speed (XN2) sensor configurations. The first
is the LPC module with the speed (XN2) sensor installed. The second
is with a speed sensor plug installed. The third is with neither the sen-
sor nor the plug installed.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the low pressure compressor
(LPC) speed (XN2) sensors.
Title Number

Molybdenum Disulfide Lubricant MIL-L-25681

Shim, Laminated 9107M55P01 3
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1210 00
6. LPC Rotor Speed (XN2) Sensor Removal (Initial Configuration).
WARNING

CAUTION

A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from speed (XN2) sensor. See figure 1.
B. Remove bolts and washers that secure speed (XN2) sensor to LPC stator case.
C. Remove speed (XN2) sensor and laminated shim. Discard laminated shim.
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1210 00
Figure 1. Low Pressure Compressor Rotor (XN2) Speed Sensor
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1210 00
7. LPC Rotor Speed Sensor Plug Removal (Interim Configuration).
A. Remove bolts and washers that secure speed sensor plug to LPC stator case. See figure 1.
B. Remove speed sensor plug and laminated shim.
8. LPC Rotor Speed Sensor Plug Installation (Interim Configuration).
A. If shim is not reused or new speed sensor is installed, calculate required shim thickness as fol-
lows. Otherwise, proceed to step C.
(1) Measure dimension A on speed sensor. See figure 2.
(2) Measure dimension B on LPC stator case. See figure 3.
(3) Calculate shim thickness as follows:
Calculated Shim Thickness (inches) = 0.182 inch + A - B

Calculated Shim Thickness (metric) = 4.623 mm + A - B
(4) Stack shims, as required, to exceed calculated shim thickness. Peel away laminated shim
until measured shim is within +/- 0.004 inch (0.101 mm) of calculated shim thickness.
Use new laminated shim, P/N 9107M55P01, if required.
Figure 2. Low Pressure Compressor Rotor Speed Sensor - Dim A
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1210 00
Figure 3. Compressor Stator Case - Dim B
B. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads of bolts.
C. Install laminated shim and speed (XN2) sensor onto LPC stator case.
D. Using four washers and bolts, secure speed (XN2) sensor onto LPC stator case. Tighten bolts
E. Connect electrical connector to speed (XN2) sensor as follows:
WARNING
backshell assembly.
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1210 00
NOTE
Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen

lead clamps that restrict mating.
9. LPC Rotor Speed Sensor Plug Installation (Interim Configuration).
A. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant to threads of bolts.
B. Install laminated shim and speed sensor plug onto LPC stator case.
C. Using four washers and bolts, secure speed sensor plug to case. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in.
(3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
Change 5 7/(8 Blank)

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1310 00
0WP 1310 00
WORK PACKAGE
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR INLET
TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE (T25/P25) SENSOR
REPLACEMENT


1-5 ...... 0
6 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
High Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T25/P25) Sensor Installation ............. 4

High Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T25/P25) Sensor Removal ................. 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1310 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the high pressure compres-
sor inlet temperature/pressure (T25/P25) sensor.
Title Number


2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1310 00
6. High Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T25/P25) Sensor Removal.
See figure 1.
A. If installed, disconnect pressure sensing tube from T25/P25 sensor pressure port per pack-
ager's manual.
NOTE
If same T25/P25 sensor will be reinstalled, proceed to step C.
B. Remove plug or fitting and preformed packing from T25/P25 sensor pressure port. Discard
preformed packing.
WARNING

CAUTION
Ensure that location of electrical connector is noted to aid at
installation. Failure to comply can cause unreliable engine
operation.
C. Tag and disconnect off engine cable from integral lead.
D. Remove jamnut that secures integral lead to electrical interface panel.
E. Remove integral lead from spring clips.
F. Remove two bolts that secure T25/P25 sensor to compressor front frame. Remove T25/P25
sensor.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1310 00
1
Figure 1. High Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T25/P25) Sensor
7. High Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T25/P25) Sensor Installation.
See figure 1.
A. Install T25/P25 sensor onto compressor front frame. Using two bolts, secure T25/P25 sensor
to compressor front frame. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire
bolts.
B. Using jamnut, secure integral lead to electrical interface panel. Tighten jamnut to 25-35 lb in.
(2.9-3.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire jamnut.
C. Connect off engine cable to integral lead as follows:
WARNING
backshell assembly.
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1310 00
NOTE
restrict mating.
D. Install integral lead in spring clips.
NOTE
If plug or fitting is already installed, proceed to step G.
E. Lubricate preformed packing, P/N J221P903, with petrolatum, and install onto plug or fitting.
F. Install plug or fitting into T25/P25 sensor pressure port. Tighten plug or fitting to
90-100 lb in. (10.2-11.3 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire plug.
G. If present, connect pressure sensing tube to fitting in T25/P25 sensor pressure port per pack-
ager's manual.
5/(6 Blank)
6 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1311 00
0WP 1311 00
WORK PACKAGE
VARIABLE BYPASS VALVE (VBV) ACTUATOR
REPLACEMENT


1 - 11 ...... 0
12 Blank . . . . . . 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Variable Bypass Valve Actuator Installation............................................................................... 5

Variable Bypass Valve Actuator Removal .................................................................................. 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1311 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the six variable bypass valve
(VBV) actuators.
Title Number
Variable Bypass Valve (VBV) System Check WP 1312 00
Front Frame Air Collector Replacement WP 2310 00

VBV, VSV

Gasket, Seal (Rod-End) J219P03 1
Gasket, Seal (Head-End) J219P04 1
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1311 00
6. Variable Bypass Valve Actuator Removal.
A. Remove access panels from air collector, as required, to gain access per WP 2310 00.
WARNING

CAUTION

B. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from VBV actuator.
C. Disconnect tubing from VBV actuator as follows (figure 1):

1
WARNING
(1) Position a waste fluid container beneath VBV actuator. Disconnect drain line from drain
adapter.
(2) Disconnect drain adapter from VBV actuator. Slide drain adapter away from VBV actua-
tor port to expose coupling nut.
CAUTION
(3) Disconnect coupling nut from VBV actuator fitting.
(4) Remove and discard preformed packings.
D. If required, remove air collector seal from VBV actuator per WP 2310 00.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1311 00
Figure 1. VBV Actuator Tubing
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1311 00
CAUTION
Do not change adjustment of clevis or actuator rod end. Any move-

ment or adjustment of clevis or actuator rod end length requires that
VBV actuation system rigging be checked.
E. Remove nut, washer, and bolt that secure clevis to bellcrank (figure 2).
2
F. Remove bolt and washer that secure VBV actuator mount leg to front frame.
G. Remove nuts and washers that secure VBV actuator mount studs to front frame. Remove
VBV actuator.
H. Remove nut and bolt that secure clevis to VBV actuator rod end. Remove clevis.
I. Remove fitting from VBV actuator (figure 1). Remove and discard preformed packing.
7. Variable Bypass Valve Actuator Installation.
WARNING

A. Lubricate preformed packings, P/N J221P904 and P/N 9365M41P122, with lubricating oil
and install into packing groove of fitting (figure 1).
B. Install fitting into VBV actuator. Tighten fitting to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
C. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads of all bolts and mount studs, figure 2.
D. Using bolt and nut, install clevis onto VBV actuator rod end. Tighten nut to 100-130 lb in.
(11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
E. Install VBV actuator onto front frame. Position VBV actuator so that clevis retaining bolt
bolthead faces inboard.
F. Using washers and nuts, secure VBV actuator onto front frame. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in.
G. Using bolt and washer, secure VBV actuator mount leg onto front frame. Tighten bolt to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1311 00
Figure 2. VBV Actuator
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1311 00
H. Using bolt, washer, and nut, secure clevis onto bellcrank. Bolthead faces inboard, washer
under nut. Tighten nut to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque. Restrain bolt during tight-
ening procedure using 0.125-inch (3.175 mm) Allen wrench.
I. If required, install air collector seal as follows:
(1) Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads of air collector seal retaining screws.
(2) Install air collector seal and secure with screws.
(3) Tighten screws to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
J. Lubricate preformed packing, P/N 9365M41P117, with lubricating oil and install into drain
adapter (figure 1).
CAUTION
K. Connect tubing coupling nut onto VBV actuator fittings. Tighten coupling nut to
270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque.
L. Leak-check head- and rod-end fittings as follows (figure 3):
(1) Remove bolts and washers that secure VBV head hose (head-end) to hydraulic control
unit (HCU). Remove seal gasket.
(2) Install seal gasket, P/N J219P04A, onto VBV head hose adapter from adapter set,
1C9393. Using washers and bolts, secure adapter onto head hose. Tighten bolts to
33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
(3) Remove bolts and washers that secure VBV rod hose (rod-end) to HCU. Remove seal
gasket.
(4) Install seal gasket, P/N J219P03A, onto VBV rod hose adapter from adapter set, 1C9393.
Using washers and bolts, secure adapter to rod hose. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in.
3
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1311 00
Figure 3. Leak Check
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1311 00
CAUTION
Use hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, with engines that use lubricat-
ing oil, MIL-L-23699. Do not intermix lubricating oil, MIL-L-7808
and MIL-L-23699, or damage will occur.
(5) Connect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, to hose adapters. Tighten fittings to
135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
and fittings.
Check head hose/actuator connection for leakage.
Check rod hose/actuator connection for leakage.
(8) If required, check VBV actuation system per WP 1312 00.
(9) Release pressure on VBV hydraulic system. Disconnect hydraulic actuator unit from
VBV hose adapters.
(10) Remove VBV hose adapters. Remove seal gaskets. Inspect seal gaskets for serviceabil-
ity. Discard damaged seal gaskets.
(11) Install new or serviceable seal gasket, P/N J219P03A, into HCU rod-end port. Using
washers and bolts, secure rod hose to HCU. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of
torque.
(12) Install new or serviceable seal gasket, P/N J219P04A, into HCU head-end port. Using
washers and bolts, secure head hose to HCU. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m)
of torque.
CAUTION
M. Slide drain adapter over coupling nuts and connect onto adapter port, (figure 1). Hand-
tighten drain adapters.
9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1311 00
N. Leak-check drain adapters as follows:
WARNING
• When using compressed air for cleaning, cooling, or drying, do
not exceed 30 psig. Wear eye protection and do not direct com-
pressed air at self or others.
(1) Connect a source of clean, dry, regulated shop air or nitrogen to drain line fitting on drain
adapter.
(3) If pressure drop limit is exceeded, use soap solution to detect leak. Repair, as required,
(5) Connect drain line to drain adapter. Tighten coupling nuts to 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
O. If required, connect electrical connector to VBV actuator as follows:
WARNING
jawed pliers. Tighten connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
10
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1311 00
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required.
P. Using washers, bolts, and nuts, install access panels onto air collector per WP 2310 00.
Tighten bolts and nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
11/(12 Blank)
12 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1312 00
0WP 1312 00
WORK PACKAGE
VARIABLE BYPASS VALVE (VBV) SYSTEM CHECK


1-8 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Variable Bypass Valve (VBV) System Check............................................................................. 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1312 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for checking the variable bypass valve (VBV) system.
Title Number

Tool Set, Rigging, VBV Doors 1C9353G02
VBV, VSV

2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1312 00
6. Variable Bypass Valve (VBV) System Check.
A. Remove air collector access panels. See figure 1.

1
WARNING

B. Remove bolts and washers that secure VBV head hose to hydraulic control unit (HCU). See
figure 2. Remove seal gasket.
2
C. Install seal gasket, P/N J219P04, onto VBV hose adapter from adapter set, 1C9393. Secure
adapter to VBV head hose using washers and bolts. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in.
D. Remove bolts and washers that secure VBV rod hose to HCU. Remove seal gasket.
E. Install seal gasket, P/N J219P03, onto VBV hose adapter from adapter set, 1C9393. Secure
adapter to VBV rod hose using washers and bolts. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m)
of torque.
CAUTION

F. Connect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, to hose adapters. Tighten fittings to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
and fittings.
G. Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VBV system to the full open
and full closed positions several times. System shall operate smoothly throughout entire
range of travel in both directions.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1312 00
Figure 1. Air Collector Access Panels
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1312 00
Figure 2. VBV Hose Locations
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1312 00
NOTE
VBV position indication is read at indicator on control panel. Control

panel must be powered up to read VBV position indication.
H. Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VBV system to the full
closed position. Insert four rig pins, 1C9353. Rig pins shall insert freely through unison ring
and thread into the four threaded bosses at the 12:30, 2:00, 6:30, and 8:00 o'clock positions.
See figure 3. VBV position indicator shall indicate 0 ± 1 percent (full closed).
I. If VBV position indicator does not indicate 0 ± 1 percent (full closed), adjust the rigging as
follows (figure 4):
(1) Release hydraulic pressure from system.
(2) Loosen jamnut on each of the six rod-end bearing/actuator clevis linkages.
(3) Remove six nuts and bolts attaching rod-end bearing/actuator clevis linkages to actuator
rods.
3
Figure 3. VBV Door, Unison Ring, and Rig Pin Hole

4
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1312 00
Figure 4. VBV Rigging
WARNING

and fittings.
(4) Apply hydraulic pressure so that actuator rods are fully retracted (full closed).
(5) Turn rod-end bearing(s) in or out of the actuator clevis(es), as necessary, until hole in
rod-end bearing(s) aligns with hole in the clevis on actuator rod(s). Tighten jamnut(s)
finger-tight.
(6) Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads of six bolts.
(7) Install six bolts and nuts that attach rod-end bearing/actuator clevis linkages to actuator
rods. Tighten nuts to 125 lb in. (14.1 N·m) of torque.
(8) Ensure that a 0.055-inch (1.40 mm) diameter wire will not pass through witness hole in
actuator clevises. If necessary, turn rod-end bearing and clevis on actuator rod to position
rod-end bearing centered in actuator clevis.
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1312 00
(9) Tighten jamnuts on rod-end bearing/actuator clevis linkages to 80 lb in. (9.0 N·m) of
torque.
J. Remove four rig pins. Release pressure on VBV hydraulic system.
WARNING

and fittings.
K. Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VBV system to the full open
position. VBV position indicator shall indicate 100 ± 1 percent (full open).
L. Release pressure on VBV hydraulic system.
CAUTION
M. Disconnect hydraulic actuator unit from VBV hose adapters.
N. Remove VBV hose adapters. Remove seal gaskets. Inspect seal gaskets for serviceability.
Discard damaged seal gaskets.
O. Install new or serviceable seal gasket, P/N J219P03, onto HCU rod-end port. Secure VBV
rod hose to HCU using washers and bolts. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of
torque.
P. Install new or serviceable seal gasket, P/N J219P04, onto HCU head-end port. Secure VBV
head hose to HCU using washers and bolts. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of
torque.
Q. Using washers, bolts, and nuts, install air collector access panels. See figure 1. Tighten bolts
and nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1313 00
5WP 1313 00
WORK PACKAGE
BYPASS VALVE, BELLCRANK, AND ACTUATING RING
REPLACEMENT


1 - 15 ...... 5
16 Blank . . . . . . 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Bypass Valve, Bellcrank, and Actuating Ring Installation ......................................................... 7

Bypass Valve, Bellcrank, and Actuating Ring Removal............................................................. 3
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1313 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing a bypass valve, bellcrank,
and actuating ring.
Title Number

Tool Set, Rigging, VBV Doors 1C9353G02
VBV, VSV
Sling, Lift MSE-53
Bottle Jack Local Purchase
(Black or Blue)
Sprayable Air Drying Lubricant GE Spec. A50TF192,
Class B
Loctite 271 or European Loctite 275 GE Spec. A15B41A9
(MIL-S-46163A,
Type I, Grade A)

2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1313 00
6. Bypass Valve, Bellcrank, and Actuating Ring Removal.
A. Remove access panels from front frame air collector, as required, to gain access.
B. If required, remove lower section of air collector as follows (figure 1):
(1) Position bottle jack with protective block to support accessory gearbox.
(2) Remove screws that secure engine thrust mount frame seals. Remove seals.
1
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts. Stay

out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall, they
can cause an injury or death.
(3) Using a 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist, position lift sling above air collector.
Secure sling arms to air collector lower section. Take up slack on hoist to support air col-
lector lower section.
(4) Remove nuts, washers, and bolts that secure air collector lower section.
(5) Slowly lower sling while pulling lower section clear of engine.
(6) Repeat steps (3), (4), and (5) to remove remaining lower section.
C. Remove bypass valve (figure 2) and hinge assembly as follows:
(1) Remove nut, washers, and bolt that secure clevis rod-end bearing to valve.
(2) Remove bolts (Section A-A) and washers that secure hinge to front frame. Remove valve
with attached hinge.
(3) Remove nuts, washers, screws, and bushings that secure hinge to valve. Separate hinge
from valve.
(4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) to remove remaining 11 bypass valves.
2
D. Remove actuating ring and bellcranks (figure 3) as follows:
3
(1) Remove 12 bolts (View B) that secure bypass valve bellcrank to actuating ring.
(2) Remove six bolts that secure variable bypass valve (VBV) actuator bellcrank to
actuating ring.
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1313 00
Figure 1. Front Frame Air Collector
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1313 00
Figure 2. Bypass Valve Replacement
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1313 00
Figure 3. Actuating Ring and Bellcrank Removal
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1313 00
NOTE
Bellcrank bearings are tack-welded to the frame.
E. Remove bolts (Section A-A), flat washers, thrust washers, sleeves, and washers that secure 18
bellcranks onto bearing. Remove bellcranks from bearing.
NOTE
Actuating ring halves are a matched set.
F. Remove four bolts (View B) from connector plate (if present) at struts No. 2 and 5, and
remove actuating ring halves from front frame. Remove screw thread inserts.
G. Remove nut (figure 2, Detail C), bolt, and washer that secure clevis to bypass valve bellcrank.
H. Loosen jamnut and remove rod-end bearing from clevis.
7. Bypass Valve, Bellcrank, and Actuating Ring Installation.
A. Assemble bypass valve (figure 2) to hinge as follows:
WARNING
Solid film lubricant is toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract.

Skin, eye, and respiratory protection is required.
(1) Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads of screws.
(2) Align hinge with bypass valve. Install bushings, flange outside, through valve and hinge.
(3) Install two screws, washers, and nuts to secure hinge to bypass valve. Install screw
through bushing from outside, washers and nuts inside.
(5) Repeat steps (1) through (4) for remaining 11 bypass valve/hinge assemblies.
B. Determine valve position as follows (figure 4):
(1) Measure from aft center portion of valve bottom to seal retainer lip. Record as
dimension B.
4
(2) Subtract 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) from dimension B. Record difference as dimension C.
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1313 00
Figure 4. Bypass Valve Positioning
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1313 00
(3) Measure bypass port rear face from inside outward. Using marking pen, mark rear face at
dimension C.
C. Install bypass valve/hinge assembly (figure 2) onto front frame as follows:
WARNING
Solid film lubricant is toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract.

Skin, eye, and respiratory protection is required.
(1) Apply sprayable lubricant to seal on bypass valve and mating surface of front frame.
(2) Apply molybdenum disulfide onto bolt threads. Install bypass valve/hinge assembly in
opening on front frame.
(3) Secure bypass valve/hinge assembly onto front frame using two bolts and washers.
(4) Tighten bolts to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
(5) Repeat steps (1) through (4) for remaining 11 bypass valve/hinge assemblies.
D. Assemble bypass valve bellcrank and clevis assemblies as follows:
(1) Apply thin coating of molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads of rod-end bearing.
(2) Thread jamnut onto rod-end bearing and install bearing to clevis. Thread bearing into
clevis approximately 0.375 inch (9.53 mm), until end of thread is flush with underside of
clevis. Tighten jamnut finger-tight.
(3) Apply thin coating of molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads of bellcrank-to-clevis
bolt.
(4) Align clevis with bellcrank angled leg and install bolt, washer, and nut. Install washer
under nut and bolthead on frame side of bellcrank.
(5) Tighten nut to 90-110 lb in. (10.2-12.4 N·m) of torque.
(6) Repeat steps (1) through (5) for remaining 11 bellcrank and clevis assemblies.
E. Install actuating ring (figure 3) onto front frame as follows:
(1) Adjust six VBV actuators as follows:
(a) Remove protective caps from VBV actuators.
(b) Pull actuator rod to full extended position.
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1313 00
(c) Push rod into actuator to full retracted position until contact is made.
(d) Install protective caps in VBV actuator ports.
CAUTION
Variable bypass valve actuator rods must remain in the full retracted
position for successful VBV components installation. Adjust rod-end
bearing length to align with actuator rod end; do not extend VBV
actuator rods to align with rod-end bearings.
(2) Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant to threads of four bolts (View B).
(3) Position actuating ring halves around front frame so halves connect at approximately
2:00 and 8:00 o’clock positions (over struts No. 2 and 5).
NOTE
There are two configurations of actuating rings. Early configuration

has connector plates. Latest configuration does not.
(4) Secure actuating ring halves together using connector plates and bolts. Longest bolt goes
through center hole of each connector plate. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m)
of torque.
F. Install 12 bypass valve bellcrank assemblies (figure 3) as follows:
(1) Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant to threads of 12 bolts that secure bellcranks onto
bearing.
(2) Install washer (Section A-A) and sleeve onto bearing. Install bellcrank assembly. Install
thrust washer on top of bellcrank.
(3) Secure bellcrank assembly onto bearing with washer and bolt. Tighten bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) for remaining 11 bellcrank assemblies.
(5) Check that each bellcrank assembly operates freely, using finger force only.
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1313 00
G. Assemble 18 bellcranks to actuating ring as follows:
NOTE
There are two configurations of actuating rings. Early configuration

has slots at the bellcrank locations. Later configuration is U-shaped.
(1) Align actuating ring (figure 2, View B) to front frame with four locating pins,
1C9353P02. Insert locating pins through actuating ring and thread into front frame at
4:00, 7:00, 10:00, and 12:30 o’clock positions. Tighten locating pins hand-tight; do not
force the assembly. This is the bypass valve rig position.
(2) Rotate bellcranks until straight leg engages into actuation ring.
(3) Apply Loctite 271 to threads of 18 bolts (figure 3, View B) that secure bellcranks to
actuation ring. Align bellcranks with holes in ring. Install bolts through ring and
bellcrank. Tighten bolts to 225 lb in. (25.4 N·m) of torque.
H. Assemble rod-end bearings (figure 2) to bypass valves as follows:
(1) Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant to threads of 12 bolts that secure rod-end bear-
ings to bypass valves.
(2) With actuator rods fully retracted and four locating pins installed, align rod-end bearing
to bypass valve clevis.
(3) Thread rod-end bearing to bellcrank clevis to align boltholes. Adjust so bolt can be
installed with center of bypass valve aft lip protruding into air flow path.
(4) Adjust rod-end bearings at each of 12 bellcranks to obtain required bypass valve align-
ment. Check that there is full thread engagement of bearing into clevis, approximately
0.375 inch (9.53 mm). Do not torque jamnuts at this time.
(5) Install bolt, washers, and nut to hold clevis to rod-end bearing. Bolthead is on right side
of valve, aft looking forward. Washer is under bolt and nut. See View B.
(6) Tighten 12 nuts at valve and clevis pivot point to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Safety-cable or lockwire nuts.
(7) Position 12 rod-end bearings centered in clevises. This will prevent premature failure of
rod-end bearings.
(8) Tighten 12 rod-end bearing jamnuts ( Detail C) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Safety-cable or lockwire jamnuts.
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1313 00
(9) Remove four locating pins, 1C9353P02, from actuating ring.
I. Final test VBV hydraulic system as follows:
(1) Remove bolts and washers that secure VBV head hose onto hydraulic control unit
(HCU). Remove seal gasket (figure 5).
5
(2) Install seal gasket, PN J219P04, onto VBV hose adapter from adapter set, 1C9393.
Using washers and bolts, secure adapter onto head hose. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in.
(3) Remove bolts and washers that secure VBV rod hose onto HCU. Remove seal gasket.
(4) Install seal gasket, PN J219P03, onto VBV hose adapter from adapter set, 1C9393.
Using washers and bolts, secure adapter onto rod hose. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in.
CAUTION
(5) Connect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, onto hose adapters. Tighten fittings to
135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING

and fittings.
(6) Apply 200-250 psi (1379-1724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VBV system to full open
and full closed positions several times. System shall operate smoothly throughout entire
range of travel in both directions.
(7) Apply 200-250 psi (1379-1724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VBV system to full
closed position. Variable bypass valve seal retainer lip shall align with mark on inside lip
of bleed port rear face.
(8) Release pressure on VBV hydraulic system.
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1313 00
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1313 00
CAUTION

(9) Disconnect hydraulic actuator unit from VBV hose adapter set.
(10) Remove VBV hose adapters (figure 5). Remove seal gaskets. Inspect seal gaskets for
serviceability. Discard damaged seal gasket.
(11) Install new or serviceable seal gasket, PN J219P03, onto HCU rod port. Using washers
and bolts, secure rod hose to HCU. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
(12) Install new or serviceable seal gasket, PN J219P04, onto HCU head port. Using washers
and bolts, secure head hose to HCU. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of
torque.
J. If removed, install lower section of air collector as follows (figure 1):
(1) Position lower section under air collector.
WARNING

(2) Using a 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist, position lift sling above air collector.
Secure sling arms to lower section.
(3) Slowly raise lower section into position.
(4) Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads of bolts.
(5) Install bolts and nuts that secure lower section onto front frame forward flange.
Boltheads face aft.
(6) Install bolts that secure lower section onto front frame aft flange.
(7) Install bolts and nuts that secure flanges. Boltheads face up or outboard.
(8) Tighten flange nuts to 480-570 lb in. (54.3-64.4 N·m) of torque.
(9) Remove sling.
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1313 00
(10) Tighten nuts that secure lower section onto front frame forward flange to 55-70 lb in.
(11) Tighten bolts that secure lower section onto front frame aft flange to 55-70 lb in.
(12) Repeat steps (1) through (11) for remaining lower section.
(13) Install thrust mount frame seals and secure with screws.
K. Using washers, bolts, and nuts, install access panels onto air collector. Tighten bolts and nuts
L. Remove bottle jack and protective block.

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1410 00
5WP 1410 00
WORK PACKAGE
VARIABLE STATOR VANE (VSV) ACTUATOR
COMPONENTS REPLACEMENT


1 - 14 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Variable Stator Vane Actuator Installation.................................................................................. 6

Variable Stator Vane Actuator Length Preset Adjustment Using Fixture, 1C9403 .................... 11
Variable Stator Vane Actuator Lever Installation........................................................................ 13
Variable Stator Vane Actuator Lever Removal ........................................................................... 12
Variable Stator Vane Actuator Ring Installation ......................................................................... 14
Variable Stator Vane Actuator Ring Removal............................................................................. 14
Variable Stator Vane Actuator Removal ..................................................................................... 3
Variable Stator Vane Connecting Link Installation..................................................................... 14
Variable Stator Vane Connecting Link Removal ........................................................................ 14
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1410 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the variable stator vane
(VSV) actuation components.
Title Number
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Rigging WP 1411 00
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Upper and Lower Stator WP 2411 00
Case Replacement
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Stator Vanes Replacement WP 2412 00

VBV, VSV
Fixture, Check VSV/VIGV Actuators 1C9403G01
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
(Black or Blue)
Silicone Rubber Adhesive GE Spec A15F6B56
(RTV 106)
Thread Lubricant GP 460

2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1410 00
6. Variable Stator Vane Actuator Removal.
WARNING
CAUTION

A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from VSV actuator.
NOTE
B. Disconnect tubing as follows (figure 1):
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not

inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant. Personal
protective equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust ventila-
tion - if not available, use an approved respirator.
(1) Position a waste fluid container beneath VSV actuator. Disconnect drain line from drain
adapter.
(2) Disconnect drain adapter from VSV actuator. Slide drain adapter away from VSV actua-
tor ports to expose coupling nut.
1
CAUTION
(3) Disconnect coupling nut from VSV actuator fitting.
(4) Remove and discard preformed packing from drain adapters.
C. Remove bolts that secure actuator bracket to front frame. See figure 2.
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1410 00
Figure 1. VSV Actuator Tubing
CAUTION

adjustment requires that paragraph 8. be performed and VSV actua-
tion system rigging be checked.
D. Remove nut and bolt that secure VSV actuator to bracket. Separate bracket from VSV
actuator.
E. Rotate guide 90 degrees. Remove guide and VSV actuator from actuation lever.
F. Remove fitting from VSV actuator. Remove and discard preformed packings. See figure 1.
2
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1410 00
Figure 2. VSV Actuation Components
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1410 00
7. Variable Stator Vane Actuator Installation.
WARNING
NOTE
If installing a new actuator, or in the event actuator rod end adjust-
ment is disturbed during removal/installation, perform paragraph 8.
A. Lubricate preformed packings, P/N J221P904 and P/N 9365M41P122, with lubricating oil,
and install into groove of fitting. See figure 1.
B. Install fitting into VSV actuator. Tighten fitting to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
adjustment requires that paragraph 8. be performed and VSV actua-
tion system rigging be checked.
C. Position VSV actuator rod end over forward end of actuation lever. See figure 2.
D. Install guide onto end of lever. AFT mark on guide faces aft. Rotate guide 90 degrees.
E. Apply thread lubricant onto threads of actuator retaining bolt and actuator bracket retaining
bolts.
F. Slide VSV actuator so that guide fits into channel of bracket. Using bolt and nut, secure VSV
actuator to bracket. Bolthead faces forward. Tighten nut to 120-150 lb in. (13.6-16.9 N·m) of
torque.
G. Using bolts, secure actuator bracket onto front frame. Tighten bolts per figure 3 and
safety-wire.
3
WARNING
H. Lubricate preformed packing, P/N 9365M41P117, with lubricating oil and install into drain
adapter. See figure 1.
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1410 00
Figure 3. VSV Actuator Bracket Installation
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1410 00
CAUTION

I. Connect tubing coupling nut to VSV actuator fittings. Tighten coupling nut to 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
J. Leak-check head- and rod-end fittings as follows (figure 4):

4
CAUTION
Use hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, with engines that use lubricat-
ing oil, MIL-L-23699. Do not intermix lubricating oil, MIL-L-7808
(1) Install reducers from adapter set, 1C9393, onto hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569. Tighten
reducers to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Position waste fluid container under hydraulic control unit (HCU).
WARNING

CAUTION

(3) Disconnect VSV head tube from HCU. Install head tube onto -4 to -10 reducer. Tighten
coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
(4) Disconnect VSV rod tube from HCU. Install rod tube onto -4 to -8 reducer. Tighten cou-
WARNING
and fittings.
Check head tube/actuator connection for leakage.
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1410 00
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1410 00
Check rod tube/actuator connection for leakage.
(7) If required, check VSV system rigging per WP 1411 00.
(8) Disconnect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569. Remove reducers.
(9) Connect head tube to HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of
torque.
(10) Connect rod tube to HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of
torque.
K. Slide drain adapter over coupling nut and connect to VSV actuator port. See figure 1. Hand-
tighten drain adapters.
L. Leak-check drain adapters as follows:
WARNING


(1) Connect a source of clean, dry, regulated shop air or nitrogen to drain line fitting on drain
adapter.
(3) If pressure drop limit is exceeded, use soap solution to detect leak. Repair as required
(5) Connect drain line to drain adapter. Tighten coupling nut to 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
M. Connect electrical connector to VSV actuator as follows:
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1410 00
WARNING

backshell assembly.
jawed pliers. Tighten connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required.
8. Variable Stator Vane Actuator Length Preset Adjustment Using Fixture, 1C9403.
WARNING
and fittings.
CAUTION
• Maintain 250.0 psi (1,724 kPa) on actuator, at the fully extended
position, when adjusting rod end.
• Use hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, with engines that use lubri-
cating oil, MIL-L-23699. Do not intermix lubricating oil,
NOTE
This procedure is to be performed before installing a new actuator or
in the event actuator rod end adjustment is disturbed during
removal/installation.
A. Connect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, to actuator. Supply 250.0 psi (1,724 kPa) to
extend actuator to fully extended position. Maintain pressure throughout adjustment
procedure.
5
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1410 00
Figure 5. Actuator Length Preset Using Fixture, 1C9403
B. Loosen jamnut that secures actuator rod end.
C. Adjust rod end so that actuator slides freely onto fixture, 1C9403. See figure 5.
D. Tighten jamnut to secure rod end. Safety-wire jamnut.
E. Release pressure and remove hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569.
F. Perform VSV rigging per WP 1411 00 before operating engine.
9. Variable Stator Vane Actuator Lever Removal.
A. Remove VSV actuator per paragraph 6.
B. Remove bolts, washers, bushings (stages 3-5), and nuts that secure clevis assemblies to VSV
connecting links. See figure 2.
C. Remove nut, washer, and spacer that secure actuation lever to aft mount and remove lever.
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1410 00
D. Mark stage number on each clevis assembly with marking pen.
E. Remove nuts and bolts that secure clevis assemblies to actuation lever.
F. Separate seal boots and slot-loaded bearings from actuation lever.
10. Variable Stator Vane Actuator Lever Installation.
A. Install slot-loaded bearings into actuation lever (figure 2). Install seal boots over bearings.
B. Apply thread lubricant to threads of clevis bolts.
C. Secure clevis assemblies to actuation lever using nuts and bolts (boltheads next to engine).
D. Install spacer and actuation lever over aft mount stud.
E. Apply thread lubricant to stud threads and install washer and nut. Tighten nut to
190-230 lb in. (21.5-25.9 N·m) of torque.
E.A Apply thread lubricant to threads of rod-end bearing to connecting link bolts.
F. Align clevis rod-end bearings with connecting links and secure with bolts, washers, and nuts.
Boltheads face forward. One washer is under bolthead and one washer is under nut. On stages
3-5, bushing is between aft side of rod end and connecting link.
G. Tighten rod-end bearing to connecting link nuts to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract.
Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or prolonged
contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
H. Using isopropyl alcohol, clean lever aft mount and spacer.
WARNING
Vapor from uncured sealant is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes,
and respiratory tract. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Use in a
I. Apply silicone rubber adhesive over exposed joint between lever, spacer, and aft mount.
Allow adhesive to cure for 8 hours minimum before engine operation.
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1410 00
11. Variable Stator Vane Connecting Link Removal.
A. Remove VSV actuation lever per paragraph 9.
CAUTION

adjustment requires that paragraph 8. of this work package be per-
formed and VSV actuator system rigging be checked.
B. Remove VSV connecting links per WP 2411 00.
12. Variable Stator Vane Connecting Link Installation.
A. Install VSV connecting links per WP 2411 00.
B. Install VSV actuation lever per paragraph 10.
13. Variable Stator Vane Actuator Ring Removal.
A. Remove VSV actuation lever per paragraph 9.
CAUTION

adjustment requires that paragraph 8 of this work package be per-
formed and VSV actuator system rigging be checked.
B. Remove VSV connecting links per WP 2411 00.
C. Remove VSV actuation ring per WP 2412 00.
14. Variable Stator Vane Actuator Ring Installation.
A. Install VSV actuation ring per WP 2412 00.
B. Install VSV connecting links per WP 2411 00.
C. Install VSV actuation lever per paragraph 10.
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1411 00
5WP 1411 00
WORK PACKAGE
VARIABLE STATOR VANE (VSV) RIGGING


1 - 16 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Hydraulic Actuator Unit, 1C3569, Installation ........................................................................... 4

Hydraulic Actuator Unit, 1C3569, Removal............................................................................... 16
Variable Stator Vane Actuation Ring Spacer Clearance Adjustment.......................................... 3
Variable Stator Vane Actuator Full Travel Verification .............................................................. 15
Variable Stator Vane System Rigging (Alternate Method) ......................................................... 7
Variable Stator Vane System Rigging (Preferred Method) ......................................................... 6
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1411 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for rigging the variable stator vane (VSV) system.
None required.

Protractor Assy, Electronic, Portable - VSV 1C9365G01
VBV, VSV
Gage Set, VSV Clevis 2C6925G02
(Black or Blue)
Thread Lubricant GP 460
None required.
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1411 00
6. Variable Stator Vane Actuation Ring Spacer Clearance Adjustment.
CAUTION
Prior to performing this work package, ensure the following condi-

tions exist:
• VSV vane arms are installed in actuation rings.
• Actuation rings are secured to bridge connectors.
• Actuating arm levers are installed and secured properly.
• VSV actuators are installed and secured properly.
A. Position stator vanes to full open position (VSV actuator rods fully extended).
NOTE
All eight spacers per stage shall be adjusted at the same time.
B. Adjust actuation ring spacers. See figure 1.

1
Figure 1. VSV Actuation Ring Spacer Clearance
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1411 00
C. Tighten locknuts to 60-70 lb in. (6.8-7.9 N·m) of torque.
D. Measure clearance between spacer and high pressure compressor (HPC) case (dimension M).
Clearance shall be within limits of figure 1.
7. Hydraulic Actuator Unit, 1C3569, Installation.
See figure 2.
A. Position waste fluid container beneath hydraulic control unit (HCU).
WARNING
CAUTION
• Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when loosening or tight-

ening coupling nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
• Use hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, with engines that use

B. Install reducers, from adapter set, 1C9393, onto hydraulic actuator unit. Tighten reducer to
135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
C. Disconnect head tube from HCU. Install head tube onto -4 to -10 reducer. Tighten tube to
650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
D. Disconnect rod tube from HCU. Install rod tube onto -4 to -8 reducer. Tighten tube to
450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
2
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1411 00

Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1411 00
NOTE
An alternate method of rigging VSV system using electronic protractor,

1C9365, is provided in paragraph 9.
8. Variable Stator Vane System Rigging (Preferred Method).
A. Preset length of clevis assemblies as follows (figure 3):
CAUTION
Ensure stage number is marked on each clevis assembly. Improper

location of clevis assemblies will cause unpredictable engine
operation.
(1) Using marking pen, mark stage number on clevis assembly.
(2) Install clevis assembly into VSV clevis gage set, 2C6925.
(3) If necessary, loosen jamnut and adjust clevis assembly length to appropriate value as
specified in figure 3.
(4) Tighten jamnut to 60-70 lb in. (6.8-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire jamnut.
3
Figure 3. Preset Length of Clevis Assemblies Using Gage Set, 2C6925
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1411 00
CAUTION
Ensure clevis assemblies are installed at the proper locations.

Failure to comply may cause unpredictable engine operation.
B. Install inlet guide vane (IGV) and stages 1 and 2 clevis assemblies as follows (figure 4):
CAUTION
Jamnut safety wire shall not be broken when installing clevis assem-
blies on actuating arm lever or bridge connector.
(1) Apply thread lubricant to threads of clevis bolts and rod end to bridge connector bolts.
(2) Using bolt and nut, secure clevis (detail A) onto actuating arm lever, bolthead facing
inboard. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
(3) Using bolt, washers, and nut, secure rod end to bridge connector, bolthead facing
forward. One washer goes under bolthead, and one washer goes under nut. Tighten nut to
62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
4
C. Install stage 3 through stage 5 clevis assemblies as follows (figure 4):
(2) Using bolt and nut, secure clevis (detail B) to actuating arm lever, bolthead faces
(3) Using bolt, washers, bushing, and nut, secure rod end to bridge connector, bolthead
facing forward. Bushing goes between aft face of rod end and bridge connector. One
washer goes under bolthead, and one washer goes under nut. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in.
(7.0-7.7 N·m) above run-on torque.
D. Verify full travel of VSV actuator per paragraph 10.
9. Variable Stator Vane System Rigging (Alternate Method).
CAUTION
Ensure clevis assemblies are installed at the proper locations. Fail-

ure to comply may cause unpredictable engine operation.
A. Assemble clevis assemblies per figure 4. Do not tighten jamnuts at this time.
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1411 00
Figure 4. Vane Actuator Lever Assembly
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1411 00
B. Install stage IGV through stage 2 clevis assemblies as follows (figure 4):
(2) Using bolt and nut, secure clevis (detail A) onto actuating arm lever, bolthead facing
(3) Using bolt, washers, and nut, secure rod end onto bridge connector, bolthead facing
forward. One washer under bolthead, and one washer under nut. Tighten nut to
62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
C. Install stage 3 through stage 5 clevis assemblies as follows (figure 4):
(2) Using bolt and nut, secure clevis (detail B) to actuating arm lever, bolthead faces
(3) Using bolt, washers, bushings, and nut, secure rod end onto bridge connector, bolthead
facing forward. Bushing goes between aft face of rod end and bridge connector. One
washer goes under bolthead, and one washer goes under nut. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in.
(7.0-7.7 N·m) above run-on torque.
D. Calibrate portable electronic protractor, 1C9365, to set master as follows (figure 5):
(1) Set 110v/60Hz, 230v/50Hz switch on back panel to proper setting for power supply
being used.
5
NOTE
P38 encoders should remain connected to readout unit to ensure pre-

rig check accuracy.
(2) Install encoder on set master ensuring tangs are engaged. Position locator arm at zero
degree. Install alignment pin through locator arm into zero degree hole of set master.
(3) Connect encoder to digital position readout unit.
(4) Power up readout unit and allow to warm up for 15 minutes. When unit is powered up,
display will show P-UP. Press any R key to clear display.
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1411 00
Figure 5. Portable VSV Electronic Protractor Tool Set, 1C9365
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1411 00
NOTE
Ensure locator arm is in zero degree position before pressing reset

button.
(5) Move locator arm to zero position. Press reset button to set readout counter to zero.
CAUTION
• Do not make any mechanical adjustments to encoder or locator

arm. Move arm slowly; rapid movement will cause inaccurate
readings. Operate one complete cycle between readouts.
• Always pass through zero degree on set master when checking

angles. Inaccurate readings will result if not actuated through
zero from either + or - readings.
(6) Move locator arm to each degree hole in set master and check readout of counter. Read-
ings shall be within 0.2 degree of degree mark on set master. If readings cannot be met
within 0.2 degree, check for proper setup and security of plugs in receptacle. Replace
encoder or digital position readout unit as required.
(7) Return to zero hole in set master. Zero hole shall give zero reading after other settings
have been checked.
(8) Repeat steps (1) through (7) for remaining encoders.
E. Install P38 encoders on stage IGV through stage 2 vane stems as follows:
NOTE
• Refer to figure 6 for tool part numbers.
• Vane angles shall be measured from the vane positions listed on

figure 7, table 1. When adequate thread engagement cannot be
obtained (less than two threads), an alternate vane location, one
vane position either side of the locations listed in figure 7, table 1,
may be used. Vane positions are numbered from the 9 o'clock posi-
tion (aft looking forward).
(1) Install post locators onto four vane stems as listed in figure 7, table 1. Tighten post loca-
tor to 5-10 lb in. (0.6-1.1 N·m) of torque. See figure 6.
7
6
(2) Install tang adapters over four post locators and engage adapter tangs in vane arms.
Scribe lines on tang adapters must face aft.
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1411 00
Figure 6. Installation of P38 Encoders on Stage IGV Through Stage 5
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1411 00
Figure 7. Encoder Mounting Locations and VSV Angles
(3) Install arm locator onto second vane in either direction from the four vane positions
listed in figure 7, table 1.
(4) Install encoder over post locator. Engage slots in encoder with tangs of tang adapter.
Simultaneously, engage encoder arm with pin on arm locator.
(5) Measure stator vane angles per step G.
F. Install encoders on stages 3 through 5 vanes as follows (figures 6 and 7):
CAUTION
Use safety wire to ensure stator vane does not drop into stator case
when retaining nut is removed.
(1) Remove stator vane arm retaining nuts at locations where encoders will be installed.
(2) Secure stator vane arm with nut. Tighten nut finger-tight.
(3) Install tang adapter over vane arm. Tighten setscrew to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of
torque.
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1411 00
(4) Install post locator and arm locator.
(5) Install encoder over post locator. Engage slot in encoder with tang of tang adapter.
Simultaneously, engage arm of encoder with arm locator pin.
(6) Measure stator vane angles per step G.
G. Measure stator vane angles as follows:
WARNING
and fittings.
(1) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VSV system to full
open and full closed positions several times. System shall operate smoothly through
entire range of travel in both directions.
closed position. Pushrods shall be positioned for maximum clearance to actuation rings
and actuator lever arms. Record average of encoder readouts. The average reading shall
be between upper and lower limits listed in figure 7, table 2.
open position. Pushrods shall be positioned for maximum clearance to actuation rings
and actuator lever arms. Record average of encoder readouts. The average reading shall
be between upper and lower limits listed on figure 7, table 2.
NOTE
Rod end adjustment must be equal within one-half thread on both sides
of the engine.
(4) Adjust rod ends to obtain required angles at both open and closed positions.
(5) Check clevis assemblies for proper engagement of rod end bearing threads by attempting
to insert No. 56 drill (0.55 inch [1.4 mm] diameter) through witness hole at each end of
clevis assembly. Drill shall not pass through.
(6) Tighten jamnuts to 60-70 lb in. (6.8-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire jamnuts.
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1411 00
CAUTION
Ensure stator vane does not drop into stator case when retaining nut
is removed.
(7) Remove encoders, post locators, tang adapter, arm locator, and retaining nut. Install sta-
tor vane arm retaining nuts. Replace any nut when run-on torque falls below 5 lb in.
(0.6 N·m) or exceeds 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m) of torque. Tighten nuts to 85-95 lb in.
H. Verify full travel of VSV actuator per paragraph 10.
10. Variable Stator Vane Actuator Full Travel Verification.
WARNING
and fittings.
A. Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VSV system to full open and
full closed positions several times. System shall operate smoothly through entire range of
travel in both directions.
NOTE
VSV position indication is read at indicator on control panel. Control

panel must be powered up to read VSV position indication.
B. Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VSV system to full closed
position. VSV position indicator shall indicate 0 ± 1 percent.
C. Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VSV system to full open
position. VSV position indicator shall indicate 100 ± 1 percent.
Change 5 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1411 00
11. Hydraulic Actuator Unit, 1C3569, Removal.
See figure 2.
CAUTION
A. Disconnect hydraulic actuator unit. Remove reducers.
B. Connect head tube to HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
C. Connect rod tube to HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
16 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1412 00
5
WP 1412 00
WORK PACKAGE
VARIABLE STATOR VANE (VSV)
STAGES 3 TO 5 BUSHING REPLACEMENT
(HIGH-BOSS HPC STATOR CASE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PD HIGH-BOSS CASE HPC STATOR


1 - 16 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
HPC Stages 3 to 5 Bushing Replacement ................................................................................... 5
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1412 00
1. Introduction.
This work package provides instruction for replacement of high-boss case stages 3 to 5 high pres-
sure compressor (HPC) variable stator vane (VSV) bushings on engine while engine is installed
in the package.
Title Number
Maintenance Considerations Chapter II
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Actuator Component WP 1410 00
Replacement
Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and Clamping SWP 1913 02
Engine Assembly External Tubing, Harnesses, and Clamping SWP 1913 04
Gas Turbine External Inspection (Visual) WP 4012 00
Variable Stator Vane Off-Schedule Inspection WP 4028 00

Tool Set, Jackscrew 1C9150G02
Fixture Set, VSV Torque Measuring 1C9408G02
Fixture, Retention, HPC Variable Stator 1C9412P01
Vane
Wrench, VSV Locknut Torque Break 1C9428G01
Wrench, VSV Spacer Spanner 2C6647G01
Handle, Stator Vane Tang Extension Local Manufacture
Pull Scale, 0-50 lb Local Purchase
Pliers, Soft Jaw Local Purchase
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1412 00
Anti-Seize Compound Milk of Magnesia
(Unflavored)
(Black or Blue)
(R297P04 ALT)
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) Fed Spec SS-S-736
Thread Lubricant GP460
NOTE
Quantities below are for complete change for all three stages.
Smaller quantities are required if individual bushing changes are
accomplished.

Bushing, Vane Actuation (Stg 3 and 4) 1704M66P05 92
Bushing, Vane Actuation (Stg 3 and 4 - 1704M68P09 02
above splitline, left side)
Bushing, Vane Actuation (Stg 3 and 4 - 2nd 1704M68P05 02
above splitline, left side)
Bushing, Vane Actuation (Stg 5) 1704M66P06 56
Bushing, Vane Actuation (Stg 5 - above 1704M68P10 01
splitline, left side)
Bushing, Vane Actuation (Stg 5 - 2nd above 1704M68P06 01
splitline, left side)
Sleeve, Actuation Ring (Stg 3, 4, and 5) 9146M80P03 AR
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1412 00
6. Recommended Material.
NOTE
• Quantities expressed below are the maximum required for a com-

plete change. Quantity actually required will vary depending on
severity of bushing wear.
• If self-locking bolts, PN 1855M35P06 or P07, are installed in

bushings, it is recommended to replace them with current
bolts, 1855M35P08.
Quantity per Quantity

Nomenclature Part Number Engine Recommended
Bolt, Machine, Self-Locking 1855M35P08 305 AR
Bolt, Machine J644P04F 3 AR
Jamnut AN316C4R 154 AR
Nut, Self-Locking J574P02D 154 AR
Sleeve, Compressor Stator 1704M61P03 154 AR
Spacer (Stg 3 and 4) 1704M62P04 96 AR
Spacer (Stg 5) 1704M62P05 58 AR
Arm, Vane Actuation, Stg 3 1704M63G07 42 AR
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1412 00
7. HPC Stages 3 to 5 Bushing Replacement.
A. Before disassembly, inspect VSV actuation system for problems per applicable section of
WP 4012 00 and IGV to stage 5 stator vanes for off-schedule condition per WP 4028 00.
Obtain vane retention fixture, 1C9412, or locally manufacture vane tang extension handle
per figure 1.
B. Perform the following:
(1) Remove any interfering tubing or electrical cables per appropriate work packages
(SWP 1913 02 and SWP 1913 04).
(2) Remove VSV actuation lever arms per WP 1410 00.
(3) Remove VSV connecting links as follows:
(a) Using marking pen, mark stage number on connecting links to be removed.
(b) Remove bolts, washers, and lineup pin from stages 3 and 4 connecting links and
remove links from actuation rings. Retain sleeves, if not damaged, for reinstallation.
(c) Remove bolts from stage 5 connecting links and remove links from actuation rings.
Retain sleeves, if not damaged, for reinstallation.
1
Figure 1. Locally Manufactured Vane Tang Extension Handle
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1412 00
C. Remove any safety cable or safety wire from all bushings to be replaced. Ensure that all
safety-cable/safety-wire pieces are removed from VSV area to prevent binding in rotating
elements and to prevent any cable or wire from entering the HPC flowpath (FOD risk).
D. Starting at left horizontal splitline (ALF) and working clockwise, number all bushings using
marking pen.
NOTE
In the event that bushings are replaced randomly, i.e., not a complete
stage is replaced, new bushings should be marked, using the shallow
vibropeen method, on the aft facing edge with the number of engine
hours at time of replacement. This will aid in identifying replaced
bushings and determining length of bushing service.
E. Starting at bushing marked number 1, remove bushings as follows (figure 2):

2
NOTE
It is recommended that the vane assemblies be disassembled and reas-

sembled one at a time to ensure that reusable parts are not mixed. If
more than one vane assembly is to be disassembled at a time, care
must be taken to ensure that reusable parts are placed on the same
vane assembly from which they were removed.
(1) Note direction of V scribed in end of vane tang. Ensure apex of each V is pointing
forward.
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1412 00
Figure 2. High-Boss Stages 3 to 5 Configuration
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1412 00
CAUTION
• Extreme caution must be used when disassembling vane bush-

ings. Once the bushing is removed, the vane may be easily
dropped or rotated in the case. This may cause damage to the
vane which would necessitate replacement. Care must be taken
to maintain control of the vane at all times while the bushing and
attaching hardware are removed, to avoid vane damage and need
to remove HPCS top case.
• Movement of the HPC rotor even in small increments during

bushing removal may cause irreparable damage to the vane and
scoring of the rotor surface. Extreme caution shall be taken to
ensure that the rotor does not turn during this procedure.
(2) Loosen locknut (1) with torque break wrench, 1C9428, and channel lock pliers
(figure 3). If torque break wrench, 1C9428, is not available, use standard socket or
wrench to loosen nut. Provide countertorque on lever arm body using soft jaw pliers.
Remove locknut and lever arm (2, figure 2). Inspect lever arm for serviceability per
WP 4012 00, table 8. Remove actuation ring sleeve (10) from actuation ring (11).
3
Figure 3. Locknut Removal Tool (High-Boss)
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1412 00
CAUTION
When using a screwdriver to hold vane in position, do not apply

excessive force on vane or damage to vane will occur. A nonmetallic
contact surface is recommended.
NOTE
When removing bushings from upper case or lower case near split line,
use step (3). When removing bushings from the lower case, use
step (4).
(3) Remove bushings (6) from upper case as follows:
(a) Hold vane (9) with spacer spanner wrench, 2C6647. Break torque on jamnut (3).
Remove wrench.
(b) Ensuring vane (9) does not turn, install vane retention fixture, 1C9412, or locally
manufactured tool onto end of vane stem.
(c) Insert small blade-tipped screwdriver under spacer (5). Gently lift spacer and align-
ment sleeve (4) while slowly sliding screwdriver in until it contacts vane stem.
Apply gentle force against the vane stem to hold vane (9) in case. Remove vane
retention fixture or locally manufactured tool.
(d) While still maintaining force on vane stem with screwdriver, remove jamnut (3),
alignment sleeve (4), and spacer (5).
(e) Reinstall vane retention fixture on vane stem and remove screwdriver.
(4) Remove bushings (6) from lower case as follows:
(a) Hold vane (9) with spacer spanner wrench, 2C6647. Break torque on jamnut (3).
Remove wrench.
(b) Remove jamnut (3), alignment sleeve (4), and spacer (5).
(c) Ensuring vane (9) does not turn, install vane retention fixture, 1C9412, or locally
manufactured fixture onto end of vane stem.
(5) Examine bushings (6) and securing bolts (7) to ensure that bolts are clamping bushing in
place. If bushings are loose, threaded holes in case must be examined to determine if
repair is needed.
(6) Remove bolts (7) securing bushings (6) to case.
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1412 00
(7) Remove bushings (6) from case. Bushings next to the borescope ports do not have jack-
screw holes: use a nylon drift and small screwdriver to loosen, as required.
(8) If installed, remove and discard preformed packing (8). Packing will not be reinstalled at
assembly.
F. Clean HPC case in area of bushings, taking care to ensure that no material enters the
HPC case. Remove all preformed packing residue and inspect HPC case for damage per
WP 4012 00.
G. Inspect threaded holes in high-boss case (12). Ensure internal threads are not damaged.
H. Inspect vane tang and threaded stem for damage.
I. Install bushings (6) in case as follows (figure 2):
(1) Install bushing (6) into high-boss case (12).
CAUTION
The bolts, J644, are non-self-locking bolts and must be safety-wired

or bolts may vibrate loose.
NOTE
There are 3 bolts, J644P04F, indicated in the parts list (paragraph 6).
These bolts are to be used, one per stage, in one of the bushings adja-
cent to the borescope plug. This bolt is configured with a safety-wire
hole and is to be used to safety-wire the borescope plug in position.
(2) Visually check for evidence of locking feature on bolts (7). Lightly coat threads and
seating surfaces of bolts with thread lubricant.
(a) Install self-locking bolts by hand into case. If bolts can be run into case without
stopping, self-locking feature is not adequate. Replace bolt with new bolt.
(b) If bolthole condition does not allow any self-locking fastener to engage locking fea-
ture, remove adjacent self-locking bolt and install two non-self-locking bolts so they
may be safety-wired or safety-cabled together.
(3) Secure bushing (6) with two bolts (7), 1855M35P08 or J644P04F. Install bolts by hand
into case. Maximum installation torque of bolts is not to exceed 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m).
Tighten bolts to 85-105 lb in. (9.6-11.9 N·m) of torque. Install non-self-locking bolts at
borescope locations. Safety-wire or safety-cable bolts to adjacent borescope plug.
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1412 00
CAUTION
When using a screwdriver to hold vane in position, do not apply

excessive force on vane or damage to vane will occur. A nonmetallic
contact surface is recommended.
NOTE
When installing spacer (5), alignment sleeve (4), and jamnut (3) in
upper case or lower case near split line, use step (3). When installa-
tion is in lower case, use step (4).
(4) Install spacer (5), alignment sleeve (4), and jamnut (3) into upper case as follows:
(a) Using small blade tipped screwdriver, apply gentle force against vane stem to hold
vane (9) in position.
(b) Ensuring vane (9) does not turn, remove vane retention fixture.
(c) Install spacer (5) and alignment sleeve (4) onto vane (9). Flat on alignment sleeve
faces forward.
(d) Install jamnut (3) onto vane (9).
(e) Remove screwdriver.
(f) Install spacer spanner wrench, 2C6647, or soft jaw pliers over spacer (5) to hold
vane (9).
(g) Tighten jamnut (3) to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque. Replace jamnut if run-on
torque exceeds 20 lb in. (2.3 N·m).
(h) Remove wrench or pliers.
(5) Install spacer (5), alignment sleeve (4), and jamnut (3) into lower case as follows:
(a) Ensuring vane does not turn, remove vane retention fixture.
(b) Install spacer (5) and alignment sleeve (4) onto vane (9). Flat on alignment sleeve
faces forward.
(c) Install jamnut (3) onto vane (9).
(d) Install spacer spanner wrench, 2C6647, over spacer to hold vane.
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1412 00
(e) Tighten jamnut (3) to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque. Replace jamnut if run-on
torque exceeds 20 lb in. (2.3 N·m).
(f) Remove wrench.
CAUTION
Ensure that all stages 3-5 stator vanes have the letter V marked at
top of vane stem. Apex of V shall point forward. Failure to comply
may result in serious engine or part damage.
NOTE
A 0.0 lb in. (0.0 N·m) torque limit implies that vane can rotate with a
minimum force applied. However, it is important to ensure that the
vane assembly is not loose after assembly as a result of a spacer that is
too thin. Vane assembly should be tight and should not rattle or dem-
onstrate any looseness.
(6) Reset torque wrench to 10 lb in. (1.1 N·m). Manually rotate vane (9) several times to
ensure vane is seated. Ensure vane rotational torque is within range of 0 to 10 lb in.
(0.0 to 1.1 N·m). Replace spacer (5) as required to obtain proper rotational torque. A
thinner spacer will reduce rotational torque. A thicker spacer will increase rotational
torque. Record rotational torque.
(7) Small changes to vane rotational torque may be accomplished by lapping spacer (5) face,
using a figure eight motion to remove material. Final surface finish shall match original.
(8) Install new actuation ring sleeve (10) into actuation ring (11).
(9) Install lever arm (2) onto vane (9). Flat on lever arm faces forward. Insert pin end of
lever arm into actuation ring sleeve.
(10) Install locknut (1) onto vane (9) by hand. If nuts can be run onto vane without stopping,
self-locking feature is not adequate. Replace nut with new nut. Tighten locknut to
50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque. Take care when torquing nut to prevent lever arm
damage.
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1412 00
J. Once all bushings in a stage have been replaced, perform actuation ring pull check as follows:
NOTE
There are two methods for performing the actuation ring pull check.
The first uses the torque measuring fixture set, 1C9408, and the other
uses a pull scale. Perform only the paragraphs that correspond with
the method used.
(1) Using torque measuring fixture set, 1C9408, perform pull check on stages 3-5 as
follows:
(a) Remove parts from vane near center of actuation ring per figure 4.
(b) Remove sleeve from actuation ring.
(c) Install dummy lever arm, locator plug, and drive adapter from fixture set, 1C9408.
(d) Tighten locator plug to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(e) Measure torque required to move actuation ring +5 degrees from axial position per
figure 5. On stages 3 and 4, torque required shall not exceed 140 lb in. (15.8 N·m).
On stage 5, torque required shall not exceed 204 lb in. (23.0 N·m).
(2) Perform pull check using a pull scale as follows:
(a) Install slave bolt into actuation ring connecting link bolthole.
(b) Attach pull scale to slave bolt.
(c) Measure force required to move actuation ring +5 degrees from axial position per
figure 5. Multiply reading by the following scale factors to obtain torque:
Stage Scale Factor

3 2.18 in. (55.4 mm)
4 1.92 in. (48.8 mm)
5 1.20 in. (30.5 mm)
5
4
(d) On stages 3 and 4, torque required shall not exceed 140 lb in. (15.8 N·m). On
stage 5, torque required shall not exceed 204 lb in. (23.0 N·m).
(3) Actuate each stage by hand, through complete open and closed mechanical travel. Each
stage shall move freely with no catching or binding.
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1412 00
Figure 4. VSV Actuation Ring Pull Check
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1412 00
Figure 5. VSV Actuation Ring Travel
(4) If pull check requirements are not met, perform the following:
(a) Check actuation ring spacer clearance per figure 6. Adjust as required.
6
(b) Check for vane binding at casing bore. Correct as required.
(c) Check recorded rotational torques for individual vanes per step I.(6). Replace or
rework spacers on vanes with high torques per step I.(6) and (7).
(d) Repeat steps as necessary to bring torque values into range required. If the require-
ments cannot be met, contact GE Engineering Support for further direction.
K. Reassemble VSV actuating ring connecting links as follows:
(1) Install sleeves into connecting link ID. Ensure connecting link is correct for stage being
installed.
(2) Position connecting link onto actuation rings, ensuring FWD marking faces forward.
Install stage 3 and 4 lineup pins, ensuring lever arm pins engage sleeves.
Change 5 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1412 00
Figure 6. Actuation Ring Spacer Clearance
(3) Install bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire or
safety-cable.
(4) Ensure that all lever arm pins are engaged in sleeves and not engaged with connecting
link lightening holes.
L. Reinstall actuation levers per WP 1410 00.
M. Reconnect all piping and electrical connections per appropriate work packages.
16 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
4WP 1510 00
WORK PACKAGE
FUEL SYSTEM REPLACEMENT


1 - 39 ...... 4
40 Blank . . . . . . 4
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Acoustic Baffles and Fuel Nozzle Plugs Installation.................................................................. 10

Acoustic Baffles and Fuel Nozzle Plugs Removal...................................................................... 8
Fuel Hose Assembly Installation ................................................................................................ 4
Fuel Hose Assembly Removal .................................................................................................... 4
Fuel Nozzle Installation .............................................................................................................. 12
Fuel Nozzle Removal .................................................................................................................. 10
Staging Valves Installation.......................................................................................................... 13
Staging Valves Removal.............................................................................................................. 12
Tubular Fuel Manifold Installation ............................................................................................. 25
Tubular Fuel Manifold Removal ................................................................................................. 14
Change 4 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
1. Introduction.
This work package provides instructions for the removal and installation of the tubular fuel man-
ifold used on LM6000 engines. Instructions for the removal and installation of associated fuel
system components is covered as well. Reference kit 682L268.
Title Number
Dual Fuel Manifold Support Fixture Replacement WP 3015 00

Tool, Remove/Install - Fuel Nozzle 1C9427G01
Support Fixture, Fuel System, 1C9621G01
Tubular Manifold
Lubricating Oil MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I)
(Black or Blue)
Safety Wire (0.020 inch) R297P02
Tape Local Purchase
2 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00

Gasket L54659P01 5
Gasket, Seal Flange J1215P17 or 11
J219P05 ALT
Seal, Case Hose L42604P01 or 30
L42604P02 ALT
Seal, Fuel Nozzle L47618P01 30
Seal, Manifold Valve L42602P01 or 11
L42602P02 ALT
Seal, Plug, Fuel Nozzle L47494P01 30
Change 4 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
6. Fuel Hose Assembly Removal.
A. Remove fuel hose assembly as follows:
CAUTION
Cover open fuel manifold and premixer ports immediately after
removal of each fuel hose assembly to prevent engine contamination.
(1) Disconnect fuel hose assembly from fuel manifolds (figure 1) as follows:
1
NOTE
Even numbered fuel nozzles are connected to enhanced lean blow out
(ELBO) manifold, odd numbered fuel nozzles are connected to
C-manifold.
(a) If connected, loosen B-nut that secures fuel hose onto ELBO manifold. Disconnect
fuel hose from fuel manifold.
(b) If connected, loosen B-nut that secures fuel hose onto C-manifold. Disconnect fuel
hose from fuel manifold.
(c) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel hose onto A-manifold. Disconnect fuel hose. Discon-
nect fuel hose from fuel manifold.
(d) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel hose onto B-manifold. Disconnect fuel hose from
manifold.
(2) Remove bolts that secure fuel hose assembly plate to fuel nozzle. Remove fuel hose
assemblies.
(3) Remove and discard gasket.
(4) Cover open fuel nozzle port with tape.
(5) Repeat steps (1) through (4) to remove as many fuel hose assemblies as required to per-
form maintenance.
7. Fuel Hose Assembly Installation.
A. Install fuel hose assemblies onto odd number fuel nozzle pads as follows:
(1) Remove tape from fuel nozzle port.
(2) Install gasket between fuel hose assembly plate and fuel nozzle.
4 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
Figure 1. Fuel Hose and Fuel Nozzle Replacement
Change 4 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
(3) Lightly coat four bolt threads and contact faces with thread lubricant.
CAUTION
• Excessive torque on one bolt will result in fuel hose pad improp-
erly seating onto fuel nozzle.
• Improper seating of fuel hose will result in fuel leakage during

engine operation.
• Do not exceed 15 lb in. (1.7 N·m) of torque during seating of

hose assembly plate onto fuel nozzle or distortion of fuel nozzle
may occur.
(4) Using crisscross pattern, run down four bolts and seat fuel hose assembly onto fuel
nozzle. Use minimum torque.
(5) Connect fuel hose to ELBO manifold as follows:
(a) Lightly coat B-nut fitting on ELBO manifold with thread lubricant.
WARNING

(b) Slide B-nut back on aft most fuel hose. Lubricate ferrule with lubricating oil.
(c) Install B-nut hand-tight onto ELBO manifold.
(6) Connect fuel hose to A-manifold as follows:
(a) Lightly coat B-nut fitting on A-manifold with thread lubricant.
WARNING
(b) Slide B-nut back on middle fuel hose. Lubricate ferrule with lubricating oil.
(c) Install B-nut hand-tight onto A-manifold.
6 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
(7) Connect fuel hose to B-manifold as follows:
(a) Lightly coat B-nut fitting onto B-manifold with thread lubricant.
WARNING
(b) Slide B-nut back on forward most fuel hose. Lubricate ferrule with lubricating oil.
(c) Install B-nut hand-tight onto B-manifold.
B. Install fuel hose assemblies onto even number fuel nozzle pads as follows:
(1) Install hose assembly plate onto fuel nozzle per steps A.(1) through A.(4).
(2) Connect fuel hose to C-manifold as follows:
(a) Lightly coat B-nut fitting on C-manifold with thread lubricant.
WARNING

(b) Slide B-nut back on aft most fuel hose. Lubricate ferrule with lubricating oil.
(c) Install B-nut hand-tight onto C-manifold.
(3) Install fuel hoses onto A- and B-manifold per steps A.(6) and A.(7).
C. After all fuel hose assemblies that were removed have been reinstalled, perform following
steps:
(1) Final tighten bolts that secure fuel hose assembly plate to fuel nozzle as follows:
(a) Using crisscross pattern, tighten four bolts to 100 lb in. (11.3 N·m) of torque.
(b) Using crisscross pattern, tighten four bolts to 20 lb ft (27 N·m) of torque.
(c) Using alternating sequence, apply final torque of 33 lb ft (45 N·m) of torque.
Change 4 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
(d) Verify final torque of 33 lb ft (45 N·m) of torque has been applied to four bolts.
(e) Safety-wire four bolts at fuel nozzle.
CAUTION
Ensure alignment stripe on flex fuel hose is not twisted, or prema-
ture hose fail may occur.
(2) Final tighten B-nuts that secure fuel hoses to manifolds to 500 lb in. (56.5 N·m) of
torque.
8. Acoustic Baffles and Fuel Nozzle Plugs Removal.
NOTE
There are 12 acoustic baffles (three different lengths) and 10 fuel

nozzle plugs.
A. Remove acoustic baffle and/or fuel nozzle plug as follows:
NOTE
There are 30 fuel nozzle ports located in compressor rear frame

(CRF).
(1) Starting at 12:00 o'clock position, indexing clockwise (aft looking forward), number
acoustic baffles, fuel nozzle plugs, and fuel nozzle ports (figure 2).
NOTE
Various brackets shall require removal with fuel nozzle plugs. Ensure
brackets are tagged for location and orientation prior to removal.
(2) If required, remove bolts that secure bracket to fuel nozzle plug. Attach tag that notes
location and orientation onto bracket. Remove brackets.
CAUTION
Cover open fuel nozzle port immediately after removal of each
acoustic baffle or fuel nozzle plug to prevent engine contamination.
(3) Remove bolts and spacers that secure acoustic baffle or fuel nozzle plug to fuel nozzle.
Remove acoustic baffle or fuel nozzle plug. Inspect gasket and replace if required. Cover
fuel nozzle port with tape.
2
8 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
Figure 2. Acoustic Baffles and Fuel Nozzle Plug Locations
Change 4 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
(4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) to remove as many acoustic baffles and/or fuel nozzle plugs
as required to perform maintenance.
9. Acoustic Baffles and Fuel Nozzle Plugs Installation.
A. Install acoustic baffles and fuel nozzle plugs as follows:
(1) Apply thread lubricant to threads and faces of bolts that secure acoustic baffles and fuel
nozzle plugs to fuel nozzle.
(2) Remove tape from fuel nozzle port. Install gasket onto fuel nozzle.
(3) Install correct acoustic baffle or fuel nozzle plug onto correct fuel nozzle (figure 2).
(4) Using four short bolts without spacers (at four corners), secure fuel nozzle plug or
acoustic baffle to fuel nozzle port. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(5) Using two long bolts with spacers (at sides), secure fuel nozzle plug or acoustic baffle to
fuel nozzle port. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(6) Using crisscross pattern, incrementally tighten bolts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of
torque and safety-wire.
(7) Reinstall any brackets that were removed. Safety-wire bolts and remove tags.
(8) Repeat steps (1) through (7) to reinstall all acoustic baffles and/or fuel nozzle plugs that
were removed to perform maintenance.
10. Fuel Nozzle Removal.
A. Remove fuel nozzle as follows:
(1) Start at 12:00 o'clock position. Moving clockwise (aft looking forward), use marker to
number fuel nozzles on CRF from 1 to 30 (figure 2).
(2) Remove fuel hose assembly per paragraph 6.
(3) Remove acoustic baffle and/or fuel nozzle plug per paragraph 8.
(4) Using four capscrews, install fuel nozzle removal/installation tool, 1C9427, onto fuel
nozzle (figure 3).
3
10 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
Figure 3. Fuel Nozzle Removal/Installation Tool, 1C9427
CAUTION
Cover open CRF port immediately after removal of each fuel nozzle
to prevent engine contamination.
(5) Remove remaining four bolts and spacers that secure fuel nozzle to CRF.
(6) Remove fuel nozzle from CRF.
(7) Inspect gasket, replace if required.
(8) Using tape, cover CRF port.
(9) Remove fuel nozzle removal/installation tool, 1C9427, from fuel nozzle.
(10) Repeat steps (1) through (9), as required, to perform required maintenance.
Change 4 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
11. Fuel Nozzle Installation.
A. Install fuel nozzle as follows:
nozzle.
(2) Apply thread lubricant to threads and faces of bolts that secure fuel nozzle to CRF.
(3) Remove tape from CRF port.
(4) Install gasket onto fuel nozzle.
CAUTION
• Use care when installing fuel nozzles. Do not force fuel nozzles
into position, or damage could result.
• Install 3-cup fuel nozzles into even number CRF ports and 2-cup
fuel nozzles into odd number CRF ports, or damage could result.
(5) Install fuel nozzle into CRF port.
(6) Using four bolts and spacers, attach fuel nozzle to CRF.
(7) Using crisscross pattern, incrementally tighten bolts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of
(8) Remove fuel nozzle removal/installation tool, 1C9427, from fuel nozzle.
(9) Reinstall removed fuel nozzles per steps (1) through (8).
(10) Install removed fuel nozzles plugs and/or acoustic baffles per paragraph 9.
(11) Install removed fuel hose assemblies per paragraph 7.
12. Staging Valves Removal.
A. Remove staging valve from valve rack bracket as follows:
WARNING

(1) Loosen and disconnect electrical harness connector from staging valve connector.
12 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
(2) Remove four bolts and nuts that secure staging valve to fuel manifold adapter plate.
(3) Remove and discard gasket.
(4) Remove staging valve from bracket.
(5) Cover adapter plate port with tape.
13. Staging Valves Installation.
A. Install staging valve onto valve rack bracket (figure 1) as follows:
(1) Remove tape from adapter plate on valve rack bracket.
(2) Lightly coat bolt threads and contact faces and nut contact faces with thread lubricant.
(3) Install gasket onto staging valve.
NOTE
• All staging valves installed on valve rack brackets have electrical

connectors pointing forward.
• Staging valve installed on bracket connected to B-manifold and

ELBO assembly has electrical connector pointing aft.
(4) Place staging valve onto adapter plate.
(5) Using four bolts and nuts, secure staging valve to fuel port. Tighten bolts to hand-tight.
(6) Tighten bolts in a crisscross sequence to 54 lb in. (6.1 N·m).
(7) Tighten bolts in a crisscross sequence to 11 lb ft (15 N·m).
(8) Tighten bolts in a crisscross sequence to 18 lb ft (24 N·m).
(9) Perform final tightening check in a clockwise bolt to bolt sequence. Ensure bolts are
torqued to 18 lb ft (24 N·m).
Change 4 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
WARNING

B. Connect staging valve to electrical harness as follows:
(1) Engage electrical harness connector onto staging valve connector.
(2) Turn knurled coupling ring while wiggling backshell of electrical connector.
(3) Fully seat electrical harness connector by hand.
(4) Using Teflon-jawed pliers, final tighten electrical harness connector to 1/4 to 1/2 turn
past hand-tight.
(5) Check tightness by wiggling connector backshell. No movement shall occur.
14. Tubular Fuel Manifold Removal.
A. Secure all fuel and electrical connections to fuel system per packager’s manual.
B. Install tubular manifold fuel system support fixture, 1C9621, per WP 3015 00.
C. Remove enclosure fuel manifold supports per packager’s manual.
D. Remove electrical harnesses from valve rack brackets as follows:
WARNING

(1) Disconnect electrical harness connector from staging valve.
(2) Remove loop clamps and bolts that secure electrical harness to valve rack bracket.
(3) Remove four screws (6, figure 4) and self-locking nuts (7) that secure electrical harness
connector to harness support brackets (5 and 8).
(4) Remove electrical harness from valve rack bracket.

4
E. Remove staging valves per paragraph 12.
14 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
Figure 4. Manifold Assembly-Aft View (Sheet 1 of 3)
Change 4 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
16 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
Change 4 17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
F. Remove fuel hoses as follows:
(1) Remove fuel hoses from B-manifold, ELBO assembly, C-manifold, and A-manifold per
paragraph 6.
(2) If desired, remove fuel hose assembly from fuel nozzle per paragraph 6.
G. Remove plate adapters as follows:
(1) Remove four bolts (26, figure 4, sheet 3) that secure two fuel tubes to adapter plate (25).
(2) Remove four bolts (2) that secure adapter plate (25) to valve rack brackets (1 and 9).
Remove adapter plate.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for 10 other locations.
H. Remove A-manifold fuel tubes (1, figure 5) as follows:

5
(1) Remove four bolts (2) and self-locking nuts (3) that secure fuel tube (5) to A-manifold.
Remove fuel tube (5) and discard gasket (4).
Remove fuel tube and discard gasket (4).
(6) Remove eight bolts (11) and self-locking nuts (12) that secure fuel tube (14) to fuel
tube (6).
(7) Remove U-bolts (13, figure 6) and self-locking nuts (7) that secure fuel tubes (6 and 14,
figure 5) to brackets at three locations.
(8) Remove fuel tubes (6 and 14) and discard gasket (13).
6
I. Remove C-manifold fuel tubes as follows:
(1) Remove four bolts (2, figure 7) and self-locking nuts (3) that secure fuel tube (5) to
C-manifold. Remove fuel tube (5) and discard gasket (4).
18 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
Figure 5. A-Manifold
Change 4 19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
Figure 6. Fuel Manifold-Forward Side (Sheet 1 of 2)
20 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00

7
(2) Remove four bolts (2) and self-locking nuts (3) that secure fuel tube (9) to C-manifold.
(6) Remove eight bolts (12) and self-locking nuts (13) that secure fuel tube (8) to fuel
tube (16).
(7) Remove U-bolts and self-locking nuts that secure fuel tubes (8 and 16) to brackets at
three locations.
J. Remove bolts (1, figure 6) that secure brackets (2, 3, 4, and 5) to valve rack brackets (6 and
16). Remove brackets.
Change 4 21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
Figure 7. C-Manifold
22 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
K. Remove A-manifold as follows:
(1) Remove bolts (9, figure 5) and self-locking nuts (10) that secure A-manifold fuel
tube (1) at 12:30 o’clock position.
(2) Remove bolts (9) and self-locking nuts (10) that secure A-manifold fuel tube (1) at 2:30
o’clock position.
o’clock position.
o’clock position.
o’clock position.
(6) Remove bolts (12, figure 4) that secure loop clamps (11) to brackets (7 locations).
(7) Remove A-manifold fuel tubes (1, figure 5) from brackets.
L. Remove C-manifold as follows:
(1) Remove bolts (6, figure 7) and self-locking nut (7) that secure C-manifold fuel tube (1)
at 2:00 o’clock position.
(2) Remove bolts (6) and self-locking nuts (7) that secure C-manifold fuel tube (1) at 4:00
o’clock position.
o’clock position.
o’clock position.
o’clock position.
(7) Remove C-manifold fuel tubes (1, figure 7) from brackets.
M. Remove ELBO assembly as follows:
(1) Remove fuel tube (17, figure 8) from ELBO assembly and B-manifold.
Change 4 23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
8
Figure 8. ELBO Assembly
24 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
(2) Remove bolts (8) and self-locking nuts (9) that secure fuel tubes (6 and 15) from ELBO
assembly and B-manifold.
(3) Remove self-locking nuts (4) and U-bolts (3) that secure brackets (5) to ELBO assembly
and B-manifold. Remove brackets and attached fuels hoses and discard gaskets (7).
(4) Disconnect ELBO assembly fuel tube (1) from ELBO assembly fuel tube (16).
(8) Remove ELBO assembly fuel tubes.
N. Remove U-bolts (18) and self-locking nuts (16) that secure brackets (10 and 19) to B-mani-
fold (17). Remove brackets.
O. Remove B-manifold as follows:
(1) Remove eight bolts (3, figure 9) and self-locking nuts (5) that secure fuel tubes (6 and 9).
9
(2) Remove eight bolts (3) and self-locking nuts (5) that secure fuel tubes (6 and 8).
(3) Remove fuel tube (6) and discard gaskets (4).
(5) Remove six bolts (2) that secure valve rack bracket (1) to fuel tube (9). Remove fuel tube
and discard gasket (4).
(6) Remove six bolts (2) that secure valve rack bracket (1) to fuel tube (8). Remove fuel
tube.
P. Remove valve rack brackets as follows:
(1) Remove eight capscrews (3, figure 10), flat washers (4), and self-locking nuts (5) that
secure two valve rack brackets (1) to valve rack support (2). Remove valve rack brackets.
10
15. Tubular Fuel Manifold Installation.
A. If not previously accomplished, install tubular manifold fuel system support fixture, 1C9621,
per WP 3015 00.
Change 4 25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
Figure 9. B-Manifold
26 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
Figure 10. Valve Rack Bracket
Change 4 27

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
B. Install valve rack brackets (1, figure 10) onto tubular manifold fuel system support fixture,
1C9621, as follows:
(1) Align valve rack brackets (1) with valve rack supports (2).
(2) Install eight capscrews (3), heads down with flat washers (4) under heads, through valve
rack brackets (1) and valve rack supports (2).
(3) Using eight self-locking nuts (5) secure valve rack bracket (1) to valve rack support (2).
Tighten self-locking nuts to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
C. Install B-manifold as follows:
NOTE
Ensure bracket tabs on fuel tubes point forward.
(1) Align fuel tube (6, figure 9) with aft rail of valve rack bracket (1).
(2) Install new gaskets (4) onto fuel tube (6) flanges at 4:00 and 8:00 o'clock positions.
(3) Using six bolts (2), install fuel tube (8) onto valve rack bracket (1). Tighten bolts hand-
tight.
(4) Using eight bolts (3), boltheads up, and self-locking nuts (5), secure fuel tube (8) onto
fuel tube (6). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(5) Install new gasket (4) onto fuel tube (8) flange at 12:00 o'clock position.
(7) Using eight bolts (3), boltheads right (aft looking forward), and self-locking nuts (5),
secure fuel tube (9) onto fuel tube (8). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(8) Using six bolts (2), install fuel tube (9) onto valve rack bracket (1). Tighten bolts hand-
tight.
CAUTION
Ensure gasket is properly centered between fuel tube flanges prior to

applying final torque, or fuel leakage may occur.
(9) Tighten bolts (3) at each fuel tube flange as follows:
(a) Using crisscross pattern, tighten bolts (3) to 100 lb in. (11.3 N·m) of torque.
28 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
(b) Using crisscross pattern, tighten bolts (3) to 250 lb in. (28.2 N·m) of torque.
(c) Using crisscross pattern, tighten bolts (3) to 375 lb in. (42.4 N·m) of torque.
(10) Tighten bolts (2) to 65 lb in. (7.3 N·m) of torque.
(11) If removed, install cap (7) onto fuel tube (6). Tighten cap to 145 lb in. (16.4 N·m) of
torque.
(12) If removed, install bracket (5, figure 8) as follows:
(a) Position bracket (5) onto B-manifold (2).
NOTE
Tab of bracket faces radially outward, flat part up.
(b) Lightly coat U-bolt (3) threads with thread lubricant.
(c) Using two U-bolts (3) and self-locking nuts (4), secure bracket (5) onto B-manifold
(2). Tighten self-locking nuts hand-tight.
(13) If removed, install adapter plate (19) onto bracket (5) as follows:
(a) Lightly coat bolt threads with thread lubricant.
(b) Using four bolts, secure adapter plate (19) to bracket. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(c) Install preformed packings onto fuel tubes (6 and 15).
(d) Position fuel tube (6) to inboard port of adapter plate (19).
(e) Using two bolts, secure fuel tube (6) to adapter plate. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(f) Position fuel tube (15) to outboard port of adapter plate (19).
(g) Using two bolts, secure fuel tube (15) to adapter plate (19). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
D. Using two bolts, install harness support bracket (8, figure 4) onto lower left (aft looking for-
ward) corner of aft side of valve rack bracket (9). Tighten bolts to 65 lb in. (7.3 N·m) of
torque.
E. Using two bolts, install harness support bracket (5) onto lower right (aft looking forward)
corner of aft side of valve rack bracket (1). Tighten bolts to 65 lb in. (7.3 N·m) of torque.
Change 4 29

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
F. Using U-bolt (18) and self-locking nuts (16), attach bracket (10) to B-manifold (17) at 5:30
o’clock position. Tighten self-locking nuts hand-tight.
G. Install ELBO assembly to fuel manifold as follows:
(1) Position ELBO assembly fuel tube (18, figure 8) onto ELBO assembly fuel tube (1).
(2) Secure ELBO assembly fuel tube (1) to ELBO assembly fuel tube (18). Tighten connec-
tors hand-tight.
(3) Position ELBO assembly fuel tube (16) onto ELBO assembly fuel tubes (1 and 18).
(4) Position ELBO assembly fuel tubes (1 and 18) onto forward side of B-manifold (2).
(5) Using two loop clamps (11, figure 4), loops forward, and bolts (12), secure ELBO
assembly (15) to B-manifold brackets (two places, section K-K). Tighten bolts hand-
tight.
(6) Secure ELBO assembly fuel tube (18, figure 8) to ELBO assembly fuel tubes (1 and 18).
Tighten connectors hand-tight.
(7) Using loop clamp (11, figure 4), loop outward, and bolt (12), secure ELBO assembly
(15) to bracket (10) at 5:30 o’clock position. Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(8) Install new gasket (7, figure 8) between fuel tube (6) and B-manifold (2). Using four
bolts (8), boltheads down, and self-locking nuts (9), secure fuel tube to B-manifold.
Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(9) Install new gasket (7) between fuel tube (15) and ELBO assembly fuel tube (16). Using
four bolts (8), boltheads down, and self-locking nuts (9), secure fuel tube to ELBO
assembly fuel tube. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(10) If removed, Install tube clamp (14) onto ELBO assembly fuel tube (16). Tighten tube cap
to 500 lb in. (56.5 N·m) of torque.
(11) Install fuel tube (17) as follows:
(a) Lightly lubricate B-nut fitting on B-manifold (2) and ELBO assembly with thread
lubricant.
(b) Slide B-nuts on fuel tube (17) radially inward.
30 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
WARNING

(c) Using lubricating oil, lightly lubricate fuel tube (17) ferrule to nut mate faces.
(d) Install fuel tube onto ELBO assembly fuel tube (18) and B-manifold. Tighten B-nuts
hand-tight.
H. Assemble C-manifold (10) as follows:
(1) Using bolts (6, figure 7) and self-locking nuts (7), join two C-manifold fuel tubes (1).
(2) Position C-manifold fuel tubes (1) from 9:30 to 2:00 o’clock position.
(3) Using loop clamp (11, figure 4, section K-K), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure C-manifold
(14) to B-manifold (17) support bracket at 10:00 o’clock position. Tighten bolt hand-
tight.
(4) Using loop clamp (11), loop inward, and bolt (12), secure C-manifold (14) to B-manifold
(17) support bracket at 1:30 o’clock position. Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(5) Using bolts (6, figure 7) and self-locking nuts (7), install C-manifold fuel tube (1) sec-
tion onto C-manifold at 2:00 o’clock position. Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(6) Using bolts (6) and self-locking nuts (7), install C-manifold fuel tube (1) section onto
C-manifold at 9:30 o’clock position. Tighten bolt hand-tight.
C-manifold at 4:00 and 9:30 o’clock positions. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(8) Using loop clamp (11, figure 4, section J-J), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure C-manifold
I. Assemble A-manifold as follows:
(1) Using bolts (9, figure 5) and self-locking nuts (10), join two A-manifold fuel tubes (1).
(2) Position A-manifold section from 9:30 to 2:00 o’clock position.
Change 4 31

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
(3) Using loop clamp (11, figure 4, section K-K), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure A-manifold
(13) to B-manifold (17) support bracket at 1:30 position. Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(4) Using loop clamp (11), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure A-manifold (13) to B-manifold
(17) support bracket at 10:00 o’clock position. Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(5) Using bolts (9, figure 5) and self-locking nuts (10), install A-manifold fuel tube (1) sec-
tion onto A-manifold at 2:00 o’clock position. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(6) Using bolts (9) and self-locking nuts (10), install A-manifold fuel tube (1) section onto
A-manifold at 9:30 o’clock position. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
A-manifold at 4:00 and 9:30 o’clock positions. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(8) Using loop clamp (11, figure 4, section J-J), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure A-manifold
J. Install brackets (10) onto fuel manifolds as follows:
(1) Using U-bolt (18) and two self-locking nuts (16), secure brackets (10) onto B-manifold
(17) at 3:00, 7:30, and 9:30 o’clock positions. Tighten nuts hand-tight.
(2) Using loop clamp (11), loop outward, and bolt (12), secure ELBO assembly (15) to
bracket (10) at 3:00, 7:30, and 9:30 o’clock positions. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(3) Using loop clamp (11), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure C-manifold (14) to bracket (10) at
3:00, 7:30, and 9:30 o’clock positions. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(4) Using loop clamp (11), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure A-manifold (13) to bracket (10) at
3:00, 7:30, and 9:30 o’clock positions. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
K. If removed, install 10 adapter plates (25) onto valve racket bracket (1 and 9) as follows:
(1) Lightly coat bolt (2) threads with thread lubricant.
(2) Position adapter bracket (25) onto valve rack bracket (1 or 9).
(3) Using four bolts (2), secure adapter plate (25) onto valve rack bracket (1 or 9). Tighten
bolts hand-tight.
L. Install C-manifold supply tubes as follows:
(1) Install three preformed packings onto fuel tube (8, figure 7).
32 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
(2) Lightly coat bolt (26, figure 4) threads with thread lubricant.
(3) Using six bolts (26) secure fuel tube (8, figure 7) to three adapter plates (25, figure 4).
(5) Using two bolts (1), secure brackets (4 and 5) onto valve rack bracket (16). Tighten bolts
(6) Using U-bolt (15) and self-locking nuts (7), secure fuel tube (12) to bracket (4). Tighten
self-locking nuts hand-tight.
(10) Secure fuel tube (8, figure 7) to fuel tube (16) as follows:
(a) Install new gasket (14) between fuel tube (16) and fuel tube (8).
(b) Lightly coat bolt (12) threads with thread lubricant.
(c) Using eight bolts (12) and self-locking nuts (13), secure fuel tube (8) to fuel
tube (16). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(12) Using two bolts (1), secure brackets (2 and 3) onto valve rack bracket (6). Tighten bolts
(13) Using U-bolt (9) and self-locking nuts (7), secure fuel tube (12) to bracket (2). Tighten
self-locking nuts hand-tight.
(14) Tighten eight bolts (12, figure 7) as follows:
CAUTION

(a) Using crisscross pattern, tighten eight bolts (12) to 100 lb in. (11.3 N·m) of torque.
Change 4 33

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
(b) Using crisscross pattern, tighten eight bolts (12) to 250 lb in. (28.2 N·m) of torque.
(c) Using alternating sequence, apply final torque of 375 lb in. (42.4 N·m) of torque.
(d) Verify final torque of 375 lb in. (42.4 N·m) of torque has been applied to eight bolts
(15) If required, install tube cap (15) onto fuel tube (16). Tighten cap to 145 lb in. (16.4 N·m)
of torque.
(16) Using thread lubricant, lightly lubricate bolt (26, figure 4) threads.
(17) Install preformed packings onto fuel tubes (5, 9, 11, 18, and 19, figure 7).
(18) Position fuel tube (5) into adapter plate. Route fuel tube towards 12:00 o'clock position.
Secure using two bolts (26, figure 4). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(19) Position fuel tube (9, figure 7) into adapter plate. Route fuel tube towards 6:00 o'clock
position. Secure using two bolts (26, figure 4). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(23) Install new gaskets (4, figure 7) between C-manifold fuel tube (1) flanges and fuel tubes
(5, 9, 11, 18, and 19) flanges.
(25) Using four bolts (2), boltheads radially inward, and self-locking nuts (3), secure
C-manifold fuel tube (1) to fuel tube (5). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
34 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
M. Install A-manifold supply tubes as follows:
(4) Using U-bolt (13, figure 6) and self-locking nuts (7), secure fuel tube (12) to bracket (5).
Tighten self-locking nuts hand-tight.
(7) Using six bolts (26) secure fuel tube (14, figure 5) to three adapter plates (25,
figure 4). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(8) Secure fuel tube (14, figure 5) to fuel tube (6) as follows:
(c) Using eight bolts (11) and self-locking nuts (12), secure fuel tube (14) to fuel tube
(6). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(9) Using U-bolt (9, figure 6) and self-locking nuts (7), secure fuel tube (8) to bracket (3).
(10) Tighten eight bolts (11, figure 5) as follows:
CAUTION

(a) Using crisscross pattern, tighten eight bolts (11) to 100 lb in. (11.3 N·m) of torque.
(b) Using crisscross pattern, tighten eight bolts (11) to 250 lb in. (28.2 N·m) of torque.
(c) Using alternating sequence, apply final torque of 375 lb in. (42.4 N·m) of torque.
Change 4 35

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
(d) Verify final torque of 375 lb in. (42.4 N·m) of torque has been applied to eight
bolts (11).
(11) If required, install tube cap (19) onto fuel tube (6). Tighten tube cap to 145 lb in.
(16.4 N·m) of torque.
(15) Position fuel tube (7, figure 5) into adapter plate (25, figure 4). Route fuel tube towards
6:00 o'clock position. Secure using two bolts (26). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(19) Install new gaskets (4, figure 5) between A-manifold fuel tube (1) flanges and fuel tubes
(5, 7, 15, 17, and 18) flanges.
A-manifold fuel tube (1) sections to fuel tube (5). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
36 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
N. Install bracket (19, figure 4, section H-H) as follows:
(1) Using U-bolt (18) and self-locking nuts (16), secure bracket (19) to B-manifold (17).
(2) Using loop clamp (11), loop outward, and bolt (12), secure ELBO assembly (15) to
bracket (19). Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(3) Using loop clamp (11), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure C-manifold (14) to bracket (19).
Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(4) Using loop clamp (11), loop aft, and bolt (15), secure A-manifold (13) to bracket (19).
Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(5) Using U-bolt (21) and self-locking nuts (24), secure bracket (19) to fuel tube (22).
(6) Using U-bolt (23) and self-locking nuts (24), secure bracket (19) to fuel tube (22).
O. If required, install fuel hoses to fuel nozzles per paragraph 7.
P. Install fuel hoses onto manifolds per paragraph 7.
Q. Apply final torque to fuel system components as follows:
(1) Tighten bolts (26) that secure fuel tubes to adapter plates (25) on valve rack brackets
(1 and 9) to 65 in lb. (7.3 N·m) of torque.
(2) Tighten ELBO assembly as follows:
(a) Tighten bolts (12) on ELBO assembly (15) loop clamps (11) to 65 lb in. (7.3 N·m)
of torque.
(b) Tighten bolts (8) to 65 lb in. (7.3 N·m) of torque.
(c) Tighten fuel tube (17) B-nuts to 500 lb in. (56.5 N·m) of torque.
(3) Tighten C-manifold as follows:
(a) Tighten bolts (12, figure 4) on C-manifold (14) loop clamps (11) to 65 lb in.
(b) Tighten bolts (6, figure 7) to 65 lb in. (7.3 N·m) of torque.
Change 4 37

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1510 00
(c) Tighten bolts (2) to 65 lb in. (7.3 N·m) of torque.
(4) Tighten A-manifold as follows:
(a) Tighten bolts (12, figure 4) on A-manifold (13) loop clamps (11) to 65 lb in.
(c) Tighten bolts (2) to 65 lb in. (7.3 N·m) of torque.
(5) Tighten B-manifold as follows:
(a) Tighten all self-locking nuts that secure U-bolts to 65 lb in. (7.3 N·m) of torque.
(c) Tighten fuel tube (17) B-nuts to 500 lb in. (56.5 N·m) of torque.
(6) Tighten bolts (26, figure 4) that secure fuel tubes to adapter plates (25) on valve rack
brackets (1 and 9) to 65 in lb. (7.3 N·m) of torque.
(7) Tighten U-bolts as follows:
(a) Tighten self-locking nuts (24) that secure U-bolts (21 and 23) to 65 lb in. (7.3 N·m)
of torque.
(b) Tighten self-locking nuts (7, figure 6) that secure U-bolts (9, 11, 13, and 15) to
65 lb in. (7.3 N·m) of torque.
R. Install staging valves per paragraph 13.
S. Install left (aft looking forward) electrical harnesses as follows:
(1) Install electrical harness connector into harness support bracket (8, figure 4) on lower
left corner of aft side of valve rack bracket (9).
(2) Position connector keyway at 12:00 o'clock position.
(3) Using four screws (6) and self-locking nuts (7), secure electrical harness connector to
harness support bracket (5).
(4) Route electrical harness to staging valves (3) on valve rack bracket (9).
38 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1510 00
WARNING

(5) Attach electrical harness to staging valves per paragraph 13.
(6) Using three loop clamps and bolts, secure electrical harness to valve ladder rack. Tighten
bolts to 65 lb in. (7.3 N·m) of torque.
(7) Connect electrical harness to staging valves per paragraph 13.
T. Install right (aft looking forward) electrical harnesses as follows:
(1) Install electrical harness connector into harness support bracket (5) on lower right corner
of aft side of valve rack bracket (1).
(3) Using four screws (6) and self-locking nuts (7), secure electrical harness connector to
harness support bracket (5).
(4) Route electrical harness to staging valves (3) on valve rack bracket (1) and on
B-manifold bracket.
(5) Attach electrical harness to staging valves per paragraph 13.
(6) Using four loop clamps and bolts, secure electrical harness to valve ladder rack. Tighten
bolts to 65 lb in. (7.3 N·m) of torque.
(7) Connect electrical harness to staging valves per paragraph 13.
U. Install enclosure fuel manifold supports per packager's manual.
V. Remove tubular manifold fuel system support fixture, 1C9621, per WP 3015 00.
W. Make all fuel and electrical connections to fuel system per packager's manual.

40 Blank Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
4WP 1511 00
WORK PACKAGE
DUAL FUEL SYSTEM REPLACEMENT


1 - 89 ...... 4
90 Blank . . . . . . 4
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Acoustic Baffles and Fuel Nozzle Plugs Installation.................................................................. 16

Acoustic Baffles and Fuel Nozzle Plugs Removal...................................................................... 16
Fuel Nozzle Installation .............................................................................................................. 21
Fuel Nozzle Removal .................................................................................................................. 19
Fuel Hose Assembly Installation ................................................................................................ 56
Fuel Hose Assembly Removal .................................................................................................... 56
Gas Staging Valves Installation................................................................................................... 60
Gas Staging Valves Removal ...................................................................................................... 60
Liquid Fuel Manifold Fuel Tube Installation.............................................................................. 11
Liquid Fuel Manifold Fuel Tube Removal.................................................................................. 4
Liquid Fuel Staging Valve Fuel Supply and Purge Tubes Installation........................................ 30
Liquid Fuel Staging Valve Fuel Supply and Purge Tubes Removal ........................................... 22
Liquid Fuel Staging Valve Installation........................................................................................ 35
Change 4 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
Liquid Fuel Staging Valve Removal............................................................................................ 35

Tubular Fuel Manifold Installation.............................................................................................. 47
Tubular Fuel Manifold Removal ................................................................................................. 39
Tubular Gas Fuel Manifold Installation....................................................................................... 75
Tubular Gas Fuel Manifold Removal .......................................................................................... 66
1. Introduction.
This work package provides instructions for the removal and installation of the dual fuel mani-
folds used on LM6000 engines. Instructions for the removal and installation of associated fuel
system components are covered as well. Reference kit 682L261.
Title Number

Tool, Removal/Installation, Fuel Nozzle 1C9427G01
Fixture, Support-Dual Fuel Manifold 1C9621G02
Lubricating Oil MIL-PRF-23699F
(C/I)
(Black or Blue)
Tape Local Purchase
2 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00

Gasket L54659P01 5
Gasket, Seal - Flange J1215P17 or 11
J219P05 ALT
Seal, Case Hose L42604P01 or 30
L42604P02 ALT
Seal, Fuel Nozzle L47618P01 30
Seal, Manifold Valve L42602P01 or 11
L42602P02 ALT
Seal Ring, Metal 4058T39P04 6
Seal Ring, Metal C L52068P01 60
Change 4 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
6. Liquid Fuel Manifold Fuel Tube Removal.
WARNING
• Fuel in liquid, vapor, or mist form is flammable, irritating to
the skin and respiratory tract, and poisonous in the digestive
tract. Remove saturated clothing, wash skin well, don't swal-
low liquid, and don't breathe mist or vapor.
• Fuel system is pressurized. Use care to prevent injury when

disconnecting lines.
A. Disconnect fuel tubes from liquid fuel manifolds (figure 1) as follows:
CAUTION
Cover open fuel manifold and fuel nozzle nipples immediately after
removal of each fuel tube to prevent engine contamination.
(1) Disconnect fuel tubes (1) located at upper B-manifold (2) or lower B-manifold (3) as
follows:
(a) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel tube (1, Section B-B) onto upper B-manifold (2) or
lower B-manifold (3).
(b) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel tube (1) onto fuel nozzle (19) nipple.
(c) Remove fuel tube (1).

1
(2) Disconnect fuel tubes (4) located at upper A-4 manifold (5) and lower A-4 manifold (6)
as follows:
(a) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel tube (4, Section C-C) onto upper A-4 manifold (5) or
lower A-4 manifold (6).
(3) Disconnect fuel tubes (7) located at upper A-3 manifold (8) and lower A-3 manifold (9)
as follows:
(a) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel tube (7, Section D-D) onto upper A-3 manifold (8) or
lower A-3 manifold (9).
4 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Figure 1. Liquid Fuel Manifold Fuel Tube Replacement (Sheet 1 of 5)
Change 4 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
6 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Change 4 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
8 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Change 4 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(4) Disconnect fuel tubes (10) located at upper A-2 manifold (11) and lower A-2
manifold (12) as follows:
(a) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel tube (10, Section E-E) onto upper A-2 manifold (11)
or lower A-2 manifold (12).
CAUTION
Cover open fuel manifold and fuel nozzle nipples immediately after
removal of each fuel tube to prevent engine contamination.
(5) Disconnect fuel tubes (13) located at upper A-1 manifold (14) or lower A-1
manifold (15) as follows:
(a) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel tube (13, Section F-F) onto upper A-1 manifold (14)
or lower A-1 manifold (15).
(6) Disconnect fuel tubes (16) located at upper C-manifold (17) or lower C-manifold (18) as
follows:
(a) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel tube (16, Section G-G) onto upper C-manifold (17)
or lower C-manifold (18).
B. Cover open fuel nozzle and fuel manifold nipples with tape.
C. Repeat steps A. through B. to remove as many fuel tubes as required to perform maintenance.
10 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
7. Liquid Fuel Manifold Fuel Tube Installation.
A. Remove tape from fuel nozzle and fuel manifold nipples.
B. Using tape, start at 12:00 o’clock position, indexing clockwise (CW), forward looking aft
(FLA), number each fuel nozzle (19, figure 1) 1 through 30. The No. 1 fuel nozzle is just CW
of 12:00 o’clock position, FLA.
C. Lightly coat fuel nozzle nipples with thread lubricant.
D. Install upper C-manifold (17) fuel tubes as follows:
WARNING
(1) Lubricate B-nut threads and ferrules of fuel tube (16) with lubricating oil.
(2) Install straight end of each fuel tube (16, Section G-G) onto most CW nipple port, FLA,
odd number fuel nozzles No. 1, 3, 5, 23, 25, 27, and 29. Tighten B-nut finger-tight.
(3) Lightly coat upper C-manifold (17) nipple threads with thread lubricant.
(4) Connect remaining end of each fuel tube (16) onto upper C-manifold (17). Tighten B-nut
finger-tight.
(5) Triple torque B-nuts as follows:
(a) Tighten B-nut hand-tight plus 30 degree rotation (1/2 of flat on B-nut).
(b) Loosen B-nut 1/4 to 1/2 turn.
(c) Tighten B-nut hand-tight plus 30 degree rotation (1/2 of flat on B-nut).
(d) Loosen B-nut 1/4 to 1/2 turn.
(e) Tighten B-nut hand-tight plus 30 degree rotation (1/2 of flat on B-nut).
E. Install lower C-manifold (18) fuel tubes as follows:
Change 4 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(2) Install straight end of each fuel tube (16) onto most CW nipple port, FLA, odd number
fuel nozzles No. 7 through No. 21. Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
(3) Lightly coat lower C-manifold (18) nipple threads with thread lubricant.
(4) Connect remaining end of each fuel tube (16) onto lower C-manifold (18). Tighten
B-nuts finger-tight.
(5) Triple torque B-nuts per substep D.(5).
F. Install upper A-1 manifold (14) fuel tubes as follows:
WARNING
(2) Install straight end of each fuel tube (13, Section F-F) onto center nipple port, FLA, fuel
nozzles No. 4, No. 5, and No. 27. Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
(3) Lightly coat upper A-1 manifold (14) nipple threads with thread lubricant.
(4) Connect remaining end of each fuel tube (13) onto upper A-1 manifold (14). Tighten
G. Install lower A-1 manifold (15) fuel tubes as follows:
(2) Install straight end of each fuel tube (13) onto center nipple port, FLA, fuel nozzles
No. 12, No. 19, and No. 20. Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
(3) Lightly coat lower A-1 manifold (15) nipple threads with thread lubricant.
(4) Connect remaining end of each fuel tube (13) onto lower A-1 manifold (15). Tighten
B-nut finger-tight.
12 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
H. Install upper A-2 manifold (11) fuel tubes as follows:
(2) Install straight end of each fuel tube (10, Section E-E) onto center nipple port (FLA),
fuel nozzles No. 6, No. 26, and No. 28. Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
I. Install lower A-2 manifold (12) fuel tubes as follows:
WARNING

No. 11, No. 13, and No. 21. Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
J. Install upper A-3 manifold (8) fuel tubes as follows:
(2) Install straight end of each fuel tube (7, Section D-D) onto center nipple port, FLA, fuel
nozzles No. 3, No. 7, No. 25 and No. 29. Tighten B-nut finger-tight.
Change 4 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
K. Install lower A-3 manifold (9) fuel tubes as follows:
No. 10, No. 14, No. 18, and No. 22. Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
L. Install upper A-4 manifold (5) fuel tubes as follows:
WARNING

(2) Install straight end of each fuel tube (4, Section C-C) onto center nipple port, FLA, fuel
nozzles No. 1, No. 2, No. 23, No. 24, and No. 30. Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
M. Install lower A-4 manifold (6) fuel tubes as follows:
(2) Install straight end of each fuel tube (4) onto center nipple port, FLA, fuel nozzles No. 8,
No. 9, No. 15, No. 16, and No. 17. Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
14 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00

N. Install upper B-manifold (2) fuel tubes as follows:
(2) Install straight end of each fuel tube (1, Section B-B) onto least CW nipple port, FLA,
fuel nozzles No. 23 through No. 30 and No. 1 through No. 7. Tighten B-nuts
finger-tight.
(3) Lightly coat upper B-manifold (2) nipple threads with thread lubricant.
(4) Connect remaining end of each fuel tube (1) onto upper B-manifold (2). Tighten B-nuts
finger-tight.
O. Install lower B-manifold (3) fuel tubes as follows:
WARNING

(2) Install straight end of each fuel tube (1) onto least CW nipple port, FLA, fuel nozzles
No. 8 through No. 22. Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
(3) Lightly coat lower B-manifold (3) nipple threads with thread lubricant.
(4) Connect remaining end of each fuel tube (1) onto lower B-manifold (3). Tighten B-nuts
finger-tight.
Change 4 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
8. Acoustic Baffles and Fuel Nozzle Plugs Removal.
NOTE
• There are 20 acoustic baffles (three different lengths) and 10 fuel

nozzle plugs.
• There are 30 fuel nozzle ports located in compressor rear frame

(CRF).
A. Starting at 12:00 o’clock position, use approved yellow tape and number each acoustic baffle,
fuel nozzle plug, and fuel nozzle port (figure 2) indexing CW (FLA).
2
NOTE
Various brackets shall require removal with fuel nozzle plugs. Ensure
brackets are tagged for location and orientation prior to removal.
B. If required, remove bolts that secure bracket onto fuel nozzle plug (6). Matchmark and attach
tag that notes location and orientation onto bracket. Remove brackets.
C. Remove four bolts (8, View A), fuel hose assembly (9), and hose seal (10).
CAUTION
Cover open fuel nozzle port immediately after removal of each

acoustic baffle or fuel nozzle plug to prevent engine contamination.
D. Remove bolts (1 and 2) that secure acoustic baffle (3, 4, or 5) or fuel nozzle plug (6) onto
fuel nozzle (7). Remove acoustic baffle or fuel nozzle plug. Remove and discard metal seal
rings (11). Cover fuel nozzle port with tape.
E. Repeat steps A. through D. to remove remaining acoustic baffles and/or fuel nozzle plugs as
required.
9. Acoustic Baffles and Fuel Nozzle Plugs Installation.
A. Apply thread lubricant onto threads and face of bolts that secure acoustic baffles (3, 4, or 5,
figure 2, View A) or fuel nozzle (6) plugs onto fuel nozzle (7).
B. Remove tape from fuel nozzle port. Install new metal seal rings (11) onto fuel nozzle.
C. Install correct acoustic baffle (3, 4, or 5) or fuel nozzle plug (6) onto correct fuel nozzle.
D. Using two short bolts (1), secure fuel nozzle plug (6) or acoustic baffle (3, 4, or 5) onto fuel
nozzle port. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
16 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Figure 2. Acoustic Baffles and Fuel Nozzle Plug Locations (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 4 17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
Figure 2. Acoustic Baffles and Fuel Nozzle Plug Locations (Sheet 2 of 2)
18 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
E. Using two long bolts (2), secure fuel nozzle plug (6) or acoustic baffle (3, 4, or 5) onto fuel
nozzle port. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
F. Using crisscross pattern, incrementally tighten bolts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of
G. Secure hose seal (10) and fuel hose assembly (9) onto fuel nozzle (7) using four bolts (8).
Tighten bolts to 200-221 lb in. (22.6-25.0 N·m) of torque.
H. Reinstall any brackets that were removed. Safety-wire bolts and remove tags.
I. Repeat steps A. through H. to reinstall all acoustic baffles and/or fuel nozzle plugs that were
removed to perform maintenance.
10. Fuel Nozzle Removal.
A. Starting at 12:00 o'clock position, number fuel nozzles (1 and 2, figure 3) on CRF from 1 to
30 with marker, indexing CW (FLA).
3
B. Remove liquid fuel manifold fuel tubes per paragraph 6.
C. Remove fuel hose assembly, hose seal, acoustic baffle, and/or fuel nozzle plug per
paragraph 8.
D. Install fuel nozzle removal/installation tool, 1C9427, onto fuel nozzle and secure with four
capscrews (figure 4).
4
CAUTION
Cover open CRF port immediately after removal of each fuel nozzle
to prevent engine contamination.
E. Remove remaining four bolts (12, figure 2, View A) and spacers (13) that secure fuel
nozzle (7) onto CRF (14).
F. Remove fuel nozzle (7) from CRF (14).
G. Remove and discard fuel nozzle seal (15).
H. Using tape, cover CRF port.
I. Remove fuel nozzle removal/installation tool, 1C9427, from fuel nozzle.
J. Repeat steps A. through I., as required, to perform required maintenance.
Change 4 19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
Figure 3. Fuel Nozzle Removal/Installation
20 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Figure 4. Fuel Nozzle Removal/Installation Tool, 1C9427
11. Fuel Nozzle Installation.
A. Install fuel nozzle as follows:
nozzle (figure 4).
(2) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and face of bolts (12, figure 2, View A) that secure
fuel nozzle (7) onto CRF (14).
(3) Remove tape from CRF (14) port.
(4) Install new fuel nozzle seal (15) onto fuel nozzle (7).
Change 4 21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
CAUTION
• Use care when installing fuel nozzles. Do not force fuel nozzles
into position, or damage could result.
• Install 3-cup fuel nozzles into odd number CRF ports and 2-cup
fuel nozzles into even number CRF ports, or damage could
result.
(5) Install fuel nozzle (7) into CRF (14) port.
(6) Using four bolts (12) and spacers (13), attach fuel nozzle (7) onto CRF (14).
(7) Using crisscross pattern, incrementally tighten bolts (12) to 210-230 lb in.
(23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
(8) Remove fuel nozzle removal/installation tool (figure 4), 1C9427,from fuel nozzle.
(9) Reinstall remaining removed fuel nozzles per steps (1) through (8).
(10) Install new fuel nozzle seal and removed fuel hose assembly, fuel nozzle plugs, and/or
acoustic baffles per paragraph 9.
(11) Install removed liquid fuel manifold tubes per paragraph 7.
12. Liquid Fuel Staging Valve Fuel Supply and Purge Tubes Removal.
WARNING
• Fuel in liquid, vapor, or mist form is flammable, irritating to

the skin and respiratory tract, and poisonous in the digestive
tract. Remove saturated clothing, wash skin well, don't swal-
low liquid, and don't breathe mist or vapor.
• Fuel system is pressurized. Use care to prevent injury when

disconnecting lines.
A. Remove liquid fuel staging valve fuel supply tubes as follows:
(1) Remove fuel supply manifold (1, figure 5) as follows:
(a) Loosen bolt (2) that secures clamp (3) onto fuel supply manifold (1). Remove bolt
and clamp.
5
22 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Figure 5. Liquid Fuel Staging Valve Fuel Supply Tube Replacement (Sheet 1 of 3)
Change 4 23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
24 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Change 4 25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(b) Loosen four B-nuts that secure fuel supply manifold (1) onto forward ports of liquid
fuel staging valves (23, 25, 27, and 29) on underside of staging valve support tray
(21).
CAUTION
Cover open staging valve fittings immediately after removal of each

fuel tube to prevent engine contamination.
(c) Remove fuel supply manifold (1).
(2) Remove fuel purge manifold (4) as follows:
(a) Loosen bolt (6) that secures clamp (5) onto fuel purge manifold (4). Remove bolt
and clamp.
(b) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel purge manifold (4) onto forward port of liquid fuel
staging valve (31) on underside of staging valve support tray (21).
(c) Remove fuel purge manifold (4).
(3) Remove fuel supply tube (7) as follows:
(a) Loosen bolt (6, Detail A) that secures clamp (19) onto forward face of liquid fuel
staging valve rack support bracket. Remove bolt and clamp.
(b) Remove nut (32, Detail B), bolt (33), and clamps (34 and 35).
(c) Remove nut (36, Detail C), bolt (37), and clamps (38 and 39).
(d) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel supply tube (7) onto aft port of liquid fuel staging
valve (31) on underside of staging valve support tray (21).
(e) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel supply tube (7) onto lower C-manifold (18, figure 1).
WARNING

(f) Disconnect electrical connector (40, figure 5) from fuel supply tube (7).
26 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
CAUTION

(g) Remove fuel supply tube (7).
(a) Loosen bolt (6, Detail A) that secures clamp (19) onto forward face of staging valve
support tray. Remove bolt and clamp.
(b) Remove nut (36, Detail C), bolt (37), and clamp (38).
(c) Remove nut (41), bolt (42), and clamps (43 and 44).
(d) Loosen B-nuts that secure fuel supply tube (8) onto aft ports on liquid fuel staging
valves (29 and 30).
(e) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel supply tube (8) onto lower A-2 manifold
(12, figure 1) at 6:00 o’clock position.
(f) Disconnect electrical connector (40, figure 5) from fuel supply tube (8).
(g) Remove fuel supply tube (8).
support tray (21). Remove bolt and clamp.
(b) Remove nut (41, Detail C), bolt (42), and clamp (43).
(c) Loosen B-nuts that secure fuel supply tube (9) onto aft ports on liquid fuel staging
valves (27 and 28).
(d) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel supply tube (9) onto lower A-4 manifold (6, figure 1)
(e) Disconnect electrical connector (40, figure 5) from fuel supply tube (9).
(f) Remove fuel supply tube (9).
Change 4 27

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
support tray (21). Remove bolt and clamp
(b) Remove nut (45, Detail D), bolt (46), and clamp (47). Remove split bushing (48).
(c) Remove nut (49, Detail E), bolt (50), and clamp (51).
(d) Remove nut (52, Detail F), bolt (53), and clamps (54 and 55).
(e) Loosen B-nuts that secure fuel supply tube (10) onto aft ports on liquid fuel staging
valves (22 and 23).
(f) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel supply tube (10) onto lower A-1 manifold
WARNING

(g) Disconnect electrical connector (40, figure 5) from fuel supply tube (10).
CAUTION

(h) Remove fuel supply tube (10).
(b) Remove nut (52, Detail F), bolt (53), and clamp (54).
(c) Loosen B-nuts that secure fuel supply tube (11) onto aft ports on liquid fuel staging
valves (24 and 25).
(d) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel supply tube (11) onto lower A-3 manifold (9,
figure 1) at 6:00 o’clock position.
(e) Disconnect electrical connector (40, figure 5) from fuel supply tube (11).
28 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(f) Remove fuel supply tube (11).
(b) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel supply tube (12) onto aft port on liquid fuel staging
valve (26).
(c) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel supply tube (12) onto lower B-manifold (3, figure 1)
WARNING
(d) Disconnect electrical connector (40, figure 5) from fuel supply tube (12).
CAUTION

(e) Remove fuel supply tube (12).
(9) Remove fuel purge tube (13) as follows:
(a) Loosen bolt (14) that secures clamp (15) onto bracket (16). Remove bolt and clamp.
(b) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel purge tube (13) onto forward port on liquid fuel
staging valve (26).
(c) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel purge tube (13) onto liquid fuel supply.
(d) Remove fuel purge tube (13).
(10) Remove fuel purge manifold (17) as follows:
(a) Loosen bolts (18) that secure clamps (19) onto brackets (20). Remove bolts and
clamps.
(b) Loosen four B-nuts that secure fuel purge manifold (17) onto forward ports of liquid
fuel staging valves (22, 24, 28, and 30).
Change 4 29

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(c) Remove fuel purge manifold (17).
13. Liquid Fuel Staging Valve Fuel Supply and Purge Tubes Installation.
A. Install liquid fuel staging valve fuel tubes as follows (figure 5):
(1) Install fuel purge manifold (17) as follows:
WARNING
(a) Lubricate B-nut threads and ferrules of fuel purge manifold (17) with lubricating oil.
(b) Tighten four B-nuts that secure fuel purge manifold (17) onto forward ports of liquid
fuel staging valves (22, 24, 28, and 30) finger-tight.
(c) Using bolts (18) and clamps (19) loops aft and tabs up, secure fuel purge manifold
(17) onto brackets (20). Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(2) Install fuel purge tube (13) as follows:
(a) Lubricate B-nut threads and ferrules of fuel purge tube (13) with lubricating oil.
(b) Tighten B-nut that secures fuel purge tube (13) onto forward port of liquid fuel stag-
ing valve (26) on staging valve support tray (21) finger-tight. Route remaining end
of fuel purge tube (13) forward.
(c) Using bolt (14) and clamp (15), loop left (FLA), secure fuel purge tube (13) onto
bracket (16). Tighten bolt finger-tight.
(3) Install fuel supply tube (12) as follows:
(a) Lubricate B-nut threads and ferrules of fuel supply tube (12) with lubricating oil.
(b) Install short leg B-nut that secures fuel supply tube (12) onto aft port on liquid fuel
staging valve (26) on staging valve support tray (21). Route remaining end of fuel
supply tube (12) forward and up over staging valves.
(c) Install remaining B-nut that secures fuel supply tube (12) onto lower B-manifold
30 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(d) Install clamp (19, figure 5, Detail A) around fuel supply tube (12). Secure clamp to
forward face of staging valve support tray (21) using bolt (6). Tighten bolt
finger-tight.
(e) Connect electrical connector (40) onto fuel supply tube (12).
(f) Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
WARNING

(b) Install B-nuts that secure short legs of fuel supply tube (11) onto aft ports on liquid
fuel staging valves (24 and 25) on staging valve support tray (21). Route remaining
end of fuel supply tube (11) forward and up and over staging valves.
(c) Install remaining B-nut that secures fuel supply tube (11) onto lower A-3
manifold (9, figure 1) at 6:00 o’clock position.
(d) Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
(e) Connect electrical connector (40, figure 5) onto fuel supply tube (11).
(f) Install clamp (54, Detail F) around fuel supply tube (11). Secure clamp with
bolt (53) and nut (52). Tighten bolt finger-tight.
(g) Using bolt (6, Detail A) and clamp (19), loop left (FLA), secure fuel supply tube
(11) onto forward face of staging valve support tray (21). Tighten bolt finger-tight.
end of fuel supply tube (10) forward and up and over staging valves.
Change 4 31

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(f) Install clamps (54 and 55, Detail F) around fuel supply tubes (10 and 11) and secure
with bolt (53) and nut (52). Tighten bolt finger-tight.
(g) Install clamp (51, Detail E) around fuel supply tube (10) and secure with bolt (50)
and nut (49). Tighten bolt finger-tight.
(h) Install split bushing (48, Detail D) around fuel supply tube (10). Install clamp (47)
around split bushing and secure with bolt (46) and nut (45). Tighten bolt finger-tight.
(i) Using bolt (6, Detail A) and clamp (19), loop left (FLA), secure fuel supply
tube (10) onto forward face of liquid fuel staging valve support tray (21) between
A3-PRG and A1-STG ports. Tighten bolt finger-tight.
WARNING

end of fuel supply tube (9) forward and up over staging valves.
(c) Install remaining B-nut that secures fuel supply tube (9) onto lower A-4 manifold
(f) Install clamp (43, Detail C) around fuel supply tube (9). Secure clamp with bolt (42)
and nut (41). Tighten bolt finger-tight.
32 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(g) Using bolt (6, Detail A) and clamp (19), loop right (FLA), secure fuel tube (9) onto
forward face of liquid fuel staging valve support tray (21). Tighten bolt finger-tight.
WARNING

end of fuel supply tube (8) forward and up over staging valves.
(f) Install clamps (43 and 44, Detail C) around fuel supply tubes (8 and 9) and secure
(g) Install clamp (38) around fuel supply tube (8). Secure clamp with bolt (37) and
nut (36). Tighten bolt finger-tight.
(h) Using bolt (6, Detail A) and clamp (19), loop right (FLA), secure fuel supply tube
(8) onto forward face of liquid fuel staging valve support tray (21) between A4-PRG
and A2-STG ports. Tighten bolt finger-tight.
(b) Install B-nut that secures short bend end of fuel supply tube (7) onto aft port on liq-
uid fuel staging valve (31) on staging valve support tray (21). Route remaining end
of fuel supply tube (7) forward and up over staging valves.
(c) Install remaining B-nut that secures fuel supply tube (7) onto lower C-manifold
Change 4 33

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(f) Install clamps (38 and 39, Detail C) around fuel supply tubes (7 and 8) and secure
(g) Install clamp (35, Detail B) around fuel supply tube (7) and secure clamps
(34 and 35) with bolt (33) and nut (32). Tighten bolt finger-tight.
(h) Using bolt (6, Detail A) and clamp (19), loop left (FLA), secure fuel supply tube (7)
onto forward face of liquid fuel staging valve support tray (21). Tighten bolt
finger-tight.
(9) Install fuel purge manifold (4) as follows:
WARNING

(a) Lubricate B-nut threads and ferrules of fuel purge manifold (4) with lubricating oil.
(b) Install B-nut that secures fuel purge manifold (4) onto forward port on liquid fuel
staging valve (31) on staging valve support tray (21). Route remaining end of fuel
purge manifold (4) forward.
(c) Tighten B-nut finger-tight.
(d) Using bolt (6) and clamp (5), loop left, (FLA), secure fuel purge manifold (4) onto
underside of bracket. Tighten bolt finger-tight.
(10) Install fuel supply manifold (1) as follows:
(a) Lubricate B-nut threads and ferrules of fuel supply manifold (1) with lubricating oil.
(b) Install four B-nuts that secure fuel supply manifold (1) onto forward ports of liquid
fuel staging valves (23, 25, 27, and 29) on liquid fuel staging valve support tray (21).
(c) Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
(d) Using bolt (2), and clamp (3), loop forward and down, secure fuel supply manifold
(1) onto bracket. Tighten bolt finger-tight.
34 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(11) Tighten bolts on clamps, figure 5, to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(12) Triple torque all fuel supply tubes as follows:
(a) Tighten B-nut hand-tight plus 30 degree rotation (1/2 of flat on B-nut).
(b) Loosen B-nut 1/4 to 1/2 turn.
(c) Tighten B-nut hand-tight plus 30 degree rotation (1/2 of flat on B-nut).
(d) Loosen B-nut 1/4 to 1/2 turn.
(e) Tighten B-nut hand-tight plus 30 degree rotation (1/2 of flat on B-nut).
14. Liquid Fuel Staging Valve Removal.
A. Remove liquid fuel staging valve (20, figure 6) from valve rack bracket as follows:
WARNING

(1) Loosen and disconnect left electrical harness (7) connectors from liquid fuel staging
valve (20) connector.
6
(2) Loosen and disconnect right electrical harness (2) connectors from liquid fuel staging
valve (20) connector.
(3) Remove liquid fuel staging valve (20) fuel supply and purge tubes per paragraph 12.
(4) Remove bolts (19) that secure liquid fuel staging valves (20) onto tray bracket (17).
(5) Remove liquid fuel staging valves (20).
15. Liquid Fuel Staging Valve Installation.
A. Install liquid fuel staging valves (20, figure 6) onto valve rack bracket as follows:
(1) Lightly coat staging valve ports, 2 per valve, with thread lubricant.
(2) Place staging valves (20) onto tray bracket (17) with electrical connector forward.
(3) Using bolts (19), secure staging valves (20) onto tray bracket (17).
Change 4 35

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
Figure 6. Liquid Fuel Staging Valve Electrical Harness Removal/Installation (Sheet 1 of 3)
36 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Change 4 37

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
38 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(4) Tighten bolts (19) as follows:
(a) Tighten bolts in crisscross sequence to 54 lb in. (6.1 N·m).
(b) Tighten bolts in crisscross sequence to 11 lb ft (15 N·m).
(c) Tighten bolts in crisscross sequence to 18 lb ft (24 N·m).
(d) Final tighten in CW bolt-to-bolt sequence to 18 lb ft (24 N·m).
(5) Install liquid fuel staging valve (20) fuel supply and purge tubes per paragraph 13.
B. Connect liquid fuel staging valves electrical harness (2 or 7, figure 6) as follows:
WARNING
(1) Engage electrical harness (2 or 7) connectors onto liquid fuel staging valve (20)
connectors.
(2) Turn knurled coupling rings while wiggling backshells of electrical connectors.
(3) Fully seat electrical harness (2 or 7) connectors by hand.
(4) Using teflon-jawed pliers, final tighten electrical harness connectors 1/4 to 1/2 turn past
hand-tight.
(5) Check tightness by wiggling connector backshells. No movement shall occur.
16. Tubular Fuel Manifold Removal.
A. Secure all fuel and electrical connections onto fuel system per packager's manual.
B. Remove angle support (1, figure 7) as follows:
(1) Remove three bolts (2) and two bolts (3) from angle support (1).
7
(2) Remove bolt (4, Section A-A) that secures center clamp block (5) to angle support (1).
(3) Remove two bolts (6, Section B-B), located at 11:00 and 1:00 o’clock positions, that
secure two center clamps (7) to angle support (1).
(4) Lift angle support (1) and secure away from assembly.
Change 4 39

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
Figure 7. Liquid Fuel Manifold Clamps/Brackets (Sheet 1 of 2)
40 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Figure 7. Liquid Fuel Manifold Clamps/Brackets (Sheet 2 of 2)
Change 4 41

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
C. Install dual fuel manifold support fixture, 1C9621, per WP 3015 00.
D. Remove enclosure fuel manifold supports per packager’s manual.
E. Remove electrical harnesses as follows (figure 6):
WARNING

(1) Loosen bolt (1), securing electrical harness (2) and cushion clamp (3) onto bracket (4)
located on forward side of staging valve tray between A2-STG and A4-PRG ports.
Remove bolt (1) and cushion clamp (3).
(2) Loosen and disconnect electrical harness (2) connectors from liquid fuel staging
valve (20) connectors.
(3) Loosen machine screws (5) and self-locking nuts (6) securing electrical harness (2) onto
bracket (39). Remove machine screws (5) and self-locking nuts (6).
(4) Remove electrical harness (2).
(5) Loosen bolt (1) securing electrical harness (7) and cushion clamp (3) onto bracket (4)
located on forward side of staging valve tray between A3-PRG and A3-STG ports.
Remove bolt and cushion clamp.
(6) Loosen and disconnect electrical harness (7) connectors from liquid fuel staging
valve (20) connectors.
(7) Loosen machine screws (5) and self-locking nuts (6) securing electrical harness (7) onto
bracket (40). Remove machine screws (5) and self-locking nuts (6).
(9) Remove nut (22, Detail A), bolt (23), and clamp (24) from electrical harness (21).
(10) Remove nut (25, Detail B), bolt (26), and clamp (27) from electrical harness (21).
(11) Remove nut (28, Detail C), bolt (29), and clamp (30) from electrical harness (21).
(12) Disconnect electrical connector (32, View G (6 places)) from temperature sensor
(33, Detail D).
42 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(13) Remove machine screws (5) and self-locking nuts (6) that secure electrical harness (21)
onto bracket (39).
F. Remove temperature sensor (33) as follows:
(1) Remove coupling nut (31, Detail D) (six places). Remove and discard metal seal ring
(34, Detail D).
(2) Remove six temperature sensor (33) from fuel tube connection.
G. Remove liquid fuel staging valves per paragraph 14.
H. Remove liquid fuel manifold fuel tubes per paragraph 6.
I. Remove fuel manifold clamps (figure 7) as follows:
(1) Remove four bolts (8 and 9, and bolt (4) Section A-A). Remove clamp blocks (10 and
11), and center clamp block (5).
(2) At 1:00 o’clock position, FLA, remove bolt (6) that secures center clamp (7) block to
angle support (1). Remove six bolts (12, Section B-B), washers (13), springs (14), and
washers (15) from center clamp (7) block. Remove six bolts (16, View C), one block
clamp (17), block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), five block clamps (20), and one
center clamp (7, Section B-B) block.
support bracket (21). Remove six bolts (12), washers (13), springs (14), and washers (15)
from center clamp (7) block. Remove six bolts (16, View C), one block clamp (17),
block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), five block clamps (20), and one center clamp
(7, Section B-B) block.
(4) At 3:30 o’clock position, FLA, remove bolt (6) that secures center clamp (7) block to left
side support bracket (22). Remove six bolts (12, Section B-B), washers (13), springs
(14), and washers (15) from center clamp (7) block. Remove six bolts (16, View C), one
block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), five block clamps (20), and
one center clamp (7, Section B-B) block.
(5) At 4:30 o’clock position, FLA, remove two bolts (23, Section D-D), two bolts (24),
clamp block (25), center clamp block (26), and clamp block (27) from fuel system
support bracket (28).
Change 4 43

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
lower support (29). Remove six bolts (12), washers (13), springs (14), and washers (15)
block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), five block clamps (20), and one center
clamp (7) block.
lower support (29). Remove six bolts (12, Section B-B), washers (13), springs (14), and
washers (15) from center clamp (7) block. Remove six bolts (16, View C), one block
clamp (17), block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), five block clamps (20), and one
center clamp (7) block.
(8) At 7:30 o’clock position, FLA, remove two bolts (23, Section D-D), two bolts (24),
clamp block (25), center clamp block (26), and clamp block (27) from fuel system
support bracket (30).
right side support bracket (31). Remove six bolts (12), washers (13), springs (14), and
washers (15) from center clamp (7) block. Remove six bolts (16), one block clamp (17),
block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), five block clamps (20), and one center
clamp (7) block.
support bracket (32). Remove six bolts (12), washers (13), springs (14), and washers (15)
(7) block.
angle support (1). Remove six bolts (12), washers (13), springs (14), and washers (15)
(7) block.
J. Remove liquid fuel staging valve fuel supply and purge tubes per paragraph 12.
K. Remove liquid fuel staging valve tray brackets as follows (figure 6):
(1) Loosen bolts (9), that secure bracket (8) onto liquid fuel staging valve tray bracket (17).
Remove bolts and bracket.
(2) Loosen bolts (11) that secure bracket (10) onto liquid fuel staging valve tray
bracket (17). Remove bolts and bracket.
44 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(3) Loosen bolts (13) that secure brackets (12) onto liquid fuel staging valve tray
bracket (17). Remove bolts and brackets.
(4) Loosen bolts (14) that secure brackets (4) onto liquid fuel staging valve tray bracket (17).
Remove bolts and brackets.
(5) Remove bolts (15) and self-locking nuts (16) that secure liquid fuel staging valve tray
bracket (17) onto support brackets (18).
(6) Remove liquid fuel staging valve tray bracket (17).
L. Remove fuel manifold clamp support brackets as follows:
(1) At 2:30 o’clock position, remove three bolts (33, figure 7) that secure support bracket
(21) to liquid manifold side frame (34). Remove bracket.
(2) At 3:30 o’clock position, remove three bolts (33) that secure left side support
bracket (22) to liquid manifold side frame (34). Remove bracket.
(3) At 4:30 o’clock position, remove three bolts (33) that secure fuel system support
(4) At 7:30 o’clock position, remove three bolts (33) that secure fuel system support
(5) At 9:00 o’clock position, remove three bolts (33) that secure right side support
(6) At 10:00 o’clock position, remove three bolts (33) that secure support bracket (32) to
liquid manifold side frame (35). Remove bracket.
M. Remove four bolts (35, figure 6, Details E and F) and remove lower support (36).
N. Remove four bolts (37) and support brackets (38) from brackets (18).
O. Remove fuel manifolds as follows:
(1) Remove fuel B-manifold as follows (figure 1):
(a) Loosen two B-nuts connecting upper B-manifold (2) onto lower B-manifold (3).
(b) Remove upper B-manifold (2) and lower B-manifold (3).
Change 4 45

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(2) Remove fuel A-4 manifold as follows:
(a) Loosen two B-nuts connecting upper A-4 manifold (5) onto lower A-4 manifold (6).
(b) Remove upper A-4 manifold (5) and lower A-4 manifold (6).
(3) Remove fuel A-3 manifold as follows:
(a) Loosen two B-nuts connecting upper A-3 manifold (8) onto lower A-3 manifold (9).
(4) Remove A-2 manifolds as follows:
(a) Loosen two B-nuts connecting upper A-2 manifold (11) onto lower A-2
manifold (12).
(5) Remove A-1 manifolds as follows:
(a) Loosen two B-nuts connecting upper A-1 manifold (14) onto lower A-1
manifold (15).
(6) Remove C-manifolds as follows:
(a) Loosen two B-nuts connecting upper C-manifold (17) onto lower C-manifold (18).
(b) Remove upper C-manifold (17) and lower C-manifold (18).
P. Remove air purge tube (20, figure 1, view H) as follows:
(1) Remove bolt (21) and clamp (22) from air purge tube (20).
(2) Remove bolts (23) and gasket (24).
(3) Remove safety wire from bolts (25).
(4) Remove bolts (25), metal gasket (26), and air purge tube (20).
(5) Remove two bolts (27) and purge support bracket (28).
Q. Remove duel fuel manifold support fixture, 1C9621, per WP 3015 00.
46 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
17. Tubular Fuel Manifold Installation.
A. If not previously accomplished, install dual fuel manifold support fixture, 1C9621, per
WP 3015 00.
B. Install air purge tube (20, figure 1, View H) as follows:
(1) Install purge support bracket (28) using two bolts (27). Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(2) Install new metal gasket (26) onto end of air purge tube (20).
(3) Install air purge tube (20) to CRF using four bolts (25). Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(4) Safety-wire bolts (25).
(5) Install gasket (24) and bolts (23).
(6) Position clamp (22) around air purge tube (20) and install bolt (21). Tighten bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
C. Install two support brackets (38, figure 6) onto brackets (18) using four bolts (37). Tighten
bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
D. Install lower support (36) onto two support brackets (38) using four bolts (35). Tighten bolts
E. Install liquid fuel staging valve tray brackets as follows:
(1) Lightly coat bolt (15), threads with thread lubricant.
(2) Using bolts (15) and self-locking nuts (16), secure tray bracket (17) onto left and right
support brackets (18). Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(4) Using bolts (14), boltheads forward, secure short leg of brackets (4), onto aft face of
forward bend on tray bracket (17). Long tab on brackets bends forward. Tighten bolts
(14 and 15) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Change 4 47

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(6) Using bolts (13), boltheads aft, secure bracket (12) onto forward side of aft bend on tray
bracket (17). Secure bracket onto holes in between A3-STG and B-PRG ports, bracket
tab forward and down. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(8) Using bolts (13) boltheads aft, secure bracket (12) onto forward side of aft bend on tray
bracket (17). Secure bracket onto holes in between 4-STG and B-PRG ports, bracket tab
forward and down. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(10) Using bolts (11), boltheads forward, secure bracket (10) bracket tab forward, onto aft
face of forward bend on tray bracket (17) at B-PRG port. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(12) Using bolts (9), boltheads forward, secure bracket (8), bracket tab forward, onto aft face
of forward bend on tray bracket (17) at C-PRG port. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
F. Install temperature sensor (33) as follows:
(1) Install new seal ring (34, Detail D) (6 places) onto temperature sensor (33).
(2) Install temperature sensor (33) and tighten nut to 50 lb ft (68 N·m) of torque.
G. Install electrical harnesses onto valve ladder brackets as follows:
WARNING
(1) Install cushion clamp (3) around electrical harness (2) and connect clamp to bracket (4)
using bolt (1). Tighten bolt to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Secure electrical harness (2) onto bracket (39) using machine screws (5) and self-locking
nuts (6). Tighten screws to 17 lb in. (1.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Connect electrical harness (2) connector to liquid fuel staging valve (20) connections.
(4) Install cushion clamp (3) around electrical harness (7) and connect clamp to bracket (4)
using bolt (1). Tighten bolt to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
48 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(5) Secure electrical harness (7) onto bracket (40) using machine screws (5) and self-locking
nuts (6). Tighten bolt to 17 lb in. (1.9 N·m) of torque.
(6) Connect electrical harness (7) connector to liquid fuel staging valve (20) connections.
(7) Install clamp (30, Detail C), clamp (27, Detail B), and clamp (24, Detail A) around elec-
trical harness (21). Install bolts (29, 26, and 23) and nuts (28, 25, and 22). Tighten bolt to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(8) Secure electrical harness (21) onto bracket (39) using machine screws (5) and self-
locking nuts (6). Tighten bolt to 17 lb in. (1.9 N·m) of torque.
(9) Connect electrical connector (32, View G (six places)) to temperature sensor (33).
H. Install fuel manifolds as follows (figure 1):
(1) Install C-manifolds as follows:
(a) Lubricate seven nipples on upper C-manifold (17, Section G-G) with thread
lubricant.
(b) Install upper C-manifold, nipples onto manifold forward, with ends located at 8:45
and 2:45 o'clock positions (FLA).
(c) Connect seven B-nuts onto fuel tubes (16) onto upper C-manifold (17).
(d) Tighten B-nuts hand-tight.
(e) Lubricate eight nipples on lower C-manifold (18) with thread lubricant.
(f) Install lower C-manifold (18), nipples onto manifold forward, with ends located at
8:45 and 2:45 o'clock positions (FLA).
(g) Connect eight B-nuts onto fuel tubes (16) onto lower C-manifold (18).
(h) Tighten B-nuts hand-tight.
(i) Triple torque B-nuts per paragraph 7, substep D.(5).
(j) Connect 15 B-nuts onto fuel nozzles. Tighten B-nuts hand-tight.
(k) Triple torque B-nuts per paragraph 7, substep D.(5).
Change 4 49

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(2) Install A-1 manifolds as follows:
(a) Lubricate three nipples on upper A-1 manifold (14, Section F-F) with thread
lubricant.
(b) Install upper A-1 manifold (14), manifold ends located at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock
positions (FLA).
(c) Connect three B-nut fittings onto upper A-1 manifold (14) hand-tight.
(d) Lubricate three nipples on lower A-1 manifold (15) with thread lubricant.
(e) Install lower A-1 manifold (15), manifold ends located at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock
positions (FLA).
(f) Connect upper A-1 manifold (14) and lower A-1 manifold (15) B-nuts at 8:45 and
2:45 o’clock positions (FLA). Tighten B-nuts hand-tight.
(g) Connect three B-nut fittings onto lower A-1 manifold (15) hand-tight.
(h) Triple torque two B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock positions (FLA) per paragraph 7,
substep D.(5).
(i) Triple torque six B-nuts onto upper A-1 manifold (14) and lower A-1 manifold (15)
per paragraph 7, substep D.(5).
(a) Lubricate three nipples on upper A-2 manifold (11, Section E-E) with thread
lubricant.
(b) Install upper A-2 manifold (11), manifold ends located at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock
positions (FLA).
(c) Connect three B-nuts onto upper A-2 manifold (11) hand-tight.
(e) Install lower A-2 manifold (12), manifold ends located at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock
positions (FLA).
(f) Connect three B-nuts onto lower A-2 manifold (12) hand-tight.
(g) Connect upper A-2 and lower A-2 B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock positions (FLA)
hand-tight.
50 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(h) Triple torque upper A-2 and lower A-2 B-nuts per paragraph 7, substep D.(5).
(i) Triple torque six B-nuts per paragraph 7, substep D.(5).
(a) Lubricate three nipples on upper A-3 manifold (8, Section D-D) with thread
lubricant.
(b) Install upper A-3 manifold (8) onto engine, B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock
positions (FLA).
(c) Connect four B-nuts onto upper A-3 manifold (8) hand-tight.
(e) Install lower A-3 manifold (9) onto engine, B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock
positions (FLA).
(f) Connect lower B-nuts onto lower A-3 manifold (9) hand-tight.
(g) Connect upper and lower A-3 manifold B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock positions
hand-tight.
(h) Triple torque B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock positions per paragraph 7,
substep D.(5).
(i) Triple torque eight B-nuts per paragraph 7, substep D.(5).
(a) Lubricate three nipples on upper A-4 manifold (5, Section C-C) with thread
lubricant.
(b) Install upper A-4 manifold (5) onto engines, B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock
positions (FLA).
(c) Connect five B-nuts onto upper A-4 manifold (5) hand-tight.
(e) Install lower A-4 manifold (6) onto engine, B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock
positions (FLA).
(f) Connect five B-nuts hand-tight.
Change 4 51

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(g) Connect upper and lower A-4 manifold B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock positions
hand-tight.
(h) Triple torque upper and lower A-4 manifold B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock posi-
tions per paragraph 7, substep D.(5).
(i) Triple torque 10 B-nuts per paragraph 7, substep D.(5).
(6) Install B-manifolds as follows:
(a) Lubricate three nipples on upper B-manifold (2, Section B-B) with thread lubricant.
(b) Install upper B-manifold (2) onto engine, B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock
positions, FLA.
(c) Connect 15 B-nuts onto upper B-manifold (2) hand-tight.
(d) Lubricate three nipples on lower B-manifold (3) with thread lubricant.
(e) Install lower B-manifold onto engine, B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock
positions (FLA).
(f) Connect 15 B-nuts onto lower B-manifold (3) hand-tight.
(g) Connect upper and lower B-manifold B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock positions
hand-tight.
(h) Triple torque upper and lower B-manifold B-nuts at 8:45 and 2:45 o’clock positions
per paragraph 7, substep D.(5).
(i) Triple torque 30 B-nuts per paragraph 7, substep D.(5).
(7) Install manifold clamps (figure 7) as follows:
(a) At 11:00 o’clock position, FLA, install one block clamp (17, View C), block clamp
(18), five block clamps (19), and five block clamps (20), onto manifold using six
bolts (16). Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(b) Install one block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), and five
block clamps (20) onto center clamp (7) block using six bolts (12), washers (13),
springs (14), and washers (15). Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(c) At 10:00 o’clock position, FLA, secure center clamp (7) block to support bracket
(32) using bolt (6). Install one block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five block
52 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
clamps (19), and five block clamps (20) onto manifold using six bolts (16). Tighten
bolt (6) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque. Tighten bolt (16) finger-tight.
(d) Install one block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), and five
(e) At 9:00 o’clock position, FLA, secure center clamp (7) block to right side support
bracket (31) using bolt (6). Install one block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five
block clamps (19), and five block clamps (20) onto manifold using six bolts (16).
Tighten bolt (6) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque. Tighten bolt (16) finger-
tight.
(f) Install one block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), and five
(g) At 7:30 o’clock position, FLA, secure clamp block (27), center clamp block (26),
and clamp block (25) to manifold and fuel system support bracket (30) using bolts
(23 and 24). Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(h) At 6:30 o’clock position, FLA, secure center clamp (7) block to lower support (29)
using bolt (6). Install one block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five block clamps
(19), and five block clamps (20), onto manifold using six bolts (16). Tighten bolt (6)
to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque. Tighten bolt (16) finger-tight.
(i) Install one block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), and five
(j) At 5:30 o’clock position, FLA, secure center clamp (7) block to lower support (29)
(19), and five block clamps (20), onto manifold using six bolts (16). Tighten bolt (6)
(k) Install one block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), and five
(l) At 4:30 o’clock position, FLA, secure clamp block (27), center clamp block (26),
and clamp block (25) to manifold and fuel system support bracket (28) using four
bolts (23 and 24). Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Change 4 53

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(m) At 3:30 o’clock position, FLA, secure center clamp block (7) to left side support
bracket (22) using bolt (6). Install one block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five
block clamps (19), and five block clamps (20) onto manifold using six bolts (16).
Tighten bolt (6) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque. Tighten bolt (16)
finger-tight.
(n) Install one block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), and five
(o) At 2:30 o’clock position, FLA, secure center clamp (7) block to support bracket (21)
(19), and five block clamps (20) onto manifold using six bolts (16). Tighten bolt (6)
(p) Install one block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), and five
(q) At 1:00 o’clock position, FLA, install one block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five
block clamps (19), five block clamps (20) using six bolts (16). Tighten bolts
finger-tight.
(r) Install one block clamp (17), block clamp (18), five block clamps (19), and five
(s) At 12:00 o’clock position, FLA, install clamp blocks (10 and 11) to manifold and
center clamp block (5) using four bolts (8 and 9). Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(t) Tighten bolts (8, 9, and 16) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(u) Tighten bolts (12) to 210 lb in. (23.7 N·m) of torque.
(8) Install tubular fuel manifold clamp support brackets as follows:
(a) At 2:30 o’clock position, secure support bracket (21) to liquid manifold side frame
(34) using three bolts (33).
(b) At 3:30 o’clock position, secure left side support bracket (22) to liquid manifold side
frame (34) using three bolts (33).
(c) At 4:30 o’clock position, secure fuel system support bracket (28) to liquid manifold
side frame (34) using three bolts (33).
54 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(d) At 7:30 o’clock position, secure fuel system support bracket (30) to liquid manifold
(e) At 9:00 o’clock position, secure right side support bracket (31) to liquid manifold
(f) At 10:00 o’clock position, secure support bracket (32) to liquid manifold side frame
(35) using three bolts (33).
(g) Tighten eighteen bolts (33) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(9) Remove dual fuel manifold support fixture, 1C9621, per WP 3015 00.
(10) Install angle support (figure 7) as follows:
(a) Position angle support (1, Section B-B) over assembly.
(b) Secure two center clamps (7) (1:00 and 11:00 o’clock positions) to angle support (1)
using bolts (6). Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(c) Secure center clamp block (5, Section A-A) to angle support (1) using bolt (4).
Tighten bolt to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(d) Secure angle support (1) to support bracket (21) using two bolts (3). Tighten bolts
(e) Secure angle support (1) to support bracket (32) using three bolts (2). Tighten bolts
Change 4 55

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
18. Fuel Hose Assembly Removal.
A. Remove fuel hose assembly as follows:
CAUTION
Cover open fuel manifold and fuel nozzle ports immediately after
removal of each fuel hose assembly to prevent engine contamination.
(1) Disconnect fuel hose assembly from fuel manifolds (figure 8) as follows :
NOTE
Odd numbered fuel nozzles are connected onto enhanced lean blow
out (ELBO) manifold, A-manifold, and B-manifold, even numbered
fuel nozzles are connected onto C-manifold, A-manifold, and
B-manifold.
(a) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel hose onto ELBO manifold. Disconnect fuel hose
from fuel manifold.
(b) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel hose onto C-manifold. Disconnect fuel hose from
fuel manifold.
8
(c) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel hose onto A-manifold. Disconnect fuel hose from
fuel manifold.
(d) Loosen B-nut that secures fuel hose onto B-manifold. Disconnect fuel hose from
manifold.
(2) Remove bolts that secure fuel hose assembly plate onto fuel nozzle. Remove fuel hose
assemblies.
(3) Remove and discard fuel nozzle seal.
(4) Cover open fuel nozzle port with tape.
(5) Repeat steps (1) through (4) to remove as many fuel hose assemblies as required to per-
form maintenance.
19. Fuel Hose Assembly Installation.
A. Install fuel hose assemblies onto odd number fuel nozzle pads (figure 8) as follows:
(1) Remove tape from fuel nozzle port.
56 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Figure 8. Gas Fuel Hose and Fuel Nozzle Replacement
Change 4 57

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(2) Install new fuel nozzle seal between fuel hose assembly plate and fuel nozzle.
(3) Lightly coat four bolt threads and contact faces with thread lubricant.
CAUTION
• Excessive torque on one bolt will result in fuel hose pad improp-
erly seating onto fuel nozzle.
• Improper seating of fuel hose will result in fuel leakage during

engine operation.
• Do not exceed 15 lb in. (1.7 N·m) of torque during seating of

hose assembly plate onto fuel nozzle or distortion of fuel nozzle
may occur.
(4) Using crisscross pattern, run down four bolts and seat fuel hose assembly onto fuel noz-
zle. Use minimum torque.
(5) Connect fuel hose onto ELBO manifold as follows:
(a) Lightly coat B-nut fitting on ELBO manifold with thread lubricant.
WARNING
(b) Slide B-nut back onto aft most fuel hose. Lubricate ferrule with lubricating oil.
(c) Install B-nut hand-tight onto ELBO manifold.
(6) Connect fuel hose onto A-manifold as follows:
(a) Lightly coat B-nut fitting on A-manifold with thread lubricant.
(b) Slide B-nut back onto middle fuel hose. Lubricate ferrule with lubricating oil.
(c) Install B-nut hand-tight onto A-manifold.
(7) Connect fuel hose onto B-manifold as follows:
(a) Lightly coat B-nut fitting onto B-manifold with thread lubricant.
58 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(b) Slide B-nut back onto forward most fuel hose. Lubricate ferrule with lubricating oil.
(c) Install B-nut hand-tight onto B-manifold.
B. Install fuel hose assemblies onto even number fuel nozzle pads as follows:
(1) Install hose assembly plate onto fuel nozzle per steps A.(1) through (4).
(2) Connect fuel hose onto C-manifold as follows:
(a) Lightly coat B-nut fitting on C-manifold with thread lubricant.
(b) Slide B-nut back onto aft most fuel hose. Lubricate ferrule with lubricating oil.
(c) Install B-nut hand-tight onto C-manifold.
(3) Install fuel hoses onto A- and B-manifolds per steps A.(6) and (7).
C. After all fuel hose assemblies have been reinstalled, perform following steps:
(1) Final tighten bolts that secure fuel hose assembly plate onto fuel nozzle as follows:
(a) Using crisscross pattern, tighten four bolts to 100 lb in. (11.3 N·m) of torque.
(b) Using crisscross pattern, tighten four bolts to 20 lb ft (27 N·m) of torque.
(c) Using alternating sequence, apply final torque of 33 lb ft (45 N·m) of torque.
(d) Verify final torque of 33 lb ft (45 N·m) of torque has been applied to four bolts.
(e) Safety-wire four bolts at fuel nozzle.
CAUTION
Ensure alignment stripe on flex fuel hose is not twisted, or prema-

ture hose failure may occur.
(2) Final tighten B-nuts that secure fuel hoses onto manifolds to 500 lb in. (56.5 N·m) of
torque.
Change 4 59

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
20. Gas Staging Valves Removal.
A. Remove gas staging valve (3, figure 9) from valve support bracket (1 or 9) as follows:
WARNING

(1) Loosen and disconnect electrical harness connector from gas staging valve connector.
(2) Remove four bolts that secure gas staging valve (3) onto fuel manifold adapter plate (25).
(3) Remove gas staging valve (3) from adapter plate (25).
(4) Remove and discard manifold valve seal (4).
(5) Cover adapter plate (25) port with tape.

9
21. Gas Staging Valves Installation.
A. Install gas staging valve (3, figure 9) onto valve support bracket (1 or 9) as follows:
(1) Remove tape from adapter plate (25) port on valve support bracket (1 or 9).
(2) Lightly coat bolt threads and contact faces with thread lubricant.
(3) Install manifold valve seal (4) onto gas staging valve (3).
NOTE
• All gas staging valves installed onto valve support brackets have
electrical connectors pointing forward.
• Gas staging valve installed onto bracket connected onto B-mani-

fold and ELBO assembly has electrical connector pointing aft.
(4) Place gas staging valve (3) onto adapter plate (25).
(5) Using four bolts, secure gas staging valve (3) onto adapter plate (25) port. Tighten bolts
hand-tight.
(6) Tighten bolts in a crisscross sequence to 54 lb in. (6.1 N·m) of torque.
(7) Tighten bolts in a crisscross sequence to 11 lb ft (15 N·m) of torque.
60 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Change 4 61

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
62 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Change 4 63

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
64 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Change 4 65

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(8) Tighten bolts in a crisscross sequence to 18 lb ft (24 N·m) of torque.
(9) Perform final tightening check in CW bolt-to-bolt sequence. Ensure bolts are tightened
to 18 lb ft (24 N·m) of torque.
WARNING

B. Connect gas staging valve onto electrical harness as follows:
(1) Engage electrical harness connector onto gas staging valve (3) connector.
(2) Turn knurled coupling ring while wiggling backshell of electrical connector.
(3) Fully seat electrical harness connector by hand.
(4) Using teflon-jawed pliers, final tighten electrical harness connector to 1/4 to 1/2 turn past
hand-tight.
(5) Check tightness by wiggling connector backshell. No movement shall occur.
22. Tubular Gas Fuel Manifold Removal.
A. Secure all fuel and electrical connections onto fuel system per packager's manual.
B. Remove angle support per paragraph 16.
C. Install dual fuel manifold support fixture, 1C9621, per WP 3015 00.
D. Remove enclosure fuel manifold supports per packager's manual.
E. Remove electrical harnesses (29 or 30, figure 9) from valve support brackets (1 or 9) as
follows:
WARNING

(1) Disconnect electrical harness connector from gas staging valve (3).
(2) Remove nuts (33, Details D, E, and F), bolts (34), and loop clamps (35) that secure elec-
trical harness (29 or 30) onto valve support bracket (1 or 9).
66 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(3) Remove four screws (6) and self-locking nuts (7) that secure right electrical harness (29,
Detail Y) connector onto harness support bracket (5).
(4) Remove two bolts (28) and harness support bracket (5).
(5) Remove four screws (6) and self-locking nuts (7) that secure left electrical
harness (30, Detail X) connector onto harness support bracket (8).
(6) Remove two bolts (28) and harness support bracket (8).
(7) Remove electrical harnesses (29 and 30) from valve support brackets (1 and 9).
F. Remove gas staging valves per paragraph 20.
G. Remove fuel hoses as follows:
(1) Remove fuel hoses from B-manifold, ELBO assembly, C-manifold, and A-manifold per
paragraph 18.
(2) If desired, remove fuel hose assembly from fuel nozzle per paragraph 18.
H. Remove adapter plates (25) as follows:
(1) Remove four bolts (26) that secure two fuel hoses (31 and 32) onto adapter plate (25).
Remove and discard preformed packings (27).
(2) Remove four bolts (2) that secure adapter plate (25) onto valve support brackets
(1 and 9). Remove adapter plate.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for 10 other locations.
I. Remove A-manifold fuel tubes (1, figure 10) as follows:
(1) Remove bolts (2) and self-locking nuts (3) that secure fuel tubes (5, 7, 15, 17, and 18)
onto A-manifold. Remove fuel tubes and discard gaskets (4).
10
(2) Remove eight bolts (11) and self-locking nuts (12) that secure fuel tube (14) onto fuel
tube (6).
(3) Remove U-bolt (23, figure 9, Section H-H) and self-locking nut (24) that secure fuel
tube (22) onto bracket (19).
(4) Remove U-bolts (9 and 13, figure 11, Sections M-M and N-N) and self-locking nuts (7)
that secure fuel tubes (6 and 14, figure 10) onto brackets.
11
Change 4 67

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
Figure 10. A-Manifold
68 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Change 4 69

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(6) If required, remove tube cap (19) from fuel tube (6).
J. Remove C-manifold fuel tubes as follows:
(1) Remove bolts (2, figure 12) and self-locking nuts (3) that secure fuel tubes (5, 9, 11, 18,
and 19) onto C-manifold. Remove fuel tubes and discard gaskets (4).
12
(2) Remove eight bolts (12) and self-locking nuts (13) that secure fuel tube (8) onto fuel
tube (16).
(3) Remove U-bolt (21, figure 9, Section H-H) and self-locking nut (24) that secure fuel
tube (20) onto bracket (19).
(4) Remove U-bolts (11 and 15, figure 11, Sections M-M and N-N) and self-locking nuts (7)
that secure fuel tubes (8 and 16, figure 12) onto brackets.
(6) If required, remove tube cap (15) from fuel tube (16).
70 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Figure 12. C-Manifold
Change 4 71

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
K. Remove bolts (1, figure 11) that secure brackets (2, 3, 4, and 5) onto valve support brackets
(6 and 16). Remove brackets.
L. Remove A-manifold as follows:
(1) Remove bolts (9, figure 10) and self-locking nuts (10) that secure A-manifold fuel
tube (1) at 12:30, 2:30, 5:00, 8:00, and 10:00 o’clock positions.
(2) Remove bolts (12, figure 9, Section J-J, K-K, and H-H) that secure loop clamps (11)
onto brackets (seven locations).
(3) Remove bolt (12, figure 13, View U) that secure loop clamp (11) onto bracket (5).
(4) Remove A-manifold fuel tubes (1, figure 10) from brackets.
M. Remove C-manifold as follows:
(1) Remove bolts (6, figure 12) and self-locking nut (7) that secure C-manifold fuel tube (1)
at 2:00, 4:00, 7:00, 9:30, and 11:30 o’clock positions.
(2) Remove bolts (12, figure 9, Section J-J, K-K, and H-H) that secure loop clamps (11)
onto brackets (seven locations).
(3) Remove bolt (12, figure 13, View U) that secure loop clamp (11) onto bracket (5).
(4) Remove C-manifold fuel tubes (1, figure 12) from brackets.
N. Remove staging valve (20, figure 13) as follows:

13
(1) Disconnect electrical harness connector (21) from staging valve (20).
(2) Loosen B-nut and disconnect ELBO purge manifold (22) at staging valve (20) and
ELBO assembly fuel tube (18). Remove and discard preformed packings (23).
(3) Loosen B-nut and disconnect ELBO purge tube (17) at staging valve (20) and
B-manifold (2). Remove and discard preformed packings (23).
(4) Remove four bolts (26) and staging valve (20). Remove and discard manifold valve
seal (27).
(5) Remove four bolts and adapter plate (19) from support bracket (32).
(6) Remove bolt (28) and clamp (29) from ELBO assembly fuel tube (18).
72 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
Figure 13. ELBO Assembly (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 4 73

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
Figure 13. ELBO Assembly (Sheet 2 of 2)
(7) Remove four nuts (30), two U-bolts (31) from B-manifold (2) and remove support
brackets (32).
O. Remove ELBO assembly as follows:
(1) Remove bolts (8, figure 13) and self-locking nuts (9) that secure fuel tube (6) onto
B-manifold (2).
(2) Loosen B-nut and disconnect fuel tube (15) from ELBO assembly fuel tube (16).
(3) Disconnect electrical harness connector (41) from staging valve (40).
(4) Remove two bolts (34) and fuel tube (6). Remove and discard gasket (7) and preformed
packing (33).
(5) Remove two bolts (35) and fuel tube (15). Remove and discard preformed packing (33).
(6) Remove four bolts (36) and staging valve (40). Remove and discard manifold valve
seal (39).
74 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(7) Remove four bolts (37) and adapter plate (38) from bracket (5).
(8) Remove self-locking nuts (4) and U-bolts (3) that secure bracket (5) onto ELBO
assembly and B-manifold (2). Remove bracket.
(9) Disconnect ELBO assembly fuel tube (1) from ELBO assembly fuel tubes (16 and 18).
(11) Remove bolts (12, figure 9) that secure loop clamps (11) onto brackets (seven
locations).
(12) Remove ELBO assembly fuel tubes (1, 16, and 18, figure 13).
(13) If required, remove tube cap (14) from ELBO assembly fuel tube (16).
P. Remove U-bolts (18, figure 9) and self-locking nuts (16) that secure brackets (10 and 19)
onto B-manifold (17). Remove brackets.
Q. Remove B-manifold (17) as follows:
(1) Remove eight bolts (3, figure 14, Detail A) and self-locking nuts (5) that secure fuel
tubes (6 and 9).
14
(3) Remove fuel tube (6) and discard gaskets (4).
(5) Remove six bolts (2) that secure valve support bracket (1) onto fuel tube (9). Remove
fuel tube and discard gasket (4).
(6) Remove six bolts (2) that secure valve support bracket (1) onto fuel tube (8). Remove
fuel tube.
(7) Remove cap (7) from fuel tube (6).
R. Remove dual fuel manifold support fixture, 1C9621, per WP 3015 00.
23. Tubular Gas Fuel Manifold Installation.
A. If not previously accomplished, install dual fuel manifold support fixture, 1C9621, per
WP 3015 00.
Change 4 75

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
Figure 14. B-Manifold
76 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
B. Install B-manifold as follows:
NOTE
Ensure bracket tabs on fuel tubes point forward.
(1) Align fuel tube (6, figure 14) with aft rail of valve support bracket (1).
(2) Install new gaskets (4, Detail A) onto fuel tube (6) flanges at 4:00 and 8:00 o’clock
positions.
(3) Using six bolts (2), install fuel tube (8) onto valve support bracket (1). Tighten bolts
hand-tight.
(5) Install new gasket (4) onto fuel tube (8) flange at 12:00 o’clock position.
(7) Using eight bolts (3), boltheads right (aft looking forward), and self-locking nuts (5),
secure fuel tube (9) onto fuel tube (8). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(8) Using six bolts (2), install fuel tube (9) onto valve support bracket (1). Tighten bolts
hand-tight.
CAUTION
(9) Using crisscross pattern, tighten nuts (5) at each fuel tube flange to 190-230 lb in.
(21.5-26.0 N·m) of torque.
(10) Tighten bolts (2) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(11) If removed, install cap (7) onto fuel tube (6). Tighten cap to 145 lb in. (16.4 N·m) of
torque.
(12) If removed, install bracket (5, figure 13) as follows:
(a) Position bracket (5) onto B-manifold (2).
Change 4 77

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
NOTE
Tab of bracket faces radially outward, flat part up.
(b) Lightly coat U-bolt (3) threads with thread lubricant.
(c) Using two U-bolts (3) and self-locking nuts (4), secure bracket (5) onto
B-manifold (2). Tighten self-locking nuts hand-tight.
(13) If removed, install adapter plate (19) onto bracket (5) as follows:
(a) Lightly coat bolt (37) threads with thread lubricant.
(b) Using four bolts (37), secure adapter plate (19) onto bracket (5). Tighten bolts
hand-tight.
(c) Install preformed packings onto fuel tubes (6 and 15).
(d) Position fuel tube (6) onto inboard port of adapter plate (19).
(e) Using two bolts (34), secure fuel tube (6) onto adapter plate. Tighten bolts hand-
tight.
(f) Position fuel tube (15) onto outboard port of adapter plate (19).
(g) Using two bolts (35), secure fuel tube (15) onto adapter plate (19). Tighten bolts
hand-tight.
C. Using two bolts, install harness support bracket (8, figure 9) onto lower left (aft looking
forward) corner of aft side of valve support bracket (9). Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque. See Detail X.
D. Using two bolts, install harness support bracket (5) onto lower right (aft looking forward)
corner of aft side of valve support bracket (1). Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of
torque. See Detail Y.
E. Using U-bolt (18) and self-locking nuts (16), attach bracket (10, Section J-J, (four places))
onto B-manifold (17). Tighten self-locking nuts hand-tight.
F. Install ELBO assembly onto fuel manifold as follows:
(1) Position ELBO assembly fuel tube (18, figure 13) onto ELBO assembly fuel tube (1).
(2) Secure ELBO assembly fuel tube (1) onto ELBO assembly fuel tube (18). Tighten con-
nectors hand-tight.
78 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(3) Position ELBO assembly fuel tube (16) onto ELBO assembly fuel tubes (1 and 18).
(4) Position ELBO assembly fuel tubes (1 and 18) onto forward side of B-manifold (2).
(5) Using two loop clamps (11, figure 9), loops forward, and bolts (12), secure ELBO
assembly (15) onto B-manifold brackets (two places, Section K-K). Tighten bolts
hand-tight.
(6) Secure ELBO assembly fuel tube (16, figure 13) onto ELBO assembly fuel tubes (1 and
18). Tighten connectors hand-tight.
(7) Using loop clamp (11, figure 9), loop outward, and bolt (12), secure ELBO
assembly (15) onto bracket (10, Section J-J (four places)). Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(8) Install new gasket (7, figure 13), between fuel tube (6) and B-manifold (2). Using four
bolts (8), boltheads down, and self-locking nuts (9), secure fuel tube onto B-manifold.
(9) Using loop clamp (11, figure 9) and bolts (12), secure ELBO assembly (15) onto bracket
(19, Section H-H). Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(10) Install fuel tube (15, figure 13) onto ELBO assembly fuel tube (16) as follows:
(a) Lightly lubricate B-nut fitting on ELBO assembly fuel tube (16) with thread
lubricant.
(b) Slide B-nut onto fuel tube (15) radially inward.
WARNING
(c) Using lubricating oil, lightly lubricate fuel tube (15) ferrule on nut mate faces.
(d) Install fuel tube (15) onto ELBO assembly fuel tube (16). Tighten B-nut hand-tight.
(11) If removed, install tube cap (14) onto ELBO assembly fuel tube (16). Tighten tube cap to
Change 4 79

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
G. Install staging valve (20, figure 13) as follows:
(1) Position U-bolts (31) around B-manifold (2) and through support brackets (32). Install
four nuts (30). Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Install new manifold valve seal (27) onto staging valve (20).
(3) Install adapter plate (19) onto support bracket (32) using four bolts.
(4) Lightly coat staging valve (20) ports, two per valve, with thread lubricant. Install staging
valve onto adapter plate (19) using four bolts (26). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(5) Tighten bolts (36) in a crisscross sequence to 54 lb in. (6.1 N·m) of torque.
(6) Tighten bolts (36) in a crisscross sequence to 11 lb ft (15 N·m) of torque.
(9) Install new preformed packings (23) into ELBO purge manifold (22). Lubricate B-nut
threads with lubricating oil. Install purge manifold to staging valve (20) and ELBO
assembly fuel tube (18).
(10) Install new preformed packings (23) into ELBO purge tube (17).
(a) Lightly lubricate B-nut fitting on B-manifold (2) with thread lubricant.
(b) Slide B-nuts onto ELBO purge tube (17) radially inward.
WARNING
(c) Using lubricating oil, lightly lubricate ELBO purge tube (17) ferrule on nut mate
faces.
(d) Install ELBO purge tube onto B-manifold. Tighten B-nut hand-tight.
(e) Install purge tube into stage valve (20).
80 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(11) Position clamp (29) around ELBO assembly fuel tube (18) and install bolt (28).
(12) Connect electrical harness connector (21) as follows:
WARNING
(a) Install electrical harness connector (21) onto staging valve (20) connector.
(b) Turn knurled coupling rings while wiggling backshell of electrical harness
connector (21).
(c) Fully seal electrical harness connector (21) by hand.
(d) Using teflon-jawed pliers, final tighten electrical harness connector (21) 1/4 to 1/2
turn past hand-tight.
(e) Check tightness by wiggling electrical harness connector (21) backshell. No move-
ment shall occur.
H. Install staging valve (40) as follows:
(1) Install new manifold valve seal (39) onto staging valve (40).
(2) Lightly coat staging valve (40) ports, two per valve, with thread lubricant. Install staging
valve onto adapter plate (38) using four bolts (36). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(3) Tighten bolts (36) in a crisscross sequence to 54 lb in. (6.1 N·m) of torque.
I. Assemble C-manifold (10) as follows:
(1) Using bolts (6, figure 12) and self-locking nuts (7), join two C-manifold fuel tubes (1).
(2) Position C-manifold fuel tubes (1) from 9:30 to 2:00 o'clock position.
Change 4 81

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(3) Using loop clamp (11, figure 9, Section K-K), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure
C-manifold (14) onto B-manifold (17) support bracket at 10:00 o’clock position. Tighten
bolt hand-tight.
(4) Using loop clamp (11), loop inward, and bolt (12), secure C-manifold (14) onto
B-manifold (17) support bracket at 1:30 o’clock position. Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(5) Using bolts (6, figure 12) and self-locking nuts (7), install C-manifold fuel tube (1)
section onto C-manifold at 2:00 o’clock position. Tighten bolt hand-tight.
C-manifold at 9:30 o’clock position. Tighten bolt hand-tight.
C-manifold at 4:00 and 6:30 o’clock positions. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(8) Using loop clamp (11, figure 9, Section J-J), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure
C-manifold (14) onto bracket (10 (four places)). Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(9) Using loop clamp (11, Section H-H) and bolt (12), secure C-manifold (14) onto
bracket (19). Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(10) Using loop clamp (12, figure 13, View U) and bolt (11), secure C-manifold (10) to
B-manifold support bracket at 5:00 o’clock position.
J. Assemble A-manifold as follows:
(1) Using bolts (9, figure 10) and self-locking nuts (10), join two A-manifold fuel tubes (1).
(2) Position A-manifold section from 9:30 to 2:00 o'clock position.
(3) Using loop clamp (11, figure 9, Section K-K), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure
A-manifold (13) onto B-manifold (17) support bracket at 1:30 position. Tighten bolt
hand-tight.
(4) Using loop clamp (11), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure A-manifold (13) onto
B-manifold (17) support bracket at 10:00 o'clock position. Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(5) Using bolts (9, figure 10) and self-locking nuts (10), install A-manifold fuel tube (1)
section onto A-manifold at 2:00 o'clock position. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
A-manifold at 9:30 o'clock position. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
82 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
A-manifold at 4:00 and 7:30 o’clock positions. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(8) Using loop clamp (11, figure 9, Section H-H), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure
A-manifold (13) onto bracket (19) at 6:30 o’clock position. Tighten bolt hand-tight.
(9) Using loop clamp (12, figure 13, View U) and bolt (11), secure A-manifold (13) onto
B-manifold support bracket at 5:00 o’clock position.
K. Using loop clamp (11, figure 9), loop aft, and bolt (12), secure A-manifold (13) onto bracket
(10) at 3:00, 5:30, 7:30, and 9:30 o'clock positions. Tighten bolts hand-tight.
L. If removed, install 10 adapter plates (25) onto valve support bracket (1 and 9) as follows:
(2) Position adapter plate (25) onto valve support bracket (1 or 9).
(3) Using four bolts (2), secure adapter plate (25) onto valve support bracket (1 or 9).
M. Install C-manifold supply tubes as follows:
(2) Lightly coat bolt (26, figure 9, View V) threads with thread lubricant.
(3) Using six bolts (26) secure fuel tube (8, figure 12) onto three adapter plates (25,
(5) Using two bolts (1), secure brackets (4 and 5) onto valve support bracket (16). Tighten
(6) Using U-bolt (15, Section M-M) and self-locking nuts (7), secure fuel tube (14) onto
bracket (4). Tighten self-locking nuts hand-tight.
(9) Using six bolts (26) secure fuel tube (16, figure 12) onto three adapter plates (25,
Change 4 83

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(10) Secure fuel tube (8, figure 12) onto fuel tube (16) as follows:
(c) Using eight bolts (12) and self-locking nuts (13), secure fuel tube (8) onto fuel
(12) Using two bolts (1), secure brackets (2 and 3) onto valve support bracket (6). Tighten
(13) Using U-bolt (11, Section N-N) and self-locking nuts (7), secure fuel tube (10) onto
bracket (2). Tighten self-locking nuts hand-tight.
CAUTION
(14) Using crisscross pattern, tighten eight nuts (13, figure 12) to 190-230 lb in.
(21.5-26.0 N·m) of torque.
(15) If required, install tube cap (15) onto fuel tube (16). Tighten cap to 145 lb in. (16.4 N·m)
of torque.
84 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(22) Position fuel tube (19, figure 12) into adapter plate. Route fuel tube towards
12:00 o’clock position. Secure using two bolts (26, figure 9). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(23) Install new gaskets (4, figure 12) between C-manifold fuel tube (1) flanges and fuel
tubes (5, 9, 11, 18, and 19) flanges.
(25) Using bolts (2), boltheads radially inward, and self-locking nuts (3), secure C-manifold
fuel tube (1) onto fuel tubes (5, 9, 11, 18, and 19). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
N. Install A-manifold supply tubes as follows:
(3) Using six bolts (26) secure fuel tube (14, figure 10) onto three adapter plates (25, figure
9). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(4) Using U-bolt (13, figure 11, Section M-M) and self-locking nuts (7), secure fuel
tube (12) onto bracket (5). Tighten self-locking nuts hand-tight.
(7) Using six bolts (26) secure fuel tube (6, figure 10) onto three adapter plates (25, figure
9). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(8) Secure fuel tube (14, figure 10) onto fuel tube (6) as follows:
(c) Using eight bolts (11) and self-locking nuts (12), secure fuel tube (14) onto fuel
(9) Using U-bolt (9, figure 11, Section N-N) and self-locking nuts (7), secure fuel tube (8)
onto bracket (3). Tighten self-locking nuts hand-tight.
Change 4 85

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
CAUTION

(10) Using crisscross pattern, tighten eight nuts (12, figure 10) to 190-230 lb in.
(21.5-26.0 N·m) of torque.
(11) If required, install tube cap (19) onto fuel tube (6). Tighten tube cap to 145 lb in.
(14) Position fuel tube (5) into adapter plate (25, figure 9). Route fuel tube towards
(16) Position fuel tube (15, figure 10) into adapter plate (25, figure 9). Route fuel tube
towards 6:00 o'clock position. Secure using two bolts (26). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
(19) Install new gaskets (4, figure 10) between A-manifold fuel tube (1) flanges and fuel
tubes (5, 7, 15, 17, and 18) flanges.
(21) Using bolts (2), boltheads radially inward, and self-locking nuts (3), secure A-manifold
fuel tube (1) sections onto fuel tubes (5, 7, 15, 17, and 18). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
O. Install bracket (19, figure 9, Section H-H) as follows:
(1) Using U-bolt (18) and self-locking nuts (16), secure bracket (19) onto B-manifold (17).
(2) Using U-bolt (21) and self-locking nuts (24), secure bracket (19) onto fuel tube (20).
86 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(3) Using U-bolt (23) and self-locking nuts (24), secure bracket (19) onto fuel tube (22).
P. If required, install fuel hoses onto fuel nozzles per paragraph 19.
Q. Install fuel hoses onto manifolds per paragraph 19.
R. Apply final torque to fuel system components as follows:
(1) Tighten bolts (26, figure 9) that secure fuel tubes onto adapter plates (25) on valve sup-
port brackets (1 and 9) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Tighten ELBO assembly as follows:
(a) Tighten bolts (12) on ELBO assembly (15) loop clamps (11) to 55-70 lb in.
(b) Tighten fuel tube (17, figure 13) B-nuts to 500 lb in. (56.5 N·m) of torque.
(3) Tighten C-manifold as follows:
(a) Tighten bolts (12, figure 9) on C-manifold (14) loop clamps (11) to 55-70 lb in.
(b) Tighten bolts (6, figure 12) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(c) Tighten bolts (2) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(4) Tighten A-manifold as follows:
(a) Tighten bolts (12, figure 9) on A-manifold (13) loop clamps (11) to 55-70 lb in.
(b) Tighten bolts (9, figure 10) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(c) Tighten bolts (2) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(5) Tighten B-manifold as follows:
(a) Tighten bolts (8, figure 13) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(b) Tighten fuel tube (17) B-nuts to 500 lb in. (56.5 N·m) of torque.
(6) Tighten U-bolts as follows:
(a) Lightly coat threads and mating face of all self-locking nuts with thread lubricant.
Change 4 87

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1511 00
(b) Tighten self-locking nuts (16 and 24, figure 9) that secure U-bolts (18, 21, and 23)
(c) Tighten self-locking nuts (7, figure 11) that secure U-bolts (9, 11, 13, and 15) to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(d) Tighten self-locking nuts (30, figure 13) that secure U-bolts (31) to 55-70 lb in.
S. Install staging valves per paragraph 21.
T. Install left (aft looking forward) electrical harness (30, figure 9) as follows:
(1) Install electrical harness (30) connector into harness support bracket (8) on lower left
corner of aft side of valve support bracket (9). See Detail X.
(3) Using four screws (6) and self-locking nuts (7), secure electrical harness (30) connector
onto harness support bracket (5).
(4) Route electrical harness (30) onto staging valves (3) on valve support bracket (9).
WARNING

(5) Attach electrical harness (30) onto staging valves per paragraph 21.
(6) Using three loop clamps (35, Details D, E, and F) and bolts (34), secure electrical har-
ness (30) onto valve ladder rack using nuts (33). Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(7) Connect electrical harness (30) onto staging valves per paragraph 21.
U. Install right (aft looking forward) electrical harness (29, figure 9) as follows:
(1) Install electrical harness (29) connector into harness support bracket (5) on lower right
corner of aft side of valve support bracket (1). See Detail Y.
(3) Using four screws (6) and self-locking nuts (7), secure electrical harness (29) connector
onto harness support bracket (5).
88 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1511 00
(4) Route electrical harness (29) onto staging valves (3) on valve support bracket (1) and on
B-manifold bracket.
(5) Attach electrical harness (29) onto staging valves per paragraph 21.
(6) Using four loop clamps (35, Details D, E, and F) and bolts (34), secure electrical harness
(29)onto valve ladder rack using nuts (33). Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of
torque.
(7) Connect electrical harness onto staging valves per paragraph 21.
V. Install enclosure fuel manifold supports per packager's manual.
W. Remove dual fuel manifold support fixture, 1C9621, per WP 3015 00.
X. Install angle support per paragraph 17.
Y. Make all fuel and electrical connections onto fuel system per packager's manual.

90 Blank Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1515 00
3WP 1515 00
WORK PACKAGE
ULTRAVIOLET FLAME SENSOR, L28490, FLAME
SENSOR SIGHT GLASS, AND FLAME SENSOR
BRACKET REPLACEMENT


1-7 ...... 3
8 Blank ...... 3
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Flame Sensor Bracket Installation .............................................................................................. 5

Flame Sensor Bracket Removal .................................................................................................. 5
Flame Sensor Sight Glass Installation ........................................................................................ 7
Flame Sensor Sight Glass Removal ............................................................................................ 5
Ultraviolet Flame Sensor Installation.......................................................................................... 3
Ultraviolet Flame Sensor Removal ............................................................................................. 3
Change 3 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1515 00
1. Introduction.
A. If replacing flame sensor, L44819, or cooling can, L44821, go to SWP 1515 01.
B. This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of ultraviolet flame sen-
sor, L28490, flame sensor sight glass, and flame sensor bracket. Flame sensors are located at
the 4:00 o'clock and 10:00 o'clock positions.
Title Number
Ultraviolet Flame Sensor, L44819, Flame Sensor Sight Glass, SWP 1515 01
and Flame Sensor Bracket Replacement
None required.

Gasket L43073P01 2
2 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1515 00
6. Ultraviolet Flame Sensor Removal.
See figure 1.
WARNING

A. Disconnect flame sensor integral lead from packager's junction box per packager's manual.
B. Remove bolts and clamps that secure flame sensor integral lead to brackets.
CAUTION

C. Disconnect cooling air supply tube from cooling air fitting on cooling can.
D. Remove bolts that secure cooling can to flame sensor bracket. Slide cooling can up onto inte-
gral lead.
E. Remove flame sensor and discard gasket.

1
7. Ultraviolet Flame Sensor Installation.
See figure 1.
A. Install new gasket and flame sensor onto flame sensor bracket.
B. Slide cooling can along integral lead over flame sensor. Secure cooling can and flame sensor
to flame sensor bracket with three bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
C. Connect cooling air supply tube onto cooling air fitting on cooling can. Tighten coupling nut
to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
D. Install integral lead to brackets with clamps and bolts per SWP 1913 02. Tighten bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Change 3 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1515 00
Figure 1. Ultraviolet Flame Sensor
4 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1515 00
WARNING

E. Connect flame sensor integral lead to packager's junction box per packager's manual.
8. Flame Sensor Bracket Removal.
See figure 2.
A. Remove flame sensor per paragraph 6.
B. Remove bolts that secure flame sensor bracket to compressor rear frame (CRF) flange
bracket. Remove flame sensor bracket.
2
9. Flame Sensor Bracket Installation.
See figure 2.
A. Install flame sensor bracket and secure to CRF flange bracket with three bolts. Tighten bolts
B. Install flame sensor per paragraph 7.
10. Flame Sensor Sight Glass Removal.
See figure 2.
B. Remove flame sensor bracket per paragraph 8.
C. Remove bolts that secure heat shield cover to heat shield. Remove heat shield cover.
D. Remove flame sensor sight glass.
Change 3 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1515 00
Figure 2. Flame Sensor Sight Glass and Bracket
6 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1515 00
11. Flame Sensor Sight Glass Installation.
See figure 2.
A. Install flame sensor sight glass. Tighten sight glass to 315-345 lb in. (35.6-39.0 N·m) of
torque.
B. Install heat shield cover and secure with four bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m)
of torque.
C. Install flame sensor bracket and secure to CRF flange bracket with three bolts. Tighten bolts
D. Install flame sensor per paragraph 7.

8 Blank Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1515 01
3SWP 1515 01
SUBORDINATE WORK PACKAGE
ULTRAVIOLET FLAME SENSOR, L44819, FLAME
SENSOR SIGHT GLASS, AND FLAME SENSOR
BRACKET REPLACEMENT
LIST OF EFFECTIVE SWP PAGES

Total Number of Pages in this SWP is 8

1-7 ...... 3
8 Blank ...... 3
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Flame Sensor Bracket Installation .............................................................................................. 5

Flame Sensor Bracket Removal .................................................................................................. 5
Flame Sensor Sight Glass Installation ........................................................................................ 7
Flame Sensor Sight Glass Removal ............................................................................................ 5
Ultraviolet Flame Sensor Installation.......................................................................................... 3
Ultraviolet Flame Sensor Removal ............................................................................................. 3
Change 3 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1515 01
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of ultraviolet flame sensor,
L44819, flame sensor sight glass, and flame sensor bracket. Flame sensors are located at the
4:00 o'clock and 10:00 o'clock positions.
Title Number
None required.

Gasket L43073P01 2
2 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1515 01
6. Ultraviolet Flame Sensor Removal.
See figure 1.
WARNING

A. Disconnect interconnecting cable from packager's junction box per packager's manual.
B. Remove bolts and clamps that secure interconnecting cable to brackets.
C. Disconnect interconnecting cable from flame sensor.
CAUTION
D. Disconnect cooling air supply tube from cooling air fitting on air cooling can.
E. Loosen screws that secure cooling can to flame sensor. Slide cooling can off flame sensor.
F. Remove flame sensor.
G. Remove three bolts that secure flame sensor tube mount onto flame sensor bracket. Remove
tube mount and gasket. Discard gasket.
1
7. Ultraviolet Flame Sensor Installation.
See figure 1.
A. Install gasket and flame sensor tube mount onto flame sensor bracket. Secure tube mount to
flame sensor bracket with three bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
B. Thread flame sensor onto tube mount. Tighten flame sensor to until snug on tube mount.
Loosen flame sensor and tighten a second time until snug. Tighten flame sensor one-quarter
turn past snug.
C. Install air cooling can onto flame sensor and tighten screws on adjustable clamps.
Change 3 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1515 01
Figure 1. Ultraviolet Flame Sensor
4 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1515 01
CAUTION

D. Connect cooling air supply tube onto cooling air fitting on cooling can. Tighten coupling nut
to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
E. Install interconnecting cable to brackets with clamps and bolts per SWP 1913 02. Tighten
WARNING

F. Connect interconnecting cable to packager's junction box per packager's manual.
G. Connecting interconnecting cable to flame sensor.
8. Flame Sensor Bracket Removal.
See figure 2.
B. Remove bolts that secure flame sensor bracket to compressor rear frame (CRF) flange
bracket. Remove flame sensor bracket.
2
9. Flame Sensor Bracket Installation.
See figure 2.
A. Install flame sensor bracket and secure to CRF flange bracket with three bolts. Tighten bolts
B. Install flame sensor per paragraph 7.
10. Flame Sensor Sight Glass Removal.
See figure 2.
B. Remove flame sensor bracket per paragraph 8.
C. Remove bolts that secure heat shield cover to heat shield. Remove heat shield cover.
Change 3 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1515 01
Figure 2. Flame Sensor Sight Glass and Bracket
6 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1515 01
D. Remove flame sensor sight glass.
11. Flame Sensor Sight Glass Installation.
See figure 2.
A. Install flame sensor sight glass. Tighten sight glass to 315-345 lb in. (35.6-39.0 N·m) of
torque.
B. Install heat shield cover and secure with four bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m)
of torque.
C. Install flame sensor bracket and secure to CRF flange bracket with three bolts. Tighten bolts
D. Install flame sensor per paragraph 7.

8 Blank Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1516 00
5WP 1516 00
WORK PACKAGE
IGNITER PLUG REPLACEMENT


1-7 ...... 5
8 Blank ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Igniter Plug Inspection ................................................................................................................ 4

Igniter Plug Installation............................................................................................................... 4
Igniter Plug Removal .................................................................................................................. 3
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1516 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the igniter plug.
NOTE
Two configurations exist: single igniter plug unit and double igniter
plug unit. Single igniter plugs are installed at the 3:00 o'clock position
and a blank off plug installed at the 5:00 o'clock position. With a
double igniter plug unit, igniter plugs are installed at the 3:00 and
5:00 o'clock positions.
None required.

Gage, Immersion Depth - Igniter Plug 2C6613G01
None required.
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1516 00
6. Igniter Plug Removal.
WARNING
Ignition system shall be inoperative for at least 2 minutes before

disconnecting ignition leads. Ignition system could be charged
with lethal high voltage.
CAUTION
• Ensure igniter plug adapter is restrained when loosening cou-

pling nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
• Igniter plug may fall out when ignition lead is disconnected.
A. Disconnect ignition lead from igniter plug adapter. See figure 1. Momentarily ground igni-
tion lead to remove any residual electrical charge.
B. Remove igniter plug and shims.

1
Figure 1. Igniter Plug and Lead
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1516 00
7. Igniter Plug Inspection.
A. Inspect igniter plug per table 1 and figure 2.

Table 1. Igniter Plug Inspection
On-Site Max On-Site Max

Inspect Serviceable Limits Repairable Limits Corrective Action
1. Visible wear or None allowed Not repairable Inspect per step 2
grooving on plug
tip area
2. Depth of wear or Not exceeding Not repairable Replace plug
groove 0.015 in. (0.38 mm)
deep or less than
0.621 in. (15.77 mm)
diameter
2
8. Igniter Plug Installation.
A. Determine number of shims required as follows (figure 3):
(1) Measure from outer surface of igniter plug adapter to outer surface of combustor ferrule
using immersion depth gage, 2C6613. Record as dimension A.
(2) Refer to table 2 to determine number of shims required.
B. Install required number of shims on igniter plug.
C. Install igniter plug into igniter plug adapter. See figure 1.
CAUTION
Ensure igniter plug adapter is restrained when tightening coupling
D. Install ignition lead over igniter plug adapter. Tighten coupling nut to 23.0-27.0 lb ft.
(31.2-36.6 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire coupling nut.
3
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1516 00
Figure 2. Igniter Plug Inspection
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1516 00
Figure 3. Igniter Plug Immersion Depth
Table 2. Igniter Plug Shims Requirement
Dimension A Number of Shims Required

2.463-2.494 inch (62.56-63.35 mm) 0
2.431-2.462 inch (61.75-62.53 mm) 1
2.399-2.430 inch (60.93-61.72 mm) 2
2.367-2.398 inch (60.12-60.91 mm) 3
2.335-2.366 inch (59.31-60.10 mm) 4
2.303-2.334 inch (58.50-59.28 mm) 5
2.271-2.302 inch (57.68-58.47 mm) 6
2.239-2.270 inch (56.87-57.66 mm) 7
2.207-2.238 inch (56.06-56.85 mm) 8
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1516 00
CAUTION
Do not operate igniter unit with cap or cover in place. Failure to

comply may result in damage to part.
E. If installing a single igniter unit in place of a double igniter unit, ensure correct plug and
washer are installed. Apply thread lubricant to thread before installation. Tighten plug to
540-600 lb in. (61.1-67.8 N·m) of torque. See figure 4.
4
Figure 4. Plug Installed - Single Igniter System

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1517 00
0WP 1517 00
WORK PACKAGE
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE
TEMPERATURE (T3) SENSOR REPLACEMENT


1-5 ...... 0
6 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
High Pressure Compressor Discharge Temperature (T3) Sensor Installation ............................ 3

High Pressure Compressor Discharge Temperature (T3) Sensor Removal ................................ 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1517 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the HPC discharge tempera-
ture (T3) sensor. For detailed routing and clamping, see SWP 1913 02.
Title Number


Gasket MS9202-042 1
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1517 00
6. High Pressure Compressor Discharge Temperature (T3) Sensor Removal.
WARNING

CAUTION
Ensure that location of electrical connector is noted to aid at
installation. Failure to comply can cause unreliable engine
operation.
A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from T3 sensor integral lead. See figure 1.
1
B. Remove jamnut that secures T3 sensor integral lead to No. 3 electrical interface panel.
C. Remove bolts that secure T3 sensor integral lead clamps to brackets. Remove clamps from T3
sensor integral lead.
D. Remove bolts and washers that secure T3 sensor to high pressure compressor (HPC) rear
frame mounting boss.
E. Remove T3 sensor and gasket. Discard gasket.
7. High Pressure Compressor Discharge Temperature (T3) Sensor Installation.
See figure 1.
A. Install new gasket, P/N MS9202-042, and T3 sensor onto HPC rear frame mounting boss.
Forward (FWD) marking on T3 sensor must face toward front of engine.
NOTE
Maintain 5 inches (127 mm) minimum bend radius during routing of

T3 sensor integral lead.
B. Using four washers and bolts, secure T3 sensor onto HPC rear frame. Tighten bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
C. Install clamps onto T3 sensor integral lead.
D. Secure clamps onto brackets using bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1517 00
Figure 1. High Pressure Compressor Discharge Temperature (T3) Sensor
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1517 00
E. Secure T3 sensor integral lead to No. 3 electrical interface panel with jamnut. Tighten jamnut
to 25-35 lb in. (2.9-3.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire jamnut.
F. Connect electrical connector to T3 sensor integral lead as follows:
WARNING

backshell assembly.
NOTE
restrict mating.
5/(6 Blank)
6 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1610 00
0WP 1610 00
WORK PACKAGE
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE (CDP) AND
STAGE 8 BLEED VALVES REPLACEMENT


1-9 ...... 0
10 Blank . . . . . . 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Compressor Discharge Pressure (CDP) Bleed Valve Installation............................................... 5

Compressor Discharge Pressure (CDP) Bleed Valve Removal................................................... 3
Stage 8 Bleed Valve Installation ................................................................................................. 8
Stage 8 Bleed Valve Removal ..................................................................................................... 6
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1610 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the compressor discharge
pressure (CDP) and stage 8 bleed valves.
Title Number

None required.

Seal, Ring 0946 (FSCM 2
15284)
Seal, Ring 2873-600 (FSCM 2
15284)
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1610 00
6. Compressor Discharge Pressure (CDP) Bleed Valve Removal.
WARNING

CAUTION
Ensure that location of electrical connector is noted to aid at installation.

A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from CDP bleed valve. See figure 1.
1
B. Disconnect tubing from CDP bleed valve as follows:
(1) Position a waste fluid container beneath CDP bleed valve.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, is toxic to skin, eyes, and

respiratory tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid
repeated or prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
CAUTION

Failure to comply can result in part damage.
(2) Disconnect drain line coupling nut from CDP bleed valve fitting.
(3) Disconnect supply tube and return tube coupling nuts from CDP bleed valve fittings.
C. Remove V–clamps and ring seals that secure CDP bleed valve onto CDP bleed air tubes. Dis-
card ring seals.
D. Remove four bolts that secure CDP bleed valve onto mounting bracket. Remove CDP bleed
valve.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1610 00
Figure 1. CDP Bleed Valve
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1610 00
7. Compressor Discharge Pressure (CDP) Bleed Valve Installation.
See figure 1.
NOTE
• Bleed valve interfacing hardware may be installation specific.

Refer to packager's manual for specific procedure.
• Position bleed valve so that the flow arrow on the valve is oriented
so the bleed air flows away from the gas turbine. Ensure pneumatic
vents are not obstructed.
A. Position CDP bleed valve onto mounting bracket and install bolts. Tighten bolts to
100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
B. Install new ring seals, P/N 0946, between CDP bleed valve and CDP bleed air tubes and
secure with two V–clamps. Tighten V–clamps to 115-125 lb in. (13.0-14.1 N·m) of torque.
C. Connect tubing onto CDP bleed valve as follows:
CAUTION
nut. Failure to comply can result in part damage.
(1) Connect drain line coupling nut onto CDP bleed valve fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Connect supply tube coupling nut onto CDP bleed valve fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Connect return tube coupling nut onto CDP bleed valve fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
D. Connect electrical connector onto CDP bleed valve as follows:
WARNING

5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1610 00
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using teflon-
jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn or until plier slippage occurs.
NOTE
It may be necessary to loosen clamps that restrict mating.
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen clamps that
restrict mating.
8. Stage 8 Bleed Valve Removal.
WARNING

CAUTION

A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from stage 8 bleed valve. See figure 2.
2
B. Disconnect tubing from stage 8 bleed valve as follows:
(1) Position a waste fluid container beneath stage 8 bleed valve.
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fittings are restrained when loosening

coupling nuts, or damage can result.
(2) Disconnect drain line coupling nut from stage 8 bleed valve fitting.
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1610 00
Figure 2. Stage 8 Bleed Valve
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1610 00
(3) Disconnect supply tube and return tube coupling nuts from stage 8 bleed valve fittings.
C. Remove V–clamps and ring seals that secure stage 8 bleed valve to stage 8 bleed air tubes.
Remove stage 8 bleed valve. Discard ring seals.
9. Stage 8 Bleed Valve Installation.
See figure 2.
NOTE
• Bleed valve interfacing hardware may be installation specific.

Refer to packager's manual for specific procedure.
• Position bleed valve so that the flow arrow on the valve is oriented
so the bleed air flows away from the gas turbine. Ensure pneumatic
vents are not obstructed.
A. Install new ring seals, P/N 2873–600, between stage 8 bleed valve and stage 8 bleed air tubes.
Position stage 8 bleed valve and secure with two V–clamps. Tighten V–clamps to
115-125 lb in. (13.0-14.1 N·m) of torque.
B. Connect tubing to stage 8 bleed valve as follows:
CAUTION

nut, or damage can result.
(1) Connect drain line coupling nut onto stage 8 bleed valve fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Connect supply tube coupling nut onto stage 8 bleed valve fitting. Tighten coupling nut
(3) Connect return tube coupling nut onto stage 8 bleed valve fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1610 00
C. Connect electrical connector to stage 8 bleed valve as follows:
WARNING

jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn or until plier slippage occurs.
NOTE
It may be necessary to loosen clamps that restrict mating.
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen clamps that
restrict mating.
9/(10 Blank)
10 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1611 00
2WP 1611 00
WORK PACKAGE
ACOUSTIC SENSOR REPLACEMENT


1-7 ...... 2
8 Blank ...... 2
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Acoustic Sensor Installation........................................................................................................ 5

Acoustic Sensor Removal ........................................................................................................... 3
Change 2 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1611 00
1. Introduction.
This work package provides instructions for the removal and installation of two acoustic sensors
located on the compressor rear frame (CRF) of the engine.
Title Number
None required.

Seal Ring, Metal 4058T39P02 2
2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1611 00
6. Acoustic Sensor Removal.
WARNING

NOTE
There are two acoustic sensors installed on engine. Removal proce-

dure for acoustic sensor from compressor rear frame is same for both.
Remove integral lead for acoustic sensor per appropriate step.
A. Disconnect packager supplied cable to acoustic sensor integral lead per packager's manual.
B. Remove integral lead for acoustic sensor (1, figure 1) at 3:30 o'clock position forward look-
ing aft (FLA) from brackets as follows:
(1) Remove jamnut that secures integral lead to bracket (2). Remove integral lead from
bracket (2).
(2) Remove bolt (3) and cushioned loop clamp (4) that secure integral lead to bracket (5).
(4) Remove bolt (3), self-locking nut (8), and cushioned loop clamp (4) that secure integral
lead to cushioned loop clamp (7).
(5) Remove bolt (3) and cushioned loop clamp (4) that secure integral lead to cooling
manifold (9).
C. Remove integral lead for acoustic sensor (1) at 9:30 o'clock position from brackets as
follows:
(1) Remove jamnut that secures integral lead to bracket (10). Remove integral lead from
bracket (10).
(4) Remove bolts (3) and cushioned loop clamps (4) that secure integral lead to air tube (13).
1
D. Remove acoustic sensor (1) from compressor rear frame (CRF) (19) as follows:
(1) Remove bolts (15) that secure acoustic sensor flange (16) to adapter (17).
Change 2 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1611 00
Figure 1. Acoustic Sensor Removal/Installation (Sheet 1 of 2)
4 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1611 00
Figure 1. Acoustic Sensor Removal/Installation (Sheet 2 of 2)
(2) Remove acoustic sensor (1) from adapter (17). Remove and discard metal seal ring (18).
E. If required, remove adapter (17) and flat washer (14) from CRF (19).
7. Acoustic Sensor Installation.
A. If required, install adapter (17, figure 1) and flat washer (14) onto CRF (19) as follows:
(1) Coat threads of adapter (17) and contact faces of flat washer (14) with thread lubricant.
(2) Install adapter (17) and flat washer (14) into CRF (19). Tighten adapter to 143-157 lb in.
(16.2-17.7 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire adapter.
B. Install acoustic sensor (1) into CRF (19) as follows:
(1) Install metal seal ring (18) into acoustic sensor flange (16) adapter groove.
Change 2 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1611 00
CAUTION
Ensure metal seal ring remains properly seated in flange groove dur-
ing insertion of acoustic sensor, or a false sensor signal may result.
(2) Carefully install acoustic sensor (1) into adapter (17).
(3) Lightly coat threads of bolts (15) with thread lubricant.
(4) Using bolts (15), secure acoustic sensor (1) to adapter (17). Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(5) Tighten bolts (15) to 190-230 lb in. (21.5-26.0 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
C. Route integral lead for acoustic sensor (1) at 3:30 o'clock position (FLA) as follows:
CAUTION
Ensure placement of clamps maintain 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) clear-

ance between integral lead and adjacent hardware.
NOTE
Boltheads shall be installed facing up or forward.
(2) Using bolt (3) and cushioned loop clamp (4), secure integral lead to cooling
manifold (9). Tighten bolt finger-tight.
(3) Using bolt (3), self-locking nut (8), and cushioned loop clamp (4), secure integral lead to
cushioned loop clamp (7). Tighten bolt finger-tight.
(4) Using bolt (3) and cushioned loop clamp (4), secure integral lead to bracket (6). Tighten
bolt finger-tight.
bolt finger-tight.
(6) Using jamnut, secure integral lead to bracket (2). Torque jamnut 1/4 to 1/2 turn beyond
finger-tight.
(7) Inspect alignment of integral lead. Ensure bend radius of lead exhibits smooth transition
with no evidence of kinking. Adjust integral lead as required.
6 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1611 00
D. Route integral lead for acoustic sensor (1) at 9:30 o'clock position (FLA) as follows:
CAUTION
Ensure placement of clamps maintain 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) clear-

ance between integral lead and adjacent hardware.
NOTE
Boltheads shall be installed facing up or forward.
(2) Using bolt (3) and cushioned loop clamps (4), secure integral lead to air tube (13).
Tighten bolts finger-tight.
bolt finger-tight.
(4) Using bolts (3) and cushioned loop clamp (4), secure integral lead to bracket (11).
Tighten bolt finger-tight.
(5) Using jamnut, secure integral lead to bracket (10). Torque jamnut 1/4 to 1/2 turn beyond
finger-tight.
(6) Inspect alignment of integral lead. Ensure bend radius of lead exhibits smooth transition
with no evidence of kinking. Adjust integral lead as required.
E. Connect acoustic sensor integral leads to control system per packager's manual.

8 Blank Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1710 00
5WP 1710 00
WORK PACKAGE
LOW PRESSURE ROTOR SPEED (XNSD) SENSOR
REPLACEMENT


1-7 ...... 5
8 Blank ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Low Pressure Rotor Speed (XNSD) Sensor Installation............................................................. 6

Low Pressure Rotor Speed (XNSD) Sensor Removal ................................................................ 3
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1710 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the low pressure rotor speed
(XNSD) sensor. There are two XNSD sensors on the low pressure turbine (LPT) rotor, one at
2:30 o'clock position, and one at 9:30 o'clock position. For detailed routing and clamping, see
SWP 1913 03.
Title Number
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module External Tubing, SWP 1913 03
Harnesses, and Clamping
Safety-Wiring of Low Pressure Rotor Speed (XNSD) Sensor LM6000-IND-165
Electrical Connector (PA Uprate, PC, and PD Models)

Safety Wire R297P04 (ALT)

2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1710 00
6. Low Pressure Rotor Speed (XNSD) Sensor Removal.
NOTE
Turbine rear frame (TRF) insulation blankets are no longer required

and can be removed and discarded.
A. If installed, remove insulation blankets as follows:
(1) Remove bolt and nut securing strap around blankets, and remove strap. Discard strap.
(2) Remove bolts, nuts, and washers attaching insulation brackets to TRF aft flange. Discard
brackets.
(3) Remove safety wire securing blankets together at three locations.
(4) Remove all insulation blankets from TRF. Discard blankets.
(5) Reinstall bolt, washer, and nut attaching electrical bracket to TRF aft flange at
4:30 o’clock position. Tighten nut to 190-230 lb in. (21.5-26.0 N·m) of torque.
WARNING

CAUTION

B. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from XNSD sensor. See figure 1.
1
WARNING
Use extreme care when working with springs under compression.

Serious injury could result if spring is suddenly released.
C. If Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-165 has been accomplished, remove safety wire from bolt.
Remove nut and bolt that secure clamp to bracket. Remove clamp from XNSD sensor.
D. Remove nuts and bolts that secure bracket and spring retainer to adapter strut.
E. Remove bracket, spring retainer, and spring from adapter strut.
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1710 00
Figure 1. Low Pressure Rotor Speed (XNSD) Sensor
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1710 00
CAUTION
Shim spacers must be separated or pulled away from XNSD sensor

to allow removal of sensor, or damage to sensor will occur.
F. Loosen four bolts and nuts attaching adapter strut to TRF strut. Do not remove bolts and nuts.
G. Pull XNSD sensor out about 0.25 inch (6.4 mm).
H. Pull shim spacers, located between adapter strut and TRF strut, out as far as possible. Shim
spacers are not removable. See figure 2.
CAUTION
Use care when removing sensor to avoid damage to sensor tip.
I. Pull XNSD sensor straight out of strut.
J. Remove and discard preformed packings from sensor tip.

2
Figure 2. Shim Spacers Pulled Out for XNSD Sensor Removal/Installation
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1710 00
7. Low Pressure Rotor Speed (XNSD) Sensor Installation.
CAUTION
Use care when installing sensor to avoid damage to sensor tip.
A. Lubricate new preformed packings with petrolatum and install onto XNSD sensor. See
figure 1.
B. Ensure shim spacers, located between adapter strut and TRF strut, are pulled out as far as
possible or sensor cannot be installed. See figure 2.
C. Slide XNSD sensor straight down into strut.
D. Slide shim spacers together around XNSD sensor and secure with four bolts and nuts.
E. Install spring onto XNSD sensor. See figure 1.
NOTE
Pressure must be kept on spring retainer until nuts are tightened.
F. Install spring retainer and bracket onto adapter strut and secure with bolts and nuts. Tighten
nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
G. Connect electrical connector (4, figure 3) to XNSD sensor as follows:
WARNING

NOTE
It may be necessary to loosen lead clamps that restrict seating of

electrical connector.
(1) Engage connector with mating sensor connector and turn knurled coupling ring (5) while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) Fully seat connector (4) by hand. Tighten coupling ring (5) using Teflon-jawed pliers.
Tighten connector 1/4-1/2 turn beyond finger-tight.
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1710 00
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3) as required, to ensure electrical connector (4) is seated.
H. Install clamp (3) onto bracket. Secure clamp to bracket with bolt (1) and existing nut (2).
I. If Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-165 has been accomplished, safety-wire knurled coupling

ring (5) to new bolt (1).
3
Figure 3. XNSD Sensor

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1711 00
5WP 1711 00
WORK PACKAGE
LOW PRESSURE TURBINE INLET TEMPERATURE
(T48) THERMOCOUPLE REPLACEMENT/INSPECTION


1-7 ...... 5
8 Blank ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature (T48) Thermocouple Inspection................................ 3

Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature (T48) Thermocouple Installation .............................. 7
Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature (T48) Thermocouple Removal .................................. 3
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1711 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removal, inspection, and installation the low pres-
sure turbine (LPT) inlet temperature (T48) thermocouple. Refer to SWP 1913 03 for routing of
T48 harnesses.
Title Number
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module External Tubing, SWP 1913 03
Harnesses, and Clamping

Heat Gun Local Purchase

Gasket 9379M93P01 8
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1711 00
6. Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature (T48) Thermocouple Removal.
See figure 1.
A. Loosen nuts that secure thermocouple harness to T48 thermocouple. Disconnect thermocou-
ple harness from T48 thermocouple.
B. Remove bolts that secure T48 thermocouple to LPT case. Remove T48 thermocouple.
C. Remove and discard gasket.
7. Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature (T48) Thermocouple Inspection.
A. Inspect thermocouples per table 1 and figure 2.
Table 1. Thermocouple Inspection Criteria
On-Site Max On-Site Max On-Site

1. Support and Sheath for:
a. Corrosion/oxidation 0.228 inch (5.8 mm) Not repairable Replace probe
diameter at mid point
inlet gas port
b. Missing material (includ- None allowed Not repairable Replace probe
ing tip)
c. Bowed support 0.090 inch (2.29 mm) Not repairable Replace probe
at end of support
d. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace probe
2. Electrical Circuitry for: (thermocouple elements)
WARNING
NOTE
Clean probe with clean cloth and alcohol. Dry with jet of dry, filtered
compressed air. Disconnect electrical harness. Measure resistance
with one ohmmeter lead on each threaded stud, then reverse ohmmeter
leads and average resistance values.
a. Chromel to alumel circuit 2.4 to 4.1 ohms Not repairable Replace probe
resistance
b. Insulation resistance >10 Mohms each Not repairable Replace probe
(refer to steps B. and C.)
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1711 00
1
Figure 1. Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature (T48) Thermocouple
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1711 00
2
Figure 2. Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature (T48) Thermocouple Inspection
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1711 00
B. Preferred method of measuring insulation resistance:
(1) Heat probe in oven at 400°F (204°C) for 1 hour.
WARNING
Wear insulated gloves to prevent injury when handling hot

parts.
(2) Place probe into a container of demineralized water. Ensure water fills inside of all
cavities.
(3) Remove temperature probe from water and dry for 5 minutes in air, heating to 200 to
300°F (93.3 to 148.9°C) using heat gun.
(4) Individually measure resistance, using hi-pot megaohmmeter, of each threaded stud to
probe body.
C. Alternate method of measuring insulation resistance:
(1) Place probe in a container of demineralized water. Ensure water fills inside of all
cavities.
(2) Individually measure resistance, using ohmmeter, of each threaded stud to probe body.
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1711 00
8. Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature (T48) Thermocouple Installation.
See figure 1.
A. Install new gasket, P/N 9379M93P01, onto LPT case.
B. Install T48 thermocouple into LPT case with flat side of flange facing aft. Using thread lubri-
cant, lubricate threads and friction surfaces of bolts and secure thermocouple with bolts.
C. Ensure curved spring washer is in place, and connect thermocouple harness to T48
thermocouple and secure with nuts.
CAUTION
Do not over tighten thermocouple harness nuts. Failure to comply

may result in part damage.
D. Tighten largest diameter nut to 29-33 lb in. (3.3-3.7 N·m) of torque. Tighten smallest
diameter nut to 16-18 lb in. (1.8-2.0 N·m) of torque.

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1712 00
5WP 1712 00
WORK PACKAGE
LOW PRESSURE TURBINE INLET PRESSURE (P48)
PROBE REPLACEMENT


1-4 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Pressure (P48) Probe Inspection..................................................... 3

Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Pressure (P48) Probe Installation ................................................... 4
Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Pressure (P48) Probe Removal ....................................................... 3
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1712 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the low pressure turbine
(LPT) inlet pressure (P48) probe.
Title Number
None required.
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec. TT-I-735

Gasket 1538M42P01 1
Gasket 1538M42P02 (ALT)
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1712 00
6. Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Pressure (P48) Probe Removal.
A. Disconnect pressure sensing tube from P48 pressure probe. See figure 1.
B. Remove safety wire. Remove bolts and washers that secure P48 probe onto LPT case.
Remove P48 probe.
7. Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Pressure (P48) Probe Inspection.
A. Clean probe using isopropyl alcohol to remove external dirt. Total probe immersion
is permitted.
B. Inspect probe per table 1 and figure 1.
Table 1. LPT Pressure Probe

1. Sheath Area for:
a. Corrosion/ Minimum TBD diame- Not repairable Replace probe
oxidation ter at mid point of inlet
gas port
b. Missing None allowed Not repairable Replace probe
material
(including tip)
c. Bowed support 0.090 inch (2.29 mm) Not repairable Replace probe
at end of support
d. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace probe
2. Probe Sensing Holes for:
a. Hole diameters 0.045-0.048 inch (1.14- Not repairable Replace probe
1.22 mm) diameter
b. Blockage None allowed Not repairable Replace probe
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1712 00
8. Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Pressure (P48) Probe Installation.
A. Install new gasket, P/N 1538M42P01, onto LPT case. See figure 1.
B. Install P48 pressure probe in LPT case so that holes in probe face forward. Secure probe with
two washers and bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m ) of torque. Safety-wire
bolts.
C. Connect pressure sensing tube to P48 probe per packager's manual.

1
Figure 1. Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Pressure (P48) Probe
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1713 00
0WP 1713 00
WORK PACKAGE
THRUST BALANCE VALVE (TBV) ASSEMBLY
REPLACEMENT


1-8 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Thrust Balance Valve (TBV) Assembly Installation................................................................... 6

Thrust Balance Valve (TBV) Assembly Removal ...................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1713 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the thrust balance valve
(TBV) assembly, including changing orifices.
Title Number

Reference GEK GEK 105062, Illustrated Parts Breakdown (IPB).

E-Seal 2873-400 2
Seal Ring, Metal J1128P24 2
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1713 00
6. Thrust Balance Valve (TBV) Assembly Removal.
WARNING

CAUTION
Ensure that location of electrical connector is noted to aid at instal-
lation. Failure to comply can cause unreliable engine operation.
A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from TBV assembly.
B. Disconnect tubing from TBV assembly as follows (figure 1):

1
(1) Position a waste fluid container beneath TBV assembly.
WARNING

CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when loosening coupling nut,

or damage can result.
(2) Disconnect drain tube coupling nut from TBV valve fitting.
(3) Disconnect supply tube and return tube coupling nuts from TBV assembly fittings.
C. Disconnect packager supplied piping connections to TBV assembly inlet, discharge, and
bypass connections per packager instructions. Discard bypass seal rings and E-seal (7). Han-
dle bypass orifice plate (1) with care to prevent damage to orifice.
D. Remove four bolts that secure TBV assembly to mounting bracket. Remove TBV assembly.
E. Disassemble TBV assembly as follows:
(1) Matchmark flange tee (2), flange to V adapter (9), and bleed air valve (8) flanges for
reassembly.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1713 00
Figure 1. TBV Assembly (Sheet 1 of 2)
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1713 00
Figure 1. TBV Assembly (Sheet 2 of 2)
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1713 00
(2) Remove V-band clamp connecting bleed air valve (8) to flange to V adapter (9). Discard
E-seal (7).
(3) Remove eight nuts (4) and bolts (3) that secure flange to V adapter (9) to flange tee (2).
Discard metal seal rings (5). Handle main orifice plate (6) with care to prevent damage to
orifice.
7. Thrust Balance Valve (TBV) Assembly Installation.
A. Assemble TBV assembly as follows (figure 1, sheet 2):
(1) Lubricate threads and washer faces of eight bolts (3) with thread lubricant. Install bolts
thorough boltholes in flange tee (2).
NOTE
Chamfered side of orifice in orifice plate faces away from flange on

flange tee.
(2) Install new metal seal ring (5), orifice plate (6) [with chamfered side of orifice away from
flange tee (2)], and new metal seal ring (5) over bolts (3) onto flange tee (2) flange face.
(3) Use matchmarks (if present) to align flange to V adapter (9) to flange tee (2). Install
flange to V adapter over bolts (3) and seat on metal seal rings (5) and orifice plate (6).
Secure assembly with nuts.
(4) Tighten nuts in crisscross pattern to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
(5) Install new E-seal (7) onto inlet flange of bleed air valve (8).
(6) Use matchmarks (if present) to align V flange of flange to V adapter (9) to inlet flange of
bleed air valve (8). Seat flange to V adapter onto bleed air valve and secure with pack-
ager supplied V-band type clamp as follows:
(a) Tighten clamp nut to approximately 60 lb in. (6.8 N·m) of torque. Check to ensure
clamp is seated over flanges equally around circumference, and E-seal is properly
seated. Loosen clamp and reseat as necessary.
(b) Using soft-faced mallet, lightly tap around circumference of clamp to seat evenly.
(c) Continue to tap around clamp to ensure even seating, and tighten clamp nut to
115-125 lb in. (13.0-14.1 N·m) of torque.
(d) Tap around circumference of clamp. Retighten nut to 115-125 lb in. (13.0-14.1 N·m)
of torque.
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1713 00
NOTE
Preferred orientation of valve is shown on sheet 2.
B. Install TBV assembly on mounting bracket and secure with packager-supplied bolts. Tighten
C. Connect TBV assembly inlet per packager instructions and as follows (figure 1, sheet 1):
(1) Install new packager-supplied seal ring onto flange of flange tee.
(2) Align packager-supplied high pressure compressor stage 11 tube flange to flange tee and
install packager-supplied bolts. Ensure seal is properly seated. Install nuts onto bolts and
tighten in crisscross pattern to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
D. Connect TBV assembly outlet per packager instructions and as follows:
(1) Install new E-seal (7) onto outlet flange of bleed air valve (8).
(2) Align packager-supplied thrust balance interface tube to bleed air valve (8). Secure tube
onto valve with packager-supplied V-band type clamp as follows:
(a) Tighten clamp nut to approximately 60 lb in. (6.8 N·m) of torque. Check to ensure
clamp is seated over flanges equally around circumference, and E-seal (7) is prop-
erly seated. Loosen clamp and reseat as necessary.
(b) Using soft-faced mallet, lightly tap around circumference of clamp to seat clamp
evenly.
(c) Continue to tap around clamp to ensure even seating, and tighten clamp nut to
115-125 lb in. (13.0-14.1 N·m) of torque.
(d) Tap around circumference of clamp. Retighten nut to 115-125 lb in. (13.0-14.1 N·m)
of torque.
E. Connect TBV assembly bypass per packager instructions as follows:
NOTE
Chamfered side of orifice in orifice plate faces away from flange on

flange tee.
(1) Install packager-supplied seal ring, orifice plate (1) [with chamfered side of orifice away
from flange tee (2)], and new packager-supplied seal ring onto flange T flange face.
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1713 00
(2) Align packager-supplied bypass tube onto flange T flange face. Secure with packager-
supplied bolts and nuts. Ensure seals and orifice plate are properly seated.
(3) Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when loosening coupling nut,

or damage can result.
F. Align and connect packager-supplied supply tube, return tube, and drain tube onto bleed air
valve (8) fittings. Tighten coupling nuts as follows:
(1) Tighten return tube coupling nut to 270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Tighten drain tube coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(3) Tighten supply tube coupling nut to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
G. Check supply, return, and drain connections for leakage per packager instructions.
H. Connect electrical cable as follows:
WARNING

(1) Align and install cable harness connector onto bleed air valve receptacle. Turn coupling
ring while wiggling the back shell assembly.
(2) After seating connector by hand, tighten the coupling ring using Teflon-jawed pliers.
Tighten 1/4-1/2 turn, or until pliers slip on coupling ring.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling the connector assembly. No movement between mat-
ing connectors is allowed.
NOTE
restrict mating.
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1811 00
0WP 1811 00
WORK PACKAGE
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT (HCU) AND HYDRAULIC
FILTER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT


1 - 10 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Installation ................................................................................ 6

Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Removal .................................................................................... 3
Hydraulic Filter Assembly Installation ....................................................................................... 9
Hydraulic Filter Assembly Removal........................................................................................... 9
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1811 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the hydraulic control unit
(HCU) and hydraulic filter assembly.
Title Number


Gasket, Seal L28004P01 1
Gasket, Seal L28004P03 1 (ALT)
Gasket, Seal - Fuel Filter 9011M60P01 1
Gasket, Seal J219P03 1
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1811 00
6. Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Removal.
WARNING

CAUTION
Ensure location of electrical connectors is noted to aid at installation.

A. Tag and disconnect electrical connectors. See figure 1.
B. Position waste fluid container under HCU.
NOTE
C. Disconnect tubing as follows (figure 2):
WARNING
(1) Remove bolts and washers that secure variable bypass valve (VBV) head and rod hoses
to HCU. Remove and inspect seal gaskets for serviceability. Discard damaged seal
gasket.
CAUTION
Ensure that connecting fitting is restrained when loosening coupling nut.

(2) Disconnect variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) head and rod tubes from HCU.
(3) Disconnect variable stator vane (VSV) head and rod tubes from HCU.
1
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1811 00
Figure 1. HCU Electrical Connectors
(4) Disconnect thrust balance vane (TBV) head and rod tubes from HCU.
(5) On left side of HCU, disconnect bleed supply and bleed return tubes from HCU. See
figure 3.
NOTE
Ensure HCU is supported while removing nuts and washers. HCU

weighs approximately 75 lbs (34 kg).
D. Remove nuts and washers that secure HCU to variable geometry (VG) hydraulic pump. Slide
HCU off mounting studs. See figure 4.
E. Remove and discard gasket.
NOTE
If same HCU will be installed, disregard step F.
F. Remove all fittings. Remove and discard preformed packings.

4
3
2
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1811 00
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1811 00
Figure 3. HCU Bleed Tubes
7. Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Installation.
NOTE
If HCU fittings are already installed, proceed to step B.
A. Install HCU fittings as follows (figure 2):
WARNING

(1) Lubricate new packings using lubricating oil.
(2) Install new packings, P/N J221P910, onto VIGV, VSV, and TBV head port fittings.
Install fittings on HCU. Tighten fittings to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
(3) Install new packings, P/N J221P908, onto VIGV, VSV, and TBV rod port fittings. Install
fittings on HCU. Tighten fittings to 270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1811 00
Figure 4. HCU
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1811 00
B. Install new seal gasket, P/N L28004P01, onto VG hydraulic pump. See figure 4.
NOTE
Ensure HCU is supported while installing washers and nuts. HCU

weighs approximately 75 lbs (34 kg).
C. Install HCU onto VG hydraulic pump and secure with washers and nuts. Tighten nuts to
100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
D. Connect tubing as follows (figure 2):
CAUTION

(1) Connect TBV, VSV, and VIGV head tubes onto HCU. Tighten head tube coupling nuts
(2) Connect TBV, VSV, and VIGV rod tubes onto HCU. Tighten rod tube coupling nuts to
450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(3) Install new or serviceable seal gasket, P/N J219P03, onto VBV rod-end port. Using
washers and bolts, secure VBV rod hose onto HCU. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in.
(4) Install seal gasket, P/N J219P04, onto VBV head-end port. Using washers and bolts,
secure VBV head hose onto HCU. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
(5) Connect bleed supply tube onto HCU. See figure 3. Tighten supply tube coupling nut to
54-64 lb ft (73.3-86.7 N·m).
(6) Connect bleed return tube onto HCU. Tighten return tube coupling nut to 79-91 lb ft
(107.2-123.3 N·m).
CAUTION
Ensure electrical connectors are installed at the proper positions.
Failure to comply will cause unreliable engine operation.
E. Connect electrical connectors. See figure 1.
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1811 00
WARNING

backshell assembly.
NOTE
restrict mating.
8. Hydraulic Filter Assembly Removal.
See figure 5.
A. Position waste fluid container under hydraulic filter assembly.
WARNING

B. Remove bolts, nuts, and washers that secure hydraulic filter assembly to HCU. Pull hydraulic
filter assembly away from HCU.

5
9. Hydraulic Filter Assembly Installation.
See figure 5.
A. Install new gasket, P/N 9011M60P01, onto hydraulic filter assembly.
B. Install hydraulic filter assembly to HCU and secure with bolts, nuts, and washers. Tighten
bolts and nuts to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1811 00
Figure 5. Hydraulic Filter Assembly
10
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1812 00
0WP 1812 00
WORK PACKAGE
VARIABLE GEOMETRY HYDRAULIC PUMP
REPLACEMENT


1-4 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Variable Geometry Hydraulic Pump Installation ........................................................................ 3

Variable Geometry Hydraulic Pump Removal............................................................................ 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1812 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the variable geometry
hydraulic pump.
A. Remove hydraulic control unit (HCU) per WP 1811 00.
B. At the operator's option, the variable geometry hydraulic pump and the HCU may be
removed as a unit. In this case, all steps of WP 1811 00 must be performed, except for sepa-
rating the HCU from the pump.
Title Number
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) and Hydraulic Filter Assembly WP 1811 00
Replacement
None required.

2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1812 00
6. Variable Geometry Hydraulic Pump Removal.
See figure 1.
A. Position waste fluid container under pump.

1
WARNING

B. Remove nuts and washers that secure oil supply tube onto pump.
C. Remove nuts and washers that secure oil supply tube onto eductor block. Remove tube and
seal gaskets. Inspect gaskets for serviceability. Discard damaged gasket.
D. Remove nuts and washers that secure eductor tube onto pump.
E. Remove nuts and washers that secure eductor tube onto eductor block. Remove tube and seal
gaskets. Inspect gaskets for serviceability. Discard damaged gasket.
F. Remove nuts and washers that secure pump onto gearbox adapter. Remove and discard pre-
formed packing.
7. Variable Geometry Hydraulic Pump Installation.
See figure 1.
A. Lubricate new preformed packing, P/N J221P260, with petrolatum. Install preformed pack-
ing into pump packing groove.
B. Align pump alignment pin with hole in gearbox flange. Engage pump spline in gearshaft.
Push pump into position against gearbox adapter and secure with washers and nuts. Tighten
nuts evenly, in small increments, in a crisscross pattern to draw pump to gearbox adapter
flange. Tighten nuts to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
C. Position two new or serviceable oil supply tube seal gaskets, P/N J219P07, one at pump and
one at eductor block. Install oil supply tube and secure with nuts and washers. Tighten nuts to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
D. Position new or serviceable eductor tube seal gaskets, P/N J219P05 and P/N J219P04, at
pump and eductor block. Install eductor tube and secure with nuts and washers. Tighten nuts
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1812 00
Figure 1. Variable Geometry Hydraulic Pump
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1813 00
0WP 1813 00
WORK PACKAGE
LUBE AND SCAVENGE PUMP REPLACEMENT


1 - 12 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Lube and Scavenge Pump Installation ........................................................................................ 7

Lube and Scavenge Pump Removal............................................................................................ 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1813 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the lube and scavenge pump.
Title Number
Magnetic Chip Detector Replacement WP 1910 00


Gasket, Round 9608M12P04 1
Gasket, Seal 9013M28P02 1
Gasket, Seal 9013M28P01 (ALT)
Gasket, Seal 9013M29P01 (ALT)
Gasket Packager-Supplied 3
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1813 00
6. Lube and Scavenge Pump Removal.
A. Remove lube and scavenge pump as follows:
(1) Remove electrical cables from clips on electrical bracket.
WARNING

CAUTION
(2) Tag and disconnect electrical connectors from chip detectors and resistance temperature
detector (RTD)s. See figure 1.
1
(3) Position waste fluid container under lube and scavenge pump.
WARNING

NOTE
Ensure lube oil supply is shut off before disconnecting tubing.
(4) Disconnect tubes and hoses from lube and scavenge pump and oil manifolds.
NOTE
Ensure lube and scavenge pump is supported when removing V-band

clamp. Lube and scavenge pump weighs approximately 25 lbs
(11.3 kg).
(5) Remove V-band clamp that secures lube and scavenge pump. See figure 2. Pull pump
straight out until drive spline clears gearbox. Remove round gasket and inspect for ser-
viceability. Discard damaged gasket.
2
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1813 00
Figure 1. Lube and Scavenge Pump and Oil Manifold Ports (Sheet 1 of 2)
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1813 00
Figure 1. Lube and Scavenge Pump and Oil Manifold Ports (Sheet 2 of 2)
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1813 00
Figure 2. Lube and Scavenge Pump
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1813 00
NOTE
If same lube and scavenge pump will be installed, disregard steps B.,
C., and D.
B. Remove oil manifolds as follows (figure 3):

3
(1) Remove bolts (1 and 9) and washers (2 and 10) that secure oil supply manifold ( 3), oil
lube and scavenge manifold (11), and scavenge oil manifold (14) onto lube and scavenge
pump (20). Remove manifolds.
(2) Disconnect coupling nut on air/oil separator tube (5). Remove air/oil separator fitting (8).
Remove and discard preformed packing (7).
(3) Remove bolts (4) that secure air/oil separator tube (5) onto lube and scavenge pump (20)
lube and scavenge. Remove air/oil separator tube.
(4) Remove bolts (16) and washers (17) that secure E-sump scavenge oil manifold (18) onto
lube and scavenge pump (20). Remove manifold.
(5) Remove gaskets (6, 12, 13, 15, and 19) and inspect for serviceability. Discard damaged
gaskets.
C. Remove spline lube and seal drain fittings. Remove and discard packings.
D. Remove chip detectors from lube and scavenge pump per WP 1910 00.
7. Lube and Scavenge Pump Installation.
NOTE
If chip detectors, spline lube and seal drain fittings, and oil manifolds
are installed, disregard steps A., B., and C.
A. Install chip detectors into lube and scavenge pump per WP 1910 00.
B. Install fittings as follows (figure 2):
WARNING

(1) Lubricate new preformed packings, P/N J221P904, with lubricating oil. Install pre-
formed packings onto spline lube and seal drain fittings.
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1813 00
Figure 3. Typical Oil Manifolds
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1813 00
(2) Install spline lube and seal drain fittings into spline lube and seal drain ports. Tighten fit-
tings to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
C. Install oil manifolds as follows (figure 3):
(1) Install new or serviceable gaskets (12, 13, and 15), P/N 9013M29P02, P/N
9013M28P02, and P/N 9013M30P02, onto lube and scavenge pump (20).
(2) Position oil supply manifold (3), oil lube and scavenge manifold (11), and scavenge oil
manifold (14) onto lube and scavenge pump (20) and secure with washers (2 and 10) and
bolts (1 and 9). Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Install new or serviceable gasket (19), P/N J219P04, onto rear of lube and scavenge
pump (20). Install E-sump scavenge oil manifold (18) and secure with washers (17) and
bolts (16). Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
(4) Install new gasket (6), P/N J219P02, onto air/oil separator tube (5). Connect air/oil sepa-
rator tube (5) onto lube and scavenge pump (20) and secure with bolts (4). Tighten bolts
WARNING

(5) Lubricate new preformed packing (7), P/N J221P910, with lubricating oil. Install pre-
formed packing onto air/oil separator fitting (8).
CAUTION
Ensure that connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
(6) Connect air/oil separator tube (5) to air/oil separator fitting (8). Tighten coupling nut to
650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
D. Install lube and scavenge pump as follows (figure 2):
(1) Install round gasket, P/N 9608M12P04, onto lube and scavenge pump. Align hole in gas-
ket with antitorque pin on pump.
(2) Position lube and scavenge pump in front of gearbox, aligning drive shaft splines and
antitorque pin. Slide pump into gearbox until housing seats.
9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1813 00
NOTE
Ensure lube and scavenge pump is supported while installing V-band

clamp. Lube and scavenge pump weighs approximately 25 lbs
(11.3 kg).
(3) Secure lube and scavenge pump onto gearbox using V-band clamp. Tighten clamp to
70-90 lb in. (8.0-10.1 N·m) of torque.
E. Connect oil tubes and hoses as follows (figure 2):
(1) Install packager-supplied gasket. Connect oil tube onto lube supply outlet (L3) port and
secure with bolts. Tighten bolts to 325-425 lb in. (36.8-48.0 N·m) of torque.
(2) Install packager-supplied gasket. Connect oil tube onto lube supply inlet (L1) port and
(3) Install packager-supplied gasket. Connect oil tube onto scavenge discharge (L2) port and
CAUTION
Ensure that connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
(4) Connect lube oil tube onto lube discharge port fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
900-1090 lb in. (101.7-123.1 N·m) of torque.
(5) Connect oil tube onto supply pressure (L4) port fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(6) Connect scavenge tube onto scavenge discharge pressure (L5) port fitting. Tighten cou-
(7) Connect oil manifold tube onto gearbox oil supply port fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(8) Connect oil tube onto compressor rear frame (CRF) oil supply port fitting. Tighten cou-
(9) Connect oil tube onto turbine rear frame (TRF) oil supply port fitting. Tighten coupling
(10) Connect accessory gearbox scavenge tube/hose onto accessory gearbox (AGB) scavenge
in port fitting. Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
10
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1813 00
(11) Connect D-sump lube scavenge tube onto D-sump scavenge in port fitting. Tighten cou-
(12) Connect E-sump lube scavenge tube onto E-sump scavenge in port fitting. Tighten cou-
(13) Install new gasket, P/N J219P05, onto transfer gearbox scavenge tube. Connect tube onto
transfer gearbox scavenge in port and secure with bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(14) Install new gasket, P/N J219P05, onto B-sump scavenge tube. Connect tube onto
B-sump scavenge in port and secure with bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(15) Install new gasket, P/N J219P05, onto C-sump scavenge tube. Install tube onto C sump
scavenge in port and secure with bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of
torque.
(16) Connect oil tube onto spline lube port fitting. Tighten coupling nut to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(17) Connect hose assembly onto seal drain port fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
F. Connect electrical connectors to RTDs and chip detectors as follows:
WARNING
backshell assembly.
11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1813 00
NOTE
restrict mating.
G. Install electrical cables into clips on electrical bracket.
12
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1814 00
0WP 1814 00
WORK PACKAGE
PNEUMATIC STARTER REPLACEMENT


1-7 ...... 0
8 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Pneumatic Starter Installation ..................................................................................................... 6

Pneumatic Starter Removal......................................................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1814 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the pneumatic starter.
(Reference kit, P/N 682L184.)
B. Prior to operation, service new pneumatic starter per WP 4022 00.
Title Number
Pneumatic Starter Servicing WP 4022 00


Gasket 9107M23P01 1
Gasket L22281P02 1
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1814 00
6. Pneumatic Starter Removal.
WARNING

CAUTION

A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from pneumatic starter. See figure 1.
1
CAUTION
Ensure air supply is shut off before disconnecting air/gas inlet hose.
B. Remove V-band clamp that secures air/gas inlet hose onto pneumatic starter. Remove and dis-
card gasket.
C. Disconnect air/gas outlet hose from pneumatic starter per packager's manual.
D. Position waste fluid container under pneumatic starter.
WARNING

CAUTION

E. Disconnect tubes and hoses from pneumatic starter fittings.

2
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1814 00
Figure 1. Pneumatic Starter
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1814 00
Figure 2. Pneumatic Starter Fittings
NOTE
Ensure pneumatic starter is supported when removing nuts. Pneumatic

starter weighs approximately 50 lbs (22.7 kg).
F. Remove nuts that secure pneumatic starter to transfer gearbox (TGB). Reposition oil scav-
enge tube bracket. Remove pneumatic starter.
G. Remove and discard gasket.
H. Remove and discard preformed packings from starter drive shaft.
NOTE
If same pneumatic starter will be installed, proceed to paragraph 7.
I. Remove fittings and discard packings. See figure 2.
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1814 00
7. Pneumatic Starter Installation.
A. If a new pneumatic starter is installed, service starter per WP 4022 00.
NOTE
If fittings are already installed, proceed to step C.
B. Install fittings as follows (figure 2):
WARNING

(1) Lubricate all new preformed packings using lubricating oil.
(2) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P906, onto reducer. Install reducer into air sup-
ply port.
(3) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P904, onto elbow. Install elbow into oil scav-
enge port. Tighten jamnut finger-tight.
(4) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P908, onto union. Install union into oil scav-
enge port. Tighten union to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque.
C. Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P222, onto pneumatic starter drive shaft. See
figure 1.
D. Install new gasket, P/N 9107M23P01, onto TGB starter adapter.
NOTE
Ensure pneumatic starter is supported when installing nuts. Pneumatic

E. Align pneumatic starter so maintenance drain plug is at 6:00 o'clock position and install onto
TGB. Install oil scavenge tube bracket onto TGB studs. Secure starter and bracket using nuts.
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1814 00
F. Connect tubes and hoses as follows:
CAUTION

(1) Connect tube/hose onto air supply reducer. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in.
(50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(2) Align oil in elbow with oil tube. Tighten jamnut on elbow to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque. Connect oil tube onto oil in elbow. Tighten coupling nut to
135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Connect oil scavenge tube to oil scavenge union. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in.
(50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(4) Install new gasket, P/N L22281P02, on air/gas inlet hose. Using V-band clamp, secure
air/gas inlet hose to pneumatic starter. Tighten V-band clamp to 90-100 lb in.
(10.2-11.3 N·m) of torque.
(5) Install air/gas outlet hose onto pneumatic starter per packager's manual.
G. Connect electrical connector to pneumatic starter as follows:
WARNING
backshell assembly.
NOTE
restrict mating.
7/(8 Blank)
8 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1815 00
0WP 1815 00
WORK PACKAGE
HYDRAULIC STARTER AND DISTRIBUTOR ASSEMBLY
REPLACEMENT


1-6 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Distributor Assembly Installation ............................................................................................... 5

Distributor Assembly Removal ................................................................................................... 4
Hydraulic Starter Installation ...................................................................................................... 4
Hydraulic Starter Removal.......................................................................................................... 3
Seal Drain and Cooling Interface Installation............................................................................. 6
Seal Drain and Cooling Interface Removal................................................................................. 6
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1815 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing hydraulic starter and distrib-
utor assembly. (Reference kit, P/N 537L379G05.)
Title Number
None required.
Hydraulic Fluid MIL-L-17627

Gasket 9107M23P01 1
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1815 00
6. Hydraulic Starter Removal.
See figure 1.
WARNING
Hydraulic fluid is toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin

and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or prolonged con-
tact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
A. Position waste fluid container under hydraulic starter.
WARNING
Pressure of 100 psig exists in the supply lines. Relieve pressure to

prevent injury when disconnecting fittings.
CAUTION

B. Disconnect hydraulic lines per packager's manual.

1
Figure 1. Hydraulic Starter
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1815 00
NOTE
Ensure hydraulic starter is supported when removing nuts. Hydraulic

C. Remove nuts that secure hydraulic starter to gearbox. Remove hydraulic starter.
D. Remove and discard preformed packing from starter drive shaft.
E. Remove and discard gasket.
7. Hydraulic Starter Installation.
See figure 1.
A. Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P222, onto starter drive shaft.
B. Install new gasket, P/N 9107M23P01, onto gearbox starter adapter.
NOTE
Ensure hydraulic starter is supported when installing nuts. Hydraulic

C. Align hydraulic starter so cooling supply interface is at 12:00 o'clock position. Using nuts,
install hydraulic starter onto gearbox starter adapter. Tighten nuts to 190-230 lb in.
(21.5-25.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Ensure that connecting fitting is restrained when tightening

D. Connect hydraulic lines per packager's manual.
8. Distributor Assembly Removal.
See figure 2.
WARNING
Hydraulic fluid is toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin

tact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
A. Position waste fluid container under hydraulic starter.

2
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1815 00
Figure 2. Distributor Assembly
B. Disconnect hydraulic line to distributor assembly per packager's manual.
C. Remove bolts that secure distributor assembly to starter. Remove distributor assembly. Dis-
card preformed packing.
9. Distributor Assembly Installation.
See figure 2.
WARNING

A. Lubricate new preformed packing, P/N J221P219, using lubricating oil. Install packing onto
distributor assembly.
B. Using bolts, install distributor assembly onto starter. Tighten bolts to 250-320 lb in.
(28.3-36.1 N·m) of torque.
C. Connect hydraulic line to distributor assembly per packager's manual.
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1815 00
10. Seal Drain and Cooling Interface Removal.
See figure 1.
A. Remove fittings from case drain and seal drain ports. Discard preformed packings.
11. Seal Drain and Cooling Interface Installation.
See figure 1.
A. Install fittings as follows:
WARNING
(1) Lubricate all new preformed packings using lubricating oil.
(2) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P904, onto union. Install union into seal drain
port. Tighten union to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P912, onto union. Install union into case drain
port. Tighten union to 540-600 lb in. (61.1-67.8 N·m) of torque.
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1816 00
0WP 1816 00
WORK PACKAGE
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR SPEED (XN25)
SENSOR REPLACEMENT


1-5 ...... 0
6 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
High Pressure Compressor Speed (XN25) Sensor Installation................................................... 3

High Pressure Compressor Speed (XN25) Sensor Removal ...................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1816 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the high pressure compres-
sor speed (XN25) sensor.
Title Number

(RTV 106)

Gasket J219P04 1
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1816 00
6. High Pressure Compressor Speed (XN25) Sensor Removal.
WARNING

CAUTION

NOTE
There are two identical XN25 sensors on left side of gearbox.
A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from XN25 sensor. See figure 1.
B. Loosen jamnut and remove XN25 sensor from gearbox port. Remove and retain jamnut.
WARNING

CAUTION
Use care to ensure old silicone rubber adhesive does not fall into
gearbox. Failure to comply may cause part damage.
C. Using isopropyl alcohol, clean old silicone rubber adhesive from gearbox.
1
7. High Pressure Compressor Speed (XN25) Sensor Installation.
See figure 1.
A. Remove bolts that secure gearbox access cover. Remove access cover and gasket. Inspect gas-
ket for serviceability. Discard damaged gasket.
B. Install jamnut onto XN25 sensor.
C. Install and adjust XN25 sensor to meet required gap of 0.010-0.015 in. (0.25-0.38 mm)
between sensor tip and tooth crown of gear. Using feeler gage inserted through gearbox open-
ing, check for required gap through gearbox access opening.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1816 00
Figure 1. High Pressure Compressor Speed (XN25) Sensor
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1816 00
WARNING

D. Apply a thin bead of silicone rubber adhesive around XN25 sensor at gearbox. Diameter of
bead shall be approximately 0.06 inch (1.5 mm).
NOTE
Tighten jamnut while silicone rubber adhesive is still wet.
E. Hold XN25 sensor and tighten jamnut to 90-110 lb in. (10.2-12.4 N·m) of torque.
F. Using feeler gage, recheck gap between sensor tip and tooth crown of gear. Gap shall be
between 0.010-0.015 in. (0.25-0.38 mm). Safety-wire jamnut.
G. Install new or serviceable gasket, P/N J219P04, and cover onto gearbox access opening, and
secure using bolts. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
H. Connect electrical connector to XN25 sensor as follows:
WARNING
backshell assembly.
NOTE
restrict mating.
(5) Safety-wire electrical connector.
5/(6 Blank)
6 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1817 00
0WP 1817 00
WORK PACKAGE
LUBE RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR (RTD)
REPLACEMENT


1-5 ...... 0
6 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Lube Resistance Temperature Detector Installation ................................................................... 3

Lube Resistance Temperature Detector Removal ....................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1817 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing lube resistance temperature
detector (RTD).
Title Number


2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1817 00
6. Lube Resistance Temperature Detector Removal.
WARNING

CAUTION

A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from RTD. See figure 1.
B. Position waste fluid container under lube and scavenge pump.
WARNING

C. Remove RTD from lube and scavenge pump manifold or boss on transfer gearbox (TGB)
scavenge tube. Remove and discard preformed packing.
1
7. Lube Resistance Temperature Detector Installation.
See figure 1.
WARNING
A. Lubricate new preformed packing, P/N J221P904, with lubricating oil and install into RTD
packing groove.
CAUTION
Use care to prevent damage to RTD tip.
B. Install RTD into lube and scavenge pump manifold or boss on TGB scavenge tube. Tighten
RTD to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1817 00
Figure 1. Lube Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD)
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1817 00
C. Connect electrical connector to RTD as follows:
WARNING

backshell assembly.
NOTE
restrict mating.
5/(6 Blank)
6 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1910 00
0WP 1910 00
WORK PACKAGE
MAGNETIC CHIP DETECTOR REPLACEMENT


1-5 ...... 0
6 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Magnetic Chip Detector Installation ........................................................................................... 3

Magnetic Chip Detector Removal............................................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1910 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the magnetic chip
detector.
Title Number


2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1910 00
6. Magnetic Chip Detector Removal.
See figure 1.
A. Position waste fluid container under lube and scavenge pump.

1
WARNING
CAUTION
B. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from chip detector.
WARNING

C. Remove chip detector from lube and scavenge pump or oil manifold block. Remove and dis-
card preformed packing.
7. Magnetic Chip Detector Installation.
See figure 1.
WARNING
A. Lubricate new preformed packing, P/N J221P905, with lubricating oil. Install new preformed
packing onto chip detector.
B. Install chip detector into lube and scavenge pump or oil manifold block. Tighten chip detector
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1910 00
Figure 1. Magnetic Chip Detector
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1910 00
C. Safety-wire chip detector.
D. Connect electrical connector to chip detector as follows:
WARNING

backshell assembly.
NOTE
restrict mating.
5/(6 Blank)
6 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1911 00
5WP 1911 00
WORK PACKAGE
ACCELEROMETER REPLACEMENT


1-7 ...... 5
8 Blank ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Compressor Rear Frame Accelerometer Installation .................................................................. 3

Compressor Rear Frame Accelerometer Removal...................................................................... 3
Turbine Rear Frame Accelerometer Installation......................................................................... 5
Turbine Rear Frame Accelerometer Removal............................................................................. 5
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1911 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the compressor rear frame
(CRF) and turbine rear frame (TRF) accelerometers.
None required.

None required.
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1911 00
6. Compressor Rear Frame Accelerometer Removal.
WARNING

CAUTION
A. Remove bolts that secure integral lead loop clamps onto brackets. Remove clamps from inte-
gral lead.
1
B. Remove nut and bolt that secure CRF accelerometer integral lead loop clamp onto bracket.
Remove clamp from CRF accelerometer integral lead.
C. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from integral lead at No. 3 electrical interface panel.
See figure 1.
D. Remove jamnut that secures integral lead onto No. 3 electrical interface panel.
E. Remove bolts and secure CRF accelerometer onto bracket. Remove CRF accelerometer.
7. Compressor Rear Frame Accelerometer Installation.
A. Install CRF accelerometer onto bracket. See figure 1.
B. Using bolts, secure CRF accelerometer onto bracket. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
C. Using jamnut, secure integral lead onto No. 3 electrical interface panel. Tighten jamnut to
25-35 lb in. (2.8-4.0 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
D. Connect electrical connector onto integral lead at No. 3 electrical interface panel as follows:
WARNING
backshell assembly.
jawed connector pliers. Tighten connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1911 00
Figure 1. CRF Accelerometer
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1911 00
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no movement
with respect to mating connector.
NOTE

(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3) as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead clamps that
restrict mating.
E. Install loop clamps onto integral lead.
F. Using bolt and nut, secure loop clamp onto bracket. Tighten nut to 55-70 lb in.
G. Using bolts, secure integral lead loop clamps onto brackets. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
8. Turbine Rear Frame Accelerometer Removal.
A. Remove bolts that secure integral lead loop clamps to brackets. Remove clamps from inte-
gral lead.
WARNING

CAUTION

lation. Failure to comply may cause unreliable engine operation.
B. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from integral lead at No. 4 electrical interface panel.
See figure 2.
2
C. Remove jamnut that secures integral lead onto No. 4 electrical interface panel.
D. Remove bolts that secure TRF accelerometer to TRF accelerometer bracket. Reposition
flame detector lead clamp bracket. Remove TRF accelerometer (view X).
9. Turbine Rear Frame Accelerometer Installation.
A. Install TRF accelerometer onto TRF accelerometer bracket. Position flame detector lead
clamp bracket onto accelerometer.
B. Using bolts, secure TRF accelerometer onto TRF accelerometer bracket. Tighten bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1911 00
Figure 2. TRF Accelerometer
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1911 00
C. Using jamnut, secure integral lead onto No. 4 electrical interface panel. Tighten jamnut to
25-35 lb in. (2.8-4.0 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
D. Connect electrical connector onto integral lead at No. 4 electrical interface panel as follows:
WARNING

backshell assembly.
NOTE
restrict mating.
E. Install loop clamps onto integral lead.
F. Using bolts, secure integral lead loop clamps onto brackets. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1913 00
0WP 1913 00
WORK PACKAGE
EXTERNAL PIPING, HOSES, AND ELECTRICAL
HARNESS REPLACEMENT


1-3 ...... 0
4 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Arrangement................................................................................................................................ 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1913 00
1. Introduction.
This work package introduces the external configuration work packages. For specific work
instructions, refer to the following:
Title Number
Front Frame Module External Tubing, Harnesses, and Clamp- SWP 1913 01
ing
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module External Tubing, Har- SWP 1913 03
nesses, and Clamping
None required.
Reference SWP 1913 01, SWP 1913 02, SWP 1913 03, and SWP 1913 04 for a list of consum-
able material.
Due to the variety of gaskets, packings, seals, etc. used during installation of external tubing,
expendable materials are not listed. Refer to Illustrated Parts Breakdown (IPB), GEK 105062,
for required parts.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1913 00
6. Arrangement.
A. SWP 1913 01 contains information for installation of front frame module external tubing,
harnesses, and clamping.
B. SWP 1913 02 contains information for installation of core module external tubing, harnesses,
and clamping.
C. SWP 1913 03 contains information for installation of engine assembly external tubing, har-
nesses, and clamping.
D. SWP 1913 04 contains information for final installation of engine assembly external tubing,
harnesses, and clamping.
3/(4 Blank)
4 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
3SWP 1913 01
FRONT FRAME MODULE EXTERNAL TUBING,
HARNESSES, AND CLAMPING


1 - 41 ...... 3
42 Blank . . . . . . 3
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Air Collector Brackets Installation ............................................................................................. 4

Front Frame Module Brackets Installation ................................................................................. 4
Front Frame Module Electrical Cables Installation .................................................................... 4
Front Frame Module Tubing and Clamping Installation ............................................................ 4
Transfer Gearbox Assembly Brackets Installation...................................................................... 4
Transfer Gearbox Assembly Tubing and Clamping Installation................................................. 4
Change 3 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
1. Introduction.
A. This subordinate work package contains information concerning installation of front frame
module external tubing, harnesses, and clamping.
B. The following general instructions shall be met any time tubing, electrical leads, harnesses, or
cables are disturbed:
(1) Unless otherwise specified, bend radii for an electrical lead, cable, or harness must
exhibit a smooth transition. No kinks allowed.
(2) Electrical connections of heads and harnesses shall conform to the following assembly
points:
(a) Engage connector with its mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring, while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(b) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(c) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no movement
NOTE
(d) Repeat substeps (b) and (c), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead clamps
that restrict mating.
(3) Torque all remaining nuts of mis-alignment fittings as follows:
Tube Size OD Torque

(inches) (mm) (lb ft) (N·m)
0.75-1.0 (19.0-25.4) 24-26 (32.5-35.2)
1.125-1.50 (28.57-38.1) 20-40 (27.1-54.2)
1.625-2.0 (41.27-50.8) 40-50 (54.2-67.8)
2.125 and up (53.9 and up) 50-60 (67.8-81.3)
(4) Unless otherwise noted, install all bolts with boltheads forward.
2 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
(5) If any external tube or manifold does not fit in the free state at assembly within
0.060 inch (1.52 mm) and is known to be within manufacturing tolerance, it shall be
modified by bending as required. After bending, to obtain the required free-state fit, the
following shall apply:
(a) Part shall conform to original specification and pressure requirements.
(b) Bend radii shall not be less than manufacturing limits.
(c) Coupling nuts shall thread freely by hand.
(d) End flange fittings shall seat flush within 0.005 inch (0.12 mm).
(e) End points of tube or manifold shall align with mating connector with 0.060 inch
(1.52 mm) in all planes.
(f) A minimum clearance of 0.125 inch (3.17 mm) shall be maintained between tube
OD and adjacent parts.
Title Number

Silicone Tape MIL-I-46852
Zinc Chromate Primer Fed Spec TT-P-1757
expendable materials are not listed. Refer to Illustrated Parts Breakdown (IPB), GEK 105062, for
required parts.
Change 3 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
6. Air Collector Brackets Installation.
See figure 1 and table 1.

1
7. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Brackets Installation.

2
8. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Tubing and Clamping Installation.

3
9. Front Frame Module Brackets Installation.

4
10. Front Frame Module Tubing and Clamping Installation.

5
11. Front Frame Module Electrical Cables Installation.

6
4 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Figure 1. Air Collector Brackets
Change 3 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
Table 1. Air Collector Brackets (See figure 1.)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
VSV/VBV bracket Air collector/front Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(1) frame aft flange (6.2-7.9 N·m)
VSV/VBV bracket Air collector/front Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
Electrical bracket Air collector/front Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
Electrical bracket Aft lower right Bolts (6), Nuts (7) 480-570 lb in. (a) (c)
(5) flange (54.3-64.4 N·m)
Panel bracket (8) Forward lower Bolts (6), Nuts (7) 480-570 lb in. (a) (c)
right flange (54.3-64.4 N·m)
Panel bracket (9) Air collector/front Bolts (10), Nuts 55-70 lb in. (a) (d)
frame forward (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
flange
Electrical Aft lower left Bolts (6), Nuts (7) 480-570 lb in. (a) (c)
bracket (12) flange (54.3-64.4 N·m)
Electrical Aft lower left Bolts (6), Nuts (7) 480-570 lb in. (a) (c)
bracket (13) flange (54.3-64.4 N·m)
VSV/VBV Air collector aft Bolts (15) 55-70 lb in.
Bracket (14) face (6.2-7.9 N·m)
VSV/VBV Air collector right Bolts (15), 55-70 lb in.
Bracket (16) side Washers (17) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using molybdenum disulfide lubricant.
(b) Safety-wire with safety cable, 736L680.
(c) Boltheads face outboard.
(d) Boltheads face aft.
6 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Figure 2. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Brackets (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 3 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
Figure 2. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Brackets (Sheet 2 of 2)
8 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Table 2. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Brackets (See figure 2.)
Attach To Secure
Mounting bracket Gearbox housing Bolts (2), 190-230 lb in. (a)
(1) Washers (3), Nuts (21.5-25.9 N·m)
(4)
Electrical bracket Gearbox housing Washers (6), Nuts 55-70 lb in.
(5) (7) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Mounting bracket Gearbox housing Bolts (10) 190-230 lb in. (a) (b)
(8) and Tubing (21.5-25.9 N·m)
bracket (9)
Electrical Bevel gear housing Washers (12), 190-230 lb in. (b)
bracket (11) Bolts (13) (21.5-25.9 N·m)
Electrical Bevel gear housing Washers (12), 55-70 lb in. (b)
bracket (14) Bolts (25) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil bracket (15) VG hydraulic pump Bolts (16) 55-70 lb in. (b)
adapter (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Lube bracket (17) VG hydraulic pump Bolts (16) 55-70 lb in. (b) (c)
adapter (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Lube bracket (18) Gearbox housing Bolts (19) 33-37 lb in.
(3.7-4.2 N·m)
Lube bracket (18) Gearbox housing Bolts (20), 300-360 lb in.
Washers (21), (33.9-40.6 N·m)
Nuts (22)
Electrical Manual drive Washers (6), 55-70 lb in. (b)
bracket (23) adapter assembly Bolts (16) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical Manual drive Washers (6), 55-70 lb in. (b)
bracket (24) adapter assembly Bolts (16) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Mounting bracket Gearbox housing Bolts (10) 190-230 lb in. (a) (b)
(8) (21.5-25.9 N·m)
Change 3 9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
Table 2. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Brackets (See figure 2.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Manifold bracket Gearbox housing Bolts (27) 190-230 lb in.
(26) (21.5-25.9 N·m)
WARNING
Zinc Chromate Primer, TT-P-1757, is highly toxic to skin, eyes,

and respiratory tract. Skin and eye protection, and vapor con-
trol are required. Avoid all contact.
NOTES:
(a) Coat mating surfaces of bracket and gearbox housing using zinc chromate primer.
(b) Safety-wire.
(c) Nut plates face aft.
10 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Figure 3. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Tubing and Clamping (Sheet 1 of 3)
Change 3 11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
12 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Change 3 13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
Table 3. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Tubing and Clamping (See figure 3.)
Attach To Secure
Electrical bracket Oil supply Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in.
(1) manifold (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Preformed Oil manifold 180-200 lb in. (a)
packing (3), (20.4-22.6 N·m)
Union (4)
Preformed Oil supply 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (5), Plug manifold (15.3-17.5 N·m)
(6)
packing (7), manifold (20.4-22.6 N·m)
Union (8)
Preformed Lube and scavenge 135-155 lb in. (a)
Plug (10)
Preformed Lube and scavenge 360-400 lb in.
Union (12)
Gasket (13), Oil scavenge Bolts (15) 55-70 lb in.
Oil tube (14) manifold (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Union (17)
Gasket (18), Gearbox housing Bolts (21) 33-37 lb in.
AGB tube/hose (3.7-4.2 N·m)
(19), Oil drain
bracket (20)
AGB tube/hose Union (17) Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
(19) (73.4-87.0 N·m)
AGB tube/hose Manual drive Clamp (22), Bolt 33-37 lb in.
(19) adapter (23) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
Preformed AGB tube/hose 135-155 lb in. (a) (b)
packing (24), (19) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Plug (25)
14 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Table 3. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Tubing and Clamping (See figure 3.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Preformed Fuel pump adapter 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (26), (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Union (27)
Preformed Gearbox housing 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (28), fuel pump pad (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Union (29)
Hose assembly Union (29) Coupling nut 135-155 lb in.
(30) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Preformed Gearbox housing Coupling nut 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (31), starter pad (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Oil drain tube (32)
Oil manifold (33) Union (27), Coupling nuts 135-155 lb in.
Hose assembly (15.3-17.5 N·m)
(30), Oil drain tube
(32)
Oil manifold (33) Manifold bracket Clamp (34), Bolt 33-37 lb in.
(26, figure 2) (35), Nut (36) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
Oil manifold (33) Oil drain bracket Clamp (37), Bolt 33-37 lb in.
(20) (35), Nut (36) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
packing (38), pump (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Union (39)
Hose assembly Oil manifold (33), Coupling nuts 135-155 lb in.
(40) Union (39) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Hose assembly Electrical bracket Clamp (41), 55-70 lb in.
(40) (23, figure 2) Bolts (42) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Hose assembly AGB tube/hose Clamps (43, 44), 33-37 lb in.
(40) (19) Bolts (35), Nuts (3.7-4.2 N·m)
(36)
packing (45), pump (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Union (46)
Change 3 15
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
Attach To Secure
packing (47), (40.6-45.2 N·m)
Union (48)
Preformed AGB tube/hose 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (49), (19) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
RTD sensor (50)
Union (52)
Union (54)
packing (55), (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Plug (56)
packing (57), (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Plug (58)
packing (59), (40.6-45.2 N·m)
Union (60)
Gasket (61), Lube and scavenge Bolts (63) 33-37 lb in. (a)
Air/Oil separator pump (3.7-4.2 N·m)
tube (62)
Air/Oil separator Union (60) Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
tube (62) (73.4-87.0 N·m)
packing (64), (61.1-67.8 N·m)
Union (65)
packing (66), (61.1-67.8 N·m)
Oil tube (67)
16 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Attach To Secure
Oil tube (68) Oil tube (67), Coupling nut 75-91 lb ft.
Union (65) (102-123 N·m)
packing (69), (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Plug (70)
packing (71), (20.4-22.6 N·m)
Union (72)
Oil manifold (73) Union (72) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil manifold (73) Tubing bracket (9, Clamp (37), 55-70 lb in.
figure 2) Bolts (42) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (74), VG hydraulic pump Washers (76), 33-37 lb in.
Lube tube (75) Nuts (36) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
Gasket (77), Oil manifold Bolts (42) 55-70 lb in.
Lube tube (75) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Lube tube (75) Lube bracket (18, Clamp (41), 55-70 lb in.
figure 2) Bolts (42) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (78), VG hydraulic pump Washers (80), 55-70 lb in.
Lube tube (79) Nuts (81) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (82), Oil manifold Bolts (42) 55-70 lb in.
Lube tube (79) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Preformed HCU, TBV Head 360-400 lb in. (a)
packing (83), (40.7-45.2 N·m)
Union (84)
Preformed HCU, TBV Rod 270-300 lb in. (a)
packing (85), (30.6-33.9 N·m)
Union (86)
Preformed HCU, VSV and 360-400 lb in. (a)
packing (87), VIGV Head (40.7-45.2 N·m)
Union (88)
Change 3 17
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
Attach To Secure
Gasket (91), Oil tube (14) Bolts (93), Nuts 55-70 lb in. (a)
Oil tube (92) (94) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (95), Transfer gearbox Bolts (35) 55-70 lb in.
Oil tube (92) housing (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Preformed HCU, VSV and 270-300 lb in.
packing (89), VIGV Rod (30.6-33.9 N·m)
Union (90)
Oil tube (92) Lube bracket (17, Clamp (96), 55-70 lb in.
figure 2) Bolt (42) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil tube (92) Oil bracket (15, Clamp (96), 55-70 lb in.
figure 2) Bolt (42), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Washer (97), Nut
(94)
Oil tube (98) Oil manifold (73) Coupling nut 135-155 lb in.
(15.3-17.5 N·m)
Oil tube (98) Union (46) Coupling nut 135-155 lb in.
(15.3-17.5 N·m)
Oil tube (98) Lube bracket (18, Clamp (34), 33-37 lb in.
figure 2) Bolt (99), Washer (3.7-4.2 N·m)
(100), Nut (36)
Cap assembly Oil tube (98) 135-155 lb in.
(101) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Preformed Accessory gearbox 155-175 lb in. (a)
packing (102), housing (17.6-19.7 N·m)
Reducer (103)
Oil manifold (104) Reducer (103) Coupling nut 180-200 lb in.
(20.4-22.6 N·m)
Oil manifold (104) Oil manifold (73) Coupling nut 180-200 lb in.
(20.4-22.6 N·m)
Oil manifold (104) Accessory gearbox Clamp (105), 55-70 lb in.
housing Bolt (106) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
18 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Attach To Secure
Preformed Transfer gearbox 155-175 lb in. (a)
packing (107), housing (17.6-19.8 N·m)
Reducer (108)
Oil tube (109) Reducer (108) Coupling nut 135-155 lb in.
(15.3-17.5 N·m)
(15.3-17.5 N·m)
Preformed VG hydraulic pump 180-200 lb in.
packing (71), (20.4-22.6 N·m)
Plug (110)
WARNING
protective equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust venti-
lation - if not available, use an approved respirator.
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate preformed packing using lubricating oil.
(b) Safety-wire.
Change 3 19
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
Figure 4. Front Frame Module Brackets
20 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Table 4. Front Frame Module Brackets (See figure 4.)
Attach To Secure
Mount pad (1) Front frame Bolts (2) 480-570 lb in. (a)
(54.3-64.4 N·m)
VBV bracket (3) Front frame Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in.
(5) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
VSV/VBV bracket Front frame Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in.
(6) (5) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Transfer gearbox Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in. (b)
(7) mount plate (8) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Transfer gearbox Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in. (b)
(9) mount plate (8) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical Transfer gearbox Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in. (b)
bracket (10) mount plate (8) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil bracket (11) Electrical Bolts (5) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (10) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
No. 2 electrical Electrical brackets Bolts (13) 55-70 lb in.
interface panel (12) (9, 10) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
No. 2 electrical Transfer gearbox Washers (4), 190-230 lb in.
interface panel (12) mount bracket Bolts (14) (21.5-25.9 N·m)
VSV/VBV Front frame Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in.
bracket (15) (5) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
VSV/VBV Front frame Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in.
bracket (16) (5) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical Front frame Bolts (18) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (17) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Coat threads of bolts with molybdenum disulfide lubricant.
(b) Safety-wire.
Change 3 21
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
Figure 5. Front Frame Module Tubing and Clamping (Sheet 1 of 5)
22 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Change 3 23
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
24 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Change 3 25
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
26 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Table 5. Front Frame Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 5.)
Attach To Secure
Gasket (1), HCU Bolts (3), 33-37 lb in.
Oil tube/hose (2) Washers (4) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
(Initial
configuration)
Gasket (5), HCU Bolts (3), 33-37 lb in.
VBV oil hose (6) Washers (4) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
(Initial
configuration)
Teflon hose (7) Union (88, Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
(Initial figure 3) (73.4-87.0 N·m)
configuration)
Oil tube/hose (8) Union (90, Coupling nut 450-550 lb in.
(Initial figure 3) (50.8-62.1 N·m)
configuration)
VBV oil tube (9) Oil tube/hose (2) Coupling nut 75-91 lb ft
(Initial (102-123 N·m)
configuration)
VSV oil tube (10) Oil tube/hose (8) Coupling nut 450-550 lb in.
(Initial (50.8-62.1 N·m)
configuration)
VSV oil tube (11) Teflon hose (7) Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
(Initial (73.4-87.0 N·m)
configuration)
VBV oil tube (12) VBV oil hose (6) Coupling nut 112-128 lb ft
(Initial (151.9-173.5 N·m)
configuration)
VBV oil tubes (9, VSV/VBV bracket, Clamps (13, 14), 55-70 lb in.
12), VSV oil tubes (16, figure 1) Bolts (15), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(10, 11) (Initial Washers (16), and
configuration) Nuts (17)
VBV oil tubes (9, VSV/VBV bracket, Clamps (18, 19), 55-70 lb in.
12), VSV oil tubes (14, figure 1) Bolts (15), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(10, 11) (Initial Washers (16), and
configuration) Nuts (17)
Change 3 27
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
Table 5. Front Frame Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 5.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Gasket (20), Front frame Bolts (22) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Air elbow (21) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil manifold (23) VSV/VBV bracket, Clamp (24), 55-70 lb in.
(16, figure 4) Bolt (22), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Washer (25), and
Nut (17)
(15, figure 4) Bolt (22), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Washer (25), and
Nut (17)
(16, figure 4) Bolt (22), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Washer (25), Nut
(17)
Oil manifold (26) VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (24), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
(15, figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
Preformed VBV actuator rod 135-155 lb in. (b)
packing (27), end port (6 places) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Reducer (28)
VBV oil tube (29) Oil manifold (26) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
VBV oil tube (29) Reducer (28) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Preformed VBV actuator head 135-155 lb in. (b)
packing (30), end port (6 places) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Reducer (31)
Preformed Oil tube (35) (b)
packings (32, 33),
Drain can (34)
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
28 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Attach To Secure
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Drain can (34) VBV actuator head Hand-tight (c)
end port
Oil drain tube (36) Drain can (34) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
(73.4-87.0 N·m)
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
packings (32, 33),
Drain can (34)
(73.4-87.0 N·m)
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
end port
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil drain tube (39) Oil drain tube (36) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil manifolds (37, VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (40), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
38) Oil drain tube (3, figure 1) (41), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(39) Nut (17)
Oil drain tube (39) VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (42), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
(15, figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
(6, figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
Change 3 29
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
Attach To Secure
Oil manifold (43) VBV bracket (3, Clamp (24), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
(6, figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
Oil manifold (45) VBV bracket (3, Clamp (24), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
VBV oil tube (46) Oil manifold (43) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
VBV oil tube (46) Reducer (28) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
packings (32, 33),
Drain can (34)
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
end port
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
(73.4-87.0 N·m)
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
packings (32, 33),
Drain can (34)
30 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Attach To Secure
(73.4-87.0 N·m)
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
end port
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil drain tube (51) Oil drain tube (48) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil manifold (49), VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (40), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
Oil tube (50), (1, figure 1) (41), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil drain tube (51) Nut (17)
Oil drain tube (51) VBV bracket (3, Clamp (42), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
packings (32, 33),
Drain can (34)
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Drain can (34) VBV actuator head Coupling nut Hand-tight (c)
end port
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
packings (32, 33),
Drain can (34)
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Change 3 31
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
Attach To Secure
end port
VSV teflon Union (88, Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
hose (56) figure 4) (73.4-86.9 N·m)
VBV teflon HCU Bolts (60) 33-37 lb in.
hose (57) Washers (61) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
Gasket (62)
VBV teflon HCU Bolts (60) 33-37 lb in.
hose (58) Washers (61) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
Gasket (63)
Reducer (64)
VSV teflon Union (90, Coupling nut 450-550 lb in.
hose (59) figure 4) (50.8-62.1 N·m)
VSV teflon Together Clamps (65, 66, 57) 55-70 lb in.
hose (56, 59) Bolt (70) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
VBV teflon Nut (71)
hose (57, 58)
VSV teflon VSV/VBV bracket Clamps (65, 66, 57) 55-70 lb in.
hose (56, 59) (68) (16, figure 1) Bolt (70) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
VBV teflon Nut (71)
hose (57, 58)
VSV/VBV Front frame Bolts (69) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (6.2-7.9 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Safety-wire.
WARNING
(b) Lubricate packings using lubricating oil.

(c) Align drain fittings before tightening.
32 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Figure 6. Front Frame Module Electrical Cables (Sheet 1 of 4)
Change 3 33
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
34 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Change 3 35
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
36 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Table 6. Front Frame Module Electrical Cables (See figure 6.)
Attach To Secure
Preformed T25 sensor 90-100 lb in. (a) (b)
packing (19), (10.2-11.3 N·m)
Plug (20)
T25 Air collector upper Bolt (21) 33-37 lb in. (b)
sensor/Intergral left (3.7-4.2 N·m)
lead (1)
T25 sensor/Integral VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (9), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
lead (1) (3, figure 1) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Clamp (9), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
(4, figure 1) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Clamps (14), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(17, figure 4) Bolts (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Spring clip (a)
(7, figure 4)
No. 2 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (c)
interface panel (12, 1/4 to 1/2 turn
figure 4)
CAUTION
Routing of harness is completed during final engine assembly.

Ensure loose connector is secured to avoid damage during trans-
port.
Left side VBV actuator Connector ring Hand-tight
VSV/VBV/LVDT (11:00 o'clock)
electrical cable (2)
VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (14), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
(3, figure 1) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(4, figure 1) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(17, figure 4) Bolts (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(7, figure 4) Bolt (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Change 3 37
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
Table 6. Front Frame Module Electrical Cables (See figure 6.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
figure 4)
Gas generator XN25 sensor Connector ring Hand-tight (c)
speed electrical
cable (3)
(7, figure 4)
figure 4)
Gas generator XN25 sensor Connector ring Hand-tight (b)
speed electrical
cable (4)
(12, figure 1)
figure 4)
T25 sensor/integral Electrical bracket Clamps (9, 10, 13) 55-70 lb in. (c)
lead (1), left side (13, figure 1) Bolt (11), Nut (12) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
VBV/VSV LVDT
electrical cable (2),
Gas generator
speed electrical
cable (4)
Chip detector Common scavenge Connector ring Hand-tight
electrical cable (5) chip detector
Tubing bracket (9, Spring clip (a)
figure 2)
Lube bracket (17, Spring clip (2 (a)
figure 2) places)
38 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Attach To Secure
B-sump scavenge Connector ring Hand-tight
chip detector
TGB/A-sump Connector ring Hand-tight
scavenge chip
detector
Electrical bracket Spring clips (a)
(23, figure 2)
(14, figure 2)
Chip detector Electrical bracket Spring clip (a)
electrical cable (5) (5, figure 2)
(7, figure 4)
figure 4)
TGB/A, AGB, B, C AGB scavenge Connector ring Hand-tight
lube RTD electrical RTD
cable (6)
(24, figure 2) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
TGB/A sump Connector ring Hand-tight
scavenge RTD
B-sump scavenge Connector ring Hand-tight
RTD
C-sump scavenge Connector ring Hand-tight
RTD
(11, figure 2) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(7, figure 4) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Change 3 39
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 01
Attach To Secure
No. 2 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (b)
figure 4)
D, E, supply lube D, E-sump Connector ring Hand-tight
RTD electrical scavenge, supply
cable (7) RTD
D-sump branch of D-sump scavenge Connector ring Hand-tight
electrical cable (7) RTD
(7, figure 4) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(5, figure 1) (11), Nut (12) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil bracket (15, Clamp (16), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
figure 2) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
E-sump & supply Oil bracket (11, Clamp (18), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
branch of electrical figure 4) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
cable (7)
E-sump branch of Oil bracket (11, Clamp (16), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
electrical cable (7) figure 4) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(1, figure 3) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Main cable No. 2 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (c)
figure 4)
CAUTION
Routing of harness is completed during final engine assembly.

Ensure loose connector is secured to avoid damage during trans-
port.
Right side VBV actuator (5:00 Connector ring Hand-tight
VBV/VSV LVDT o'clock position)
electrical cable (8)
40 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 01
Attach To Secure
(7, figure 4) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
figure 4)
NOTES:
(a) Lead may be spiral wrapped using silicone tape in the area of spring clips or clamps and 0.50
inch (12.7 mm) on either side of clip or clamp to provide positive lead clamping as required.
(b) Safety-wire using R297P02 safety wire.
(c) Safety-wire to adjacent jamnut using R297P02 safety wire.

42 Blank Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
4SWP 1913 02
CORE MODULE EXTERNAL TUBING, ELECTRICAL
LEADS, AND CLAMPING


1 - 44 ...... 4
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Core Module Brackets Installation ............................................................................................. 5

Core Module Electrical Leads Installation.................................................................................. 5
Core Module Tubing and Clamping Installation ........................................................................ 5
CRF Aft Case to CRF Brackets Installation ............................................................................... 5
CRF Fuel Nozzle Pad and Strut Pad Brackets Installation ......................................................... 5
CRF/HPT Flange Brackets Installation....................................................................................... 5
HPC/CRF Flange Brackets Installation ...................................................................................... 5
HPT Tubing Installation.............................................................................................................. 5
Change 4 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
1. Introduction.
A. This subordinate work package contains information concerning installation of core module
external tubing, harnesses, and clamping.
(1) Unless otherwise specified, the bend radii for an electrical lead, cable, or harness must
points:
(a) Engage the connector with its mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring, while
wiggling the backshell assembly.
teflon-jawed connector pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage
occurs.
NOTE
(3) Torque all remaining nuts of misalignment fittings as follows:
Tube Size OD Torque

0.75-1.00 (19.1-25.4) 24-26 (32.5-35.2)
1.125-1.50 (28.58-38.1) 20-40 (27.1-54.2)
1.625-2.00 (41.28-50.8) 40-50 (54.2-67.8)
2.125 and up (54.0 and up) 50-60 (67.8-81.3)
2 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
modified by bending as required. After bending, to obtain the required free-state fit, the
Title Number
Heat Shields Replacement WP 1915 00

Change 4 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Due to the variety of Gaskets, packings, seals, etc., used during installation of external tubing,
expendable materials are not listed. Refer to Illustrated Parts Breakdown, GEK 105062, for
required parts.
4 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
6. HPC/CRF Flange Brackets Installation.

1
7. CRF/HPT Flange Brackets Installation.

2
8. CRF Aft Case to CRF Brackets Installation.

3
9. CRF Fuel Nozzle Pad and Strut Pad Brackets Installation.

4
10. Core Module Brackets Installation.

5
11. HPT Tubing Installation.

6
12. Core Module Tubing and Clamping Installation.

7
13. Core Module Electrical Leads Installation.

8
Change 4 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Figure 1. HPC/CRF Flange Brackets (Sheet 1 of 2)
6 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Figure 1. HPC/CRF flange Brackets (Sheet 2 of 2)
Change 4 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Table 1. HPC/CRF Flange Brackets (See figure 1.)
Attach To Secure
Cooling bracket (1) Boltholes 18, 21 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(42.9-47.5 N·m)
Tube bracket (4) Cooling bracket (1) Bolts (5) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
(7.0-7.7 N·m)
Cooling bracket (6) Boltholes 27 Bolt (7), Nut (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(42.9-47.5 N·m)
Cooling bracket (6) Boltholes 30, 32 Bolts (2), 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
Nuts (3) (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Tube bracket (8) Cooling bracket (6) Bolts (5) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (c)
(7.0-7.7 N·m)
Air/oil bracket (9) Boltholes 33, 35 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(42.9-47.5 N·m)
Mount bracket (10), Air/oil bracket (9) Bolts (12) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (c)
Tube bracket (11) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
(42.9-47.5 N·m)
Support bracket Air/oil bracket (13) Bolts (15) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
(14) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Accelerometer Boltholes 45, 47 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (16) (42.9-47.5 N·m)
(42.9-47.5·N·m)
Support bracket Air/oil bracket (17) Bolts (19) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
(18) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Accelerometer Boltholes 51, 53 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (20) (42.9-47.5 N·m)
(42.9-47.5·N·m)
Tube bracket (21) Air/oil bracket (13) Bolts (22) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
(7.0-7.7 N·m)
8 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Table 1. HPC/CRF Flange Brackets (See figure 1.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Cooling bracket (1) Boltholes 63, 66 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(42.9-47.5 N·m)
(7.0-7.7 N·m)
Cooling bracket (6) Boltholes 71, 74, Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
76 (42.9-47.5 N·m)
(7.0-7.7 N·m)
(42.9-47.5 N·m)
Tube bracket (25) Air/oil bracket (9) Bolts (12) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
(7.0-7.7 N·m)
Support bracket Boltholes 82, 84 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(26) (42.9-47.5 N·m)
(27) (Dual fuel (42.9-47.5 N·m)
system only)
(28) (Dual fuel (42.9-47.5 N·m)
system only)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
(b) Boltheads face aft.
(c) Boltheads face forward.
Change 4 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Figure 2. CRF/HPT Flange Brackets
10 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Table 2. CRF/HPT Flange Brackets (See figure 2.)
Attach To Secure
Support bracket (1) Boltholes 27, 28, Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 209-231 lb in. (a)
29, 30 (23.6-26.1 N·m)
Electrical bracket Boltholes 41, 42, Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 209-231 lb in. (a)
(4) 43, 44 (23.6-26.1 N·m)
84, 85 (23.6-26.1 N·m)
107, 108 (23.5-26.1 N·m)
133, 134 (23.5-26.1 N·m)
NOTES:
Change 4 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Figure 3. CRF Aft Case to CRF Brackets (Sheet 1 of 3)
12 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Change 4 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
14 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Table 3. CRF Aft Case To CRF Brackets (See figure 3.)
Attach To Secure
External flange Boltholes 3-7 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 570-630 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (1) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (4) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (5) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (6) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (7) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (8) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (9) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (10) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (11) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (12) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (13) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (14) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (15) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (16) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (17) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
Change 4 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Table 3. CRF Aft Case To CRF Brackets (See figure 3.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
bracket (18) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (19) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (20) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (21) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (22) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (23) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (24) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (25) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (26) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (27) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (28) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
bracket (29) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
External flange Boltholes 138, 139, Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 570-630 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (30) 2 (64.4-71.2 N·m)
Bolthole 1 Bolts (2), Spacer 570-630 lb in. (a) (b)
(31), Nuts (3) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
16 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Attach To Secure
NOTE
Forward and mid heat shields are removed and installed in WP

1915 00.
CDP air bracket External flange Bolt (33) 55-70 lb in. (a)
(32) bracket (4) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
CDP air bracket External flange Bolt (35), Spacer 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(34) bracket (7) (36), Spring (7.0-7.7 N·m)
washers (37)
(2 places)
Bolt (35) 55-70 lb in. (a)
(6.2-7.9 N·m)
Tube brackets (38, External flange Bolt (35) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
39) bracket (10) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
CDP Air bracket External flange Bolts (35), Spacers 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(40), UV detector bracket (11) (36), Spring washer (7.0-7.7 N·m)
bracket (41) (37) (2 places)
Bolt (35) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(7.0-7.7 N·m)
Tube bracket (42) External flange Bolt (35), Spacer 55-70 lb in. (a)
bracket (13) (36), Spring washer (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(37), Nut (43)
(2 places)
External flange Bolts (35), Nuts 55-70 lb in. (a)
bracket (13) (43) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Support bracket External flange Bolt (45), Spacer 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(44) bracket (14) (36), Spring washer (7.0-7.7 N·m)
(37), Nut (43)
Bolt (45), Nut (43) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(7.0-7.7 N·m)
Oil supply bracket External flange Bolts (35), Nuts 55-70 lb in. (a)
(46) bracket (15) (43) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(2 places)
Change 4 17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Attach To Secure
(37)
Bolts (35) 55-70 lb in. (a)
(2 places) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(37)
Bolts (35) 55-70 lb in. (a)
(2 places) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Tube bracket (49), External flange Bolts (35) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Tube bracket (50) bracket (24) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
HPT cooling External flange Bolts (35) 55-70 lb in. (a)
bracket (51), UV bracket (25) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
detector bracket
(52)
Air Tube bracket External flange Bolt (35), Spacer 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(37)
Bolts (35) 55-70 lb in. (a)
(2 places) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
NOTES:
(b) Install nuts finger-tight; when all bolts/nuts are installed, torque in a crisscross pattern to
value listed.
18 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Figure 4. CRF Fuel Nozzle Pad and Strut Pad Brackets (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 4 19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Figure 4. CRF Fuel Nozzle Pad and Strut Pad Brackets (Sheet 2 of 2)
20 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Table 4. CRF Fuel Nozzle Pad and Strut Pad Brackets (See figure 4.)
Attach To Secure
Tube bracket (1) Fuel nozzle pads Bolts (2) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
No. 4 and No. 5 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
(CW from top CL
forward looking
aft)
Oil supply bracket Fuel nozzle pad Bolts (2) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(3) No. 16 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Tube bracket (4) Fuel nozzle pads Bolts (2) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
No. 17 and No. 18 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
CDP support Fuel nozzle pad Bolts (6) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
bracket (5) No. 19 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Cable bracket (7) Strut No. 3 pad Bolts (8) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(7.0-7.7 N·m)
Cable bracket (9) Strut No. 4 pad Bolts (8) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(7.0-7.7 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts using thread lubricant.
Change 4 21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Figure 5. Core Module Brackets (Sheet 1 of 3)
22 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Change 4 23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
24 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Table 5. Core Module Brackets (See figure 5.)
Attach To Secure
Tube bracket (1) HPC case stage Bolts (2) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
No. 2 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
B-sump bracket (3), HPC case stage Bolts (5) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
LPT cooling No. 2 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
bracket (4)
LPT cooling HPC case stage Bolts (7) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (6) No. 2 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Flange cooling HPC case stage Bolts (9) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (8) No. 2 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Electrical bracket HPC case stage Bolts (11) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
(10) No. 2 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Vent bracket (12) HPC case stage Bolts (13) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
No. 4 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
No. 4 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
No. 4 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Vent bracket (16) HPC case stage Bolts (17) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
No. 4 (6.2-7.9 N·m
LPT cooling HPC case stage Bolts (19) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (18) No.4 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Support bracket HPC case stage Bolts (21), Spacers 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
(20) No. 6 (22) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
B/C-sump bracket HPC case stage Bolts (24) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(23) No. 6 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Tube bracket (25) HPC case stage Bolts (7) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
No. 6 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Electrical bracket HPC case stage Bolts (27) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
(26) No. 6 (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Change 4 25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Table 5. Core Module Brackets (See figure 5.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Bridge bracket (29) Mount bracket Bolts (28) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(10, figure 1) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Bridge bracket (29) Electrical bracket Bolts (30) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(26) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Electrical bracket Electrical bracket Bolts (32) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(31) (10) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Electrical bracket Electrical bracket Bolts (32) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(31) (26) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
No. 3 electrical Electrical bracket Bolts (34) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
panel (33) (10) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
No. 3 electrical Electrical bracket Bolts (32) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
panel (33) (26) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Electrical bracket No. 3 Electrical Bolts (32) (three 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(31) panel (33) places) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
NOTES:
(b) Safety-wire using R297P04 safety wire.
26 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Figure 6. HPT Tubing
Change 4 27

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Table 6. HPT Tubing (See figure 6.)
Attach To Secure
Ring seal (1), High-pressure Bolts (3) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
Baseplate (2) turbine (eight (7.0-7.7 N·m)
places)
Ring seal (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
Cooling air tube (8) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Check valve (7) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Cooling air tube (8) Check valve (7) Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft. (b)
(54.2-67.8 N·m)
Cooling air (7.0-7.7 N·m)
tube (11)
Cooling air Check valve (9) Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft. (b)
tube (11) (54.2-67.8 N·m)
tube (14)
Cooling Air Tube Check valve (13) Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft. (b)
(14) (54.2-67.8·N·m)
tube (17)
Cooling air Check valve (15) Coupling nut 40-50 lb in. (b)
tube (17) (54.2-67.8 N·m)
NOTES:
(b) Safety-wire.
28 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Figure 7. Core Module Tubing and Clamping (Sheet 1 of 6)
Change 4 29

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
30 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Change 4 31

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
32 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Change 4 33

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
34 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Table 7. Core Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 7.)
Attach To Secure
Air tube (2), Seal Front frame Bolts (51) 55-70 lb in. (a) (d)
ring (52) module (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Air tube (2), Seal Air tube (1) Coupling (4) 55-70 lb in.
ring(3) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Air tube (2) LPT cooling Bolts (5), Nuts (6), 55-70 lb in. (a)
bracket Retaining strap (7) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(6, figure 5)
(4, figure 5)
(18, figure 5)
Air tube (1), LPT supply tube Coupling (4) 55-70 lb in.
Seal ring (3) (8) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
LPT supply tube (8) Support bracket Bolts (5), Retaining 55-70 lb in. (a)
(20, figure 5) strap (7) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
LPT supply tube (8) Support bracket Bolts (5), Retaining 55-70 lb in. (a)
(26, figure 1) strap (7) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
LPT supply tube PCC manifold Coupling (10)
(8), Seal ring (9)
LPT supply tube (8) Bracket (93) Bolts (5), Nuts (6), 55-70 lb in. (a)
Retaining strap (7) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Air cooling tube Stage 11 bleed air Coupling (13)
(11), Seal ring (12) manifold
Air cooling tube Tube bracket Bolts (14), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(11) (24, figure 1) Retaining strap (15) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Air cooling tube Check valve Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft.
(11) (7, figure 6) (54.2-67.8 N·m)
Change 4 35

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Table 7. Core Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 7.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Air cooling tube Stage 11 bleed air Coupling (13) 45 lb in.
(16), Seal ring (12) manifold (50.9 N·m)
Air cooling tube Tube bracket (23, Bolts (14), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(16) figure 1) Retaining strap (15) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Air cooling tube Check valve Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft.
(16) (9, figure 6) (54.2-67.8 N·m)
Air manifold (17), Front frame Bolts (18) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
Gasket (19) module (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Air manifold (17) B-sump bracket Bolts (18), Washers 570-630 lb in. (a)
(3, figure 5) (20), Nuts (21), (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Retaining strap (22)
Air manifold (17) Vent bracket Bolts (18), Washers 570-630 lb in. (a)
(12, figure 5) (20), Nuts (21), (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Air manifold (17) Vent brackets Bolts (18), Washers 570-630 lb in. (a)
(14 and 15, figure (20), Nuts (21), (7.0-7.7 N·m)
5) Retaining strap (22)
Air manifold (17) B-sump Air Tube Bolts (59), Nuts 570-630 lb in. (a) (b)
(58) (21), Gasket (60), (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Preformed packing
(61), Coupling
flange (62)
Air manifold (17) Vent bracket Bolts (18), Washers 570-630 lb in. (a)
(16, figure 5) (20), Nuts (21), (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Air manifold (17), Front frame Bolts (18) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
Gasket (66) module (7.0-7.7 N·m)
36 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Attach To Secure
B-sump air tube Air elbow Bolts (26), Nuts 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(23) (Front frame (27), Gasket (28), (7.0-7.7 N·m)
module) preformed packing
(29), Coupling
flange (30)
B-sump air tube Tube bracket Bolts (24), 570-630 lb in. (a)
B-sump air tube B/C-sump bracket Bolts (24), 570-630 lb in.
(23) (23, figure 5) Retaining strap (7.0-7.7 N·m)
(25), Nuts (27),
Washers (31)
B-sump air tube CRF strut No. 9 Bolts (26), Nuts 55-70 lb in. (a)
(23) (27), Gasket (32) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
LPT air tube (33), Stage 7 bleed air Coupling clamp 40 lb in. (a)
Seal ring (34) manifold (35) (4.5 N·m)
LPT air tube (33) Tube bracket Bolts (36), 61.8-68.3 lb in.
(25, figure 1) Retaining strap (37) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
LPT air tube (33) Tube bracket Bolts (36), 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
LPT air tube (33) LPT Air Tube (41) Bolts (38), Gasket 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(39), Orifice plate (7.0-7.7 N·m)
(40)
LPT air tube (41), LPT air manifold Coupling clamp 1150125 lb in. (a)
Seal ring (42) (43) (13.0-14.1 N·m)
LPT air tube (41) HPT cooling Bolts (36), 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(51, figure 3)
HPT air tube (44) CFF strut No. 10 Bolts (45), Nuts 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(46), Gasket (47) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
HPT air tube (44) Air tube bracket Bolts (48), 55-70 lb in. (a)
Change 4 37

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Attach To Secure
HPT air tube (44) Air recoup tee (50)
LPT air tube (53), Stage 7 bleed air Coupling clamp 40 lb in. (a)
Seal ring (34) manifold (35) (4.5 N·m)
LPT air tube (53) Tube bracket Bolts (36), 55-70 lb in. (a)
LPT air tube (53) LPT air tube (55) Bolts (38), Nuts 55-70 lb in. (b)
(56), Orifice plate (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(57)
LPT air tube (55) Tube bracket Bolts (36), 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
LPT air tube (55) Tube bracket Bolts (36), 61.8-68.3 lb in. (c)
LPT air tube (55), LPT air manifold Coupling clamp 115-125 lb in. (a)
Seal ring (42) (43) (13.0-14.1 N·m)
B-sump air tube CRF strut No. 1 Bolts (63), Nuts 570-630 lb in. (a)
(58) (21), Gasket (64) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
Air cooling tube Stage 11 bleed air Coupling clamp 45 lb in. (a)
(65), Seal ring (12) manifold (13) (5.1 N·m)
Air cooling tube check valve Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft.
(65) (13, figure 6) (54.2-67.8 N·m)
Air cooling tube check valve Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft.
(67) (15, figure 6) (54.2-67.8 N·m)
38 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Attach To Secure
Air cooling tube Stage 11 bleed air Coupling clamp 45 lb in.
(67), Seal ring (12) manifold (13) (5.1 N·m)
HP air tube (68) Air recoup tee (69)
HP air tube (68) CDP air bracket Bolts (48), 55-70 lb in. (a)
HP air tube (68) CRF strut No. 4 Bolts (45), Nuts 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(46), Gasket (47) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
B-scavenge oil tube CRF strut No. 7 Bolts (72), Nuts 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(70), Gasket (74) (73) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
B-scavenge oil tube Support bracket Bolt (75), Clamps 570-630 lb in. (a)
(70) (18, figure 1) (76,77) (64.4-71.2 N·m
C-scavenge oil tube CRF strut No. 8 Bolts (72), Nuts 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(71), Gasket (74) (73) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
C-scavenge oil tube Support bracket Bolt (75), Clamps 570-630 lb in. (a)
(71) (18, figure 1) (76,77) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
LP recoup air tube CRF strut No. 6 Bolts (79), Nuts 55-70 lb in. (a)
(78), Gasket (81) (80) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
LP recoup air tube LP recoup air tube Bolts (79), Nuts 55-70 lb in. (a)
(78), Gasket (81) (82) (80) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
LP recoup air tube Support bracket Bolts (83), 55-70 lb in. (a)
LP recoup air tube CRF strut No. 7, Bolts (79), Nuts 55-70 lb in. (a)
(82), Gasket (81) No. 8, No. 9 (80) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
LP recoup air tube Support bracket Bolts (85), Washers 55-70 lb in. (a)
(82) (5, figure 2) (86), Nuts (80) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Change 4 39

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Attach To Secure
CDP air manifold CRF strut No. 2, Bolts (89), Nuts 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
(87), Gasket (88) No. 3 (90) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
CDP air manifold CDP air bracket Bolts (91), 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
CDP air manifold CDP air bracket Bolts (91), 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces and bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
WARNING

(b) Lubricate preformed packings using lubricating oil.

(c) Use cushion jaw pliers, if necessary.
(d) Safety-wire.
40 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Figure 8. Core Module Electrical Leads (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 4 41

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Figure 8. Core Module Electrical Leads (Sheet 2 of 2)
42 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 02
Table 8. Core Module Electrical Lead (See figure 8.)
Attach To Secure
Gasket (1), HPC CRF boss between Bolts (3), Washers 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
discharge struts No. 2 and 3 (4) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
temperature (T3)
sensor (2)
HPC discharge Cable brackets Clamps (5), Bolts 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (c)
temperature (T3) (7, 9, figure 4) (6) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
sensor (2) integral
lead
HPC discharge Mount bracket Clamps (5), Bolts 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (c)
temperature (T3) (10, figure 1) (7) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
sensor (2) integral
lead
HPC discharge Bridge bracket Clamps (5), Bolts 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (c)
sensor (2) integral (two places)
lead
HPC discharge No. 3 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight then 1/4 (a) (d)
temperature (T3) panel to 1/2 turn
sensor (2) lead (33, figure 5)
connector
Gasket (1), HPC CRF boss between Bolts (3), Washers 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
discharge struts No. 4 and (4) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
temperature (T3) No. 5
sensor (8)
HPC discharge Tube bracket Clamps (5), Bolts 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (c)
sensor (8) integral
lead
HPC discharge Bridge bracket Clamps (5), Bolts 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (c)
temperature (T3) (29, figure 5) (two (7) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
sensor (8) integral places)
lead
Change 4 43

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 02
Table 8. Core Module Electrical Lead (See figure 8.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
HPC discharge No. 3 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight then 1/4 (a) (d)
temperature (T3) panel to 1/2 turn
sensor (8) lead (33, figure 5)
connector
Accelerometer (9) Accelerometer Bolts (10) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (7.0-7.7 N·m)
(16, figure 1)
Accelerometer (9) Bracket on Air Clamps (5), 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (c)
integral lead Tube (53, figure 7) Bolts (11), (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Nuts (12)
Accelerometer (9) Bridge bracket Clamps (5), Bolts 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (c)
integral lead (29, figure 5) (7) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
(two places)
Accelerometer (9) No. 3 electrical Clamps (5), Bolts 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a) (c)
integral lead panel (7) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
(33, figure 5)
Accelerometer (9) No. 3 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight then 1/4 (a) (d)
lead connector panel to 1/2 turn
(33, figure 5)
NOTES:
(a) Coat threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
(b) Safety-wire.
(c) Lead can be spiral wrapped using silicone tape in the area of clamps and 0.50 inch (12.7 mm)
on either side of clamp to provide positive lead clamping as required.
(d) Safety-wire to adjacent jamnut.
44 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 03
5SWP 1913 03
LOW PRESSURE TURBINE (LPT) MODULE EXTERNAL
TUBING, HARNESSES, AND CLAMPING


1 - 26 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Air Manifold Installation ............................................................................................................ 4

Low Pressure Turbine Module Brackets Installation .................................................................. 4
Low Pressure Turbine Module Electrical Leads Installation ...................................................... 4
Low Pressure Turbine Module Tubing and Clamping Installation ............................................. 4
Low Pressure Turbine/Turbine Rear Frame Flange Brackets Installation .................................. 4
Replacing Manifold Bracket ....................................................................................................... 25
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 03
1. Introduction.
A. This subordinate work package contains information concerning installation of the low pres-
sure turbine (LPT) module and turbine rear frame (TRF) external, tubing, harnesses, and
clamping.
(2) Electrical connections of leads and harnesses shall conform to the following assembly
points:
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4 to 1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
NOTE
Tube Size OD Torque

0.75-1.0 (19.0-25.4) 24-26 (32.5-35.2)
1.125-1.50 (28.57-38.1) 20-40 (27.1-54.2)
1.625-2.0 (41.27-50.8) 40-50 (54.2-67.8)
2.125 and up (53.9 and up) 50-60 (67.8-81.3)
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 03
modified by bending as required. After bending to obtain the required free-state fit, the
Title Number

Fixturing Clamps 2C14754G01
Teflon-jawed pliers Local Purchase
Penetrating Oil L1 Liquid Wrench
or Dag 2404
(GE Spec.
A50TF54)
expendable materials are not listed. Reference GEK 105062, Illustrated Parts Breakdown (IPB),
for required parts.
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 03
6. Low Pressure Turbine/Turbine Rear Frame Flange Brackets Installation.
7. Air Manifold Installation.
8. Low Pressure Turbine Module Brackets Installation.
9. Low Pressure Turbine Module Tubing and Clamping Installation.
10. Low Pressure Turbine Module Electrical Leads Installation.
11. Deleted.
5
4
3
2
1
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 03
Figure 1. LPT/TRF Flange Brackets
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 03
Table 1. LPT/TRF Flange Brackets (See figure 1.)
Attach To Secure
Balance piston Boltholes 8, 9, 10 Bolts (2) 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (1) (45.2-49.7 N·m)
Balance piston Boltholes 22, 23, Bolts (2) 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (3) 24 (45.2-49.7 N·m)
Cable bracket (4) Boltholes 28, 29 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Cable bracket (7), Boltholes 35, 36, Bolts (2) 400-440 lb in. (a)
Balance piston 37 (45.2-49.7 N·m)
bracket (8)
nuts (6)
bracket (10) 50 (45.2-49.7 N·m)
Accelerometer Boltholes 51, 52 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (11) Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Oil scavenge Boltholes 55, 56, Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (12) 57 Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Lube supply Boltholes 61, 62 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (13) Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
nuts (6)
nuts (6)
Electrical Boltholes 78 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (16) through 83 Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 03
Table 1. LPT/TRF Flange Brackets (See figure 1.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
nuts (6)
nuts (6)
nuts (6)
nuts (6)
bracket (21) 117 (45.2-49.7 N·m)
bracket (22) 126 (45.2-49.7 N·m)
NOTES:
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 03
Figure 2. Air Manifold
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 03
Table 2. Air Manifold (See figure 2.)
Attach To Secure
Fixturing clamps, Left side air Wing nuts Finger-tight (a)
2C14754G01 manifold (1),
Right side air
manifold (2)
Gasket (3), Left LPT stator Bolts (4) 90-100 lb in. (b) (c) (d)
side air (10.2-11.3 N·m)
manifold (1)
Gasket (3), Right LPT stator Bolts (4) 90-100 lb in. (c) (d) (e)
side air (10.2-11.3 N·m)
manifold (2)
Left side air Left side air Bolts (5), Nuts (6) 55-70 lb in. (c)
manifold (1) manifold (1), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Right side air
manifold (2)
Support link (7) Air manifold (1, 2) Bolts (8), Nuts (9) 33-37 lb in. (c) (f) (g)
(3.8-4.1 N·m)
Support link (7) Cooling bracket Bolts (8), Nuts (9) 33-37 lb in. (c) (h) (i) (j)
(3.8-4.1 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Fixturing clamps align the expansion joints for engine assembly.
(b) Align inlet fitting pointing forward at 10:00 o'clock position (aft looking forward).
(c) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
(d) Safety-wire.
(e) Align inlet fitting pointing forward at 4:00 o'clock position (aft looking forward).
(f) Adjustable rod-end of link must be installed to manifold.
(g) Begin support link installation at 12:00 o'clock position and proceed clockwise (aft looking
forward).
(h) Loosen link jamnuts and adjust link to fit up with forward brackets.
(i) Tighten link jamnut to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire jamnut.
(j) Remove fixturing clamps.
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 03
Figure 3. LPT Module Brackets (Sheet 1 of 3)
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 03
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 03
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 03
Table 3. LPT Module Brackets (See figure 3.)
Attach To Secure
LPT cooling PCC cooling Bolts (4) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (1), LPT manifold (3) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
cooling bracket (2) (6 places)
LPT damper Bracket (6) Bolts (4) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (5) (5 places) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
LPT damper PCC cooling Bolts (7), 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (5) manifold (3) Self-locking (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(5 places) nuts (8)
Cooling damper Bracket (6) Bolts (4) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (9) (5 places) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling damper PCC cooling Bolts (4) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (9) manifold (3) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(11 places)
LPT damper Bracket (6) Bolts (4) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (10) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
LPT damper PCC cooling Bolts (11), 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (10), manifold (3) Nuts (12) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Oil supply
bracket (14)
Cooling damper Bracket (6) Bolts (4) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (13) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling damper PCC cooling Bolts (15) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (13), manifold (3) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Oil supply
bracket (14)
NOTES:
(a) LPT outer case to PCC cooling manifold clearance shall be a minimum of 0.075 inch
(1.9 mm).
(b) If any tube or manifold does not fit in the free state, within 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), it may be
modified by bending, as required.
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 03
Figure 4. LPT Module Tubing and Clamping (Sheet 1 of 3)
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 03
Change 5 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 03
16 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 03
Table 4. LPT Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 4.)
Attach To Secure
Balance piston air TRF (3) Bolts (4), 100-130 lb in. (a)
manifold (1), Self-locking (11.3-14.6 N·m)
Gasket (2) nuts (5)
Balance piston air TRF (3) Bolts (4), 100-130 lb in. (a)
manifold (6), Self-locking (11.3-14.6 N·m)
Gasket (2) nuts (5) (2 places)
Balance piston air Balance piston air Metal seal ring (7), 100-130 lb in. (a)
manifold (1) manifold (6) V-retainer (11.3-14.6 N·m)
coupling (8)
Balance piston air Balance piston Retaining 50-70 lb in. (a)
manifold (1) bracket (21, strap (10), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1) Bolts (11)
NOTES:
(a) If any tube or manifold does not fit in the free state, within 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), it may be
modified by bending, as required.
Change 5 17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 03
Figure 5. LPT Module Electrical Leads (Sheet 1 of 3)
18 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 03
Change 5 19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 03
20 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 03
Table 5. LPT Module Electrical Leads (See figure 5.)
Attach To Secure
LPT speed Cable bracket Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in. (b) (c)
electrical cable (1) (7, figure 1), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion clamp (2)
Cable bracket Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
(9, figure 1), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion clamp (2)
Electrical Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
bracket (6), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion clamp (2)
Oil scavenge Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
bracket (12, (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1), Cushion
clamp (2)
(2 places)
Lube Supply Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
bracket (13, (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1), Cushion
clamp (2)
Cable bracket (14, Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
figure 1), Cushion (6.3-7.9 N·m)
clamp (2)
clamp (2)
Electrical bracket Jamnut Hand-tight, 1/4 to (a)
(16, figure 1) 1/2 turn more
LPT speed Cable bracket (19, Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in. (b) (c)
electrical cable (4) figure 1), Cushion (6.3-7.9 N·m)
clamp (2)
clamp (2)
Change 5 21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 03
Table 5. LPT Module Electrical Leads (See figure 5.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
clamp (2)
Electrical bracket Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
(16, figure 1), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion clamp (2)
(2 places)
Electrical bracket Jamnut Hand-tight, 1/4 to (a)
High temperature Accelerometer Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
accelerometer (5), bracket (11, (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Electrical figure 1)
bracket (6)
High temperature Oil scavenge Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
accelerometer (5) bracket (12, (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1), cushion
clamp (7)
(2 places)
Lube supply Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
bracket (13, (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1), Cushion
clamp (7)
clamp (7)
Cable bracket (15, Bolt (3) 50-70 lb in.
clamp (7)
Electrical bracket Jamnut Hand-tight, 1/4 to
Electrical TMF Bolt (18), 50-70 lb in.
bracket (14) Spacer (19) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
22 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 03
Attach To Secure
Thermocouple (b)
electrical
harness (8)
Right side air Bolts (10), 50-70 lb in.
manifold (2, Nuts (11) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 2), Cushion
clamp (9)
(4 places)
Right side air Bolts (10), 50-70 lb in.
manifold (2, Nuts (11) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 2), Cushion
clamp (12),
Cushion clamp
(13)
Electrical Bolts (10) 50-70 lb in.
bracket (14), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion
clamp (12)
clamp (12)
Electrical bracket Bolts (10) 50-70 lb in.
(16, figure 1), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion
clamp (12)
(2 places)
Electrical bracket Jamnut Hand-tight, (a)
(16, figure 1) 1/4 to 1/2 turn more
Change 5 23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 03
Attach To Secure
Thermocouple (b)
electrical
harness (15)
Left side air Bolts (10), 50-70 lb in.
manifold (1, Nuts (11) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 2), Cushion
clamp (17)
(11 places)
Left side air Bolts (10), 50-70 lb in.
manifold (1, Nuts (11) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1), Cushion
clamp (9)
(2 places)
Oil supply bracket Bolts (10), 50-70 lb in.
(14, figure 3), Nuts (11) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion clamp (9)
Electrical bracket Jamnut Hand-tight, (a)
(16, figure 1) (not shown) 1/4 to 1/2 turn more
NOTES:
(a) Safety-wire.
(b) The bend radii for an electrical lead, cable, or harness shall exhibit a smooth transition. No
kinks allowed.
(c) Cable may be spiral wrapped with silicone tape in the areas of bracket clips or clamps and
0.50 inch (12.7 mm) on either side, beyond the edge of the clip or clamp, to provide positive
lead clamping, as required.
24 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 03
12. Replacing Manifold Bracket.
See figure 2.
CAUTION
• EXTENDED DWELL PERIOD IS RECOMMENDED TO
AVOID FASTENER BREAKAGE.
• DO NOT ATTEMPT THIS MAINTENANCE IF ADEQUATE

TIME IS NOT AVAILABLE FOR RECOMMENDED PENE-
TRANT DWELL TIME.
A. Liberally soak all fasteners to be removed with penetrating oil. 12-HOUR MINIMUM
DWELL TIME IS RECOMMENDED. Repeated soaking is recommended throughout the
dwell period to maximize penetrant effectiveness.
B. Remove self-locking nuts (9) and bolts (8) securing support links (7) to manifold
bracket (10).
C. Install safety wire through clevis end of support links (7) where bolt (8) was; secure clevis
end link to manifold with safety wire.
D. Remove old manifold bracket (10) from LPT case as follows:

CAUTION
• IF BOLT BREAKAGE OCCURS DURING REMOVAL OF
FIRST NUT (11), STOP THIS MAINTENANCE ACTIVITY.
SECOND FASTENER BREAKAGE REQUIRES DEPOT VISIT
TO REPAIR MODULE.
• TWO BOLTS (12) SECURING MANIFOLD BRACKET (10) TO

LPT CASE ARE PRESSED INTO RETAINER (13). ONE NUT
(11) MUST ALWAYS BE INSTALLED TO AVOID DROPPING
RETAINER INTO LPT ASSEMBLY. DROPPING RETAINER
INTO LPT ASSEMBLY REQUIRES DEPOT VISIT TO
REPAIR MODULE.
(1) Remove a single nut (11) completely, then thread nut back on and hand-tighten. Mini-
mum two-thread engagement is required.
(2) Remove second nut (11) completely. Lift and swing manifold bracket (10) over bolt (12)
and to one side, making sure manifold bracket is secured by first nut and bolt.
(3) Thread removed nut (11) back on and hand-tighten. Minimum two-thread engagement is
required.
Change 5 25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 03
(4) Remove first hand-tightened nut (11). Remove and discard damaged manifold bracket
(10).
(5) Thread removed nut (11) back on and hand-tighten. Minimum two-thread engagement is
required.
E. Install manifold bracket (10) to LPT case as follows:
(1) Remove one of the hand-tightened nuts (11). Discard used nut.
(2) Coat open bolt (12) with thread lubricant, on threads only.
(3) Place new manifold bracket (10) on open bolt (12) and hand-tighten new nut (11). Min-
imum two-thread engagement is required.
(4) Remove second used hand-tightened nut (11). Discard used nut.
(5) Coat second bolt (12) with thread lubricant, on threads only.
(6) Swing free end of new manifold bracket (10) over second bolt (12) and hand-tighten new
nut (11). Minimum two-thread engagement is required.
(7) Tighten nuts (11) to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
F. Install securing support links (7) as follows:
(1) Reinstall support links (7) per table 2.
Figure 6. Deleted.
Table 6. Deleted.
26 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 04
5SWP 1913 04
ENGINE ASSEMBLY EXTERNAL TUBING,
HARNESSES, AND CLAMPING


1 - 20 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Engine Assembly External Tubing and Hoses Installation......................................................... 4

Front Frame/HPC Flange Brackets Installation .......................................................................... 4
LPC Module Final Assembly...................................................................................................... 4
VIGV/LPC Flange Brackets Installation .................................................................................... 4
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 04
1. Introduction.
A. This subordinate work package contains information concerning installation of engine

assembly external tubing, cables, and clamping.
points:
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
NOTE
(d) Repeat steps (b) and (c) as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead clamps that
restrict mating.
Tube Size OD Torque

0.75-1.0 (19.0-25.4) 24-26 (32.5-35.2)
1.125-1.50 (28.57-38.1) 20-40 (27.1-54.2)
1.625-2.0 (41.27-50.8) 40-50 (54.2-67.8)
2.125 and up (53.9 and up) 50-60 (67.8-81.3)
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 04
(5) If any external tube or manifold does not fit in the free state at assembly within 0.060
inch (1.52 mm), and is known to be within manufacturing tolerance, it shall be modified
by bending as required. After bending, to obtain the required free state fit, the following
shall apply:
Title Number
ing
None required.
Silicone Tape MIL-L-46852
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 04
expendable materials are not listed. Refer to Illustrated Parts Breakdown, GEK 105062, for
required parts.
6. VIGV/LPC Flange Brackets Installation.

1
7. LPC Module Final Assembly.

2
8. Front Frame/HPC Flange Brackets Installation.

3
9. Engine Assembly External Tubing and Hoses Installation.

4
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 04
Figure 1. VIGV/LPC Flange Brackets
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 04
Table 1. VIGV/LPC Flange Brackets (See figure 1.)
Attach To Secure
Electrical bracket (1) Boltholes 64, 1 Bolts (2), Washers 380-420 lb in. (a)
(3), Nuts (4) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
Electrical bracket (5) Boltholes 3, 4 Bolts (2), Washers 380-420 lb in. (a)
(3), Nuts (4) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
Electrical bracket (6) Boltholes 19, 20 Bolts (8), Nuts (4) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
[Deleted if speed (43.0-47.4 N·m)
(XN2) sensor is
deleted]
Mounting bracket (7) Boltholes 19-22 Bolts (8), Nuts (4) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(43.0-47.4 N·m)
Bearing block (9) Mounting bracket Bolts (8), Nuts (10) 360-400 lb in. (a)
(7) (40.6-45.2 N·m)
Angle bracket (11) Boltholes 23, 24 Bolts (2), Washers 380-420 lb in. (a)
(3), Nuts (4) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
Panel bracket (12) Boltholes 26, 27, Bolts (8), Washers 360-400 lb in. (a)
28 (3), Nuts (4) (40.6-45.2 N·m)
IGV bracket (13) Boltholes 29, 30 Bolts (2), Washers 380-420 lb in. (a)
(3), Nuts (4) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
(3), Nuts (4) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
(3), Nuts (4) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
(3), Nuts (4) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
(3), Nuts (4) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
(3), Nut (4) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
Electrical bracket Boltholes 52, 53 Bolts (8), Nuts (4) 360-400 lb in. (a) (b)
(19) [Deleted if speed (40.6-45.2 N·m)
(XN2) sensor is
deleted]
Mounting bracket Boltholes 50-53 Bolts (8), Nuts (4) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(20) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 04
Table 1. VIGV/LPC Flange Brackets (See figure 1.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Bearing block (21) Mounting bracket Bolts (8), Nuts (10) 360-400 lb in. (a)
(20) (40.6-45.2 N·m)
Electrical bracket Boltholes 55, 56 Bolts (2), Washers 380-420 lb in. (a)
(22) (3), Nuts (4) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
(23) (3), Nuts (4) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
(24) (3), Nuts (4) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
NOTES:
(b) Install mounting brackets on each side of flange.
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 04
Figure 2. LPC Module Final Assembly (Sheet 1 of 2)
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 04
Figure 2. LPC Module Final Assembly (Sheet 2 of 2)
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 04
Table 2. LPC Module Final Assembly (See figure 2.)
Attach To Secure
Channel bracket (1) Panel bracket (8, Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a)
figure 1, (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
Channel bracket (1) IGV bracket (13, Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a)
figure 1) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Panel bracket (3) Channel bracket (1) Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a)
(6.3-7.9 N·m)
Panel bracket (4) Channel bracket (1) Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a)
(6.3-7.9 N·m)
No. 1 electrical Panel bracket (9, Bolts (2), Washers 55-70 lb in. (a)
interface panel (5) figure 1, (6) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
No. 1 electrical Panel bracket (12, Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a)
interface panel (5) figure 1) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
No. 1 electrical Panel brackets Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a)
interface panel (5) (3, 4) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Preformed packing Right VIGV actuator 135-150 lb in. (b)
(7), Reducer (8) rod-end port (15.3-16.9 N·m)
Preformed packing Right VIGV actuator 135-150 lb in. (b)
(9), Reducer (10) head-end port (15.3-16.9 N·m)
Preformed packings Oil tube/hose (14) 270-300 lb in. (b)
(11, 12), Drain can (30.6-33.9 N·m)
(13)
Oil tube/hose (14) Reducer (8) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Drain can (13) Right VIGV actuator Hand-tight (d)
rod-end port
Preformed packings Oil tube/hose (15) 270-300 lb in.
(11, 12), Drain can (30.6-33.9 N·m)
(13) (b)
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Drain can (13) Right VIGV actuator Hand-tight (d)
head-end port
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 04
Table 2. LPC Module Final Assembly (See figure 2.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Oil tube/hose (16) Drain cans (13) Coupling nuts 270-300 lb in.
(2 places) (30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil tube/hoses (14, Angle bracket (11, Clamps (17), Bolts 55-70 lb in. (a)
15, 16) figure 1) (18), Washers (19) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Preformed packing Left VIGV actuator 135-150 lb in. (b)
(20), Reducer (21) rod-end port (15.3-16.9 N·m)
Preformed packing Left VIGV actuator 135-150 lb in. (b)
(22), Reducer (23) head-end port (15.3-16.9 N·m)
Preformed packings Oil tube/hose (24) TBP (b)
(11, 12), Drain can
(13)
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Drain can (13) Left VIGV actuator Hand-tight (d)
rod-end port
Preformed packings Oil tube/hose (25) 270-300 lb in. (b)
(11, 12), Drain can (30.6-33.9 N·m)
(13)
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Drain can (13) Left VIGV actuator Hand-tight (d)
head-end port
Oil tube/hose (26) Drain can (13) Coupling nuts 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
IGV oil tube (27) Oil tube/hoses Coupling nuts 270-300 lb in.
(15, 24) (30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil manifold (28) Oil tube/hoses Coupling nuts 270-300 lb in.
(16, 26) (30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil manifold (29) Oil tube/hoses Coupling nuts 270-300 lb in.
(14, 25) (30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil tube/hoses Angle bracket Clamps (30), Bolts 55-70 lb in. (a)
(24, 25), Oil (17, figure 1) (18), Washers (19) (6.-7.9 N·m)
manifold (28)
IGV oil tube (27), Angle brackets (14, Clamps (31), Bolts 55-70 lb in. (a)
Oil manifolds (28, 15, 16, figure 1) (18), Washers (19) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
29)
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 04
Table 2. LPC Module Final Assembly (See figure 2.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
IGV oil tube (27), IGV bracket (13, Clamps (32), Bolts 55-70 lb in. (a)
Oil manifolds (28, figure 1) (18), Washers (19) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
29)
IGV oil tube (27), No. 1 electrical Clamps (33), Bolts 55-70 lb in. (a)
Oil manifolds (28, interface panel (5) (18), Washers (19) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
29)
IGV oil tube (34) Oil manifold (29) Coupling nut 450-550 lb in.
(50.9-62.1 N·m)
IGV oil tube (35) IGV oil tube (27) Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
Teflon hose (36) IGV oil tube (34) Coupling nut 450-550 lb in.
(50.9-62.1 N·m)
Teflon hose (36) Nipple (86, figure 3, Coupling nut 450-550 lb in.
SWP 1913 01) (50.9-62.1 N·m)
IGV oil hose (37) IGV oil tube (35) Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
IGV oil hose (37) Nipple (84, figure 3, Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
SWP 1913 01) (73.5-87.0 N·m)
IGV oil tube (34) No. 1 electrical Clamps (38), Bolts 55-70 lb in. (a)
interface panel (5) (2) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(3 places)
IGV oil tube (35) No. 1 electrical Clamps (39), Bolts 55-70 lb in. (a)
interface panel (5) (2) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(3 places)
NOTES:
WARNING
(b) Lubricate preformed packing using lubricating oil.
(c) Align drain fittings before tightening.
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 04
Figure 3. Front Frame/HPC Flange Brackets
Table 3. Front Frame/HPC Flange Brackets (See figure 3.)
Attach To Secure
VSV actuator Boltholes 18, 19, Bolts (2) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (1) 24, 26 (43.0-47.4 N·m)
Bolthole 25 Bolt (3) 210-230 lb in. (a) (b)
(23.8-25.9 N·m)
(65.6-70.0 N·m)
Hydraulic bracket Bolthole 33 Bolt (2), 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(5) Spacer (10) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
(65.6-70.0 N·m)
Bracket Boltholes 45, 46 Bolts (2) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
assembly (6) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
Bracket Front frame Bolt (7) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
assembly (6) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 04
Table 3. Front Frame/HPC Flange Brackets (See figure 3.)
Attach To Secure
Bracket Boltholes 54, 55 Bolts (2) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
assembly (8) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
Bracket Front frame Bolt (7) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
assembly (8) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
VSV actuator Boltholes 60, 61, Bolts (2) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (9) 66, 68 (43.0-47.4 N·m)
(23.8-25.9 N·m)
(65.6-70.0 N·m)
NOTES:
(b) Safety-wire.
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 04
Figure 4. Engine Assembly External Tubing and Hoses (Sheet 1 of 4)
Change 5 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 04
16 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 04
Change 5 17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 04
18 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 1913 04
Table 4. Engine Assembly External Tubing and Hoses (See figure 4.)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Note
Hose (1), AGB Bolts (41) 55-70 lb in.
Gasket (42) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Hose (1), B-scavenge oil tube Bolts (34), Nuts 55-70 lb in.
Gasket (33) (70, figure 7, (32) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
Hose (2) Tube (3) Coupling 650-770 lb in.
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
Hose (4) AGB Coupling 650-770 lb in.
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
Hose (5), C-scavenge oil tube Bolts (31), 55-70 lb in.
Gasket (33) (71, figure 7, Nuts (32) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
Hose (5), AGB Bolts (39) 55-70 lb in.
Gasket (40) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Nipple (6) TRF Boss 650-770 lb in.
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
Hose (7) Nipple (6) Coupling 650-770 lb in.
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
Hose (7) Oil scavenge bracket Loop Clamp (8), 55-70 lb in.
(12, figure 1, Bolt (9) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 03) (2 places)
Hose (7) Lube supply bracket Loop Clamp (8), 55-70 lb in.
(13, figure 1, Bolt (9) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
Hose (7) Oil supply bracket Loop Clamp (20), 55-70 lb in.
(21, figure 3, Bolt (21) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 03)
(46, figure 3, Bolt (27) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
(3, figure 4, Bolt (29) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
Change 5 19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 1913 04
Table 4. Engine Assembly External Tubing and Hoses (See figure 4.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Note
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
(21, figure 3, Bolt (19) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 03)
(46, figure 3, Bolt (23) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
(3, figure 4, Bolt (36) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
Hose (13) Electrical bracket Loop Clamp (14), 55-70 lb in. 2 Places
(16, figure 1, Bolt (15) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 03)
(21, figure 3, Bolt (17) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 03)
Hose (13) Oil supply bracket Loop Clamp (28), 55-70 lb in
(46, figure 3, Bolt (29) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
(73.5-87.0 N·m)
Tube (30) Oil supply bracket Loop Clamp (37), 55-70 lb in.
(3, figure 4, Bolt (38) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
WP 1913 02)
20 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1915 00
2WP 1915 00
WORK PACKAGE
HEAT SHIELDS REPLACEMENT


1 - 22 ...... 2
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Heat Shields Installation ............................................................................................................. 15

Heat Shields Removal ................................................................................................................. 3
Change 2 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1915 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the forward, mid, and aft
heat shields.
B. Disconnect and connect electrical leads and connecting tubes between low pressure turbine
(LPT) module and gas turbine as required per SWP 1913 03.
Title Number
Ultraviolet Flame Sensor, Flame Sensor Sight Glass, and WP 1515 00
Flame Sensor Bracket Replacement
None required.
(Black or Blue)
None required.
2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1915 00
6. Heat Shields Removal.
A. Remove four bolts (figure 1) that secure high pressure turbine (HPT) borescope cover to mid
and aft heat shields.
B. Remove aft heat shields as follows (figure 2):
(1) Using marking pen, matchmark five aft heat shields to HPT/LPT flange.
(2) Remove 32 bolts that secure aft heat shields onto mid heat shield.
2
1
(3) Remove nine bolts, spacers, and washers that secure aft heat shields together at connec-
tor plates, sheet 2, Views B and C.
(4) Remove 32 nuts, 27 spacers, 27 washers, and 32 bolts that secure aft heat shields onto aft
heat shield support brackets on HPT/LPT flange, Section D-D and E-E. Remove aft heat
shields.
C. Remove ultraviolet flame sensors per WP 1515 00.
WARNING
Ensure ignition exciter is not energized. Voltage output can be
dangerous. Do not touch the electrical contacts of the ignition
leads or exciter. The ignition exciter may contain an electrical
charge even when not energized.
CAUTION
• Ensure igniter plug adapter is restrained when loosening cou-

pling nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
• Igniter plug may fall out when ignition lead is disconnected.
D. Disconnect ignition lead from igniter plug adapter. See figure 3. Momentarily ground
ignition lead to remove any residual electrical charge.
3
E. Remove forward and mid heat shields as follows (figure 4):
(1) Using marking pen, matchmark four forward and five mid heat shields to CRF/CRF aft
case flange.
(2) Remove eight bolts, spacers, and washers that secure forward heat shields together at
four connector plates, sheet 5, View T.
Change 2 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1915 00
Figure 1. Mid and Aft Heat Shield and Connector Plates
4 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1915 00
Figure 2. Aft Heat Shields (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 2 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1915 00
Figure 2. Aft Heat Shields (Sheet 2 of 2)
6 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1915 00
Figure 3. Igniter Plug and Lead
(3) Remove 10 bolts, spacers, and washers that secure mid heat shields together at five
connector plates, figure 4, sheet 5, Views U and V, and sheet 6, Views W, X, and Y.
(4) Remove 26 nuts, 31 spacers, 32 washers, and 26 bolts that secure forward and mid heat
shields onto extension flange brackets on CRF/CRF aft case flange
5
4
NOTE
If aft heat shield or connector plate is not being replaced, it is not nec-
essary to remove connector plates.
F. If necessary, remove bolts, two each, that secure connector plates onto CW end of each for-
ward heat shield. See figure 5.
G. If necessary, remove bolts, one each, that secure two connector plates onto CW end of top
right and right mid heat shields. See figure 1.
H. If necessary, remove bolts, two each, that secure connector plates onto CW end of bottom
right, bottom left, and top left mid heat shields. See figure 1.
I. If necessary, remove bolts, two each, that secure connector plates onto CW end of each aft
heat shield. See figure 1.
Change 2 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1915 00
Figure 4. Forward and Mid Heat Shields and CRF/CRF Aft Case Flange Brackets (Sheet 1 of 6)
8 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1915 00
Change 2 9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1915 00
10 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1915 00
Change 2 11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1915 00
12 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1915 00
Change 2 13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1915 00
Figure 5. Forward Heat Shield and Connector Plates
14 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1915 00
7. Heat Shields Installation.
A. If necessary, install forward heat shield connector plates onto forward heat shields as follows
(figure 5 and figure 4, sheet 5, View T):
(1) Coat threads of eight bolts with thread lubricant.
(2) Install connector plate onto CW end of each heat shield and secure each connector plate
with two bolts. Tighten bolts finger-tight.
B. If necessary, install mid heat shield connector plates onto mid heat shields as follows
(figure 1 and figure 4, sheet 5, Views U and V):
(1) Coat threads of 10 bolts with thread lubricant.
(2) Install two connector plates onto CW end of top right and right heat shields. Secure each
connector plate with bolt, View V. Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(3) Install three connector plates onto CW end of bottom right, bottom left, and top left heat
shields, View U. Secure each connector plate with two bolts. Tighten bolts finger-tight.
C. Install forward and mid heat shields and CRF aft case forward flange brackets as follows
(figure 4):
(1) Coat threads of 26 bolts and 26 nuts with thread lubricant.
(2) Place top forward heat shield onto forward side of CRF/CRF aft case flange. Install
between 10:30 and 1:30 o'clock positions and align center bolthole in heat shield with
center bolthole in extension flange bracket at 12:00 o'clock position, sheet 2 and sheet 3,
View A.
(3) Place top right mid heat shield onto aft side of CRF/CRF aft case flange, sliding cutout
on aft edge under HP recoup tube flange. Install between 11:50 and 2:30 o'clock posi-
tions and align most CCW bolthole in heat shield with center bolthole in extension
flange bracket at 12:00 o'clock position, sheet 2 and sheet 3, View A.
(4) Secure top forward and top right mid heat shields onto center bolthole in extension
flange bracket at 12:00 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft), spacer (under bolthead
on aft side of flange), washer (under spacer on aft side of flange), and nut, sheet 3,
View A. Tighten nut finger-tight.
(5) Secure top right mid heat shield onto bolthole, at location C and View C and extension
flange brackets with bolt (bolthead aft), spacer (under bolthead on aft side of flange),
washer (under spacer on aft side of flange), and nut. Tighten nut finger-tight.
Change 2 15
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1915 00
(6) Secure top forward and top right mid heat shields onto bolthole in extension flange
bracket at 1:15 o'clock position CW of CDP air tube bracket with bolt (bolthead aft),
washer (under spacer on forward side of flange), spacer (under nut on forward side of
flange), and nut, View E. Tighten nut finger-tight.
(7) Place right forward heat shield onto forward side of CRF/CRF aft case flange. Install
center bolthole in extension flange bracket at 3:00 o'clock position.
(8) Secure right forward and top right mid heat shields onto center bolthole in extension
flange bracket at 1:45 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft), spacer (under bolthead on
aft side of flange), washer (under spacer on aft side of flange), washer (under spacer on
forward side of flange), spacer (under nut on forward side of flange), and nut, View F.
Tighten nut finger-tight.
(9) Place CDP air tube bracket onto forward side of extension flange bracket at 2:15 o'clock
position. Secure top right mid heat shield onto center bolthole in CDP air tube and exten-
sion flange bracket with bolt (bolthead aft), spacer (under bolthead on aft side of flange),
sheet 4, View G, and washer (under spacer on aft side of flange). Tighten bolts finger-
tight.
(10) Place right mid heat shield onto aft side of CRF/CRF aft case flange, sliding cutout on aft
edge under HP recoup tube flange. Install between 2:30 and 3:45 o'clock positions and
align second most CCW bolthole in heat shield with center bolthole in extension flange
bracket at 3:00 o'clock position.
(11) Secure right forward and right mid heat shields onto center bolthole in extension flange
bracket at 2:45 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft), spacer (under bolthead on aft
side of flange), washer (under spacer on aft side of flange), washer (under spacer on for-
ward side of flange), spacer (under nut on forward side of flange), and nut, sheet 3,
View F. Tighten nut finger-tight.
(12) Secure right forward and right mid heat shields onto center bolthole in extension flange
bracket at 3:00 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft), washer under nut, and nut,
sheet 4, View H. Tighten nut finger-tight.
(13) Place flame sensor bracket and HP recoup air tube bracket onto forward side of exten-
sion flange bracket at 3:45 o'clock position. Secure right mid heat shield onto upper bolt-
hole in flame sensor, HP recoup air tube, and extension flange brackets with bolt
(bolthead aft), spacer (under bolthead on aft side of flange), sheet 4, View J, and washer
(under spacer on aft side of flange). Tighten nut finger-tight.
16 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1915 00
(14) Place bottom right mid heat shield onto aft side of CRF/CRF aft case flange, sliding cut-
outs on aft edge under HP recoup tube flanges. Install between 3:45 and 6:45 o'clock
positions and align most CCW bolthole in heat shield with center bolthole in extension
flange bracket at 3:50 o'clock position.
(15) Secure bottom right mid heat shield onto center bolthole in flame sensor, HP recoup air
tube, and extension flange brackets at 3:50 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft),
spacer (under bolthead on aft side of flange), and washer (under spacer on aft side of
flange), sheet 4, View J. Tighten nut finger-tight.
(16) Secure right forward and bottom right mid heat shields onto center bolthole in extension
aft side of flange), washer (under spacer on aft side of flange), washer (under spacer on
forward side of flange), spacer (under nut on forward side of flange), and nut, View F.
(17) Place bottom forward heat shield onto forward side of CRF/CRF aft case flange. Install
center bolthole in extension flange bracket at 6:00 o'clock position.
(18) Secure bottom forward heat shield onto lower bolthole in extension flange and cooling
air tube brackets at 4:55 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft), washer (under spacer
on forward side of flange), spacer (under nut on forward side of flange), and nut,
View M. Tighten nut finger-tight.
(19) Secure bottom right mid heat shield onto upper bolthole in extension flange brackets at
5:00 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft) and nut, View N. Tighten nut finger-tight.
(20) Secure bottom forward heat shield onto lower bolthole in extension flange and support
brackets at 5:15 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft), washer (under spacer on for-
ward side of flange), spacer (under nut on forward side of flange), and nut, View S.
(21) Place support bracket onto forward side of extension flange at 6:00 postion. Secure sup-
port bracket, and bottom right mid heat shield onto center bolthole in extension flange
brackets at 6:00 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft), spacer (under bolthead on aft
side of flange), washer (under spacer on aft side of flange), and nut, View G. Tighten nut
finger-tight.
(22) Secure top forward and top right mid heat shields onto center bolthole in extension
flange bracket at 6:15 o’clock position with bolt (bolthead aft), spacer (under bolthead
on aft side of flange), washer (under spacer on aft side of flange), and nut, sheet 3,
View A. Tighten nut finger-tight.
Change 2 17
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1915 00
(23) Secure bottom forward and bottom right mid heat shields onto center bolthole in exten-
sion flange brackets at 6:30 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft), spacer (under bolth-
ead on aft side of flange), washer (under spacer on aft side of flange), washer (under
spacer on forward side of flange), spacer (under nut on forward side of flange), and nut,
(24) Place bottom left mid heat shield onto aft side of CRF/CRF aft case flange, sliding cut-
outs on aft edge under HP recoup tube flanges. Install between 6:45 and 8:50 o'clock
positions and align most CCW bolthole in heat shield with center bolthole in extension
flange bracket at 6:50 o'clock position.
(25) Secure bottom forward and bottom left mid heat shields onto center bolthole in extension
flange brackets at 6:50 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft), spacer (under bolthead
on aft side of flange), washer (under spacer on aft side of flange), washer (under spacer
on forward side of flange), spacer (under nut on forward side of flange), and nut, View F.
(26) Place left forward heat shield onto forward side of CRF/CRF aft case flange, sliding con-
nector plate on CW end under top forward heat shield. Install between 7:30 and 10:30
o'clock positions and align center bolthole in heat shield with center bolthole in exten-
sion flange bracket at 9:00 o'clock position.
(27) Secure left forward and bottom left mid heat shields onto center bolthole in extension
flange bracket at 7:45 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft), washer (under spacer on
forward side of flange), spacer (under nut on forward side of flange), and nut, View E.
(28) Secure support bracket, left forward and bottom left mid heat shields onto center bolt-
hole in extension flange brackets at 8:15 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft), spacer
(under bolthead on aft side of flange), washer (under spacer on aft side of flange), washer
(under spacer on forward side of flange), spacer (under nut on forward side of flange),
and nut, sheet 4, View G. Tighten nut finger-tight.
(29) Secure left forward and bottom left mid heat shields onto center bolthole in extension
aft side of flange), washer (under spacer on aft side of flange), and nut, sheet 3, View A.
(30) Place top left mid heat shield onto aft side of CRF/CRF aft case flange, sliding connector
plate on CW end under top right mid heat shield and sliding cutouts on the aft edge under
HP recoup tube flanges. Install between 8:50 and 11:50 o'clock positions, align most
CCW bolthole in heat shield with center bolthole in extension flange bracket at 9:00
o'clock position.
18 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1915 00
(31) Secure left forward and top left mid heat shields onto center bolthole in extension flange
ward side of flange), spacer (under nut on forward side of flange), and nut, View F.
(32) Secure left forward and top left mid heat shields onto center bolthole in extension flange
ward side of flange), spacer (under nut on forward side of flange), and nut, sheet 3,
(33) Secure top forward and top left mid heat shields onto center bolthole in extension flange
bracket at 10:45 o'clock position with bolt (bolthead aft), washer (under spacer on for-
ward side of flange), spacer (under nut on forward side of flange), and nut, View E.
(34) Secure top left mid heat shield onto center bolthole in HP recoup air tube and extension
flange brackets with bolt (bolthead aft), spacer (under bolthead on aft side of flange), and
washer (under spacer on aft side of flange), and nut, sheet 4, View G. Tighten nut finger-
tight.
(35) Place LPT bracket onto aft side of extension bracket at 11:45 o'clock position. Secure
LPT bracket, and top forward, shield onto extension flange bracket at 11:45 o'clock posi-
tion with two bolts (bolthead aft), washers (under spacers on forward side of flange),
spacer (under nut on forward side of flange), and nut, View M. Tighten nut finger-tight.
(36) Secure forward heat shields together at four connector plates with bolts, spacers (under
bolthead), and washers (under spacer). Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(37) Secure mid heat shields together at five connector plates with bolts, spacers (under bolth-
ead), and washers (under spacer). Tighten bolts finger-tight.
D. If necessary, install aft heat shield connector plates onto aft heat shields as follows (figure 1):
(2) Install connector plate onto CW end of each heat shield and secure each connector plate
with two bolts. Tighten bolts finger-tight.
E. Install aft heat shields as follows (figure 2):
(1) Coat threads of 75 bolts and 32 nuts with thread lubricant.
Change 2 19
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1915 00
(2) Place top right aft heat shield onto forward side of HPT/LPT flange, sliding cutout on
forward edge under HP recoup tube flange. Install between 11:50 and 2:30 o'clock posi-
tions at location marked during removal. Align boltholes in heat shield with boltholes in
aft heat shield support position.
(3) Secure top right aft heat shield onto aft heat shield support bracket at 1:10 o'clock posi-
tion with bolt (bolthead aft) and nut. Tighten nut finger-tight (section D-D).
(4) Secure top right aft heat shield onto other five aft heat shield support brackets with bolts
(bolthead aft), washers (under spacer on forward side of flange), spacers (under nut on
forward side of flange), and nuts. Tighten nuts finger-tight (section E-E).
(5) Place right aft heat shield onto forward side of HPT/LPT flange, sliding cutout on for-
ward edge under HP recoup tube flange. Install between 2:30 and 3:45 o'clock positions
at location marked during removal. Align boltholes in heat shield with boltholes in aft
heat shield support brackets.
(6) Secure right aft heat shield onto aft heat shield support bracket at 2:50 o'clock positions
with bolt (bolthead aft) and nut. Tighten nut finger-tight (section D-D).
(7) Secure right aft heat shield onto other three aft heat shield support brackets with bolts
(8) Place bottom right aft heat shield onto forward side of HPT/LPT flange, sliding cutouts
on forward edge under HP recoup tube flanges. Install between 3:45 and 6:45 o'clock
positions at location marked during removal. Align boltholes in heat shield with bolt-
holes in aft heat shield support brackets.
(9) Secure bottom right aft heat shield onto aft heat shield support bracket at 5:00 o'clock
positions with bolt (bolthead aft) and nut. Tighten nut finger-tight (section D-D).
(10) Secure bottom right aft heat shield onto other six aft heat shield support brackets with
bolts (bolthead aft), washers (under spacer on forward side of flange), spacers (under nut
on forward side of flange), and nuts. Tighten nuts finger-tight (section E-E).
(11) Place bottom left aft heat shield onto forward side of HPT/LPT flange, sliding cutouts on
forward edge under HP recoup tube flanges. Install between 6:45 and 8:50 o'clock posi-
tions at location marked during removal. Align boltholes in heat shield with boltholes in
aft heat shield support brackets.
(12) Secure bottom left aft heat shield onto aft heat shield support bracket at 7:45 o'clock
positions with bolt (bolthead aft) and nut. Tighten nut finger-tight (section D-D).
20 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 1915 00
(13) Secure bottom left aft heat shield onto other five aft heat shield support brackets with
bolts (bolthead aft), washers (under spacer on forward side of flange), spacers (under nut
on forward side of flange), and nuts. Tighten nuts finger-tight (section E-E).
(14) Place top left aft heat shield onto forward side of HPT/LPT flange, sliding connector
plate on CW end under top right aft heat shield and sliding cutouts on forward edge
under HP recoup tube flanges. Install between 8:50 and 11:50 o'clock positions at loca-
tion marked during removal. Align boltholes in heat shield with boltholes in aft heat
shield support brackets.
(15) Secure top left aft heat shield onto aft heat shield support bracket at 10:15 o'clock posi-
tions with bolt (bolthead aft) and nut. Tighten nut finger-tight (section D-D).
(16) Secure top left aft heat shield onto other eight aft heat shield support brackets with bolts
(17) Secure aft heat shield together at five connector plates with bolts, spacers (under bolth-
ead), and washers (under spacer). Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(18) Secure aft heat shields onto mid heat shields at 32 places around engine with bolts.
Tighten bolts finger-tight.
F. Install HPT borescope cover onto mid and aft heat shields as follows (figure 1):
(1) Coat threads of four bolts with thread lubricant.
(2) Attach HPT borescope cover onto bottom right mid and aft heat shields at 4:45 o'clock
and secure with four bolts. Tighten bolts finger-tight.
G. Tighten nuts and bolts as follows:
(1) Tighten 26 nuts that secure forward and mid heat shields and CRF/CRF aft case flange
brackets onto extension flange brackets to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
(2) Tighten 32 nuts that secure aft heat shields onto aft heat shield brackets to 62-68 lb in.
(3) Tighten eight bolts that secure forward heat shield connector plates to 62-68 lb in.
(4) Tighten 20 bolts that secure mid heat shield connector plates to 62-68 lb in.
(5) Tighten 19 bolts that secure aft heat shield connector plates to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m)
of torque.
Change 2 21
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 1915 00
(6) Tighten four bolts that secure HPT borescope cover to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of
torque.
(7) Tighten 32 bolts that secure aft heat shields to mid heat shields to 62-68 lb in.
CAUTION
Ensure igniter plug adapter is restrained when tightening coupling

H. Install ignition lead onto igniter plug adapter. See figure 3. Tighten coupling nut to
23-27 lb ft (31.2-36.6 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire coupling nut.
I. Install ultraviolet flame sensors per WP 1515 00.
22 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2110 00
0WP 2110 00
WORK PACKAGE
VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE (VIGV) ASSEMBLY
REPLACEMENT


1 - 10 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Variable Inlet Guide Vane Assembly Installation ....................................................................... 7

Variable Inlet Guide Vane Assembly Removal ........................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2110 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the variable inlet guide
vane (VIGV) assembly.
B. Remove low pressure compressor temperature/pressure (T2/P2) sensor per WP 1111 00.
Title Number
Low Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T2/P2) WP 1111 00
Sensor Replacement

Fixture Assembly, Lift & Turn - VIGV 1C9390G01
VBV, VSV
(Black or Blue)

2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2110 00
6. Variable Inlet Guide Vane Assembly Removal.
A. Using marking pen, mark position of brackets to low pressure compressor (LPC) stages 0-3
stator case forward flange.
B. Remove VIGV actuators and mount brackets as follows:
WARNING

CAUTION
(1) Tag and disconnect electrical connectors from VIGV actuators.
(2) Disconnect tubing coupling nuts from VIGV actuator fittings as follows (figure 1):
1
Figure 1. Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Tubing
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2110 00
WARNING

(a) Position a waste fluid container beneath VIGV actuator. Disconnect drain lines from
drain adapters.
(b) Disconnect drain adapters from VIGV actuator. Slide drain adapters away from
VIGV actuator ports to expose coupling nuts.
CAUTION

(c) Disconnect coupling nuts from VIGV actuator fittings.
(d) Remove and discard preformed packings.
(3) Remove nuts and bolts that secure actuator-to-ring brackets to actuation ring. See
figure 2. Remove actuator-to-ring brackets.
2
(4) Remove nuts, bolts, and bushings that secure actuator rod-ends.
(5) Remove nuts and bolts that secure VIGV actuator stationary mount brackets onto LPC
stator case front flange/VIGV stator case rear flange.
(6) Remove nuts and bolts from actuator bearing blocks.
(7) Remove actuators and stationary mount brackets as units.
C. Install lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, as follows (figure 3):
(1) Connect lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto 1-ton (907 kg) capacity hoist.
(2) Position lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto VIGV assembly forward flange.
(3) Using bolts and washers, secure lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto VIGV assembly for-
ward flange. Boltheads face aft. Tighten bolts to 40-60 lb in. (4.6-6.7 N·m) of torque.
3
D. Remove nuts, bolts, and washers that secure VIGV assembly aft flange onto LPC forward
flange.
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2110 00
Figure 2. VIGV Actuators and Mount Brackets
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2110 00
Figure 3. VIGV Lift and Turn Fixture Assembly, 1C9390
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2110 00
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from under
suspended loads to prevent injury.
E. Tap VIGV assembly forward flange using soft-face mallet. Move VIGV assembly forward
until aft rabbet clears LPC stages 0-3 stator case forward flange.
7. Variable Inlet Guide Vane Assembly Installation.
A. Install lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, as follows (figure 3):
(1) Connect lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto 1-ton (907 kg) capacity hoist.
(2) Position lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto VIGV assembly forward flange.
(3) Using bolts and washers, secure lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto VIGV assembly for-
ward flange. Boltheads face aft. Tighten bolts to 40-60 lb in. (4.6-6.7 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
B. Lift VIGV assembly into position on LPC stages 0-3 stator case forward rabbet.
C. Apply thread lubricant to threads and washer faces of bolts that secure VIGV assembly aft
flange to LPC forward flange.
D. Install brackets, bolts, washers, and nuts to secure VIGV assembly aft flange to LPC forward
flange. Boltheads face aft. Washer is under nut at bracket locations. At all other flange loca-
tions, washers are under boltheads and nuts.
E. Tighten nuts to 380-420 lb in. (43.0-47.4 N·m) of torque.
F. Remove bolts and nuts that secure lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto VIGV assembly for-
ward flange. Remove lift and turn fixture.
G. Install VIGV actuators as follows (figure 2):
(1) Install bushings into actuator-to-ring brackets so bushing flanges are to outside of
brackets.
(2) Apply thread lubricant onto threads of actuator rod-end retaining bolt.
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2110 00
(3) Using bolt (bolthead outboard) and nut, secure actuator-to-ring brackets to VIGV actua-
tor rod-end. Tighten nut to 190-230 lb in. (21.5-25.9 N·m) of torque.
(4) Apply thread lubricant to threads and mating surfaces of bracket retaining nuts.
(5) Align actuator-to-ring brackets with bushings installed in actuation ring. Install eight
bolts (boltheads are outside brackets) and nuts. Tighten nuts to 380-420 lb in.
(43.0-47.4 N·m) of torque.
(6) Position VIGV actuator forward and aft stationary mount brackets and electrical bracket
as marked during disassembly.
NOTE
Boltheads will face forward on VIGV actuator stationary mount flange

bolts adjacent to the left speed sensor.
(7) Using bolts and nuts, secure forward and aft stationary mounts, and electrical bracket,
onto VIGV stator case and stages 0-3 stator case. Boltheads face aft, except for two bolts
adjacent to left speed sensor.
(8) Using bolts and nuts, secure actuator bearing blocks onto forward and aft stationary
mounts. Boltheads face forward.
(9) Tighten stationary mount brackets and actuator bearing block bolts and nuts to
380-420 lb in. (43.0-47.4 N·m) of torque.
WARNING

(10) Lubricate new packings, P/N 9365M41P117 and P/N 9365M41P122, with lubricating oil
and install in drain adapters. See figure 1.
CAUTION

(11) Connect tubing to actuator fittings. Tighten coupling nuts to 450-550 lb in.
(50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2110 00
(12) Leak-check head- and rod-end fittings as follows:
CAUTION
Use hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569G3, with engines that use lubricat-
ing oil, MIL-L-23699. Do not inter mix lubricating oil, MIL-L-7808
(a) Install reducers from adapter set, 1C9393, on hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569.
Tighten reducers to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(b) Disconnect head tube from hydraulic control unit (HCU). Install head tube onto
-4 to -10 reducer. Tighten coupling nut to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
(c) Disconnect rod tube from HCU. Install rod tube onto -4 to -8 reducer. Tighten cou-
WARNING
and fittings.
(d) Apply 200-250 psi (1379-1724 kPa) to head tube and hold for a minimum of 2 min-
utes. Check head tube/actuator connection for leakage.
(e) Apply 200-250 psi (1379-1724 kPa) to rod tube and hold for a minimum of 2 min-
utes. Check rod tube/actuator connection for leakage.
(f) Check VIGV actuation system per WP 1113 00.
(g) Disconnect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569. Remove reducers.
(h) Connect head tube to HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m)
of torque.
(i) Connect rod tube to HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of
torque.
(13) Slide drain adapters over coupling nuts and connect to actuator ports. Hand-tighten drain
adapters.
9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2110 00
(14) Leak-check drain adapters as follows:
(a) Connect a source of clean, dry, regulated shop air or nitrogen to drain line fitting on
drain adapter.
WARNING
• Serious injury can occur when applying pneumatic pressure.

Eye protection is required. Relieve pressure before disconnect-
ing lines and fittings.

(b) Apply 50-55 psi (345-379 kPa) to drain adapter. Shut off pressure and monitor. Pres-
sure shall not drop off more than 10 psi (69 kPa) in 2 minutes.
(c) If pressure drop limit is exceeded, use soap solution to detect leak. Repair, as
required, and repeat leak check.
(d) Disconnect test equipment from drain adapter.
(e) Connect drain lines to drain adapters. Tighten coupling nuts to 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(15) Connect electrical connector to VIGV actuator as follows:
(a) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while wig-
gling back shell assembly.
Teflon-jawed connector pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn or until plier slippage
occurs.
NOTE
(d) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead clamp
10
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2210 00
2WP 2210 00
WORK PACKAGE
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (LPC) MODULE
REPLACEMENT


1 - 14 ...... 2
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Low Pressure Compressor Module Installation .......................................................................... 9

Low Pressure Compressor Module Removal.............................................................................. 3
Change 2 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2210 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the low pressure com-
pressor (LPC) module.
B. Disconnect and connect electrical leads and connecting tubes between LPC module and gas
turbine per SWP 1913 04.
C. Remove and install the variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) per WP 2110 00.
Title Number
Engine Assembly External Tubing, Harnesses, and Clamping WP 1913 04
Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Assembly Replacement WP 2110 00

Dolly, LPC Rotor and Stator - Vertical 1C9052G01
Fixture, Lift and Turn - LPC Rotor and Stator 1C9053G01
Fixture, Lift - LPC Rotor and Stator, Horiz 1C9054G02
Fixture, Lift - LPC Rotor and Stator, Fwd 1C9116G01
Adapter, Support/Lift - LPC 1C9317G01
Fixture, LPC Rotor and Stator Support 1C9385G02
Guide Pin - Fan Rotor Installation 2C6348P02
(Black or Blue)

2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2210 00
6. Low Pressure Compressor Module Removal.
A. Remove forward manifold as follows figure 1:
(1) Using marking pen, matchmark forward manifold and forward drive adapter.
(2) Remove bolts that secure forward manifold onto forward drive adapter.
(3) Using four jackscrews from jackscrew tool set, 1C9150, remove forward manifold.
1
B. Install LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, and LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, as follows:
(1) Install LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116, onto LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, at
position marked 1C9054. Secure with quick-release pin. See figure 2.
2
WARNING
(2) Connect 4-ton (3,629 kg) capacity hoist onto LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116. Lift hor-
izontal lift fixture into position on LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317. Secure with two
quick-release pins.
(3) Reposition hoist onto LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054.
(4) Position LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, so that inner ring boltholes align with for-
ward drive adapter boltholes.
(5) Using 16 bolts and nuts, secure LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, inner ring onto for-
ward drive adapter. Tighten nuts to 160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
(6) Using 56 equally spaced screws and nuts, secure outer ring of LPC support/lift adapter,
1C9317 onto stator case forward flange. Tighten nuts to 160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m)
of torque.
C. Separate LPC module from fan shaft assembly as follows:
(1) If necessary to gain access, move actuation ring to aftmost position by actuating variable
bypass valve (VBV) doors to fully closed. Refer to WP 1312 00.
(2) Remove bolts that secure LPC aft fan case aft flange onto front frame forward face.
(3) Remove bolts, washers, and nuts that secure rotor shaft onto fan shaft assembly.
Change 2 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2210 00
Figure 1. Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Module
4 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2210 00
Figure 2. LPC Support/Lift Adapter, 1C9317, and LPC Horizontal Lift Fixture, 1C9054
Change 2 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2210 00
NOTE
Perform step (4) only if same LPC module will be reinstalled.
(4) Using marking pen, matchmark rotor shaft to forward fan shaft assembly.
WARNING
CAUTION
Use care to keep LPC rotor horizontal during disengagement from

fan shaft assembly to prevent rotor damage.
(5) Pull rotor forward from fan shaft. Simultaneously support LPC rotor using overhead
hoist. Closely monitor disengagement to prevent damage.
(6) Move LPC module forward, beyond No. 1 bearing seal.
(7) Remove and discard preformed packing from rotor shaft. See figure 3.
3
Figure 3. Packing Installation
6 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2210 00
NOTE
If LPC module is to be placed forward end down for stage 3 stator

vane or stage 4 rotor blade replacement, proceed to step E.
D. Install LPC module onto LPC support fixture, 1C9385, as follows (figure 4):
(1) Move LPC module clear of gas turbine.
location marked 1C9050, LPCR. Secure with quick-release pin.
(3) Connect second 4-ton (3,629 kg) capacity hoist onto LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116.
4
WARNING
(4) Rotate LPC module so that forward end is up.
(5) Remove hoist from LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054.
(6) Position LPC support fixture, 1C9385, beneath suspended LPC module.
(7) Lower LPC module onto LPC support fixture, 1C9385, and secure with washers and
nuts.
(8) Remove nuts and bolts that secure LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, onto LPC module.
location marked 1C9054. Secure with quick-release pin.
(10) Connect hoist onto LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116. Lift assembled LPC horizontal lift
fixture, 1C9054, and LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, from LPC assembly.
NOTE
If LPC module has been installed in LPC support fixture, 1C9385, per
step D., disregard step E.
E. Install LPC module into LPC vertical dolly, 1C9052, as follows:
(1) Move LPC module clear of gas turbine.
(2) Install LPC lift and turn fixture, 1C9053, into bore of LPC rotor shaft. See figure 5.
Change 2 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2210 00
Figure 4. LPC Rotor and Stator Support Fixture, 1C9385
8 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2210 00
(3) Attach forward end of LPC lift and turn fixture, 1C9053, onto LPC horizontal lift fixture,
1C9054. Secure with quick-release pin.
5
(4) Attach second 4-ton (3,629 kg) capacity hoist onto eye of LPC lift and turn fixture,
1C9053.
WARNING
(5) Rotate LPC module so that forward end is down.
(6) Remove hoist from LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054.
(7) Position LPC vertical dolly, 1C9052, beneath suspended LPC module.
(8) Lower LPC module onto LPC vertical dolly, 1C9052, so that LPC horizontal lift fixture,
1C9054, is between dolly supports. Remove quick-release pin and remove LPC lift and
turn fixture, 1C9053. See figure 6.
(9) Install forward lift fixture, 1C9116, onto horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, at location
marked 1C9054, 1C9050. Secure using quick-release pin.
(10) Connect hoist to forward lift fixture, then lift assembled horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054,
and adapter, 1C9317, from LPC assembly.
7. Low Pressure Compressor Module Installation.
NOTE
If LPC module is in a forward end down position, proceed to step B.
A. Install LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, and LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, as follows:
(1) Install LPC forward lift adapter, 1C9116, onto LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, at
position marked 1C9054. Secure with quick-release pin. See figure 2.
(2) Connect 4-ton (3,269 kg) capacity hoist onto LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116. Lift LPC
horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, into position on LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317. Secure
with two quick-release pins.
(3) Move LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116, into position marked 1C9054, 1C9050. Secure
with quick-release pin.
Change 2 9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2210 00
Figure 5. LPC Lift and Turn Fixture, 1C9053
10 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2210 00
(4) Position LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, so that inner ring boltholes align with for-
ward drive adapter boltholes.
(5) Using 16 bolts and nuts, secure LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, inner ring onto for-
ward drive adapter outer flange. Tighten nuts to 160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of
torque.
(6) Using 56 equally spaced screws and nuts, secure outer ring of LPC support/lift adapter,
1C9317, onto LPC stages 0-3 stator case forward flange. Tighten nuts to 160-210 lb in.
(18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
(7) Move LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116, to position marked 1C9054, 1C9050, LPCR.
Secure with quick-release pin.
(8) Connect second 4-ton (3,269 kg) capacity hoist onto LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054.
WARNING
(9) Lift and rotate LPC module into horizontal position. Remove LPC forward lift fixture,
1C9116.
6
NOTE
If LPC module has been rotated to the horizontal position per step A.,
proceed to step C.
B. Install LPC lift and turn fixture, 1C9053, as follows:
(1) Connect 4-ton (3,269 kg) capacity hoist onto LPC lift and turn fixture, 1C9053.
(2) Install LPC lift and turn fixture, 1C9053, into bore of LPC rotor shaft. See figure 5.
(3) Attach forward end of LPC lift and turn fixture, 1C9053, onto LPC horizontal lift fixture,
1C9054. Secure with quick-release pin (part of 1C9054).
(4) Attach second 4-ton (3,629 kg) capacity hoist onto LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054.
WARNING
(5) Lift and rotate LPC module into horizontal position.
Change 2 11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2210 00
Figure 6. LPC Vertical Dolly, 1C9052
12 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2210 00
(6) Remove hoist from LPC lift and turn fixture, 1C9053.
(7) Remove LPC lift and turn fixture, 1C9053.
(8) Adjust center of gravity of LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, until LPC module is
horizontal.
C. Lubricate new preformed packing, PN 9607M05P21, with petrolatum, and install into rotor
shaft preformed packing groove. See figure 3.
D. Install guide pins, 2C6348P02, at three equally spaced locations on fan shaft flange.
CAUTION
If same LPC rotor is being installed, ensure that alignment marks
are aligned properly. Failure to comply will require that LP section
be balanced.
E. If same LPC module is being installed, align matchmark on rotor shaft with that on fan shaft
assembly.
F. Position LPC module so that offset boltholes at top vertical centerline align.
G. Push LPC module aft so that aft fan case aft flange mates with forward face of front frame
and aft rabbet of rotor shaft mates with fan shaft assembly. Ensure flanges and shafts are fully
seated.
H. Remove three guide pins, 2C6348P02.
I. Apply thread lubricant onto threads of bolts and onto threads and washer faces of nuts which
secure rotor shaft onto fan shaft assembly.
J. Using bolts, washers, and nuts, secure rotor shaft onto fan shaft assembly. Boltheads face aft,
washers under nuts.
K. Tighten nuts to 275-285 lb ft (372.9-386.4 N·m) of torque. Bolts shall not rotate during torqu-
ing. Loosen nuts one half turn, then retighten to 275-285 lb ft (372.9-386.4 N·m) of torque.
Wipe excess lubricant from nut.
L. Loosen bolts that secure LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, onto LPC stages 0-3 stator case.
See figure 4.
M. Apply thread lubricant to threads of bolts which secure aft fan case aft flange onto front
frame forward face.
N. Using bolts, secure aft fan case aft flange onto front frame forward face.
Change 2 13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2210 00
O. Tighten bolts to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
P. Remove LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, and LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317. See
figure 2.
Q. Install forward manifold as follows:
(1) Apply thread lubricant to threads of bolts that secure forward manifold to forward drive
adapter. See figure 1.
(2) Install forward manifold onto forward drive adapter, aligning matchmarks. Secure with
bolts.
(3) Tighten bolts to 100-120 lb in. (11.3-13.5 N·m) of torque.
14 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2211 00
5WP 2211 00
WORK PACKAGE
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (LPC) STAGE 0
ROTOR BLADES REPLACEMENT


1-9 ...... 5
10 Blank . . . . . . 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
LPC Stage 0 Rotor Blades Installation ....................................................................................... 5

LPC Stage 0 Rotor Blades Removal ........................................................................................... 3
Part Rework - Tip Grinding to Obtain Blade Tip to Stator Case Clearance ............................... 8
Replacement Blades Selection .................................................................................................... 5
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2211 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing low pressure compressor
(LPC) stage 0 rotor blades.
B. Remove variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) assembly per WP 2110 00 to gain access.
Title Number

Program, Balance - Blade Replacement 9470M55G01
(Black or Blue)
Sharpening Stone Fed Spec SS-S-736
None required.
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2211 00
6. LPC Stage 0 Rotor Blades Removal.
See figure 1.
A. Remove blade retainer as follows:
CAUTION
Ensure matchmarks are not erased during maintenance. Improper

installation of components will cause rotor imbalance.
NOTE
The following procedure is for replacement of any number of LPC

stage 0 rotor blades. Instructions for grinding blade tips to meet clear-
ance requirements are included. If an entire stage of blades requires
replacement, contact General Electric Customer Service Representa-
tive to obtain a set of preground blades.
(1) Using marking pen, matchmark blade retainer to stage 0 disk.
(2) Using marking pen, mark location of balance bolts.

1
Figure 1. LPC Stage 0 Rotor Blade Replacement
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2211 00
(3) Remove balance bolts, washers, and nuts. Maintain each balance bolt and related washer
and nut together as a set.
(4) Weigh each balance bolt set and record on position map (figure 2).
(5) Remove bolts, washers, and nuts that secure blade retainer. Maintain each bolt and
related washer and nut together as a set. Remove blade retainer.
B. Using marking pen, position mark stage 0 blades to be removed and corresponding dovetail
slot on stage 0 disk. If all stage 0 rotor blades are being replaced, position mark No. 1 and
No. 5 dovetail slots on stage 0 disk.
C. Measure blade tip to stator case clearance of blades being replaced as follows:
(1) Pull blade radially outward. Shake blade to ensure it is at its most outward position.
(2) Measure clearance between blade tip and edge of stator case. Measurement may be taken
from any area on blade tip, provided each blade is measured from the same area. Record
clearance.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for each blade requiring replacement.
D. Slide stage 0 blade forward to remove.
2
Figure 2. LPC Stage 0 Blade/Balance Bolt Position Map
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2211 00
7. Replacement Blades Selection.
A. Weigh removed blades and record on position map (figure 2).

NOTE
Replacement blades shall be weighed after tip grinding to meet clear-

ance requirement.
B. Weigh replacement blades. Mark weight on blade using marking pen.
NOTE
If individual stage 0 rotor blades are being replaced, select blades per
step C. If all stage 0 rotor blades are being replaced, calculate blade
position per step D.
C. Select replacement blade within 0.5 gram of original blade. Blades replacing those with por-
tions missing shall weigh within 0.5 gram of the average of eight serviceable blades. If
replacement blade within 0.5 gram of original blade is not available, use blade replacement
guide (figure 3).
NOTE
For a copy of GE computerized balance program and instructions for

use, contact GE customer service.
3
D. Calculate blade position using GE computerized balance program, 9470M55. Mark position
on replacement blade using marking pen.
8. LPC Stage 0 Rotor Blades Installation.

A. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant to pressure surfaces of stage 0 blade dovetails. See
figure 4.
4
B. Slide stage 0 blade into corresponding dovetail slot in stage 0 disk. See figure 1.
NOTE
If preground blades are installed, proceed to step D.
C. Measure blade tip to stator case clearance as follows:

(2) Measure clearance between blade tip and edge of stator case. Take measurement from
same area on replacement blade tip as that used to measure replaced blade clearance.
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2211 00
Figure 3. Blade Replacement Guide
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2211 00
Figure 4. Blade Dovetail Pressure Surface
D. Apply thread lubricant to threads of all nuts and bolts.
CAUTION
Ensure run-on torque for all nuts is a minimum of 5 lb in. (0.6 N·m)
to ensure integrity of locking feature.
E. Align matchmark on blade retainer with matchmark on stage 0 disk and install blade retainer.
Secure blade retainer with 12 equally spaced nuts, washers, and bolts, boltheads aft, washer
under nut.
F. Tighten nuts to 190-220 lb in. (21.5-24.8 N·m) of torque. Back off nuts one-half turn, then
tighten to 190-220 lb in. (21.5-24.8 N·m) of torque.
G. Install remaining bolts, washers, and nuts that secure blade retainer, boltheads aft, washer
under nut.
H. Tighten nuts to 190-220 lb in. (21.5-24.8 N·m) of torque. Back off nuts one-half turn, then
tighten to 190-220 lb in. (21.5-24.8 N·m) of torque.
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2211 00
I. Install balance bolts, washers, and nuts into previously marked positions, boltheads aft,
washer under nut. Tighten nuts to 70-90 lb in. (8.0-10.1 N·m) of torque. A minimum of
0.060 inch (1.52 mm) of threads shall protrude beyond nut after torquing.
9. Part Rework - Tip Grinding to Obtain Blade Tip to Stator Case Clearance.
CAUTION
• Do not use hard abrasive grinding wheels to tip grind blades.

Damage to blades may occur.
• To avoid contamination of titanium blades, do not use sharpen-

ing stones that have been used on other metals.
A. Hand-blend replacement blade tip using sharpening stone and observe the following:
(1) Minimum and maximum blade clearance for stage 0 is shown on figure 5. Replacement
blade shall not exceed length of longest blade in stage 0, or be shorter than shortest blade
in stage 0.
(2) Do not remove more than 0.007 inch (0.178 mm) of material from blade tip.
(3) Maintain original contour of blade.
B. Break all edges 0.005-0.015 inch (0.127-0.381 mm).

5
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2211 00
Figure 5. LPC Stage 0 Rotor Blade to Stator Case Clearance

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2212 00
0WP 2212 00
WORK PACKAGE
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (LPC) STAGES 0-3
UPPER AND LOWER STATOR CASE REPLACEMENT


1 - 11 ...... 0
12 Blank . . . . . . 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
LPC Stages 0-3 Lower Stator Case Installation.......................................................................... 6

LPC Stages 0-3 Lower Stator Case Removal.............................................................................. 6
LPC Stages 0-3 Upper and Lower Stator Cases Removal .......................................................... 3
LPC Stages 0-3 Upper Stator Case Removal .............................................................................. 5
LPC Stages 0-3 Upper Stator Case Installation .......................................................................... 8
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2212 00
1. Introduction.
pressor (LPC) stages 0-3 upper and lower stator cases, with engine installed in maintenance
dolly.
B. If upper and lower LPC stator cases are being removed, remove the VIGV assembly per
WP 2110 00.
Title Number

Fixture, Lift - LPC Case, Stages 0-3 1C9602G01
(Black or Blue)
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2212 00
6. LPC Stages 0-3 Upper and Lower Stator Cases Removal.
NOTE
If only the upper stator case requires removal, proceed to

paragraph 7.
A. Remove variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) assembly per WP 2110 00.
WARNING

CAUTION
Failure to comply can result in part damage.
NOTE
If VIGV kit is installed, perform steps B, and C.
B. Position waste fluid container beneath hydraulic control unit (HCU). Disconnect variable
inlet guide vane (VIGV) tubing coupling nuts from HCU fittings. Install protective
caps/plugs. See figure 1.
1
C. Disconnect VIGV actuator drain line flexible hose from drain line manifold.
WARNING
CAUTION
lation. Failure to comply can cause unpredictable engine operation.
D. Tag and disconnect electrical connectors at No. 1 electrical interface panel.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2212 00
Figure 1. No. 1 Electrical Interface Panel, VIGV Tubing, Channel Bracket, and Electrical Cables
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2212 00
E. Remove nuts and bolts that secure No. 1 electrical interface panel aft support bracket onto air
collector.
F. Remove nuts and bolts that secure channel bracket tray onto rear electrical panel support
bracket.
G. Using marking pen, mark location of brackets.
H. Remove No. 1 electrical interface panel, VIGV tubing and brackets (if installed), channel
bracket, and electrical cables and brackets as a unit.
I. Remove LPC stages 0-3 upper stator case per paragraph 7.
J. Remove LPC stages 0-3 lower stator case per paragraph 8.
7. LPC Stages 0-3 Upper Stator Case Removal.
NOTE
If both upper and lower stator cases require removal, proceed to

step B.
A. If only upper stator case requires removal, remove and disconnect the following:
(1) Disconnect T2 electrical lead from bracket clips on upper case forward flange.
NOTE
If VIGV kit is installed, perform steps (2) and (3).
(2) Disconnect left VIGV hydraulic actuator from upper (stationary) bracket.
(3) Disconnect right VIGV hydraulic actuator from actuation ring bracket.
B. Remove bolts, nuts, and washers from forward and aft flanges of stages 0-3 upper case.
Remove and retain doublers.
C. Remove bolts, nuts, and washers that secure horizontal flanges of stages 0-3 case. If neces-
sary, gently tap five body-bound bolts on each horizontal flange using hammer and nylon
drift to release bolts.
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2212 00
D. Attach lift fixture, 1C9602, onto forward and aft flanges of stages 0-3 upper case. See
figure 2.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from
under suspended loads to rpevent injury.
E. Attach 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist to lift fixture. Lift stages 0-3 upper case free of
gas turbine and place on suitable pallet using care not to damage horizontal flange surfaces or
internal hardware. If new case will be installed, transcribe bracket matchmarks to new case
using marking pen.
8. LPC Stages 0-3 Lower Stator Case Removal.
A. Remove bolts, nuts, and washers that secure aft flange of stages 0-3 lower case to aft fan case.
Remove and retain doublers.
NOTE
Nylon straps may be used to lower or elevate the lower stator case.
Attach hoist to nylon straps.
B. Place nylon straps under stages 0-3 lower case. Raise straps to support stages 0-3 lower case.
See figure 3.
3
2
C. Remove bolts, nuts, and washers that secure horizontal flanges of stages 0-3 case. If neces-
sary, gently tap five body-bound bolts on either horizontal flange using hammer and nylon
drift to release bolts.
D. Slowly lower stages 0-3 lower case. If new case is to be installed, transcribe bracket match-
marks to new case using marking pen.
9. LPC Stages 0-3 Lower Stator Case Installation.
A. Position stages 0-3 lower case under LPC rotor using nylon straps and hoist. See figure 3.
B. Slowly raise stages 0-3 lower case until LPC stator case aft flange and aft fan case forward
flange boltholes align.
WARNING
and respiratory tract. Skin and eye protection, and vapor control
are required. Avoid all contact.
C. Apply zinc chromate primer onto shank and bearing surface of bolts which secure aft circum-
ferential flange of stages 0-3 case onto aft fan case. Allow primer to air dry.
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2212 00
Figure 2. LPC Stages 0-3 Case Lift Fixture, 1C9602
Figure 3. LPC Stator Lower Case Support
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2212 00
D. Apply thread lubricant onto threads and bearing surface of aft circumferential flange bolts.
E. Install bolts and nuts into aft circumferential flange, boltheads aft, doublers on forward side
of aft circumferential flange. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
10. LPC Stages 0-3 Upper Stator Case Installation.
WARNING

under suspended loads to rpevent injury.
A. Position stages 0-3 upper case over LPC rotor using lift fixture, 1C9602, and a 1-ton (907 kg)
capacity overhead hoist. Inspect flanges for cleanliness.
B. Install washers on five body-bound bolts.
C. Install body-bound bolts, boltheads down, through lower stator case. Install bolts into hori-
zontal flange bolthole numbers 1, 4, 9, 13, and 17 (boltholes are counted from forward
flange) on both sides of stator case. See figure 4.
CAUTION
Be careful when mating upper and lower stages 0-3 case halves. The
inner shrouds have interlocking features at the horizontal split-lines.
The upper and lower stator shrouds shall be properly engaged as the
case halves are mated. Do not force case halves together. Failure to
comply will result in LPC stator damage.
D. Slowly lower stages 0-3 upper case until horizontal flanges are mated. Use flashlight to
ensure that shrouds interlock properly.
E. Remove lift fixture, 1C9602.
F. Install washers and nuts onto body-bound bolts. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
WARNING
G. Apply zinc chromate primer onto shanks and bearing surfaces of remaining bolts and washers
which secure horizontal flanges together. Also apply zinc chromate primer onto inside diam-
eter of boltholes these bolts go through.
4
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2212 00
Figure 4. LPC Stages 0-3 Stator Case Horizontal Flanges
9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2212 00
NOTE
Casing assembly procedure: L refers to 9:00 o'clock position flange

and R refers to 3:00 o'clock position flange. See figure 4.
H. Install remaining horizontal flange bolts, washers, and nuts, boltheads up, with washer under
each nut and each bolthead. Tighten nuts on nonbody-bound bolts, left to right, in ascending
order 2L, 2R, 3L, 3R, 5L, 5R, etc., to 200-220 lb in. (22.6-24.9 N·m) of torque.
I. Tighten horizontal flange nuts on body-bound bolts in ascending order 1L, 1R, 4L, 4R, 9L,
9R, etc., to 200-220 lb in. (22.6-24.8 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
J. Apply zinc chromate primer onto shank and bearing surface of bolts which secure aft circum-
ferential flange. Allow primer to dry.
K. Apply thread lubricant onto threads and bearing surfaces of aft circumferential flange bolts.
L. Install bolts, doublers, and nuts in aft circumferential flange, boltheads aft, doublers on for-
ward side of aft circumferential flange.
M. Tighten all aft circumferential flange nuts to 135-145 lb in. (15.3-16.3 N·m) of torque.
N. Remove nylon straps.
NOTE
If the VIGV assembly is not installed, proceed to step P.
O. If VIGV assembly or inlet frame assembly is installed, complete the following steps.
(1) Install brackets, bolts, washers, and nuts into forward circumferential flange per
WP 2110 00.
(2) Connect VIGV hydraulic actuators per WP 2110 00.
(3) Install T2 electrical lead into bracket clips on upper case forward flange.
10
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2212 00
NOTE
If the VIGV assembly is installed, disregard the remaining steps.
P. Install assembled No. 1 electrical interface panel, VIGV tubing and brackets, channel
bracket, and electrical cables and brackets as a unit. Align brackets at locations marked at
removal. See figure 1.
Q. Using bolts and nuts, secure No. 1 electrical interface panel aft mount brackets onto air col-
lector flange. Tighten nuts to 480-570 lb in. (54.3-64.4 N·m) of torque.
R. Using bolts and nuts, secure channel bracket to rear electrical panel support bracket. Tighten
S. Connect electrical connectors at No. 1 electrical interface panel locations tagged at removal
as follows. Remove tags.
CAUTION

T. Connect VIGV actuator drain line flexible hose onto drain line manifold. Tighten coupling
U. Connect tubes to HCU. Tighten head tube coupling nut to 360-400 lb in. (40.6-45.2 N·m) of
torque. Tighten rod tube coupling nut to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque.
V. Install VIGV assembly WP 2110 00.
11/(12 Blank)
12 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2213 00
1WP 2213 00
WORK PACKAGE
STATOR VANES REPLACEMENT


1-8 ...... 1
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
LPC Stages 0-3 Stator Vanes Installation ................................................................................... 3

LPC Stages 0-3 Stator Vanes Removal ....................................................................................... 3
Change 1 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2213 00
1. Introduction.
pressor (LPC) stages 0-3 stator vanes.
B. To gain access, remove stages 0-3 LPC upper and lower stator cases per WP 2212 00.
Title Number
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Stages 0-3 Upper and Lower WP 2212 00
Stator Case Replacement
None required.
(RTV 106)
None required.
2 Change 1
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2213 00
6. LPC Stages 0-3 Stator Vanes Removal.
A. Place upper and lower stator cases on a skid or table, aft end up.
B. Remove nuts, bolts, and washers from stage 3 inner shrouds. See figure 1.
1
CAUTION
Use care when separating forward and aft shroud sections to prevent
damage from prying tool.
C. Separate forward shroud section from aft shroud section. If necessary, pry between forward
and aft shroud sections to separate them. Remove shroud.
D. Remove vane bushings from vane inner diameter.
E. Remove two screws and locking strip from each stator case half horizontal flange.
F. Slide vanes circumferentially until they can be removed from slot in stator case.
G. Remove dovetail liners. See figure 2.

2
H. Repeat steps B. through G. for stages 2, 1, and 0.
7. LPC Stages 0-3 Stator Vanes Installation.
A. Install dovetail liners in vane slots. See figure 2. If necessary, grind ends to allow assembly.
The gap between any two adjacent liner segments shall not exceed 0.030 inch (0.76 mm).
B. Slide stage 3 vanes circumferentially into lined slots. See figure 3. Adjust quantity of A and
D vanes to obtain required clearance (Dimension K) on each half of case. Dimension K shall
be met prior to installing shrouds. During stage 1, 2, and 3 vane installation, install borescope
vane so that a 0.405 inch (10.287 mm) diameter rod will pass freely through case and plat-
form of vane.
3
C. Install vane bushings at vane inner diameter. See figure 1.
CAUTION
Fumes from adhesive may damage natural gas sensors. Ensure nat-
ural gas sensors are protected from fumes.
D. If natural gas sensors are installed in area, encase sensor heads in plastic bags and seal with
tie wraps to protect sensors.
Change 1 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2213 00
Figure 1. LPC Stator Assembly
4 Change 1
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2213 00
Figure 2. LPC Dovetail Liners Installation
WARNING

E. Clean outer surfaces of bushings and shroud bushing bores with isopropyl alcohol.
WARNING
F. Apply silicone rubber adhesive to threads of shroud nuts.
NOTE
Section of shroud with seal is aft on stages 0, 1, and 3. Section of

shroud with seal is forward on stage 2.
G. Install aft section of shroud so that vane bushings fit into each semicircle cup.
Change 1 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2213 00
Figure 3. LPC Stator Vane Location
6 Change 1
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2213 00
H. Install forward section of shroud so bushings fit in semicircular cups. Hold both shroud sec-
tions together and install bolts, washers, and nuts in each end and center of shroud. Install one
washer under bolthead (boltheads aft), and one washer under nut. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
I. Install remaining bolts, washers, and nuts in same orientation as step H.
CAUTION
Ensure run-on torque for all nuts is a minimum of 5 lb in. (0.6 N·m)
to ensure integrity of locking feature.
J. Tighten nuts to appropriate torque values as follows:
(1) Tighten six 0.250–29 stage 0 nuts to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.6 N·m) of torque. Tighten forty-
four 0.312-24 nuts to 109-121 lb in. (12.4-13.6 N·m) of torque.
(2) Tighten six 0.190-32 stage 1 nuts to 35-39 lb in. (4.0-4.4 N·m) of torque. Tighten twenty-
eight 0.250-28 nuts to 35-39 lb in. (4.0-4.4 N·m) of torque.
(3) Tighten six 0.190-32 stage 2 nuts to 35-39 lb in. (4.0-4.4 N·m) of torque. Tighten fifty
0.250-28 nuts to 35-39 lb in. (4.0-4.4 N·m) of torque.
(4) Tighten six 0.190-32 stage 3 nuts to 35-39 lb in. (4.0-4.4 N·m) of torque. Tighten thirty
0.250-28 nuts to 35-39 lb in. (4.0-4.4 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
K. Apply silicone rubber adhesive over ends of nuts to cover exposed bolt threads.
WARNING

L. Using isopropyl alcohol, remove excess silicone rubber adhesive.
M. Repeat steps A. through L. for stages 1, 2, and 3.
Change 1 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2213 00
WARNING

N. Install locking strip on each stator case half. Secure with screws coated with wet zinc chro-
mate primer. Tighten screws to 24-26 lb in. (2.8-2.9 N·m) of torque.
O. Allow silicone rubber adhesive to cure for minimum of 8 hours before operating engine.
P. If applicable, remove protective plastic bags from natural gas sensors prior to engine opera-
tion.
8 Change 1
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2214 00
5WP 2214 00
WORK PACKAGE


1 - 11 ...... 5
12 Blank . . . . . . 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
LPC Stages 1-3 Rotor Blades Installation................................................................................... 6

LPC Stages 1-3 Rotor Blades Removal ...................................................................................... 3
Part Rework - Tip Grinding to Obtain Blade Tip to Stator Case Clearance ............................... 10
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2214 00
1. Introduction.
(LPC) stages 1-3 rotor blades.
B. Remove LPC stages 0-3 upper stator case to gain access per WP 2212 00.
Title Number
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Stages 0-3 Upper and Lower WP 2212 00
Stator Case Replacement
(Black or Blue)
Penetrating Oil GE Spec A50TF54,
CL-A
None required.
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2214 00
6. LPC Stages 1-3 Rotor Blades Removal.
CAUTION

NOTE
This procedure is for removal of any number of LPC stages 1-3 rotor
blades. Instructions for grinding blade tips to meet clearance require-
ments are included in paragraph 7. If an entire stage of blades
requires replacement, contact General Electric Customer Service Rep-
resentative to obtain a set of preground blades.
A. Position mark blades using marking pen. See figure 1, view B. Blade 1 is first blade to right
of right locking lug (aft looking forward).
1
B. Measure blade tip to lower stator case clearance of blades being replaced as follows:
(2) Measure clearance between blade tip and edge of lower stator case. Measurement may be
taken from any area on blade tip, provided each blade is measured from the same area.
Record clearance.
C. Mark centerline of locking lugs on outside diameter of disk or spool using marking pen.
D. Apply penetrating oil to setscrews and allow to soak for 15 minutes.
E. Loosen setscrews of two locking lugs until lugs will slip below surface of retaining slot suffi-
ciently to permit circumferential movement of blades.
F. Rotate entire stage of blades circumferentially (in either direction) approximately one-half
the width of blade platform, until one blade can be removed from loading slot. If necessary,
tap blades as close to platform as possible using hammer and nylon drift.
G. Slide locking lug to loading slot and remove. Record on position map. See figure 2.
2
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2214 00
Figure 1. Typical LPC Stages 1-3 Rotor Blade Replacement
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2214 00
Figure 2. Stages 1-3 Blade/Balance Weight Position Map
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2214 00
H. Remove remaining blades, other locking lug, and all balance weights from stage being
removed. Mark and record position of balance weights on position map as removed. Weigh
each balance weight and record on position map.
A. Weigh removed blades and record on position map. See figure 2.
NOTE
Replacement blades shall be weighed after tip grinding to meet clear-

ance requirement.
B. Weigh replacement blades. Mark weight on blade using marking pen.
NOTE
If individual rotor blades are being replaced, select blades per step C.
If all rotor blades in a stage are being replaced, calculate blade posi-
tion per step D.
replacement blade within 0.5 gram is not available, use blade replacement guide. See
figure 3.
NOTE

3
D. Calculate blade position using GE computerized balance program, 9470M55. Mark position
8. LPC Stages 1-3 Rotor Blades Installation.
A. Ensure locking lug centerline locating marks are still visible. Mark again, if necessary.
B. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant to pressure surfaces of blade dovetails. See figure 4.
4
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2214 00
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2214 00
CAUTION
• Ensure balance weights, locking lugs, and reinstalled blades are

replaced in exact positions from which they were removed.
• Ensure replacement blades are installed in positions calculated

in paragraph 7. Failure to comply can result in engine damage.
C. Install blades and balance weights. See figure 1.
D. Install two locking blades, one on each side of loading slot, so cutout on blade platform faces
loading slot.
E. Install locking lugs as follows:
(1) Install setscrews in each of two locking lugs. Run setscrews in and out twice, full length
of threads.
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2214 00
NOTE
Run-on torque is the torque value observed while the setscrew is in

motion during one full revolution in the lug. Breakaway torque is the
torque required to start an installed screw rotating in the lug, with no
axial load on the lug (screw is not seated and is stationary at initiation
of torque). Threads of setscrew and lug must be clean and free of
lubricant.
(2) After completion of second cycle, record run-on torque of each screw. Also, check
breakaway torque of each screw. Replace setscrew or locking lug if breakaway torque is
less than 8 lb in. (0.9 N·m).
(3) Install two locking lugs, one on each side of loading slot. Ensure slope of locking lug fol-
lows slope of blade platform.
F. Install one locking blade so cutout on blade platform faces locking lug.
G. Rotate entire stage of blades approximately one-half the width of blade platform, or until last
blade can be installed. Install last locking blade so cutout on blade platform faces locking lug.
H. Rotate entire stage of blades in the opposite direction until locking lugs align with position
marks on disk or spool.
I. Slide blades circumferentially away from an outside locking blade. Measure clearance
between blade platforms. Total accumulated clearance shall be within 0.010-0.020 inch
(0.25-0.51 mm). If this requirement is not met, replace blade or blades adjacent to locking
blades with narrow or wide platform blades of equal weight.
J. Check each blade for shingling of platforms. If blade tends to shingle, replace with blade of
equal weight.
NOTE
If preground blades are installed, proceed to step L.

K. Measure blade tip to lower stator case clearance as follows:
(2) Measure clearance between blade tip and edge of lower stator case. Take measurement
from same area on replacement blade tip as that used to measure replaced blade clear-
ance.
(3) Repeat substeps (1) and (2) for each blade requiring replacement.
L. Tighten setscrews in locking lugs to 19-21 lb in. (2.2-2.3 N·m) of torque above the run-on
torque recorded in step E.(2). Top of the locking lug must be even with, or a maximum of
0.025 inch (0.64 mm) below, top of blade platform when blade is fully extended radially.
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2214 00
9. Part Rework - Tip Grinding to Obtain Blade Tip to Stator Case Clearance.
CAUTION
Do not use hard abrasive grinding wheels to tip grind blades. Dam-
age to blades may occur.
A. Hand-blend replacement blade tip using sharpening stone. Observing the following:
(1) Minimum and maximum blade clearance for each stage is shown in figure 5. Replace-
ment blade shall not exceed length of longest blade in stage, or be shorter than shortest
blade in stage.
5
(2) Do not remove more than 0.007 inch (0.178 mm) of material from blade tip.
(3) Maintain original contour of blade.
B. Break all edges 0.005-0.015 inch (0.127-0.381 mm).
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2214 00
Figure 5. LPC Stages 0-3 Rotor Blade to Stator Case Clearance

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2215 00
0WP 2215 00
WORK PACKAGE
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (LPC) AFT FAN CASE
REPLACEMENT


1-4 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Aft Fan Case Installation............................................................................................................. 3

Aft Fan Case Removal ................................................................................................................ 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2215 00
1. Introduction.
(LPC) aft fan case.
B. Remove LPC module and install in LPC rotor and stator vertical dolly, 1C9052, per
WP 2210 00. See figure 1.
Title Number
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Module Replacement WP 2210 00
None required.
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2215 00
6. Aft Fan Case Removal.
A. Remove nuts, bolts, and doublers that secure forward flange of aft fan case to aft flange of
LPC stages 0-3 stator case (figure 1).
1
B. Tap gently around circumference of aft fan case aft flange using plastic face hammer.
WARNING

under suspended loads to prevent injury.
CAUTION
Use care when removing LPC aft fan case to avoid damaging LPC
stage 4 rotor blades.
C. Lift aft fan case from LPC module.
7. Aft Fan Case Installation.
A. Install aft fan case over LPC stage 4 rotor blades.
B. Ensure aft fan case forward flange is fully seated against LPC stages 0-3 stator case aft
flange.
WARNING

C. Apply zinc chromate primer onto shank and bearing surface of bolts. Allow primer to air dry.
D. Lubricate threads of bolts and threads and bearing surfaces of nuts using thread lubricant.
Install bolts, doublers, and nuts to secure aft fan case forward flange. Doublers are on forward
side of LPC stages 0-3 stator case aft flange. Boltheads face aft.
E. Tighten all nuts at forward flange to 130-150 lb in. (14.7-16.9 N·m) of torque.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2215 00
Figure 1. LPC Module Installed in LPC Rotor and Stator Vertical Dolly, 1C9052
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2216 00
0WP 2216 00
WORK PACKAGE
STATOR VANES REPLACEMENT


1-4 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Stage 4 Stator Vanes Installation................................................................................................. 3

Stage 4 Stator Vanes Removal .................................................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2216 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the stage 4 stator vanes.
B. Remove low pressure compressor (LPC) module to gain access per WP 2210 00.
Title Number
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Module Replacement WP 2210 00
None required.
(RTV 106)
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2216 00
6. Stage 4 Stator Vanes Removal.
A. Remove stage 4 stator vane retaining bolts, as required. See figure 1.

1
CAUTION
Ensure bumpers are removed with vanes, or damage to part may

occur.
B. Remove stage 4 stator vanes and bumpers.
7. Stage 4 Stator Vanes Installation.
WARNING

A. Clean front frame bumper slots and outer surface of bumpers using isopropyl alcohol. See
figure 1.
WARNING
B. Apply a thin layer of silicone rubber adhesive onto bumper slots in front frame.
C. Install stage 4 stator vane bumpers onto stator vane, rounded portion aft.
NOTE
Ensure stator vane bumpers remain in position during stator vane

installation.
D. Install stage 4 stator vanes while silicone rubber adhesive is still wet.
E. Wipe off excess silicone rubber adhesive.
F. Install retaining bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2216 00
Figure 1. Stage 4 Stator Vane
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2217 00
5WP 2217 00
WORK PACKAGE


1-8 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
LPC Stage 4 Rotor Blades Installation ....................................................................................... 7

LPC Stage 4 Rotor Blades Removal ........................................................................................... 3
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2217 00
1. Introduction.
(LPC) stage 4 rotor blades.
B. Remove aft fan case to gain access per WP 2215 00.
Title Number
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Aft Fan Case Replacement WP 2215 00

(Black or Blue)
CL-A
None required.
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2217 00
6. LPC Stage 4 Rotor Blades Removal.
CAUTION

A. Using marking pen, position mark blades per 1 and 2, figure 1, view B. Blade 1 is first blade
to right of right locking lug (3) (aft looking forward).
1
B. Using marking pen, mark centerline of locking lugs (3) on outside diameter of spool.
C. Apply penetrating oil onto setscrews (4) and allow to soak for 15 minutes.
D. Loosen setscrews (4) of two locking lugs (3) until lugs slip below surface of retaining slot
sufficiently to permit circumferential movement of blades (1 and 2).
E. Rotate entire stage of blades circumferentially (in either direction) approximately one-half
the width of blade base, until one blade can be removed from loading slot. If necessary, tap
blades as close to platform as possible, using hammer and nylon drift.
F. Slide locking lug to loading slot and remove. Record on position map. See figure 2.
3
2
G. Remove remaining blades (1 and 2, figure 1), other locking lug (3), and all balance weights
(5) from stage being removed. Mark and record position of balance weights on position map
as removed. Weigh each balance weight and record on position map.
A. Weigh removed blades and record on position map. See figure 2.
B. Weigh replacement blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on blade.
NOTE
If individual rotor blades are being replaced, select blades per step C.
If all rotor blades in a stage are being replaced, calculate blade posi-
tion per step D.
replacement blade within 0.5 gram is not available, use blade replacement guide. See
figure 3.
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2217 00
Figure 1. Typical LPC Stage 4 Rotor Blade Replacement
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2217 00
Figure 2. Stage 4 Blade/Balance Weight Position Map
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2217 00
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2217 00
NOTE

D. Calculate blade position using GE computerized balance program, 9470M55. Using marking
pen, mark position on replacement blade.
8. LPC Stage 4 Rotor Blades Installation.

A. Ensure locking lug centerline locating marks are still visible. Mark again, if necessary.
B. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant to pressure surfaces of blade dovetails. See figure 4.
CAUTION
• Ensure balance weights, locking lugs, and reinstalled blades are

replaced in exact positions from which they were removed.
• Ensure replacement blades are installed in positions calculated
in paragraph 7.
C. Install blades and balance weights. See figure 1.
D. Install two locking blades (2), one on each side of loading slot, so cutout on blade platform
faces loading slot.
4
E. Install locking lugs as follows:
(1) Install setscrews (4) into each of two locking lugs (3). Run setscrews in and out twice,
full length of threads.
NOTE
Run-on torque is the torque value observed while the setscrew is in

motion during one full revolution in the lug. Breakaway torque is the
torque required to just start an installed setscrew rotating in the lug,
with no axial load on the lug (setscrew is not seated and is stationary
at initiation of torque). Threads of setscrew and lug must be clean and
free of lubricant.
(2) After completion of second cycle, record run-on torque of each setscrew. Also, check
breakaway torque of each setscrew. Replace setscrew (4) or locking lug (3) if breakaway
torque is less than 8 lb in. (0.9 N·m).
(3) Install two locking lugs (3), one on each side of loading slot. Ensure slope of locking lug
follows slope of blade platform.
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2217 00
F. Install one locking blade (2) so cutout on blade platform faces locking lug.
G. Rotate entire stage of blades approximately half the width of a blade platform, or until last
blade can be installed. Install last locking blade so cutout on blade platform faces locking lug.
H. Rotate entire stage of blades in the opposite direction until locking lugs align with position
marks on disk or spool.
I. Move all blades in a fan out direction, away from an outside locking blade (2). Measure clear-
ance between blade platforms. Total accumulated clearance shall be within 0.001-0.010 inch
(0.025-0.254 mm) at narrowest point along axial length of platform. Clearance at other axial
positions shall not exceed 0.030 inch (0.762 mm). If this requirement is not met, replace
blade or blades adjacent to locking blades with narrow or wide platform blades of equal
weight.
J. Check each blade (1 and 2) for shingling of platforms. Replace any blade that tends to shingle
with a blade of equal weight.
K. Tighten setscrews (4) into locking lugs (3) to 19-21 lb in. (2.2-2.3 N·m) of torque above the
run-on torque recorded in step E.(2). The top of the locking lug must be even with, or a max-
imum of 0.025 inch (0.64 mm) below, the top of the blade platform when blade is fully
extended radially.
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2310 00
0WP 2310 00
WORK PACKAGE
FRONT FRAME AIR COLLECTOR REPLACEMENT


1 - 17 ...... 0
18 Blank . . . . . . 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Lower Left Air Collector Section Installation ............................................................................ 13

Lower Left Air Collector Section Removal ................................................................................ 11
Lower Right Air Collector Section Installation .......................................................................... 9
Lower Right Air Collector Section Removal .............................................................................. 7
Transfer Gearbox Mount Plate Installation................................................................................. 16
Transfer Gearbox Mount Plate Removal..................................................................................... 16
Upper Air Collector Section Installation .................................................................................... 6
Upper Air Collector Section Removal ........................................................................................ 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2310 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the front frame air collector.
Title Number

Jack, Lowering - Engine Components 1C5654G03
Fixture, Lift - Air Collector 1C9300G01
Bottle Jack Local Purchase
(Black or Blue)
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2310 00
6. Upper Air Collector Section Removal.
NOTE
• Engine must be removed from the enclosure prior to removal of the

upper air collector section. Do not support the gas turbine by the
air collector in the maintenance stand or support pedestals.
• The upper air collector section weighs 375 lb (170 kg).
A. Ensure variable bypass valve (VBV) doors are in closed position so hardware or tools will not
fall into compressor front frame (CFF).
B. Using four bolts, washers, and nuts, install air collector lift fixture, 1C9300, onto upper air
collector section. See figure 1. Boltheads face up, washers under nuts. Tighten nuts to 420-
510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
1
C. Connect 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist to lift fixture.
D. Remove bolts that secure actuator seal to upper air collector section. See figure 2. Remove
actuator seal.
2
E. Remove bolts, washers, and four access panels from upper air collector section.
F. Remove screws that secure frame seals to upper air collector section at 3:00 and 9:00 o'clock
positions.
G. Remove nuts and bolts that secure upper air collector section to CFF forward flange.
H. Using marking pen, mark location of CFF aft flange brackets and bolts. Cut safety wire and
remove bolts and brackets from CFF aft flange.
I. Remove nuts and bolts that secure upper air collector section horizontal flanges to lower air
collector sections.
WARNING
J. Lift upper air collector section clear of engine.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2310 00
Figure 1. Air Collector Lift Fixture, 1C9300
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2310 00
Figure 2. Upper Air Collector Section
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2310 00
7. Upper Air Collector Section Installation.
A. Using four bolts, washers, and nuts, install air collector lift fixture, 1C9300, onto upper air
collector section. See figure 1. Boltheads face up, washers under nuts. Tighten nuts to 420-
510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
B. Connect 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist to air collector lift fixture, 1C9300.
WARNING

CAUTION
Use care when installing upper air collector section to avoid damag-
ing frame seals.
C. Lift upper air collector section onto CFF and align boltholes.
D. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant to threads and washer faces of all bolts and nuts.
E. Using bolts and nuts (boltheads face aft), secure upper air collector section onto CFF forward
flange. See figure 2. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
F. Install aft flange brackets at positions marked at disassembly. Using bolts, secure upper air
collector section and brackets onto CFF aft flange. Tighten bolts finger-tight.
G. Using bolts and nuts (boltheads face up), secure air collector horizontal flanges. Tighten nuts
H. Tighten aft flange bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
I. Tighten forward flange nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
J. Using screws, secure frame seals onto upper air collector section at 3:00 and 9:00 o'clock
positions. Tighten screws to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
K. Using bolts, secure actuator seal onto upper air collector section. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2310 00
CAUTION
All tools or maintenance items shall be accounted for upon job com-
pletion, or damage to engine could result.
L. Before installing access panels, perform thorough, final inspection for tools or foreign objects
left in air collector.
M. Using washers and bolts, secure access panels onto upper air collector section. Tighten bolts
N. Remove air collector lift fixture.
8. Lower Right Air Collector Section Removal.
NOTE
The lower right air collector section weighs 170 lb (77 kg).
A. Position bottle jack, with protective block, to support transfer gearbox assembly.
NOTE
If the upper air collector section is installed, proceed to step C.
B. If upper air collector section is removed, install air collector lift fixture, 1C9300, onto lower
right air collector section with two bolts, washers, and nuts. See figure 1. Boltheads face up,
washers are under nuts. Tighten nuts to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
If the upper air collector section is removed, proceed to step D.
C. If upper air collector section is installed, secure lift sling to lower right air collector section.
Use holes in top flange gussets for sling attachment points.
D. Connect 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist to lift fixture or sling. Take up slack on hoist.
E. Remove bolts and washers that secure two access panels from lower right air collector sec-
tion. See figure 3.
3
F. Remove screws that secure frame seal onto lower right air collector section.
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2310 00
Figure 3. Lower Right Air Collector Section
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2310 00
G. Remove nuts and bolts that secure lower right air collector section onto CFF forward flange.
H. Cut safety wire and remove bolts that secure lower right air collector section onto CFF aft
flange.
I. Using marking pen, mark location of lower right air collector flange brackets. Remove nuts
and bolts that secure lower right air collector section onto transfer gearbox mount plate and
onto upper air collector section.
J. Loosen bolts that secure support bracket to No. 1 electrical interface panel. Position support
bracket clear of air collector.
WARNING
K. Slowly lower hoist while pulling lower right air collector section clear of engine.
9. Lower Right Air Collector Section Installation.
NOTE
If the upper air collector section is installed, proceed to step B.
A. If upper air collector section is removed, install air collector lift fixture, 1C9300, onto lower
right air collector section using two bolts, washers, and nuts. See figure 1. Boltheads face up,
washers under nuts. Tighten nuts to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
If the upper air collector section is removed, proceed to step C.
B. If upper air collector section is installed, secure lift sling onto lower right air collector sec-
tion. Use holes in top flange gussets for sling attachment points.
C. Connect 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist to lift fixture or sling.
9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2310 00
WARNING

CAUTION
Use care when installing lower air collector section to avoid damag-
ing frame seals.
D. Carefully position lower right air collector section onto transfer gearbox mount plate flange.
See figure 3.
E. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads and washer faces of all nuts and bolts.
F. If upper air collector section is installed, secure lower right air collector section onto upper
section with bolts and nuts. Boltheads face up. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
G. Install brackets at positions marked at disassembly. Using bolts and nuts, secure lower right
air collector section and brackets onto transfer gearbox mount plate. Boltheads face outboard.
Tighten nuts finger-tight.
H. Using bolts and nuts, secure lower right air collector section onto CFF forward flange. Bolth-
eads face aft. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
I. Using bolts, secure lower right air collector section onto CFF aft flange. Tighten bolts to
J. Tighten air collector section flange nuts to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque. Tighten
bolts securing support bracket to No. 1 electrical interface panel to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m)
of torque.
K. Tighten CFF forward flange nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
L. Using screws, secure frame seal onto lower right air collector. Tighten screws to 55-70 lb in.
CAUTION
M. Before installing access panels, perform thorough, final inspection for tools or foreign objects
10
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2310 00
N. Using washers and bolts, secure access panels onto lower right air collector section. Tighten
O. Remove air collector lift fixture or lift sling.
P. Remove bottle jack from under transfer gearbox assembly.
10. Lower Left Air Collector Section Removal.
NOTE
The lower left air collector section weighs 170 lb (77 kg).
A. Position bottle jack, with protective block, to support transfer gearbox assembly.
NOTE
If the upper air collector section is installed, proceed to step C.
B. If upper air collector section is removed, install air collector lift fixture, 1C9300, onto lower
left air collector section using two bolts, washers, and nuts. See figure 1. Boltheads face up,
NOTE
If the upper air collector section is removed, proceed to step D.
C. If upper air collector section is installed, secure lift sling to lower left air collector section.
D. Connect 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist to lift fixture or sling. Take up slack on hoist.
E. Remove bolts and washers that secure two access panels from lower left air collector section.
See figure 4.
4
F. Remove screws that secure frame seal onto lower left air collector section.
G. Remove nuts and bolts that secure lower left air collector section onto CFF forward flange.
H. Cut safety wire and remove bolts that secure lower left air collector section onto CFF aft
flange.
I. Mark location of lower left air collector flange brackets using marking pen. Remove nuts and
bolts that secure lower left air collector section onto transfer gearbox mount plate and onto
upper air collector section.
11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2310 00
Figure 4. Lower Left Air Collector Section
12
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2310 00
J. Loosen bolts that secure support bracket to No. 1 electrical interface panel. Position support
bracket clear of air collector.
WARNING
K. Slowly lower hoist while pulling lower left air collector section clear of engine.
L. Remove four bolts and air collector baffle from lower left air collector section.
11. Lower Left Air Collector Section Installation.
A. Install air collector baffle onto lower left air collector section and secure with four bolts.
NOTE
If the upper air collector section is installed, proceed to step B.
B. Using two bolts, washers, and nuts, if upper air collector section is removed, install air collec-
tor lift fixture, 1C9300, onto lower left air collector section. See figure 1. Boltheads face up,
NOTE
If the upper air collector section is removed, proceed to step C.
C. If upper air collector section is installed, secure lift sling to lower left air collector section.
D. Connect 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist to lift fixture or sling.
WARNING

CAUTION
Use care when installing lower air collector section to avoid damag-
ing frame seals.
E. Carefully position lower left air collector section onto transfer gearbox mount plate flange.
See figure 4.
F. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads and washer faces of all nuts and bolts.
13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2310 00
G. Using bolts and nuts, if upper air collector section is installed, secure lower left air collector
section to upper section. Boltheads face up. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
H. Install brackets at positions marked at disassembly. Using bolts and nuts, secure lower left air
collector section and brackets onto transfer gearbox mount plate. Boltheads face outboard.
I. Using bolts and nuts, secure lower left air collector section onto CFF forward flange. Bolth-
eads face aft. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
J. Using bolts, secure lower right air collector section onto CFF aft flange. Tighten bolts to
K. Tighten air collector section flange nuts to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque. Tighten
bolts securing support bracket to No. 1 electrical interface panel to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m)
of torque.
L. Tighten CFF forward flange nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
M. Using screws, secure frame seal onto lower left air collector. Tighten screws to 55-70 lb in.
CAUTION
N. Before installing access panels, perform thorough, final inspection for tools or foreign objects
O. Using washers and bolts, secure access panels onto lower left air collector section. Tighten
P. Remove air collector lift fixture or lift sling.
Q. Remove bottle jack from under transfer gearbox assembly.

5
14
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2310 00
Figure 5. Transfer Gearbox Mount Plate
15
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2310 00
12. Transfer Gearbox Mount Plate Removal.
NOTE
• The transfer gearbox mount plate weighs 400 lb (180 kg).
• The transfer gearbox assembly has been removed from the gearbox
mount plate.
A. Remove bolts, washers, and lockwashers that secure access panel to transfer gearbox mount
plate. See figure 5.
B. Support transfer gearbox mount plate using lowering jack, 1C5654.
C. Remove bolts that secure actuator seal.
D. Mark location of CFF forward flange bracket using marking pen. Remove nuts and bolts that
secure transfer gearbox mount plate onto CFF forward flange.
E. Cut safety wire and remove bolts that secure transfer gearbox mount plate onto CFF aft
flange.
F. If lower air collector sections are installed, mark location of flange brackets. Remove nuts
and bolts that secure transfer gearbox mount plate onto lower air collector sections.
G. Carefully lower jack to remove transfer gearbox mount plate.
13. Transfer Gearbox Mount Plate Installation.
WARNING

A. Using jack, 1C5654, lift transfer gearbox mount plate into position.
B. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads and washer faces of all nuts and bolts.
C. If lower air collector sections are installed, install flange brackets at positions marked at dis-
assembly. Using bolts and nuts, secure transfer gearbox mount plate and brackets onto lower
air collector sections. Boltheads face outboard. Tighten nuts finger-tight. See figure 5.
D. Install CFF forward flange bracket at position marked at disassembly. Using bolts and nuts,
secure transfer gearbox mount plate and bracket onto CFF forward flange. Boltheads face aft.
16
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2310 00
E. Using bolts, secure transfer gearbox mount plate onto CFF aft flange. Tighten bolts to
F. Tighten air collector section flange nuts to 480-570 lb in. (54.3-64.4 N·m) of torque.
G. Tighten CFF forward flange nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
H. Before installing access panel, perform thorough, final inspection for tools or foreign objects
I. Using washers, lockwashers, and bolts, secure access panel onto transfer gearbox mount
plate. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
17/(18 Blank)
18 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2411 00
3WP 2411 00
WORK PACKAGE
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (HPC) UPPER AND
LOWER STATOR CASE REPLACEMENT


1-15 ...... 3
16 Blank . . . . . . 3
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
HPC Lower Stator Case Installation ........................................................................................... 14

HPC Lower Stator Case Removal ............................................................................................... 12
HPC Upper Stator Case Installation............................................................................................ 8
HPC Upper Stator Case Removal ............................................................................................... 3
Change 3 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2411 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the high pressure com-
pressor (HPC) upper and lower stator case.
B. Disconnect and connect electrical leads and connecting tubes between low pressure compres-
sor (LPC) module and gas turbine per SWP 1913 03.
Title Number
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Actuator Components Replace- WP 1410 00
ment

Fixture, HPC Dummy Stator Case 1C9413G01
Retainer, HPC Lower stator Case, 6-12 1C9414G01
Vanes
Jack Assembly, CRF Support 1C9419G01
Fixture, Holding - Variable Stator Arms, 2C6259G05
Stage 3-6
Fixture, Lift - Compressor Stator Case, 2C14699G02
Upper
Tool Set, Alignment - Compressor 2C14779G02
Horizontal Flange
(Black or Blue)
None required.
2 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2411 00
6. HPC Upper Stator Case Removal.
A. Disconnect variable stator vane (VSV) actuating mechanism as follows:
(1) Remove VSV hydraulic actuators, actuator brackets, and actuation levers per
WP 1410 00.
(2) Position VSV to full open position (hydraulic actuators extended).
(3) Remove VSV connecting links as follows (figure 1):
(a) Using marking pen, mark stage number on connecting links to be removed.
(b) Remove bolts, washers, and lineup pins from inlet guide vane (IGV) and stages 1-4
connecting links and remove links from actuation rings. Retain sleeves, if not dam-
aged, for reinstallation.
1
CAUTION
Do not over tighten bolts securing vane holding fixture, 2C6259, or

tool damage will result.
(4) Install vane holding fixture, 2C6259, onto VSV stages 3-5. See figure 2. Secure with
washers and bolts removed in step (3). Tighten bolts only enough to secure vane holding
fixture in place.
2
B. Remove HPC upper stator case as follows:
(1) Using marking pen, matchmark brackets to front frame and compressor rear frame
(CRF) flanges.
(2) Position jack, 1C9419, at 6:00 o'clock position on CRF forward flange. Raise jack
enough to support CRF flange, but not enough to exert any upward force.
(3) Remove nuts, bolts, spacers, and brackets that secure HPC upper stator case forward and
aft circumferential flanges.
Change 3 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2411 00
Figure 1. VSV Connecting Links
4 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2411 00
Figure 2. Vane Holding Fixture, 2C6259
(4) Install upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699, as follows (figure 3):
3
WARNING

can cause an injury or kill you.
CAUTION
Ensure compressor vane levers are positioned fully open to prevent
damage to rotor spool.
(a) Using overhead hoist, position upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699,
over upper stator case top vertical centerline.
(b) Turn knurled nut to expand upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699, until
pins engage boltholes in circumferential flanges.
Change 3 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2411 00
Figure 3. Upper Compressor Stator Case Lift Fixture, 2C14699
(5) Remove hardware from horizontal flanges, observing the following:
CAUTION
Body-bound bolts shall not be turned, or damage to parts can result.
See figure 4. Do not allow body-bound bolts to turn during removal.
(a) Remove nuts, spacers, and bolts from horizontal flanges. See figure 4. Use drift pin
and mallet to drive out body-bound bolts.
4
(b) If horizontal flange bolt or nut is loose, broken, or missing, replace that bolt and nut,
plus bolt and nut on each side.
(c) If more than five horizontal flange bolts or nuts are loose, broken, or missing,
replace all bolts and nuts in both horizontal flanges.
6 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2411 00
Figure 4. HPC High-Boss Case Horizontal Flange Hardware
Change 3 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2411 00
WARNING

(6) Using overhead hoist, lift upper stator case from engine.
(7) Place stator case on clean work surface and remove upper compressor stator case lift fix-
ture, 2C14699, and vane holding fixture, 2C6259.
7. HPC Upper Stator Case Installation.
WARNING

A. Using a clean cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol, clean horizontal flange contact faces of
upper and lower stator cases.
CAUTION
B. Install vane holding fixture, 2C6259, onto VSV stages 3-5. See figure 2. Secure with washers
and bolts. Tighten bolts only enough to secure vane holding fixture in place.
C. Install upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699, as follows figure 3:
WARNING
(1) Using overhead hoist, position upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699, over
upper stator case top vertical centerline.
(2) Turn knurled nut to expand upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699, until pins
engage boltholes in circumferential flanges.
D. Use overhead hoist to position upper stator case over compressor rotor.
8 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2411 00
CAUTION

E. Carefully lower stator case into position. Remove upper compressor stator case lift fixture,
2C14699, and vane holding fixture, 2C6259.
F. Install brackets, bolts, and nuts at aft circumferential flange. Install hardware at locations
marked during disassembly. Do not tighten nuts at this time.
G. Apply thread lubricant to threads of forward circumferential flange.
H. Install hardware at locations marked during disassembly. Do not tighten bolts at this time.
I. Install horizontal flange retaining hardware as follows:
(1) Apply thread lubricant to threads and washer faces of horizontal flange attaching bolts.
(2) Inspect to ensure flanges are in contact on both sides over full length of case. If required,
install clamps or bolts at forward and aft ends and tighten slightly to pull flanges
together. Do not overtighten clamps on bolts so that alignment pins cannot function. Do
not remove clamps or bolts until assembly bolts are installed and tightened to final
torque.
NOTE
Bolt positions on the horizontal flanges are counted from the aft flange
forward.
(3) Counting from aft end on both sides, install body-bound bolts or alignment pins from
alignment tool set, 2C14779, in horizontal flange bolthole locations 2, 5, 9, 21, 25, 31,
and 35. See figure 4.
(4) Ensure body-bound bolts or alignment pins are fully seated. While restraining pins with
Allen wrench, tighten nuts on small diameter pins to 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m) of torque. Use
socket from alignment tool set, 2C14779, to enable access in tight clearance areas. Avoid
side loads.
(5) While restraining pins with Allen wrench, tighten nuts on large diameter pins to
(6) Install bolts, spacers, and nuts into remaining horizontal flange boltholes per figure 4.
Change 3 9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2411 00
NOTE
For ease of assembly, it is permitted to advance up to four bolts farther

along one horizontal flange than the other.
(7) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from the aft end and alternating from flange to flange.
Torque nuts per figure 4.
(8) Remove alignment pins and replace with body-bound bolts, spacers, and nuts per
figure 4.
(9) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from aft end and alternating from flange to flange.
Torque nuts per figure 4.
(10) Retighten horizontal flange bolts with spacers, starting from aft end and alternating from
flange to flange. Do not unseat nuts during retightening.
J. Tighten aft circumferential flange nuts to 380-420 lb in. (42.9-47.5 N·m) of torque. Tighten-
ing sequence is as follows:
(1) Tighten four bolts from horizontal flange.
(2) Tighten four bolts from top vertical centerline.
(3) Continue tightening aft circumferential flange bolts, alternating from side to side, until
all nuts are tightened.
K. Tighten forward circumferential flange bolts per figure 5. Safety-wire bolts in groups of two
or three.
5
L. Remove jack, 1C9419.
M. Connect VSV actuating mechanism as follows:
(1) Remove vane holding fixture, 2C6259, from VSV stages 3-5.
(2) Install connecting links as follows:
(a) Loosen self-locking nuts that secure first five vane arms at each end of upper and
lower stage 5 actuator rings. Loosen self-locking nut until flush with end of vane
stem.
10 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2411 00
Figure 5. Forward Circumferential Flange Bolt Installation
Change 3 11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2411 00
CAUTION
Connecting links shall be installed on correct stage and with lever

arm pins engaging sleeves, or VSV off-schedule operation and
engine damage may result.
(b) Install sleeves into connecting link ID. Ensure connecting link is correct for stage
being installed.
(c) Position connecting link onto actuation rings, ensuring FWD marking faces forward.
Install IGV and stages 1-4 lineup pins, ensuring lever arm pins engage sleeves.
(d) Install bolts and washers on IGV and stages 1-4. Install bolts on stage 5. Tighten
bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
(e) Ensure all lever arm pins are engaged in sleeves and are not engaged with connect-
ing link lightening holes.
CAUTION
Stage 5 vane stem self-locking nuts loosened in step (a) shall be

retorqued, or damage to engine will occur.
(f) Tighten self-locking nuts loosened in step (a) to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Install VSV hydraulic actuators, actuator brackets, and actuation levers per WP 1410 00.
8. HPC Lower Stator Case Removal.
CAUTION
Do not remove HPC lower stator case unless the upper stator case of
dummy case is installed in the lower position.
A. Remove HPC upper stator case per paragraph 6.
B. Install stator case retainer, 1C9414, to HPC lower stator case as follows:
NOTE
The HPC stator case shim set provides the required clearance to rotate
the cases and retains the stator vanes in the lower case half.
(1) Install forward shim to HPC lower stator case horizontal flange boltholes 32, 33, and 34.
Secure shim to case with screw in bolthole 33. See figure 4.
12 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2411 00
(2) Install rear shim to HPC lower stator case horizontal flange between holes 3 and 20.
Secure shim to case with screws in boltholes 5, 9, 14, and 19.
C. Install upper stator case or dummy stator case, 1C9413, and secure with nuts and bolts in
boltholes 4, 8, 12, and 16. Install nut and bolt in bolthole 34 of case. Tighten nuts to
210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque.
D. Rotate HPC lower stator case to top position as follows:
(1) Using marking pen, matchmark brackets to front frame and CRF flanges.
(2) Remove nuts, bolts, spacers, and brackets that secure stator case forward and aft circum-
ferential flanges.
(3) Rotate stator cases so lower case is on top.
(4) Install bolts and nuts to secure upper stator case or dummy stator case, 1C9413, to lower
portion of forward and aft circumferential flanges. Tighten bolts and nuts to
210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque.
E. Remove HPC lower stator case as follows:
(1) Install upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699, as follows (figure 3):
WARNING
CAUTION
(a) Use overhead hoist to position upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699,
over lower stator case top vertical centerline.
(b) Turn knurled nut to expand upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699, until
pins engage boltholes in circumferential flanges.
(2) Remove nuts, spacers, and bolts from both horizontal flanges.
(3) Lift lower stator case from engine using overhead hoist.
(4) Place stator case on clean work surface and remove tooling.
Change 3 13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2411 00
9. HPC Lower Stator Case Installation.
WARNING

A. Using a clean cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol, clean horizontal flange contact faces of
CAUTION

B. Install vane holding fixture, 2C6259, on VSV stages 3-5. See figure 2. Secure using washers
and bolts. Tighten bolts only enough to secure vane holding fixture in place.
C. Install stator case retainer, 1C9414, to HPC lower stator case as follows:
NOTE
The stator case shim set provides the required clearance to rotate the
cases and retains the stator vanes in the lower case half.
(1) Install forward shim on HPC lower stator case horizontal flange between holes 32, 33,
and 34. Secure shim to case with screw in bolthole 33. See figure 4.
(2) Install rear shim on HPC lower stator case horizontal flange between hole 3 and 20.
Secure shim to case with screws in boltholes 5, 9, 14, and 19.
D. Install lift fixture, 2C14699, as follows figure 3:
(1) Use overhead hoist to position lower stator case over compressor rotor.
(2) Turn knurled nut to expand upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699, until pins
engage boltholes in circumferential flanges.
WARNING

E. Use overhead hoist to position lower stator case over compressor rotor.
14 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2411 00
CAUTION

F. Carefully lower the stator case into position. Remove upper compressor stator case lift fix-
ture, 2C14699.
G. Install nuts and bolts in horizontal flange boltholes 4, 8, 12, and 16. Install nut and bolt into
bolthole 34 of case. Tighten nuts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m).
H. Rotate stator cases as follow:
(1) Remove nuts and bolts that secure the upper stator case or dummy case onto lower por-
tion of forward and aft circumferential flanges.
(2) Rotate stator cases so that lower case is at bottom position.
I. Apply thread lubricant to threads of forward circumferential flange attaching bolts.
J. Install brackets, bolts, and nuts to lower case forward and aft circumferential flanges. Install
hardware at locations marked during disassembly. Do not tighten bolts or nuts at this time.
K. Remove nuts and bolts from horizontal flanges.
L. Remove screws that secure stator case retainer, 1C9414, onto lower stator case horizontal
flange. Remove retainer, 1C9414, from between stator case horizontal flanges.
WARNING

M. If dummy stator case, 1C9413, is installed, remove using overhead hoist.
N. Install upper stator case per paragraph 7.

16 Blank Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
3SWP 2411 01
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR UPPER/LOWER
STATOR CASE OPENING/CLOSING


1 - 29 ...... 3
30 Blank . . . . . . 3
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
High Pressure Compressor Lower Stator Case Closing.............................................................. 24

High Pressure Compressor Lower Stator Case Opening ............................................................ 19
High Pressure Compressor Upper Stator Case Closing .............................................................. 13
High Pressure Compressor Upper Stator Case Opening............................................................. 3
Change 3 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
1. Introduction.
A. This subordinate work package (SWP) contains instructions for installation and removal of
the fixture set to raise and hinge the high pressure compressor (HPC) upper stator case.
B. Disconnect electrical leads and connecting tubes between low pressure compressor (LPC)
module and gas turbine per SWP 1913 02.
C. A shim set is provided which allows the lower case to be rotated 180 degrees about horizontal
axis to position the lower case at the top.
D. Remove the two upper fuel manifold sections per WP 1510 00.
Title Number
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Actuator Components WP 1410 00
Replacement
Gas Fuel System Components ReplacementFuel System WP 1510 00
Replacement

Jack Assembly, CRF Support 1C9376G01/G02
Fixture Set, Raise & Hinge - Upper 1C9400G01
Compressor Case
Fixture, Holding - Variable Stator Arms, 2C6259G05
Stage 3-6
Tool Set, Alignment - Compressor 2C14779G02
Horizontal Flange
(Black or Blue)
None required.
2 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
6. High Pressure Compressor Upper Stator Case Opening.
A. Disconnect variable stator vane (VSV) actuating mechanism as follows:
(1) Position VSVs to full open position (hydraulic actuators extended).
(2) Remove piping, as required, per SWP 1913 02.
(3) Remove upper fuel manifold sections per WP 1510 00.
WP 1410 00.
(a) Mark stage number on connecting links to be removed with marking pen.
(b) Remove bolts, washers, and lineup pins from stages IGV and 1-4 connecting links
and remove links from actuation rings. Retain sleeves, if not damaged, for
reinstallation.
1
CAUTION

(6) Install holding fixture, 2C6259, onto VSV stages 3-5. See figure 2. Using bolts removed
in step (5), secure fixture to stages. Tighten bolts only enough to secure fixture in place.
2
B. Open HPC upper stator case as follows:
(1) Using marking pen, matchmark brackets to front frame (figure 3) and compressor rear
frame (CRF) (figure 4) flanges.
4
3
(2) Position jack assembly, 1C9376, at 6:00 o'clock position on CRF forward flange. Raise
jack just enough to support CRF flange, but not enough to exert any upward force. See
figure 5.
5
aft circumferential flanges, figures 3 and 4.
Change 3 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
Figure 1. VSV Connecting Links
4 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
Figure 2. VSV Vane Holding Set Secure Fixture, 2C6259
Figure 3. Forward Circumferential Flange Bolt Locations
Change 3 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
Figure 4. Aft Circumferential Flange Bolt Locations
6 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
Figure 5. Compressor Case Orientation
CAUTION
• Ensure compressor vane levers are positioned fully open to pre-

vent damage to rotor spool.
• Body-bound bolts shall not be turned, or damage to parts can

result. See figure 6. Do not allow body-bound bolts to turn during
removal.
(a) Remove nuts, spacers, and bolts from horizontal flanges. See figure 6. Use a drift
pin and mallet to drive out body-bound bolts.
6
(b) If horizontal flange bolt or nut is loose, broken, or missing, record location and
replace bolt and nut plus bolt and nut on each side.
(c) If more than five horizontal bolts or nuts are loose, broken, or missing, replace all
bolts and nuts in both horizontal flanges.
Change 3 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
Figure 6. HPC High-Boss Case Horizontal Flange Hardware
8 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
(5) Install aft jack, 1C9400P17, and forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, as follows:
(a) For forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, remove second and fourth bolts
from forward HPC stator case to fan frame flange, counting down from horizontal
splitline, figure 3.
(b) Align lower tabs on forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, with flange con-
necting forward HPC stator case to fan frame flange, figure 7.
7
(c) For aft jack, 1C9400P17, remove second bolt and nut from flange connecting HPC
stator case to CRF, figure 4.
(d) Align lower tabs on aft jack, 1C9400P17, to straddle HPC stator case/CRF flange,
figure 7.
(e) Extend threaded rod on each jack so that arm aligns with second hole in flange.
Insert pin until upper arm is flush against engine flange.
(f) For aft jack, 1C9400P17, fit lower tabs over aft flange and bolt into place.
(g) For forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, fit lower tabs against HPC stator
case forward flange and bolt into place on fan frame. Secure with two bolts on each
side.
(6) Extend each jack until resistance is felt. Using four operators, turn each nut, in unison,
approximately 1/4 turn each time until HPC stator case is raised approximately 1 inch
(25.4 mm) for installing hinges.
(7) Install hinges and lift bar as follows (figure 7):
(a) Align forward, upper and lower hinges, 1C9400P05 and 1C9400P06, onto horizon-
tal flange of HPC stator case, right side, aft looking forward. Position hinges so for-
ward hole in hinge aligns with second hole from forward end of upper HPC stator
case.
(b) Using three 1/4-inch fasteners, secure forward hinges to HPC stator case.
(c) Align aft, upper and lower hinges, 1C9400P07 and 1C9400P08, from fixture set,
1C9400, onto horizontal flange of HPC stator case, right side, aft looking forward.
Position hinges so aft hole in hinge aligns with sixth hole from aft end of HPC stator
case.
(d) Using two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners, secure aft hinges onto HPC stator
case.
Change 3 9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
Figure 7. Use of Jacks, Hinges, and Lift Bar from Fixture Set, 1C9400 (Sheet 1 of 3)
10 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
Change 3 11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
12 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
(e) Using three 1/4-inch fasteners, secure forward handle, 1C9400P03, onto underside
of left side of horizontal flange of HPC stator case, aft looking forward.
(f) Using two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners, secure aft handle, 1C9400P04, onto
underside of left side of horizontal flange of HPC stator case, aft looking forward.
(8) Ensure upper HPC stator case is supported by hinges and lift bar assembly. Remove
jacks.
(9) Install strut into position as follows (figure 7):
(a) Raise upper HPC stator case by lifting up on lift bar (two man operation). Open to
height desired.
(b) Install top end of strut over aft flange of HPC stator case. Align strut holes over
fourth hole CW from the horizontal flanges holes, aft looking forward.
(c) Insert ball-lock pin through holes in strut and flange.
(d) Install bottom end of strut over forward flange of CRF. Align strut over third hole
CCW from top vertical centerline, aft looking forward. Insert ball-lock pin.
7. High Pressure Compressor Upper Stator Case Closing.
A. Lower HPC upper stator case as follows:
(1) Install jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19, as follows (figure 7):
from flange connecting forward HPC stator case to fan frame, counting from split-
line, figure 3.
necting forward HPC stator case to fan frame, figure 7.
(d) Align lower tabs on aft jack, 1C9400P17, to straddle HPC stator case/CRF flange,
figure 7.
(f) For aft jack, 1C9400P17, fit the lower tabs over aft flange and bolt into place.
Change 3 13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
(g) For forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, fit the lower tabs against HPC sta-
tor case forward flange and bolt into place on fan frame. Secure with two bolts on
each side.
(h) Extend each jack approximately 1 inch (25.4 mm).
(2) Remove struts as follows (figure 7):
(a) While two people hold HPC stator case to keep it from falling, remove ball-lock pins
that secure struts to upper HPC stator case.
(b) Disconnect struts from the lower HPC stator case.
(c) Lower upper HPC stator case until it rests on jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and
1C9400P19.
(3) Remove lift bar and hinges as follows (figure 7):
(a) Remove two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners that secure aft handle,
1C9400P04, onto horizontal flange of HPC stator case. Remove handle.
(b) Remove three 1/4-inch fasteners that secure forward handle, 1C9400P03, onto hori-
zontal flange of HPC stator case. Remove handle.
(c) Remove two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners that secure aft hinge onto hori-
zontal flange of HPC stator case. Remove hinge.
(d) Remove three 1/4-inch fasteners that secure forward hinge onto horizontal flange of
HPC stator case. Remove hinge.
(4) Turn jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19, in unison and lower upper HPC
stator case down to fit onto lower HPC stator case.
(5) Remove jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19.
(6) Clean and store all tools from fixture set, 1C9400, in container, 1C9400P02.
WARNING
B. Using clean cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol, clean horizontal flange contact faces of
14 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
CAUTION

C. Install vane holding set secure fixture, 2C6259, onto VSV stages 3-5. See figure 2. Secure
with washers and bolts. Tighten bolts only enough to secure vane holding fixture in place.
CAUTION

D. Install brackets, bolts, and nuts at aft circumferential flange. Install hardware at locations
E. Apply thread lubricant to threads of forward circumferential flange attaching bolts.
F. Install brackets and bolts at forward circumferential flange. Install hardware at locations
marked during disassembly. Do not tighten bolts at this time.
G. Install horizontal flange retaining hardware as follows:
See figure 6.
(2) Ensure flanges are in contact on both sides over their full length. If required, install
clamps or bolts at forward and aft ends and tighten slightly to pull flanges together. Do
not overtighten clamps or bolts so that alignment pins cannot function. Do not remove
these clamps or bolts until assembly bolts are installed and tightened to final torque.
NOTE
forward.
(3) Install body-bound bolts or alignment pins from tool set, 2C14779, in horizontal flange
bolthole locations 2, 5, 9, 21, 25, 31, and 35, counting from aft end on both sides. See
figure 6.
(4) Ensure that body-bound bolts or alignment pins are fully seated. Restrain pins using
Allen wrench and tighten nuts on small diameter pins to 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m) of torque.
Use socket from tool set, 2C14779, to enable access in tight clearance areas. Avoid side
loads.
Change 3 15
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
(5) Using Allen wrench, restrain pins, and tighten nuts on large diameter pins to 240 lb in.
(6) Install bolts, spacers, and nuts in remaining horizontal flange boltholes per figure 6.
(7) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from aft end and alternating from flange to flange. For
ease of assembly, it is permitted to advance up to four bolts farther along one horizontal
flange than the other. Tighten nuts to torque values listed in figure 6.
figure 6.
Tighten nuts to torque values listed in figure 6.
(10) Tighten horizontal flange bolts with spacers, starting from aft end and alternating from
H. Tighten aft circumferential flange nuts to 380-420 lb in. (42.9-47.5 N·m) of torque. Tighten-
ing sequence is as follows:
all nuts are tightened, figure 8.
8
I. Tighten forward circumferential flange bolts to torque values listed in figure 9. Safety-wire
bolts in groups of two or three.
9
J. Remove jack assembly, 1C9376.
K. Connect VSV actuating mechanism as follows:
(2) Install connecting links as follows (figure 1):
stem.
16 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
Figure 8. Aft Circumferential Flange Bolt Installation
Change 3 17
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
Figure 9. Forward Circumferential Flange Bolt Installation
18 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
CAUTION

(b) Install sleeves into connecting link ID. Ensuring connecting link is correct for stage
being installed.
(d) Install bolts and washers onto IGV and stages 1-4. Install bolts onto stage 5. Tighten
CAUTION
Stage 5 vane stem self-locking nuts loosened in substep (a) shall be

(f) Tighten self-locking nuts loosened in substep (a) to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of
torque.
(4) Install upper fuel manifold sections per WP 1510 00.
(5) Install piping per SWP 1913 02.
8. High Pressure Compressor Lower Stator Case Opening.
A. Disconnect VSV actuating mechanism as follows:
(1) Position VSVs to full open position (hydraulic actuators extended).
(2) Remove piping, as needed, per SWP 1913 02.
(3) Remove upper fuel manifold sections per WP 1510 00.
WP 1410 00.
Change 3 19
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
(a) Mark stage number on connecting links to be removed with marking pen.
(b) Remove bolts, washers, and lineup pins from stages IGV and 1 through 4 connecting
links and remove links from actuation rings. Retain sleeves, if not damaged, for rein-
stallation.
CAUTION

(6) Install vane holding fixture, 2C6259, onto VSV stages 3 through 5. See figure 2. Using
bolts removed in step (5), secure fixtures to stages. Tighten bolts only enough to secure
fixtures in place.
B. Open HPC lower stator case as follows:
(1) Using marking pen, matchmark brackets to front frame, figure 3, and CRF, figure 4,
flanges.
(2) Position jack assembly, 1C9376, at 6:00 o'clock position on CRF forward flange. Raise
jack just enough to support CRF flange, but not enough to exert any upward force,
figure 5.
aft circumferential flanges (figure 3 and figure 4).
CAUTION
• Ensure compressor vane levers are positioned fully open to pre-

vent damage to rotor spool.
• Body-bound bolts shall not be turned, or damage to parts can

result. See figure 6. Do not allow body-bound bolts to turn during
removal.
(a) Remove nuts, spacers, and bolts from horizontal flanges. See figure 6. Use drift pin
and mallet to drive out body-bound bolts.
(b) If horizontal flange bolt or nut is loose, broken, or missing, record location and
replace bolt and nut plus bolt and nut on each side.
20 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
(c) If more than five horizontal bolts or nuts are loose, broken, or missing, replace all
bolts and nuts in both horizontal flanges.
(5) Install aft jack, 1C9400P17, and forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, as follows:
line, figure 3.
necting forward HPC stator case to fan frame, figure 7.
(c) For aft jacks, 1C9400P17, remove second bolt and nut from flange connecting HPC
(d) Align lower tabs on aft jacks, 1C9400P17, to straddle HPC stator case/CRF flange,
figure 7.
(f) For aft jacks, 1C9400P17, fit lower tabs over the aft flange and bolt into place.
(g) For forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, fit lower tabs against HPC stator
case forward flange and bolt into place on fan frame. Secure with two bolts on each
side.
(7) Install aft shims, 1C9400P11 and 1C9400P23, as follows (figure 7):
(a) Align aft shim, 1C9400P11, onto right side horizontal flange. Insert studs into the
second and thirteenth holes from aft end of HPC stator case. Install stud through
horizontal flange of lower case and secure finger-tight at under side of flange.
(b) Align aft shim, 1C9400P23, onto left side horizontal flange. Insert studs into the
second and thirteenth holes from aft end of HPC stator case. Install stud through
horizontal flange of lower case and secure finger-tight at under side of flange.
(8) Install forward shims, 1C9400P10 and 1C9400P22, as follows (figure 7):
(a) Align forward shim, 1C9400P10, onto right side horizontal flange. Position shim so
forward most hole in shim aligns with third flange hole from forward end of HPC
stator case.
Change 3 21
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
(b) Align forward shim, 1C9400P22, onto left side horizontal flange. Position shim so
forward most hole in shim aligns with third flange hole from forward end of HPC
stator case.
(9) Using jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19, lower upper HPC stator case
down onto lower HPC stator case.
(11) Bolt HPC stator case halves together as follows:
CAUTION

(a) Install bolts and nuts at aft circumferential flange. Do not tighten nuts at this time.
(b) Install bolts at forward circumferential flange. Do not tighten bolts at this time.
(c) Install horizontal flange retaining hardware as follows:
(d) Ensure flanges are in contact on both sides over their full length. If required, install
clamps or bolts at forward and aft ends and tighten slightly to pull flanges together.
Do not overtighten clamps or bolts so that alignment pins cannot function. Do not
remove these clamps or bolts until assembly bolts are installed and tightened to final
torque. See figure 6.
NOTE
forward.
(e) Install body-bound bolts or alignment pins from tool set, 2C14779, in horizontal
flange bolthole locations 2, 5, 9, 21, 25, 31, and 35, counting from aft end on both
sides. See figure 6.
(f) Ensure that body-bound bolts or alignment pins are fully seated. Using Allen
wrench, restrain pins, and tighten nuts on small diameter pins to 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m)
of torque. Use socket from tool set, 2C14779, to enable access in tight clearance
areas. Avoid side loads.
22 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
(g) Using Allen wrench, restrain pins, and tighten nuts on large diameter pins to
(h) Install bolts, spacers, and nuts in remaining horizontal flange boltholes per figure 6.
(i) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from aft end and alternating from flange to
flange. For ease of assembly, it is permitted to advance up to four bolts farther along
one horizontal flange than the other. Tighten nuts to torque values listed in figure 6.
(j) Remove alignment pins and replace with body-bound bolts, spacers, and nuts per
figure 6.
(k) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from aft end and alternating from flange to
flange. Tighten nuts to torque values listed in figure 6.
(l) Tighten horizontal flange bolts with spacers, starting from aft end and alternating
from flange to flange. Do not unseat nuts during retightening.
(m) Tighten aft circumferential flange nuts to 380-420 lb in. (42.9-47.5 N·m) of torque.
Tightening sequence is as follows (figure 8):
1 Tighten four bolts from horizontal flange.
2 Tighten four bolts from top vertical centerline.
3 Continue tightening aft circumferential flange bolts, alternating from side to

side, until all nuts are tightened.
(n) Tighten forward circumferential flange bolts to torque values listed in figure 9.
(12) Rotate HPC stator casing so lower half is on top.
(13) Install jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19, per step (5).
(15) Install hinges and lift bar as follows (figure 7):
(a) Align forward, upper and lower hinges, 1C9400P05 and 1C9400P06, onto horizon-
tal flange of HPC stator case, right side, aft looking forward. Position hinges so for-
ward hole in hinge aligns with the second hole from forward end of upper HPC
stator case.
(b) Using three 1/4-inch fasteners, secure forward hinges to HPC stator case.
Change 3 23
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
(c) Align aft, upper and lower hinges, 1C9400P07 and 1C9400P08, onto horizontal
flange of HPC stator case, right side, aft looking forward. Position hinges so aft hole
in hinge aligns with sixth hole from aft end of the case.
(d) Using two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners, secure aft hinges to HPC stator
case.
(e) Using three 1/4-inch fasteners, secure forward handle, 1C9400P03, onto underside
of left side of horizontal flange of HPC stator case, aft looking forward.
(f) Using two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners, secure aft handle, 1C9400P04, onto
underside of left side of horizontal flange of HPC stator case, aft looking forward.
(16) Ensure case is supported by hinges and lift bar assembly. Remove jacks, 1C9400P17,
1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19.
(17) Install strut into position as follows (figure 7):
(a) Raise upper HPC stator case by lifting up on lift bar (two man operation). Open to
height desired.
(b) Install top end of strut over aft flange of HPC stator case. Align strut holes over
fourth hole CW from the horizontal flanges holes, aft looking forward.
(c) Insert ball-lock pin through holes in strut and flange.
(d) Install bottom end of strut over forward flange of CRF. Align strut over third hole
CCW from top vertical centerline, aft looking forward. Insert ball-lock pin.
9. High Pressure Compressor Lower Stator Case Closing.
WARNING
A. Lower HPC stator case as follows:
(1) Install jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19, as follows:
line (figure 3).
24 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
necting forward HPC stator case to fan frame (figure 7).
stator case to CRF (figure 4).
(d) Align lower tabs on aft jack, 1C9400P17, to straddle HPC stator case/CRF flange
(figure 7).
(f) For aft jack, 1C9400P17, fit the lower tabs over aft flange and bolt into place.
(g) For forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, fit the lower tabs against HPC sta-
tor case forward flange and bolt into place on fan frame. Secure with two bolts on
each side.
(h) Extend each jack approximately 1 inch (25.4 mm).
(2) Remove struts as follows (figure 7):
(a) While two people hold HPC stator case to keep it from falling, remove ball-lock pins
that secure struts to upper HPC stator case.
(b) Disconnect struts from lower HPC stator case.
(c) Lower upper HPC stator case until it rests on jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and
1C9400P19.
(3) Remove lift bar and hinges as follows (figure 7):
(a) Remove two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners that secure aft handle,
1C9400P04, onto horizontal flange of HPC stator case. Remove handle.
(b) Remove three 1/4-inch fasteners that secure forward handle, 1C9400P03, onto hori-
zontal flange of HPC stator case. Remove handle.
(c) Remove two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners that secure aft hinge onto hori-
zontal flange of HPC stator case. Remove hinge.
(d) Remove three 1/4-inch fasteners that secure forward hinge onto horizontal flange of
HPC stator case. Remove hinge.
Change 3 25
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
(4) Remove shims as follows (figure 7):
(a) Remove studs and remove aft shims, 1C9400P11 and 1C9400P23, from aft end of
HPC stator case.
(b) Remove studs and remove forward shims, 1C9400P10 and 1C9400P22, from for-
ward end of HPC stator case.
(5) Turn jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19, in unison, and lower upper HPC
stator case down to fit onto lower HPC stator case.
(7) Clean and store all tools from fixture set, 1C9400, in container, 1C9400P02.
WARNING
B. Using clean cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol, clean horizontal flange contact faces of
upper and lower HPC stator cases.
CAUTION

NOTE
The shims contain through-holes in line with the case flange holes to
permit bolting of the halves together and to later install the hinges
without having to remove the shims.
C. Install vane holding fixture, 2C6259, onto VSV stages 3-5. See figure 2. Secure using wash-
ers and bolts. Tighten bolts only enough to secure vane holding fixture in place.
CAUTION

D. Install brackets, bolts, and nuts at aft circumferential flange. Install hardware at locations
E. Apply thread lubricant to threads of forward circumferential flange attaching bolts.
26 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
F. Install brackets and bolts at forward circumferential flange. Install hardware at locations
marked during disassembly. Do not tighten bolts at this time.
G. Install horizontal flange retaining hardware as follows:
See figure 6.
(2) Ensure flanges are in contact on both sides over their full length. If required, install
clamps or bolts at forward and aft ends and tighten slightly to pull flanges together. Do
not overtighten clamps or bolts so that alignment pins cannot function. Do not remove
these clamps or bolts until assembly bolts are installed and tightened to final torque.
NOTE
forward.
(3) Install body-bound bolts or alignment pins from tool set, 2C14779, in horizontal flange
bolthole locations 2, 5, 9, 21, 25, 31, and 35, counting from aft end on both sides. See
figure 6.
(4) Ensure that body-bound bolts or alignment pins are fully seated. Restrain pins using
Allen wrench and tighten nuts on small diameter pins to 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m) of torque.
Use socket from tool set, 2C14779, to enable access in tight clearance areas. Avoid side
loads.
(5) Restrain pins using Allen wrench and tighten nuts on large diameter pins to 240 lb in.
(6) Install bolts, spacers, and nuts in remaining horizontal flange boltholes per figure 6.
(7) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from aft end and alternating from flange to flange. For
ease of assembly, it is permitted to advance up to four bolts farther along one horizontal
flange than the other. Tighten nuts to torque values listed in figure 6.
figure 6.
Tighten nuts to torque values listed in figure 6.
(10) Tighten horizontal flange bolts with spacers, starting from aft end and alternating from
Change 3 27
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
SWP 2411 01
H. Tighten aft circumferential flange nuts to 380-420 lb in. (42.9-47.5 N·m) of torque. Tighten-
ing sequence is as follows (figure 8):
all nuts are tightened.
I. Tighten forward circumferential flange bolts to torque values listed in figure 9. Safety-wire
bolts in groups of two or three.
J. Remove jack assembly, 1C9376.
K. Connect VSV actuating mechanism as follows:
(2) Install connecting links as follows (figure 1):
stem.
CAUTION
(b) Install sleeves into connecting link ID. Ensure connecting link is correct for stage
being installed.
(d) Install bolts and washers onto IGV and stages 1-4. Install bolts onto stage 5. Tighten
28 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
SWP 2411 01
CAUTION
Stage 5 vane stem self-locking nuts loosened in substep (a) shall be

(f) Tighten self-locking nuts loosened in substep (a) to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of
torque.
(4) Install upper fuel manifold sections per WP 1510 00.
(5) Install piping per SWP 1913 02.

30 Blank Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
5WP 2412 00
WORK PACKAGE
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (HPC) STATOR
VANES REPLACEMENT


1 - 76 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Variable Stator Vanes Dimensional Inspection ................................... 19
HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Variable Stator Vanes Visual Inspection ............................................. 15
HPC Stage 6-13 Stator Vanes Dimensional Inspection .............................................................. 26
HPC Stage 6-13 Stator Vanes Visual Inspection......................................................................... 19
HPC Stator Case Inspection........................................................................................................ 29
HPC Stator Case - Repair of VSV Bushing Mounting Hole Threads ........................................ 29
HPC Stator Vanes Installation..................................................................................................... 50
HPC Stator Vanes Removal ........................................................................................................ 4
Parts Repair - Vanes - General .................................................................................................... 26
Parts Repair - Vanes - Leading and Trailing Edge Blending ...................................................... 27
Parts Repair - Vanes - Tip Blending............................................................................................ 29
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
1. Introduction.
NOTE
The LM6000 HPC high-boss case stages 3-5 bushings are replaceable
externally without top case removal. Refer to WP 1412 00 for replace-
ment instructions.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the high pressure
compressor (HPC) stator case.
Title Number
Maintenance Considerations Chapter 11
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) stages 3 to 5 Bushing
Replacement (High-Boss HPC Stator Case) WP 1412 00
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Upper and Lower Sta- WP 2411 00
tor Case Replacement

Fixture Set, VSV Torque Measuring 1C9408G02
Wrench, VSV Locknut Torque Break 1C9428G01
Tool Set, Holding VSV 2C6018G01
Driver Set, Compressor Stator Vane 2C6019G03
Holder Set, VSV 2C6171G02
Removal Tool, Vane Spring Retainers 2C14684G02
Bushing Rework Tool - WP2412-03 Local Manufacture
Depth Gage - WP2412-02 Local Manufacture
Drilling Jig - WP2412-01 Local Manufacture
Drill Stop, Adjustable Local Purchase
(7/32 inch Diameter)
Pull Scale, Calibrated 0-50 lb Local Purchase
7/32 inch Diameter Drill (case rework) Local Purchase
HSS 0.250-28 UNJF-3B Tap Set Local Purchase
(Taper, Plug and Bottoming Taps)
7 mm or 9/32 inch Diameter Drill Local Purchase
(bushing rework)
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00

8492A102 Drill Guide (Ref. McMaster) Local Purchase
8492A176 Drill Guide (Ref. McMaster) Local Purchase
Adjustable Drill Stop (7/32 Inch Local Purchase
Diameter)
3374A21 Transfer Punch (Ref. Local Purchase
McMaster)
Anti-Seize Compound Milk-of-Magnesia
(Unflavored)
(Black or Blue)
(RTV 106)
Tapping Fluid Trim Tap NC
(Masters
Chemical Co.)
Thread Lubricant GE Spec
A50TF201
5. Referenced Procedures.
Chapter 11 Hand Blending
Chapter 11 Marking of Parts
Chapter 11 Spot Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection
Chapter 11 Swab Etching Procedures
Packing, Preformed L47372P01 58
(Stage 5 Hi-Boss Case)
Packing, Preformed L47372P02 96
(Stages 3 and 4 Hi-Boss Case)
Spring Retainer, Stages 6 and 8 9382M94P02 127
Spring Retainer, Stages 9, 10, 12, and 13 9382M95P05 300
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
7. SPD Information.

Bushing - Spare Part 2083M62P01
through P08
8. HPC Stator Vanes Removal.
A. Before disassembly, inspect inlet guide vane (IGV) and stages 0-5 stator vanes for
off-schedule condition per WP 4028 00.
B. Remove HPC stator cases per WP 2411 00.
C. Remove stages IGV-2 stator vanes as follows:
(1) Remove stages IGV-2 vane shrouds as follows (figure 1):
(a) Using marking pen, position mark shroud sections.

1
NOTE
• The forward and aft parts of each shroud half section are a
matched set. If either part requires replacement, the entire half sec-
tion shall be replaced.
• Shroud retaining bolts are body-bound. Do not allow bolts to turn

during removal.
(b) Remove nuts from shroud retaining bolts. Support vanes and tap bolts out using a
plastic mallet. Separate and remove forward and aft shroud segments.
(c) Remove flanged bushings from vane inner trunnions.
(2) Using marking pen, position mark vanes to stator case.
(3) Using holding tool from holding VSV tool set, 2C6018, support individual vanes.
Support entire stage of vanes using holder from VSV holder set, 2C6171. See figure 2.
2
(4) Loosen locknut using torque break wrench, 1C9428, and channel-lock pliers. See
figures 3and 4. Remove locknut (1, figure 4), alignment sleeve (2), and lever arm (3).
4
3
(5) If a large number of vanes are being removed, remove all lever arms (3) and remove
actuation ring (11).
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 1. Stages IGV-2 Vane Shrouds Removal
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 2. Variable Stator Vane Holding Tools
CAUTION
Bushing may stick in stator case counterbore. Ensure all pieces are
removed before installing new parts.
(6) Remove spacer (5) and bushing (6) from outside of stator case (12).
(7) Remove vane (8) by pulling from inside of stator case (12).
(8) Remove washer (7) from inside of stator case (12).
(9) If HPC stator cases are to be replaced, remove stages IGV-2 borescope plugs from
stator case.
D. Remove stages 3-5 stator vanes as follows:
(1) Using marking pen, position mark vanes to stator case.
(2) Using holding tool from VSV tool set, 2C6018, support individual vanes. Support entire
stage of vanes using holding tool from VSV holder set, 2C6171. See figure 2.
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 3. Stages IGV-4 Locknut Removal
(3) Remove high-boss case vanes as follows (figure 5):

5
(a) Remove locknut (1) and lever arm (2).
(b) Remove jamnut (3), alignment sleeve (4), and spacer (5).
(c) Remove vane (9) by pulling from inside of high-boss case (12).
(d) If large number of vanes are being removed, remove all lever arms (2) and remove
actuation ring (11) and actuation ring sleeves (10).
(e) Remove bolts (7) that secure bushing (6) to high-boss case (12).
(f) Use nylon drift to loosen bushing (6), as required.
(g) Remove bushing (6) and discard preformed packing (8).
(h) If upper and lower HPC stator cases are to be replaced, remove stages 3-5 borescope
plugs from stator case.
E. Remove stages 6-12 stator vanes as follows:
(1) Remove borescope plugs from HPC stator case on effected stages.
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 4. Stages IGV-2 Stator Vanes
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 5. High-Boss Case Stages 3-5 Vane Removal
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
(2) Using marking pen, position mark vanes to HPC stator case.
(3) Remove vane retaining keys from horizontal flanges of upper HPC stator case (figure 6).
Lower HPC stator case has no retaining keys.
6
NOTE
Stages 7 and 11 do not have spring retainers.
(4) On stages 7 and 11, remove vanes by sliding circumferentially from retaining slots. Use
driver from compressor stator vane driver set, 2C6019, to drive against vane base, not
airfoil.
CAUTION
Do not slide vanes with spring retainers installed. Spring retainers

will scar case.
(5) On stages 6, 8, 9, 10, and 12, remove vanes to expose first spring retainer by sliding cir-
cumferentially from retaining slots.
(6) Using stator vane spring retainer removal tool, 2C14684, remove spring retainers.
(figure 7). Discard spring retainers.
7
(7) Remove remaining vanes and retainers per steps (5) and (6).
F. Remove stage 13 stator vanes as follows (figure 8):

8
(1) Remove borescope plug from lower HPC stator case.
(2) Using marking pen, position mark liner segments to HPC stator case.
(3) Remove bolts that secure liner segments to HPC stator case.
CAUTION
Use care so end-stop does not fall out of the liner segments and leaf
seals do not become disengaged.
(4) Remove liner segments by sliding circumferentially from retaining slots.
(5) Remove stationary seal segments.
(6) Attempt to remove end-stop from liner. Early configuration end-stops cannot be
removed. See figure 8.
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 6. Stages 6-12 Stator Vane Removal (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 6. Stages 6-12 Stator Vane Removal (Sheet 2 of 2)
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 7. Stages 6-12 Vane Removal Tools
(7) If end-stop is not removable, remove vanes from end of liner opposite end-stop.
(8) If end-stop is removable, remove vanes as follows:
(a) Remove end-stop and leaf seals from liner.
(b) Remove vane to expose first spring retainer by sliding circumferentially from liner
retaining slots, sliding it over liner end-stop pin.
(c) Using vane spring retainer removal tool, 2C14684, remove exposed spring retainer
(figure 7). Discard spring retainer. See figure 8.
(d) Slide second vane toward liner end-stop pin to expose next spring retainer.
(e) Repeat steps (c) and (d) until all spring retainers are removed from liner.
(f) Remove vanes from end of liner opposite end-stop pin.
(g) Install end-stop and leaf seals to liner. Retain end-stop in place with two rubber
bands, one around each end of end-stop.
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 8. Stage 13 Vane Removal
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
G. If HPC stator cases are to be replaced, remove variable stator vane (VSV) lever bracket from
stator case.
9. HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Variable Stator Vanes Visual Inspection.
Visually inspect IGV and stage 1-5 vanes per tables 1 and 2, and figure 9.
Table 1. HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Vanes Visual Inspection

NOTE
Airfoil defects within defined limits resulting in protrusion on the

opposing surface are acceptable. Defects superimposed at same
airfoil location but on opposing sides are not acceptable if sum of
two defects exceeds defined limits.
1. All Areas for:
a. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace vane
2. Area A for (figure 9):
a. Nicks, pits, 0.003 inch (0.08 mm) 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Blend per paragraph
and scratches deep deep 13
b. Dents 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Not repairable Replace vane
deep. None allowed in
fillets
3. Area B (Leading and Trailing Edges) for (figure 9):
a. Nicks, pits, 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) Any amount if repair Blend per paragraph
and scratches deep does not exceed min 13 and 14
Chord V (table 2)
b. Dents 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) Any amount if repair Blend per paragraph
deep does not exceed min 13 and 14
Chord V (table 2)
Change 5 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Table 1. HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Vanes Visual Inspection (Continued)

c. Erosion Min root Chord V and Any amount if repair Blend per paragraph
min thicknesses, mea- does not exceed min 13 and 14
sured 0.03 inch Chord V (table 2)
(0.8 mm) from lead-
ing/trailing edge are
0.012 inch (0.30 mm)
in area from root to
midspan and
0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
in area from midspan
to tip
4. Area C for (figure 9):
a. Nicks, pits, 0.003 inch (0.08 mm) 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Blend per paragraph
and scratches deep deep 13
b. Dents 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
deep. None permitted
in fillets
5. Area G (Stage 3-5 Squealer Tips) for (figure 9):
a. Cracks, nicks, Not serviceable 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) Blend per paragraph
and dents deep 13 and 15
b. Burrs and high Not serviceable Any amount Remove high metal
metal
c. Top tip corner Not serviceable Max blend radius Blend per paragraph
damage (figure 9) must remove 13 and 15
all defective material.
Rework may extend
into areas B and C
d. Airfoil 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
bending for each 1.0 inch
(25 mm) of airfoil
length
16 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00

6. Area E (IGV, Stage 1-2 Trunnions, Platforms, and Tangs) for (figure 9):
a. Nicks and 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) Blend high metal per
scratches deep if 80 percent of deep if 30 percent of paragraph 13
area is clear of defects. area is clear of defects
None allowed in fillets
and no raised metal
b. Scoring or wear 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) Replace vane*
on outer deep, 0.100 inch deep
trunnion (2.54 mm) wide
diameter
c. Scoring or wear 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
on inner deep for 50 percent of
trunnion circumference
diameter
d. Wear on outer 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
platform deep
surface
e. Wear on inner 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
platform face deep
f. Runout of inner 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
trunnion FIR
diameter with
respect to outer
trunnion
diameter (IGV-
2 only)
g. Scoring or wear 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
on tang deep
h. Wear on inner 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
platform outer deep
edge
7. Area F (Threaded Stem) for (figure 9):
a. Thread damage Not serviceable Entrance thread may Remove entrance
be removed if remain- thread or replace vane
ing threads are not
damaged
Change 5 17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00

b. High metal Not serviceable Any amount Remove high metal per
paragraph 13
* NOTE: May be repairable; consult GE for disposition of replaced parts.
Table 2. HPC IGV and Stage 1–5 Vanes Minimum Chord Values
Minimum Chord V
Dim D
IGV Stage 1 Stage 2
inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm
Root Root 2.26 57.4 2.02 51.3 1.74 44.2
0.50 12.7 2.24 56.9 2.00 50.8 1.73 43.9
1.00 25.4 2.19 55.6 1.96 49.8 1.69 42.9
1.50 38.1 2.14 54.4 1.92 48.8 1.66 42.2
2.00 50.8 2.08 52.8 1.88 47.8 1.63 41.4
2.50 63.5 2.03 51.6 1.83 46.5 1.60 40.6
3.00 76.2 1.98 50.3 1.80 45.7 1.57 39.9
3.50 88.9 1.92 48.8 1.75 44.5 1.53 38.9
4.00 101.6 1.87 47.5 1.70 43.2 1.50 38.1
4.50 114.3 1.81 46.0 1.64 41.7 1.46 37.1
5.00 127.0 1.76 44.7 1.59 40.4 1.43 36.3
5.50 139.7 1.71 43.4 1.52 38.6 1.40 35.6
6.00 152.4 1.65 41.9 1.46 37.1
6.50 165.1 1.60 40.6 1.40 35.6
7.00 177.8 1.55 39.4
7.50 190.5 1.49 37.8
Minimum Chord V
Dim D
Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5
Root Root 1.64 41.7 1.50 38.1 1.26 32.0
0.50 12.7 1.60 40.6 1.48 37.6 1.25 31.8
1.00 25.4 1.54 39.1 1.42 36.1 1.21 30.7
1.50 38.1 1.48 37.6 1.37 34.8 1.17 29.7
2.00 50.8 1.44 36.6 1.34 34.0 1.15 29.2
2.50 63.5 1.42 36.1 1.31 33.3 1.12 28.4
3.00 76.2 1.39 35.3 1.29 32.8 1.09 27.7
3.50 88.9 1.36 34.5 1.27 32.3 1.06 26.9
18 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Table 2. HPC IGV and Stage 1–5 Vanes Minimum Chord Values (Continued)
Minimum Chord V
Dim D
IGV Stage 1 Stage 2
4.00 101.6 1.32 33.5 1.24 31.5
4.50 114.3 1.29 32.8
9
10. HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Variable Stator Vanes Dimensional Inspection.
NOTE
Dimensional inspections should follow all required repairs.
A. Dimensionally inspect IGV and stage 1-5 vane chord (Dimension V) as follows:
(1) Measure vane Chord V at Dimensions D listed in table 2. See figure 9.
(2) Check measured Chord V with table 2 limits. Replace vanes as required.
B. Dimensionally inspect vane length (Dimension L) of stage 3-5 vanes per table 3, and
figure 10.
10
11. HPC Stage 6-13 Stator Vanes Visual Inspection.
Visually inspect stage 6-13 vanes per table 4, and figure 11.
11
Change 5 19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 9. IGV and Stages 1 Through 5 Vanes Inspection Areas
20 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Table 3. Stage 3–5 Vane Length Dimension L Inspection
Stage Minimum Vane Length Corrective Action

3 5.027 in. (127.69 mm) Replace vane
NOTE
The lengths tabulated represent the shortest vanes which should occur
as a result of assembly processing (minimum radius case and maxi-
mum grind).
Change 5 21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Table 4. HPC Stages 6-13 Vanes Visual Inspection

NOTE
Airfoil defects within defined limits resulting in protrusion on the

opposing surface are acceptable. Defects superimposed at same
airfoil location but on opposing sides are not acceptable if sum of
two defects exceeds defined limits.
1. All Areas for (figure 11):
a. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace vane*
2. Area A for (figure 11):
a. Nicks, pits, 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Blend per paragraph 13
and scratches deep deep
b. Dents 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
deep. None allowed in
fillets
3. Area B (Leading and Trailing Edges) for (figure 11):

a. Nicks, pits, 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) Any amount if repair Blend per paragraph 13
and scratches deep does not exceed min and 14
Chord V (table 5)
b. Dents 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) Any amount if repair Blend per paragraph 13
deep does not exceed min and 14
Chord V (table 5)
c. Erosion Min root Chord V and Any amount if repair Blend per paragraph 13
min thicknesses, mea- does not exceed min and 14
sured 0.030 inch Chord V (table 5)
(0.76 mm) from lead-
ing/trailing edge are
0.012 inch (0.030 mm)
in area from root to
midspan and
0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
in area from midspan
to tip
22 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Table 4. HPC Stages 6-13 Vanes Visual Inspection (Continued)

4. Area G (Squealer Tips) for (figure 11):
a. Cracks, nicks, Not serviceable 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) Blend per paragraph 13
and dents deep and 15
b. Burrs and high Not serviceable Any amount Remove high metal
metal
c. Tip corner Not serviceable Max blend radius (see Blend per paragraph 13
damage figure 11) must remove and 15
all defective material.
Rework may extend
into areas B and G
5. Areas E, H, and J (Vane Base) for (figure 11):
a. Dovetail 10 percent of parent - Replace vane
coating missing metal exposed
b. Dovetail Not to parent metal - Replace vane
coating wear
c. Dovetail parent Not serviceable - Replace vane
metal wear
d. Nicks and 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) Blend per paragraph 13
scratches other deep. None allowed in deep
than dovetail fillets. Remove high
surfaces metal
e. Wear from 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) Remove high metal per
retaining key deep deep paragraph 13
f. Platform end Any amount, not into Not repairable Replace vane
fretting airfoil root radius fillet
Change 5 23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 11. Stages 6 Through 13 Vanes Inspection Areas
24 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Table 5. HPC IGV and Stage 1–5 Vanes Minimum Chord Values
Minimum Chord V
Dim D
Root Root 1.34 34.0 1.23 31.2 1.26 32.0
0.50 12.7 1.32 33.5 1.22 31.0 1.24 31.5
1.00 25.4 1.28 32.5 1.16 29.5 1.22 31.0
1.50 38.1 1.24 31.5 1.11 28.2 1.20 30.5
2.00 50.8 1.20 30.5 1.06 26.9 1.17 29.7
2.50 63.5 1.16 29.5 1.01 25.7 1.14 29.0
3.00 76.2 1.11 28.2
Minimum Chord V
Dim D
Root Root 1.21 30.7 1.11 28.2 1.12 28.4
0.50 12.7 1.20 30.5 1.10 27.9 1.12 28.4
1.00 25.4 1.16 29.5 1.08 27.4 1.08 27.4
1.50 38.1 1.13 28.7 1.04 26.4 1.02 25.9
2.00 50.8 1.10 27.9 0.98 24.9
2.50 63.5
3.00 76.2
Minimum Chord V
Dim D
Stage 12 Stage 13
inches mm inches mm inches mm
Root Root 1.14 29.0 0.86 21.8
0.50 12.7 1.13 28.7 0.86 21.8
1.00 25.4 1.07 27.2 0.86 21.8
1.50 38.1 0.99 25.1 0.86 21.8
2.00 50.8
2.50 63.5
3.00 76.2
Change 5 25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
12. HPC Stage 6-13 Stator Vanes Dimensional Inspection.
NOTE
Dimensional inspections should follow all required repairs.
A. Dimensionally inspect stage 6-13 vane chord (Dimension V) as follows:
(1) Measure vane Chord V at Dimension D listed in table 5. See figure 11.
(2) Check measured Chord V with table 5 limits. Replace vanes as required.
B. Inspect stage 6-13 vane length (Dimension L) per table 6 and figure 12.
Table 6. Stage 3–5 Vane Length Dimension L Inspection
Stage Minimum Vane Length Corrective Action

NOTE
The lengths tabulated represent the shortest vanes which should occur
as a result of assembly processing (minimum radius case and maxi-
mum grind).
12
13. Parts Repair - Vanes - General.
A. Use smooth file when repair blending compressor vanes not over 8 inches (200 mm) long, or
emery cloth to remove nicks and dents when removal of considerable material is necessary.
File or blend in longitudinal direction (parallel with airfoil length). Power tools may be used
for initial heavy removal of material such as excessive tip curl. Final blend and polish
0.020–0.030 inch (0.51–0.76 mm) must be accomplished by hand.
26 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 12. Stages 6–13 Vanes Length Dimension L
CAUTION
All blend repair and polishing shall be done in direction parallel

with the vane leading or trailing edges. Do not use power tools for
final polish or finish blending.
B. Use medium stone on any areas which have been blended with file or emery cloth, and on
areas containing small nicks and dents.
C. Use fine emery cloth and/or fine abrasive stone to polish blended area until finish looks and
feels like original.
D. Blend leading edges to as near original configuration as possible. Blend trailing edges to
remove all sharp edges (figure 13).
13
14. Parts Repair - Vanes - Leading and Trailing Edge Blending.
A. Blend leading and trailing edges to within maximum repairable limits of figure 9. Contour
blend edges per figure 13.
Change 5 27

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 13. Compressor Vane Blending
28 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
B. When blending out cracks, blend away enough material to remove defect and continue to
blend an additional 0.015 inch (0.38 mm).
CAUTION
When power blending out cracks, blend away enough material to

remove defect and continue to blend an additional 0.015 inch
(0.38 mm).
C. Power tools may be used to shorten time required to remove metal but hand bench last
0.005 inch (0.13 mm).
D. After blending, spot-fluorescent-penetrant-inspect per Volume 1, Chapter 11. No cracks

allowed.
15. Parts Repair - Vanes - Tip Blending.
A. Blend to within limits of figure 9.
B. Blends may be 0.100 inch (2.54 mm) maximum depth on 20 percent of vanes per stage.
16. HPC Stator Case Inspection.
A. Inspect HPC stator case per table 7.

Table 7. HPC Stator Case Inspection
Maximum Maximum
Serviceable Repairable
Inspect Limit Limit Repair Method
1. High Boss Field Repair Stages 3-5 VSV Bushing Mounting Holes for:
a. Damage to Loss of first Any amount Repair per
threads full thread paragraph 17
17. HPC Stator Case - Repair of VSV Bushing Mounting Hole Threads.
A. This procedure provides instructions to field repair stages 3-5 VSV bushing mounting hole
threads in the HPC stator case by drilling two new holes 90º from the original holes and tap-
ping new threads. Refer to figure 14. Dimensional information for this repair is given in
figure 15.
16
15
14
B. Locally manufacture drilling jig for stages that have damaged VSV bushing mounting holes.
Refer to figure 16.
Change 5 29

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 14. Stages 3-5 VSV Bushing Mounting Holes
30 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 15. Case Rework Dimensional Information
Change 5 31

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 16. Locally Manufactured Drilling Jig (Sheet 1 of 6)
32 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Change 5 33

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
34 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Change 5 35

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
36 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Change 5 37

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
C. Locally manufacture drilling jig depth gage. Refer to figure 17.
D. Locally manufacture bushing rework tool. Refer to figure 18.
E. Install locally manufactured drilling jig onto damaged VSV bushing mounting holes as fol-
lows. Refer to figure 19.
(1) If case is off engine, place drilling jig in VSV hole. Tighten bolt to secure tool to VSV
hole. Tighten bolt to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) If case is assembled, install drilling jig using vane stem and a nut.
Refer to figure 19, sheet 2.
(3) Ensure drilling jig is correctly attached and seated against case wall and guiding holes
are in correct position.
(4) Using drilling jig base and locally manufactured depth gage, adjust drill depth to ensure
depth of drilled hole in HPC case does not exceed limit of 0.370 inch (9.39 mm).
Refer to figure 17, sheet 3.
CAUTION
Assure drill stop is secure and depth is set on the drill or damage to
case may occur.
F. Drill two new holes located on the opposite position to old damaged holes. Refer to
figure 15. Ensure you use the transfer punch to facilitate drilling.
G. Deburr machined holes. Refer to Chapter 11, Hand Blending.
H. Tap threads inside new drilled holes. Refer to requirements of figure 15. Use thread tapping
fluid.
I. Deburr machined threads. Refer to Chapter 11, Hand Blending.
J. Do a swab etch of all repaired areas. Refer to Chapter 11, Swab Etching Procedures.
K. Do a spot fluorescent penetrant inspection of compressor stator case. Refer to Chapter 11,
Spot Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection.
(1) All indications less than 0.03 in. (0.76 mm) are permitted.
(2) Indications less than 0.06 in. (1.5 mm), not interpreted as linear indications, are
permitted.
19
18
17
38 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 17. Drilling Jig Depth Gage (Sheet 1 of 3)
Change 5 39

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
40 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Change 5 41

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 18. Bushing Rework Tool (Sheet 1 of 6)
42 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Change 5 43

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
44 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Change 5 45

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
46 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Change 5 47

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 19. Drilling Jig Installation (Sheet 1 of 2)
48 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 19. Drilling Jig Installation (Sheet 2 of 2)
Change 5 49

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
(3) The above defects are permitted if they are not closer than 0.5 in. (12.7 mm).
L. Select correct bushing. Rework bushing by drilling two holes 90° from existing two mounting
holes. Use bushing rework tool. Refer to figure 18.
M. Deburr machined holes. Refer to Chapter 11, Hand Blending.
N. Reidentify reworked bushing to 2083M62. Refer to Chapter 11, Marking of Parts.
O. Install bushing on repaired VSV holes. Use standard compressor case bolts to attach
replacement bushings to VSV mounting holes. Refer to figure 20.
18. HPC Stator Vanes Installation.
A. Install stages IGV-2 stator vanes as follows:
(1) Install bushing (6, figure 4) into vane (8) counterbore on stator case (12) outer diameter.
Press bushing evenly to avoid snagging or cracking. Locally fabricate installation tool
per figure 21 and use to install bushings, if required.
CAUTION
Ensure all stages IGV-2 stator vanes have the letter H marked at top
of vane stem. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
(2) Install washer (7, figure 4) onto vane (8). Install vane into stator case (12). Washer shall
protrude into case bore when vane is installed.
(3) Install spacer (5) and lever arm (3) onto vane (8). Ensure spacer and lever arm slide over
vane tangs.
(4) Install alignment sleeve (2) and locknut (1) onto vane (8). Ensure alignment sleeve seats
between vane tangs.
CAUTION
Do not use lever arm to hold vane when torquing locknut, or lever
will be damaged.
21
20
(5) Using vane holding tool from VSV tool set, 2C6018, and torque wrench, tighten locknut
(1) to 65-75 lb in. (7.3-8.5 N·m). A minimum of two threads shall show beyond nut if
parts are seated properly.
50 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 20. SPAD Bushing Installation
Change 5 51

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 21. VSV Bushing Installation Tool
(6) Measure stages IGV-2 vane rotational torque as follows:
(a) Manually rotate vane (8) several times to ensure assembly is seated.
CAUTION
Failure to meet proper vane rotational torque may cause binding and
result in bent lever arm.
(b) Check that vane (8) rotational torque is between 2-10 lb in. (0.2-1.1 N·m). Replace
spacer (5), as required, to obtain proper rotational torque. See figure 22.
NOTE
A thinner spacer will reduce rotational torque. A thicker spacer will

increase rotational torque.
(c) Small changes to vane (8, figure 4) rotational torque may be accomplished by lap-
ping spacer face, using circular motion to remove material. Final surface finish shall
match original finish.
(d) Record final rotational torque of each vane (8). Torque value will be required for
checking total actuation load for half-ring segments.
22
52 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 22. Variable Vane Travel Limits
(7) Ensure actuation travel limits of replacement vanes as follows:
(a) Check each replacement vane for freedom of travel through limits shown in
figure 23. If vane binds, check for interference adjacent to casing bore.
23
(b) Vane areas adjacent to casing bore may be blended to obtain clearance at travel
limits. See figure 24. Remove only enough material to eliminate interference. Do
not use power tools. Gap in reworked area shall not exceed 0.005 inch (0.13 mm).
Original finish required. No undercutting allowed.
24
(8) Ensure stages IGV-2 vanes are correctly seated using 0.004-inch (0.10 mm) feeler stock
between bushing and spacer. See figure 25. Parts are not seated correctly if feeler stock
can be inserted between bushing and spacer.
25
Change 5 53

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 23. Variable Vane Travel Limits
B. Install stages IGV-2 vane shrouds as follows:
WARNING

(1) Using isopropyl alcohol, clean old silicone rubber adhesive from shroud retaining bolts
and nuts.
(2) Install bushings onto vane inner trunnions. See figure 26.
26
(3) Position forward and aft shroud segments onto bushings.
NOTE
Shroud retaining bolts are body-bound. Do not allow bolts to turn dur-
ing installation.
(4) Install shroud retaining bolts. On stage IGV, boltheads face aft. On stages 1 and 2,
boltheads face forward.
54 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 24. Variable Vane Rework Areas
(5) Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(6) Ensure actuation travel limits of replacement vanes as follows:
figure 23. If vane binds, check for interference adjacent to shroud.
(b) Vane areas adjacent to shroud may be blended to obtain clearance at travel limits.
See figure 24. Remove only enough material to eliminate interference. Do not use
power tools. Gap in reworked area shall not exceed 0.005 inch (0.13 mm). Original
finish required. No undercutting allowed.
(7) Check that torque required to rotate vanes assembled into shrouds does not exceed
15 lb in. (1.7 N·m).
Change 5 55

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 25. Variable Stator Vane Seating Check
WARNING

(8) Remove nuts one at a time, and fill nut threads with silicone rubber adhesive. Install nuts
before adhesive dries. Tighten nuts to 60-70 lb in. (6.8-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(9) Use 0.001-inch (0.03 mm) feeler stock to check that shrouds are mated.
(10) Apply silicone rubber adhesive over nuts and exposed bolt threads, to a minimum
thickness of 0.032 inch (0.81 mm).
(11) Allow silicone rubber adhesive to cure for a minimum of 8 hours before engine
operation.
C. Select and grind replacement stages 3-5 stator vanes as follows:
(1) Select replacement vane of equal length to, or slightly longer than, vane being replaced.
If replaced vane length cannot be determined, use length of shorter of two adjacent
vanes.
56 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 26. Stages IGV-2 Vane Shrouds Installation
Change 5 57

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
NOTE
Power blending shall be accomplished so no excessive heat and

thermal stresses are generated. Failure to comply may result in part
damage.
(2) Hand-grind replacement vane to length of original vane +0.000 to -0.005 inch
(+0.00 to -0.13 mm). Maintain proper length and angle across vane tip. Stages 3-5 vanes
have double angles on tip. Power tools may be used to shorten grinding time but last
0.005 inch (0.13 mm) must be hand ground.
D. Install stages 3-5 stator vanes as follows:
(1) Install high-boss case stages 3-5 stator vanes (figure 27) as follows:
27
(a) Visually check for evidence of locking feature on bolts (7, figure 27). Lightly coat
threads and seating surfaces of bolts with thread lubricant.
1 Install self-locking bolts by hand into case. If bolts can be run into case without
stopping, self-locking feature is not adequate. Replace bolt with new bolt.
2 If bolthole condition does not allow any self-locking fastener to engage locking
feature, remove adjacent self-locking bolt and install two non-self-locking bolts
so they may be safety-wired or safety-cabled together.
(b) Install bushing (6) into high-boss case (12) outer bore. Secure with two bolts (7).
Install bolts by hand into case. Maximum installation torque of bolts is not to exceed
40 lb in. (4.5 N·m). Tighten bolts to 85-105 lb in. (9.6-11.9 N·m) of torque. Install
non-self-locking bolts at borescope locations. Safety-wire or safety-cable bolts to
adjacent borescope plug.
CAUTION
Ensure all stages 3-5 stator vanes have the letter V marked at top of
vane stem. Apex of V shall point forward. Failure to comply may
result in part damage.
(c) Install vane (9) into high-boss case (12). Ensure vane has letter V marked on top of
vane stem and that apex of V is pointing forward.
(d) Install spacer (5) and alignment sleeve (4) onto vane (9). Flat on alignment sleeve
faces forward.
58 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 27. High-Boss Case Stages 3-5 Vane Installation
Change 5 59

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
(e) Install jamnut (3) onto vane (9). Using holding tool from holding VSV tool set,
2C6018, and torque wrench, tighten jamnut to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Replace jamnut if run-on torque is more than 20 lb in. (2.3 N·m).
(f) Install lever arm (2) and locknut (1) onto vane (9) by hand. If nut can be run onto
vane without stopping, self-locking feature is not adequate. Replace nut with new
nut.
CAUTION
will be damaged.
(g) Using holding tool from holding VSV tool set, 2C6018, and torque wrench, tighten
locknut to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m).
(2) Measure individual vane (9) rotational torque as follows:
(a) Manually rotate vane (9) several times to ensure assembly is seated.
CAUTION
Failure to meet proper vane rotational torque may cause binding and
result in bent lever arm.
NOTE
A 0.0 lb in. (0.0 N·m) torque limit implies that vane can rotate with a
minimum force applied. However, it is important to ensure that the
vane assembly is not loose after assembly as a result of a spacer that is
too thin. Vane assembly should be tight and should not rattle or dem-
onstrate any looseness.
(b) Ensure vane (9) rotational torque on high-boss case (12) is within 0-10 lb in.
(0.0-1.1 N·m).
(c) On high-boss case (12) installation, obtain vane (9) rotational torque as follows:
1 If rotational torque is below limits, replace spacer (5).
2 If rotational torque is above limits, spacer (5) thickness may be reduced by lap-
ping spacer face, using figure eight motion to remove material. Final surface
finish shall match original.
(d) Record final rotational torque of each vane (9). Torque value will be required for
checking total actuation load for half-ring segments.
60 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
(3) Ensure actuation travel limits of replacement vanes (9) as follows:
figure 23. If vane binds, check for interference adjacent to casing bore.
(b) Vane areas adjacent to casing bore may be blended to obtain clearance at travel
limits. See figure 24. Remove only enough material to eliminate interference. Do
not use power tools. Gap in reworked area shall not exceed 0.005 inch (0.13 mm).
Original finish is required. No undercutting is allowed.
E. Connect lever arms (2, figure 27) to actuation rings (11) as follows:
(1) Loosen locknuts (1) enough to allow lever arm (2) pins to be inserted into actuation ring
sleeves (10).
(2) Insert lever arm (2) pins into actuation ring sleeves (10).
CAUTION
will be damaged.
(3) Hold stages IGV-2 vane with holding tool from holding VSV tool set, 2C6018, or
VSV holder set, 2C6171, and tighten locknut (1) to 65-75 lb in. (7.3-8.5 N·m) of torque.
Use torque wrench, 2C6965P01.
(4) Hold stages 3-5 vane with holding tool from holding VSV tool set, 2C6018, or
VSV holder set, 2C6171, and tighten locknut (1) on high-boss case (12) to 50-70 lb in.
F. Check actuation ring segment installation as follows (figure 28):
(1) Inspect stages IGV-4 actuation ring for presence of washers under spacer locknuts.
Install washer, if missing.
(2) Position vanes so lever arms point aft. Measure dim M at each spacer for all stages.
(3) Adjust spacers, as required, to dim M limits. Tighten locknut to 70-90 lb in.
28
Change 5 61

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 28. Actuation Ring Spacer Clearance
G. Perform actuation ring pull check as follows:
NOTE
If HPC stator vanes being installed are for low-boss configuration, use
torque measuring fixture set, 1C9408G01; If high-boss configuration,
use torque measuring set, 1C9408G02.
(1) Using torque measuring fixture set, 1C9408, perform pull check on stages IGV-5 as
follows:
NOTE
To perform pull check using a pull scale rather than fixture set,
1C9408, proceed to step (2).
(a) Remove parts from vane near center of actuation ring as shown in figure 29.
29
(b) Remove sleeve from actuation ring.
(c) Install dummy lever arm, locator plug, and drive adapter from torque measuring
fixture set, 1C9408.
62 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 29. VSV Actuation Ring Pull Check
Change 5 63

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
(d) On stages IGV-2, tighten locator plug to 65-75 lb in. (7.3-8.5 N·m) of torque. On
stages 3-5 high-boss case, tighten locator plug to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of
torque.
(e) Measure torque required to move actuation ring + 5 degrees from axial position as
shown in figure 30. On stages IGV-4, torque required shall not exceed 140 lb in.
(15.8 N·m). On stage 5, torque required shall not exceed 204 lb in. (23.0 N·m).
(2) Perform pull check using a pull scale as follows:
(a) Install slave bolt into actuation ring connecting link bolthole.
(b) Attach pull scale to slave bolt.

30
Figure 30. VSV Actuation Ring Travel
64 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
(c) Measure force required to move actuation ring +5 degrees from axial position as
shown in figure 30. Multiply reading by the following scale factors to obtain torque:
Stage Scale Factor

IGV 2.80 in. (71.1 mm)
1 2.72 in. (69.1 mm)
2 2.53 in. (64.3 mm)
3 2.18 in. (55.4 mm)
4 1.92 in. (48.8 mm)
5 1.20 in. (30.5 mm)
(d) On stages IGV-4, torque required shall not exceed 140 lb in. (15.8 N·m). On stage 5,
torque required shall not exceed 204 lb in. (23.0 N·m).
(3) Actuate each stage by hand, through complete open and closed mechanical travel. Each
stage shall move freely with no catching or binding.
(4) If pull check requirements are not met, perform the following:
(a) Check actuation ring spacer clearance per step F. Adjust as required.
(b) On stages IGV-2, check for vane binding at shrouds and HPC stator casing bore.
Correct, as required, per step A. or step B.
(c) On stages 3-5, check for vane binding at HPC stator casing bore. Correct, as
required, per step D.
(d) Check recorded rotation torques for individual vanes (reference step D.(3)). Replace
or rework spacers on vanes with high torques, as required, per steps A. or D.
H. Select and grind replacement stages 6-13 stator vanes as follows:
(1) Select replacement vane of equal length to, or slightly longer than, vane being replaced.
If replaced vane length cannot be determined, use length of shorter of two adjacent
vanes.
Change 5 65

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
CAUTION
Power blending shall be accomplished so no excessive heat and

thermal stresses are generated. Failure to comply may result in part
damage.
(2) Hand-grind replacement vane to length of original vane +0.000 to -0.005 inch
(+0.00 to -0.13 mm). Maintain proper length and angle across vane tip. Stages 6-13
vanes have double angles on tip. Power tools may be used to shorten grinding time but
last 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) must be hand ground.
I. Install stage 13 stator vanes as follows (figure 31):

31
CAUTION
Use care so end-stop does not fall out of the liner segments and leaf
seals do not become disengaged.
(1) Install one end-stop and seven standard vanes into liner. Install vanes with borescope
cutouts into liner with borescope hole.
(2) With liner end-stop fully seated into liner slot, check position of last vane. Last vane plat-
form edge shall be 0.000-0.015 inch (0.00-0.38 mm) inside end of liner. See figure 31. If
end gap is not within limits, proceed as follows:
(a) Replace standard vanes with wide platform vanes, as required, to meet end gap.
(b) Vane platform edges of replacement vanes may be ground a maximum of 0.006 inch
(0.15 mm) per side to meet end gap. Surface finish and contour to match original
platform.
66 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 31. Stage 13 Vane Installation (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 5 67

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 31. Stage 13 Vane Installation (Sheet 2 of 2)
68 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
(3) Remove seven stator vanes from liner and reinstall with spring retainers as follows
(figure 32):
CAUTION
• Make sure vane spring retainers are installed correctly. Spring
retainers can be installed inverted and may result in parts failure.
• Do not reuse vane spring retainers from a previously operated

engine. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
NOTE
Vane spring retainers are not installed under end vanes or borescope
vanes.
(a) Install new spring retainer behind platform edge of installed stator vane. Ensure
spring retainers are installed per figure 32.
(b) Install next stator vane until further movement requires force. Use nylon drift or
driver from compressor stator vane driver set, 2C6019, to drive against vane plat-
form, not airfoil. Drive stator vane over spring retainer until vane platforms contact.
32
Figure 32. Vane Spring Retainer Installation
Change 5 69

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
(c) Install remaining stator vanes per steps (a) and (b) until all vanes are installed.
(d) Check that end gap is still within limits per step (2).
CAUTION
Do not allow thread lubricant on airfoil or case flowpath. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
(4) Apply thread lubricant to rails of liners. Lubricant is not permitted on vane airfoils or
case flowpath.
(5) Position honeycomb seal in place with seal lip forward and install assembled liner into
stator case slots. Install remaining liners and install honeycomb seals to bridge liner seg-
ments. Install honeycomb seal segments at horizontal flanges. Install liner and honey-
comb seal with borescope holes in bottom case, to align with case borescope hole.
(6) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and washer faces of bolts. Secure liners with bolts.
(7) Check installation of liners as follows:
(a) Measure gap between liners, four places per HPC stator case half. Gap shall not be
less than 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).
(b) Measure gap between end liners and HPC stator case horizontal flange, two places
per case half. Gap shall not be less than 0.020 inch (0.51 mm).
(c) On lower HPC stator case, check that a 0.405-inch (10.29 mm) diameter rod will
pass freely through case, liner, and vane borescope holes.
(d) Loosen bolts and adjust position of liners, as required. Tighten bolts to
290-310 lb in. (32.8-35.0 N·m) of torque.
(8) Install borescope plug into lower HPC stator case as follows:
(a) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and washer face of borescope plug.
(b) Install plug and tighten to 40-60 lb in. (4.5-6.8 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire plug.
70 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
J. Install stages 6-12 stator vanes as follows:
(1) On upper HPC stator case half, install retaining key on 3:00 o'clock horizontal flange
position and secure with two C-clamps (figure 33). On lower HPC stator case half,
install parallel bar on 3:00 o'clock horizontal flange position and secure with two
C-clamps.
33
CAUTION
Do not allow thread lubricant on airfoil or case flowpath. Failure to

comply may result in part damage.
(2) Apply two thin coats of thread lubricant onto vane dovetails. Lubricant is not permitted
on vane airfoils or case flowpath.
(3) Install stages 7 and 11 stator vanes as follows:
CAUTION
If a scrap vane is used as a driver, ensure scrap vane is not installed.
(a) Slide vane into retaining slot until flush against key or parallel bar. Use nylon drift or
compressor stator vane driver set, 2C6019, as required. Tool shall drive against vane
base, not airfoil. See figure 33.
(b) Continue installing vanes until all vanes are installed. Number of vanes per case half
shall comply with table 8.
(4) Install stages 6, 8, 9, 10, and 12 vanes as follows:
CAUTION
If a scrap vane is used as a driver, ensure scrap vane is not installed.
(a) Slide vane into retaining slot until flush against key or parallel bar. Use nylon drift or
compressor stator vane driver set, 2C6019, as required. Tool shall drive against vane
base, not airfoil. See figure 33.
Change 5 71

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 33. Stages 6-12 Stator Vanes Installation (Sheet 1 of 2)
72 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
Figure 33. Stages 6-12 Stator Vanes Installation (Sheet 2 of 2)
Change 5 73

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Table 8. Stages 6-12 Vane Requirements
Vane Quantity Stage Minimum Platform Platform End Gap

(Per Stator Half) Width (Per Stator Half)
6* 32 1.293 in. (32.84 mm) 0.080-0.120 in. (2.03-3.05 mm)
7 36 1.134 in. (28.80 mm) 0.090-0.130 in. (2.29-3.30 mm)
8* 34 1.202 in. (30.53 mm) 0.105-0.145 in. (2.67-3.68 mm)
9* 38 1.073 in. (27.25 mm) 0.105-0.145 in. (2.67-3.68 mm)
10* 40 1.017 in. (25.83 mm) 0.115-0.155 in. (2.92-3.93 mm)
11 40 1.017 in. (25.83 mm) 0.120-0.160 in. (3.05-4.06 mm)
12* 42 0.989 in. (25.12 mm) 0.066-0.106 in. (1.68-2.69 mm)
* Vane platform gap requirements shall be met with vane retainers installed.
CAUTION
• Make sure vane spring retainers are installed correctly. Spring

retainers can be installed inverted and may result in parts failure.
• Do not reuse vane spring retainers from a previously operated

engine. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
(b) Install new spring retainer behind platform edge of installed vane. Ensure spring
retainers are installed per figure 32.
(c) Install next vane into retaining slot until further movement requires force. Use nylon
drift or compressor stator vane driver set, 2C6019, to drive against vane platform,
not airfoil. Drive vane over spring retainer until vane platforms contact figure 33.
(d) Install remaining vanes per steps (b) and (c) until all vanes are installed. Install
vanes with borescope platform cutouts, to align with HPC stator case borescope
holes. Number of vanes per case half shall comply with table 8.
(5) Check installation of borescope vanes as follows:
(a) On stages 6 and 10, check that a 0.405-inch (10.29 mm) diameter rod will pass
freely through HPC stator case and platform of vanes.
(b) On stage 12, check that a 0.320-inch (8.13 mm) diameter rod will pass freely
through HPC stator case and platform of vanes.
74 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2412 00
K. Measure stages 6-12 vane total platform end-gap as follows:
(1) Push all vanes circumferentially toward retaining key or parallel bar, until no gaps exist
between vane platforms.
(2) Measure gap between last vane and case flange. Refer to table 1 for required clearances.
If end gap is not within limits of table 8, proceed as follows:
(a) Adjust quantity of wide and standard platform vanes to obtain required vane plat-
form end gap clearance. Each stage must contain quantity of vanes called out in
table 8.
(b) Vane platform edges of replacement vanes may be ground a maximum of 0.005 inch
(0.13 mm) per side to meet end gap. See table 8 for minimum platform widths. Sur-
face finish and contour to match original platform.
L. Install vane retaining keys onto upper HPC stator case half flanges as follows:
(1) Install key onto each horizontal flange of upper HPC stator case half. Chamfered side of
key goes into case flange mating slot.
(2) Stake each key two places at each end and between adjacent vane slots between stages 6
and 12. See figure 34.
(3) Using sharpening stone, remove any high metal caused by staking.
34
M. Install borescope plugs as follows:
(1) Apply anti-seize compound to threads and washer face of borescope plug.
(2) Install plug into borescope port.
(3) Tighten IGV and stages 1 through 6 plugs to 75-85 lb in. (8.5-9.6 N·m) of torque.
(4) Tighten stages 9, 10, 12, and 13 plugs to 40-60 lb in. (4.5-6.8 N·m) of torque. Safety-
wire or safety-cable plug.
Change 5 75

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2412 00
Figure 34. Top Case Vane Retainer Key Installation
76 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
5WP 2413 00
WORK PACKAGE
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (HPC) ROTOR
BLADES REPLACEMENT


1 - 57 ...... 5
58 Blank . . . . . . 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Compressor Rotor Blades Blending............................................................................................ 50

Compressor Rotor Blades Blending of Airfoil for Tip Erosion.................................................. 55
Compressor Rotor Blades Concave and Convex Surfaces Blending .......................................... 55
Compressor Rotor Blades Leading and Trailing Edges Blending .............................................. 55
Compressor Rotor Blades Tip Corner Blending ......................................................................... 56
Compressor Rotor Blades Tips Blending.................................................................................... 57
HPC Rotor Blade Replacement General Requirements.............................................................. 4
HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blades Inspection ........................................................................................ 7
HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blades Installation ....................................................................................... 16
HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blades Removal........................................................................................... 5
HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blades Selection .......................................................................................... 13
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Alphabetical Index (cont)
Subject Page
HPC Rotor Stage 2 Blades Inspection......................................................................................... 19

HPC Rotor Stage 2 Blades Installation ....................................................................................... 28
HPC Rotor Stage 2 Blades Removal ........................................................................................... 19
HPC Rotor Stage 2 Blades Selection........................................................................................... 26
HPC Rotor Stages 3-14 Blades Inspection .................................................................................. 35
HPC Rotor Stages 3-14 Blades Installation................................................................................. 42
HPC Rotor Stages 3-14 Blades Removal .................................................................................... 31
HPC Rotor Stages 3-14 Blades Selection.................................................................................... 42
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for inspecting, removing and installing high pressure
compressor (HPC) rotor blades.
Title Number
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Upper and Lower Stator WP 2411 00
Case Replacement
High Pressure Compressor Upper/Lower Stator Case Open- SWP 2411 01
ing/Closing
High Pressure Compressor Rotor Stages 1-5 Blade Clearance LM6000-IND-143
Increase (PA, PB, PC, and PD Models)

Prebend Tool, HPC Stage 1 Blade Retainer 2C6599G01
Seating Tool, HPC Stage 1 Blade Retainer 2C6600G03
Stop Install Tool, HPC Stage 2 Blade 2C6967G06
Retainer
Stop Removal Tool, HPC Stage 2 Blade 2C6968G02
Retainer
Removal Tool, HPC Stage 1 Blade Retainer 2C14198G02
Software Program, Blade Plot -
Fixture, Holding Local Mfg.
Wrench MSE-28
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
(Black or Blue)
Penetrating Oil GE Spec
A50TF54, CL-A
(RTV 106)
Tape Local Purchase
None required.
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
6. HPC Rotor Blade Replacement General Requirements.
NOTE
An exception to this procedure is compliance with Service Bulletin

LM6000-IND-143, HPCR Stages 1-5 Blade Clearance Increase.
A. Up to 25 percent of all HPC rotor blades or three complete stages of blades can be replaced
using these procedures. If more blades require replacement, core engine replacement is
required.
NOTE
Position mark all blades and balance weights as removed. Any weights
removed must be position marked during removal.
(1) Return balance weights and unchanged blades, removed during replacement of blades, to
original locations.
(2) Damaged blades are replaced with blades of same pan weight where possible, within
following limits: for stages 1 through 3, within 0.5 grams; for stages 4 and 5, within
0.3 grams and for stages 6 through 16, within 0.2 grams. Replace heavily damaged
blades (with pieces missing) with blades of same part number.
B. Ten blades in rotor may be reworked to maximum repairable limits, if worked blades are dis-
tributed uniformly around circumference to reduce imbalance effects.
C. Blend up to 100 percent of blades locally for erosion at tips, if all blades in those stages are
blended by approximately same amount. It is recommended that equivalent of no more than
50 percent of stages be blended to minimum tip-chord erosion limits.
D. If an entire stage of blades require replacement, contact General Electric Customer Service to
obtain a set of preground blades.
E. Gain access to HPC rotor by removing top stator case per WP 2411 00 or by opening top sta-
tor case per SWP 2411 01.
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
7. HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blades Removal.
NOTE
The No. 1 blade is at the same clock position as the stage 9 dovetail
loading slot.
A. Using marking pen, mark position of blades to be removed and corresponding dovetail slot
on stage 1 disk. If all stage 1 blades are being replaced, position mark No. 1 and No. 5 dove-
tail slots on stage 1 disk.
B. Using retainer removal tool, 2C14198, remove stage 1 blade retainers of individual blade to
be removed and adjacent blades as follows (figure 1):
1
(1) Install seal protector over seals forward and aft of blades. Locally manufacture protectors
from plastic or rubber.
(2) Install aft clamp ring onto aft side of stage 1 disk.
(3) Install forward clamp ring onto forward side of stage 1 disk. Secure forward clamp ring
to aft clamp ring using handknobs.
CAUTION
Use care when straightening blade retainers to avoid scratching
stage 1 disk or damaging seal teeth.
(4) Using wedge-shaped edge of impact tool, bend forward tabs of retainers away from
blades. Straighten tabs using square edge of impact tool.
(5) Remove retainer removal tool from stage 1 disk.
(6) Use nylon bar and mallet to tap on forward tangs of blade retainer and force retainer aft.
Pull blade retainer from aft side of stage 1 disk. Discard blade retainer.
CAUTION
Do not use tools or excessive force to remove blade(s), or blade lead-
ing edge/trailing edge damage may occur.
C. Push blade to be removed and adjacent blades radially forward, to ease removal of first blade.
Do not remove adjacent blades from disk.
D. Push blade to be removed radially inward to disengage midspan shroud. Slide blade forward
out of stage 1 disk.
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Figure 1. Stage 1 Blade Removal
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
E. Pan weigh removed blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on blades.
8. HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blades Inspection.
CAUTION
All stage 1 through 6 blades shall be kept together as engine sets;

there are different rotor grind methods used on HPC rotors, result-
ing in different blade lengths for stage 1 through 6 blades.
A. There are different grind methods used on HPC rotors, resulting in different blade lengths for
stage 1 through 6 blades. Keep all stage 1 through 6 blades together as engine sets.
B. Visually inspect rotor stage 1 blades per table 1 and figures 2 and 3.
C. On gas turbines operating with SPRINTTM system, replace stage 1 blades after 16,000 hours
of HPC SPRINTTM operation or as defined in Chapter 12, table 12-1 of this manual.
Table 1. HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blades Visual Inspection

1. All Areas (Except Squealer Tips) (figure 2) for:
a. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
2. Area A (Critical) for:
a. Surface defects Any number, 0.003 Any number, 0.005 Blend per
inch (0.08 mm) deep, if inch (0.13 mm) deep, if paragraph 19 and 21
separated by 0.1 inch separated by 0.1 inch
(3 mm) (3 mm)
3. Area B (Leading and Trailing Edges) for:
a. Dents Any number, 0.02 inch Any number within Blend per
(0.5 mm) deep, sepa- limits of Area B paragraph 19 and 20
rated by 0.4 inch
(10 mm) of unaffected
material
NOTE
Shallow waviness at leading and trailing edges is normal and

should not be interpreted as a dent.
b. Nicks and Not serviceable Any amount within Blend per
scratches limits of Area B paragraph 19 and 20
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Table 1. HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blades Visual Inspection (Continued)

4. Area C (Contours) for:
a. Nicks, dents, Any number, 0.003 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) Blend per
and pits inch (0.08 mm) deep. deep within 0.1 inch paragraph 19 and 21
Defects that are oppo- (3 mm) from edges.
site are permitted pro- Remaining surfaces
viding opposing 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
defects are not caused deep. Any number with
by same impact. A a minimum separation
defect 0.003 inch of 0.1 inch (3 mm) and
(0.08 mm) deep that no defects that are
shows through to oppo- opposite
site surface of the blade
is not serviceable
b. Scratches Any number, 0.003 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) Blend per
inch (0.08 mm) deep deep within 0.1 inch (3 paragraph 19 and 21
mm) of edges. Remain-
der of surfaces 0.010
inch (0.25 mm) deep.
Any number, 0.5 inch
(13 mm) long, with
minimum separation of
0.01 inch (2.5 mm) and
no opposing defects
5. Platforms for:
a. Nicks and Any number, 0.005 Any number, 0.010 Blend per
scratches inch (0.13 mm) deep, inch (0.25 mm) deep, paragraph 19
any length any length, with 0.1
inch (3 mm) separation
b. Missing pieces Not serviceable Any amount Replace blade
6. Airfoil for:
a. Bent 0.100 inch (2.54 mm) Not repairable Replace blade
from original contour
along length of airfoil
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00

b. Erosion Any amount, if tip Any amount, if tip Blend per
chord, measured 0.080 chord, measured 0.080 paragraph 19 and 22.
inch (2.03 mm) from inch (2.03 mm) from On gas turbines operat-
tip, is not less than 2.36 tip, is not less than 2.36 ing with SPRINTTM
inch (59.9 mm) and inch (59.9 mm) and
thickness, measured thickness, measured system, replace stage 1
0.030 inch (0.76 mm) 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) blades after 16,000
from trailing edge, is from trailing edge, is hours of HPC
not less than 0.010 inch not less than 0.010 inch SPRINTTM operation
(0.25 mm) (0.25 mm) or as defined in Chap-
ter 12, table 12-1 of
this manual
7. Area B (Tip Corners) for:
a. Out of contour Not serviceable Maximum blend radius Blend per
caused by soft must remove all defec- paragraph 19 and 23
body damage tive material. Rework
can extend into areas B
and C, 0.040 inch (1.02
mm) out of contour
b. Bent or Not serviceable Any amount, if tip Blend per
damaged tip chord is not less than paragraph 19 and 23
corners, tip 2.36 inch (59.9 mm)
curl, metal and thickness measured
missing from 0.030 inch (0.76 mm)
leading or from trailing edge, is
trailing edge tip not less than 0.010 inch
corner (0.25 mm)
8. Squealer Tip for:
a. Cracks, nicks, Not serviceable Any amount, 0.030 Blend per
and dents inch (0.76 mm) deep paragraph 19 and 24,
no steps allowed
b. Heat discolora- Any color or amount Not repairable Replace blade
tion due to rub within 0.06 inch (1.5
mm) of blade tip
c. Burrs and high Not serviceable Any amount Remove burrs and high
metal due to metal per
rub paragraph 19 and 24
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00

d. Tip notches, Any amount. -- --
uniform, No action required
circular notches
in tip (usually
in 2-4 blades
per stage)
9. Dovetails and Tangs for:
a. Missing coating 5 percent of parent Not repairable Replace blade
metal exposed
b. Worn coating Any amount not to Not repairable Replace blade
parent metal
c. Dovetail parent Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
metal wear
d. Tang parent Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
metal wear
10. Midspan Shroud Interlock Surface Carboloy Wear Pad for (figure 3):
a. Chipped pad 10 percent of pad may Not repairable Replace blade
be missing
b. Cracked pad Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
c. Pad wear, Any amount, 0.010 Not repairable Replace blade
smooth or inch (0.25 mm) pad
stepped thickness remaining
d. Missing pad Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
e. Wear into Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
midspan shroud
parent material
11. Midspan Shroud for:
a. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade(s)
b. Missing Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade(s)
material
3
2
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
Figure 2. HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blade Inspection Areas
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Figure 3. HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blade Mid Span Carboloy Wear Pad Inspection
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
9. HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blades Selection.
NOTE
If individual blades are being replaced, obtain correct blade length

per step A. If all stage 1 blades are being replaced, proceed to step B.
A. If individual blades are being replaced, obtain correct blade length as follows:
(1) Select replacement blade with length equal to or slightly longer than blade being
replaced. Take measurement from bottom of blade dovetail. If replaced blade length can-
not be determined, use length of shorter of two adjacent blades or 0.005 inch (0.13 mm)
less than longer blade, whichever is longer.
WARNING
Do not breathe the particles from grinding or let the particles

touch you. The particles can cause damage, injury, or irritation to
you. Use personal protection equipment. Use local mechanical
exhaust ventilation or an approved respirator.
CAUTION
Power blending shall be accomplished so no excessive heat and ther-
mal stresses are generated. Failure to comply may result in part dam-
age.
(2) Grind replacement blade to correct length, as required. Power tools may be used to
shorten grinding time but last 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) must be hand worked.
4
NOTE
Replacement blades shall be weighed after tip grinding.

B. Weigh replacement blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on blade. If all stage 1 blades
are being replaced, record weights on blade position map, figure 4.
NOTE
If individual blades are being replaced, select blades per step C. If all
stage 1 blades are being replaced, calculate blade position per step D.
C. If individual blades are being replaced, select replacement blade within 0.5 gram of original
blade. Blades replacing those with portions missing shall weigh within 0.5 gram of the aver-
age of eight adjacent serviceable blades. If replacement blade within 0.5 gram is not avail-
able, use blade replacement guide, figure 5.
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Figure 4. Stages 1-2 Blade Replacement Map
NOTE

5
D. If all stage 1 blades are being replaced, calculate blade position using GE computerized bal-
ance program, 9470M55G01, Bladeopt. Mark blade position on blade map, figure 4.
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
Figure 5. Stages 1-2 Blade Replacement Guide
Change 5 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
10. HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blades Installation.
CAUTION
Do not use tools or excessive force to install blade(s), or blade lead-

ing edge/trailing edge damage may occur.
A. Slide adjacent stage 1 blades part way out of disk. Slide blade to be reinstalled into corre-
sponding dovetail slot from forward side of stage 1 disk and engage midspan shrouds. Slide
all adjacent blades back into position.
B. Lift adjacent blades and reinstalled blade radially outward and install new blade retainers
under blades, from aft side of disk. Ensure blade retainer is seated against aft side of blade.
Retainer may be pulled from forward end for proper seating. Do not hammer on aft end of
retainer.
NOTE
If all stage 1 blades are being replaced, proceed to step D.
C. If individual blades are being replaced, measure blade-tip-to-lower-stator-case clearance as

follows:
(1) Pull replacement blade and adjacent blades radially outward. Shake blades to ensure
blades are at most outward position.
(2) Measure clearance between adjacent blade tips close to replacement blade and edge of
lower case. Make same measurement for replacement blade. Ensure replacement blade-
tip-to-case measurement is the same or greater (more clearance) than adjacent non-
removed blades.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for each replacement blade.
D. Measure clearance between midspan shrouds as follows (figure 6):
NOTE
Round wooden toothpicks may be used as shims.

(1) Tap four wooden shims between each stage 1 blade retainer and disk. Two shims under
forward end of blade retainer and two shims under aft end.
(2) Ensure all blades are seated fully aft, with tangs against disk.
6
16 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
Figure 6. Midspan Shroud Gap Check
(3) Shine light through gap or use 0.001-inch (0.03 mm) shim to check for clearance
between midspan shrouds. Do not measure as cumulative gap. No clearance is permitted.
Replace stage 1 blade, as required, to eliminate clearance between midspan shrouds.
(4) Remove wooden shims.
E. Using plastic bar, figure 7, hold blade retainer forward and prebend forward tabs using pre-
bend tool, 2C6599. Ensure tool is seated onto retainer tab prior to bending.
F. Position seating tool, 2C6600, onto stage 1 blade retainer tabs. Center forward foot of tool
radially between two retainers. Fit aft foot of tool over tabs of both retainers. Ensure leg of
seating tool marked FWD is on forward side of disk.
7
WARNING

and fittings.
G. Apply 5,000 psi (34,473.7 kPa) hydraulic pressure to seating tool to seat blade retainer tabs.
Push aft leg of seating tool forward while applying hydraulic pressure so retainer is correctly
seated while bending. Release hydraulic pressure and remove seating tool. Remove seal
protectors.
Change 5 17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Figure 7. Stage 1 Blade Retainer Installation
H. Inspect installation of stage 1 blade as follows:

(1) Using feeler stock, measure clearance between blade retainer and disk. Measure clear-
ance on both forward and aft side of disk. Total combined clearance shall not exceed
0.025 inch (0.64 mm). Replace blade retainer if requirement is not met.
(2) After retainer is seated, check for axial movement of blade by hand. If blade movement
is detected, measure with dial indicator placed against blade platform face. Movement
shall not exceed 0.025 inch (0.64 mm). Replace blade retainer if requirement is not met.
(3) Inspect retainer for cracks using light, inspection mirror, and 10X magnifying glass. Pay
particular attention to areas of bend radii. No cracks allowed.
18 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
11. HPC Rotor Stage 2 Blades Removal.
NOTE
The No. 1 blade is at the same clock position as the stage 9 dovetail
loading slot.
A. Using marking pen, mark position of blades to be removed and corresponding dovetail slot
on stage 2 disk. If all stage 2 blades are being replaced, position mark No. 1 and No. 5 dove-
tail slots on stage 2 disk.
B. Using retainer stop removal tool, 2C6968, remove stage 2 blade and retainer as follows
(figure 8):
8
(1) Position clamp rings between stages 1 and 2 disks. Turn three jackscrews to retain clamp
rings against disks and stage 2 blade retainers.
(2) Install anvil assembly aft of stage 2 blade so that lower anvil is under one leg of retainer
tab and upper anvil is placed on top of retainer stop.
(3) Tap down on upper anvil with plastic mallet until retainer stop is straightened.
(4) Remove all components of retainer stop removal tool, 2C6968.
(5) Using pliers, pull retainer stop from side of blade slot. See figure 9. Discard retainer
stop.
9
(6) Slide retainer to center of dovetail slot. Remove retainer and blade. If retainer is not dam-
aged, retain for installation.
C. Pan weigh removed blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on blades.
12. HPC Rotor Stage 2 Blades Inspection.
CAUTION
A. There are different grind methods used on HPC rotors, resulting in different blade lengths for
stage 1 through 6 blades. Keep all stage 1 through 6 blades together as engine sets.
B. Visually inspect stage 2 rotor blades per table 2, and figures 10 and 11.
Change 5 19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Figure 8. Stage 2 Blade Retainer Stop Removal
20 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
Figure 9. Stage 2 Blade Installation
Change 5 21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Table 2. HPC Rotor Stage 2 Blades Visual Inspection

1. All Areas (Except Squealer Tips) (figure 10) for:
a. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
2. Area A (Critical) for:
a. Surface defects Any number, Any number, Blend per
0.003 inch (0.08 mm) 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) paragraph 19 and 21
deep, if separated by deep, if separated by
0.1 inch (3 mm) 0.1 inch (3 mm)
3. Area B (Leading and Trailing Edges) for:
NOTE
Shallow waviness at leading and trailing edges is normal and

should not be interpreted as a dent.
a. Dents Any number, 0.02 inch Any number within Blend per
(0.5 mm) deep, sepa- limits of Area B paragraph 19 and 20
rated by 0.4 inch
material
scratches limits of Area B paragraph 19 and 20
4. Area C (Contour) for:
a. Nicks, dents, Any number, 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) Blend per
and pits 0.003 inch (0.08 mm) deep within 0.1 inch paragraph 19 and 21
deep. Defects that are (3 mm) from edges.
opposite are permitted Remaining surfaces
providing opposing 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
defects are not caused deep. Any number with
by same impact. Defect minimum separation of
0.003 inch (0.08 mm) 0.1 inch (3 mm) and no
deep that shows defects that are oppo-
through to opposite site
surface of blade is not
serviceable
22 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00

b. Scratches Any number, 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) Blend per
0.003 inch (0.08 mm) deep within 0.1 inch paragraph 19 and 21
deep (3 mm) of edges.
Remainder of surfaces
0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
deep. Any number,
0.5 inch (13 mm) long,
with minimum separa-
tion of 0.01 inch
(2.5 mm) and no
opposing defects
5. Platforms for:
a. Nicks and Any number, Any number, Blend per
scratches 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) paragraph 19
deep, any length deep, any length, with
0.1 inch (3 mm)
separation
b. Missing pieces Not serviceable Any amount Replace blade
6. Tip Corners for:
a. Bent or Not serviceable Any amount if tip Blend per
damaged tip chord, measured paragraph 19 and 23
corners, tip 0.080 inch (2.03 mm)
curl, metal from tip, is not less
missing from than 2.36 inch
leading or (59.9 mm), and trail-
trailing edge tip ing edge thickness is
corner not less than 0.010 inch
(0.25 mm)
7. Squealer Tip for:
a. Cracks, nicks, Not serviceable Any amount, Blend per
and dents 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) paragraph 19 and 24,
deep no steps allowed
b. Heat discolora- Any color or amount Not repairable Replace blade
tion due to rub within 0.06 inch
(1.5 mm) of blade tip
c. Burrs and high Not serviceable Any amount Remove burrs and high
rub paragraph 19 and 24
Change 5 23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00

d. Tip notches, Any amount. No -- --
uniform, action required
circular notches
in tip (usually
in 2-4 blades
per stage)
8. Dovetails and Tangs for:
a. Missing coating 5 percent of parent Not repairable Replace blade
metal exposed
b. Worn coating Any amount not to Not repairable Replace blade
parent metal
c. Dovetail parent Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
metal wear
d. Tang parent Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
metal wear
9. Blade Airfoil Tip (figure 11) for:
a. Erosion Any amount, if tip Not repairable Replace blade
chord, measured
0.080 inch (2.03 mm)
from the tip, is not less
than 2.36 inches
(59.9 mm), and thick-
ness, measured 0.030
inch (0.76 mm) from
trailing edge, is not less
than 0.010 inch
(0.25 mm). On gas tur-
bines operating with
SPRINTTM system,
record chord length for
each stage 2 blade on
blade inspection record
(table 2A). Blade No. 1
is at same clock posi-
tion as stage 9 dovetail
loading slot. Count
remaining blades
clockwise, ALF
24 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
Table 2A. Stages 2-4 HPC Rotor Blade Inspection Record

Engine Serial Number __________ Package Hours __________
Date __________ SPRINTTM Operating Hours __________
Last Inspection Date __________ TSPRHP __________ TSPRLP __________
Position Number Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4
Minimum Chord
Measured 0.080 in.
(2.03 mm) down
from Blade Tip 2.36 in. (59.9 mm) 1.59 in. (40.4 mm) 1.44 in. (36.6 mm)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27 N/A
28 N/A
29 N/A
30 N/A
31 N/A
32 N/A
33 N/A
34 N/A
35 N/A
36 N/A
37 N/A
38 N/A
39 N/A
40 N/A
41 N/A
42 N/A
43 N/A N/A
44 N/A N/A
45 N/A N/A
10
Change 5 25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Figure 10. HPC Rotor Stage 2 Blade Inspection Areas
13. HPC Rotor Stage 2 Blades Selection.
NOTE
If individual blades are being replaced, obtain correct blade length

per step A. If all stage 2 blades are being replaced, proceed to step B.
A. If individual blades are being replaced, obtain correct blade length as follows:
(1) Select replacement blade with length equal to or slightly longer than blade being
less than longer blade, whichever is longer.
26 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
11
Figure 11. HPC Rotor Stage 2 Blade Airfoil Tip Erosion
WARNING
Do not breathe the particles from grinding or let the particles

touch you. The particles can cause damage, injury, or irritation to
you. Use personal protection equipment. Use local mechanical
exhaust ventilation or an approved respirator.
CAUTION
Power blending shall be accomplished so no excessive heat and ther-

mal stresses are generated. Failure to comply may result in part
damage.
(2) Grind replacement blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on blade. Power tools may
be used to shorten grinding time but last 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) must be hand worked.
See figure 4.
Change 5 27

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
NOTE
Replacement blades shall be weighed after tip grinding.
B. Pan weigh replacement blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on blade. If all stage 2
blades are being replaced, record weights on blade position map. See figure 4.
NOTE
If individual blades are being replaced, select blades per step C. If all
stage 2 blades are being replaced, calculate blade position per step D.
C. If individual blades are being replaced, select replacement blade within 0.5 gram of original
blade. Blades replacing those with portions missing shall weigh within 0.5 gram of average
of eight adjacent serviceable blades. If replacement blade within 0.5 gram is not available,
use blade replacement guide. See figure 5.
NOTE

D. If all stage 2 blades are being replaced, calculate blade position using GE computerized bal-
ance program, 9470M55G01. Mark blade position on blade position map. See figure 4.
14. HPC Rotor Stage 2 Blades Installation.
WARNING

A. Clean stage 2 disk dovetail slots, blade retainers, and blade dovetails with isopropyl alcohol.
Allow to air dry for 15 minutes, minimum.
B. Install retainer into dovetail slot, centered, with shoulders toward disk ID and hooks facing
left, aft looking forward. See figure 9.
C. Install blade from forward side over retainer, and slide retainer to left, aft looking forward
(ALF). If blade cannot be installed by hand pressure, remove retainer and replace with thin-
ner retainer.
28 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
CAUTION
The aft end of the retainer stop shall extend beyond the aft end of the
retainer.
D. Install retainer stop, from forward side, on right side of retainer, ALF, with shoulder toward
disk ID. Ensure shoulder of retainer stop seats against forward side of disk. If necessary, tap
with nylon drift and nylon mallet to seat.
NOTE
If all stage 2 blades are being replaced, proceed to step F.
E. If individual blades are being replaced, measure blade-tip-to-lower-stator-case clearance as

follows:
(1) Pull replacement blade and adjacent blades radially outward. Shake blades to ensure
blades are at most outward position.
(2) Measure clearance between adjacent blade tips close to replacement blade and edge of
lower case. Make same measurement for replacement blade. Ensure replacement blade-
tip-to-case measurement is the same or greater (more clearance) than adjacent non-
removed blades.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for each replacement blade.
F. Secure stage 2 blade with retainer stop installation tool, 2C6967, as follows (figure 12):
12
(1) With tool stop separated from anvil, install tool so lever arm is under aft end of retainer
stop and anvil holds retainer stop forward face against disk. Install tool stop to anvil.
CAUTION
Ensure lever arm does not slip off retainer stop during bending oper-
ation. Damage to engine parts could result.
(2) Use hand pressure to securely hold lever arm under retainer stop and pull lever arm han-
dle forward to bend retainer stop outward 30 degrees, minimum.
(3) Remove retainer stop installation tool, 2C6967.
Change 5 29

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Figure 12. Stage Blade Retainer Stop Installation
30 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
G. Inspect installation of stage 2 blade as follows:
(1) After retainer is seated, check for axial movement of blade by hand. If blade movement
is detected, measure with dial indicator placed against blade platform face. Movement
shall not exceed 0.020 inch (0.51 mm). Replace blade retainer if this requirement is not
met.
(2) Inspect retainer for cracks using light, inspection mirror, and 10X magnifying glass. Pay
particular attention to areas of bend radii. No cracks allowed.
15. HPC Rotor Stages 3-14 Blades Removal.
A. Using marking pen, number all blades in affected stages, starting with first blade clockwise,
ALF, from dovetail loading slot.
B. Remove blades from stage requiring blade replacement as follows:
(1) Prepare stages 3-5 and 10-14 locking lugs for removal as follows (figure 13):
13
CAUTION
Do not use unauthorized penetrating oils, or corrosion and prema-

ture failure may result.
(a) Loosen setscrews until threads bottom on locking lugs located on both sides of load-
ing slot. Use wrench, MSE-28, and penetrating oil.
(b) Push locking lugs radially inward to bottom of dovetail slot. Locking lugs will be
sufficiently below surface of retaining slot to permit circumferential movement.
(2) Prepare stages 6-9 locking lugs for removal as follows (figure 14):
14
(a) Loosen setscrews until threads bottom, on locking lugs located on both sides of
loading slot and on locking lug located 180 degrees opposite loading slot. Use
wrench, MSE-28, and penetrating oil.
(b) Push three locking lugs radially inward to bottom of dovetail slot. Locking lugs will
be sufficiently below surface of retaining slot to permit circumferential movement.
Change 5 31

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Figure 13. Stages 3-5 and 10-14 Blade Installation
32 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
Figure 14. Stages 6-9 Blade Installation
Change 5 33

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
CAUTION
Locking lug access hole, located 180 degrees from loading slot, shall
be taped to prevent locking lug reseating while moving blades, or
part damage may result.
(c) Cover access hole of locking lug, located 180 degrees from loading slot, with tape to
prevent possible reseating of lug into locking slot when blades are moved.
CAUTION
• Do not use unauthorized penetrating oils, or corrosion and pre-

mature failure may result.
• Impact tools should not be used to move blades, because of

potential damage to blades and spool.
NOTE
Penetrating oil may be used on blade dovetails to aid removal of

blades.
(d) Rotate entire stage of blades circumferentially (in either direction) approximately
one-half width of blade platform, until locking blade is in line with loading slot.
Blades may be moved by lightly tapping on blade airfoil base with plastic drift. Use
care not to distort or damage airfoil.
(e) Remove blade by pulling straight out of loading slot.
(f) Slide locking lug to loading slot and remove.
(g) Remove adjacent locking blade and locking lug per steps (d) and (e).
CAUTION
Failure to identify balance weight positions may result in rotor
imbalance.
(h) Continue moving blades up to loading slot and removing. If installed, remove seal
plugs from between stages 3-5 blades. Discard seal plugs.
(i) Using marking pen, mark balance weights by position, so weights can be installed at
same position when replacement blades are installed.
34 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
C. In stages 6-14, check and remove wire seals, if required, as follows (figures 13 and 14):
(1) Measure gap between ends of wire seal. Maximum serviceable gap between wire seal
ends is 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). Check one gap per stage on stages 6-10 and three gaps per
stage on stages 11-14.
(2) Remove and discard wire seal if gap is greater than 1.00 inch (25.4 mm).
16. HPC Rotor Stages 3-14 Blades Inspection.
CAUTION

A. Different grind methods used on HPC rotors, result in different blade lengths for stage 1
through 6 blades. Keep all stage 1 through 6 blades together as engine sets.
B. Visually inspect stage 3–14 rotor blades per table 3 and figures 15 through 18.
Table 3. HPC Rotor Stage 3-14 Blades Visual Inspection

1. Area A (Concave and Convex Surfaces of Root Airfoil Panel) (figure 15) for:
a. Surface defects Any number, Any number, Blend per
0.003 inch (0.08 mm) 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) paragraph 19 and 21
deep, if separated by deep, if separated by
0.1 inch (3 mm). No 1.0 inch (3 mm)
transverse nicks or
scratches permitted
b. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
c. Cracks or sepa- Not serviceable Not repairable Replace all blades in
ration at root to stage containing defec-
platform tive blade
2. Area B (Leading and Trailing Edges of Airfoil Panel) for:
a. Dents Any number, Any amount within Blend per
0.020 inch (0.51 mm) limits of figure 16 paragraph 19 and 20
deep with minimum
root radius of
0.020 inch (0.51 mm),
separated by 0.4 inch
material
scratches limits of figure 16 paragraph 19 and 20
Change 5 35

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Table 3. HPC Rotor Stage 3-14 Blades Visual Inspection (Continued)

c. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
3. Area C (Concave and Convex Surfaces of Airfoil Panel) for:
a. Nicks, dents, Any number, 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) Blend per
and pits 0.003 inch (0.08 mm) deep if less than paragraph 19 and 21
deep. Defects that are 0.1 inch (3 mm) from
opposite are permitted edges. Other surfaces
as long as defects are may be 0.010 inch
not caused by same hit. (0.25 mm) deep. Any
Defect 0.003 inch number with a mini-
(0.08 mm) deep that mum separation of
shows through to oppo- 0.1 inch (3 mm) and no
site surface of blade is defects that are
not serviceable opposite
b. Scratches Any number, 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) Blend per
0.003 inch (0.08 mm) deep if within 0.1 inch paragraph 19 and 21
deep (3 mm) of edges.
Remainder of surfaces
0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
deep. Any number with
0.1 inch (3 mm)
c. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
4. Tips for:
a. Nicks, dents, Not serviceable Any number, Blend per
and cracks 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) paragraph 19 and 24
deep in stages 3-9,
0.020 inch (0.51 mm)
deep in stages 10-14
Any number if damage
does not extend below
squealer tip; 0.09 inch
(2.3 mm) from tip for
blade without squealer
tip
36 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00

b. Pits Any number, Any number if remain- Blend per
0.003 inch (0.08 mm) ing material is paragraph 19 and 24
deep, 0.005 inch 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
(0.13 mm) in diameter,
thick after blending
Any number if damage
(2.5 mm) does not extend below
squealer tip; 0.09 inch
(2.3 mm) from tip for
blade without squealer
tip
c. Tip clanging on Not serviceable Minimum tip thick- Blend per
convex side ness of 0.010 inch paragraph 19 and 24
only (see (0.03 mm) after
figure 16) removal of defect
d. Erosion (see Any amount if tip Any amount if tip Blend per
figure 17) Chord Y, measured Chord Y, measured paragraph 19 and 22
0.080 inch (2.03 mm) 0.080 inch (2.03 mm)
from tip, is within fig- from tip, is within fig-
ure 17 limits and thick- ure 17 limits and thick-
ness, measured ness, measured
0.030 inch (0.76 mm) 0.030 inch (0.76 mm)
from trailing edge, is from trailing edge, is
0.010 inch (0.25 mm) 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
or greater. On gas tur- or greater
bines operating with
SPRINTTM system,
record chord length for
each stage 3 and 4
blade on blade inspec-
tion record (table 2.A).
Blade No. 1 is first
blade clockwise, ALF,
from dovetail loading
slot. Count remaining
blades clockwise, ALF
Change 5 37

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00

e. Bent or Not serviceable Any amount if tip Blend per
damaged tip Chord Y is within fig- paragraph 19 and 23
corners, tip ure 17 limits and thick-
curl, metal ness, measured 0.030
missing from inch (0.76 mm) from
trailing edge tip trailing edge, is
corner 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
or greater
f. Heat discolora- Any color or amount Not repairable Replace blade
tion due to rub within 0.06 inch
(1.5 mm) of blade tip
g. Burrs and high Not serviceable Any amount Remove burrs and high
rub paragraph 19
h. Tip notches, Any amount. No -- --
uniform, action required
circular notches
in tip (usually
in 2-4 blades
per stage)
5. Entire Airfoil for:
a. Bent (see Note) 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) Not repairable Replace blade
out of contour over
entire length of airfoil
NOTE
Measure blade bending by placing a straight edge spanwise (plat-

form to blade tip on concave side of blade airfoil) and measuring
distance between blade tip and straight edge (figure 18). If blade
has squealer tip, take measurement near squealer tip, but not at
squealer tip.
6. Platform Edges for:
a. Nicks and Not serviceable Any number, Blend per
scratches 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) paragraph 19
deep, 0.10 inch
(2.5 mm) length
38 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00

b. Fretting and Any amount if wear Not repairable Replace blade
wear does not extend into
airfoil root radius
c. Bent areas Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
7. Platform for:
a. Wear or 0.003 inch (0.08 mm) Not repairable Replace blade
damage on top deep, 0.050 inch
or bottom (1.27 mm) long or
diameter
b. Seal wire wear, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Not repairable Replace blade
stages 6-9 deep
(figure 15)
c. Seal wire wear, 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) Not repairable Replace blade
stages 10-14 deep
(figure 15)
8. Dovetails for:
a. Fretting, Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
galling, or wear
of parent metal
b. Cracks or Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
separation
c. Missing coating 5 percent of parent Not repairable Replace blade
(stage 3-9 metal exposed
blades only)
d. Worn coating Any amount not to Not repairable Replace blade
(stages 3-9 parent metal
only)
9. Dovetails Fillets for:
a. Damage Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
18
17
16
15
Change 5 39

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Figure 15. HPC Rotor Stage 3-14 Blade Inspection Areas
Figure 16. HPC Rotor Stage 3-7 Blade Airfoil Tip Clang - Area D
40 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
Figure 17. HPC Rotor Stage 3-14 Blade Airfoil Tip Erosion
Figure 18. HPC Rotor Stage 3-14 Blades Bending Inspection
Change 5 41

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
17. HPC Rotor Stages 3-14 Blades Selection.
NOTE
If individual blades are being replaced, select blades per step A. If an

entire stage of blades is being replaced, calculate blade position per
step B.
A. If individual blades require replacement, select replacement blades as follows:
(1) Select replacement blades with length equal to or slightly longer than blade being
less than the longer blade, whichever is longer.
CAUTION
Blade part numbers shall be checked before installation. New blade
must have same part number as old blade or comparable number per
Illustrated Parts Breakdown (IPB), GEK 105062.
(2) Select replacement blades of similar platform width distribution of removed blades.
Check that replacement blades have correct part number per IPB, GEK 105062.
B. If entire stage of blades requires replacement, determine blade position as follows:
(1) Using marking pen, number all replacement blades, starting with two of four locking
blades and ending with last two locking blades.
(2) Pan weigh replacement blades and record weight on blade position map. See figure 19.
19
NOTE

(3) Determine blade position using GE computerized balance program, 9740M55G01.

Record blade position on blade position map.
18. HPC Rotor Stages 3-14 Blades Installation.
A. If stages 6-10 wire seals have been removed, install as follows (figure 20):
20
(1) Cut wire seals to completely encircle applicable seal groove forward and aft of dovetail
slot.
42 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
Figure 19. Stages 3-14 Blade Replacement Position Map
Change 5 43

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Figure 20. Stages 6-14 Blade Wire Seal Installation
44 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
(2) Install wire seals into grooves forward and aft of dovetail slot. Position wire seals so seal
end gaps are minimum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) away from dovetail loading slot.
(3) Trim ends of wire seals so end gap is within limits of table 4. Remove burrs and sharp
edges so ends are smooth and blunt. Apply petrolatum, as required, to hold wire seals in
place.
(4) Install two blades into dovetail loading slot and move blades around rotor to seat wire
seals. Position blade approximately 1.00 inch (25.4 mm) from ends of wire seals and
ensure end gap is within limits of table 4.
(5) Remove two blades from dovetail slot and ensure wire seals are seated in grooves.
B. If stages 11-14 wire seals have been removed, install as follows (figure 20):
(1) Cut each wire seal into three sections, each 23.00-26.00 inches (584.2-660.4 mm) long.
(2) Install wire seal segments into seal groove forward and aft of dovetail slot. Position two
wire seal segments so end gap between two segments is minimum of 2.00 inches (50.8
mm) away from dovetail loading slot. Position remaining wire seal segment 180 degrees
from blade loading slot.
(3) Trim ends of wire seal segments so each end gap is within limits of table 4. Remove
burrs and sharp edges so ends are smooth and blunt. Apply petrolatum, as required, to
hold seals in place.
(4) Install six blades into dovetail loading slot and move the blades all the way around rotor
to seat wire seals. Position blade approximately 1.00 inch (25.4 mm) from end of each
wire seal and ensure end gaps are within limits of table 4.
(5) Remove six blades from dovetail slot and ensure wire seals are seated in grooves.
Table 4. Stages 6-14 Wire Seal End Gap Limits
Stage Number End Gap Limit Number of Gaps

0.100-0.150 inch
6-9 1
(2.54-3.81 mm)
0.050-0.100 inch
10 1
(1.27-2.54 mm)
0.020-0.040 inch
11-14 3
(0.51-1.02 mm)
Change 5 45

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
C. Install stages 3-14 blades as follows:
NOTE
There are three locking slots per stage in stages 6-9 and two locking
slots per stage in stages 3-5 and 10-14.
(1) Using marking pen, mark location of locking slots and loading slots on OD of spool or
disk. See figures 13 and 14. Locking slots will not be visible after blades are installed.
WARNING
(2) Clean dovetail slots with isopropyl alcohol to aid in blade installation.
(3) Install locking lug in stages 6-9 as follows:
(a) Install locking lug in locking slot located 180 degrees opposite loading slot. See
figure 14. Slope of locking lug top surface must follow slope of blade platform.
NOTE
The stage number is marked on the base of each locking lug.
(b) Turn setscrew to raise locking lug into the locking slot. Tighten setscrew to 8-9 lb in.
(0.9-1.0 N·m) above running torque using wrench, MSE-28. Running torque must
be 3.5 lb in. (0.4 N·m) or greater. Top of locking lug must be flush with, or below,
top of blade platform after final torque.
CAUTION
• Failure to install balance weights in required locations will result
in rotor imbalance.
• Impact tools should not be used to move blades, because of
potential damage to blades and spool.
• Do not use unauthorized lubricants, or corrosion and premature
failure may result.
(4) In stages 6-9, install locking blade on each side of locking lug with blade platform cutout
facing locking lug. Check blade part number and install blades to fill stage requirements
of table 5. Maintain blades and balance weights in original locations or as indicated by
GE computer blade balance program, Bladeopt.
46 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
Table 5. Stages 3-14 Blade Requirements
Locking Blades
Standard Blades Total Blades
Stage No. Per Stage (with
Per Stage Per Stage
platform cutout)
3 38 4 42
4 41 4 45
5 44 4 48
6 48 6 54
7 50 6 56
8 58 6 64
9 60 6 66
10 62 4 66
11 72 4 76
(5) In stages 3-5 and 10-14, check blade part number and install blades to fill stage require-
ments of table 5. Maintain blades and balance weights in original locations or as indi-
cated by GE computer blade balance program, Bladeopt.
NOTE
Seal plugs are no longer installed between blade dovetails. Seal plugs
have been deleted.
(6) Deleted.
NOTE
The stage number is marked on the base of each locking lug.
(7) After all standard blades (nonlocking) are installed, install one locking blade on each
side of loading slot, with platform cutout facing toward loading slot. Install locking slug
on each side of loading slot. Slope of locking lug top surface must follow slope of blade
platform.
(8) Align locking lugs with locking slots and turn setscrew to raise locking slots. If locking
blade platform overhangs locking slot and prevents locking lug engagement, replace
standard blades (nonlocking blades) with blades having more narrow platforms until
overhang condition is corrected.
Change 5 47

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
(9) Tighten setscrew of locking lugs to 8-9 lb in. (0.9-1.0 N·m) above running torque using
wrench, MSE-28. Running torque must be 3.5 lb in. (0.4 N·m) or greater. Top of locking
lug must be flush with, or below, top of blade platform after final torque.
(10) Measure total accumulated clearance between blade platforms as follows:
(a) In stages 3-5 and 10-14, measure total accumulated platform clearance as shown in
figure 13. Slide one locking blade against locking lug and slide remaining blades
against locking lug on opposite side of loading slot. Accumulated clearance shall be
within limits of table 6.
(b) In stages 6-9, measure total accumulated platform clearance two places on each side
of loading slot as shown in figure 14. Slide one locking blade against the locking lug
and slide remaining blades against locking lug 180 degrees opposite loading slot.
Accumulated clearance shall be within limits of table 6.
(11) Correct accumulated platform clearance, as required, by selectively replacing nonlocking

blades with blades that have wider or narrower platforms. Replacement blades must
weigh within 0.5 gram of removed blade.
(12) Check each blade for overlapping (shingling) of platforms. Replace any blade that exhib-
its a tendency to overlap (shingle). Replacement blades must weigh within 0.5 gram of
removed blade.
Table 6. Accumulated Platform Clearance Limits
Stage Number Minimum Maximum

3-5 0.001 inch (0.03 mm) 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
6 0.005 inch (0.13 mm)* 0.011 inch (0.28 mm)
7 0.015 inch (0.38 mm)* 0.021 inch (0.53 mm)
8 0.030 inch (0.76 mm)* 0.036 inch (0.91 mm)
9 0.045 inch (1.14 mm)* 0.051 inch (1.30 mm)
10-14 0.001 inch (0.03 mm) 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
* Per 180 degrees segments, between locking lugs.
48 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
(13) Install last two locking blades as follows:
NOTE
Stages 3-5 and 10-14 have two locking lugs. Stages 6-9 have three
locking lugs.
(a) In stages 3-5 and 10-14, loosen locking lugs on both sides of loading slot and push
them to bottom of locking slots.
(b) In stages 6-9, loosen two locking lugs on both sides of loading slot and one located
180 degrees opposite loading slot, and push them to bottom of locking slots.
CAUTION
Locking lug access hole, located 180 degrees from loading slot, shall
be taped to prevent locking lug reseating while moving blades, or
part damage may result.
(c) In stages 6-9, place tape over access hole for locking lug 180 degrees from loading
slot, to prevent lug from engaging slot while moving blades.
(d) Install locking blade with blade platform cutout facing a locking lug.
CAUTION
Impact tools should not be used to move blades, because of potential

damage to blades and spool.
(e) Move entire stage of blades circumferentially approximately one-half width of blade
platform and install last locking blade with blade platform cutout facing locking lug.
(f) Move entire stage of blades circumferentially in opposite direction until locking lugs
are aligned with locking slots.
(14) Tighten setscrew of locking lugs to raise lugs into locking slots. Tighten setscrew to 8-
9 lb in. (0.9-1.0 N·m) above running torque using wrench, MSE-28. Running torque
must be 3.5 lb in. (0.4 N·m) or greater. Top of locking lug must be flush with, or below,
top of blade platform after final torque.
(15) Verify that locking blades between locking lugs can move freely and independently of
each other. If locking blades cannot be installed or if they are clamped together by lugs,
switch position of locking blades and lugs in order to find a sequence of blades and lugs
which allows free movement of locking blades between lugs. Replacement blades must
weigh within 0.5 gram of removed blade.
Change 5 49

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
NOTE
There are three locking lugs in stages 6-9 and two locking lugs in
stages 3-5 and 10-14.
(16) Ensure all blade locking lugs are installed and tight.
19. Compressor Rotor Blades Blending.
See figures 21 through 23.
WARNING
An accumulation of titanium dust shall be treated as a fire hazard.
CAUTION
• Titanium parts shall not be blend repaired with tools such as

grinding wheels, files, stones, or emery cloths that have been
used to repair other types of metal. Stages 1 through 5 blades are
titanium.
• Do not use silver or cadmium tools on titanium parts. When cad-

mium- or silver-plated tools are used on titanium parts, particles
of cadmium or silver may become embedded in the titanium. At
temperatures above 500°F (316°C), the metals can cause embrit-
tlement, resulting in overstessed areas and possible cracking.
Chrome-plated, nickel-plated and unplated tools may be used on
titanium parts.
NOTE
A Boroblend process is available to repair HPC blades without remov-

ing the top stator case. This process is performed through the bore-
scope ports. This service can be obtained by contacting your local
APS field service office.
A. Use smooth file, not over 8.0 inches (203 mm) long, or emery cloth to remove nicks and dents
when removal of considerable material is necessary. File or blend in longitudinal direction
(parallel with airfoil length). Power tools may be used for initial heavy removal of material
such as excessive tip curl. Final blend and polish 0.020-0.030 inch (0.51-0.76 mm) must be
accomplished by hand.
21
50 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
Figure 21. Compressor Rotor Blade Reference Areas (Sheet 1 of 2)
CAUTION

with the blade leading or trailing edges. Do not use power tools for
B. Use medium stone on any areas which have been blended with file or emery cloth, and on
areas containing small nicks and dents.
C. Use fine emery cloth and/or fine abrasive stone to polish blended area until finish looks and
feels like original.
D. Blend leading edges to as near original configuration as possible. Blend trailing edges to
remove all sharp edges. See figure 22.
23
22
Change 5 51

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Figure 21. Compressor Rotor Blade Reference Areas (Sheet 2 of 2)
52 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
Figure 22. Compressor Blade Blending
Change 5 53

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
Figure 23. Compressor Rotor Blade Repair Limits
54 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
20. Compressor Rotor Blades Leading and Trailing Edges Blending.
NOTE
On stages 2 through 14 rotor blades, if both leading and trailing edges

are blended, the maximum material removed at the tip shall not exceed
the amount shown in figure 21, sheet 2.
A. Blend leading and trailing edges to within maximum repairable limits defined in figure 21.
Contour blended edges per figure 22.
B. When blending out cracks blend away enough material to remove the effect and continue to
blend an additional 0.015 inch (0.38 mm).
CAUTION

with the blade leading or trailing edges. Do not use power tools for
C. Power tools may be used to shorten time required to remove metal but hand bench last
0.005 inch (0.13 mm).
D. After blending, spot-fluorescent-penetrant-inspect per Chapter 11. No cracks allowed.
21. Compressor Rotor Blades Concave and Convex Surfaces Blending.
NOTE
Width of blend shall not exceed 50 percent of the blade chord

(figure 21).
A. Blend in longitudinal direction, parallel with length of blade.
B. After blending, spot-fluorescent-penetrant-inspect per Chapter 11. No cracks allowed.
22. Compressor Rotor Blades Blending of Airfoil for Tip Erosion.
A. Blend stage 2 blades as follows:
(1) Blend airfoils to within limits in figure 23. Restrict blending to leading and trailing
edges outboard of area 3.2 inches (81 mm) above top of blade platform. Blend leading
edges only if required to meet section contour.
Change 5 55

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2413 00
(2) After blending, minimum trailing edge thickness of 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) is required.
Minimum tip chord remaining is 2.33 inches (59.2 mm).
(3) After blending, spot-fluorescent-penetrant-inspect per Chapter 11. No cracks allowed.
B. Blend stage 3 through 14 blades as follows:
edges outboard of area 3.2 inches (81 mm) above top of blade platform. Blend leading
Minimum tip chord of Y inches is required.
C. Blend stage 1 blades as follows:
edges outboard of area 2.50 inches (63.5 mm) above top of blade platform. Blend leading
Minimum tip chord remaining is 2.439 inches (61.95 mm).
(3) No blending is allowed 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) above or below midspan shroud or on mid-
span shroud within 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) of blade airfoil.
23. Compressor Rotor Blades Tip Corner Blending.
A. Whenever possible, remove damage on leading and/or trailing edge corners by blending to
smooth radius. Remove as little metal as possible. Do not exceed limits of figure 23.
B. If both corners are damaged, blend out damage; do not exceed radius of 1/10 blade chord
length for each corner. If only one corner is damaged, blend out damage at leading or trailing
edge corner; do not exceed a radius of 1/10 blade chord length for each corner.
C. Any number of blades may be blended as described above.
56 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2413 00
24. Compressor Rotor Blades Tips Blending.
NOTE
This procedure may have been performed on blades that have been
blended to maximum limits on the leading and/or trailing edges and/or
tip corners.
A. Accept tips bent less than 15 degrees if there are no cracks.
CAUTION
Do not straighten bent tips.
B. Remove tips bent over 15 degrees by blending. Do not exceed limits of figure 22.
C. Repair blend nicks, gouges, dents an3d cracks by removing damaged metal per paragraph 19
and within limits of figure 21. Length of removal will be governed by figure 22.
D. Cracks must be completely removed by blending. Spot-fluorescent-penetrant-inspect crack

repairs after blending per Chapter 11. No cracks or burrs allowed.

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2510 00
3WP 2510 00
WORK PACKAGE
COMBUSTION CHAMBER REPLACEMENT


1 - 14 ...... 3
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Combustion Chamber Installation............................................................................................... 11

Combustion Chamber Removal .................................................................................................. 4
Change 3 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2510 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the combustion
chamber.
B. Remove low pressure turbine (LPT) module per WP 2710 00.
C. Remove ultraviolet flame sensor, flame sensor sight glass, and flame sensor bracket per
WP 1515 00 or SWP 1515 01.
D. Remove forward, mid, and aft heat shields per WP 1915 00.
E. Remove bolts and nuts securing brackets to extension brackets on CRF aft case forward
flange per SWP 1913 02.
F. Remove high pressure turbine (HPT) module per WP 2610 00.
G. Remove stage 1 HPT nozzle per WP 2511 00.
Title Number
Ultraviolet Flame Sensor, L28490, Flame Sensor Sight Glass, WP 1515 00
Ultraviolet Flame Sensor, L44819 Flame Sensor Sight Glass, SWP 1515 01
Igniter Plug Replacement WP 1516 00
Heat Shields Replacement WP 1915 00
Stage 1 High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Nozzle Replacement WP 2511 00
High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Module Replacement WP 2610 00
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module Replacement WP 2710 00

Adapter, Lift - Combustor, Stage 1 or 2 HPT 1C9362G02
Nozzle
Fixture, Installation/Removal - CRF Aft 1C9422G02
Case
Guide, Installation/Removal - Combustion 1C9423G04
Chamber Assembly
Tool Set, Removal - CRF Aft Case 1C9429G01
2 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2510 00
Marking Pen Sharpies T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Penetrating Oil GE Spec
A50TF54, CL-A
None required.
Change 3 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2510 00
6. Combustion Chamber Removal.
A. Remove igniter plugs per WP 1516 00.
B. Remove borescope plugs S6-1 and S6-4 from compressor rear frame (CRF). See figure 1.
1
C. Remove CRF aft case as follows:
(1) Using marking pen, position mark top vertical centerline on CRF aft case forward flange.
(2) Attach an overhead hoist to lift adapter, 1C9362, link.
(3) Attach lift adapter to lift tube on installation/removal fixture, 1C9422, with quick-release
pin. See figure 2. Adjust center of gravity (CG) as required.
2
WARNING

(4) Lift and turn installation/removal fixture, 1C9422, to horizontal.
(5) Attach installation/removal fixture, 1C9422, onto aft flange of CRF aft case and secure
with eight washers and screws. Tighten screws to 70-100 lb in. (7.9-11.3 N·m) of torque.
(6) Remove 139 nuts, 28 extension flange brackets, one sleeve spacer, and 139 bolts that
secure CRF aft case onto CRF aft flange. See figure 3.
3
(7) Install removal tool set, 1C9429, segments at six equally spaced locations on CRF aft
case to CRF aft flange as follows (figure 4):
4
(a) Place spacer segment onto forward side of flange (section B-B).
(b) Install puller segment over flange (section A-A) so that lip engages forward edge of
CRF aft case flange and secure onto spacer segment with four screws. Tighten
screws finger-tight.
(c) Install jackscrew into center hole of puller segment and tighten finger-tight.
4 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2510 00
Figure 1. Combustion Chamber and HPT Borescope Ports
Change 3 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2510 00
Figure 2. CRF Aft Case Installation/Removal Fixture, 1C9422
6 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2510 00
Figure 3. CRF Aft Case to CRF Flange
Change 3 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2510 00
Figure 4. CRF Aft Case Removal Tool Set, 1C9429
WARNING
Use thermal gloves when you move or touch hot or cold parts. Hot
or cold parts can cause injury.
(8) Tighten jackscrews evenly, in small increments, to remove CRF aft case. If difficulty is
encountered, heat CRF aft case forward flange using heat gun.
(9) Remove removal tool set, 1C9429, segments.
(10) Carefully remove CRF aft case and store in a safe place.
(11) Remove lift adapter, 1C9362, from installation/removal fixture, 1C9422. Leave installa-
tion/removal fixture attached onto CRF aft case. Leave overhead hoist attached to lift
adapter link (figure 2).
D. Attach lift adapter, 1C9362, onto lift tube on combustion chamber assembly guide, 1C9423,
support ring with quick-release pin. See figure 5. Adjust CG as required.
5
8 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2510 00
Figure 5. Combustion Chamber Assembly Guide, 1C9423
Change 3 9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2510 00
WARNING

E. Lift and turn combustion chamber support ring to horizontal position.
F. Install combustion chamber assembly guide, 1C9423, as follows (figure 5):
(1) Install guide ring onto No. 5 bearing housing flange in CRF and secure to slab-head bolts
with six captive retainer nuts. Tighten retainer nuts finger-tight.
(2) Guide support ring over guide ring, and position support ring onto combustion chamber
inner support.
(3) Secure three plates of support ring onto combustion chamber inner support with six
screws. Tighten screws to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
G. Remove combustion chamber as follows:
WARNING
Penetrating oil is toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin
tact. Use with good ventilation.
(1) Apply penetrating oil to 30 threaded retaining pins that secure combustion chamber in
CRF. Allow penetrating oil to soak for 20 minutes.
(2) Cut safety wire and remove 30 threaded retaining pins.
WARNING
(3) Carefully move combustion chamber aft, out of CRF, guiding combustion chamber sup-
port ring over guide ring. If difficulty is encountered, heat CRF aft flange using heat gun.
H. Remove combustion chamber assembly guide, 1C9423, support ring from combustion
chamber.
I. Remove lift adapter, 1C9362, from combustion chamber support ring. Leave overhead hoist
attached to lift adapter link.
10 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2510 00
7. Combustion Chamber Installation.
A. Install combustion chamber assembly guide, 1C9423, as follows (figure 5):
(1) Install guide ring onto No. 5 bearing housing flange in CRF and secure to slab-head bolts
with six captive retainer nuts. Tighten retainer nuts finger-tight.
(2) Guide support ring over guide ring, and position support ring onto combustion chamber
inner support. Align lift tube with top mark on combustion chamber.
(3) Secure three plates of support ring to combustion chamber inner support with six screws.
Tighten screws to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
B. Attach lift adapter, 1C9362, onto lift tube on support ring of combustion chamber assembly
guide, 1C9423, with quick-release pin. See figure 5. Adjust CG as required.
WARNING

C. Lift and turn combustion chamber to the horizontal position.
D. Inspect interior area of CRF for dirt and foreign material. No dirt or foreign materials are
allowed.
E. Install combustion chamber as follows:
(1) Coat shafts and threads of 30 threaded retaining pins with thread lubricant.
(2) Coat the lead-in area of the combustion chamber dome mounting pin bushings (where
threaded retaining pins engage) with thread lubricant.
(3) Align combustion chamber with CRF. Align top to top. Ensure ultraviolet flame sensor,
borescope, and igniter holes in combustion chamber are aligned with the ultraviolet
flame sensor, borescope, and igniter holes in CRF.
WARNING
(4) Carefully move combustion chamber forward into CRF, guiding combustion chamber
assembly guide, 1C9423, support ring over guide ring. If difficulty is encountered, heat
CRF aft flange using heat gun.
Change 3 11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2510 00
(5) Carefully and evenly tap combustion chamber forward until seated.
(6) Secure combustion chamber onto CRF with 30 threaded retaining pins as follows:
NOTE
Do not turn any pin more than four turns until all pins are installed.
(a) Install pin at 12:00 o'clock position. Turn pin four turns.
(b) Install pin at 6:00 o'clock position. Turn pin four turns.
(c) Install pins at 3:00 and 9:00 o'clock positions. Turn pins four turns.
(d) Install remaining pins using alternating method used for first four.
(e) Seat pins around OD of CRF using alternating method.
(f) Tighten pins to 545-595 lb in. (61.6-67.2 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
F. Remove six screws that secure support ring (figure 5) of combustion chamber assembly
guide, 1C9423, onto combustion chamber inner support.
G. Carefully move support ring aft, out of CRF, guiding over guide ring.
H. Remove lift adapter, 1C9362, from combustion chamber assembly guide, 1C9423. Leave
overhead hoist attached to lift adapter link.
I. Remove guide ring from No. 5 bearing housing flange in CRF.
J. Insert a 0.400-0.407 inch (10.16-10.33 mm) diameter rod through borescope holes in com-
pressor rear frame and into holes in combustion chamber. Holes must align to ensure access
for engine borescope tool. Remove rod.
K. Install CRF aft case as follows:
(2) Attach lift adapter, 1C9362, onto lift tube on installation/removal fixture, 1C9422, with
quick-release pin. See figure 2. Adjust CG as required.
12 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2510 00
WARNING

(3) Lift and turn CRF aft case to horizontal position.
(4) Align position mark made at removal with top vertical centerline of CRF and move CRF
aft case forward until forward flange engages CRF aft flange.
(5) Install three-legged extension flange bracket onto aft side of flange at 12:00 o'clock posi-
tion, straddling bolthole No. 1. See figure 3. Secure bracket onto flange with three bolts,
boltheads aft, and nuts. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
(6) Install 27 five-legged extension flange brackets onto aft side of flange. See figure 3.
Secure brackets onto flange with 135 bolts, boltheads aft, and nuts. Tighten nuts finger-
tight.
(7) Install bolt, bolthead aft, sleeve spacer, and nut into bolthole No. 1. See figure 3. Tighten
nut finger-tight.
WARNING
(8) Using a crisscross pattern, tighten nuts to 570-630 lb in. (64.4-71.2 N·m) of torque. If
flanges do not seat easily, heat CRF aft case forward flange using heat gun.
(9) Remove installation/removal fixture, 1C9422, from CRF aft case.
(10) Remove lift adapter, 1C9362, from installation/removal fixture.
(11) Remove overhead hoist from lift adapter.
L. Install igniter plugs per WP 1516 00.
M. Install borescope plugs as follows (figure 1):
(1) Ensure borescope plug threads are clean.
(2) Coat borescope plug threads and mating surfaces with thread lubricant.
(3) Install borescope plugs into S6-1 and S6-4 ports.
Change 3 13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2510 00
(4) Tighten borescope plugs S6-1 and S6-4 to 140-160 lb in. (15.9-18.0 N·m) of torque and
safety-wire.
N. Install stage 1 HPT nozzle per WP 2511 00.
O. Install HPT module per WP 2610 00.
P. Attach brackets onto extension brackets on CRF aft case forward flange per SWP 1913 02.
Q. Install forward, mid, and aft heat shields per WP 1915 00.
R. Install flame sensor, sight glass, and flame sensor bracket per WP 1515 00 or SWP 1515 01.
S. Install LPT module per WP 2710 00.
14 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2511 00
5WP 2511 00
WORK PACKAGE
STAGE 1 HIGH PRESSURE TURBINE (HPT) NOZZLE
REPLACEMENT


1 - 22 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
High Pressure Rotor Bracket Installation.................................................................................... 13

High Pressure Rotor Bracket Removal ....................................................................................... 13
No. 5R Bearing Air/Oil Seal Installation .................................................................................... 19
No. 5R Bearing Housing and Oil Shield Installation.................................................................. 15
No. 5R Bearing Air/Oil Seal and No. 5R Bearing Housing Removal ........................................ 8
Nut Assembly (Gang Channel) Installation ................................................................................ 22
Nut Assembly (Gang Channel) Removal.................................................................................... 22
Stage 1 HPT Nozzle Installation................................................................................................. 19
Stage 1 HPT Nozzle Removal..................................................................................................... 4
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2511 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the stage 1 high pressure
turbine (HPT) nozzle.
B. Remove the HPT module to gain access per WP 2610 00.
Title Number
NOTE
Accomplishment of this work package requires a 6-inch and 12-inch

parallel bar and a 0-18 inch vernier depth gage.

Tool Set, Jackscrew - Disassemble 1C6804G04
Flanges
Adapter, Lift - Combustor, Stage 1 or 2 1C9362G02
HPT Nozzle
Adapter, Torque 2C14290G01
Fixture, Lift - Stage 1 HPT Nozzle 2C14695G01
Assembly
Slave Nuts (Qty 12, 0.375-24 thread) Local Purchase
Rivet Squeezer Local Purchase
(Black or Blue)
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2511 00
A. Required Material

Ring, Piston 1754M91P01 6
Ring, Piston 1754M91P02 (ALT)
Screw, Machine 9186M93G04 132
Ring, Piston 9693M18P06 (ALT)
B. The following material may be required in the conduct of this work package. GE recom-
mends that the following material be available:

Seal, O-ring (A/O seal) 1375M50P03 1
Seal, O-ring (5R housing) 1375M50P04 1
Nut, Plain Round 9232M78P03 54
Nut Assembly, Self-locking (nozzle support) 9232M90P17 6
Nut Assembly, Self-locking (mini nozzle) 9232M90P18 6
Bolt, Slab-Head 9234M17P05 54
Rivet, Solid AN123631 18
Packing, Preformed (lube nozzle) J221P010 1
Bolt (5R A/O seal) J646P61B 6
Nut (mini nozzle support) J979P06 54
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2511 00
6. Stage 1 HPT Nozzle Removal.
A. Remove aft air seal as follows (figure 1):

1
WARNING
(1) Remove 60 screws that secure aft air seal onto stationary seal support. If necessary, heat
screws using heat gun to facilitate removal.
(2) Remove 72 screws that secure air cover baffles and aft air seal onto stage 1 nozzle sup-
port. If necessary, heat screws using heat gun to facilitate removal. Remove 24 air cover
baffles and aft air seal.
B. Remove stationary seal support as follows (figure 2):

2
(1) Using marking pen, position mark top vertical centerline on stationary seal support outer
flange aft face.
(2) Remove 54 nuts that secure stationary seal support onto nozzle support inner mounting
flange. Use flex or universal joint on socket or torque adapter, 2C14290, to prevent
out-of-position stress on studs.
CAUTION
Uneven removal of stationary seal support may cause binding and
damage to recoup tubes and tube brackets. The following removal
sequence shall be followed to prevent binding and tube damage.
(3) Remove stationary seal support as follows:
(a) Coat threads of jackscrews, 1C6804, with thread lubricant. Install three equally
spaced jackscrews into inner mounting flange of stationary seal support. Run in
jackscrews until they contact compressor rear frame (CRF) inner seal support
flange.
(b) Screw in each jackscrew three turns.
(c) Repeat step (b) until stationary seal support is free of CRF.
(4) Remove six piston rings from recoup tubes. Discard piston rings.
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2511 00
Figure 1. Aft Air Seal
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2511 00
Figure 2. Stationary Seal Support (Sheet 1 of 2)
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2511 00
Figure 2. Stationary Seal Support (Sheet 2 of 2)
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2511 00
C. Remove stage 1 HPT nozzle as follows:

WARNING

(1) Position lift fixture, 2C14695, at aft end of stage 1 HPT nozzle using lift adapter,
1C9362, and an overhead hoist. See figure 3. Secure lift fixture onto stage 1 nozzle sup-
port using eight screws provided with lift fixture. Tighten screws to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9
N·m) of torque. Adjust center of gravity (CG) as required.
3
(2) Remove 30 bolts that secure stage 1 nozzle support onto combustor inner liner aft sup-
port flange. See figure 4.
4
CAUTION
Do not install jackscrews in stage 1 nozzle support mid flange bolt

circle to remove stage 1 HPT nozzle. Failure to comply may cause
distortion of combustor inner liner aft support flange.
(3) Coat threads of jackscrews, 1C6804, with thread lubricant. Install three equally spaced
jackscrews into nozzle support inner mounting flange of stage 1 nozzle support. Tighten
jackscrews evenly, in small increments, to release stage 1 HPT nozzle.
(4) Lift stage 1 HPT nozzle clear of engine.
7. No. 5R Bearing Air/Oil Seal and No. 5R Bearing Housing Removal.
A. Remove No. 5R bearing air/oil seal as follows (figure 5):

5
(1) Remove safety wire and remove 18 bolts that secure No. 5R bearing air/oil seal and
No. 5R bearing housing assembly onto aft sump.
WARNING

(2) Using 0.250-28 thread jackscrews, 1C6804P04, lubricated with lubricating oil, remove
No. 5R bearing air/oil seal from No. 5R bearing housing.
(3) Remove and discard preformed packing from ring groove in forward end of No. 5R bear-
ing air/oil seal.
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2511 00
Figure 3. Stage 1 HPT Nozzle Assembly Lift Fixture, 2C14695
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2511 00
Figure 4. Stage 1 HPT Nozzle
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2511 00
Figure 5. No. 5R Bearing Air/Oil Seal and No. 5R Bearing Housing Removal
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2511 00
B. Remove No. 5R bearing housing as follows:

CAUTION
To preclude handling damage, it is important to remove the lube

manifold prior to removal of the bearing housing from the sump.
(1) Remove safety wire and remove three bolts and two clamps that secure No. 5R bearing
lube manifold onto No. 5R bearing housing.
(2) Remove lube manifold and discard preformed packing.
(3) Remove safety wire and remove seven bolts that secure No. 5R bearing oil shield onto
No. 5R bearing housing. Remove oil shield.
WARNING

CAUTION
Take care during the removal of the No. 5R bearing housing to pre-
vent shifting aft of the aft sump housing and unseating of the sump
joint piston ring. Use the following jackscrew procedure to assure
that the aft sump housing is not disturbed.
(4) Using 0.375-24 thread jackscrews, 1C9150P04, and 0.250-28 thread jackscrews,
1C6804P04, lubricated with lubricating oil, remove No. 5R bearing housing as follows:
(a) Install 0.375-24 thread jackscrews, 1C9150P04, into jackscrew holes in bearing
housing inner flange. Turn screws until they contact aft flange of sump housing, then
tighten each screw three revolutions.
(b) Install 0.250-28 thread jackscrews, 1C6804P04, into jackscrew holes in bearing
housing outer flange. Turn screws until they contact CRF inner flange, then tighten
each screw three revolutions.
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2511 00
NOTE
By tightening the jackscrews in the bearing housing inner flange first,

forward pressure is kept on the aft sump housing.
(c) Continue tightening jackscrews in sequence specified [step (a) then step (b)], tight-
ening jackscrews three revolutions each time, until No. 5 bearing housing is free.
(5) Remove and discard preformed packing from outer diameter of No. 5 bearing housing.
8. High Pressure Rotor Bracket Removal.
A. Remove brackets from CRF as follows (figure 6):

6
CAUTION
Use care in removing bolts and nuts. Do not drop bolts and nuts into
CRF, or CRF damage could result.
(1) Remove 12 slab-head bolts, nuts, and six high pressure rotor (HPR) brackets from CRF
aft inner flange.
(2) Remove remaining 42 slab-head bolts and nuts from CRF aft inner flange.
9. High Pressure Rotor Bracket Installation.
See figure 6.
WARNING

A. Lubricate threads and mate faces of slab-head bolts and nuts with lubricating oil.
B. Install brackets by inserting slab-head bolts through bracket and forward side of flange. Flat
side of bolthead fits against inside diameter of inner casing.
C. Thread nuts onto slab-head bolts and hand-tighten. No torque required.
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2511 00
Figure 6. HPR Bracket Removal/Installation
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2511 00
10. No. 5R Bearing Housing and Oil Shield Installation.
See figure 7.
7
WARNING

A. Apply lubricating oil onto No. 5R bearing housing.
WARNING
B. Using heat gun, heat aft end of CRF assembly aft sump.
C. Coat preformed packing with lubricating oil. Install packing into ring groove of No. 5R bear-
ing housing.
D. Install No. 5R bearing housing into CRF assembly. Align clearance hole in housing with
No. 5R bearing forward lube nozzle in CRF assembly at approximately 10:00 o'clock posi-
tion, aft looking forward.
E. Seat No. 5R bearing housing assembly as follows:
(1) Install six nuts onto equally spaced bolts on outer flange of bearing housing. Run nuts
down until they contact flange face.
(2) Install six bolts, equally spaced, into inner flange of bearing housing. Run bolts down
until they touch flange face.
(3) Turn nuts three turns each, then turn bolts three turns each.
(4) Repeat step (3) until bearing housing assembly is seated. Tighten bolts to 355 lb in.
(40.1 N·m) and nuts to 225 lb in. (25.4 N·m) of torque. Remove nuts and bolts.
Change 5 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2511 00
Figure 7. No. 5R Bearing Housing and Air/Oil Seal Installation
16 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2511 00
CAUTION
• To assure proper assembly, lube manifold shall be installed after
the bearing housing is fully seated in sump.
• Make sure the preformed packing is properly installed to the lube

manifold and that the manifold is all the way in the hole of the
nozzle. Hold the manifold in place while securing with bolts.
F. Install lube manifold as follows (figure 7):
(1) Install two clamps onto lube manifold.
WARNING

(2) Coat preformed packing with lubricating oil. Install preformed packing onto end of lube
manifold.
(3) Insert end of lube manifold and preformed packing into forward No. 5R lube nozzle.
Align lube manifold clamps and mounting pad to three lugs on aft side of bearing hous-
ing. Clamps are attached at two top lugs with flat of clamps aft.
(4) Hold lube manifold into forward No. 5 lube nozzle and secure with three bolts. Check
drop between aft face of housing and aft side of tube. Check drop at clamps and near
bend in tube where it turns forward. Maximum drop between aft face of housing and aft
side of tube is 0.290 inch (7.366 mm).
(5) Tighten three bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
G. Check lube nozzles as follows:
(1) Place petrolatum onto No. 5R bearing rollers, opposite lube nozzle.
(2) Connect dry air supply to oil inlet fitting located on No. 8 strut.
Change 5 17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2511 00
WARNING
Serious injury can occur when applying pneumatic pressure. Eye
and fittings.
(3) Pressurize manifold and check for impingement on bearing rollers. If jet doesn't impinge
on bearing rollers, loosen, adjust, and retighten lube manifold.
WARNING

(4) Check for leakage where lube manifold plugs into forward jet by applying lubricating oil
to fitting. No leaks allowed
(5) Remove pressure and remove air supply.
H. Install No. 5R bearing oil shield as follows (figure 7):
(1) Install No. 5R bearing oil shield onto aft face of No. 5R bearing housing with cutouts
around clamps of lube manifold.
WARNING

prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area
(2) Apply lubricating oil to threads of seven No. 5R bearing oil shield bolts. Secure oil
shield with bolts.
(3) Tighten seven bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
18 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2511 00
11. No. 5R Bearing Air/Oil Seal Installation.

See figure 7.
WARNING

A. Coat preformed packing with lubricating oil. Coat threads of 18 bolts with thread lubricant.
B. Install preformed packing into ring groove at forward end of No. 5R bearing air/oil seal.
C. Install No. 5R bearing air/oil seal over No. 5 bearing housing assembly, aligning top center-
lines. Use drift pin to align holes in seal with holes in bearing housing.
D. Apply lubricating oil to threads of No. 5R bearing air/oil seal bolts and secure air/oil seal
with bolts. Tighten bolts alternately to 340-360 lb in. (38.5-40.6 N·m) of torque and safety-
wire bolts in groups of two.
12. Stage 1 HPT Nozzle Installation.
CAUTION
Ensure stage 1 HPT nozzle part number is correct per IPB, GEK
98494GEK 105062 before installation or damage to engine could
result.
A. Check slab-head bolts for security. See figure 4. Tighten nut to 20-40 lb in. (2.3-4.5 N·m) of
torque if bolt is loose.
B. Install stage 1 HPT nozzle as follows:
(1) Position lift fixture, 2C14695, onto aft end of stage 1 HPT nozzle using lift adapter,
1C9362, and an overhead hoist. See figure 3. Secure lift fixture to stage 1 nozzle support
using eight screws provided with lift fixture. Tighten screws to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m)
of torque. Adjust CG as required.
Change 5 19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2511 00
WARNING
(2) Lift stage 1 HPT nozzle into position on combustor. See figure 4. Align three equally
spaced holes in stage 1 nozzle support with those at top vertical centerline of combustor.
Borescope vane shall be at 4:30 o'clock position.
(3) Seat stage 1 nozzle support onto No. 5 bearing housing using 12 equally spaced slave
nuts. Tighten nuts alternately, and evenly, until all nuts are seated. Tighten nuts to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(4) Apply thread lubricant onto washer faces and threads of 30 bolts that secure stage 1 noz-
zle support onto combustor inner liner aft support flange.
(5) Install 30 bolts that secure stage 1 nozzle support onto combustor inner liner aft support
flange. Tighten bolts to 110-120 lb in. (12.5-13.5 N·m) of torque.
(6) Verify that outer leaf seals (360 degree radius) extend past combustor lip. See figure 8.
(7) Remove 12 slave nuts.
(8) Remove lift fixture.

8
C. Install stationary seal support as follows (figure 2):
(1) Apply generous amount of thread lubricant onto bottom of bolthole counterbores in for-
ward flange of stationary seal support.
WARNING
(2) Apply light coat of lubricating oil onto six new piston rings, P/N 1754M91P01.
(3) Install piston rings on recoup tubes.
20 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2511 00
Figure 8. Outer Leaf Seals Check
WARNING
(4) Heat forward flange of stationary seal support using heat gun.
(5) Install stationary seal support, aligning position mark made at removal with top vertical
centerline of CRF.
(6) Apply thread lubricant onto threads of 54 nuts.
(7) Secure stationary seal support to nozzle support inner mounting flange using 54 nuts.
Use flex or universal joint on socket or torque adapter, 2C14290, to prevent
out-of-position stress on studs. Tighten nuts alternately, and evenly, to seat stationary
seal support. Tighten nuts to 400-450 lb in. (45.2-50.8 N·m) of torque.
D. Install aft air seal as follows (figure 1):
(1) Install aft air seal onto stationary seal support so part number is at 12:00 o'clock position.
Change 5 21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2511 00
(2) Apply thread lubricant onto washer faces and threads of screws that secure aft air seal.
(3) Install 10 equally spaced screws into inner flange of aft air seal. Tighten screws alter-
nately, and evenly, until all are seated.
(4) Install remaining screws into inner flange of aft air seal. Finger-tighten screws.
(5) Install one air cover baffle centered at 12:00 o'clock position onto outer flange of aft air
seal and secure using three screws. Finger-tighten screws.
(6) Install remaining 23 air cover baffles and secure using screws. Finger-tighten screws.
(7) Check run-on torque of all aft air seal retaining screws. If run-on torque is less than
3.5 lb in. (0.39 N·m), replace nut assembly (gang channel) per paragraphs 13 and 14.
(8) Tighten all screws on inner and outer flanges of aft air seal to 70-80 lb in. (8.0-9.0 N·m)
of torque.
13. Nut Assembly (Gang Channel) Removal.
A. Drill out rivets using a 0.0625-inch (1.59 mm) drill.
B. Remove nut assembly (gang channel).
14. Nut Assembly (Gang Channel) Installation.
A. Install new nut assembly (gang channel) aligning nutplates with holes in part flange.
CAUTION
Do not use hammer and block to seat rivets. Part damage may result.
B. Install rivets so manufactured head sits flush in countersunk hole in part flange. Seat rivets
using rivet squeezer to secure nut assembly (gang channel).
C. Inspect rivets for proper installation. No looseness or cracks allowed.
22 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
4WP 2610 00
WORK PACKAGE
HIGH PRESSURE TURBINE (HPT) MODULE
REPLACEMENT


1 - 42 ...... 4
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Module Installation ..................................................................... 22

High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Module Removal......................................................................... 4
Change 4 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the high pressure turbine
(HPT) module.
B. Remove the low pressure turbine (LPT) module per WP 2710 00 to gain access.
C. Disconnect and connect electrical leads and connecting tubes between HPT module and gas
Title Number

Fixture Assy, Lift - HPT Rotor Horizontal 1C9358G02
Holder, Shim - HPT Pressure Tube Adapter 1C9397G01
Stand - HPT Rotor Stage 2 Nozzle - Horiz 1C9417G01
Fixture, Removal 1C9608
Pilot, LP Mid Shaft - Aft 1C9610G01
Torque Adapter, Pressure Tube/Coupling 1C9626G01
Nut-HPT Rotor
Pusher 2C14025P08
Fixture, Seat Check - No. 4B Bearing and 2C14094G06
Seal
Fixture, Seat Check - HPT Rotor 2C14131G02
Stand, Shipping/Storage - HPT Module 2C14193G03
Fixture, Install/Remove - HPT Module 2C14199G09
Assembly
Wrench Set, No. 5R Bearing Inner Race 2C14664G01
Nut
Sleeve, Retaining - No. 4B Bearing 2C14679P01
Stack-up
Puller, Races and Seals - HPT Rotor 2C14688G05
Stage 1
2 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00

Fixture, Remove - HPT Rotor Aft Outer 2C14784G01
Air Seal
Fixture, Pull - HPT Rotor Aft Air Seals 2C14785G01
Torque Multiplier Sweeney Model
8100
8102
8112
(Black or Blue)
Penetrating Oil Fed Spec A50TF54,
Cl-A

Nut, Self-locking 9283M41P04 24
Shim 9219M19P05 1
Change 4 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
6. High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Module Removal.
A. Apply penetrating oil onto threads of nuts and bolts retaining aft air seals. Apply penetrating
oil onto threads of nuts and bolts retaining HPT to compressor rear frame (CRF). Allow pen-
etrating oil to soak for 20 minutes.
B. Remove aft air seals as follows:
NOTE
Matchmark seals prior to removal.
(1) Remove nuts and bolts retaining aft air seals and pressure tube/coupling nut onto stage 2
HPT rotor disk. Discard nuts.
(2) Remove assembled aft air seals from stage 2 HPT rotor disk using pull fixture, 2C14785,
as follows (figure 1):
1
(a) Loosen clamp knobs on pull fixture, 2C14785, and move slide clamps inward.
(b) Connect an overhead hoist and lift sling through pull fixture, 2C14785, holes.
(c) Install pull fixture, 2C14785, over mid shaft so that rest pads are against stage 2
HPT rotor disk. Move slide clamps outwards to engage aft air seal. Hand-tighten
clamp knobs to secure.
(d) Install guide tube.
(e) Take up slack on hoist to support pull fixture, 2C14785.
(f) Tighten jackscrews slowly, and evenly, to remove aft air seals.
(3) Separate aft air seal from aft outer air seal using fixture, 2C14784, as follows (figure 2):
2
(a) Install assembled aft air seals onto baseplate.
(b) Install adapter plate over aft air seal.
(c) Tighten jackscrew to separate aft air seal from aft outer air seal.
4 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
Figure 1. HPT Rotor Aft Air Seals Pull Fixture, 2C14785
Change 4 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
Figure 2. HPT Rotor Aft Outer Air Seal Remove Fixture, 2C14784
C. Install rotor locking feature of removal fixture, 1C9608, as follows (figure 3):
NOTE
Inner support, 1C9608P10; clamp plate, 2C14199P96; clamp plug,

2C14199P97; locknut, 2C14199P98; and shoulder bolt, 2C14199P99,
are maintained as an assembly.
(1) If installed, remove mid shaft pilot, 1C9610.

3
(2) Thread inner support, 1C9608P10, onto aft end of mid shaft until fully seated.
(3) Adjust clamp plug, 2C14199P97, forward so that clamp plate, 2C14199P96, rests against
inner support.
(4) Apply thread lubricant onto threads of center shaft, 1C9608P05.
(5) Install center shaft, 1C9608P05, so that male-threaded end engages threads on inside
diameter of compressor rotor aft shaft. Thread center shaft until seated against end of
compressor rotor aft shaft, then back off one-half turn.
6 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
Figure 3. HPT Rotor Locking Feature from 1C9608
(6) Adjust clamp plug, 2C14199P97, aft so clamp plug is seated firmly against inside shoul-
der of center shaft, 1C9608P05. Lock into position using locknut, 2C14199P98. Tighten
clamp plug to 180 lb in. (20.3 N·m) of torque.
D. Remove pressure tube/coupling nut as follows (figure 4):

4
(1) Install antitorque tube, 1C9626P02, with leg, 1C9626P05, onto HPT rotor aft flange.
Rotate forward ring of tube to misalign lugs and slots. Install quick-release pin,
1C9626P12.
(2) Using clamp, 1C9626P06, and knob, 1C9626P08, secure leg, 1C9626P05, onto stage 2
HPT nozzle support flange. Hand-tighten knob.
(3) Install torque tube, 1C9626P03, into pressure tube/coupling nut. Align torque tube so
splines engage splines on pressure tube/coupling nut.
(4) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8112, so multiplier splines engage splines on
torque tube, 1C9626P03.
Change 4 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
Figure 4. HPT Rotor Pressure Tube/Coupling Nut Torque Adapter, 1C9626
8 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
WARNING
Stand clear of engine when using torque multiplier. Torque in

excess of 20,000 lb ft (27,116 N·m) may be required to break cou-
pling nut loose. If parts should fail, they will do so with explosive
force and could cause serious injury.
NOTE
Pressure tube/coupling nut has right-hand threads.
(5) Actuate torque multiplier to loosen pressure tube/coupling nut.
(6) Remove pressure tube/coupling nut and shim (if installed). Remove torque multiplier
and all components of torque adapter, 1C9626.
E. If same HPT rotor will be installed, matchmark stage 2 HPT disk rear face inner diameter in
line with X mark on aft surface of high pressure compressor (HPC) rotor aft shaft using
marking pen.
F. Measure from seating flange of stage 2 HPT rotor disk aft seal flange to aft surface of HPC
rotor aft shaft using seating check fixture, 2C14131. See figure 5. Record as dimension HSA.
5
Figure 5. Measure Seating Check Dimension HSA
Change 4 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
G. Install HPT module removal fixture, 1C9608, as follows:
CAUTION
Ensure HPT module removal fixture, 1C9608, is used properly. Fail-
ure to comply will cause tool and/or engine damage.
(1) Apply thread lubricant onto threads of bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102.
(2) Assemble lift adapter, 2C14199P53, lift fixture, 2C14199P22, and lifteye, 2C14199P36.
Attach to bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102.
(3) Thread center plate, 2C14199P103, onto extension shaft, 2C14199P104. Thread assem-
bly into center shaft, 1C9608P05. See figure 6.
(4) If not already attached, install frame extension, 1C9608P02, onto frame, 2C14199P123.
(5) Attach horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358, onto frame, 2C14199P123/1C9608P02. Tighten
clamp enough to fully support module but still allow support shaft, 2C14199P64, to
rotate freely.
6
Figure 6. Bearing Adapter Shaft from 2C14199
10 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
NOTE
Antirotation pins, 2C14199P124, are not required for the LM6000 PC

and can be removed for convenience. Use guide pins, 1C9608P09, and
blocks, instead.
(6) Install frame, 2C14199P123/1C9608P02, with support shaft, 2C14199P64, onto HPT
module as follows (figure 7):
7
(a) Position frame, 2C14199P123/1C9608P02, and support shaft, 2C14199P64, onto
HPT module aft end.
(b) Secure support shaft, 2C14199P64, onto stage 2 HPT rotor disk aft rabbet using
12 bolts, 2C14199P43, and nut plate, 2C14199P27. Tighten bolts to 70-110 lb in.
(c) Secure frame, 2C14199P123/1C9608P02, onto stage 2 HPT nozzle support aft
flange using 30 bolts, 2C14199P43, six nut plates, 2C14199P34, and six nut plates,
2C14199P35. Tighten bolts to 70-110 lb in. (7.9-12.4 N·m) of torque.
(7) Matchmark brackets to CRF aft flange using marking pen. Remove nuts, bolts, spacers,
and brackets that secure stage 2 HPT nozzle support forward flange to CRF aft flange.
Do not remove four screws and nuts that secure HPT hanger support.
(8) Antirotation pins, 2C14199P124, fit between the exterior flange brackets.
(9) Rotate retainer nut, 2C14199P70, counterclockwise so slots in retainer nut align with
slots in support shaft, 2C14199P64. See figure 8.
8
(10) Insert expander tube, 1C9608P07, into puller shaft, 1C9608P06, until puller shaft will
slide over center shaft, 1C9608P05. Remove expander tube. Continue sliding puller shaft
until lugs bottom in support shaft, 2C14199P64, slots. Rotate retainer nut, 2C14199P70,
clockwise to lock.
(11) Slide expander tube, 1C9608P07, between center shaft, 1C9608P05, and puller shaft,
1C9608P05, until it seats against compressor rotor aft shaft. If expander tube will not
seat with hand pressure, perform the following (figure 9):
9
(a) Thread tube, 2C14199P17, onto bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102.
(b) Slide pusher, 2C14199P18, over tube and against expander tube, 2C14199P05. Tube
should extend through hole in pusher.
(c) Install washer and nut onto tube. Hold nut and rotate tube until expander tube,
2C14199P05, seats.
Change 4 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
Figure 7. HPT Module Antirotation Tools from 2C14199/1C9608
12 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
Figure 8. HPT Module Puller Tools from 2C14199/1C9608
Change 4 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
Figure 9. Expander Tube Pusher Tools from 2C14199/1C9608
(d) Remove nut, washer, pusher, 2C14199P18, and expander tube, 2C14199P05.
(12) Install spline adapter, 2C14199P69, onto puller shaft, 1C9608P06. See figure 8. Rotate
shaft to align serrations of spline adapter and puller shaft. Secure puller shaft to spline
adapter using six quick-release pins, 2C14199P74.
(13) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8100, onto spline adapter, 2C14199P69,
engaging frame. Secure torque multiplier to frame with two knurled head screws,
2C14199P41.
(14) Install antirotation strap, 2C14199P25, over square shank of shaft. Secure antirotation
strap to frame with four handknobs, 2C14199P23.
14 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
H. Remove HPT module as follows:
WARNING
and fittings.
CAUTION
• The high pressure compressor (HPC) and low pressure compres-

sor (LPC) rotors will rotate during HPT module removal. Ensure
LPC inlet is clear of foreign objects and rotors are free to rotate.
• Do not exceed 900 lb ft (1,220 N·m) of output torque.
NOTE
• The HPT rotor and tooling will rotate counterclockwise and move
aft during removal. The frame and torque multipliers will not
rotate, but will move aft.
• The removal operation may be stopped and started as necessary

without causing bearing damage. Tooling shall remain in position
at all times.
(1) Apply input torque of 80 lb ft (108 N·m) to torque multiplier. Pneumatic torque multi-
plier, Sweeney Model 8102, (in direct drive) may be used in combination with torque
multiplier, Sweeney Model 8100, at a pressure of 90 psi (620.5 kPa) to reduce removal
time.
(2) Continue to apply input torque through torque multipliers until a space of 2.0 inches
(50.8 mm) exists between CRF/HPT flanges or until CRF flange is between scribe lines
on guide pins.
(3) Install spacer foot, 2C14199P65, between CRF and HPT stator support. Secure spacer
foot to foot bracket, 2C14199P66, with quick-release pins, 2C14199P74. See figure 8.
(4) Reverse rotation on torque multipliers a minimum of one full turn to relieve internal ten-
sion on tooling.
(5) Tighten clamp onto horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358.
(6) Remove antirotation strap, 2C14199P25, torque multipliers, and spline adapter,
2C14199P69.
Change 4 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
(7) Remove expander tube, 1C9608P07, as follows (figure 10):
(a) Thread small end of expander tube extractors, 2C14199P19, into tapped holes in aft
end of expander tube, 1C9608P07.
(b) Using washers and nuts, install plate, 2C14199P55, onto extractors, 2C14199P19.
(c) Install and tighten plate, 2C14199P55, against bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102,
until snug.
(d) Thread eyebolt, 2C14199P56, into center hole of plate, 2C14199P55.
(e) Turn eyebolt, 2C14199P56, until bottomed against plate, 2C14199P55.
(f) Unscrew eyebolt, 2C14199P56, from plate, 2C14199P55.
(g) Tighten two nuts until plate, 2C14199P55, is snug against bearing adapter shaft,
2C14199P102.
(h) Thread in eyebolt, 2C14199P56, until bottomed against plate, 2C14199P55.
(i) Repeat steps (d) through (h) until expander tube, 1C9608P07, is removed.
10
Figure 10. Expander Tube Removal Tools from 2C14199
16 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
(j) Remove plate, 2C14199P55, and extractors, 2C14199P19.
(8) Remove puller shaft, 1C9608P06, as follows (figure 11):
(a) Rotate retainer nut, 2C14199P70, counterclockwise to unlock.
(b) Thread extractors, 2C14199P54, into aft end of puller shaft, 1C9608P06.
(c) Using washers and nuts, install plate, 2C14199P55, onto extractors, 2C14199P54.
(d) Install and tighten plate, 2C14199P55, against bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102,
until snug.
(e) Thread eyebolt, 2C14199P56, into center hole of plate, 2C14199P55.
(f) Turn eyebolt, 2C14199P56, until bottomed against plate, 2C14199P55.
(g) Unscrew eyebolt, 2C14199P56, from plate, 2C14199P55.
(h) Tighten two nuts until plate, 2C14199P55, is snug against bearing adapter shaft,
2C14199P102.
(i) Thread in eyebolt, 2C14199P56, until bottomed against plate, 2C14199P55.

11
(j) Repeat steps (e) through (i) until puller shaft, 1C9608P06, is removed.
(k) Remove plate, 2C14199P55, and extractors, 2C14199P19.
WARNING

(9) Remove HPT module by pulling tooling aft.
(10) Remove antirotation pins, 2C14199P124, and screws, 2C14199P125.
(11) Install retaining sleeve, 2C14679P01, onto No. 4B bearing inner race. Ensure retaining
sleeve is firmly installed.
Change 4 17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
Figure 11. Puller Shaft Removal Tools from 2C14199
NOTE
If same HPT rotor will be installed, proceed to step K.
I. Install HPT module into support stand, 1C9417, as follows (figure 12):
12
(1) Lower HPT module into support stand, 1C9417, so frame, 2C14199P123, sits on four
vertical supports.
(2) Secure HPT module into support stand, 1C9417, by positioning four swing clamps
against frame.
CAUTION
The No. 5R bearing is a matched assembly. Ensure matched bearing

components are kept together as sets by serial numbers. Mixing of
serviceable matched bearing components may result in engine
damage.
J. Remove No. 5R bearing inner race as follows:
(1) Pull heat shield from HPT forward shaft using puller, 2C14688.
18 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
Figure 12. HPT Rotor Shaft Seals and Bearing Races Install/Remove Stand, 1C9417
Change 4 19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
(2) Install wrench, 2C14664, onto No. 5R bearing spanner nut. Attach torque multiplier,
Sweeney Model 8100, to wrench.
(3) Activate torque multiplier to remove No. 5R bearing spanner.
(4) Using puller, 2C14688, remove No. 5R bearing inner race.
K. Install HPT module into shipping/storage stand, 2C14193, as follows (figure 13):
13
(1) Attach vertical lift fixture, 1C9608P11, with lifteye, onto frame at 6:00 and 12:00 o’clock
positions. Secure using thumbscrews.
CAUTION
Do not loosen swing clamps unless weight of HPT module is sup-
ported by horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358. Failure to comply may
cause module damage.
(2) Ensure weight of HPT module is supported by horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358. Discon-
nect four swing clamps on support stand, 1C9417.
WARNING

(3) Lift module from support stand.
(4) Connect a second hoist to vertical lift fixture. Turn HPT module so forward end is down.
Remove horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358.
(5) Lower HPT module into shipping/storage stand, 2C14193. Secure case to leveling
screws using washers and nuts. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(6) Install plug in aft bore of stage 2 HPT rotor disk. Secure plug using rod. Safety-wire plug
to rod.
(7) Remove HPT module removal fixture, 2C14199.
20 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
Figure 13. HPT Module Shipping/Storage Stand, 2C14193
Change 4 21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
7. High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Module Installation.
A. Remove retaining sleeve, 2C14679P01, from gas turbine core.
NOTE
All dimensions in this WP shall be measured at eight locations. The

average of these measurements shall determine the dimension.
B. Compute seating dimension HSA as follows:
(1) Measure from aft face of forward HPT rotor shaft inner seating shoulder to aft face of
stage 2 HPT disk aft mounting flange. Record as dimension J. See figure 14. For refer-
ence, dimension J should be 15.783-15.824 inches (400.89-401.93 mm). Remeasure
dimension J if not within range.
(2) Measure from aft face of No. 4B bearing inner race to aft face of compressor rotor aft
shaft using seat check fixture, 2C14094. Record as dimension CCM. See figure 15. If
dimension CCM is not within 8.921-8.948 inches (226.59-227.28 mm), No. 4B bearing
inner race has backed out, remeasure to validate.
14
Figure 14. Dimension J Measurement

15
22 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
Figure 15. Dimension CCM Measurement
CAUTION
When using 6-inch parallel bar on aft face of pressure tube/coupling

nut shoulder, assure parallel bar is not seated on radius.
(3) Measure from forward face of HPT rotor shaft to aft face of pressure tube/coupling nut
sealing shoulder. Record as dimension EHS. See figure 16. For reference, dimension
EHS should be 7.137-7.147 inches (181.28-181.53 mm). Remeasure dimension EHS if
not within range.
16
(4) Compute seating dimension HSA using the following formula:
HSA = EHS + J - CCM
C. Determine if HPT rotor aft seal shim is required as follows:
(1) Measure from forward most point of pressure tube/coupling nut to forward side of pres-
sure tube/coupling nut mounting flange. Record as dimension K. See figure 17.
17
(2) Subtract dimension J from dimension K. If difference is greater than 0.027 inch
(0.69 mm), one shim is required. If difference is less than 0.027 inch (0.69 mm), no shim
is required.
Change 4 23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
Figure 16. Dimension EHS Measurement
D. Install rotor locking feature of removal fixture, 1C9608, as follows (figure 18):
18
NOTE
Inner support, 1C9608P10; clamp plate, 2C14199P96; clamp plug,

2C14199P97; locknut, 2C14199P98; and shoulder bolt, 2C14199P99,
are maintained as an assembly.
(2) Thread inner support, 1C9608P10, onto aft end of mid shaft until fully seated.
(3) Adjust clamp plug, 2C14199P97, forward so that clamp plate, 2C14199P96, rests against
inner support.
(4) Apply thread lubricant onto threads of center shaft, 1C9608P05.
(5) Install center shaft, 1C9608P05, so that male-threaded end engages threads on inside
diameter of compressor rotor aft shaft. Thread center shaft until seated against end of
compressor rotor aft shaft, then back off one-half turn.
24 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
Figure 17. Dimension K Measurement
(6) Adjust clamp plug, 2C14199P97, aft so clamp plate, 2C14199P96, is seated firmly
against inside shoulder of center shaft. Lock into position with locknut, 2C14199P98.
Tighten clamp plug to 180 lb in. (20.3 N·m) of torque.
E. Install HPT module installation fixture, 1C9608, as follows (figure 19):

19
CAUTION
Ensure HPT module installation fixture, 1C9608, is used properly.
Failure to comply will cause tool and/or engine damage.
(1) Apply thread lubricant onto threads of bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102.
(2) Assemble lift adapter, 2C14199P53, lift fixture, 2C14199P22, and lifteye, 2C14199P36.
Attach to bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102.
(3) Thread center plate, 2C14199P103, into extension shaft, 2C14199P104. Thread assem-
bly into center shaft, 1C9608P05.
(4) If installed, remove plug, 2C14193P04, from HPT rotor.
(5) Remove nuts and washers that secure HPT module onto shipping/storage module.
Change 4 25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
Figure 18. HPT Module Centering Tools from 2C14199
(6) Install frame, 2C14199P123/1C9608P02, with support shaft, 2C14199P64, onto HPT
module as follows:
NOTE
Antirotation pins, 2C14199P124, not required for the LM6000 PC and

can be removed for convenience. Use guide pins, 1C9608P09, and
blocks, 1C9608P08, instead.
(a) If not already attached, install frame extension, 1C9608P02, onto frame,
2C14199P123.
(b) Position frame so three spacer feet, 2C14199P65, face up.
(c) Attach vertical lift fixture, 1C9608P11, with lifteye, 2C14199P38, onto frame at
6:00 and 12:00 o’clock positions. Secure with hand knob, 2C14199P23.
26 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
Figure 19. Bearing Adapter Shaft from 1C9608
WARNING

(d) Attach hoist to lifteye. Lift frame and support shaft over HPT rotor.
(e) Lower tooling onto HPT module. Support shaft, 2C14199P64, shall fit into rabbet of
stage 2 HPT disk aft flange. Frame shall fit into rabbet of stage 2 HPT nozzle sup-
port aft flange. See figure 20.
20
(f) Install spacer foot, 2C14199P65, onto forward flange of HPT stator support. Using
quick-release pins, 2C14199P74, secure spacer foot onto foot bracket, 2C14199P66.
See figure 21.
21
(g) Secure support shaft, 2C14199P64, onto stage 2 HPT rotor disk aft rabbet using
12 bolts, 2C14199P43, and nut plate, 2C14199P27. Tighten bolts to 70-110 lb in.
(7.9-12.4 N·m) of torque. See figure 20.
Change 4 27

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
Figure 20. Support Shaft from 2C14199
28 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
Figure 21. Pusher Tools from 2C14199/1C9608
Change 4 29

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
(h) Secure frame onto stage 2 HPT nozzle support aft flange using 30 bolts,
2C14199P43, six nut plates, 2C14199P34, and six nut plates, 2C14199P35. Tighten
(7) Install pusher shaft, 1C9608P03, as follows (figure 21):
(a) Ensure HPT rotor shaft inner diameter and seating shoulder are clean and free of
foreign material or high metal.
(b) Remove vertical lift fixture, 1C9608P11.
(c) Install lift fixture, 2C14199P22, with lifteye, 2C14199P36, into aft end of pusher
shaft, 1C9608P03. Raise pusher shaft over HPT module.
(d) Rotate retainer nut, 2C14199P70, counterclockwise so that slots in retainer nut align
with slots in support shaft, 2C14199.
(e) Insert pusher shaft, 1C9608P03, into aft end of HPT module. Align lugs of pusher
shaft with slots of support shaft, 2C14199, and retainer nut, 2C14199P70.
(f) Rotate retainer nut, 2C14199P70, clockwise.
(g) Remove lift fixture and lifteye.
(h) Attach vertical lift fixture, 1C9608P11.
NOTE
If same HPT rotor is being installed, disregard steps F. and G.
F. Install HPT module into support stand, 1C9417, as follows (figure 22):
22
(1) Attach horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358, to frame.
(2) Connect overhead hoist to vertical lift fixture, 1C9608P11.
WARNING
(3) Lift HPT module from shipping/storage stand.
(4) Connect second hoist onto shackle on horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358.
30 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
Figure 22. HPT Rotor Shaft Seals and Bearing Races Install/Remove Stand, 1C9417
Change 4 31

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
(5) Turn HPT module to horizontal position.
(6) Lower HPT module into support stand, 1C9417, so frame, 2C14199P123/1C9608P02,
sits on four vertical supports.
(7) Secure HPT module in support stand, 1C9417, by positioning four swing clamps against
frame, 2C14199P123/1C9608P02.
G. Install No. 5R bearing inner race as follows:
WARNING
Use thermal gloves when you move or touch hot parts. Hot parts
can cause injury.
(1) If required, heat rotating air seal in oven for 30 minutes at 350°F (176.7°C), and install
onto HPT forward shaft.
(2) Heat No. 5R bearing inner race in oven for 30 minutes at 350°F (176.7°C ).
(3) Install bearing inner race onto HPT forward shaft using pusher, 2C14025P08. Do not
remove pusher until temperature of inner race has normalized.
(4) Check that bearing inner race is seated properly by attempting to insert a 0.002-inch
(0.05 mm) thick shim between inner race and No. 5R air/oil seal. Shim shall not fit any-
where between parts except at pusher relief grooves.
(5) Install No. 5R bearing spanner nut as follows:
WARNING
(a) Clean threads of HPT forward shaft and spanner nut using isopropyl alcohol.
(b) Measure spanner nut minor thread diameter. See figure 23. Take measurement at
three axial locations on threads. The average of these three measurements shall not
exceed 7.684 inches (195.17 mm). Replace spanner nut if this requirement is not
met.
23
(c) Apply a coat of thread lubricant onto threads of spanner nut.
32 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
Figure 23. No. 5R Bearing Spanner Nut Minor Thread Diameter
(d) Install spanner nut over HPT rotor shaft engaging threads just forward of No. 5R
bearing inner race. Chamfer faces forward.
(e) Tighten spanner nut until threads extend through nut locking insert. Use wrench,
2C14664; torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8100; and a torque wrench.
(f) Measure torque required to start spanner nut moving (with nut not bottomed out). A
minimum of 25 lb ft (34 N·m) of torque shall be present. Replace spanner nut if this
requirement is not met.
(g) Tighten spanner nut to 2000-3000 lb ft (2712-4067 N·m) of torque.
(h) Wipe excess thread lubricant from spanner nut and inner race.
(6) Install heat shield as follows:
(a) Place heat shield into oven for 20 minutes at a maximum temperature 400°F
(204.4°C).
Change 4 33

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
WARNING
(b) Remove heat shield from oven and install onto stage 1 HPT disk/shaft as follows:
1 Align Z mark on heat shield with Z mark on shaft.
2 Put two tabs on ID of heat shield into two notches on shaft.
3 Seat heat shield by hand.
NOTE
If removal of heat shield is necessary after it has been installed, use

HPT rotor stage 1 race and seal puller, 2C14688.
4 After heat shield and shaft have reached the same temperature, take a drop check
from forward end of shaft to forward end of heat shield. Drop check dimension
must be 0.240-0.350 inch (6.10-8.89 mm).
H. Install HPT module as follows:
CAUTION
Ensure HPT rotor is free to rotate, or damage to rotor may occur.
(1) Rotate HPC rotor until X mark is at 6:00 o’clock position.
(2) Transfer X mark from forward surface of stage 1 HPT disk shaft to stage 2 HPT disk rear
face inner diameter.
NOTE
Ensure X marks on HPC and HPT are at same circumferential

location.
(3) Rotate HPT rotor until X mark is at 6:00 o’clock position.
(4) Install guide tube, 1C9608P04, into engine over center shaft, 1C9608P05, until tube
seats against compressor rotor aft shaft. See figure 21.
(5) Apply light coat of petrolatum onto No. 5R bearing rollers. Push rollers outward in outer
race using finger pressure.
34 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
(6) Install six antirotation pins, 2C14199P124, and secure with screws, 2C14199P125.
(7) Remove HPT module support stand, 1C9417, as follows:
(a) Attach horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358, onto frame, 2C14199123/1C9608P02.
(b) Connect overhead hoist onto horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358.
(c) Connect second hoist onto shackle on horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358.
(d) Release four swing clamps.
WARNING
(e) Slowly lift HPT module from support stand, 1C9417.
CAUTION
HPT module shall be slid into core engine only until CRF aft flange
is between scribed lines on guide pins. Failure to comply may cause
bearing damage.
(8) Slide HPT module into engine core until pusher guide tube just contacts bearing adapter
shaft, and antirotation pins pass through extended flange brackets. Do not slide HPT
module any closer than 2.0 inches (50.8 mm) between CRF/HPT flanges.
(9) Position spacer feet, 2C14199P65, aft. Secure spacer feet in foot bracket, 2C14199P66,
with quick-release pins, 2C14199P74. See figure 21.
(10) Hold pusher shaft stationary while rotating bearing adapter shaft to move pusher shaft
forward until threads engage bearing adapter shaft threads. Continue hand threading
until antirotation pins, 2C14199P124, pass through extended flange brackets.
(11) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8100, onto pusher splines. Secure torque multi-
plier to frame using two knurled head screws, 2C14199P41.
(12) Install antirotation strap, 2C14199P25, over square shank of bearing adapter shaft,
2C14199P102. Secure antirotation strap to frame with handknobs, 2C14199P23.
(13) Loosen clamp on lift fixture enough to permit support shaft, 2C14199P64, to rotate and
still support module and tooling.
Change 4 35

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
WARNING

and fittings.
CAUTION
• The HPC and LPC rotors will rotate during HPT module instal-
lation. Ensure LPC inlet is clear of foreign objects and rotors are
free to rotate.
• Do not exceed 900 lb ft (1,220 N·m) of output torque.
NOTE
• The HPT rotor and tooling will rotate clockwise and move forward
during installation. The frame and torque multipliers will not
rotate, but will move forward.
• The installation operation may be stopped and started as neces-

sary without causing bearing damage. Tooling shall remain in
place at all times.
(14) Apply input torque of 80 lb ft (108.48 N·m) to torque multiplier. Pneumatic torque multi-
plier, Sweeney Model 8102, (in direct drive) may be used in combination with torque
multiplier, Sweeney Model 8100, at a pressure of 90 psi (620.5 kPa) to reduce installa-
tion time.
I. Remove tooling as follows:
(1) Rotate retainer nut, 2C14199P70, counterclockwise to unlock pusher shaft lugs. Reverse
torque multiplier two or three revolutions to release load on threads between HPT rotor
shaft and pusher shaft.
(2) Remove antirotation strap, 2C14199P25, and torque multiplier (figure 8).
(3) Remove pusher shaft, 1C9608P03, as follows:
(a) Rotate shaft clockwise to back out pusher shaft, 1C9608P03.
(b) Install lift fixture, 2C14199P22, with lifteye, 2C14199P36, into aft end of pusher
shaft, 1C9608P03. Remove pusher shaft from HPT module.
(4) Remove screws, 2C14199P125, and antirotation pins, 2C14199P124.
36 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
(5) Install eight flange retaining bolts, spacers, and nuts. Boltheads face forward. Spacers
mate directly with boltheads. Tighten nuts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque.
(6) Tighten clamp onto horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358.
(7) Remove bolts and nut plates that secure frame onto HPT nozzle. Remove frame,
2C14199P123/1C9608P02, and support shaft, 2C14199P64.
(8) Remove guide tube, 1C9608P04.
J. Perform HPT rotor seating check as follows:
(1) Inspect pressure tube/coupling nut threads and forward face for dirt, burrs, or high metal.
No dirt, burrs, or high metal allowed.
CAUTION
Do not allow alignment pins to extend through the aft side of the
shim. Failure to comply will cause damage to pressure tube/coupling
nut.
(2) If required, install HPT rotor shim, PN 9219M19P05, onto aft flange of stage 2 disk.
Install shim holder, 1C9397, to keep shim holes aligned with flange holes when pressure
tube/coupling nut is tightened.
NOTE
To facilitate pressure tube/coupling nut installation, loosen center

shaft, 1C9608P05, two complete turns. Ensure rotor locking fixture of
removal fixture, 1C9608, is installed prior to performing next step.
(3) Thread pressure tube/coupling nut onto HPC aft shaft. Hand-tighten pressure tube/cou-
pling nut.
(4) Install antitorque tube, 1C9626P02, onto stage 2 HPT rotor seal flange. Rotate forward
ring on tube to misalign lugs and slots. Install quick-release pin.
(6) Install torque tube, 1C9626P03, into inside diameter of pressure tube/coupling nut so
that splines engage.
(7) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8112, onto torque tube, 1C9626P03.
Change 4 37

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
CAUTION
Do not exceed maximum torque. Failure to comply will cause dam-

age to pressure tube/coupling nut.
(8) Tighten pressure tube/coupling nut to 9,500 lb ft (12,880 N·m) of torque.
(9) Break torque on pressure tube/coupling nut. Remove pressure tube/coupling nut, shim,
and all tooling except rotor locking tools.
(10) Measure from seating flange of stage 2 HPT rotor disk aft seal flange to aft surface of
HPC rotor aft shaft using seating check fixture, 2C14131 (figure 24). This dimension
shall be within 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) of computed dimension HSA determined in
step B.(4). Repeat steps J.(1) through (10) if this requirement is not met.
24
K. Install pressure tube/coupling nut as follows:
WARNING

(1) Using isopropyl alcohol, clean threads of pressure tube/coupling nut.
(2) Measure pressure tube/coupling nut minor thread diameter. See figure 25. Take measure-
ment at three axial locations on threads. The average of these three measurements shall
not exceed 6.388 inches (162.26 mm). Replace pressure tube/coupling nut if this require-
ment is not met.
25
(3) Inspect pressure tube/coupling nut threads and forward face for burrs or high metal.
Remove burrs or high metal.
(4) Apply a coat of thread lubricant onto threads, forward face, and flange forward face of
pressure tube/coupling nut.
CAUTION
Do not allow alignment pins to extend through the aft side of the
shim. Failure to comply will cause damage to pressure tube/coupling
nut.
(5) If required, install HPT rotor aft shim, PN 9219M19P05, onto seal flange of stage 2 HPT
rotor disk. Install alignment pins into shim holder, 1C9397, to keep shim holes aligned
with flange holes when pressure tube/coupling nut is tightened.
38 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
Figure 24. HPT Rotor Seating Check Using Fixture, 2C14131
Change 4 39

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
Figure 25. Pressure Tube/Coupling Nut Minor Thread Diameter
NOTE
Ensure rotor locking fixture of removal fixture, 1C9608, is installed

prior to performing next step.
(6) Thread pressure tube/coupling nut onto HPC aft shaft. Hand-tighten pressure tube/cou-
pling nut.
(7) Install antitorque tube, 1C9626P02, onto HPT stage 2 rotor flange. Rotate forward ring
on tube to misalign lugs and slot. Install quick-release pin.
(9) Install torque tube, 1C9626P03, onto inside diameter of pressure tube/coupling nut so
that splines engage.
(10) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8112, onto torque tube, 1C9626P03.
(11) Tighten coupling nut to 1,000 lb ft (1,356 N·m) of torque.
(12) Using marking pen, mark zero point on torque multiplier.
40 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2610 00
CAUTION
Do not exceed maximum torque of 13,100 lb ft (17,761 N·m). Failure

to comply will cause damage to pressure tube/coupling nut.
(13) Continue to tighten pressure tube/coupling nut a minimum of 76 degrees beyond zero
point to minimum torque of 9,500 lb ft (12,880 N·m). Record angle and torque.
(14) If maximum torque of 13,100 lb ft (17,761 N·m) is reached, remove pressure tube/cou-
pling nut and perform the following:
(a) Check torque multiplier for excessive drag.
(b) Inspect pressure tube/coupling nut threads and mating faces for dirt, burrs, galling,
or high metal. Clean and deburr threads and mating faces, if necessary.
(c) Inspect outer diameter seal teeth for evidence of contact with HPT rotor shaft inner
diameter. If seal teeth have contacted HPT rotor shaft inner diameter, replace pres-
sure tube/coupling nut. Remove high metal from HPT rotor shaft inner diameter.
(d) Inspect HPT rotor seating shoulder for dirt or metal pickup. Clean and deburr HPT
rotor seating shoulder, if necessary.
(e) Replace pressure tube/coupling nut if reason for excessive torque cannot be deter-
mined.
CAUTION
Do not exceed a maximum of 84 degrees beyond zero point or a max-
imum torque value of 13,800 lb ft (18,710 N·m). Failure to comply
will cause damage to pressure tube/coupling nut.
(15) Continue tightening to align stage 2 HPT disk and pressure tube/coupling nut aft flange
boltholes to minimum torque of 9,500 lb ft (12,880 N·m). Record final angle and torque.
(16) Remove all tooling.
(17) Inspect pressure tube/coupling nut inner diameter for displaced or damaged damper
sleeve. Replace pressure tube/coupling nut if damage is present.
Change 4 41

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2610 00
L. Install aft air seals as follows:
NOTE
Ensure matchmarks are aligned before installing air seals.
(1) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and washer faces of bolts and new self-locking nuts,
9283M41P04.
(2) Using bolts and self-locking nuts, 9283M41P04, secure aft air seals and pressure
tube/coupling nut onto stage 2 HPT rotor disk. Tighten nuts to 220-240 lb in.
(24.9-27.1 N·m) of torque.
M. Install flange retaining hardware as follows:
(1) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and seating faces of flange retaining bolts.
(2) Install brackets at locations marked at disassembly. Secure brackets to flange with bolts
and nuts, boltheads face forward. Tighten nuts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of
torque.
(3) Install remaining bolts, spacers, and nuts. Boltheads face forward, and spacers mate
directly with boltheads. Tighten nuts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque.
42 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2611 00
2WP 2611 00
WORK PACKAGE
(ON ENGINE) REPLACEMENT


1-9 ...... 2
10 Blank . . . . . . 2
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page

Change 2 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2611 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for replacing the stage 2 high pressure turbine (HPT)
nozzle when HPT module is installed on engine.
B. Remove low pressure turbine (LPT) module to gain access per WP 2710 00.
Title Number
Stage 2 High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Rotor Blades WP 2614 00
Replacement

Fixture Assy, Lift - HPT Rotor Horizontal 1C9358G02
Adapter, Lift - HPT Nozzle, Stage 2 2C14703G01
Adhesive Scotch Grip 77
Dry Ice Fed Spec BB-C-104
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C. (Black
or Blue)
Masking Tape Local Purchase
CL-A

Nut, Self-Locking 9985M32P06 74
Seal, Ring 9331M55P01 1
2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2611 00
A. Remove stage 2 HPT rotor blades as follows (figure 1):

1
CAUTION
The procedures in this work package for removing and installing
stage 2 HPT rotor blades are to facilitate other maintenance only. If
stage 2 HPT rotor blades require replacement, refer to WP 2614 00.
(1) Apply penetrating oil onto threads of nuts that secure stage 2 blade retainer onto stage 2
disk. Allow penetrating oil to soak for 20 minutes.
(2) Using marking pen, matchmark stage 2 blade retainer to stage 2 disk.
(3) Remove and discard nuts that secure stage 2 blade retainer. If any stud is broken, or if
any nut must be cut off, replace HPT module.
WARNING
Dry ice, BB-C-104: Do not let this material touch you. Low-
temperature skin damage. Can decrease available air.
Asphyxiant. Personal protective equipment required, especially
insulated gloves and eye protection when handling material. Use
in a well-ventilated area.
(4) Using dry ice, chill stage 2 blade retainer.
WARNING
Wear insulated gloves to prevent injury wqhen handling cold
parts.
CAUTION
Protect stage 2 disk from tool damage when prying stage 2 blade
retainer. Ensure prying tool has corner radii to prevent damage to
stage 2 blade retainer.
(5) Remove stage 2 blade retainer. Remove and discard ring seal.
Change 2 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2611 00
Figure 1. HPT Module
4 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2611 00
CAUTION
Ensure blade damper assemblies are matchmarked accurately.
Incorrect placement at installation will cause rotor imbalance.
(6) Using marking pen, matchmark stage 2 blades to stage 2 disk. Begin with blade in dove-
tail slot marked 1-1 and number all stage 2 blades consecutively in clockwise direction.
Mark number 1 through number 5 dovetail slots. Mark blade damper assemblies, starting
with number 1 at clockwise side of number 1 blade.
(7) Remove stage 2 blades and damper assemblies.
B. Remove stage 2 HPT nozzle as follows (figure 2):

2
WARNING
(1) Using lift adapter assembly, 1C9358, and 1-ton (907 kg) overhead hoist, position lift
adapter, 2C14703, onto stage 2 HPT nozzle aft flange.
(2) Using three screws and nuts, secure lift adapter, 2C14703, onto stage 2 HPT nozzle aft
(3) Using masking tape and marking pen, matchmark brackets to compressor rear frame
(CRF) aft flange.
(4) Remove nuts, bolts, spacers, and brackets that secure stage 2 nozzle support forward
flange onto CRF aft flange. Do not remove four screws and nuts that secure HPT hanger
support.
(5) Carefully slide stage 2 HPT nozzle aft from HPT rotor assembly.
CAUTION
Ensure stage 2 HPT nozzle part number is correct per IPB,

GEK 105062, before installation, or damage to engine could result.
A. Install stage 2 HPT nozzle as follows (figure 2):
(1) Using lift adapter assembly, 1C9358, and overhead hoist, position lift adapter, 2C14703,
onto stage 2 HPT nozzle aft flange.
Change 2 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2611 00
Figure 2. Stage 2 HPT Nozzle Lift Adapter, 2C14703
6 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2611 00
WARNING
(3) Lift stage 2 HPT nozzle into position. Carefully slide stage 2 HPT nozzle onto HPT rotor
assembly.
(4) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and washer faces of 136 bolts.
(5) Install brackets at locations marked at disassembly. Using bolts and nuts, secure brackets
onto flange. Boltheads face forward. Tighten nuts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of
torque.
(6) Install remaining bolts, spacers, and nuts. Boltheads face forward. Spacers mate directly
with boltheads. Tighten nuts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque.
B. Install stage 2 HPT rotor blades as follows (figure 1):
(1) Install stage 2 HPT rotor blade marked number 1 into dovetail slot marked number 1.
Install blade from aft side of disk.
CAUTION
Ensure stage 2 blade damper assemblies are installed at positions as

marked at disassembly. Incorrect placement will cause rotor
imbalance.
(2) Install damper assembly marked number 1 on clockwise side of number 1 blade. Seal
extension faces aft and letter F faces forward.
(3) Install remaining blades and damper assemblies in numerical order.
(4) Hold adjacent blades together at platforms and outward in dovetail slot. Seal portion of
damper assembly shall be free to move radially minimum of 0.010 inch (0.25 mm). See
figure 3. Damper portion of damper shall be free to move.
3
(5) Apply generous amount of thread lubricant onto threads and washer faces of new self-
locking nuts that secure stage 2 blade retainer.
Change 2 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2611 00
Figure 3. Stage 2 Blade Damper Assemblies
WARNING
Adhesive is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Use in a well-ventilated
area.
CAUTION
Adhesive may be used to hold ring seal in place during assembly.
Ensure adhesive is applied in areas 0.5-1.5 inches (12.7-38.1 mm)
long and spacer not less than 6 inches (152.4 mm) apart.
(6) Install new ring seal into stage 2 blade retainer groove. Gap between ends of ring seal
shall be 0.10-0.15 inch (2.5-3.8 mm). If gap exceeds 0.15 inch (3.8 mm), piece of
another ring seal may be used to fill gap. Minimum length of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) shall
be used.
(7) Install stage 2 blade retainer onto stage 2 disk, aligning matchmarks. Using new nuts,
secure stage 2 blade retainer. Using dial indicator torque wrench, tighten nuts to 110-120
lb in. (12.4-13.6 N·m) of torque. If run-on torque is less than 6.5 lb in. (0.7 N·m) or more
than 30 lb in. (3.4 N·m), replace nut.
8 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2611 00
(8) Check clearance between aft retainer and stage 2 disk. Clearance shall be 0.002 inch
(0.050 mm) maximum in areas where axial width of stage 2 blade shank is greater than
width of stage 2 disk. Clearance shall be 0.001 inch (0.025 mm) maximum in all other
areas. See figure 4.
(9) Loosen nuts one-half turn, then tighten to 110-120 lb in. (12.4-13.6 N·m) of torque.
4
Figure 4. Stage 2 Blade Retainer Seating Check

10 Blank Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2612 00
2WP 2612 00
WORK PACKAGE
(OFF ENGINE) REPLACEMENT


1-8 ...... 2
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page

Change 2 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2612 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for replacing the stage 2 high pressure turbine (HPT)
nozzle when HPT module is removed from engine.
B. Remove HPT module and install, forward end down, in HPT module shipping/storage stand,
2C14193G03, and secure with plug, 2C14193P04, to retain stage 2 disk per WP 2610 00.
Title Number
Replacement

Stand, Shipping/Storage - HPT Module 2C14193G03
Adapter, Lift - HPT Nozzle, Stage 2 2C14703G01
Sling, Lift MES-53
Dry Ice Fed Spec BB-C-104
or Blue)
CL-A

2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2612 00
A. Remove stage 2 HPT rotor blades as follows (figure 1):
NOTE
The procedures in this work package for removing and installing stage
2 HPT rotor blades are to facilitate other maintenance only. If stage 2
HPT rotor blades require replacement, refer to WP 2614 00.
1
Figure 1. Stage 2 HPT Rotor Blades
Change 2 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2612 00
CAUTION
Do not move HPT rotor assembly while stage 2 blade retainer is

removed unless a minimum of 37 blade retainer nuts are installed
and tightened to 110-120 lb in. (12.4-13.5 N·m) of torque.
any nut must be cut off, replace HPT module per WP 2610 00.
WARNING
WARNING
Wear insulated gloves to prevent injury when handling cold parts.
CAUTION
CAUTION
(6) Using marking pen, matchmark stage 2 blades to stage 2 disk. Begin with blade in dove-
tail slot marked 1-1 and number all stage 2 blades consecutively in clockwise direction.
Mark number 1 through number 5 dovetail slots. Mark blade damper assemblies, starting
with number 1 at clockwise side of number 1 blade.
B. Remove stage 2 HPT nozzle as follows (figure 2):

2
(1) Using sling and and 1-ton (907 kg) overhead hoist, position lift adapter, 2C14703, onto
stage 2 HPT nozzle aft flange.
4 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2612 00
Figure 2. Stage 2 HPT Nozzle Lift Adapter, 2C14703
flange. Tighten nuts 40-60 lb in. (4.5-6.8 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(3) Carefully lift stage 2 HPT nozzle aft from HPT rotor assembly.
C. Inspect interstage seal honeycomb for evidence of thermal shield teeth rub into braze.
Replace HPT module if braze has been contacted.
Change 2 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2612 00
CAUTION

A. Install stage 2 HPT nozzle as follows (figure 2):
(1) If installed, remove stage 2 HPT rotor blades per step 6.A.
WARNING
(2) Using sling and 1-ton overhead hoist, position lift adapter, 2C14703, onto stage 2 HPT
nozzle aft flange.
WARNING
(4) Lift stage 2 HPT nozzle over HPT rotor assembly. Carefully lower stage 2 HPT nozzle
onto HPT rotor assembly. Remove lift adapter.
B. Install stage 2 HPT rotor blades as follows (figure 1):
Install blade from aft side of disk.
CAUTION
imbalance.
(2) Install stage 2 blade damper assembly marked number 1 on clockwise side of number 1
blade. Seal extension faces aft and letter F faces forward.
(3) Install remaining blades and damper assemblies in numerical order.

3
6 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2612 00
figure 3. Damper portion of damper shall be free to move.
(5) Apply generous amount of thread lubricant onto threads and washer faces of new nuts
that secure stage 2 blade retainer.
WARNING
Adhesive is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Use in a well-ventilated
area.
NOTE
Ensure adhesive is applied in areas 0.5-1.5 inches (12.7-38.1 mm)
long and spacer not less than 6 inches (152.4 mm) apart.
(6) Install new ring seal into stage 2 blade retainer groove. Gap between ends of ring seal
shall be 0.10-0.15 inch (2.5-3.8 mm). If gap exceeds 0.15 inch (3.8 mm), piece of
another ring seal may be used to fill gap. A minimum length of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm)
shall be used.
Change 2 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2612 00
secure aft retainer. Using dial indicator torque wrench, tighten nuts to 110-120 lb in.
(12.4-13.6 N·m) of torque. If run-on torque is less than 6.5 lb in. (0.7 N·m), or more than
30 lb in. (3.4 N·m), replace nut.
(8) Check clearance between aft blade retainer and stage 2 disk. Clearance shall be
0.002 inch (0.050 mm) maximum in areas where axial width of stage 2 blade shank is
greater than width of stage 2 disk. Clearance shall be 0.001 inch (0.025 mm) maximum
in all other areas. See figure 4.
4
8 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2613 00
5WP 2613 00
WORK PACKAGE
STAGE 1 HIGH PRESSURE TURBINE (HPT) ROTOR
BLADES REPLACEMENT


1 - 15 ...... 5
16 Blank . . . . . . 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page

Stage 1 HPT Rotor Blades Installation ....................................................................................... 13
Stage 1 HPT Rotor Blades Removal ........................................................................................... 3
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2613 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains procedures for replacing stage 1 HPT rotor blades.
B. Remove stage 2 HPT nozzle to gain access per WP 2612 00.
Title Number
Stage 2 High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Nozzle (Off Engine) WP 2612 00
Replacement

Fixture, Clamp - HPT Rotor Disks 1C9444G01
Fixture, Lift - HPT Rotor, Aft 2C14038G01
Truck, HPT Rotor, Horizontal 2C14049G01
Fixture, Lift - HPT Assy, Forward 2C14672G02
Gage, Length - HPT Rotor Stage 1 Blade 2C14796G01
Slave Washer (Qty 20) AN960C516
Pump, Hydraulic - 3,000 psi Capacity Local Purchase
Dry Ice BB-C-104
or Blue)
Cl-A

2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2613 00
6. Stage 1 HPT Rotor Blades Removal.
NOTE
The following procedure allows replacement of a maximum of five

stage 1 blades without a subsequent HPT rotor balance.
A. Install HPT rotor onto truck, 2C14049, as follows:
(1) Install aft lift fixture, 2C14038, onto aft flange of stage 2 HPT rotor disk. See figure 1.
Secure fixture with four bolts and nuts. Tighten nuts to 70-110 lb in. (7.9-12.4 N·m) of
torque.
1
WARNING
(2) Connect 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist onto aft lift fixture, 2C14038. Lift rotor
to allow installation of forward lift fixture, 2C14672.
(3) Install forward lift fixture, 2C14672, as follows (figure 2):

2
(a) Rotate indexing plate to unlocked position and insert quick-release pin.
(b) Install forward lift fixture, 2C14672, onto HPT rotor forward shaft until guide plate
is flush with end of shaft.
CAUTION
If indexing tube will not rotate, lift plate is not fully inserted below
shaft splines. Do not try to lift rotor until quick-release pin is seated
in the locked position.
(c) Remove quick-release pin and rotate indexing plate CCW to locked position. Install
quick-release pin.
(4) Connect second hoist onto forward lift fixture, 2C14672.
(5) Rotate HPT rotor to horizontal position. Lower HPT rotor into truck, 2C14049. See
figure 3. Secure rotor into truck by closing retainer over forward shaft, aligning pin in
slots, and tightening handknob.
3
(6) Remove hoists and lift fixtures.
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2613 00
Figure 1. HPT Rotor Aft Lift Fixture, 2C14038
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2613 00
Figure 2. HPT Assembly Forward Lift Fixture, 2C14672
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2613 00
Figure 3. HPT Rotor Horizontal Truck, 2C14049
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2613 00
B. Install clamp fixture, 1C9444, as follows (figure 4):
(1) Turn clamp foot, in three places, CCW to disengaged position, and install quick-release
pin.
(2) Insert clamp assembly, clamp feet facing forward, into aft bore of HPT rotor.
(3) Push clamp assembly forward until aft flange on plug makes contact with hub of stage 2
disk.
(4) Turn clamp foot, in three places, CW to engaged position. Ensure position arrow on end
of each clamp shaft aligns with corresponding engaged mark on plug. Ensure plunger on
foot engages with second set of detents on clamp plate.
(5) Turn center nut CW, by hand, until clamp feet contact forward face of stage 1 disk. Wig-
gle each clamp shaft to ensure that clamp fixture does not bind against inner diameter of
rotor assembly.
(6) Tighten center nut to 50 lb ft (68 N·m) of torque.
C. Remove stage 1 blade retainer as follows (figure 5):
WARNING
The stage 1 HPT disk is sensitive to nicks and scratches that could
inadvertently result from this procedure. If the stage 1 disk is
damaged, even slightly, during this procedure, the disk must be
referred to the appropriate Factory Technical Support representa-
tive for evaluation and repair recommendation. Failure to comply
may result in an uncontained engine failure, which could cause
injury or death.
(3) Position mark number 1 through number 5 blades to stage 1 disk.
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2613 00
CAUTION
Ensure windage cups are position marked correctly and listed on

blade/windage cup position map. Incorrect placement at installation
will cause rotor imbalance.
(4) Remove nuts and windage cups that secure forward retainer. Retain 20 nuts for later use.
Discard remaining nuts. If any stud is broken, or if any nut must be cut off, replace HPT
module. Using marking pen, position mark windage cups. Note weight of windage cups
on position map (figure 6).
4
Figure 4. HPT Rotor Disks Clamp Fixture, 1C9444

6
5
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2613 00
Figure 5. Stage 1 HPT Rotor Blade Replacement
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2613 00
Figure 6. HPT Stage 1 Blade/Windage Cup Position Map
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2613 00
WARNING
Dry ice, BB-C-104: Do not let this material touch you. Low-tem-
perature skin damage. Can decrease available air. Asphyxiant.
Personal protective equipment required, especially insulated
gloves and eye protection when handling material. Use in a well-
ventilated area.
WARNING
Use thermal gloves when you move or touch cold parts. Cold parts
can cause injury.
CAUTION
(6) Remove stage 1 blade retainer. Remove and discard ring seals.
(7) Apply generous amount of thread lubricant onto threads of 20 nuts retained from
step C.(4).
CAUTION

(8) Install 20 equally spaced nuts and washers onto stage 1 disk. Tighten nuts to 220-
240 lb in. (24.9-27.1 N·m) of torque.
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2613 00
D. Remove stage 1 HPT rotor blades as follows:

WARNING
injury or death.
(1) Using marking pen, position mark stage 1 blades to be removed and their corresponding
dovetail slot on stage 1 disk. Mark blade dampers and blade seals to be removed.
NOTE
It is necessary to fan approximately one quadrant of blades to remove

the first blade.
(2) Remove stage 1 blades, dampers, and blade seals.
A. Measure length of removed blades using gage, 2C14796. Replacement blade length shall be
within 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) of length of removed blade but shall not exceed length of long-
est blade in stage.
B. Weigh removed blades and record on position map (figure 6).
NOTE
Replacement blades shall be weighed after tip grinding to meet length

requirement. For planning purposes, removal of 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
from blade tip will reduce blade weight by 0.12 gram. Do not use
blade weight marked on new blades by manufacturer.
C. Weigh replacement blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on blade.
D. Select replacement blades within 0.25 gram of original blade. Blades replacing those with
portions missing shall weigh within 0.25 gram of average of two adjacent blades on each side
of damaged blade. If replacement blade within 0.25 gram of original blade is not available,
use blade replacement guide (figure 7).
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2613 00
NOTE

E. Calculate blade position using GE computerized balance program, 9470M55. Mark position
7
8. Stage 1 HPT Rotor Blades Installation.
A. Install stage 1 HPT rotor blades as follows (figure 5):
WARNING
injury or death.
Install blade from forward side of disk.
(2) Install damper marked number 1 onto CW side of number 1 blade. Seal extension faces
forward. Install blade seal.
NOTE
It is necessary to fan the stage 1 blades aside to install the last stage 1
blade.
(3) Install remaining blades, dampers, and seal bodies in numerical order. Seal bodies shall
not bind or move adjacent blades apart during installation.
(4) Hold adjacent blades together at platforms and outward in the dovetail slot. Seal bodies
and dampers shall be free to move.
(5) Check for blade movement in the circumferential direction. Blades shall move perceiv-
able amount.
B. Install stage 1 blade retainer as follows:
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2613 00
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2613 00
CAUTION
Ensure clamp fixture, 1C9444, hydraulic pressure is at 3,000 psi

(20,684 kPa) before removing 20 nuts from stage 1 disk.
(1) Remove 20 nuts and slave washers, AN960C516, from stage 1 disk. Discard nuts.
NOTE

Ensure adhesive is applied in areas 0.5-1.5 inch (12.7-38.1 mm) long
and spaced not less than 6 inches (152.4 mm) apart.
(3) Install new ring seal into stage 1 blade retainer outer groove. Ring seal shall be in four
approximately equal segments. Gap between segment ends shall be 0.10-0.15 inch
(2.5-3.8 mm).
(4) Install new ring seal into stage 1 blade retainer inner groove. Ring seal shall remain in
one piece. Gap between ring seal ends shall be 0.10-0.15 inch (2.5-3.8 mm). If gap
exceeds 0.15 inch (3.8 mm), piece of another ring seal may be used to fill gap. Minimum
length of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) shall be used.
CAUTION
Ensure windage cups are installed at same locations from which
they were removed. Failure to comply will result in rotor imbalance.
(5) Install stage 1 blade retainer onto stage 1 disk, aligning matchmarks. Using windage
cups and new nuts, secure stage 1 blade retainer.
(6) Tighten nuts to 220-240 lb in. (24.9-27.1 N·m) of torque. If run-on torque is less than
6.5 lb in. (0.7 N·m) or more than 60 lb in. (6.8 N·m), replace nut.
(7) Ensure stage 1 blade retainer is fully seated on stage 1 disk by attempting to insert
0.002-inch (0.05 mm) feeler stock between retainer and disk.
(8) Remove clamp fixture, 1C9444, as follows:
(a) Loosen center nut until clamp foot, in three places, loses contact with forward face
of stage 1 disk.
(b) Turn clamp feet assemblies CCW until clamp feet are disengaged from stage 1 disk.
(c) Pull clamp fixture out aft end of rotor assembly.

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2614 00
5WP 2614 00
WORK PACKAGE
STAGE 2 HIGH PRESSURE TURBINE (HPT) ROTOR
BLADES REPLACEMENT


1 - 10 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page

Stage 2 HPT Rotor Blades Installation ....................................................................................... 7
Stage 2 HPT Rotor Blades Removal ........................................................................................... 3
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2614 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the stage 2 high pressure
turbine (HPT) rotor blades.
B. Remove the low pressure turbine (LPT) module to gain access.
Title Number
Replacement

Fixture, Clamp - HPT Rotor Disks 1C9444G01
Gage, Length - HPT Rotor Stage 2 Blade 2C14796G02
Dry Ice BB-C-104
or Blue)
CL-A

2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2614 00
6. Stage 2 HPT Rotor Blades Removal.

1
NOTE
• The following procedure allows replacement of a maximum of five

stage 2 blades without a subsequent HPT rotor balance.
• If the tube coupling nut is removed, install HPT clamp fixture,

1C9444, per WP 2613 00.
A. Remove stage 2 blade retainer, figure 1, as follows:
WARNING
injury or death.
CAUTION

any nut must be cut off, replace HPT module.
WARNING
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2614 00
Figure 1. Stage 2 HPT Rotor Blade Replacement
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2614 00
CAUTION
B. Remove stage 2 HPT rotor blades as follows:
WARNING
injury or death.
CAUTION

(1) Position mark stage 2 blades and blade dampers to be removed and their corresponding
dovetail slot on stage 2 disk using marking pen. Mark blade damper assemblies to be
removed.
A. Measure length of removed stage 2 HPT rotor blades using gage, 2C14796. Replacement
blade length shall be within 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) of length of removed blade but shall not
exceed length of longest blade in stage.
B. Weigh removed stage 2 HPT rotor blades and record on position map (figure 2).
2
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2614 00
Figure 2. HPT Stage 2 Blade/Damper Assembly Position Map
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2614 00
NOTE
Replacement stage 2 HPT rotor blades shall be weighed after tip

grinding to meet length requirement. For planning purposes, removal
of 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) from blade tip will reduce blade weight by
0.12 gram. Do not use blade weight marked on new blades by
manufacturer.
C. Weigh replacement stage 2 HPT rotor blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on blade.
D. Select replacement stage 2 HPT rotor blades within 0.25 gram of original blade. Blades
replacing those with portions missing shall weigh within 0.25 gram of average of two adja-
cent blades on each side of damaged blade. If replacement blade within 0.25 gram of original
blade is not available, use blade replacement guide (figure 3).
NOTE

E. Calculate blade position using GE computerized balance program, 9470M55. Mark position
3
8. Stage 2 HPT Rotor Blades Installation.
WARNING
injury or death.
CAUTION
A. Install stage 2 HPT rotor blades as follows:
(1) Install stage 2 HPT rotor blade into corresponding dovetail slot. Install blade from aft
side of disk.
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2614 00
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2614 00
CAUTION

imbalance.
(2) Install damper assembly as marked at removal.
(3) Install remaining blades and damper assemblies.
figure 4. Damper portion of damper assembly shall also be free to move.
B. Install stage 2 blade retainer as follows:
4
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2614 00
NOTE

Ensure adhesive is applied in areas 0.5-1.5 inch (12.7-38.1 mm) long
and spaced not less than 6 inches (152.4 mm) apart.
(2) Install new ring seal into stage 2 blade retainer groove. Gap between ring seal ends shall
be 0.10-0.15 inch (2.5-3.8 mm). If gap exceeds 0.15 inch (3.8 mm), piece of another ring
seal may be used to fill gap. Minimum length of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) shall be used.
secure aft retainer. Tighten nuts to 110-120 lb in. (12.4-13.6 N·m) of torque using dial
indicator torque wrench. Replace nut if run-on torque is less than 6.5 lb in. (0.7 N·m) or
more than 30 lb in. (3.4 N·m).
(4) Check clearance between aft retainer and stage 2 disk. Clearance shall be 0.002 inch
(0.050 mm) maximum in areas where axial width of stage 2 blade shank is greater than
width of stage 2 disk. Clearance shall be 0.001 inch (0.025 mm) maximum in all other
areas. See figure 5.
5
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
4WP 2710 00
WORK PACKAGE
LOW PRESSURE TURBINE (LPT) MODULE
REPLACEMENT


1 - 44 ...... 4
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Bushing Reseating Procedure ..................................................................................................... 17

Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module Inspection ....................................................................... 17
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module Installation ...................................................................... 21
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module Removal .......................................................................... 5
Change 4 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the LPT module.
B. Remove gas turbine from enclosure per WP 3010 00 and install in the maintenance dolly or
maintenance support pedestals per WP 3012 00 or WP 3013 00.
C. Disconnect and connect electrical leads and connecting tubes between LPT module and gas
Title Number
Gas Turbine in Enclosure Replacement WP 3010 00
Gas Turbine Maintenance Dolly Removal and Installation WP 3012 00
Gas Turbine/Support Pedestal Removal and Installation WP 3013 00
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module in Shipping Container WP 3017 00
Replacement
2 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00

Adapter, Sleeve - LPT Rotor Shaft 1C9316G02
Puller, LPT Module - Mid Shaft 1C9327G03
Fixture Assembly, Install/Remove - Aft Drive 1C9336G01
Shaft Nut
Fixture, Forward Restrain - LPT Rotor/Stator 1C9338G02
Jack Assembly, Support - Compressor Rear 1C9447G01
Frame
Adapter Assembly, Drive - Rear 1C9609P01
Pilot, LP Mid Shaft - Aft 1C9610P01
Strongback, Lift, Turn and Restrain - LPT 1C9613G02
Module
Fixture, Seat Check - Coupling Nut, Shaft, 1C9616G01
LPT Rotor
Fixture, Start - LPT Coupling Nut 1C9617G01
Fixture, Install/Remove - Retainer Ring 1C9618G01
LPT/Mid Shaft
Fixture, Torque - LPT Shaft Coupling Nut 1C9619G01
Gage Inspection - Fan Shaft to HPT Stator 1C9620G01
Case
Collar Mid Shaft, Centering and Support 1C9622G01
Fixture, Adjustable C.G. Horizontal Lift - 1C9627G01
Heavy Purpose
Dolly, Storage, LPT Module 1C9632G01
Puller, High Force - LPT Module Mid Shaft 1C9650G01
(Alternate for 1C9327G03)
Pusher, LPT Shaft Bushing 1C9651G01
Guide Clamps 2C14693G01
Dynamometer, 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) Local Purchase
Capacity
Lifteye (0.500-13UNC-2B Thread) Local Purchase
Load Cell, 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) Capacity Local Purchase
(Alternate to Dynamometer)
Hand Pump P802 (ENERPAC)
8100
8112
Change 4 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
Dry Film Lubricant GE Spec A50TF192,
CL-B
(Black or Blue)
Penetrating Oil GE Spec A50TF54, CL-A

A. Required Material.

Nut, Coupling L47804P01 1
B. The following material may be required to complete this work package:

Bolt (Rear Drive Adapter Cover) L45045P01 28
Nut, Adapter L45017G05 1
Nut (After Shaft Cover) J626P04 7
Nut (Rear Drive Adapter Cover) J626P09 28
Ring, Retainer L47805P01 1
Ring, Shaft L45066P01 1
C. The following material may be required if a new LPT module is being installed:

Spacer, Ring (Shim) L47865P03 1
4 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
6. Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module Removal.
A. Remove aft shaft cap as follows:
(1) Remove nuts that secure aft shaft cap to adapter nut.
(2) Using four jackscrews, from tool set, 1C6804, remove aft shaft cap.
(3) Remove keyed ring.
B. Deleted.
C. Install strongback, 1C9613, as follows (figure 1):

1
(1) Install rear drive adapter assembly, 1C9609 onto aft spacer seal, L47758P01.
(2) Install lifteye in shaft adapter ring, 1C9613P04.
WARNING

NOTE
The rear drive adapter, 682L262, has been replaced with spacer seal,
L47758. The rear drive adapter assembly, 1C9609, is a tool that
attaches to the spacer seal during removal. See figure 1.
(3) Using overhead hoist, lift shaft adapter ring, 1C9613P04, into position on rear drive
adapter assembly, 1C9609. Secure shaft adapter ring onto adapter assembly with 14
equally spaced bolts and nuts. Tighten nuts to 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m) of torque.
(4) Remove lifteye.
(5) Using adjustable horizontal lift fixture, 1C9627, and dynamometer or load cell between
hoist and horizontal lift fixture, lift strongback, 1C9613, into position.
Change 4 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
Figure 1. LPT Module Lift, Turn, and Restrain Strongback, 1C9613
6 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
CAUTION
Do not allow the weight of the strongback to rest on the outer seal
carrier or shaft adapter ring before installing strongback retaining
screws.
(6) Secure strongback, 1C9613, onto outer seal carrier with screws and washers. Tighten
screws to 160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
(7) Turn LPT rotor to align alignment hole on shaft adapter ring, 1C9613P04, with radial
slot at 10:00 o'clock position on strongback. Install quick-release pin.
(8) Install nut ring, 1C9613P06, onto shaft adapter ring, 1C9613P04. Tighten nut ring until
seated against shaft adapter ring flange.
(9) Install four lock blocks, 1C9613P05. Secure lock blocks, 1C9613P05, with screws.
D. Remove adapter nut as follows:
(1) If same LPT module and adapter nut will be reinstalled, measure from rear face of
adapter nut to rear face of LPT shaft using depth micrometer. See figure 2. Record as
dimension AF. An LPT installation worksheet is provided on figure 13.
2
NOTE
Dimension AF is used to verify proper seating of adapter nut upon

LPT module installation.
(2) Install adapter nut fixture, 1C9336, over adapter nut and secure with nuts. See figure 3.
3
(3) Install mounting plate, 1C9619P06, over fixture assembly. Secure mounting plate,
1C9619P06, to strongback, 1C9613, with two mounting screws. Tighten mounting
screws finger-tight.
(4) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8100/8112. Actuate torque multiplier to loosen
adapter nut and locking ring.
(5) If adapter nut will not loosen, proceed as follows:
(a) Remove torque multiplier, mounting plate, 1C9619P06, and adapter nut fixture,
1C9336.
Change 4 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
Figure 2. Rear Drive Adapter Nut Seating Check Dimensions
8 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
Figure 3. Aft Drive Shaft Nut Removal Fixture Assembly, 1C9336
Change 4 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
WARNING
Use eye protection when you cut material or parts. Particles can
cause damage to your eyes.
(b) Cut adapter nut in axial direction, two places 180 degrees apart, on top of castella-
tion, 1.375 inch (34.93 mm) deep. Use care not to cut into LPT rotor shaft threads or
rear drive adapter. Cut adapter nut with high speed cut-off wheel.
(c) Install tooling and loosen adapter nut per steps (2), (3), and (4) above. Adapter nut
will split under torque and may be removed and discarded.
(6) Remove torque multiplier, mounting plate, 1C9619P06, and adapter nut fixture, 1C9336.
Remove adapter nut.
E. Install guide protector, 1C9316P04, so that tabs engage slots in LPT rotor shaft. See figure 4.
Tighten retaining nut, 1C9316P03, until bottomed against rear drive adapter/spacer seal.
F. Remove LPT coupling nut retaining ring as follows (figure 5):
(1) Using bright light, determine location of two retaining ring tooling holes. Rotate shaft to
locate these holes to 6:00 o’clock position.
(2) Using gage block, 1C9618P14, preset pins on retaining ring removal fixture, 1C9618.
(3) Install retaining ring removal fixture, 1C9618, into guide protector, 1C9316P04. If nec-
essary, rotate removal fixture, 1C9618, slightly to engage pins in retaining ring tooling
holes.
(4) Insert flexible borescope into guide tube at rear of retaining ring removal fixture,
1C9618. Verify engagement of pins in retaining ring tooling holes. If necessary, reposi-
tion removal fixture to engage pins in retaining ring tooling holes.
5
4
(5) Seat retaining ring removal fixture, 1C9618, against retaining ring.
(6) Turn knurled knob of retaining ring removal fixture, 1C9618, to compress retaining ring.
(7) Withdraw retaining ring removal fixture, 1C9618, with retaining ring. Turn knurled knob
to release retaining ring.
G. Remove LPT module forward flange attaching hardware as follows:
(1) Using marking pen and masking tape, mark location and orientation of brackets on
stage 2 high pressure turbine (HPT) nozzle aft flange.
10 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
Figure 4. LPT Rotor Shaft Guide Protector, 1C9316P04
Figure 5. LPT/Mid Shaft Retaining Ring Removal Fixture, 1C9618
Change 4 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
(2) Soak attaching hardware with penetrating oil to aid in removal.
(3) Remove nuts, bolts, spacers, and brackets that secure LPT module to HPT module.
(4) Install guide clamps, 2C14693, onto stage 2 HPT nozzle aft flange at 12:00, 3:00, 6:00,
and 9:00 o’clock positions. Tighten thumbscrews.
NOTE
Thumbscrews may require retightening after the LPT flange disen-

gages the HPT flange.
H. Remove LPT coupling nut as follows (figure 6):
(1) Install torque tube, 1C9619P03, and torque fixture, 1C9619, through LPT rotor shaft.
Align torque tube so that teeth of tube engage slots of LPT coupling nut.
(2) Push indexing tube, 1C9619P02, forward and rotate, if necessary, to engage tab on tube
with slot in mid shaft assembly.
(3) Install mounting plate, 1C9619P06, onto strongback, 1C9613, and secure with two
mounting screws. Tighten mounting screws finger-tight.
6
Figure 6. LPT Coupling Nut Torque Fixture, 1C9619
12 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
(4) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8100/8112, onto mounting plate, 1C9619P06,
so that splines engage splines on torque tube. Secure torque multiplier to mounting plate,
1C9619P06, with two locking screws.
(5) Actuate torque multiplier to loosen coupling nut.
(6) Remove torque multiplier and all components of torque fixture.
(7) Using LPT coupling nut start fixture, 1C9617, remove LPT coupling nut. If difficulty is
encountered engaging locking pins into LPT coupling nut inner snapring groove, remove
LPT coupling nut as follows (figure 7):
(a) Fully retract inner sleeve of start fixture.
(b) Insert start fixture and loosen LPT coupling nut until nearly disengaged.
(c) Remove start fixture and extend inner sleeve until locking pins are positioned
0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) beyond wrenching lugs.
(d) Insert start fixture so that locking pins engage LPT coupling nut inner snapring
groove.
7
Figure 7. LPT Coupling Nut Start Fixture, 1C9617
Change 4 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
(e) Loosen LPT coupling nut until disengaged from threads. Remove LPT coupling nut
and discard.
I. Separate LPT module from gas turbine as follows (figure 8):
(1) Install plunger tube, 1C9327P11, into LPT rotor shaft so that forward end of tube seats
against mid shaft assembly.
(2) Install remaining portion of LPT module mid shaft puller, 1C9327, so that slots in
adapter, 1C9327P03, slide over capscrews in sleeve adapter, 1C9316. Turn adapter coun-
terclockwise to lock.
WARNING
and fittings.
NOTE
If difficulty occurs during LPT module removal, alternate puller,

1C9650, may be used.
(3) Apply hydraulic pressure until LPT module moves aft approximately 0.75 inch
(19.1 mm). Ensure that LPT moves freely, indicating it is not held by press fit diameters.
If LPT will not move, proceed as follows:
(a) Release pressure. Remove puller, 1C9327, and plunger tube, 1C9327P11.
8
(b) Install plunger tube, 1C9650P02, sheet 2, forward end into LPT shaft until aft end of
tube is inside aft face of LPT shaft.
(c) Attach horizontal adjustable lift fixture, 1C9627, to lift ring on hydraulic cylinder
and adapter, 1C9650P03, assembly.
WARNING
(d) Align large holes in adapter, 1C9650P03, with bolts of LPT rotor shaft sleeve
adapter, 1C9316P03. Push adapter against sleeve adapter and rotate hydraulic cylin-
der to lock cylinder to LPT shaft.
14 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
Figure 8. LPT Module Mid Shaft Puller (Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 8. LPT Module Mid Shaft Puller (Sheet 2 of 2)
Change 4 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
(e) Attach hand pump to hydraulic cylinder coupler and actuate cylinder. LPT module
must move 1 inch (25.4 mm) to disengage from rabbet fit.
(4) Remove LPT module mid shaft puller, 1C9327 or 1C9650.
(5) Adjust center of gravity on horizontal adjustable lift fixture, 1C9627.
WARNING

(6) Using knurled nut, ensure jack assembly, 1C9447, under compressor rear frame (CRF),
is snug in place. Tighten rod-end nut one additional turn. Lift strongback, 1C9613, until
dynamometer or load cell indicates combined weight of LPT module, strongback, and
lift fixture, 1C9627, approximately 7,000 lb (3,175 kg). Check pins at turbine rear frame
(TRF) for easy removal. If pins cannot be removed, readjust jack assembly. Lift strong-
back until dynamometer or load cell indicates combined LPT module, strongback, and
lift fixture weight again. Repeat process until pins at TRF are not loaded. Remove pins
and move LPT module aft, taking care to level module during removal, until clear of
engine.
(7) Remove shim from mid shaft rear flange. Record shim part number or thickness.
J. Install LPT module into LPT module storage dolly, 1C9632, per WP 3017 00 or install in
shipping container per WP 3017 00.
K. Deleted.
L. Deleted.
M. If LPT module will not be installed shortly, install mid shaft pilot, 1C9610, onto mid shaft.
16 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
7. Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module Inspection.

NOTE
Some LPT modules contain a bushing on the aft shaft inner pilot diam-
eter (figure 9). Inspection of the shaft for bushing axial movement is
required prior to LPT module installation.
A. Inspect LPT aft shaft for steps on surface B (figure 10):
Inspect Max Serviceable Max Repairable Action

Steps on Surface B 0.050 in. (1.27 mm) Any amount Reseat bushing per
paragraph 8
B. Alternate Inspection - If step on surface B is present, measure axial position of aft shaft
bushing (figure 10):
Inspect Max Serviceable Max Repairable Action

Axial position of aft 0.690 in. (17.53 mm) Any amount Reseat bushing per
shaft bushing paragraph 8
10
9
8. Bushing Reseating Procedure.
A. Assemble tool, 1C9651, as follows:
(1) For forward portion of tool, attach push plate (1, figure 11, Detail A) to nylon guide (2)
using three capscrews (3), provided. Thread handle (4) into push plate.
11
NOTE
Ensure small chamfer on backing plate (5) is located facing forward.
(2) For aft portion of tool, assemble backing plate (5) to guide rod (6). Assemble three guide
plates (7) and seven nuts (8) per figure 11.
B. Reseat bushing as follows:
(1) Insert aft portion of tool, backing plate (5) first, into aft LPT shaft bore until plate seats
on aft face of bushing.
(2) Insert forward portion of tool into forward end of LPT shaft, over guide rod (6), and seat
against bushing.
(3) Thread nut (8) onto forward end of guide rod (6) and tighten with hand wrench.
Change 4 17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
Figure 9. LPT Aft Shaft Bushing Location
18 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
Figure 10. LPT Aft Shaft Inspection Criteria
Change 4 19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
Figure 11. LPT Rotor Shaft Bushing Reseating
20 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
NOTE
Ensure guide rod (6) is centered before applying additional torque.
(4) Tighten nut (8) against LPT aft shaft to 25 lb ft (34 N·m).
NOTE
Each turn of nut (8) is worth approximately 0.090 inch (2.3 mm).
(5) Tighten nut (8) until torque starts to dramatically increase. Back off nut, remove tooling,
and inspect bushing for correct seating.
(6) Repeat reseat procedure until bushing is fully seated.
(7) Remove forward and aft portions of tool.
9. Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module Installation.
A. Install strongback, 1C9613, as follows (figure 1):
(1) If removed, install rear drive adapter, 1C9609, onto aft spacer seal.
(2) Install lifteye in shaft adapter ring.
WARNING

(3) Using overhead hoist, lift shaft adapter ring into position on rear drive adapter assembly,
1C9609. Using 14 equally spaced bolts and nuts, secure adapter ring onto adapter assem-
bly. Tighten nuts to 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m) of torque.
(4) Remove lifteye.
(5) Using adjustable horizontal lift fixture, 1C9627, and dynamometer or load cell between
hoist and horizontal lift fixture, lift strongback, 1C9613, into position.
Change 4 21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
CAUTION
carrier or shaft adapter ring before installing strongback retaining
screws.
(6) Secure strongback, 1C9613, onto outer seal carrier with screws and washers. Tighten
screws to 160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
(7) Turn LPT rotor to align alignment hole on shaft adapter ring with radial slot at
10:00 o'clock position on strongback. Install quick-release pin.
(8) Install nut ring, 1C9613P06, onto shaft adapter ring. Tighten nut until seated against
shaft adapter ring flange.
(9) Install four lock blocks, 1C9613P05. Secure lock blocks, 1C9613P05, with screws.
B. If installed, remove forward restrain fixture, 1C9338.
NOTE
If same LPT module, stage 2 HPT nozzle, and combustion chamber are
installed, disregard step C.
C. Determine required thickness of LPT shim as follows:
(1) Calculate dimension A as follows, using figure 12 and worksheet from figure 13:
13
12
(a) Thread parallel bar, 1C9620P02, onto LP mid shaft. Bar shall be tight against LPT
rotor shaft seating flange (surface AH) of LP mid shaft.
(b) Position centering collar and support fixture, 1C9622, so support frame,
1C9622P02, feet interface with HPT stator case aft flange. If necessary, lower
adjusting plate, 1C9622P03, by turning hand knob, 1C9622P08. Align countersunk
holes in frame feet and flange holes. Insert capscrews into countersinks and secure
onto forward side of stator case flange with washers and nuts, sheet 2. Tighten nuts
(c) Use hand knob, 1C9622P08, to raise adjusting plate, 1C9622P03, to bring LPTR
mid shaft to required level. If necessary, apply slight upward force at aft end of shaft.
Tighten nuts (figure 12, sheet 1).
22 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
Figure 12. Dimension A Measurement (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 4 23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
Figure 12. Dimension A Measurement (Sheet 2 of 2)
24 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
Figure 13. LPT Installation Worksheet
Change 4 25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
(d) Using vernier depth gage, 1C9620P04, take four drop measurements from aft sur-
face of parallel bar (surface AH) to HPT stator support aft face at 2:00, 4:00, 8:00,
and 10:00 o’clock position locations by turning the assembled core section 90
degrees after each measurement. Record measurements as dimension A1.
(e) Average four A1 measurements and record as dimension A2.
(f) Subtract thickness of parallel bar (stamped on bar) from A2 and record as
dimension A3.
NOTE
The 0.093 inch (2.36 mm) equals stage 2 shroud support thickness
(0.063 inch [1.60 mm]) and depth of HPT stator support cooling scal-
lops (0.030 inch [0.76 mm]).
(g) Subtract 0.093 inch (2.36 mm) from A3 and record as dimension A.
(2) Obtain dimension J02 from LPT module build record or as marked on LPT case. Dimen-
sion J02 is marked on case at 9:00 o’clock position, adjacent to T48 probe boss, approxi-
mately 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) aft of case forward flange.
(3) Determine difference between J02 and dimension A. Subtract J02 from dimension A.
Record result as calculated shim thickness. See LPT installation worksheet on figure 13.
(4) Calculate shim thickness based on figure 13. Record result as calculated shim thickness.
(5) Remove parallel bar, 1C9620P02 and centering collar, 1C9622.
(6) Use calculated shim thickness to select required LPT shim from table 1. If calculated
shim is not within range of shims shown, select shim closest to calculated shim
thickness.
26 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
Table 1. LPT Shim Thickness
Thickness Shim P Number

Inch (mm) (PN L47865)
0.098-0.102 (2.49-2.59) P03
0.108-0.112 (2.74-2.84) P04
0.118-0.122 (3.00-3.10) P05
0.128-0.132 (3.25-3.35) P06
0.138-0.142 (3.51-3.61) P07
0.148-0.152 (3.76-3.86) P08
0.158-0.162 (4.01-4.11) P09
0.168-0.172 (4.27-4.37) P10
0.178-0.182 (4.52-4.62) P11
0.188-0.192 (4.78-4.88) P12
D. Determine calculated LPT seating check dimension AJ as follows. See figure 14 and work-
sheet on figure 13.
14
(1) Measure length of coupling nut at one location. Mark point of measurement on aft face
with marking pen. Record as dimension THK.
(2) Measure thickness of shim at four equally spaced locations. Average four measurements
and record as dimension AST.
(3) Measure thickness of LPT shaft seating flange at four equally spaced locations. Average
four measurements and record as dimension ST.
(4) Add dimensions THK, AST, and ST and record as dimension TAS.
(5) Measure length from end of LP mid shaft to surface AH at four equally spaced locations.
Average four measurements and record as dimension AG.
(6) Determine difference between dimensions TAS and AG. Record result as calculated
dimension AJ.
E. Install guide clamps, 2C14693, onto HPT stator case aft flange at 12:00, 3:00, 6:00, and
9:00 o’clock positions. Tighten thumbscrews. See figure 15.
15
Change 4 27

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
Figure 14. Calculate LPT Seating Check Measurements
28 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
Figure 15. LPT Module Guide Installation
Change 4 29

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
F. Deleted.
G. Install LPT module as follows:
CAUTION
Ensure coupling nut has correct size threads prior to final installa-
tion. An oversized nut may back off during gas turbine operation.
16
Figure 16. Deleted.
(1) Measure LPT coupling nut minor thread diameter. See figure 17. Take measurement at
three axial locations on threads. Average of these three measurements shall not exceed
4.376 inches (111.2 mm). Replace LPT coupling nut if this requirement is not met.
17
Figure 17. LPT Coupling Nut Inspection
30 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
WARNING

(2) Using clean cloth, and isopropyl alcohol, clean thread and seating surface of LPT cou-
pling nut and threads, seating surface, and splines of mid shaft assembly.
(3) Apply visible coat of dry film lubricant onto mid shaft assembly pilot. No overspray of
spray lubricant allowed on shaft mating surfaces, splines, or threads. Allow coating to
dry 1 hour prior to further assembly of fan mid shaft.
(4) Apply generous coat of thread lubricant onto threads and forward face of LPT coupling
nut and onto threads of mid shaft assembly.
(6) Install shim into LPT rotor shaft until shim contacts seating shoulder. Align shim so that
maximum thickness is located 180 degrees from H mark on fan midshaft.
(7) Rotate LPC rotor to align forward drive adapter M mark with M mark on spacer seal/rear
drive adapter. See figure 18.
18
WARNING
Use thermal gloves when you move or touch hot parts. Hot parts
can cause injury.
(8) Heat inside pilot diameter of LPT rotor shaft to 325 to 400°F (162.8 to 204.4°C) using
dry heat.
Change 4 31

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
Figure 18. Rear Drive Adapter M Mark
WARNING

(9) Lift LPT module and observe weight of strongback, 1C9613, combination. Move LPT
module forward, aligning M marks. Carefully engage splines of mid shaft assembly.
Ensure M marks remain aligned. Do not remove hoist loading until pins at TRF are fully
loaded. Ensure dynamometer or load cell does not indicate less than weight observed
above. Install pins at TRF. Snug TRF posts to take weight of LPT module by adjusting
threaded risers. Tighten pedestal retaining nuts to 70-80 lb ft (95-108 N·m) of torque.
After all fasteners are properly torqued and engine is fully supported at front and aft
ends, jack assembly, 1C9419, may be removed. Remove loading from jack assembly by
adjusting rod-end nut.
H. Install guide protector, 1C9316P04, so that tabs engage slots in LPT rotor shaft (figure 19).
19
I. Start LPT coupling nut onto mid shaft assembly using LPT coupling nut start fixture,
1C9617. See figure 20.
20
32 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
Figure 19. LPT Rotor Shaft Guide Protector, 1C9316P04

21
J. Install LPT shaft coupling nut torque fixture, 1C9619, as follows (figure 21):
(1) Install torque tube, 1C9619P03, of torque fixture, 1C9619, through LPT rotor shaft.
Align torque tube so that teeth of tube engage slots of LPT coupling nut.
(2) Push indexing tube, 1C9619P02, forward and rotate, if necessary, to engage tab on tube
with slot in mid shaft assembly.
(3) Install mounting plate, 1C9619P06, onto strongback fixture, 1C9613, and secure with
two mounting screws. Tighten mounting screws finger-tight.
(4) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8100/8112, onto mounting plate, 1C9613P06,
so that splines engage torque tube splines. Secure torque multiplier to mounting plate,
1C9619P06, with two locking screws.
K. Tighten LPT coupling nut as follows:
(1) Tighten LPT coupling nut to 2,000 lb ft (2,712 N·m) of torque. Record wrench angle at
this torque.
Change 4 33

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
Figure 20. LPT Coupling Nut Installation
34 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
Figure 21. LPT Shaft Coupling Nut Torque Fixture, 1C9619
CAUTION
Do not exceed 7,500 lb ft (10,169 N·m) maximum torque or a maxi-

mum wrench angle of 30 degrees from angle recorded in step (1).
(2) Continue tightening to wrench angle 26 degrees beyond wrench angle recorded in
step (1). Do not exceed maximum torque value of 7,500 lb ft (10,169 N·m).
(3) Check alignment of LPT coupling nut and mid shaft assembly slots.
(4) Continue tightening until slots align. Marks on tool must align or retaining ring cannot
be installed. Do not exceed maximum torque of 7,500 lb ft (10,169 N·m) or maximum
angle of 30 degrees beyond wrench angle recorded in step (1).
(5) Remove torque multiplier and all components of torque fixture, 1C9619.
L. Check LPT module installation using seat check fixture, 1C9616, as follows (figures 22
and 23):
23
22
(1) Secure gage master, 1C9616P03, to seat check fixture, 1C9616, with thumbscrew. Set
dial indicator to zero. Remove gage master from seat check fixture.
Change 4 35

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
Figure 22. LPT Coupling Nut Seating Check
36 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
Figure 23. LPT Seating Check Dimension AJ
(2) Position seat check fixture, 1C9616, into LPT in order to measure from marked LPT
coupling nut castellation aft surface. Hold firmly in place.
NOTE
A negative reading indicates the LPT coupling nut is forward of the LP

mid shaft end. A positive reading indicates the LPT coupling nut is aft
of the LP mid shaft end.
(3) Read coupling nut position directly from dial indicator and record as measured dimen-
sion AJ. See figure 23 and worksheet on figure 13.
(4) Measured dimension AJ must be 0.002-0.010 inch (0.05-0.25 mm) less than calculated
dimension AJ. If dimension AJ is not with in limits, proceed as follows:
(a) Verify seat check fixture, 1C9616, with gage master, 1C9616P03, and check LPT
module installation per steps (1) through (3). Check all calculations used to deter-
mine calculated dimension AJ.
(b) If measured dimension AJ is still not within limits, this indicates that LPT module is
not correctly installed. Remove LPT module and check dimensions per steps C and
D. Reinstall LPT module and check installation per this paragraph.
Change 4 37

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
M. Install LPT coupling nut retaining ring, as follows (figure 24).

24
(1) Install retaining ring onto pins of retainer ring installation fixture, 1C9618.
(2) Turn knurled knob of retainer ring installation fixture, 1C9618, to compress retaining
ring.
(3) Insert retaining ring into LPT rotor coupling nut and mid shaft assembly slots.
(4) Turn knurled knob of retainer ring installation fixture, 1C9618, to release ring.
(5) Optional: Insert flexible borescope into guide tube at rear of retainer ring installation fix-
ture, 1C9618, to verify retaining ring is seated in coupling nut.
(6) Rotate retainer ring installation fixture, 1C9618, slightly and pull aft to remove from
LPT shaft.
N. Remove guide clamps, 2C14693, from HPT stator case.
O. Lubricate bolt threads with thread lubricant. Install nuts, bolts, spacers, and brackets that
secure LPT module to HPT module. Tighten nuts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque.
Refer to SWP 1913 03.
P. Remove guide protector, 1C9316P04, from LPT rotor shaft.
Q. If adapter nut was removed, install adapter nut as follows (figure 25):
25
WARNING

(1) Using isopropyl alcohol, clean threads and mating surfaces of adapter nut and LPT rotor
shaft. Inspect adapter nut threads to ensure threads are free of damage and high metal.
(2) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and forward face of adapter nut and onto threads of
LPT rotor shaft.
CAUTION
Adapter nut shall be able to be tightened by hand.
(3) Install adapter nut onto LPT rotor shaft. Hand-tighten nut.
38 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
Figure 24. LPT Coupling Nut Retaining Ring Installation
Change 4 39

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
Figure 25. Rear Drive Adapter Nut Removal/Installation
40 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
(4) Install adapter nut fixture, 1C9336, over adapter nut and secure with nuts. Tighten nuts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(5) Install mounting plate, 1C9619P06, over adapter nut fixture, 1C9336. Secure mounting
plate onto strongback, 1C9613, with mounting screws. Tighten mounting screws finger-
tight.
(6) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8100/8112.
(7) Tighten adapter nut as follows:
(a) Seat adapter nut to 2,000 lb ft (2,712 N·m) of torque. Loosen adapter nut.
(b) Tighten adapter nut to 250 lb ft (339 N·m) above run-on torque. Record wrench
angle at this torque.
(c) Continue tightening to wrench angle 21 degrees beyond wrench angle recorded in
step (b).
(d) Check alignment of adapter nut and LPT rotor shaft slots.
CAUTION
Do not exceed maximum torque value of 8,500 lb ft (11,525 N·m) or

a maximum angle of 24 degrees from wrench angle recorded in
step (b).
(e) Continue tightening until adapter nut slots align with LPT rotor shaft slots. Do not
exceed maximum of 8,500 lb ft (11,525 N·m) or maximum angle of 24 degrees from
wrench angle recorded in step (b).
(8) Remove torque multiplier, mounting plate, 1C9619P06, and adapter nut fixture, 1C9336.
(9) Measure from rear face of adapter nut to rear face of LPT shaft using depth micrometer.
Record as dimension AF on worksheet (figure 13). Dimension shall be within 0.005 inch
(0.13 mm) of calculated or previously recorded dimension AF in step D. See figure 26.
26
R. Remove strongback, 1C9613, as follows (figure 27):
27
(1) Remove bolts that secure lock blocks, 1C9613P05, to strongback, 1C9613. Remove lock
blocks.
(2) Remove nut ring, 1C9613P06.
Change 4 41

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
Figure 26. Rear Drive Adapter Nut Installation Seating Check Measurement
42 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2710 00
Figure 27. LPT Module Lift, Turn, and Restrain Strongback, 1C9613
Change 4 43

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2710 00
CAUTION
carrier or shaft adapter ring after removing strongback retaining
screws.
(3) Remove washers and screws that secure strongback, 1C9613, to outer seal carrier.
WARNING
(4) Move strongback, 1C9613, aft away from LPT module. Lower strongback, 1C9613, for-
ward end down, onto pallet or store on LPT module storage dolly, 1C9632. Remove
quick-release pin securing strongback onto adjustable horizontal lift fixture, 1C9627.
Remove lift fixture and dynamometer or load cell from overhead hoist.
(5) Install lifteye in shaft adapter ring, 1C9613P04. Connect an overhead hoist to lifteye.
(6) Remove nuts and bolts that secure shaft adapter ring, 1C9613P04, to rear drive adapter
assembly, 1C9609. Lower shaft adapter ring to pallet. Remove lifteye.
S. Deleted.
T. Install keyed ring.
U. Install aft shaft cap and secure with nuts. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
V. Install electrical leads and tubing per SWP 1913 03.
44 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2711 00
5WP 2711 00
WORK PACKAGE
REAR DRIVE ADAPTER OR AFT SEAL SPACER
REPLACEMENT
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 GAS TURBINE MODELS


1 - 16 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Aft Adapter Nut Installation ....................................................................................................... 14

Rear Drive Adapter or Aft Seal Spacer Installation.................................................................... 8
Rear Drive Adapter or Aft Seal Spacer Removal........................................................................ 4
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2711 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing a rear drive adapter or an
aft seal spacer.
B. This work package also allows switching of a rear drive adapter with an aft seal spacer or an
aft seal spacer with a rear drive adapter.
Title Number

Torque Fixture (PA/PB), Shaft Coupling 1C9309G03
Nut, Low Pressure Turbine (LPT)
Puller, LPT Module Midshaft 1C9327G03
Strongback Fixture (PA/PB), Lift, Turn 1C9328G01
and Restrain, Low Pressure Turbine
Puller Plate, Aft Drive Adapter 1C9329G02
Nut Fixture, Aft Drive Shaft 1C9336G01
Assembly, Rear Drive Adapter 1C9609G01
Strongback Fixture (PC/PD), Lift, Turn 1C9613G02
and Restrain, Low Pressure Turbine
Torque Fixture, LPT Shaft Coupling Nut 1C9619G01
Lift and Remove Fixture, Aft Seal Spacer 1C9642G01
Lift and Remove Fixture, Aft Seal Spacer 1C9643G01
Torque Multiplier 8100
Torque Multiplier 8112
Depth Gage, Vernier
Depth Micrometer
Heat Gun
Torque Wrench, Advanced Hydraulics,
Model AH-1043
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2711 00
Isopropyl Alcohol TT-I-735
(Black or Blue)
Safety Wire R297P04
Thread Lubricant GP460 (GE Spec
A50TF201)
None required.
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2711 00
6. Rear Drive Adapter or Aft Seal Spacer Removal.
A. Remove aft adapter nut per GEK 105061, WP 2710 00.
NOTE
• For rear drive adapter configuration, perform step B. and skip

step C. For aft seal spacer configuration models, skip step B. and
perform step C.
• Due to space constraints in package, use of Advanced Hydraulics

Model AH-1043 hydraulic torque wrench is recommended.
B. Remove rear drive adapter as follows:
(1) Using marking pen, matchmark rear drive adapter to LPT rotor shaft and rear drive
adapter to rear drive adapter flange cover.
(2) Remove bolts and self-locking nuts securing rear drive adapter flange cover to rear drive
adapter. Remove rear drive adapter flange cover. Retain rear drive adapter flange cover,
bolts, and self-locking nuts for reuse.
(3) Install reaction plate, 1C9329P04 (figure 1), into LPT rotor shaft.
(4) Install LPT module midshaft puller, 1C9327, onto drive adapter puller plate,
1C9329P02, by sliding midshaft puller slots over puller plate capscrews and turning LPT
module midshaft puller counterclockwise to lock.
WARNING
(5) Using overhead hoist attached to LPT module midshaft puller lift ring, position drive
adapter puller plate, P02, onto rear drive adapter. Using hex nuts, MS51972-6, and
slabbed head bolts, 1C9613P07, obtained from strongback fixture, 1C9613, secure drive
adapter puller plate to rear drive adapter. Do not install bolts in three holes at 12:00
o'clock position.
(6) Using three capscrews, MS35308-446, and hex nuts, MS51972-6, secure fixture,
1C9643, to drive adapter puller plate, 1C9329P02, and rear drive adapter. Attach over-
head hoist to fixture.
(7) Install hydraulic pressure source to LPT module midshaft puller, 1C9327.
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2711 00
Figure 1. Rear Drive Adapter Removal
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2711 00
WARNING

and fittings.
(8) Apply hydraulic pressure until rear drive adapter is free from LPT rotor shaft.
(9) Release hydraulic pressure.
(10) Remove rear drive adapter and tooling.
C. Remove aft seal spacer as follows:
(1) Using capscrews, NAS1352-8-36 (figure 2), flat washers, AN960-C816, under screw-
heads, and hex nuts, MS51971-5, install rear drive adapter onto aft seal spacer.
(2) Install reaction plate, 1C9329P04, into LPT rotor shaft.
(3) Install LPT module midshaft puller, 1C9327, onto drive adapter puller plate,
1C9329P02, by sliding midshaft puller slots over puller plate capscrews and turning LPT
module midshaft puller counterclockwise to lock.
WARNING

(4) Using overhead hoist attached to LPT module midshaft puller, 1C9327, lift ring, position
drive adapter puller plate, 1C9329P02, on rear drive adapter assembly, 1C9609. Using
hex nuts, MS51972-6, and slabbed head bolts, 1C9613P07, obtained from strongback
fixture, 1C9613, secure drive adapter puller plate to rear drive adapter assembly. Do not
install bolts in three holes at 12:00 o’clock position.
(5) Using three capscrews, MS35308-446, and hex nuts, MS51972-6, secure fixture,
1C9643, to drive adapter puller plate, 1C9329P02. Attach overhead hoist to fixture sling
link.
(6) Install hydraulic pressure source to LPT module midshaft puller, 1C9327.
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2711 00
Figure 2. Aft Seal Spacer Removal
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2711 00
WARNING

and fittings.
(7) Apply hydraulic pressure until aft seal spacer is free from LPT rotor shaft.
(8) Release hydraulic pressure.
(9) Remove aft seal spacer and tooling.
(10) Using isopropyl alcohol, clean thread and splines of LPT rotor shaft.
(11) Using marking pen, mark area of key slot of balance piston on LPT rotor shaft splines.
Move mark to most aft point of LPT rotor shaft.
7. Rear Drive Adapter or Aft Seal Spacer Installation.
A. Install aft seal spacer/rear drive adapter as follows:
(1) Calculate aft seal spacer/rear drive adapter installation measurement as follows:
NOTE
Refer to figure 3 for rear drive adapter measurements and

figure 4 for aft seal spacer measurements.
(a) Measure stack-up thickness of aft seal spacer or rear drive adapter. Record as
dimension AB (figure 5).
(b) Measure stack-up thickness of adapter nut. Record as dimension AC (figure 5).
(c) Measure drop dimension from LPT shaft aft tang to balance piston aft surface.
Record dimension AD (figure 5).
(d) Add dimension AB to dimension AC and subtract sum from dimension AD. Record
as calculated dimension AF (figure 5).
(2) If installed, matchmark rear drive adapter flange cover to rear drive adapter using mark-
ing pen. Remove rear drive adapter flange cover from rear drive adapter.
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2711 00
Figure 3. LM6000 PA/PB Balance Piston Installation Dimensions
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2711 00
Figure 4. LM6000 PC/PD Balance Piston Installation Dimensions
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2711 00
Figure 5. Balance Piston/Rear Drive Adapter Installation Worksheet
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2711 00
NOTE
To install rear drive adapter, proceed to substep (3). To install aft seal
spacer, proceed to substep (4).
(3) Attach drive adapter puller plate, 1C9329P02, and fixture, 1C9643, to rear drive adapter
as follows (figure 1):
(a) Using capscrews, MS35308-446, and hex nuts, MS51972-6, secure lifting plate,
1C9643P02, and drive adapter puller plate, 1C9329P02, to rear drive adapter.
WARNING

(b) Attach hoist to sling link and raise rear drive adapter to the vertical position.
(c) If CG adjustment is required, loosen jamnuts, MS35691-75, and move lifting plate,
1C9643P02, in direction required. Tighten jamnuts when correct position is
attained.
(d) Proceed to step 5. to install rear drive adapter.
(4) Attach fixture, 1C9642, as follows (figure 6):
(a) Using capscrews, .375-24 UNF-3A X 1.75 inch long, and flat washers,
MS9321-12, secure lifting plate, 1C9642P02, to three balance weight holes on aft
flange of aft seal spacer.
WARNING

(b) Attach hoist to sling link and raise aft seal spacer to vertical position.
(c) If CG adjustment is required, loosen jamnuts, MS35691-75, and move CG adjusting

plate, 1C9642P03, in direction required. Tighten jamnuts when correct position is
attained.
(d) Proceed to step 5 to install aft seal spacer.
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2711 00
Figure 6. LM6000 Aft Seal Spacer Lift and Remove Fixture, 1C9642
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2711 00
WARNING
(5) Heat aft seal spacer or rear drive adapter using heat gun to 350°F (176.6°C) for
30 minutes minimum.
CAUTION
Assure balance piston slot marking is identified on LPT rotor shaft
prior to installation of adapter, or incorrect installation may occur.
(6) Install aft seal spacer or rear drive adapter to the LPT rotor shaft, aligning key on rear
drive adapter to slot mark on LPT rotor shaft. Remove tooling used to position aft seal
spacer or rear drive adapter.
8. Aft Adapter Nut Installation.
A. For aft seal spacer configurations only, install rear drive assembly adapter, 1C9609, onto aft
seal spacer using capscrews, NAS1352-8-36, flat washers, AN960-C816, and hex nuts,
MS51971-5 (figure 2).
WARNING

B. Lift shaft adapter ring, 1C9328P04 or 1C9613P04 (figure 7), into position on rear drive
assembly or rear drive adapter assembly, 1C9609, using an overhead hoist. Secure shaft
adapter ring with eight equally spaced slabbed head bolts, 1C9328P07 or 1C9613P07, and
hex nuts, MS51972-6. Tighten nuts to 55-65 lb ft (74.6-88.1 N·m) of torque.
WARNING

C. Clean retaining nut and rotor shaft threads with isopropyl alcohol.
D. Lightly coat threads and forward face of adapter nut and threads of LPT rotor shaft with
thread lubricant.
E. Install adapter nut onto LPT rotor shaft. Tighten adapter nut finger-tight.
F. Install adapter nut fixture, 1C9336, over studs in adapter nut and secure using seven nuts,
MS51972-1. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2711 00
Figure 7. Adapter Nut Installation
Change 5 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2711 00
G. Install mounting plate, 1C9309P06 for rear drive adapter configurations or 1C9619P06 for aft
seal spacer configurations over adapter nut fixture, 1C9336. Secure mounting plate to shaft
adapter ring, 1C9328P04 or 1C9613P04, using mounting screws, 1C9309P07 or 1C9619P07.
Tighten mounting screws finger-tight.
H. Install torque multiplier onto adapter nut fixture, 1C9336, and mounting plate, 1C9309P06 or
1C9619P06.
I. Tighten adapter nut as follows:
(1) Seat adapter nut to 2,000 lb ft (2,711 N·m) of torque. Loosen adapter nut.
(2) Tighten adapter nut to 250 lb ft (339 N·m) above run-on torque. Record wrench angle at
this torque.
(3) Continue tightening to wrench angle 21 degrees beyond wrench angle recorded in sub-
step (2).
(4) Check alignment of adapter nut and LPT rotor shaft slots.
CAUTION
Do not exceed maximum torque value of 8,500 lb ft (11,524 N·m) of

torque or maximum angle of 24 degrees from wrench angle recorded
in substep (2) or damage to LPT module may result.
(5) Continue tightening until adapter nut slots align with LPT rotor shaft slots. Do not
exceed maximum of 8,500 lb ft (11,524 N·m) of torque or maximum angle of 24 degrees
beyond wrench angle recorded in substep (2).
J. Remove torque multiplier, mounting plate, 1C9309P06 or 1C9619P06, shaft adapter ring,
1C9328P04 or 1C9613P04, and adapter nut fixture, 1C9336.
K. Using depth micrometer, measure from rear face of adapter nut to rear face of LPT rotor
shaft. Record as measured dimension AF (figure 5).
L. Compare measured dimension AF to calculated dimension AF. The two values shall be
within 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) of each other.
M. Install keyed ring to adapter nut and LPT rotor shaft.
N. Using self-locking nuts, J626P04, secure aft shaft cap to LPT rotor shaft. Tighten self-lock-
ing nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.5-7.9 N·m) of torque.
O. If rear drive adapter flange cover was removed in step 6.B.(2), secure rear drive adapter
flange cover to rear drive adapter using bolts, L45045P01, and self-locking nuts, J626P09B
or J626P09D. Ensure matchmarks on rear drive adapter flange cover and rear drive adapter
align. Tighten self-locking nuts to 480-570 lb in. (54.3-64.4 N·m) of torque.
16 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2810 00
2WP 2810 00
WORK PACKAGE
RADIAL DRIVE SHAFT REPLACEMENT


1 - 10 ...... 2
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Radial Drive Shaft Installation.................................................................................................... 6

Radial Drive Shaft Removal........................................................................................................ 3
Change 2 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2810 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the radial drive shaft.
Title Number

Tool Set, Radial Drive Shaft 1C6361G01

Ring, Retaining 705B276P5 1
2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2810 00
6. Radial Drive Shaft Removal.
A. Remove radial drive shaft spacer as follows:
WARNING

(1) Position waste fluid container under transfer gearbox drain. Remove drain plug and drain
oil. See figure 1. Remove and discard preformed packing from drain plug.
(2) Lubricate new preformed packing with lubricating oil and install on drain plug.
(3) Install drain plug into transfer gearbox assembly. Tighten drain plug to 60-80 lb in.
(6.8-9.0 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire drain plug.
(4) Place waste fluid container under radial cover assembly. Remove nuts and washers that
secure radial cover assembly. Using jackscrews, carefully remove radial cover assembly.
Remove and discard preformed packing.
1
Figure 1. Drain Plug and Radial Cover Assembly
Change 2 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2810 00
(5) Using flat-tipped screwdriver, unwind retaining ring from groove in bottom of bevel
gearshaft.
(6) Assemble radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, as follows (figure 2):
2
(a) Turn handnut counterclockwise until no threads are visible at end of rod between
handnut and T-handle.
(b) Place sleeve onto rod against handnut.
(c) Assemble washer, expandable plug, and retainer onto socket head screw. Ensure
retainer fits over end of expandable plug. Install socket head screw into end of rod
and tighten finger-tight.
(d) Turn handnut clockwise until seated snugly against sleeve.
(7) Insert radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, into gearbox opening so expandable plug goes
through center of radial drive shaft spacer. Lift tool upwards as far as possible.
(8) Hold T-handle of rod and turn handnut clockwise to expand expandable plug snugly
inside spacer.
CAUTION
Radial drive shaft may fall suddenly after removal of radial drive
shaft spacer. Hand should be held under gearbox opening to prevent
damage to drive shaft.
(9) Pull down on radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, to remove radial drive shaft spacer from
bevel gearshaft. Remove radial drive shaft, by hand, if radial drive shaft comes out with
radial drive shaft spacer.
(10) Loosen handnut and remove radial drive shaft spacer from radial drive shaft tool,
1C6361.
(11) Remove preformed packing from radial drive shaft spacer. Remove and discard pre-
formed packing.
(12) Remove socket head screw, retainer, expandable plug, and washer from radial drive shaft
tool, 1C6361.
4 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2810 00
Figure 2. Radial Drive Shaft Spacer Removal Using Radial Drive Shaft Tool, 1C6361
Change 2 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2810 00
NOTE
If radial drive shaft fails to come out during spacer removal, remove
radial drive per step B.
B. Remove radial drive shaft as follows (figure 3):

3
(1) Assemble collet and draw screw onto end of rod. Tighten draw screw finger-tight.
(2) Insert radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, into gearbox opening so that collet enters center of
radial drive shaft.
(3) Hold T-handle of rod and turn handnut clockwise to expand collet snugly into radial
drive shaft.
(4) Pull down on radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, to remove radial drive shaft from radial
drive shaft tool, 1C6361.
NOTE
Radial drive shaft binding during removal indicates possible transfer

gearbox assembly misalignment.
(5) Loosen handnut and remove radial drive shaft from radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361.
7. Radial Drive Shaft Installation.
A. Install radial drive shaft as follows:
(1) Assemble radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, as follows (figure 3):
(a) Turn handnut counterclockwise until no threads are visible at end of rod between
handnut and T-handle. Install sleeve onto rod against handnut.
(b) Assemble collet onto draw screw. Install draw screw into end of rod and tighten
finger-tight.
(2) Insert radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, into end of radial drive shaft opposite grooved
shear section. Hand-tighten handnut.
(3) Install radial drive shaft into transfer gearbox opening. Raise radial drive shaft as far as
possible. Slight turning may be required to engage splines.
(4) Move radial drive shaft up and down to ensure free axial movement. No binding is
allowed.
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2810 00
Figure 3. Radial Drive Shaft Removal Using Radial Drive Shaft Tool, 1C6361
Change 2 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2810 00
(5) If binding exists, perform the following:
(a) Loosen jamnuts on mount links until locking devices are disengaged.
CAUTION
Ensure locking devices remain disengaged during adjustment of

mount links.
(b) Adjust mount links to obtain free movement of drive shaft.
(c) Tighten jamnuts to 270-290 lb in. (30.5-32.8 N·m) of torque.
(d) Move radial drive shaft up and down to ensure that no binding exists.
(e) Check mount links for proper engagement of rod-end bearing threads by trying to
insert a No. 56 drill (0.055-inch [1.4 mm] diameter) through witness hole at each
end of turnbuckle. Drill shall not pass through.
(f) Safety-wire jamnuts to locking devices.
CAUTION
If left unsupported, radial drive shaft may fall out of transfer gear-
box.
(6) Loosen handnut and carefully withdraw radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361.
(7) Remove draw screw and collet from rod.
B. Using radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, install radial drive shaft spacer and retaining ring, as
follows (figure 4):
4
(1) Install new retaining ring into flanged end of retaining ring shaft.
(2) Using ring pusher, push retaining ring through retaining ring shaft to within
0.125-0.250 in. (3.18-6.35 mm) of end of shaft. Align cutout sections of shaft and
pusher.
(3) Install shaft and pusher over rod and sleeve.
(4) Assemble washer, expandable plug, and retainer onto socket head screw. Ensure retainer
fits over end of expandable plug. Install socket head screw into end of rod and tighten
finger-tight.
8 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2810 00
Figure 4. Radial Drive Shaft Spacer and Retaining Ring Installation Using Radial Drive Shaft Tool, 1C6361
Change 2 9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2810 00
WARNING

(5) Lubricate new preformed packing with lubricating oil and install onto radial drive shaft
spacer.
(6) Install radial drive shaft spacer onto expandable plug. Hand-tighten handnut.
(7) Insert radial drive shaft spacer into bottom of radial drive shaft. Turn radial drive shaft
tool cutouts to face aft.
(8) Raise radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, to position radial drive shaft and radial drive shaft
spacer as far into gearbox as possible.
(9) Hold T-handle and push retaining ring shaft upwards, as far as possible, and hold.
(10) Release T-handle and push ring pusher upwards, as far as possible, to position retaining
ring into groove of bevel gear.
(11) Pull down on radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, to seat radial drive shaft spacer against
retaining ring.
(12) Loosen handnut and remove radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361.
CAUTION
An improperly installed retaining ring can cause radial drive shaft

failure and gas turbine shutdown.
(13) Ensure retaining ring is properly installed in bevel gearshaft groove.
WARNING
(14) Lubricate new preformed packing with lubricating oil and install onto radial cover
assembly. See figure 1.
(15) Using washers and nuts, install radial cover assembly onto bottom of transfer gearbox
assembly. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
10 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2811 00
2WP 2811 00
WORK PACKAGE
TRANSFER GEARBOX ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT


1-7 ...... 2
8 Blank ...... 2
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Transfer Gearbox Assembly Installation .................................................................................... 5

Transfer Gearbox Assembly Removal ........................................................................................ 3
Change 2 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2811 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the transfer gearbox
assembly.
B. Disconnect and connect electrical leads and connecting tubes between transfer gearbox and
gas turbine per SWP 1913 01.
Title Number
Front Frame Module External Tubing, Harnesses, and SWP 1913 01
Clamping

Jack, Lowering - Engine Components 1C5654G03
Guide, Expandable Bushing 1C6119G01
Fixture, Instl/Removal - Access Gearbox, 1C6872G01
Horiz
Pusher, Bolt - Front Frame/TGB Fwd Mtg 1C6892G01
Bracket
Molybdenum Disulfide Lubricant GE Spec A50TF79
None required.
2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2811 00
6. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Removal.
CAUTION
When loosening hose clamp to reposition and retighten around

radial drive shaft housing, ensure clamp is not placed directly on
beaded end of adapter.
A. Loosen lower flexible housing clamp. See figure 1. Reposition clamp higher on flexible
housing and retighten to prevent clamp from falling.
1
B. Install installation/removal fixture, 1C6872, onto jack, 1C5654.
C. Position jack, 1C5654, under transfer gearbox assembly. Raise jack to position installa-
tion/removal fixture, 1C6872, against transfer gearbox assembly.
D. Continue raising jack, 1C5654, to support weight of transfer gearbox assembly.
E. Secure strap around forward side of transfer gearbox assembly between forward mount and
flexible housing adapter. Set floor locks on jack, 1C5654.
CAUTION
Ensure bolts are free turning prior to removal. Forceful removal of

bolts may damage gas turbine or transfer gearbox assembly.
F. Remove three nuts, washers, and bolts that secures transfer gearbox assembly onto links.
G. Remove nut from expandable bushing that secure front end of transfer gearbox assembly onto
gas turbine.
H. Retract screw of pusher, 1C6892, then engage clevis end of pusher around head of expand-
able bushing. See figure 2. Ensure that pusher is seated squarely against gearbox mount. Turn
pusher screw slowly to push out expandable bushing.
2
WARNING
Keep hands clear of moving parts when lowering jack or personal

injury could occur.
I. Lower jack, 1C5654, slowly until transfer gearbox assembly is clear of gas turbine.
J. Release floor locks on jack, 1C5654, and remove transfer gearbox assembly.
Change 2 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2811 00
Figure 1. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Replacement
4 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2811 00
Figure 2. Expandable Bushing Removal Using Pusher, 1C6892
7. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Installation.
A. Install installation/removal fixture, 1C6872, onto jack, 1C5654. Set floor locks on jack.
B. Install transfer gearbox assembly onto installation/removal fixture, 1C6872.
C. Secure strap around forward end of transfer gearbox assembly between forward mount and
flexible housing adapter.
D. Release floor locks on jack, 1C5654. Position transfer gearbox assembly under gas turbine.
Set floor locks on jack.
E. Raise jack, 1C5654, to position transfer gearbox assembly. Align mounting points and flexi-
ble housing adapter with flexible housing.
Change 2 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2811 00
NOTE
It may be necessary to release floor locks on jacks to position transfer

gearbox assembly. Always engage floor locks before continuing gear-
box raising operation.
F. Raise gearbox until flexible housing adapter is engaged in flexible housing and forward
mount expandable bushing can be installed.
G. Screw guide, 1C6119, onto expandable bushing until seated. See figure 3. Do not apply pres-
sure that could expand bushing. Insert expandable bushing, with guide, into forward gearbox
mount so bolthead is to left (forward looking aft). If necessary, lightly tap bolthead with plas-
tic mallet.
H. Remove guide. Install nut, but do not tighten at this time.
I. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto spherical bearings of mount and sway links.
J. Adjust gearbox, as required, to connect aft left mount link onto gearbox mount. See figure 1.
Install bolt, washer, and nut so that bolthead faces left (aft looking forward). Do not tighten
nut at this time.
3
Figure 3. Expandable Bushing Installation Using Guide, 1C6119
6 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2811 00
K. Adjust gearbox, as required, to connect right mount link onto gearbox mount. Ensure sleeve
bushing is present. Install bolt, washer, and nut so that bolthead faces right (aft looking for-
ward). Do not tighten nut at this time.
L. Connect sway link onto gearbox mount. Install bolt, washer, and nut so bolthead faces aft. Do
not tighten nut at this time.
M. Tighten forward mount bushing nut to 125-133 lb ft (169.5-180.3 N·m) of torque.
N. Tighten remaining mount and sway link nuts to 125-133 lb ft (169.5-180.3 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Keep hands clear of moving parts when lowering jack or personal

injury could occur.
O. Disconnect strap from around transfer gearbox assembly. Slowly lower jack, 1C5654.
Release floor locks and roll jack clear of gas turbine.
CAUTION
Radial drive shaft housing cuts caused by clamps can occur when
clamp is installed on housing surface directly over beaded end of
adapter. Ensure clamps are installed per figure 1.
P. Ensure that flexible housing is seated over flexible housing adapter. Loosen and lower clamp
to secure flexible housing to flexible housing adapter. Ensure clamp is placed on housing per
dimensions shown in view A of figure 1. Hand-tighten clamp but do not overtighten (housing
material shall not bulge around clamp).

8 Blank Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2812 00
2WP 2812 00
WORK PACKAGE
SPUR GEARSHAFT ASSEMBLIES REPLACEMENT


1 - 23 ...... 2
24 Blank . . . . . . 2
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Free Rotation Check.................................................................................................................... 21

Fuel Pump Spur Gearshaft Assembly Installation ...................................................................... 7
Fuel Pump Spur Gearshaft Assembly Removal.......................................................................... 5
Manual Drive Spur Gearshaft Installation .................................................................................. 16
Manual Drive Spur Gearshaft Removal ...................................................................................... 14
Preparation For Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 4
Starter Spur Gearshaft Assembly Installation ............................................................................. 13
Starter Spur Gearshaft Assembly Removal................................................................................. 11
Variable Geometry Hydraulic Pump Spur Gearshaft Installation............................................... 20
Variable Geometry Hydraulic Pump Spur Gearshaft Removal................................................... 18
Change 2 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2812 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing transfer gearbox assem-
bly spur gearshaft assemblies.
B. Remove gearbox mounted accessories as required to gain access per WPs 1812 00, 1814 00,
and 1815 00.
Title Number
Variable Geometry Hydraulic Pump Replacement WP 1812 00
Pneumatic Starter Replacement WP 1814 00
Hydraulic Starter and Distributor Assembly Replacement WP 1815 00
Accessory Gearbox Carbon Seals Replacement WP 2813 00

Tool Set, Assy/Disassy - Gearbox 1C6986G01
or Blue)
2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2812 00

Gasket, Seal J219P02A 1
Keywasher 9009M32P01 3
Ring, Internal Retaining 705B276P10 1
Ring, Retaining 705B276P5 1
Change 2 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2812 00
6. Preparation For Maintenance.
WARNING

A. Place waste fluid container under transfer gearbox drain. Remove drain plug and drain oil.
Discard preformed packing. See figure 1.
B. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto drain plug.
C. Install drain plug into transfer gearbox assembly. Tighten drain plug to 270-300 lb in.
(30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque.
1
Figure 1. Preparation for Maintenance
4 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2812 00
7. Fuel Pump Spur Gearshaft Assembly Removal.
CAUTION

A. Disconnect seal drain manifold from fitting on fuel pump adapter. Reposition seal drain
manifold.
B. Remove fitting and discard preformed packing.
C. If fuel pump cover is used, perform the following:
(1) Remove bolts, washers, fuel pump cover, and gasket from fuel pump drive pad, if
required. Discard gasket. See figure 2.
2
(2) Remove aft shaft seal assembly. Remove and discard preformed packing.
(3) Remove nut, adapter, and preformed packing from aft shaft seal assembly. Discard pre-
formed packing.
D. Remove safety wire. Remove bolts and washers that secure fuel pump adapter assembly onto
gearbox housing assembly.
CAUTION
Do not allow fuel pump adapter assembly flange to cock during

removal. Turning jackscrews evenly in small increments will prevent
cocking.
E. Using three jackscrews from tool set, 1C6986, remove fuel pump adapter assembly and pre-
formed packing. Discard preformed packing.
F. Using arbor press, remove spur gearshaft assembly from fuel pump adapter assembly.
CAUTION
If mating seal ring requires replacement, carbon seal must also be
replaced. Refer to WP 2813 00 for carbon seal replacement.
G. Remove mating seal ring.
Change 2 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2812 00
Figure 2. Fuel Pump Spur Gearshaft Assembly Replacement
6 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2812 00
CAUTION
Inner and outer races of roller bearing must be kept together as a

matched set, or bearing damage may occur.
H. Using arbor press, remove roller bearing inner race and rollers from spur gearshaft assembly.
I. Remove forward shaft seal assembly from spur gearshaft assembly. Remove and discard pre-
formed packing.
J. Remove nut, adapter, and preformed packing from forward shaft seal assembly. Discard pre-
formed packing.
K. Unbend keywasher tabs. Remove bolts and keywashers that secure bearing housing. Discard
keywashers.
L. Using puller from tool set, 1C6986, remove bearing housing and roller bearing outer race as
follows (figure 3):
3
(1) Install puller so three puller feet engage bearing housing.
(2) Turn knurled knob CW to secure puller feet into place.
(3) Tighten jamnut against spreader bar.
(4) Slide hammer against knurled knob with enough force to disengage bearing housing
from gearbox housing assembly.
(5) Loosen jamnut and turn knurled knob CCW to release bearing housing from puller feet.
8. Fuel Pump Spur Gearshaft Assembly Installation.
WARNING
A. Using lubricating oil, lubricate bearing housing and gearbox housing bore. Install bearing
housing into gearbox housing bore. Using nylon drift and soft face hammer, tap bearing hous-
ing until seated. See figure 3.
Change 2 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2812 00
Figure 3. Typical Bearing Housing Removal Using Puller from Tool Set, 1C6986
8 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2812 00
CAUTION
• Ensure prebent tabs of keywasher contact CCW against bearing

housing ear with zero clearance. Do not use force or distort preb-
ent tab of keywasher into position.
• Do not loosen bolt to position a flat on the bolthead adjacent to

the tab.
B. Install bolts and new keywashers (figure 2). Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of
torque. Determine if flat on bolthead is adjacent to tab of keywasher. If necessary, continue to
tighten bolt to a maximum of 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m) of torque, until flat on bolthead is adjacent to
tab. Bend tab into position. See figure 4.
C. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto forward shaft seal assem-
bly. See figure 2.
D. Install adapter and nut onto forward shaft seal assembly. Tighten nut to 190-230 lb in.
(21.5-26.0 N·m) of torque.
4
Figure 4. Typical Keywasher Installation
Change 2 9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2812 00
E. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto forward shaft seal assem-
bly.
F. Install forward shaft seal assembly into fuel pump spur gearshaft assembly.
G. Using arbor press, install roller bearing inner race and rollers onto spur gearshaft assembly.
H. Install mating seal ring so tangs engage slots on roller bearing.
I. Using arbor press, install spur gearshaft assembly into fuel pump adapter assembly.
J. Apply light coat of petrolatum onto roller bearing rollers. Push rollers toward inner race to
minimize roller circle diameter.
K. Install two guide pins from tool set, 1C6986, into fuel pump drive pad.
L. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install into groove of fuel pump
adapter assembly.
M. Carefully hold spur gearshaft assembly centered in gearbox bore and move assembly inward
to engage guide pins and roller bearing. Rotate gearshaft slightly to engage spur gears.
CAUTION
Ensure gear teeth mesh properly and gears rotate freely to avoid
damaging gears.
N. Install five bolts and washers. Tighten bolts evenly, in small increments, to draw fuel pump
adapter assembly onto gearbox housing.
O. Perform free rotation check per paragraph 15.
P. Remove guide pins and install remaining bolts and washers. Tighten all bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
Q. If fuel pump cover is used, perform the following:
(1) Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto aft shaft
seal assembly.
(2) Install adapter and nut onto aft shaft seal assembly. Tighten nut to 190-230 lb in.
(21.5-26.0 N·m) of torque.
(3) Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto aft shaft
seal assembly.
10 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2812 00
(4) Install aft shaft seal assembly into fuel pump spur gearshaft assembly.
(5) Using bolts, install new round gasket and cover onto fuel pump adapter assembly.
R. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto fitting.
S. Install fitting into fuel pump adapter. Tighten fitting to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of
torque.
CAUTION

T. Connect seal drain manifold onto fitting. Tighten coupling nut to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
9. Starter Spur Gearshaft Assembly Removal.
A. Remove safety-wire. Remove bolts and washers that secure starter adapter assembly onto
gearbox housing assembly. See figure 5.
5
Figure 5. Starter Spur Gearshaft Assembly Replacement
Change 2 11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2812 00
CAUTION
Do not allow starter adapter assembly flange to cock during removal.

Turning jackscrews evenly in small increments will prevent cocking.
B. Using three jackscrews from tool set, 1C6986, remove starter adapter assembly and pre-
formed packing. Discard preformed packing.
C. Using arbor press, remove spur gearshaft assembly from starter adapter assembly.
CAUTION
D. Remove mating seal ring.
CAUTION

E. Using arbor press, remove roller bearing inner race and rollers from spur gearshaft assembly.
F. Remove and discard retaining ring.
G. Unbend keywasher tabs. Remove bolts and keywashers that secure bearing housing. Discard
keywashers.
H. Using puller from tool set, 1C6986, remove bearing housing and roller bearing outer race as
follows (figure 3):
(5) Loosen jamnut and turn knurled knob CW to release bearing housing from puller feet.
12 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2812 00
10. Starter Spur Gearshaft Assembly Installation.
WARNING

A. Lubricate bearing housing and gearbox housing bore with lubricating oil. Install bearing
housing to gearbox housing bore. Using nylon drift and soft face hammer, tap bearing hous-
CAUTION


the tab.
B. Install bolts and new keywashers. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of torque. Deter-
mine if flat on bolthead is adjacent to tab of keywasher. If necessary, continue to tighten bolt
to a maximum of 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m) of torque until flat on bolthead is adjacent to tab. Bend
tab into position. See figure 4.
C. Install new retaining ring into forward groove of starter spur gearshaft assembly. See
figure 5.
D. Using arbor press, install roller bearing inner race and rollers onto starter spur gearshaft
assembly.
E. Install mating seal ring so tangs engage slots on roller bearing.
F. Using arbor press, install spur gearshaft assembly into starter adapter assembly.
G. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install into groove of starter adapter
assembly.
H. Apply light coat of petrolatum onto roller bearing rollers. Push rollers toward inner race to
I. Install two guide pins from tool set, 1C6986, into starter drive pad.
Change 2 13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2812 00
J. Carefully hold spur gearshaft assembly centered in gearbox bore and move assembly inward
to engage guide pins. Rotate gearshaft slightly to engage gear teeth with idler gear. Continue
pushing to engage bearing rollers with outer race. Using soft face hammer, tap assembly gen-
tly until starter adapter assembly is seated.
K. Remove guide pins and secure starter adapter assembly with bolts and washers. Tighten bolts
finger-tight.
L. Perform free rotation check per paragraph 15.
M. Tighten starter adapter assembly retaining bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Safety-wire bolts.
11. Manual Drive Spur Gearshaft Removal.
A. Remove bolt and clamp that secures scavenge tube and hose assembly onto manual drive pad
cover plate. See figure 6.
6
B. Remove nut, bolt, and clamp that secures scavenge tube and hose assembly onto low pressure
drain hose.
C. Remove bolts that secure scavenge tube and hose assembly onto boss on gearbox assembly.
Remove and discard gasket.
D. Disconnect scavenge tube and hose assembly coupling nut from oil tube assembly. Remove
scavenge tube and hose assembly.
E. Using marking pen, position mark electrical brackets. Remove nuts and washers that secure
manual drive adapter assembly onto gearbox housing assembly. Reposition electrical
brackets.
CAUTION
Do not allow manual drive adapter assembly flange to cock during
removal. Turning jackscrews evenly in small increments will prevent
cocking.
F. Using three jackscrews from tool set, 1C6986, remove manual drive adapter assembly and
preformed packing. Discard preformed packing.
CAUTION

G. Remove mating seal ring.
14 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2812 00
Figure 6. Manual Drive Spur Gearshaft Replacement
Change 2 15
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2812 00
CAUTION

H. Using arbor press, remove roller bearing inner race and rollers from spur gearshaft assembly.
I. Using arbor press, remove spur gearshaft assembly from manual drive adapter assembly.
J. Unbend keywasher tabs. Remove bolts and keywashers that secure bearing housing. Discard
keywashers.
K. Using puller from tool set, 1C6986, remove bearing housing and roller bearing outer race as
follows (figure 3):
12. Manual Drive Spur Gearshaft Installation.
WARNING
16 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2812 00
CAUTION


the tab.
C. Using arbor press, install roller bearing inner race and rollers onto manual drive spur gear-
shaft assembly. See figure 6.
D. Install mating seal ring so tangs engage slots on roller bearing.
E. Using arbor press, install manul drive spur gearshaft assembly into manual drive adapter
assembly.
F. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install into groove of manual drive
adapter assembly.
G. Apply light coat of petrolatum onto roller bearing rollers. Push rollers toward inner race to
H. Install two guide pins from tool set, 1C6986, into manual drive pad.
I. Carefully hold manual drive spur gearshaft assembly centered in gearbox bore and move
assembly inward to engage guide pins and roller bearing. Rotate gearshaft slightly to engage
spur gears.
CAUTION
damaging gears.
J. Position electrical brackets as marked at removal. Install five bolts and washers. Tighten bolts
evenly, in small increments, to draw manual drive adapter assembly onto gearbox housing.
K. Perform free rotation check per paragraph 15.
L. Remove guide pins and install remaining bolts and washers. Tighten all bolts to 55-70 lb in.
Change 2 17
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2812 00
M. Install new gasket onto scavenge tube and hose assembly. Using bolts, secure scavenge tube
and hose assembly onto boss on gearbox assembly. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2
N·m) of torque.
N. Connect scavenge tube and hose assembly coupling nut onto oil tube assembly. Tighten cou-
O. Install clamp onto scavenge tube and hose assembly. Using bolt and nut, secure clamp to
clamp on low pressure drain hose. Tighten nut to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of torque.
P. Install clamp onto scavenge tube and hose assembly. Using bolt, secure clamp to manual
drive adapter assembly. Tighten bolt to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of torque.
13. Variable Geometry Hydraulic Pump Spur Gearshaft Removal.
A. Remove safety-wire. Remove bolts and washers that secure variable geometry hydraulic
pump adapter onto variable geometry pump drive pad. See figure 7.
7
Figure 7. Variable Geometry Hydraulic Pump Spur Gearshaft Replacement
18 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2812 00
CAUTION
Do not allow variable geometry hydraulic pump adapter flange to

cock during removal. Turning jackscrews evenly in small increments
will prevent cocking.
B. Using three jackscrews from tool set, 1C6986, remove variable geometry hydraulic pump
adapter and preformed packing. Discard preformed packing.
C. Using arbor press, remove spur gearshaft assembly from variable geometry hydraulic pump
adapter.
CAUTION

D. Remove mating seal ring.
CAUTION

E. Remove roller bearing inner race and rollers from spur gearshaft assembly.
F. Unbend keywasher tabs. Remove bolts and keywashers securing bearing and housing. Dis-
card keywashers.
G. Using puller from tool set, 1C6986, remove bearing housing and roller bearing outer race as
follows (figure 3):
(2) Turn knurled knob CW to secure puller feet in place.
Change 2 19
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2812 00
14. Variable Geometry Hydraulic Pump Spur Gearshaft Installation.
WARNING

ing until seated.
CAUTION

the tab.
C. Using arbor press, install roller bearing inner race and rollers onto spur gearshaft.
D. Install mating seal ring so that tangs engage slots on roller bearing.
E. Using arbor press, install spur gearshaft assembly into variable geometry hydraulic pump
adapter.
F. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install into groove of variable geome-
try hydraulic pump adapter.
G. Apply light coat of petrolatum onto roller bearing rollers. Push rollers toward inner race to
H. Install two guide pins from tool set, 1C6986, into variable geometry hydraulic pump drive
pad.
I. Carefully hold spur gearshaft assembly centered in gearbox bore and move assembly inward
to engage guide pins and roller bearing. Rotate gearshaft slightly to engage spur gears.
20 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2812 00
CAUTION
damaging gears.
J. Install six bolts and washers. Tighten evenly, in small increments, to draw variable geometry
hydraulic pump adapter into gearbox housing.
K. Perform free rotation check per paragraph 15.
L. Remove guide pins and install remaining bolts and washers. Tighten all bolts to 55-70 lb in.
15. Free Rotation Check.
A. Remove horizontal drive shaft as follows (figure 8):
(1) Remove nuts and washers that secure horizontal cover onto transfer gearbox housing
assembly.
(2) Tap horizontal cover with nylon drift and soft face hammer. Remove horizontal cover
and preformed packing. Discard preformed packing.
8
Figure 8. Horizontal Drive Shaft Removal and Installation
Change 2 21
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2812 00
NOTE
If more access space is required for internal retaining ring or horizon-

tal drive shaft removal, perform step (3). If access space for ring or
shaft removal is adequate, proceed to step (4).
(3) Remove nuts and washers that secure radial cover assembly. Using two 0.250-28 UNF-
3B jackscrews, remove radial cover assembly. Remove and discard preformed packing.
(4) Remove internal retaining ring from groove on inside forward end of bevel gearshaft.
Discard internal retaining ring.
(5) Remove horizontal drive shaft.
B. Perform free rotation check as follows:
(1) Remove nuts, washers, cover plate, and preformed packing to gain access to manual
drive to check free rotation of newly installed gearshaft. Discard preformed packing.
(2) Insert 3/4-inch drive extension into manual drive gearshaft.
(3) Turn manual drive gearshaft CW and ensure gears mesh properly and no binding exists.
(4) Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto cover plate.
(5) Install cover plate onto manual drive adapter assembly. Secure with washers and nuts.
C. Install horizontal drive shaft as follows (figure 8):
WARNING
(1) Apply light coat of lubricating oil to splines of horizontal drive shaft. Install drive shaft,
small spline aft, through opening in front of transfer gearbox housing into bevel gear-
shaft. Align splines and push drive shaft through bevel gearshaft.
(2) Install new internal retaining ring into groove on inside forward end of bevel gearshaft.
(3) Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install on horizontal cover.
(4) Install horizontal cover onto front of transfer gearbox housing. Secure with washers and
nuts. Tighten nuts to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of torque.
22 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2812 00
(5) If radial cover assembly was removed, lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum
and install onto radial cover assembly. Using washers and nuts, install radial cover
assembly onto bottom of transfer gearbox housing. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9
N·m) of torque.

24 Blank Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2813 00
0WP 2813 00
WORK PACKAGE
ACCESSORY GEARBOX CARBON SEALS
REPLACEMENT


1-8 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Accessory Gearbox Carbon Seals Installation ............................................................................ 6

Accessory Gearbox Carbon Seals Removal................................................................................ 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2813 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing accessory gearbox car-
bon seals.
B. Remove starter as required to gain access per WP 1814 00 or WP 1815 00.
Title Number
Pneumatic Starter Replacement WP 1814 00
Hydraulic Starter and Distributor Assembly Replacement WP 1815 00

Fixture Set, Mating Seal Removal 1C8182G01
Guide Pins (Qty 3, 0.190-32 by 1.0 inch Locally Fabricated
bolt with head removed)

Keywasher 9009M32P01 9
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2813 00
6. Accessory Gearbox Carbon Seals Removal.
A. Remove carbon seal as follows (figure 1):

1
(1) If installed, remove coupling clamp or bolts and washers, cover, and gasket from applica-
ble drive pad. Discard gasket.
(2) Unbend keywasher tabs.
NOTE
Seal retainer is used at starter pad only.
(3) Remove bolts, keywashers, and seal retainer. Discard keywashers.
NOTE
Some carbon seal configurations contain three slots on the inner face
of the flange midway between the bolt holes to aid in seal removal. If
slots are present, proceed to step (5).
(4) Rotate carbon seal by inserting pin of offset driver from fixture set, 1C8182, into bolt-
hole of seal flange and tap lightly with light hammer until seal tangs overlap housing
boss.
CAUTION
Use care to prevent cocking carbon seal or damaging housing dur-

ing removal.
(5) Remove carbon seal from gearbox housing bore using prybar from fixture set, 1C8182,
to apply leverage.
(6) Remove packing from gearbox housing bore using pick set from fixture set, 1C8182.
Discard preformed packing.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2813 00
Figure 1. Accessory Gearbox Carbon Seals
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2813 00
CAUTION
If carbon seal is replaced, the mating seal ring shall also be replaced.
If carbon seal is reused, the mating seal ring shall also be reused.
B. Remove mating seal ring as follows (figure 2):
NOTE
Tool numbers 1C8182P02 through P05 are used at starter pad. Tool
numbers 1C8182P10 through P13 are used at fuel pump pad and aux-
iliary accessory drive pad.
(1) Turn screw, 1C8182P06, counterclockwise to end of travel to retract pusher plate,
1C8182P05 or P11.
(2) Slide outer sleeve, 1C8182P04 or P12, back to allow fingers of inner sleeve, 1C8182P03
or P10, to expand.
(3) Insert tool into seal cavity until plastic stop, 1C8182P02 or P13, contacts mating seal
ring.
2
Figure 2. Mating Seal Ring Removal Tool, 1C8182
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2813 00
(4) Slide outer sleeve over inner sleeve closing flexible fingers over mating seal ring.
(5) Turn screw clockwise until mating seal ring is pulled free of shaft.
(6) Remove tool and slide outer sleeve back to release mating seal ring.
(7) Remove packing from seal ring packing groove. Discard packing.
7. Accessory Gearbox Carbon Seals Installation.
A. Install mating seal ring as follows:
NOTE
Tool numbers 1C8182P07 and P08 are used at starter pad. Tool num-
bers 1C8182P14 and P15 are used at fuel pump pad and auxiliary
accessory drive pad.
(1) Using petrolatum, lubricate new preformed packing and install into mating seal ring
packing groove (figure 2).
CAUTION
Use care to avoid damaging packing during installation of mating
seal ring.
(2) Using seal ring installation pliers from fixture set, 1C8182, install mating seal ring onto
shaft. Ensure tangs of mating seal ring fully engage slots of bearing inner race.
B. Install new carbon seal as follows:
(1) Using petrolatum, lubricate new preformed packing and install into gearbox housing
bore (figure 1).
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 2813 00
WARNING

CAUTION
During handling, protect mating surfaces of mating seal ring and

carbon seal from contamination, including fingerprints. The seal
ring and carbon seal are matched parts; do not interchange.
(2) Lubricate internal elements of carbon seal with lubricating oil. Depress and release car-
bon seal slowly several times to ensure seal operates smoothly.
(3) Apply light coat of lubricating oil onto carbon seal face, seal housing outside diameter,
and face of mating seal ring.
(4) Install locally fabricated guide pins into gearbox housing inserts to align seal tang bolt-
holes with inserts during installation.
CAUTION
• Before installation, ensure carbon seal is clean and free of
debris. Contamination may cause carbon seal failure.
• Take care not to disturb or damage packing during installation.
• To prevent damage to carbon seal, ensure the tangs of the seal

ring fully engage slots of the bearing inner race.
(5) Install carbon seal over guide pins and carefully push into housing until seal flange is
fully seated against housing face. Remove guide pins.
NOTE
Perform step (6) only if starter pad carbon seal was replaced.
(6) Install seal retainer at starter pad.
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 2813 00
CAUTION
Ensure prebent tabs of keywasher contact counterclockwise

against housing or the top retainer with zero clearance. Do not
force or distort prebent tab of keywasher into position.
(7) Install new keywashers and bolts.
CAUTION
Do not loosen bolt to position a flat on the bolthead adjacent to the

tab.
(8) Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque. Determine if flat on bolthead is
adjacent to tab of keywasher. If necessary, continue to tighten bolt to a maximum of
40 lb in. (4.6 N·m) of torque until flat on bolthead is adjacent to tab. Bend tab into posi-
tion. See figure 3.
(9) Install new gasket, cover, and coupling clamp or bolts and washers, as applicable.
Tighten coupling clamp to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque. Tighten bolts to
190-230 lb in. (21.5-25.9 N·m) of torque.
3
Figure 3. Typical Keywasher Installation
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3010 00
4WP 3010 00
WORK PACKAGE
GAS TURBINE IN ENCLOSURE REPLACEMENT


1 - 12 ...... 4
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Gas Turbine Installation into Enclosure...................................................................................... 9

Gas Turbine Removal from Enclosure........................................................................................ 3
Change 4 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3010 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing or installing the gas turbine in an
enclosure.
B. Disconnect and connect electrical leads and connecting tubes on the gas turbine per
SWP 1913 01, SWP 1913 02, SWP 1913 03, and SWP 1913 04.
NOTE
Removal and installation of gas turbine in an enclosure is the pack-

ager’s responsibility. Instructions in this work package are intended to
provide guidance for tasks which must be accomplished to allow gas
turbine removal and installation
Title Number
ing
Gas Turbine Maintenance Dolly Removal and Installation WP 3012 00
Gas Turbine/Support Pedestal Removal and Installation WP 3013 00
Gas Turbine in Shipping Container Replacement WP 3014 00

Fixture Assembly, Horizontal Lift 1C9625G01
(Black or Blue)
2 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3010 00
Packager-supplied gaskets are required to perform the tasks described in this work package. (Ref-
erence packager’s manual.)
6. Gas Turbine Removal from Enclosure.
See figure 1.
1
CAUTION
Ensure all electrical, fuel, oil, and air supplies are shut off before
disconnecting customer interfaces. Failure to comply may result in
part damage.
A. Disconnect inlet, exhaust, bypass air, and drive interfaces as follows:
(1) Disconnect inlet system from the variable inlet guide vane case per packager’s manual.
(2) Disconnect exhaust system per packager’s manual.
(3) Disconnect bypass air collection system per packager’s manual.
(4) If same gas turbine will be installed, matchmark drive adapter and shaft using marking
pen.
(5) Disconnect forward and aft drive adapters per packager’s manual.
Change 4 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3010 00
Figure 1. Gas Turbine Mount Locations
4 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3010 00
B. Disconnect customer electrical interfaces as follows:
WARNING
(1) Disconnect igniter cables from igniters as follows:
CAUTION
• Ensure igniter adapter is restrained when loosening or tighten-

ing coupling nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
• Igniter plug may fall out when ignition cable is disconnected.
(a) Disconnect ignition cables from igniter plug adapters. Momentarily ground ignition
cable to remove any residual electrical charge.
(b) Install igniter plug covers. Tighten covers to 23-27 lb ft (31-37 N·m) of torque.
(c) Remove nut, bolt, and clamps that secure ignition cables onto gas turbine bracket.
(2) Disconnect flame sensor integral leads from packager's junction box per packager's
manual.
(3) If required, disconnect starter speed switch connector from pneumatic starter per
packager's manual.
(4) Disconnect customer electrical cables as follows:
(a) Using marking pen, matchmark customer electrical cable connections at electrical
interface panels.
(b) Remove bolts, washers, and clamps that secure customer electrical cables onto elec-
trical interface panels.
WARNING
Circuits shall be open (off) and capacitors discharged to ground
before proceeding. Electricity causes shock, burns, and death.
(c) Disconnect customer electrical cable connectors from electrical interface panels per
packager's manual.
Change 4 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3010 00
C. Disconnect remaining customer hydraulic, pneumatic, lube oil, fuel, and vent/drain interfaces
per SWP 1913 01, SWP 1913 02, SWP 1913 03, and SWP 1913 04.
D. Install fuel manifold support fixture set per WP 3015 00.
E. Remove bolts that secure fuel manifold ladder racks onto packager’s stanchions.
F. Remove gas turbine from enclosure as follows:
(1) Attach 15-ton (13,607.7 kg) hoist onto horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, or equivalent. See
figure 2.
2
WARNING

(2) Raise horizontal lift fixture to working height. Level fixture by adjusting trolley. Record
center of gravity (CG) measurement.
(3) Position lift fixture over gas turbine. Using quick-release pins, secure lift fixture clevis,
1C9625P09, onto rear mounts on the turbine rear frame.
(4) Position lift fixture front frame adapter onto front frame forward lift point. Install quick-
release pin.
CAUTION
Ensure lift fixture trolley is set to 30.5 inches (774.7 mm). Incorrect
positioning may cause lift fixture/gas turbine damage.
(5) Position lift fixture trolley to 30.5 inches (774.7 mm). Slowly apply small amount of lift-
ing force on hoist. Ensure lift fixture is properly attached to gas turbine.
WARNING
Ensure hoist and lift fixture are aligned prior to removing rear
mount pins. Failure to comply may result in gas turbine shifting,
causing serious injury.
(6) Remove trunnion attachments and aft mount attachment per packager’s manual.
6 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3010 00
Figure 2. Horizontal Lift Fixture, 1C9625 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 4 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3010 00
WARNING

CAUTION
Ensure rear mount links do not drop onto gas turbine components
while gas turbine is raised from enclosure. Gas turbine damage may
result.
(7) Lift gas turbine and maneuver to remove from enclosure.
(8) Install gas turbine into applicable support equipment per WP 3012 00, WP 3013 00, or
WP 3014 00.
(9) Install inlet, exhaust, and air collector covers.
8 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3010 00
7. Gas Turbine Installation into Enclosure.
A. Install gas turbine into enclosure as follows:
WARNING
Ensure hoist and lift fixture are aligned prior to removing rear
mount pins. Failure to comply may result in gas turbine shifting,
causing serious injury.
(1) Position aft mount links outboard.
WARNING

CAUTION
while gas turbine is installed in enclosure. Gas turbine damage may
result.
(2) Lower gas turbine into enclosure and align aft clevis mounts with mount links.
(3) Install trunnion pins into trunnion support stanchions per packager’s manual.
(4) Install trunnion washers and nuts onto gas turbine trunnions. Tighten nuts per packager’s
manual.
(5) Install mount bolt and nut through aft left mount link and gas turbine mount. Tighten nut
per packager’s manual.
(6) Install mount bolt and nut through aft center mount and gas turbine mount. Tighten nut
per packager’s manual.
(7) Adjust aft right mount link so mount bolt can be inserted freely. Install mount bolt and
nut through aft right mount link and gas turbine mount. Tighten nut per packager’s
manual.
(8) Tighten aft right mount link jamnut per packager’s manual.
(9) Slowly release tension on hoist.
Change 4 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3010 00
WARNING
Ensure lift fixture is located at the center of gravity before discon-

necting from gas turbine. Failure to comply may result in gas tur-
bine damage or serious injury.
(10) Position lift fixture trolley at center of gravity. Slowly apply lifting force to allow lift fix-
ture pins to rotate freely. See figure 2.
WARNING

(11) Remove two turbine rear frame lift fixture quick-release pins. Remove forward lift point
quick-release pin. Raise lift fixture clear of gas turbine.
B. Connect inlet, exhaust, bypass air, and drive interfaces as follows:
(1) If installed, remove inlet, exhaust, and air collector covers.
(2) Connect forward and aft drive adapters per packager’s manual.
(3) Connect exhaust system per packager’s manual.
(4) Connect inlet system to variable inlet guide vane case per packager’s manual.
(5) Connect bypass air collection system per packager’s manual.
10 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3010 00
C. Connect customer electrical interfaces as follows:
NOTE
• LM6000 PD gas turbines, serial numbers 192-100 through

192-138, were delivered with a speed sensor mounted on the LPC
casing (this sensor is sometimes referred to as the XN2 speed sen-
sor). When installing an LM6000 PD engine without an XN2
speed sensor (SN 192-139 and up), the XN2 harness connector
should be protected with tape or other suitable means, and an
adjustment must be made to the control system. Control system
tunable switch N2SELSW (contact packager or control supplier to
confirm this parameter name) must be set to False to run with the
LPT (XNSD) sensors only. When subsequently installing a gas tur-
bine with an XN2 sensor, the software switch should be reset to its
original setting (True).
• When installing an LM6000 PD engine that has an XN2 sensor

into a site which does not have cabling to accept this speed input,
the sensor lead should be secured with a nylon wire tie or appro-
priate means to prevent wearing or chafing of the sensor lead.
There is no need in this case to change any software settings.
(1) Connect customer electrical cables as follows:
WARNING
Circuits shall be open (off) and capacitors discharged to ground
before proceeding. Electricity causes shock, burns, and death.
(a) Connect customer electrical cables onto electrical interface panels.
(b) Using bolts, washers, and clamps, secure customer electrical cables onto electrical
interface panels. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Change 4 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3010 00
(2) Connect igniter cables to igniters as follows:
WARNING
CAUTION
Igniter plug may fall out when ignition cable is disconnected or

igniter plug cover is removed.
(a) Remove igniter plug covers.
(b) Install ignition cables over igniter plug adapters. Tighten coupling nuts to 23-27 lb ft
(31-37 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire coupling nut.
(3) Connect flame sensor integral lead to packager's junction box per packager's manual.
(4) If required, connect starter speed switch connector to pneumatic starter per packager's
manual.
CAUTION
Position hydraulic, pneumatic, lube oil, fuel, and vent/drain inter-
faces to avoid interference with engine components that could result
in premature failure.
D. Check for misalignment and interference between engine and package interfaces. Adjust and
correct as required.
E. Connect remaining customer hydraulic, pneumatic, lube oil, fuel, and vent/drain interfaces
per SWP 1913 01, SWP 1913 02, SWP 1913 03, and SWP 1913 04.
NOTE
Misalignment between the fuel manifold and the packager’s stanchions

may indicate that the packager’s supporting stanchions are located
incorrectly.
F. Install bolts that secure fuel manifold ladder racks to gas turbine base. Refer to packager's
manual for proper bolt torques.
G. Remove fuel manifold support fixture per WP 3015 00.
12 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3011 00
3
WP 3011 00
WORK PACKAGE
PRESERVATION/DEPRESERVATION


1 - 26 ...... 3
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Definitions................................................................................................................................... 4
Engine Depreservation ................................................................................................................ 26
Installed Engine for Greater than 60 Days Preservation............................................................. 23
Installed Engine for up to 60 Days Preservation......................................................................... 4
Noninstalled Engine for Greater than 60 Days Preservation ...................................................... 25
Noninstalled Engine for up to 60 Days Preservation .................................................................. 24
Oil Wetting LM6000 Bearings Alternate Procedure................................................................... 14
Change 3 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3011 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for preservation/depreservation of the engine.
Title Number
Gas Turbine Water-Wash WP 4014 00

Pressurizer, Hydraulic Unit 1C3569G2
Spline Adapter, Fuel Pump Drive Pad 1C8208G01
Spline Adapter, Manual or Front Drive Pad 1C8208G02
Drive Motor, Electric (115 VAC 50/60 and 2C14764G05
400 Hz, 28 VDC)
Drive Motor, Electric (220 VAC 50 Hz and 2C14764G06
28 VDC)
Drive Motor, Pneumatic 18932
Reducer AN919-6
Reducer AN919-10
Reducer MS51525B6-8S
Union MS51525B8S
Cap MS51532B6S
Cap MS51532B10S
Lubricating Stand Local Purchase
2 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3011 00
Barrier Paper (Kraft) Grade A, Type II, Class II
Desiccant MIL-P-116
Preservative Brayco 483
Rust Preventative Concentrate GE Spec D50TF6 or
Brayco 599

Gasket, Seal J219P05A 2
Packing, Preformed M83248/1-912 6
Change 3 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3011 00
6. Definitions.
For purposes of this work package, the following definitions apply:
A. Installed engine - An engine installed in the enclosure.
B. Noninstalled engine - An engine installed in a maintenance dolly or pedestals, or an engine

installed in a shipping container.
7. Installed Engine for up to 60 Days Preservation.
CAUTION
• Ensure driven equipment is prelubricated or drive shaft is dis-

connected prior to motoring engine. Failure to comply may result
in damage to driven equipment or lack of low pressure rotor rota-
tion and subsequent insufficient bearing lubrication.
• Do not exceed starter duty cycle when motoring. Hydraulic

starter has no duty cycle limitations except oil temperature shall
be maintained below 140°F (60°C). Pneumatic starter duty cycle
follows:
5 minutes on, 2 minutes off,

or
10 minutes on, 20 minutes off.
A. Inspect inlet, exhaust, and variable bleed valve (VBV) discharge.
B. Remove moisture barrier paper, covers, and plugs from engine.
C. Oil wet bearings using one of the following three procedures:
(1) Water-wash engine per WP 4014 00. Then motor engine for minimum of 3 minutes
(2,000 RPM high pressure rotor minimum speed).
(2) Oil wet bearings per paragraphs 7.D. through 7.I.
(3) Oil wet bearings per paragraph 8.

2
1
D. Connect lubricating stand as follows:
(1) Install locally manufactured blankoff plates (figure 1) using existing gaskets, bolts, and
washers onto ports L1, L2, and L3. See figure 2. Tighten bolts on port L1 to 420-510 lb
in. (47.4-57.6 N·m) of torque. Tighten bolts on port L2 to 250-320 lb in. (28.2-36.1 N·m)
of torque. Tighten bolts on port L3 to 160-210 lb in. (18.0-23.7 N·m) of torque.
4 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3011 00
Figure 1. Locally Manufactured Blankoff Plates
Change 3 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3011 00
Figure 2. Lubricating Oil Manifold Ports (Sheet 1 of 2)
6 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3011 00
Figure 2. Lubricating Oil Manifold Ports (Sheet 2 of 2)
Change 3 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3011 00
(2) Install cap onto scavenge discharge pressure port L5 fitting.
(3) Remove protective cap from supply pressure port L4 fitting.
(4) Remove fitting from supply pressure port L4. Discard preformed packing.
WARNING

(5) Lubricate new preformed packing with lubricating oil and install onto reducer. Install
reducer into supply pressure port L4. Tighten reducer to 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.5 N·m)
of torque.
(6) Connect lubricating stand supply hose onto reducer at supply pressure port L4. Tighten
(7) Remove drain plug from forward side of accessory gearbox.
(8) Lubricate preformed packing with lubricating oil and install onto union. Install union
into accessory gearbox drain port. Tighten union to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.8 N·m) of
torque.
(9) Connect lubricating stand scavenge hose onto union on accessory gearbox drain port.
Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(10) Remove transfer gearbox (TGB), B- and C-sump scavenge inlet screen plugs from lube
and scavenge pump. Discard preformed packings.
(11) Lubricate preformed packings with lubricating oil and install onto reducers. Install
reducers into TGB, B- and C-sump scavenge ports. Tighten reducers to 45-50 lb ft
(61-68 N·m) of torque.
(12) Connect lubricating stand scavenge lines onto TGB, B- and C-sump scavenge port
reducers. Tighten coupling nuts to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(13) Disconnect D-sump scavenge hose from D-sump scavenge in port fitting. Install cap onto
fitting. Tighten cap finger-tight.
(14) Install reducer onto D-sump scavenge hose. Tighten reducer to 650-770 lb in.
(73.4-86.9 N·m) of torque.
8 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3011 00
(15) Connect lubricating stand scavenge hose onto reducer on D-sump scavenge hose.
Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(16) Disconnect E-sump scavenge hose from E-sump scavenge in port fitting. Install cap onto
fitting. Tighten cap finger-tight.
(17) Install reducer onto E-sump scavenge hose. Tighten reducer to 650-770 lb in.
(73.4-86.9 N·m) of torque.
(18) Connect lubricating stand scavenge hose onto reducer on E-sump scavenge hose. Tighten
E. Install spline adapter and electric/pneumatic drive motor as follows:
(1) Remove nuts and washers securing forward drive pad cover to front of accessory gear-
box. Remove cover. Discard preformed packing.
WARNING

NOTE
Spline adapter, 1C8208G01, adapts the electric/pneumatic drive

motor to the fuel pump drive spline. Spline adapter, 1C8208G02,
adapts the electric/pneumatic drive motor to the forward drive spline
or the manual drive spline.
(2) Lubricate spline adapter, 1C8208, with lubricating oil. Install spline adapter into spline
adapter forward drive spline and secure with washers and nuts. Tighten nuts to
100-130 lb in. (11.2-14.6 N·m) of torque.
(3) Install electric drive motor, 2C14764, or pneumatic drive motor, 18932, onto forward
drive pad aligning square drive with spline adapter. Secure with washers and bolts.
(4) Connect drive motor to applicable power source.
Change 3 9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3011 00
F. Oil-wet engine bearings as follows:
WARNING
Corrosion preventative, Brayco 599: Combustible. Do not inhale,

ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant. Personal protective
equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust ventilation - if not
available, use an approved respirator.
NOTE
The use of rust preventative concentrate is optional if preservation

period is less than 60 days.
(1) Add 5 percent (by volume) of rust preventative concentrate to lubricating stand oil tank.
CAUTION
Ensure lubricating stand scavenge lines show visible flow through

viewing windows. If flow is not observed, stop lubricating stand sup-
ply and scavenge pumps and check fittings for leaks. Failure to com-
ply may result in overflow of oil sumps.
(2) Start lubricating stand supply and scavenge pumps. See figure 3. Regulate supply pres-
sure to 5-10 psi (34-69 kPa). Lube oil temperature shall be maintained between 60 and
100°F (15.6 to 37.8°C).
WARNING
CAUTION
Failure to rotate low pressure rotor will result in insufficient lubrica-
tion of no. 1, 2, 6, and 7 bearings.
(3) Rotate high pressure turbine (HPT) rotor, using electric/pneumatic drive motor, in for-
ward direction a minimum of two revolutions (approximately 12-15 minutes) at maxi-
mum RPM. Rotate low pressure turbine (LPT) rotor, using driven equipment jacking
gear (if installed), a minimum of two revolutions. If jacking gear is not installed, discon-
nect coupling shaft to driven equipment and rotate LPT rotor by pulling stage 5 LPT
blades a minimum of two revolutions.
(4) Stop lubricating stand supply pump. Run scavenge pump until no oil flow is visible in
scavenge line viewing windows. Stop scavenge pump.
10 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3011 00
3
Figure 3. Typical Lubricating Stand
Change 3 11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3011 00
G. Disconnect lubricating stand as follows:
(1) Disconnect lubricating stand supply line from supply pressure port L4.
(2) Remove reducer from supply pressure port L4.
WARNING

(3) Lubricate new preformed packing with lubricating oil and install onto fitting. Install fit-
ting in supply pressure port L4. Tighten fitting to 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.5 N·m) of
torque.
(4) Disconnect lubricating stand scavenge lines from TGB, B-, and C-sump scavenge inlet
port fittings. Remove fittings.
(5) Lubricate three preformed packings with lubricating oil and install on TGB, B- and
C-sump scavenge inlet screen plugs.
(6) Install inlet screen plugs into TGB, B-, and C-sump scavenge inlet ports. Tighten plugs
(7) Remove cap from main scavenge discharge tube. Install pump scavenge discharge
hose onto main scavenge discharge tube. Tighten coupling nut to 133-150 lb ft
(8) Disconnect lubricating stand accessory gearbox scavenge hose. Remove accessory gear-
box scavenge hose adapter.
(9) Lubricate preformed packing with lubricating oil and install onto accessory gearbox
drain plug.
(10) Install accessory gearbox drain plug. Tighten plug to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.8 N·m) of
torque. Safety-wire plug.
(11) Remove caps from D- and E-sump scavenge fittings.
(12) Disconnect lubricating stand scavenge hose from reducer on D-sump scavenge hose.
Remove reducer from D-sump scavenge hose.
(13) Connect D-sump scavenge hose onto D-sump scavenge fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
650-770 lb in. (73.4-86.9 N·m) of torque.
12 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3011 00
(14) Disconnect lubricating stand scavenge hose from reducer on E-sump scavenge hose.
Remove reducer from E-sump scavenge hose.
(15) Connect E-sump scavenge hose onto E-sump scavenge fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
650-770 lb in. (73.4-86.9 N·m) of torque.
(16) Remove cap from scavenge discharge pressure port L5.
H. Remove electric/pneumatic drive motor and spline adapter as follows:
WARNING
Use extreme care when working with electricity. Electricity causes

shock, burns, and death.
(1) Disconnect drive motor from power source.
(2) Remove bolts and washers that secure drive motor onto accessory gearbox. Remove
drive motor.
(3) Remove nuts, washers, and spline adapter, 1C8208, from accessory gearbox.
WARNING
(4) Lubricate preformed packing with lubricating oil and install into preformed packing
groove on cover.
(5) Install forward drive pad cover onto accessory gearbox forward drive pad. Secure with
washers and nuts. Tighten nuts to 100-130 lb in. (11.2-14.6 N·m) of torque.
I. Cover or plug all engine openings and unattached fittings. Cover inlet, exhaust, and VBV
openings using moisture barrier paper, if possible.
Change 3 13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3011 00
8. Oil Wetting LM6000 Bearings Alternate Procedure.
A. Oil wet gearbox bearings as follows:
WARNING
• Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not
• Corrosion preventative, Brayco 599: Combustible. Do not

NOTE
The use of rust preventative concentrate is optional if preservation

period is less than 60 days.
(1) Thoroughly mix 6 quarts (6 liters) of lubricating oil with 290 cc of Brayco preservative
to obtain 5 percent mixture.
(2) Remove oil from reservoir of hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569. Pour oil/Brayco mix-
ture into unit pressurizer reservoir.
(3) Remove tube-end reducer, nut, -6/-4 reducer, and cap from head-end hose swivel of unit
pressurizer. Head-end and rod-end lines are identified with tag.
(4) Move unit pressurizer selector valve to head-end position, open supply valve on head-
end line, and close supply valve on rod-end.
(5) Locate gearbox drain plug (figure 4) and place clean container under drain. Remove
drain plug (some packages may have a starter clutch drain attached). Dispose of drained
oil and return container under drain.
(6) Remove four nuts and washers from accessory gearbox manual drive pad cover plate
(figure 5). Remove cover plate.
(7) Insert 3/4 -inch by 12-inch-drive extension into manual drive pad and attach ratchet.
(8) Remove oil supply manifold as follows (figure 6):
(a) Disconnect gearbox lube oil supply tube.

4
14 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3011 00
Figure 4. Gearbox
(b) Disconnect A-sump oil supply tube.
(c) Disconnect B-, C-, D-, and E-sump tubes.

6
5
WARNING

(d) Remove electrical connector from lube oil supply resistance temperature detector
(RTD).
(e) Disconnect other packager connections, as required.
(f) Remove bolts and washers connecting oil supply manifold onto oil manifold.
Remove manifold and store in clean container.
(g) Cap or tape all openings to avoid lube system contamination.
(9) Locate gearbox lube oil supply tube and install reducer. Connect unit pressurizer head-
end line onto reducer.
Change 3 15
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3011 00
Figure 5. Front Frame and Gearbox
16 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3011 00
Figure 6. Oil Supply Manifold
Change 3 17
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3011 00
CAUTION
During operation of hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, observe

head-end pressure gage to verify pressure buildup does not exceed
100 psi (689.4 kPa) or damage to gearbox seals may result.
NOTE
• Pump handle of hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, shall be oper-

ated rapidly through the full piston stroke to ensure the proper
amount of oil/preservative mixture is supplied to the sump.
• Core RPM can be determined by observing rotation of ratchet

drive. A ratchet drive speed of 7 RPM equals core speed of
10 RPM.
(10) Use ratchet in manual drive pad to rotate core 5-10 RPM clockwise (aft looking forward)
while operating unit pressurizer, 1C3569, pump handle (maintain 20 psig [137.8 kPa]
minimum pressure). Rotate core and activate pump handle for 2 minutes.
(11) Remove hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line from gearbox oil supply line.
Cap or tape gearbox lube oil supply tube to avoid lube system contamination.
WARNING
• Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not

• Corrosion preventative, Brayco 599: Combustible. Do not

(12) Allow oil/preservation mixture to drain from gearbox into container. If clean, pour mix-
ture from container into hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, reservoir and replace con-
tainer under open gearbox drain. If reservoir does not contain approximately 6 quarts
(6 liters) (reservoir capacity), mix an additional 5 percent mixture and fill reservoir.
B. Oil wet A-sump bearings as follows:
(1) Locate A-sump oil supply tube (figure 6) and install reducer. Connect hydraulic unit
pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line to reducer.
18 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3011 00
CAUTION

NOTE
Pump handle of hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, shall be operated

rapidly through the full piston stroke to ensure the proper amount of
oil/preservative mixture is supplied to the sump.
(2) Use ratchet in manual drive pad to rotate core 5-10 RPM clockwise (aft looking for-
ward). Simultaneously rotate low pressure rotor by hand using rear drive adapter (the gas
turbine shall be disconnected from the electrical generator or drive equipment). Rotate
both rotors while operating hydraulic unit pressurizer pump, 1C3569, handle (maintain
20 psig [137.8 kPa] minimum pressure). Rotate rotors and activate pump handle for
2 minutes.
(3) Remove hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line from A-sump oil supply tube.
Cap or tape A-sump oil supply tube to avoid lube system contamination.
(4) Install locking ring, preformed packing, and drain plug into gearbox. Tighten plug to
270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.8 N·m) of torque.
(5) Inspect oil/Brayco mixture. If serviceable, pour mixture from container into hydraulic
unit pressurizer, 1C3569, reservoir. If reservoir does not contain approximately 6 quarts
(6 liters) (reservoir capacity), mix an additional 5 percent oil/Brayco mixture and fill
reservoir.
(6) Attach oil supply manifold as follows (figure 6):
(a) Install oil supply manifold onto oil manifold with three washers and bolts. Tighten
(b) Connect gearbox lube oil supply tube and preformed packing. Tighten fitting to
180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.5 N·m) of torque.
(c) Connect A-sump oil supply tube and preformed packing. Tighten fitting to
270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.8 N·m) of torque.
(d) Connect B-, C-, D-, and E-sump tube. Tighten fitting to 75-91 lb ft
Change 3 19
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3011 00
WARNING

(e) Connect electrical connector to lube oil supply.
(f) Connect remaining packager connections per packager's manual.
C. Oil wet D- and E-sump bearings as follows:
(1) Disconnect the D- and E-sump oil supply line fitting on strut 6 of turbine rear frame
(figure 7). Connect hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line with reducer.
WARNING

(2) Locate D- and E-scavenge lines (figure 8) and place clean container under lines. Dis-
connect the two lines. Dispose of drained oil and return container under lines.
7
Figure 7. D- and E-Sump Oil Supply Line

8
20 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3011 00
Figure 8. Rear Frame and Scavenge Lines
CAUTION

NOTE
Pump handle of hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, shall be operated
rapidly through the full piston stroke to ensure that the proper amount
of oil/preservative mixture is supplied to the sump.
(3) Using rear drive adapter, rotate low pressure rotor 5-10 RPM clockwise (aft looking for-
ward) while operating hydraulic unit pressurizer pump, 1C3569, handle (maintain
20 psig [137.8 kPa] minimum pressure). Rotate low pressure rotor and activate pump
handle for 2 minutes.
(4) Remove hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line from D- and E-sump oil sup-
ply line. Reconnect oil supply line. Tighten fitting to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of
torque.
Change 3 21
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3011 00
(5) Reconnect D- and E-scavenge lines and tighten to 650-750 lb in. (73.4-84.7 N·m) of
torque.
WARNING
(6) Pour oil mixture from container into hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, reservoir. If res-
ervoir does not contain approximately 6 quarts (6 liters) (reservoir capacity), mix an
additional 5 percent mixture and fill reservoir.
D. Oil wet B- and C-sump bearings as follows:
(1) Locate B- and C-sump oil supply line (figure 7) and disconnect fitting at main lube sup-
ply manifold. Connect hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line with reducer.
(2) Locate B- and C-scavenge lines (figure 7) and place container under lines. Disconnect
two lines. Dispose of drained oil and return container under lines.
CAUTION

NOTE
• Pump handle of hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, shall be oper-

ated rapidly through the full piston stroke to ensure the proper
amount of oil/preservative mixture is supplied to the sump.
• Core RPM can be determined by observing rotation of ratchet

drive. A ratchet drive speed of 7 RPM equals core speed of
10 RPM.
(3) Use ratchet in manual drive pad to rotate core 5-10 RPM clockwise (aft looking forward)
while operating hydraulic unit pressurizer pump, 1C3569, handle (maintain 20 psig
[137.8 kPa] minimum pressure). Rotate core and activate pump handle for 2 minutes.
(4) Remove hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line from B- and C-sump oil sup-
ply line. Reconnect oil supply line and tighten fitting to 650-750 lb in. (73.4-84.7 N·m)
of torque.
22 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3011 00
(5) Reconnect B- and C-scavenge lines and two gaskets. Tighten bolts and nuts to 55-70 lb
in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(6) Remove ratchet from gearbox drive pad. Lubricate preformed packing with lubricating
oil, and install preformed packing onto cover plate.
(7) Reinstall cover plate, four washers, and four nuts. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in.
(8) Pump all oil/preservative mixture from hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, reservoir and
agitate using fresh lubricating oil in reservoir. Pump all oil from reservoir and dispose of
oil.
(9) Disconnect reducer from hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, line and reinstall -6/-4
reducer, nut, and cap on head-end line.
E. Cover or plug all engine openings and unattached fittings. Cover inlet, exhaust, and VBV
openings using moisture barrier paper, if possible.
9. Installed Engine for Greater than 60 Days Preservation.
A. Use of rust preventative concentrate in lubricating oil is required.
Change 3 23
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3011 00
CAUTION
• Ensure driven equipment is prelubricated or drive shaft is dis-

connected prior to motoring engine. Failure to comply may result
in damage to driven equipment or lack of low pressure rotor rota-
tion and subsequent insufficient bearing lubrication.
• Do not exceed starter duty cycle when motoring. Hydraulic

starter has no duty cycle limitations except oil temperature shall
be maintained below 140°F (60°C). Pneumatic starter duty cycle
follows:

or
10 minutes on, 20 minutes off.
B. Perform paragraphs 7.A. through 7.C., as applicable.
C. Perform paragraphs 7.A. through 7.C., as applicable, every 60 days. Update engine log to
include oil wetting dates.
10. Noninstalled Engine for up to 60 Days Preservation.
NOTE
If engine is installed in pedestals or dolly, proceed to step C.
A. Container should be stored in an area shaded from direct sunlight and within limits of normal
environment. Engine storage log should be maintained and updated every 30 days, to include
recorded humidity condition, oil wetting dates, and desiccant replacement.
B. For gas turbine to be installed in shipping container, perform the following:
(1) Preserve engine per paragraphs 7.C.(2) or 7.C.(3).
(2) Place 75 bags of new desiccant in container.
(3) Install container lid.
(4) Inspect humidity indicator at least once every 30 days. Indicator should appear blue,
indicating safe humidity conditions. If indicator appears pink, the following steps must
be complied with within 14 days:
(a) Remove cover.
24 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3011 00
(b) Remove desiccant.
(c) Preserve engine per paragraphs 7.C.(2) or 7.C.(3).
(d) Place 75 bags of new desiccant in container.
(e) Reinstall container lid.
C. For gas turbines installed in dolly or pedestals, perform the following:
(1) Engine storage log should be maintained and updated to include oil wetting dates.
11. Noninstalled Engine for Greater than 60 Days Preservation.
NOTE
If engine is installed in pedestals or dolly, proceed to step B.
A. Container should be stored in an area shaded from direct sunlight and within limits of normal
environment. Engine storage log should be maintained and updated every 30 days, to include
recorded humidity condition, oil wetting dates, and desiccant replacement.
NOTE
The use of rust preventative concentrate is required for preservation

period of greater than 60 days.
B. Preserve engine per paragraphs 7.C.(1) or 7.H.
C. Place 75 bags of new desiccant in container.
D. Install container lid.
E. Inspect humidity indicator at least once every 30 days. Indicator should appear blue, indicat-
ing safe humidity conditions. If indicator appears pink, the following steps must be complied
with within 14 days:
(1) Remove cover.
(2) Remove desiccant.
(4) Place 75 bags of new desiccant in container.
Change 3 25
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3011 00
(5) Reinstall container lid.
(6) Inspect humidity indicator at least once every 30 days. If indicator appears pink, com-
plete corrective actions per step E.(1) through E.(5) within 14 days and start the humid-
ity inspection period again.
F. For gas turbines in a dolly or on a pedestal:
(1) Maintain and update engine storage log to include oil wetting dates.
(3) Repeat gas turbine preservation per paragraphs 7.C.(2) or 7.C.(3) every 60 days.
12. Engine Depreservation.
WARNING

A. Drain engine lubricating oil tank per packager's manual.
B. Remove drain plug from forward side of accessory gearbox. Drain oil into suitable container.
Discard packing.
C. Lubricate preformed packing with lubricating oil and install onto accessory gearbox drain
plug.
D. Install accessory gearbox drain plug. Tighten plug to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.8 N·m) of
torque.
E. Fill lubricating oil tank with lubricating oil per packager's manual.
26 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3012 00
3WP 3012 00
WORK PACKAGE
GAS TURBINE MAINTENANCE DOLLY
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION


1 - 17 ...... 3
18 Blank . . . . . . 3
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Gas Turbine Installation into Maintenance Dolly ....................................................................... 3

Gas Turbine Removal from Maintenance Dolly ......................................................................... 14
Change 3 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3012 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing gas turbine in maintenance
dolly.
None required.
NOTE
Original support equipment ring assembly, 1C9371G01, is reworked

to ring assembly, 1C9371G02, per Tool Bulletin, LM6000-0243. Main-
tenance dolly adapter set, 1C9372G05, is reworked to 1C9372G06 per
Tool Bulletin, LM6000-0244. Maintenance dolly adapter assembly,
1C9378G02, is reworked to 1C9378G03, per Tool Bulletin LM6000-
0245. Jack assembly, 1C9419G01, is replaced by 1C9447G01. It is
recommended that maintenance dolly, 1C9372G06, be reworked to
1C9372G07, per Tool Bulletin LM2500-0254.

Ring Assembly, VIGV Case Support 1C9371G02
Maintenance Dolly, External Engine 1C9372G06 or G07
Adapter Set, Assembly, Support - 1C9375G01
Air Collector, FWD
Adapter Set, Assembly, Support - 1C9377G01
Low Pressure Compressor, FWD
Adapter Assembly, Maintenance Dolly 1C9378G03
- External Engine
Jack Assembly, Support - Compressor Rear 1C9447G01
Frame
Fixture Assembly, Horizontal Lift - Engine 1C9625G01
Sling, Lift MSE-53
None required.
None required.
2 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3012 00
6. Gas Turbine Installation into Maintenance Dolly.
CAUTION
Turbine rear frame supports and either trunnion or air collector

supports are the minimum supports necessary for installing gas tur-
bine in maintenance dolly. Failure to use the correct supports may
result in gas turbine damage.
A. Install only those supports required for maintenance task being performed. See figures 1 and
2 to determine which supports are required.
2
1
B. If required, install trunnion pedestals, 1C9378P02 and P03, onto maintenance dolly, 1C9372,
using bolts, washers, and nuts. Boltheads shall face up, washers under both bolts and nuts.
Tighten nuts to 70-80 lb ft (95-108 N·m) of torque. See figure 3.
3
C. If required, install air collector support pedestals, 1C9378P10, onto maintenance dolly,
1C9372, using bolts, washers, and nuts, washers under nuts. Tighten nuts finger-tight. See
figure 4.
4
D. Using bolts, washers, and nuts, install turbine rear frame (TRF) support pedestals,
1C9378P06, onto maintenance dolly, 1C9372. Boltheads shall face up, washers under nuts.
Tighten nuts finger-tight. See figure 5.
E. Deleted.
F. Install gas turbine into maintenance dolly, 1C9372, as follows:
NOTE
Height of pedestals can be adjusted to two different positions depend-

ing on maintenance required.
(1) Adjust height of pedestals to lower or higher maintenance position. Secure with quick-
release pins.
WARNING

(2) Lower gas turbine into maintenance dolly, 1C9372.
(3) If required, secure gas turbine trunnions onto trunnion adapters with locknuts. Tighten
locknuts to 50 lb ft (68 N·m) of torque. See figure 3.
Change 3 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3012 00
Figure 1. Determine Required Support Equipment
4 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3012 00
Figure 2. Maintenance Dolly Supports from 1C9378
Change 3 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3012 00
Figure 3. Trunnion Mount Supports (Position 4)
6 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3012 00
Figure 4. Air Collector Supports (Position 3)
NOTE
Ensure air collector support adapter, 1C9375, is installed on lower

forward air collector flange.
(4) If required, adjust air collector support pedestal position on maintenance dolly, 1C9372.
See figure 4. Tighten pedestal retaining nuts to 70-80 lb ft (95-108 N·m) of torque.
(5) If required, turn adjusting nut to align air collector support pedestal mount with forward
air collector support adapter, 1C9375. Install quick-release pin.
(6) Adjust TRF support pedestal position on maintenance dolly, 1C9372. See figure 5.
Tighten pedestal retaining nuts to 70-80 lb ft (95-108 N·m) of torque. Turn support ped-
estal yoke to align TRF pedestal brackets, 1C9378P35, with gas turbine rear mount.
(7) Using TRF mount pin, secure gas turbine onto TRF support pedestal bracket,
1C9378P35. Install quick-release pins through TRF mount pins.
5
Change 3 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3012 00
Figure 5. Turbine Rear Frame Supports (Position 6)
8 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3012 00
G. Remove horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, as follows (figure 6):
WARNING
Ensure lift fixture is located at the center of gravity before discon-

necting from gas turbine. Failure to comply may result in gas tur-
bine damage or serious injury.
6
(1) Slowly release tension on hoist until lift fixture pins rotate freely. Position lift fixture
trolley at center of gravity (CG).
WARNING

(2) Remove turbine rear frame fixture quick-release pins. Remove forward lift point quick-
release pin. Raise lift fixture clear of gas turbine.
H. Install compressor rear frame (CRF) support jack assembly, 1C9447, as follows (figure 7):
7
NOTE
If maintenance dolly supports are positioned at lower height, proceed

to step (2).
(1) Using capscrews, washers, and nuts, install pedestal onto maintenance dolly, 1C9372,
cross plate. Screwheads shall face up, washers under nuts. Tighten nuts to 420-510 lb in.
(47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
(2) Install CRF support jack assembly, 1C9447, onto cross plate or pedestal, as required.
Secure with capscrews, washers, and nuts. Screwheads face up, washers under nuts.
(3) Install saddle mount, 1C9447P05, onto arm, 1C9447P04, and secure with quick-release
pin.
(4) Adjust support jack position on maintenance dolly, 1C9372, by moving cross plate.
Tighten cross plate nuts to 70-80 lb ft (95-108 N·m) of torque.
(5) Turn knurled nut and rod-end nut, in even increments, until saddle mount is aligned and
touching CRF.
Change 3 9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3012 00
10 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3012 00
NOTE
Install low pressure compressor (LPC) support adapters only if vari-

able inlet guide vane (VIGV) case has been removed.
I. Install LPC supports as follows (figure 8):

8
(1) Install LPC forward support adapters, 1C9377, onto LPC case front flange by aligning
split-line markings on adapter with LPC case split-line. Secure with bolts, washers, and
nuts, washers under nuts. Tighten nuts to 160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
(2) Using bolts, washers, and nuts, install universal support pedestals, 1C9378P06, and
yoke, 1C9378P08, onto maintenance dolly, 1C9372. Boltheads face up, washers under
nuts. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
(3) Adjust height of universal support pedestals to lower or higher maintenance position.
Secure with quick-release pins.
(4) Adjust universal support pedestal position on maintenance dolly, 1C9372. Tighten ped-
estal retaining nuts to 70-80 lb ft. (95-108 N·m) of torque. Turn adjusting nut to align
yoke with LPC forward support adapter. Install quick-release pins.
Change 3 11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3012 00
Figure 7. CRF Support Jack Assembly, 1C9447 (Position 5)
12 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3012 00
Figure 8. LPC Supports (Position 2)
Change 3 13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3012 00
J. Install VIGV stator case supports as follows (figure 9):

9
WARNING

(1) Position VIGV support ring, 1C9371, onto VIGV case front flange using 1-ton (907 kg)
hoist and sling. Secure ring with bolts and washers. Tighten bolts to 40-60 lb in.
(2) Using bolts, washers, and nuts, install universal support pedestals, 1C9378P06, and
yoke, 1C9378P08, onto maintenance dolly, 1C9372. Boltheads shall face up, washers
under nuts. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
(3) Adjust height of universal support pedestals to lower or higher maintenance position.
Secure with quick-release pins.
(4) Adjust universal support pedestal position on maintenance dolly, 1C9372. Tighten ped-
estal retaining nuts to 70-80 lb ft (95-108 N·m) of torque. Turn adjusting nut to align sup-
port yoke to VIGV support ring, 1C9371. Install quick-release pin.
7. Gas Turbine Removal from Maintenance Dolly.
A. Install horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, as follows (figure 6):
WARNING
Establish and record the center of gravity of the horizontal lift fix-
ture to prevent fixture from pitching when being disconnected
from the gas turbine. Failure to comply may cause serious injury
or gas turbine damage.
(1) Attach 15-ton (13,607 kg) hoist to horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625.
WARNING

(2) Raise horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, to working height. Level fixture by adjusting trol-
ley. Record CG measurement.
14 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3012 00
Figure 9. VIGV Support Ring (Position 1)
Change 3 15
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3012 00
(3) Position lift fixture over gas turbine. Secure lift fixture clevis, 1C9625P09, onto rear
mounts on turbine rear frame with quick-release pins.
release pin.
CAUTION
(5) Position lift fixture trolley to 30.5 inches. (774.7 mm). Slowly apply small amount of
lifting force on hoist. Ensure lift fixture is properly attached to gas turbine.
(6) Apply sufficient lifting force on hoist to allow gas turbine to float in maintenance dolly,
1C9372, support mounts. Mount pins shall turn freely.
B. Remove VIGV support rings, 1C9371, as follows (figure 9):
(1) Adjust universal support pedestal adjusting nut to allow quick-release pins to rotate
freely. Remove quick-release pins.
(2) Attach 1-ton (907 kg) hoist and sling onto VIGV support ring, 1C9371. Apply sufficient
lifting force to VIGV support ring for removal.
WARNING
(3) Remove bolts and washers from VIGV support ring, 1C9371. Remove support ring.
C. Remove LPC forward support adapters, 1C9377, as follows (figure 8):
(1) Adjust universal support pedestal adjusting nut to allow quick-release pins to rotate
freely. Remove quick-release pins.
(2) Remove bolts, washers, and nuts that secure LPC forward support adapters, 1C9377,
onto LPC case. Remove LPC forward support adapters.
D. Remove CRF support jack assembly, 1C9447, as follows (figure 7):
(1) Adjust support jack rod-end nut to release pressure on CRF.
16 Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3012 00
(2) Adjust support jack knurled nut until CRF saddle mount quick-release pin turns freely.
Remove quick-release pin and saddle mount.
E. Adjust support pedestal, 1C9378, to release tension on turbine rear frame TRF mount pins.
See figure 5. Pins shall rotate freely. Remove quick-release pins. Remove TRF mount pins.
F. Remove forward air collector support adapters, 1C9375, as follows (figure 4):
(1) Adjust air collector support pedestal adjusting nut to allow quick-release pin to rotate
freely.
(2) Remove quick-release pin and forward air collector support adapters, 1C9375.
G. Remove locknuts that secure gas turbine trunnions onto trunnion adapters. See figure 3.
WARNING
H. Lift gas turbine free of maintenance dolly, 1C9372.

18 Blank Change 3
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3013 00
2WP 3013 00
WORK PACKAGE
GAS TURBINE/SUPPORT PEDESTAL REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION


1 - 17 ...... 2
18 Blank . . . . . . 2
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Gas Turbine Installation onto Support Pedestals ........................................................................ 3

Gas Turbine Removal from Support Pedestals ........................................................................... 11
Change 2 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3013 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the gas turbine in the
support pedestals.
None required.
NOTE
Original support equipment ring assembly, 1C9371G01, is reworked

to ring assembly, 1C9371G02, per Tool Bulletin, LM6000-0243. Ped-
estal assembly, 1C9384G01, is reworked to 1C9384G03, and
1C9384G02, is reworked to 1C9384G04, by Tool Bulletin LM6000-
0246. Jack assembly, 1C9419G02, is replaced by 1C9447G02.

Ring Assembly Support - VIGV Stator Case 1C9371G02
Adapter Set Assembly, Support - 1C9375G01
Air Collector, Forward
Adapter Set Assembly, Support - LPC, 1C9377G01
Forward
Support Pedestals, Storage and Maintenance 1C9384G03/G04
Jack Assembly, Support - CRF 1C9447G02
Fixture Assembly, Engine Lift - Horizontal 1C9625G01
Sling, Lift MSE-53
None Required.
None required.
2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3013 00
6. Gas Turbine Installation onto Support Pedestals.
CAUTION
Turbine rear frame supports and either trunnion or air collector

supports are the minimum supports necessary for installing gas tur-
bine in support pedestals. Failure to use correct supports may result
in gas turbine damage.
A. Use only those supports required for the maintenance task being performed. See figures 1
and 2 to determine which supports are required.
2
1
B. Install gas turbine into support pedestals, 1C9384, as follows:
(1) If required, secure gas turbine onto trunnion support pedestals, 9448M53, as follows
(figure 3):
3
(a) Align trunnion support pedestals with gas turbine trunnions.
(b) Using locknuts, secure gas turbine trunnions onto trunnion support pedestals.
Tighten locknuts to 50 lb ft (67.8 N·m) of torque.
(2) If required, secure gas turbine onto air collector support pedestals, 9448M52, as follows
(figure 4):
4
NOTE
Ensure forward air collector support adapters, 1C9375, are installed

on lower forward air collector flange.
(a) Align air collector support pedestals with forward air collector support adapters,
1C9375.
(b) Adjust support pedestal yokes, as required, and install quick-release pins.
(3) Secure gas turbine onto turbine rear frame (TRF) support pedestals, 9448M84, as fol-
lows (figure 5):
5
(a) Deleted.
(b) Align support pedestals with TRF mounts.
(c) Turn support pedestal yokes, as required, and install TRF mount pins. Mount pins
shall rotate freely. Install quick-release pins through TRF mount pins.
Change 2 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3013 00
Figure 1. Determine Required Support Equipment
4 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3013 00
Figure 2. Maintenance Pedestals from 1C9384
Change 2 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3013 00
Figure 3. Trunnion Support (Position 4)
6 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3013 00
Figure 4. Air Collector Support (Position 3)
Change 2 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3013 00
Figure 5. Turbine Rear Frame Support (Position 6)
8 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3013 00
C. Remove horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, as follows (figure 6):

6
(1) Slowly release tension on hoist until lift fixture pins rotate freely. Position lift fixture
trolley at center of gravity (CG).
WARNING
• Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from

• Ensure lift fixture is located at the center of gravity before dis-

connecting from gas turbine. Failure to comply may result in
gas turbine damage or serious injury.
• Ensure gas turbine is secured in pedestals and pedestals are

flat on floor before disconnecting lift fixture from gas turbine.
(2) Remove turbine rear frame rear mount quick-release pins, sheet 2. Remove compressor
front frame forward lift point quick-release pin. Raise lift fixture clear of gas turbine.
D. Support gas turbine with compressor rear frame (CRF) support jack assembly, 1C9447, as
follows (figure 7):
7
(1) Install CRF support jack assembly, 1C9447, onto support pedestal, 9448M85. Using
bolts and nuts, secure support jack. Tighten nuts to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of
torque.
(2) Install CRF saddle, 1C9447P05, onto support jack. Secure with quick-release pin.
(3) Position support jack under gas turbine. Turn nut, 1C9447, and rod-end nut, in even
increments, until saddle mount is aligned and touching CRF.
NOTE
Install low pressure compressor forward support adapters only if

VIGV case has been removed.
E. Install low pressure compressor (LPC) forward support adapters, 1C9377, and secure gas tur-
bine onto LPC support pedestals as follows (figure 8):
8
(1) Install LPC forward support adapters, 1C9377, onto LPC stages 0-3 stator case front
flange by aligning split-line markings on adapters with LPC case split-line. Secure with
bolts, washers, and nuts. Tighten nuts to 160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
(2) Align gas turbine support pedestals, 9448M51, with LPC forward support adapters,
1C9377.
Change 2 9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3013 00
10 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3013 00
(3) Turn adjusting nuts on support pedestals, as required, and install quick-release pins.
F. Install variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) support ring, 1C9371, and secure gas turbine onto
VIGV support pedestals as follows (figure 9):
9
(1) Using 1-ton (907 kg) hoist and sling, position VIGV support ring, 1C9371, onto VIGV
case front flange. Secure VIGV support ring with bolts and washers. Tighten bolts to
40-60 lb in. (4.5-6.8 N·m) of torque.
(2) Align gas turbine support pedestals, 9448M51, with VIGV support ring, 1C9371.
(3) Turn adjusting nuts on support pedestals, as required, and install quick-release pins.
7. Gas Turbine Removal from Support Pedestals.
A. Install horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, as follows (figure 6):
(1) Attach 15-ton (13,607.8 kg) hoist onto horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625.
Change 2 11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3013 00
Figure 7. CRF Support Jack Assembly 1C9447 (Position 5)
12 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3013 00
Figure 8. LPC Support (Position 2)
Change 2 13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3013 00
Figure 9. VIGV Case Support (Position 1)
14 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3013 00
WARNING
• Establish and record the center of gravity of the horizontal lift

fixture to prevent fixture from pitching when being discon-
nected from the gas turbine. Failure to comply may cause seri-
ous injury or gas turbine damage.

CG measurement.
(3) Position lift fixture over gas turbine. Secure lift fixture clevis, 1C9625P09, onto rear
mounts on turbine rear frame with turbine rear frame rear mount, sheet 2, quick-release
pins.
(4) Position lift fixture front frame adapter onto front frame forward lift point. Install com-
pressor front frame lift point quick-release pin.
CAUTION
WARNING
(6) Apply sufficient lifting force on hoist to allow gas turbine to float in support mounts.
Mount pins shall turn freely.
B. Remove VIGV support ring, 1C9371, as follows (figure 9):
(1) Adjust support pedestal adjusting nuts to allow quick-release pins to rotate freely.
Remove quick-release pins.
(2) Attach 1-ton (907 kg) hoist and sling to VIGV support ring, 1C9371. Take up slack on
hoist.
Change 2 15
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3013 00
WARNING
(3) Remove bolts and washers from VIGV support ring, 1C9371. Remove VIGV support
ring.
C. Remove LPC forward support adapters, 1C9377, as follows (figure 8):
(1) Adjust support pedestal adjusting nuts to allow quick-release pins to rotate freely.
Remove quick-release pins. Remove support pedestals.
(2) Remove bolts, washers, and nuts that secure LPC forward support adapters, 1C9377,
onto LPC case. Remove LPC forward support adapters.
D. Remove CRF support jack, 1C9447P07, as follows (figure 7):
(1) Adjust rod-end nut to release pressure on CRF.
(2) Adjust nut, 1C9447P07, until CRF saddle mount quick-release pin turns freely. Remove
quick-release pin and CRF saddle.
(3) Remove bolts and nuts that secure support jack, 1C9447, onto support pedestal,
1C9448M85. Remove support jack.
E. Remove adapter brackets as follows (figure 5):
(1) Adjust support pedestal adjusting nut to release tension on TRF mount pins. Pins shall
rotate freely. Remove quick-release pins. Remove TRF mount pins.
(2) Deleted.
F. Remove air collector support pedestals as follows (figure 4):
(1) Turn support pedestal yoke to allow quick-release pin to rotate freely.
(2) Remove quick-release pin.
(3) Remove bolts and forward air collector support adapters, 1C9375.
G. Remove locknuts that secure gas turbine trunnions onto trunnion support pedestals,
9448M53P02. See figure 3.
16 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3013 00
WARNING
H. Lift gas turbine free of support pedestals.

18 Blank Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3014 00
0WP 3014 00
WORK PACKAGE
GAS TURBINE IN SHIPPING CONTAINER
REPLACEMENT


1 - 17 ...... 0
18 Blank . . . . . . 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Gas Turbine Installation into Shipping Container ...................................................................... 14

Gas Turbine Removal from Shipping Container......................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3014 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the gas turbine in the ship-
ping container.
None required.

Dolly Assembly, Gas Turbine Changeout 1C9354G03
Adapter Set, Air Collector Support 1C9375G01
Fixture Assembly, Horizontal Lift 1C9625G01
Desiccant MIL-D-3464
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3014 00
6. Gas Turbine Removal from Shipping Container.
A. Prepare shipping container for gas turbine removal as follows:
WARNING
Release pressure from shipping container to prevent injury when
separating container halves.
(1) Depressurize shipping container by pressing button located in center of relief valve. See
figure 1.
1
(2) Rotate tee-head bolts so boltheads drop into lower flange recess. See figure 2.
2
(3) Attach 2-ton (1,814 kg) hoist and sling to two lifting rings on each end of lid. Attach two
control lines to opposite ends of lid.
WARNING
(4) Raise lid straight up until clear of gas turbine and place on wood blocks. Remove hoist
and sling.
(5) Lower four corner posts. See figure 3, view C.

3
B. Remove gas turbine from container as follows:
(1) Remove five bolts and nuts from air collector lower forward flange on each side. See
figure 4.
4
(2) Remove two aft bolts that secure No. 1 electrical interface panel on support bracket.
Loosen forward bolt on support bracket and swing bracket clear of air collector flange.
(3) Using five bolts, install forward air collector adapter set, 1C9375, on air collector lower
forward flange. Tighten bolts to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque. See figure 5.
5
WARNING
Establish and record the center of gravity of the horizontal lift fix-
ture to prevent fixture from pitching when being disconnected
from the gas turbine.
(4) Attach 15-ton (13,607 kg) hoist onto horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625. See figure 6.
6
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3014 00
Figure 1. LM6000 DLE Shipping Container Pressure Relief Valves
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3014 00
Figure 2. LM6000 DLE Shipping Container
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3014 00
Figure 3. Shipping Container Base
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3014 00
Figure 4. No. 1 Electrical Interface Panel Support Bracket
WARNING
center of gravity (CG) measurement.
(6) Position lift fixture over gas turbine. Using quick-release pins, secure lift fixture clevis,
1C9625P09, onto rear mounts on turbine rear frame. See figure 6, detail B.
release pin, detail A.
CAUTION
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3014 00
Figure 5. Mounting Hardware
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3014 00
Figure 6. Horizontal Lift Fixture and Changeout Dolly
9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3014 00
(9) Remove hardware (TBD) that secure two lower support brackets onto fuel manifold lad-
der racks. See figure 7.
7
(10) Remove hex nuts, lockwashers, and flat washers from trunnions. See figure 8.
8
(11) Remove four bolts and lockwashers that secure upper pillow blocks. Remove upper pil-
low blocks. See figure 3.
(12) Apply sufficient lifting force on hoist to allow gas turbine to float in rear mounts. Rear
mount pins shall turn freely. See figure 9.
9
WARNING

• Ensure hoist and lift fixture are aligned prior to removing rear
mount pins. Failure to comply may result in gas turbine shift-
ing, causing serious injury.
CAUTION
while gas turbine is being raised. Gas turbine damage may result.
(13) Remove cotter pins, washers, and rear mount pins, and raise gas turbine clear of
container.
C. Install gas turbine into changeout dolly, 1C9354, as follows:
WARNING
(1) Slowly lower gas turbine onto changeout dolly. Align forward air collector support
adapters, 1C9375, with dolly forward supports. Install quick-release pin on both sides.
See figure 5, view A.
(2) Push right rear support clevis pin inboard and align with turbine rear frame mount.
Install mount pin. Install quick-release pin through mount pin. Install quick-release pin
through rear mount support and clevis pin, view B.
10
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3014 00
Figure 7. Fuel Manifold Support Brackets
11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3014 00
Figure 8. Trunnion Mount
(3) Push left rear support clevis pin inboard and align with turbine rear frame mount by
adjusting support. Install mount pin. Install quick-release pin through mount pin. Install
quick-release pin through rear mount support and clevis pin.
(4) Position lift fixture trolley at center of gravity (CG). Slowly release tension on hoist until
lift fixture pins rotate freely.
WARNING

(5) Remove two turbine rear frame rear mount quick-release pins. Remove compressor front
frame forward lift point quick-release pin. Raise lift fixture clear of gas turbine. See
figure 6.
(6) Remove pin, washers, and cotter pins from turbine rear frame sway mount. See figure 9.
12
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3014 00
Figure 9. Turbine Rear Frame Sway Mount
13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3014 00
7. Gas Turbine Installation into Shipping Container.
A. Prepare shipping container for gas turbine installation as follows:
(1) Remove four bolts and lockwashers that secure trunnion mount upper pillow blocks.
Remove upper pillow blocks. See figure 3.
(2) Loosen four bolts that secure trunnion mount lower pillow blocks, to provide for lateral
adjustment.
(3) Position aft mount links outboard. Loosen right mount link jamnut.
(4) Lower four corner posts.
(5) Position aft mount links to proper position (farthest aft location).
B. Remove gas turbine from changeout dolly, 1C9354, as follows:
(1) Install sway mount pin, washers, and cotter pins into turbine rear frame 6:00 o'clock
position. One washer under pinhead, one washer under cotter pin. See figure 9.
WARNING
(2) Attach 15-ton (13,607 kg) hoist onto horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625. Raise fixture to
working height. Level fixture by adjusting trolley. Record CG measurement.
(3) Position lift fixture, 1C9625, over gas turbine. Using turbine rear frame rear mount
quick-release pins, secure lift fixture clevis, 1C9625P09, onto rear mounts on turbine
rear frame. See figure 6, view B.
(4) Position lift fixture front frame adapter onto front frame forward lift point. Install com-
pressor front frame forward lift point quick-release pin, view A.
CAUTION
14
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3014 00
WARNING

• Ensure mount pins turn freely before removing.
(6) Apply sufficient lifting force on hoist to allow gas turbine to float in mounts. Mount pins
shall turn freely.
(7) Remove forward air collector support adapter, 1C9375, quick-release pins. See figure 5,
view A.
(8) Remove quick-release pins that secure mount pins onto turbine rear frame. Remove
mount pins, view B.
(9) Remove turbine rear frame quick-release pins that secure clevis pins onto support. Pull
clevis pins outboard for maximum clearance.
WARNING
(10) Raise gas turbine clear of dolly.
C. Install gas turbine in shipping container as follows:
WARNING
CAUTION
while gas turbine is being lowered into container, or gas turbine
damage may result.
(1) Lower gas turbine into shipping container. Align trunnion mounts with lower pillow
blocks. Align aft mount links with turbine rear frame mounts. See figure 3.
(2) Install left rear mount pin, washers, and cotter pins. One washer under pinhead, one
washer under cotter pin. Secure pin with cotter pin. See figure 9.
15
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3014 00
(3) Adjust right rear mount link, as required, until mount pin can be inserted freely. Install
mount pin, washers, and cotter pins. One washer under pinhead, one washer under cotter
pin. Secure pin with cotter pin. Hand-tighten adjustable link jamnut.
(4) Slowly release tension on hoist.
(5) Align lower support brackets with fuel manifold ladder rack and secure with hardware.
See figure 7.
(6) Using four bolts and lockwashers, install upper pillow blocks. See figure 3. Tighten bolts
to 50-70 lb ft (67.8-94.9 N·m) of torque.
(7) Install flat washers, lockwashers, and nuts onto gas turbine trunnions.
Tighten nuts to 200-250 lb ft (271.2-339.0 N·m) of torque.
(8) Tighten lower pillow block bolts to 50-70 lb ft (67.8-94.9 N·m) of torque.
(9) Position lift fixture trolley at CG. Slowly apply sufficient lifting force to allow lift fixture
pins to rotate freely.
WARNING


(10) Remove two turbine rear frame rear mount quick-release pins. Remove compressor front
frame forward lift point quick-release pin. Raise lift fixture clear of gas turbine. See
figure 6.
(11) Remove five bolts that secure forward air collector support adapters, 1C9375, onto air
collector lower forward flange. Remove support adapters. See figure 5.
(12) Position No. 1 electrical interface panel bracket. Secure bracket onto air collector with
two bolts and nuts. Tighten nuts finger-tight. Install eight remaining bolts and nuts onto
air collector forward flange. Tighten eight air collector nuts to 480-570 lb in.
(54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque. See figure 4.
(13) Install two bolts that secure No. 1 electrical interface panel to bracket. Tighten three bolts
to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque. Tighten two nuts that secure bracket on air collec-
tor to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque.
16
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3014 00
D. Install shipping container cover as follows:
(1) Raise four corner posts. See figure 3.
(2) Fill desiccant container, as required.
(3) Ensure flange and gasket on enclosure base are clean and serviceable.
NOTE
Ensure tee-head bolts are aligned in recess and nuts have been loos-
ened prior to installing the lid on the shipping container.
(4) Attach 2-ton (1,814 kg) hoist and sling onto two lifting rings on each end of lid. Attach
two control lines to opposite ends of lid.
WARNING
(5) Lower lid straight down over gas turbine, aligning forward and aft guide pins. Ensure
flanges seat.
(6) Remove hoist, sling, and guide ropes.
(7) Rotate tee-head bolts until long side of bolthead is perpendicular to flange. Tighten tee-
head bolt nuts to 420-510 lb in. (47.4-57.6 N·m) of torque. See figure 2.
17/(18 Blank)
18 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3015 00
2WP 3015 00
WORK PACKAGE
GAS AND DUAL FUEL MANIFOLD SUPPORT FIXTURE
REPLACEMENT


1 - 15 ...... 2
16 Blank . . . . . . 2
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Dual Fuel Manifold Support Fixture Installation (Gas or Gas and Liquid Fuel Systems) ......... 12
Dual Fuel Manifold Support Fixture Removal (Gas or Gas and Liquid Fuel Systems) ............. 8
Fuel Manifold Support Fixture Installation (Gas Models Only)................................................. 6
Fuel Manifold Support Fixture Removal (Gas Models Only) .................................................... 3
Change 2 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3015 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the dual fuel manifold
support fixture.
B. Remove required tubing on compressor rear frame (CRF) per SWP 1913 02, before installing
dual fuel manifold support fixture, 1C9621.
Title Number
NOTE
Shipping bracket fixture assembly, 1C9621G01, can only be used on

gas turbines with a gas fuel system. The manifold support fixture,
1C9621G02, can be used for either gas turbines with a gas fuel system
or a gas and liquid fuel system.

Fixture Assembly, Shipping Bracket - 1C9621G01
Steam/Fuel Manifold (Gas Systems Only)
Fixture Assembly, Shipping Bracket - 1C9621G02
Steam/Fuel Manifold (Gas and Liquid
Systems Only)
None required.
None required.
2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3015 00
6. Fuel Manifold Support Fixture Removal (Gas Models Only).
See figure 1.
1
A. Disassemble support fixture as follows:
(1) Remove eight capscrews (25, figure 1, sheet 2), washers (26), and nuts (27) that secure
left side rail (22) and right side rail (14) onto left side valve rack (23) and right side valve
rack (24).
(2) Attach hoist to crossover bar (1, figure 1, sheet 1) and take up slack.
(3) Attach hoist to left side rail (22).
(4) Remove capscrew (19), washer (20), and nut (21) that secure left side rail (22) onto
crossover bar (1).
WARNING
(5) Remove capscrew (16), washer (17), and nut (18) that secure left side rail (22) to air col-
lector clevis (15) and remove left side rail (22).
(6) Attach hoist to right side rail (14).
(7) Remove capscrew (19), washer (20), and nut (21) that secure right side rail (14) to cross-
over bar (1).
(8) Remove capscrew (16), washer (17), and nut (18) that secure right side rail (14) to air
collector clevis (15) and remove right side rail (14).
(9) Remove three capscrews (7), washers (8), and nuts (9) that secure left support (10), cen-
ter support (12), and right support (2) to engine brackets (11), (13), and (6).
(10) Remove capscrew (3), washer (4), and nut (5) that secure left support (10) to crossover
bar (1) and remove left support.
(11) Remove capscrew (3), washer (4), and nut (5) that secure center support (12) to cross-
over bar (1) and remove center support.
(12) Remove capscrew (3), washer (4), and nut (5) that secure right support (2) to crossover
bar (1) and remove right support.
(13) Remove crossover bar (1).
Change 2 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3015 00
Figure 1. Dual Fuel Manifold Support Fixture, 1C9621 (Sheet 1 of 2)
4 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3015 00
Change 2 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3015 00
7. Fuel Manifold Support Fixture Installation (Gas Models Only).
See figure 1.
CAUTION
Do not operate engine with support fixture installed, or severe dam-

age to the manifold hoses or tubes may result.
NOTE
• Orientation of tubes are metal stamped on each tube to assist

assembly of fixture.
• Numbers are metal stamped at joints of interfacing supports on

crossover bar to assist in assembly of parts.
A. Assemble fixture as follows:
(1) Install lifteye onto crossover bar (1, figure 1, sheet 1).
WARNING
(2) Position crossover bar (1), per metal stampings on bar, and lift bar over mid-compressor
flange.
(3) Position top end of right support (2) with end stamped 6 into clevis plate (with 6 stamped
on it) of crossover bar (1), and install capscrew (3), washer (4), and nut (5).
Hand-tighten.
(4) Install bottom end of right support (2) onto aft side of lower hole of engine bracket (6)
with capscrew (7), washer (8), and nut (9). Hand-tighten.
(5) Position top end of left support (10) with end stamped 5 into clevis plate (with 5 stamped
Hand-tighten.
(6) Install bottom end of left support (10) onto aft side of lower hole of engine bracket (11)
(7) Position top end of center support (12), with end stamped 7 into clevis plate (with 7
stamped on it) of crossover bar (1), and install with capscrew (3), washer (4), and nut (5).
Hand-tighten.
6 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3015 00
(8) Install bottom end of center support (12) onto aft side of lower hole of engine
bracket (13) with capscrew (7), washer (8), and nut (9). Hand-tighten.
(9) Tighten bottom capscrews (7) of right support (2), left support (10), and center support
(12) to 20 lb ft (27.1 N·m) of torque.
(10) Install lifteye onto right side rail (14).
WARNING
(11) Position right side rail (14, figure 1, sheet 2) onto air collector clevis (15), and install
(12) Install right side rail (14, figure 1, sheet 1), onto crossover bar (1) with capscrew (19),
washer (20), and nut (21). Hand-tighten.
(13) Install lifteye onto left side rail (22).
WARNING
(14) Position left side rail (22) onto air collector clevis (15), and install with capscrew (16),
washer (17), and nut (18). Hand-tighten.
(15) Install left side rail (22) onto crossover bar (1) with capscrew (19), washer (20), and
nut (21). Hand-tighten.
(16) Measure rectangle from corner to corner (diagonally) to ensure perpendicularity.
(17) Tighten capscrews (3) to 135-150 lb ft (183.0-203.4 N·m) of torque.
(19) Tighten capscrews (19) to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
Change 2 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3015 00
NOTE
Thick washers (26) are used between the screwhead and valve rack to
distribute load.
(20) Attach left side rail (22) and right side rail (14) onto left side valve rack (23) and right
side valve rack (24) with eight capscrews (25, figure 1, sheet 2) (screwheads down),
washers (26) (under screwhead), and nuts (27). Tighten capscrews to 420-510 lb in.
(47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
8. Dual Fuel Manifold Support Fixture Removal (Gas or Gas and Liquid Fuel Systems).
2
NOTE
If gas turbine does not have a gas and liquid fuel system, skip step A
and disassemble per step B.
A. Disassemble additional support fixture hardware as follows:
(1) Remove four capscrews (37, figure 2, sheet 2) washers (4), and nuts (5) that secure man-
ifold frame braces (36) to bracket (35) and brackets on right and left side frame rails (14
and 22). Remove manifold frame braces.
(2) Remove four capscrews (29), washers (4), and nuts (5) that secure brackets (35) to right
and left sides of manifold support frame (28). Remove brackets.
(3) Remove four capscrews (34), washers (4), and nuts (5) that secure lateral braces (32 and
33, figure 1, sheet 1) to brackets (30 and 31) and engine brackets (38 and 39). Remove
lateral braces.
(4) Remove four capscrews (29), washers (4), and nuts (5) that secure brackets (30 and 31)
to manifold support frame (28). Remove brackets.
(5) Remove four capscrews (29), washers (4), and nuts (5) that secure manifold support
frame (28) to brackets on right and left side rails (14 and 22). Remove manifold support
frame.
(6) Follow step B for fuel manifold support fixture removal.
B. Disassemble support fixture as follows:
(1) Remove eight capscrews (25, figure 2, sheet 2), washers (26), and nuts (27) that secure
left side rail (22) and right side rail (14) onto left side valve rack (23) and right side valve
rack (24).
(2) Attach hoist to crossover bar (1, figure 2, sheet 2) and take up slack.
8 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3015 00
Change 2 9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3015 00
10 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3015 00
(3) Attach hoist to left side rail (22).
(4) Remove capscrew (19), washer (20), and nut (21) that secure left side rail (22) onto
crossover bar (1).
WARNING
(5) Remove capscrew (16), washer (17), and nut (18) that secure left side rail (22) to air col-
lector clevis (15) and remove left side rail (22).
(6) Attach hoist to right side rail (14).
(7) Remove capscrew (19), washer (20), and nut (21) that secure right side rail (14) to cross-
over bar (1).
(8) Remove capscrew (16), washer (17), and nut (18) that secure right side rail (14) to air
collector clevis (15) and remove right side rail (14).
(9) Remove three capscrews (7), washers (8), and nuts (9) that secure left support (10), cen-
ter support (12), and right support (2) to engine brackets (11), (13), and (6).
(10) Remove capscrew (3), washer (4), and nut (5) that secure left support (10) to crossover
bar (1) and remove left support.
(11) Remove capscrew (3), washer (4), and nut (5) that secure center support (12) to cross-
over bar (1) and remove center support.
(12) Remove capscrew (3), washer (4), and nut (5) that secure right support (2) to crossover
bar (1) and remove right support.
(13) Remove crossover bar (1).
Change 2 11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3015 00
9. Dual Fuel Manifold Support Fixture Installation (Gas or Gas and Liquid Fuel Systems).
CAUTION
Do not operate engine with support fixture installed, or severe dam-

age to the manifold hoses or tubes may result.
NOTE
• Orientation of tubes are metal stamped on each tube to assist

assembly of fixture.
• Numbers are metal stamped at joints of interfacing supports on

crossover bar to assist in assembly of parts.
• If gas turbine does not have a gas and liquid fuel system, skip step
B.
A. Assemble fixture as follows:
(1) Install lifteye onto crossover bar (1, figure 2, sheet 1).
WARNING
(2) Using hoist position crossover bar (1), per metal stampings on bar, and lift bar over mid-
compressor flange.
(3) Position top end of right support (2) with end stamped 6 into clevis plate (with 6 stamped
Hand-tighten.
(4) Install bottom end of right support (2) onto aft side of lower hole of engine bracket (6)
(5) Position top end of left support (10) with end stamped 5 into clevis plate (with 5 stamped
Hand-tighten.
(6) Install bottom end of left support (10) onto aft side of lower hole of engine bracket (11)
12 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3015 00
(7) Position top end of center support (12), with end stamped 7 into clevis plate (with 7
stamped on it) of crossover bar (1), and install with capscrew (3), washer (4), and nut (5).
Hand-tighten.
(8) Install bottom end of center support (12) onto aft side of lower hole of engine
bracket (13) with capscrew (7), washer (8), and nut (9). Hand-tighten.
(9) Tighten bottom capscrews (7) of right support (2), left support (10), and center support
(12) to 20 lb ft (27.1 N·m) of torque. Remove hoist.
(10) Install lifteye onto right side rail (14).
WARNING
(11) Using hoist, position right side rail (14, figure 2, sheet 2) onto air collector clevis (15),
and install with capscrew (16), washer (17), and nut (18). Hand-tighten.
(12) Install right side rail (14, figure 2, sheet 1), onto crossover bar (1) with capscrew (19),
washer (20), and nut (21). Hand-tighten. Remove hoist.
(13) Install lifteye onto left side rail (22).
WARNING
(14) Using hoist position left side rail (22) onto air collector clevis (15), and install with
capscrew (16), washer (17), and nut (18). Hand-tighten.
(15) Install left side rail (22) onto crossover bar (1) with capscrew (19), washer (20), and
nut (21). Hand-tighten. Remove hoist.
(16) Measure rectangle from corner to corner (diagonally) to ensure perpendicularity.
(19) Tighten capscrews (19) to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
Change 2 13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3015 00
NOTE
Thick washers (26) are used between the screwhead and valve rack to
distribute load.
(20) Attach left side rail (22) and right side rail (14) onto left side valve rack (23) and right
side valve rack (24) with eight capscrews (25, figure 2, sheet 2) (screwheads down),
washers (26) (under screwhead), and nuts (27). Tighten capscrews to 420-510 lb in.
(47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
B. Assemble additional manifold support fixture hardware as follows:
(1) Attach manifold support frame (28) to brackets on right and left side rails (14 and 22)
with four capscrews (29), washers (4), and nuts (5). Hand-tighten.
(2) Attach brackets (30 and 31) to manifold support frame (28) with two capscrews (29),
washers (4), and nuts (5). Hand-tighten.
(3) Attach lateral braces (32 and 33) with end marked TO LIQUID MANIFOLD BRACKET
to brackets (30 and 31) and other end of braces to engine brackets (38 and 39) with cap-
screws (34), washers (4), and nuts (5). Hand-tighten.
(4) Attach two brackets (35) to right and left sides of support frame (28) with capscrews
(29), washers (4), and nuts (5). Hand-tighten.
(5) Attach two manifold frame braces (36) to brackets (35) and brackets on right and left
side rails (14 and 22) with capscrews (37), washers (4), and nuts (5). Hand-tighten.
(6) Inspect manifold support frame (28) to ensure correct position.
(7) Tighten capscrews (29) to 420-510 lb in (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque in the following
sequence:
(a) Capscrews (29) attaching brackets (35) to manifold support frame (28).
(b) Capscrews (29) attaching manifold support frame (28) to brackets on side rails (14
and 22).
(c) Capscrews (37) attaching frame braces (36) to brackets (35) and brackets on right
and left side rails (14 and 22).
(d) Capscrews (29) attaching bracket (31) to manifold support frame (28).
(e) Capscrews (34) attaching right lateral brace (32) to bracket (31) and engine
bracket (39).
14 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3015 00
(f) Capscrews (34) attaching left lateral brace (33) to bracket (30) and engine
bracket (38).
(g) Capscrews (29) attaching bracket (30) to manifold support frame (28).

16 Blank Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3017 00
2WP 3017 00
WORK PACKAGE
LOW PRESSURE TURBINE (LPT) MODULE IN
SHIPPING CONTAINER REPLACEMENT


1 - 16 ...... 2
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
LPT Module Installation into Shipping Container...................................................................... 13

LPT Module Removal from Shipping Container........................................................................ 3
Change 2 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3017 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the LPT module in the
shipping container utilizing a single hoist.
Title Number

Fixture, Forward Restrain - LPT 1C9338G02
Rotor/Stator
Strongback, Lift, Turn and Restrain - LPT 1C9613G02
Module
Fixture, Adjustable C.G. Horizontal Lift - 1C9627G01
Heavy Purpose
Dolly, Storage, LPT Module 1C9632G01
Container, Shipping - LPT 106C7158P02
Desiccant MIL-D-3464
None required.
2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3017 00
6. LPT Module Removal from Shipping Container.
A. Remove top from shipping container, 106C7158P02, as follows:
(1) Depressurize shipping container by pressing button located in center of relief valve,
figure 1, sheet 1.
1
WARNING
Release pressure from shipping container to prevent injury when

separating container halves.
(2) Loosen nuts on tee-head bolts that secure shipping container top. Rotate tee-head bolts
so boltheads drop into lower flange recess (figure 1, sheet 2, section A-A).
2
(3) Attach 2-ton (1,814.4 kg) hoist and sling to four lifting rings along sides of top. Attach
two control lines to opposite ends of top.
WARNING
(4) Raise top straight up until clear of module and place on wood blocks. Remove hoist and
sling.
B. Remove LPT module from shipping container as follows (figure 2):
(1) Lower four alignment tubes, located in corners of the container, by pulling cotter pin,
view A.
(2) Remove shaft restraint lock from center of LPT rotor shaft by turning rod until lock is
removed, view B.
(3) Install strongback fixture, 1C9613, onto LPT module per WP 2710 00. Use two-leg sling
and 10-ton (9,071.9 kg) hoist to install strongback.
(4) Remove 16 capscrews, washers, and nuts that secure support plate to mounting frame.
(5) Lift module from container.
(6) Remove four capscrews, washers, and nuts that secure center shaft restraint and exten-
sion assembly to mounting frame, view B. Remove center shaft restraint and extension
assembly.
Change 2 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3017 00
Figure 1. Shipping Container, 106C7158P02 (Sheet 1 of 2)
4 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3017 00
Figure 1. Shipping Container, 106C7158P02 (Sheet 2 of 2)
Change 2 5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3017 00
Figure 2. Shipping Container Setup (Sheet 1 of 3)
6 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3017 00
Change 2 7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3017 00
8 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3017 00
NOTE
Pivot brace consists of a top and bottom piece. Both pieces are
required for PA Uprate, PC, and PD models.
(7) Remove four capscrews, washers, and nuts that secure pivot braces (sheet 1) in corner of
container. If top pivot brace is not attached to bottom brace, secure using two bolts and
nuts, view D.
(8) Position pivot brace in center of mounting frame by engaging pins in brace in holes in
frame. Secure pivot brace onto frame using two bolts and nuts at curved end.
(9) Remove quick-release pins from both clevis mounts.
(10) Rotate module until top vertical centerline is toward clevis mounts and 6:00 o'clock posi-
tion is toward center of container.
(11) Lower module and install trunnion pins, sheet 2, view C, into clevis mounts. Install
quick-release pins.
(12) Slowly rotate module in clevis mounts to horizontal position until strongback fixture,
1C9613, rests on pivot brace in center of container.
(13) Remove sling and install adjustable CG lift fixture, 1C9627, to strongback fixture,
1C9613.
(14) Switch hoist from strongback fixture, 1C9613, to adjustable CG lift fixture, 1C9627.
(15) Raise module enough to take load off pivot brace but leave module retained in clevis
mounts.
(16) Remove 24 capscrews, lockwashers, and 12 clamps that attach support plate to module
foward flange.
(17) Slowly slide LPT module away from support plate. Support plate will remain in clevis
mounts.
(18) Raise module from container and either install on gas turbine per WP 2710 00 or install
in storage dolly, 1C9632, as follows:
(a) Install adapter plate, 1C9632P08, to LPT case foward flange and secure with five
tooling screws and nuts. Tighten nuts to 70–110 lb in. (7.9–12.4 N·m) of torque.
(b) Lower module onto dolly, 1C9632, and secure adapter plate, figure 3, to forward
posts with ball lock pins.
3
Change 2 9
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3017 00
Figure 3. LPT Module Storage Dolly and Restrain Fixture
10 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3017 00
(c) Install LPT restrain fixture, 1C9338, onto forward end of module as follows:
1 Attach hoist to frame, 1C9338P02.
2 Turn three pointers to disengage position.
3 Install frame, 1C9338P02, into LPT shaft until seated.
4 Turn three pointers to ENGAGE. Tighten knurled jamnut.
5 Secure fixture to LPT case using 13 capscrews. Install capscrews with heads on
LPT case flange.
6 Tighten 1C9338 capscrews to 70–110 lb in. (7.9–12.4 N·m) of torque.
7 If fixture flange does not mate to LPT case or pointers cannot be engaged, pro-
ceed as follows:
a Remove screws that secure lock blocks, 1C9613P02, onto strongback fix-
ture, 1C9613. Remove lock blocks.
b Remove nut ring from strongback ring adapter.
c Reposition LPT rotor, forward or aft, as required.
d Secure fixture per steps 1 through 6.
CAUTION
Do not remove strongback until LPT rotor is restrained at the for-
ward end, either by the forward restrain fixture, installation in the
vertical shipping container, or by connection to the engine.
(d) Remove strongback fixture, 1C9613, as follows (figure 4).

4
1 Remove bolts that secure lock blocks onto strongback fixture, 1C9613. Remove
lock blocks, 1C9613P02.
2 Remove nut ring, 1C9613P06, from strongback ring adapter.
3 Remove shaft adapter ring, 1C9613P04, from rear drive adapter.
Change 2 11
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3017 00
Figure 4. LPT Module Strongback Fixture, 1C9613
12 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3017 00
CAUTION
carrier or shaft adapter ring after removing strongback retaining
screws.
4 Remove screws that secure strongback onto outer seal carrier.
5 Move strongback fixture, 1C9613, aft and separate from LPT module.
C. If LPT module will not be installed in shipping container, prepare shipping container for stor-
age as follows:
(1) Install support plate and 12 clamps into shipping container and secure to mounting with
16 capscrews, washers, and nuts.
(2) Store pivot braces in corner of shipping container and secure with four capscrews, wash-
ers, and nuts.
(3) Install top per paragraph 7, step D.
7. LPT Module Installation into Shipping Container.
A. Identify LPT module shipping container as follows:
(1) Obtain LPT module serial number (S/N) from 6:00 o'clock position on LPT forward
flange.
(2) Paint S/N on shipping container base. Ensure old S/N is completely obscured and new
S/N is legible.
(3) Ensure all shear mounts are secured at each of the shipping container corners.
NOTE
If LPT module is being removed from engine and installed directly into
container skip step B and proceed to step C.
B. If LPT module is installed in horizontal storage dolly, install strongback fixture, 1C9328, and
adjustable CG fixture, 1C9330, per WP 2710 00.
(1) Remove restrain fixture, 1C9338, from module forward flange, figure 3.
(2) Remove quick-release pins securing LPT module to dolly.
Change 2 13
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3017 00
WARNING
(3) Raise LPT module off dolly.
(4) Remove adapter plate, 1C9326P03, from LPT case forward flange.
C. Install LPT module into shipping container as follows:
(1) If support plate is not already installed in clevis mounts, remove 16 capscrews, nuts, and
washers that secure support plate onto mounting frame. Remove support plate and 12
clamps from shipping container, install in clevis mounts, and secure with two quick-
release pins.
(2) Install support plate onto LPT case forward flange as follows:
(a) Loosen 24 capscrews and retract 12 clamps on support plate.
(b) Slowly slide module toward support plate until forward flange contacts support
plate. Position support plate onto LPT case forward flange aligning 3 locating pins
and TOP VERTICAL mark on support plate with 12:00 o’clock position of LPT
module.
(c) Slide 12 clamps back into position over LPT case forward flange, clamps have
notches for 3 locating pins. Tighten 24 capscrews.
NOTE
This LPT module requires both top and bottom pivot braces. Ensure
braces are bolted together.
(3) Install both pivot braces in center of mounting frame by engaging pins in brace in holes
in frame. Secure pivot brace onto frame using two bolts and nuts at curved ends.
(4) Slowly lower LPT module in clevis mounts until strongback fixture, 1C9613, rests on
pivot brace located in center of shipping container.
(5) Remove adjustable CG lift fixture, 1C9627, from strongback fixture, 1C9613.
(6) Install two-legged sling onto strongback fixture, 1C9613, and connect hoist to sling.
Remove slack from sling.
(7) Lift LPT module and rotate in clevis mounts to forward end down position.
14 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 3017 00
(8) Remove pivot braces from center of mounting frame and store in corner of container.
Secure pivot brace to container with four capscrews, washers, and nuts.
NOTE
Ensure extension is installed on center shaft restraint.
(9) Install center shaft restraint to center of mounting frame, view B. Secure with four cap-
screws and lockwashers. Tighten capscrews.
WARNING
(10) Remove quick-release pins from clevis mounts and lift LPT module from clevis mounts.
(11) Align TOP VERTICAL markings of support plate on LPT module and marking on
mounting frame.
CAUTION
Ensure module is centered over shaft restraint in center of module.

ensure honeycomb seal at front of LPT module does not contact the
shaft restraint when LPT module is installed. Damage to seal may
occur.
(12) Slowly lower LPT module and engage rotor shaft and center shaft restraint. Continue to
lower module until seated on restraint and two locating pins are aligned with holes in
adapter plate.
(13) Secure support plate onto mounting frame with 16 capscrews, washers, and nuts, sheet 1.
Tighten nuts.
(14) Remove strongback fixture, 1C9613, from LPT module per WP 2710 00.
(15) Install shaft restraint lock through center of LPT shaft and thread into center shaft
restraint until tight.
D. Install top on shipping container as follows (figure 1):
(1) Raise four corner alignment tubes and secure into position with pins.
(2) Fill desiccant container, as required.
(3) Ensure flange and gasket on shipping container base are clean and serviceable.
Change 2 15
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 3017 00
NOTE
Ensure tee-head bolts are aligned in recess before installing the lid on
the shipping container.
(4) Attach 2-ton (1,815 kg) hoist and sling to four lifting rings on sides of top. Attach two
control lines to opposite ends of top.
WARNING
(5) Lower top straight down over LPT module, aligning forward and aft guide pins. Ensure
flanges seat.
(6) Remove hoist, sling, and guide ropes.
(7) Rotate tee-head bolts, sheet 2, section A-A, until long side of bolthead is perpendicular
to flange. Tighten tee-head bolt nuts to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
16 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4010 00
0WP 4010 00
WORK PACKAGE
GAS TURBINE INLET INSPECTION


1-9 ...... 0
10 Blank . . . . . . 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Gas Turbine Inlet Inspection ....................................................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4010 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for inspecting the gas turbine inlet.
Title Number
Borescope Inspection WP 4015 00
None required.
None required.
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4010 00
6. Gas Turbine Inlet Inspection.
WARNING
• Gas turbine shall not be operating and shall be verified as
inoperable during inspection period.
• A safety observer shall be stationed adjacent to the inlet access.
CAUTION
Empty pockets before entering inlet to ensure no loose objects are
left in the inlet.
A. Before accessing inlet, do the following:
(1) Verify gas turbine will be inoperable during inspection.
(2) Deactivate fire extinguishing system per packager's manual.
(3) Station safety observer adjacent to inlet access.
(4) Secure enclosure door so that it will remain open. Enclosure door shall remain open.
B. Access inlet plenum through access hatch or inlet duct access per packager's manual.
NOTE
Some items in table 1 can be inspected only if the gas turbine is

removed. If the gas turbine is installed, inspection will be limited to
accessible items only.
C. Using bright light, visually inspect gas turbine inlet per table 1. See figures 1 and 2.
2
1
D. If evidence of foreign object damage (FOD) is found, perform borescope inspection of low
pressure compressor (LPC) and high pressure compressor (HPC) sections per WP 4015 00.
CAUTION
E. Before exiting the enclosure, perform a thorough, final inspection for possible foreign
objects.
F. Secure inlet duct access per packager's manual.
G. Activate the fire extinguishing system per packager's manual and close enclosure door.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4010 00
Figure 1. Gas Turbine Inlet Inspection
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4010 00
Figure 2. LPC Rotor Blade Inspection Criteria
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4010 00
Table 1. Gas Turbine Inlet Inspection

NOTE
Some of the following items can be inspected only if the gas turbine
is removed. If the gas turbine is installed, inspection will be limited
to accessible items only.
1. Inlet Duct or Bellmouth Assembly for:
a. Damage – – Refer to packager's
manual for limits and
corrective action
b. Plugged water- None allowed Any amount Remove contamina-
wash discharge tion per packager's
holes manual
c. Dirty airflow None allowed Any amount Wipe clean if inlet
path surfaces screen has been
removed
d. Loose installa- None allowed Any amount Tighten fasteners per
tion fasteners packager's manual
2. Centerbody Assembly for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace centerbody
b. Nicks and Any number, any Any number, 0.06 inch Blend to remove high
scratches length, 0.03 inch (1.52 mm) deep, metal
(0.76 mm) deep, 0.06 inch (1.52 mm)
0.03 inch (0.76 mm) wide, and 0.05 inch
wide, 1.0 inch (1.27 mm) long, pro-
(25.4 mm) separation vided none extend into
boltholes
c. Missing paint Any amount, if no Any amount Touch up paint
exposed parent metal
d. Dirty airflow None allowed Any amount Wipe clean if inlet
path surfaces screen has been
removed
e. Loose bolts None allowed Any amount Tighten bolts
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4010 00
Table 1. Gas Turbine Inlet Inspection (Continued)

3. Inlet Screen and Sock for:
a. Damage and – – Refer to packager's
corrosion manual for limits and
corrective action
b. Build up of None allowed Any amount Clean
deposits
4. Baffles for:
a. Cracks, tears, – – Refer to packager's
and damage manual for limits and
corrective action
b. Loose fasteners None allowed Any amount Tighten fasteners
c. Contact with None allowed Any amount Reposition baffles to
variable inlet provide proper clear-
guide vane ance per packager's
(VIGV) case manual
5. Seals for:
a. Cracks, tears, – – Refer to packager's
and damage manual for limits and
corrective action
b. Loose None allowed Any amount Tighten fasteners
fasteners
6. LPC Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T2/P2) Sensor for:
a. Damage None allowed Not repairable Replace sensor
b. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten connections/
fasteners
c. Obstructions None allowed Any amount Clear obstructions
d. Build up of None allowed Any amount Wipe clean
deposits
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4010 00

7. VIGV and Flaps for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace VIGV assem-
bly
b. Dents and nicks TBP TBP –
c. Loose flap TBP TBP –
d. Dirt, salt, or None allowed Any amount Wipe clean if accessi-
industrial ble
deposits
8. LPC Stage 0 Rotor Blades for (figure 2):
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace blade
b. Chips, crush, None allowed Not repairable Replace blade
nicks, dents,
and scratches in
root area
c. Chips and crush Any number, Not repairable Replace blade
in leading and 0.025 inch (0.6 mm)
trailing edges, deep
except root area
d. Scratches on Any number, Not repairable Replace blade
leading and 0.005 inch (0.13 mm)
trailing edges, deep, 0.5 inch
except root area (1.27 mm) long
e. Nicks and dents Any number, Not repairable Replace blade
on leading and 0.005 inch (0.13 mm)
trailing edges, deep, 0.125 inch
except root area (3.1 mm) diameter
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4010 00

f. Tip curl Not more than Not repairable Replace blade
0.25 inch (6.35 mm) of
original blade tip width
g. Pits and Any number, Not repairable Replace blade
erosion, except 0.005 inch (0.13 mm)
in root area deep, any diameter, any
spacing
h. Dirt, salt, or None allowed Any amount Wipe clean if accessi-
industrial ble
deposits
9/(10 Blank)
10 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4011 00
4WP 4011 00
WORK PACKAGE
EXTERNAL ENGINE CLEANING


1-3 ...... 4
4 Blank ...... 4
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
External Engine Cleaning ........................................................................................................... 3
Change 4 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4011 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for cleaning the external engine surfaces.
Title Number
None required.
ARDROX 6322 Local Purchase
B&B 3100 Local Purchase
Monopropylene Glycol AMS 1424
RMC Turbine/Engine Cleaner (Rivenaes) Local Purchase
Rochem FYREWASH Local Purchase
None required.
2 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4011 00
6. External Engine Cleaning.
WARNING
and fittings.
NOTE
If available, portable steam cleaning equipment may be used.
A. Wash external engine and components with 50-60 gallons (189-227 liters) of clean water
using a flexible hose with adjustable spray nozzle. Maintain water pressure of 40-45 psi
(276-310 kPa).
B. If water will not remove dirt, apply water-wash solution per WP 4014 00 and allow to soak
for 2 hours minimum. Flush with clean water.
C. Start engine and operate at idle speed 5 minutes to dry excessive water.

4 Blank Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
4WP 4012 00
WORK PACKAGE
GAS TURBINE EXTERNAL INSPECTION (VISUAL)


1 - 52 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Gas Turbine External Inspection (Visual)................................................................................... 3
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for performing a visual external inspection of
LM6000 gas turbine.
B. Replace electrical leads and connecting tubes on gas turbine, as required, per SWP 1913 03.
Title Number
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Stages 3 to 5 Bushing Replace- WP 1412 00
ment (High-Boss HPC Stator Case)
High Pressure Compressor Stator Variable Geometry Stage 5 LM6000-IND-150
Connecting Link Rework (PA, PB, PC, and PD Models)
None required.
(RTV 106)
None required.
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
6. Gas Turbine External Inspection (Visual).
A. Inspect tubing, hoses, and electrical harnesses per table 1.
Table 1. Tubing, Hoses, and Electrical Harnesses Inspection

1. Tubing for:
a. Cracks or splits None allowed Not repairable Replace tube*
b. Wrinkles or 2.0 percent of tube OD Not repairable Replace tube*
kinks in bend
ID
c. Dents and flat Any amount of devia- Not repairable Replace tube*
areas tion from contour,
within 20 percent of
original tube OD
d. Nicks or scores Any number, Any amount, Blend to remove high
0.005 inch (0.12 mm) 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) metal. Contour smooth
deep deep and polish
e. Leaking fittings None allowed Any amount Light polishing of
or connectors entire sealing (mating)
surfaces to remove
scratches. Tighten or
replace tube per
SWP 1913 03
f. Loose fittings None allowed Any amount Tighten per
or connectors SWP 1913 03
g. Attaching None allowed Any amount Replace cushion
cushion clamps clamps
for inadequate
clamping
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
Table 1. Tubing, Hoses, and Electrical Harnesses Inspection (Continued)

2. Right- and Left-Hand Side Stage 8 LPT Cooling Air Manifold for:
a. Open cracks or Determine length of Less than 100 hours Replace manifold
missing time engine has and continue engine
material result- operated with loss of operation
ing in loss of cooling air
cooling air Greater than 100 hours Remove engine for
inspection of stage 2
HPT disk and stage 1
LPT disk
3. Hoses (except fuel hoses) for:
a. Broken braid 3 wires per plait (a Not repairable Replace hose
wires band of interwoven
wires) and no more
than 6 broken wires per
assembly
b. Crimps None allowed Not repairable Replace hose
c. Leaking fittings None allowed Any amount Light polishing of
or connectors entire sealing (mating)
surfaces to remove
scratches. Tighten or
replace assembly per
SWP 1913 03
d. Loose fittings None allowed Any amount Tighten per
or connectors SWP 1913 03
e. Attaching None allowed Any amount Replace cushion
cushion clamps clamps
for inadequate
clamping
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00

4. Fuel Hoses for:
NOTE
Special hoses are convoluted Inco 625, not rubber or Teflon.

a. Broken braid 3 wires per plait (a Not repairable Replace hose
wires band of interwoven
wires) and no more
than 6 broken wires
per assembly
b. Crimps None allowed Not repairable Replace hose
c. Leaking fuel None allowed Any amount Tighten bolts or replace
hose plate gasket
d. Loose fuel hose None allowed Any amount Tighten bolts
plate
e. Bulges None allowed Any amount Replace hose
5. Electrical Cables for:

a. Broken braid 50 percent of exterior Not repairable Replace assembly*
braid wires may be
broken, provided
circuit continuity is
maintained
b. Kinks/crimps Any amount, provided Not repairable Replace assembly*
circuit continuity is
maintained. Insulation
resistance pin-to-pin
and pin-to-shell shall
be 1 megohm
minimum
c. Security/ Clamps must be secure Any amount Correct as required
installation with no evidence of
abrasion. No relative
motion between cable
and supporting
hardware
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00

d. Loose electri- None allowed Any amount Hand-tighten connector
cal connectors
e. Seal damaged None allowed Any amount Replace seal
or missing
f. Braid/ 50 percent of wires Not repairable Replace assembly*
connector must be secure and
separation circuit continuity
maintained
g. Bent or dis- Must assemble to Any amount Straighten pins or
torted pins mating connector replace assembly*
h. Cracked or None allowed Not repairable Replace assembly*
broken pins
i. Corroded pins None allowed Not repairable Replace assembly*
j. Cracked inserts Any amount, provided Not repairable Replace assembly*
continuity is main-
tained. Insulation resis-
tance pin-to-pin and
pin-to-shell shall be 1.0
megohm min
k. Distorted Must assemble to mat- Not repairable Replace assembly*
inserts ing connector and seal
* Contact GE Marine and Industrial Customer Service for repair data.
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
B. Inspect variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) assembly per table 2 and figure 1.
Table 2. VIGV Assembly Inspection

1. VIGV Case for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace VIGV assembly
b. Nicks, gouges, TBP – –
and scratches
c. Dents Any number with a Any amount Replace VIGV assembly
smooth contour, 0.030
inch (0.76 mm) deep
d. Damaged anodic Any amount, if parent Up to 5.0 percent of Touch up anodic coating
coating metal is not showing total surface, provid-
ing damage does not
extend into parent
metal
e. Flanges for None allowed Any amount Tighten or replace
broken, loose, or damaged hardware
missing attach-
ing hardware
2. VIGV Actuator for:
a. Leakage None allowed Any amount Tighten or replace
fitting or replace
preformed packing
b. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten or replace
attaching hardware
c. Damaged or None allowed Not repairable Replace rod-end bearing
worn rod-end
bearing
3. Actuator Support Brackets for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace bracket
b. Distorted or bent None allowed Not repairable Replace bracket
4. Actuation Brackets for:
b. Distorted or None allowed Not repairable Replace bracket
bent
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
Table 2. VIGV Assembly Inspection (Continued)

c. Loose, None allowed Not repairable Replace bushings or
damaged, or bracket
missing
bushings
5. Actuation Ring for:
scratches, and
dents
c. Distortion None allowed Not repairable Replace VIGV assembly
d. Loose, None allowed Any amount Replace VIGV assembly
damaged, or
missing
bushings
e. Damaged anodic 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) by Any length, 0.250 inch Touch up anodic coating
coating 0.020 inch (0.5 mm), if (6.35 mm) wide, not to
damage does not exceed 3.0 percent of
extend into parent total coated surface
metal
6. Actuator Rigging Bracket for:
b. Distortion or None allowed Not repairable Replace bracket
bent
c. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten securing
hardware
7. Vane Lever Arms for:
b. Distorted or None allowed Not repairable Replace VIGV assembly
bent
c. Damaged or Bearing shall rotate Not repairable Replace VIGV assembly
bound bearing freely in all directions
under finger pressure
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
Table 2. VIGV Assembly Inspection (Continued)

d. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Replace or tighten lock-
nut. Replace or tighten
actuation ring nut and
bolt
8. T2/P2 sensor for No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten attaching hard-
security ware WP 1111 00
1
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
Figure 1. VIGV Assembly
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
C. Inspect low pressure compressor (LPC) per table 3 and figure 2.
Table 3. LPC Inspection

1. LPC Stages 0-3 Case for:
a. Cracks other None allowed Not repairable Replace stages 0-3
than boltholes stator case
b. Cracks at One, every tenth Not repairable Replace stages 0-3
boltholes bolthole in each stator case
circumferential flange,
0.250 inch (6.35 mm)
long. None allowed on
horizontal flanges
c. Nicks, scores, Any number, – Blend to remove high
and scratches 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) metal. Contour smooth
deep, separated by and polish
0.250 inch (6.35 mm),
after removal of high
metal
d. Dents Any number with a – Blend to remove high
smooth contour, metal. Contour smooth
0.060 inch (1.52 mm) and polish
deep
e. Missing Any amount – –
anodize
f. Nicks, dents, None allowed Any amount Blend to remove high
scratches, or metal. Contour smooth
scores on and polish
mating flanges
or split-line
g. Loose or None allowed Any amount Replace bolts and nuts
missing bolts
and nuts
h. Loss of self- None allowed Any amount Replace nut
locking quality
of nuts
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
Table 3. LPC Inspection (Continued)

2. LPC Stage 4 Case for:
a. Cracks other None allowed Not repairable Replace stage 4 stator
than boltholes case
b. Cracks at One, every tenth Not repairable Replace stage 4 stator
boltholes bolthole in each case
circumferential flange,
0.250 inch (6.35 mm)
long
c. Nicks and Any number, – Blend to remove high
scratches 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) metal. Contour smooth
deep, after removal of and polish
high metal, with
0.250 inch (6.35 mm)
separation
d. Dents Any number with a – Blend to remove high
smooth contour, metal. Contour smooth
0.060 inch (1.52 mm) and polish
deep
3. XN2 sensor for No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten attaching bolts
security per WP 1210 00
4. No. 1 Electrical Interface Panel for:
a. Cracks None allowed Any amount Replace panel
b. Nicks, Any amount, Defects not exceeding Blend to remove high
scratches, and 0.0050 inch (0.12 mm) 75 percent of sheet metal. Contour smooth
scores deep metal thickness and polish
c. Dents and Any amount, if proper Any amount Re-form using hand
distortion assembly with mating tools. No cracks
parts can be allowed
accomplished
d. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten attaching bolts
per SWP 1913 03
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
2
Figure 2. LPC Case and Front Frame
D. Inspect air collector per table 4.
Table 4. Air Collector Inspection

1. Aft Flange and Mounts for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace air collector*
b. Distortion None allowed Not repairable Replace air collector*
2. All Other Surfaces for:
a. Cracks Any number, Not repairable Replace air collector*
0.120 inch (3.04 mm)
long, separated by
2.0 inches (50.8 mm)
b. Distortion Any amount – –
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
Table 4. Air Collector Inspection (Continued)

c. Dents Any amount, 0.50 inch Any amount Re-form to original
(12.7 mm) deep, contour
separated by 4.0 inches
(101.6 mm), provided
there are no parent
cracks
d. Nicks or Any number, 0.030 Any number Blend smooth and
scratches inch (0.76 mm) deep, touch up paint
(25.4 mm). No sharp
grooves allowed
e. Corrosion None allowed Any amount Blend smooth and
touch up paint
f. Missing, None allowed Any amount Blend smooth and
chipped, or touch up paint
peeling paint
3. Frame Seals for:
a. Tears in rubber None allowed Not repairable Replace frame seal
b. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten attaching
screws
4. Brackets for:
b. Loose, None allowed Any amount Replace rivet
damaged, or
missing rivets
c. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten attaching hard-
ware per SWP 1913 03
* Contact GE Marine and Industrial Customer Service for repair data.
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
E. Inspect the front frame assembly per table 5 and figure 2.
Table 5. Front Frame Inspection

1. Mounts and trun- None allowed Not repairable Replace part
nions for cracks
a. Cracks TBP – –
b. Dents TBP – –
c. Nicks, gouges, TBP – –
and scratches
3. Threaded pads, None allowed One full thread Chase threads
ports, and bosses cumulative or
for damaged continuous may be
threads removed
OR
Any amount of thread Install Heli-Coil insert*
damage
NOTE
Inspection of any VBV system actuation component requires that

the access doors be removed from the air collector assembly.
4. VBV Actuator for:
a. Leakage None allowed Any amount Replace packing,
tighten fitting, or
replace actuator
b. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten attaching
hardware
5. VBV Actuator and Bypass Door Rod-End Bearings for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace rod-end
bearing
b. Distorted or None allowed Not repairable Replace rod-end
bent bearing
c. Damaged or None allowed Not repairable Replace rod-end
bound bearing bearing
6. VBV Actuator and Bypass Door Clevis for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace clevis
b. Distorted or None allowed Not repairable Replace clevis
bent
Change 5 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
Table 5. Front Frame Inspection (Continued)

7. VBV Actuator and Bypass Door Bellcranks for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace bellcranks
b. Evidence of None allowed Any amount Correct as required
binding
c. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Correct as required
8. VBV Actuation Ring for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace ring
scratches, and
dents
c. Distortion None allowed Not repairable Replace ring
d. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Correct as required
e. Damaged or None allowed Any amount Replace insert
missing insert
9. VBV Bypass Door Hinges for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace hinge
b. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Correct as required
c. Damaged or None allowed Any amount Replace bushing
missing
bushings
10. VBV Bypass Valve Doors for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace door
c. Loose, cracked, Any amount – –
or missing seals
d. Evidence of None allowed Any amount Perform VBV system
binding or mis- check per WP 1312 00
alignment and correct as required
11. T25 sensor for No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten attaching bolts
security
3
16 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
Figure 3. HPC Stator Case Inspection Areas
Change 5 17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
F. Inspect transfer gearbox assembly (TGB) per table 6.
Table 6. TGB Assembly Inspection

1. Transfer Gearbox for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace transfer gear-
box
b. Nicks, scores, Any number, any – –
or scratches on length, 0.030 inch
nonmachined (0.76 mm) deep
surfaces
c. Leaking plugs None allowed Any amount Tighten loose fittings
or fittings or replace damaged
seals
d. Missing or None allowed Any amount Replace lockwire
broken
lockwire
2. Gearbox-mounted Accessories for:
a. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten attaching
hardware
b. Leakage Any amount Not repairable Replace accessory
3. Mount and Sway Links for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace mount or sway
link
c. Bushings for None allowed Not repairable Replace bushings
wear
4. Studs for:
a. Thread damage None allowed Total of 3/4 of one full Remove damage with
thread may be removed fine file
b. Looseness None allowed Any amount Torque stud one turn. If
still not tight, replace
transfer gearbox
a. Cracks Not serviceable Any amount Replace panel
b. Nicks, Any number, Defects not exceeding Blend to remove high
sores deep metal thickness and polish
18 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
Table 6. TGB Assembly Inspection (Continued)

c. Dents and Any number, provided Any amount Re-form using hand
distortion proper assembly with tools. No cracks
mating parts can be allowed
accomplished
d. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten attaching hard-
ware per SWP 1913 03
Change 5 19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
G. Inspect high pressure compressor (HPC) case per table 7 and figures 3 and 4.
Table 7. HPC Inspection

NOTE
Hot spots and bulges indicate internal damage in that area. Assess
condition by borescope inspection.
1. Casing Skin for:
a. Nicks, gouges, Any number, Not repairable Replace case
scratches, and 0.0150 inch (0.38 mm)
dents deep, after removal of
high metal
b. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace case
c. Bulges None allowed Not repairable Replace case
d. Hot spots Serviceable if metal is Not repairable Replace case
(discoloration) not crazed and cracks
are not present
e. Grooves worn Any length, Not repairable Replace case
by actuation 0.0250 inch (0.63 mm)
ring spacers deep, after removal of
high metal
2. Stages 8 and 11 Manifolds for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace case
b. Dents Any number, Not repairable Replace case
0.250 inch (6.35 mm)
deep, provided there is
a 0.0250 inch
(0.63 mm) minimum
radius at bottom of
dent
c. Nicks and Any number, Not repairable Replace case
scratches 0.010 inch
(0.25 mm) deep
20 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
Table 7. HPC Inspection (Continued)

3. Casing Ribs for:
a. Cracks None allowed Any amount remov- Blend max depth flush
able by blending flush to case OD, min radius
with casing skin equal to depth
b. Nicks, gouges, Any number, Not repairable Replace case
and scratches 0.060 inch (1.52 mm)
deep, 0.50 inch
(12 mm) long, with a
min separation of
2 inches (50.8 mm),
metal
4. Circumferential Flanges for:
a. Cracks
(1) Radially One per hole, maxi- Not repairable Replace case
outward mum 3 holes per flange
from bolt-
holes
(2) Bolthole to None allowed Not repairable Replace case
skin
(3) Cracks in None allowed Not repairable Replace case
fillet
between aft
circumfer-
ential
flange and
horizontal
flange
(4) All other None allowed Not repairable Replace case
areas
Change 5 21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
Table 7. HPC Inspection (Continued)

b. Nicks, Any number, Not repairable Replace case
gouges deep, after removal of
high metal, provided
defect does not extend
completely across mat-
ing surface
5. Horizontal Flanges for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace case
b. Nicks, Any number, Not repairable Replace case
gouges deep, after removal of
high metal, provided
defect does not extend
completely across mat-
ing surface
6. Horizontal flange None allowed Any amount Replace all loose, bro-
for bolts and nuts, ken, or missing
broken, loose, or bolts/nuts plus adja-
missing cent bolts/nuts
7. Circumferential None allowed Any amount Replace broken, loose,
flange for bolts and or missing bolts and
nuts, broken, loose, nuts
or missing
b. Nicks, Any number, Defects not exceeding Blend to remove high
c. Dents and Any amount, provided Any amount Re-form using hand
accomplished
per SWP 1913 04
4
22 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
Figure 4. HPC Stator Case Crack Inspection
Change 5 23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
H. Inspect variable stator vane (VSV) actuation components per table 8 and figure 5.
Table 8. VSV Actuation System Inspection

1. VSV Actuator for:
a. Leakage None allowed Any amount Tighten fitting or replace
fitting, packing, or
actuator
b. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten attaching hard-
ware or replace parts
2. Actuator Bracket for:
a. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten mounting bolts
b. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace bracket
c. Distortion None allowed Not repairable Replace bracket
3. Actuator lever None allowed Not repairable Replace guide and
guide for binding bracket, as required
or looseness
4. Actuation Lever Assembly for:
a. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten attaching
hardware
b. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace lever assembly
c. Worn slot- None allowed Not repairable Replace bearing ball or
loaded bearings lever assembly
d. Seal boots for None allowed Not repairable Replace seal boot
wear
(tears/rips)
5. Actuation Lever Mount for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace mount
b. Bent stud None allowed Not repairable Replace mount
6. Clevis/Push Rod Assembly for:
a. Missing safety None allowed Any amount Replace safety wire
wire
b. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace part
c. Bending None allowed Not repairable Replace part. Perform
VSV off-schedule
inspection per
WP 4028 00
24 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
Table 8. VSV Actuation System Inspection (Continued)

7. Rod-End Bearings for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace rod-end bearing.
Perform VSV off-
schedule inspection per
WP 4028 00
b. Bending None allowed Not repairable Replace rod end bear-
ing. Perform VSV off-
WP 4028 00
c. Looseness or None allowed Not repairable Replace rod-end bearing
surface wear
8. Connecting Link for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace connecting link.
Perform VSV off-
WP 4028 00
b. Lever arm hole None allowed Not repairable Replace connecting link
wear
c. Loose bolts None allowed Any amount Replace bolt or actuation
ring
d. Broken or dis- None allowed Not repairable Replace connecting link.
torted Perform VSV off-
WP 4028 00
9. Actuation Ring for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace actuation ring.
Perform VSV off-
WP 4028 00
b. Broken or dis- None allowed Not repairable Replace actuation ring.
torted Perform VSV off-
WP 4028 00
c. Improperly None allowed Any amount Adjust spacer clearance
adjusted per WP 1411 00
spacers
Change 5 25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00

d. Loose spacer None allowed One per ring segment Apply silicone rubber
nuts (stage 5 compound around nut,
only) back off spacer until
head is against ring,
tighten locknut to secure
e. Actuation ring None allowed Not repairable Replace sleeve
sleeve torn or
with missing
pieces
f. Worn or elon- None allowed Not repairable Replace actuation ring.
gated lever arm Perform VSV off-
pin hole schedule inspection per
WP 4028 00
10. Vane Lever Arms for:
a. Security No looseness allowed. Locknut in place Replace vane or locknut
Locknut shall be tight
with at least one vane
stud thread showing
Locknut missing Replace locknut. Per-
form VSV off-schedule
inspection per
WP 4028 00
b. Cracks, distor- None allowed Not repairable Replace lever arm. Per-
tion, bending, form VSV off-schedule
or loose pin inspection per
WP 4028 00
c. Rub marks or None allowed Not repairable Replace lever arm.
scratching of Re-work connecting link
lever arm from per Service Bulletin
contact with LM6000-IND-150
connecting link
26 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00

11. Vane Radial Assembly, IGV-Stage 2, for:
a. Radial outward Any amount less than – Continue operation
movement (pull 0.020 inch (0.51 mm)
vane stem out, indicating inner bush-
away from HPC ing wear. No visible
case, and bushings or washers
measure using missing (whole
shim gages or or in part). No
with dial indi- metal-to-metal contact
cator on top of
vane stem)
b. Radial outward Any amount between – Plan for washer and
movement (pull 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) bushing replacement at
vane stem out, and 0.025 inch next maintenance
away from HPC (0.64 mm). No visible interval per WP 2412 00
case, and bushings or washers
measure using missing (whole
shim gages or or in part). No
cator on top of
vane stem)
c. Radial outward Any amount less than Not repairable Replace inner and outer
movement (pull 0.025 inch (0.64 mm). bushings per
vane stem out, No visible bushings or WP 2412 00
away from HPC washers missing
case, and (whole or in part). No
measure using metal-to-metal contact
shim gages or
with dial indi-
cator on top of
vane stem)
d. Side-to-side Any amount, provided Not repairable Replace inner and outer
movement bushings or washers bushings per
(vane stem are not missing (whole WP 2412 00
wiggle, or in part). No
side-to-side, metal-to-metal contact
perpendicular
to lever arm)
Change 5 27

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00

e. Misassembled, None allowed Not repairable Perform VSV off-
cocked, bent, or schedule inspection per
broken lever WP 4028 00 and result-
arms or ing maintenance actions.
actuation arm Replace lever arms and
sleeves actuation arm sleeves per
WP 2412 00
f. Lever arm None allowed Not repairable Replace nuts. Ensure
locknuts backed proper torque value on
off, not all other nuts per
clamping lever WP 2412 00
arm
12. Vane Assembly, Stages 3 and 4, for:
vane stem out, indicating inner
away from HPC bushing wear. No
case, and visible bushings or
measure using washers missing
shim gages or (whole or in part). No
cator on top of
vane stem)
b. Radial outward Any amount between – Plan for bushing
movement (pull 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) replacement at next
vane stem out, and 0.040 inch maintenance interval
away from HPC (1.02 mm). No per WP 1412 00 or
case, and visible bushings or WP 2412 00
shim gages or (whole or in part). No
cator on top of
vane stem)
28 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00

c. Radial outward Any amount less than Not repairable Replace bushings per
movement 0.040 inch (1.02 mm). WP 1412 00 or
high-boss case No visible bushings or WP 2412 00
(pull vane stem washers missing
out, away from (whole or in part). No
HPC case, and metal-to-metal contact
measure using
shim gages or
with dial indi-
cator on top of
vane stem)
d. Bushing for Less than 12,500 hours Any amount greater Replace bushings per
time since than 12,500 hours WP 1412 00 or
installation WP 2412 00
e. Side-to-side Any amount, provided Not repairable Replace bushings per
movement bushings or washers WP 1412 00 or
(vane stem are not missing (whole WP 2412 00
wiggle, side-to- or in part). No metal-
side perpendic- to-metal contact
ular to lever
arm)
f. Misassembled None allowed Not repairable Perform VSV off-sched-
cocked, bent, or ule inspection per
broken lever WP 4028 00 and result-
arms or actua- ing maintenance actions.
tion sleeves Replace lever arms and
actuation arm sleeves per
WP 1412 00 or
WP 2412 00
Change 5 29

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00

g. Lever arm None allowed Not repairable Replace locknuts.
locknuts backed Ensure proper torque
off, not value on all other nuts
clamping lever per WP 1412 00 or
arm WP 2412 00
13. Vane Assembly, Stage 5, for:
vane stem out, indicating inner
away from HPC bushing wear. No
case, and visible bushings or
shim gages) (whole or in part). No
metal-to-metal contact
b. Radial outward Any amount between – Plan for bushing
movement (pull 0.025 inch (0.64 mm) replacement at next
vane stem out, and 0.030 inch maintenance interval per
away from HPC (0.76 mm). No visible WP 1412 00 or
case, and bushings or washers WP 2412 00
measure using missing (whole or in
shim gages) part). No metal-to-
metal contact
c. Radial outward Any amount less than Not repairable Replace bushings per
movement (pull 0.030 inch (0.76 mm). WP 1412 00 or
vane stem out, No visible bushings or WP 2412 00
away from HPC washers missing
case, and (whole or in part). No
measure using metal-to-metal contact
shim gages)
d. Bushing for Less than 12,500 hours Any amount greater Replace bushings per
time since than 12,500 hours WP 1412 00 or
installation WP 2412 00
30 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00

e. Side-to-side As measured with dial -- Continue operation
movement indicator, less than
(vane stem 0.020 in. (0.51 mm) in
wiggle, either direction
side-to-side,
perpendicular
to lever arm,
using dial indi-
cator located on
nut surface
touching top of
lever arm)
f. Side-to-side As measured with dial Not repairable Plan for bushing change-
movement indicator, amount out as soon as practical,
(vane stem between 0.020 inch not to exceed next
wiggle, (0.51 mm) and 0.035 periodic inspection
side-to-side, inch (0.89 mm) in
perpendicular either direction
to lever arm,
using dial
indicator
located on nut
surface
touching top of
lever arm)
g. Side-to-side As measured with dial Not repairable Replace bushings prior
movement indicator, amount to continued operation
(vane stem under 0.035 in. per WP 1412 00 or
wiggle, side-to- (0.89 mm) WP 2412 00
side perpendic-
ular to lever
arm, using dial
indicator
located on nut
surface
touching top of
lever arm)
Change 5 31

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00

h. Lever arm At bushing Not repairable Replace lever arm per
inspection at replacement per any WP 1412 00 or
bushing condition, inspect vane WP 2412 00
replacement and case for operation
in metal-to-metal
contact mode
i. Misassembled, None allowed Not repairable Perform VSV off-
cocked, bent, or schedule inspection per
broken lever WP 4028 00 and
arms or actua- resulting maintenance
tion arm sleeves actions. Replace lever
arms and actuation arm
sleeves per WP 1412 00
or WP 2412 00
j. Lever arm None allowed Not repairable Replace nuts. Ensure
locknuts backed proper torque value on
off, not all other nuts per
clamping lever WP 1412 00 or
arm WP 2412 00
14. Vane Bushings, Stages 3-5 for:
a. Looseness, Bushings must be Any amount Tighten bolts holding
using finger tightly clamped to case bushing down, not to
pressure and exceed torque value
side-to-side or specified per
fore and aft WP 2412 00. Ensure
wiggle motion, bolthole and bushing
any amount. mating surface with case
Bushing bolts are free of obstructions
not seated
(clamping
bushing).
Shim-check
bushing or bolt
if suspected
loose
5
32 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
Figure 5. VSV System Inspection
Change 5 33

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
I. Inspect fuel manifold per table 9.
Table 9. Fuel Manifold Inspection

1. Fuel Manifold for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace manifold
segment
b. Nicks, scores, – – –
and scratches
c. Leaks between None allowed Any amount Tighten bolts or replace
segments gasket
d. Leaking fuel None allowed Any amount Tighten bolts or replace
hose plate gasket
e. Loose fuel hose None allowed Any amount Tighten bolts
plate
2. Staging valves for No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten bolts
security
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace engine
accomplished
per SWP 1913 03
34 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
J. Inspect compressor rear frame (CRF) per table 10 and figure 6.
Table 10. CRF Inspection

1. CRF Outer Casing for:
a. Cracks in None allowed Not repairable Replace engine
parent metal
b. Cracks in welds Any number, separated Not repairable Replace engine
by 0.50 inch
(12.7 mm), 0.10 inch
(2.54 mm) long trans-
verse to the weld, and
0.060 inch (1.52 mm)
long longitudinal to
weld
c. Nicks, scores, In axial direction, any Any number Blend out over a
and scratches number, 0.0150 inch 0.50 inch (12.7 mm)
(0.38 mm) deep and radius
1.0 inch (25.4 mm)
long. In circumferen-
tial direction, any num-
ber, 0.030 inch
(0.76 mm) deep and
1.0 inch (25.4 mm)
long with a min separa-
tion of 1.0 inch
(25.4 mm) after
removal of high metal,
provided metal is not
reduced to less than 75
percent of original
thickness
d. Dents, distor- Any number with a Not repairable Replace engine
tions, or smooth contour, devia-
waviness tions within 0.250 inch
(6.35 mm) of normal
surface contour, except
on mating (sealing)
surfaces
Change 5 35

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
Table 10. CRF Inspection (Continued)

e. Hot spots Any number provided Not repairable Replace engine
(discoloration) metal is not crazed
f. Bulges Not serviceable when Not repairable Replace engine
associated with heat
discoloration
2. Premixer Pad and Igniter Pad Areas for:
b. Damaged None allowed One full thread may be Chase threads or install
threads removed, if remaining Heli-Coil insert*
threads are not
damaged
c. Premixer pad None allowed Not repairable Replace engine
burn-through
caused by failed
premixer
3. All Other Pads and Threaded Parts for:
a. Nicks, scores, Any number, Not repairable Replace engine
deep not extending
across more than 1/2 a
sealing surface, after
removal of high metal.
No air leakage allowed
b. Thread damage None allowed One full thread may be Chase threads or install
removed, if remaining Heli-Coil insert*
threads are not
damaged
4. CRF Forward Flange for:
a. Bolthole cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace engine
36 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00

b. Nicks, scores, Any number, any Not repairable Replace engine
and scratches length, 0.030 inch
(0.76 mm) deep, after
that do not extend
across more than
0.750 inch (19.05 mm)
of flange sealing lip
5. CRF Rear Flange for:
a. Bolthole radial One per hole, four per Not repairable Replace engine
cracks flange, radially out-
ward only
b. Wear on Any amount, provided Not repairable Replace engine
forward face bolthead completely
around bolthole covers hole to seal air
leakage. Maximum of
two non-adjacent hole
locations allowed
c. Nicks, scores, Any number, any Not repairable Replace engine
that does not extend
across more than
0.750 inch (19.05 mm)
6. CRF Aft Case for:
a. Cracks in None allowed Not repairable Replace engine
parent metal
b. Cracks in welds Any number, spaced by Not repairable Replace engine
0.50 inch (12.7 mm),
0.10 inch (2.54 mm)
long transverse to the
weld, and 0.060 inch
(1.52 mm) long longi-
tudinal to weld
Change 5 37

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00

c. Nicks, scores, In axial direction, any Any number Blend out over a
and scratches number, 0.0150 inch 0.50 inch (12.7 mm)
(0.38 mm) deep, radius
1.0 inch (25.4 mm)
long. In circumferential
direction, any number,
0.030 inch (0.76 mm)
deep, 1.0 inch
(25.4 mm) long with a
min separation of
1.0 inch (25.4 mm),
metal, provided metal
is not reduced to less
than 75 percent of orig-
inal thickness
d. Dents, distor- Any number with a Not repairable Replace engine
tions, or smooth contour, devia-
waviness tions within 0.250 inch
(6.35 mm) of normal
surface contour, except
on mating (sealing)
surfaces
e. Hot spots (dis- Any number, provided Not repairable Replace engine
coloration) metal is not crazed. No
cracks allowed
f. Bulges Not serviceable when Not repairable Replace engine
associated with heat
discoloration
7. CRF Aft Case Forward Flange for:
a. Bolthole radial One per hole, four per Not repairable Replace engine
cracks flange, radially out-
ward only
38 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00

b. Wear on Any amount, provided Not repairable Replace engine
forward face bolthead completely
around bolthole covers hole to seal air
leakage. Max of two
nonadjacent hole loca-
tions allowed
c. Nicks, scores, Any number, any Not repairable Replace engine
that do not extend
across more than
0.750 inch (19.05 mm)
8. CRF Aft Case Rear Flange for:
a. Bolthole cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace engine
b. Nicks, scores, Any number, any Not repairable Replace engine
that do not extend
across more than
0.750 inch (19.05 mm)
9. Oil Supply, Oil Scavenge, Sump Vent, and Sump Pressurizing Tubes for:
a. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace engine
b. Nicks, scores, Any number, Not repairable Replace engine
deep, after removal of
high metal
c. Wear at contact Not serviceable Not repairable Replace engine
point of strut
pad
Change 5 39

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00

d. Dents Any number with a Not repairable Replace engine
smooth contour,
0.250 inch (6.35 mm)
deep, except on mating
(sealing) surfaces
e. Oil supply tube Any amount, Not repairable Replace engine
grooving and 0.0050 inch (0.12 mm)
wear on sleeve deep, after removal of
high metal
f. Scavenge tubes Any amount, Not repairable Replace engine
wear on sleeves deep, after removal of
high metal
g. Vent tube Any amount, Not repairable Replace engine
wear on sleeves deep, after removal of
high metal
h. Vent tube 50 percent of sump Not repairable Replace engine
coking vent tube opening may
be blocked off by cok-
ing as determined visu-
ally by looking into
outer end of strut tubes
i. Sump pressur- Any amount, Not repairable Replace engine
ization tube 0.0050 inch (0.12 mm)
grooving and deep, after removal of
wear on sleeves high metal
10. All Other CRF Tubes for:
b. Nicks and Any number, any Not repairable Replace engine
scratches length, 0.010 inch
removal of high metal
40 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00

c. Dents Any number, 1/5 tube Any number Re-form to original
diameter, provided contour. Inspect for
proper assembly can be cracks
obtained
d. Bent (out of Not serviceable Any amount Straighten tube. Inspect
alignment) for cracks
6
Change 5 41

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
Figure 6. CRF Inspection
42 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
K. Inspect high pressure turbine (HPT) per table 11 and figure 7.
Table 11. HPT Inspection

1. HPT Case (Nozzle Stator Support) for:
a. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace HPT stage 2
nozzle assembly
b. Nicks and Any number, any Any number, any Blend to remove high
scratches length, 0.0150 inch length, provided the metal. Contour smooth
(0.38 mm) deep, after thickness of parent and polish
removal of high metal metal is not reduced
more than 0.0150 inch
(0.38 mm), after
and blending
c. Dents or bulges Three dents or bulges, Not repairable Replace HPT stage 2
0.50 inch (12.7 mm) nozzle assembly
diameter, 0.120 inch
(3.05 mm) deep. No
high metal allowed on
flange mating surfaces
2. Flanges for:
a. Cracks from Four cracks radially Not repairable Replace HPT stage 2
boltholes outward, provided nozzle assembly
effected holes are sepa-
rated by five boltholes.
None radially inward
b. Nicks and Any number, any Any number, any Blend to remove high
scratches length, 0.0150 inch length, provided the metal. Contour smooth
(0.38 mm) deep, after thickness of parent and polish
removal of high metal metal is not reduced
(0.38 mm), after
and blending
Change 5 43

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
Table 11. HPT Inspection (Continued)

c. Broken, loose, None allowed Any amount Tighten or replace
or missing damaged hardware
attaching
hardware
3. Borescope ports for None allowed One full thread may be Chase threads or
damaged threads removed or missing replace Heli-Coil
insert*
4. Air Tubes for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace HPT stage 2
nozzle assembly
b. Dents TBP – –
7
44 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
Figure 7. HPT Case Inspection
Change 5 45

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
L. Inspect low pressure turbine (LPT) per table 12 and figure 8.
Table 12. LPT Inspection

1. LPT Case for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace LPT module
b. Nicks Any number, Not repairable Replace LPT module
0.0150 inch (0.38 mm)
high metal
c. Scratches and Any number, Not repairable Replace LPT module
scores 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
deep (after removal of
high metal) in axial
direction. Any num-
ber, 0.010 inch
(0.25 mm) deep (after
removal of high metal),
1.0 inch (25.4 mm)
separation, in circum-
ferential direction
d. Dents Any number with a Not repairable Replace LPT module
smooth contour,
0.1250 inch (3.18 mm)
deep, provided
assembly can be
accomplished
e. Distortion None allowed Not repairable Replace LPT module
f. Penetration None allowed Not repairable Replace LPT module
g. Cracks in None allowed Not repairable Replace LPT module
bosses
h. Damaged None allowed Any number Chase threads or install
threads in Heli-Coil insert*
bosses
i. Hot spots Any amount, provided Not repairable Replace LPT module
(distortion) metal is not granular
and cracks are not
present
46 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
Table 12. LPT Inspection (Continued)

j. Heat or other Any amount, provided Not repairable Replace LPT module
discoloration there are no associated
distortion bulges
k. Bulges Any amount not associ- Not repairable Replace LPT module
ated with heat discolor-
ation and provided
proper assembly can be
accomplished
2. Forward and Aft Flanges for:
b. Nicks, scores, Any number, any Not repairable Replace LPT module
with 1.0 inch
(25.4 mm) separation
c. Dents Any number, provided Not repairable Replace LPT module
damage does not
extend across more
than 3/4 of flange face
and does not result in
flange distortion
d. Broken, loose, None allowed Any amount correct- Tighten or replace
or missing able by replacing or damaged hardware
attaching tightening
hardware
3. Borescope ports for None allowed One full thread may be Chase threads or install
damaged threads removed or missing Heli-Coil insert*
4. Air Manifold for:
a. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Correct as required
b. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace manifold
c. Dents and flat Any amount within 20 Not repairable Replace manifold
areas percent of original tube
OD
Change 5 47

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00

d. Nicks and Any amount, Any amount, Blend to remove high
scores 0.0050 inch (0.12 mm) 0.010 inch (0.26 mm) metal. Contour smooth
deep deep and polish
5. Support Links for:
a. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Correct as required
b. Broken safety None allowed Any amount Replace safety wire
wire
c. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace link
d. Distortion Any amount, provid- Not repairable Replace link
(bending) ing parts are not under
stress or contacting
surrounding hardware
6. Support Link Brackets for:
a. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten or replace
hardware
b. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace bracket
c. Distortion Any amount, provid- Not repairable Replace bracket
ing parts are not under
stress or contacting sur-
rounding hardware
d. Worn bushings 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) Not repairable Replace bracket
wear permitted
7. T48 Thermocouples for:
a. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten or replace
hardware
b. Loose alumel/ No looseness allowed Any amount Replace T48 harness
chromel studs or thermocouple as
required
8. P48 probe for No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten bolts
security
48 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00

accomplished
per SWP 1913 03
8
Change 5 49

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
Figure 8. LPT Case and TRF Inspection
50 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4012 00
M. Inspect turbine rear frame (TRF) per table 13 and figure 8.
Table 13. TRF Inspection

1. Insulation Blankets for:
a. Tears (wire Any number, Not repairable Replace blanket
mesh and insu- 2.0 inches (50.8 mm)
lation material long with 8.0 inches
intact) (203.2 mm) separation
b. Wire mesh or None allowed Not repairable Replace blanket
insulation
material torn
c. Loose fasteners None allowed Any number Tighten or replace
safety wire
d. Reflective None allowed Not repairable Replace blanket
material burnt
away or
missing
e. Security No loose blankets Any amount Tighten or replace
allowed safety wire
f. Saturated with None allowed Not repairable Replace blanket
fuel or oil
2. Flanges for:
and scratches
c. Broken, loose, None allowed Any amount Tighten or replace
or missing damaged hardware
attaching
hardware
3. Mounts for cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace mounts
4. Strut Pads for:
a. Cracks Any amount in strut Not repairable Replace LPT module
ends that do not permit
air leakage. One bolt-
hole per flange may be
cracked through radi-
ally outward
Change 5 51

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4012 00
Table 13. TRF Inspection (Continued)

b. Nicks and Any number, any Not repairable Replace LPT module
scratches length, 0.060 inch
provided metal is not
reduced to less than 75
percent of its original
thickness
c. Dents Any number with a Not repairable Replace LPT module
smooth contour,
0.250 inch (6.35 mm)
deep, except on seal-
ing surfaces
and scratches
6. Oil Supply and Scavenge Tubes for:
a. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace LPT module
b. Nicks, scores, Any number, Not repairable Replace LPT module
high metal
c. Dents Any number with a Not repairable Replace LPT module
smooth contour,
0.250 inch (6.35 mm)
deep, except on mating
(sealing) surfaces
d. Tube wear Any amount, Not repairable Replace LPT module
sleeve for 0.0050 inch (0.12 mm)
grooving and deep, after removal of
wear high metal
7. Thrust Balance or Bleed Valve for:
a. Leakage None allowed Any amount Tighten fitting or
replace packing, fitting,
or actuator
b. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten attaching hard-
ware or replace parts
52 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4013 00
0WP 4013 00
WORK PACKAGE
GAS TURBINE EXHAUST SYSTEM INSPECTION


1-5 ...... 0
6 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Gas Turbine Exhaust System Inspection..................................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4013 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for inspecting the gas turbine exhaust system.
None required.
None required.
None required.
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4013 00
6. Gas Turbine Exhaust System Inspection.
See figure 1.
1
A. Before accessing exhaust, do the following:
WARNING

inoperable during inspection period.
• The exhaust duct temperature shall be at an acceptable work-

ing level, below 120°F (49°C). If exhaust parts are hot, allow
them to cool before inspection.
• A safety observer shall be stationed adjacent to the exhaust

duct access.
CAUTION
To ensure that no loose objects are left in the exhaust, empty pockets
before entering exhaust access.
(3) Station safety observer adjacent to exhaust duct access.
B. Access exhaust duct per packager's manual.
NOTE
Some items can only be inspected if the gas turbine and exhaust duct
are separated. If the gas turbine and exhaust duct are not separated,
inspection will be limited to accessible items only.
C. Using bright light, visually inspect turbine rear frame and inner and outer seal carriers for
cracks, security, metal deposits, and damage. Contact General Electric Marine and Industrial
Customer Service if discrepancies are found. See figure 1.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4013 00
Figure 1. Gas Turbine Exhaust Duct Interface
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4013 00
D. Using bright light, visually inspect exhaust duct, inner and outer diffuser walls, and inner and
outer piston rings and housings for cracks, security, metal deposits, and damage. If discrepan-
cies are found, refer to the packager's manual for limits and corrective action.
E. Perform thorough, final inspection of exhaust duct for possible foreign objects or tools left in
exhaust area.
F. Secure exhaust duct access per packager's manual.
G. Check exhaust system alignment as follows:
NOTE
Exhaust duct alignment should be checked after final full engine align-
ment is complete.
(1) Measure and record dimension A and dimension B at eight equally spaced locations
around circumference of exhaust duct. Calculate X as follows:
XA = AMAX - AMIN
(2) Refer to table 1 for the applicable limits. If dimensions exceed the table maximum or
minimum values, then adjust the exhaust diffuser. Refer to packager's manual.
Table 1. Exhaust System Limits
Minimum Maximum
Value Value Maximum XA
Dimension A 2.775 in. (70.49 mm) N/A 0.25 in. (6.35 mm)
(Measured at Outer Piston
Ring)
Dimension B 0.14 in. (3.56 mm) N/A N/A
5/(6 Blank)
6 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4014 00
4WP 4014 00
WORK PACKAGE
GAS TURBINE WATER-WASH


1-7 ...... 4
8 Blank ...... 4
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Crank/Soak Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 4

On-Line Cleaning........................................................................................................................ 7
Water and Detergent Requirements............................................................................................. 3
Water-Wash Description ............................................................................................................. 3
Change 4 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4014 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for performing water-wash procedures on the LM6000
gas turbine.
Title Number
Compressor Cleaning Water Purity Specification for GE Air- Appendix A4
craft Derivative Gas Turbines in Industrial Applications
Liquid Detergent for Compressor Cleaning for GE Aircraft Appendix A5
Derivative Gas Turbines in Industrial Applications
System Descriptions Chapter 5
Engine Operation Chapter 8
None required.
ARDROX 6322 Local Purchase
B&B 3100 Local Purchase
Monopropylene Glycol AMS 1424
RMC Turbine/Engine Cleaner (Rivenaes) Local Purchase
Rochem FYREWASH Local Purchase
None required.
2 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4014 00
6. Water-Wash Description.
The following basic water-wash procedures may be applied:
A. Crank/Soak Cleaning: Applied while motoring high pressure (HP) rotor, and used to perform
thorough cleaning of engine.
B. On-line Cleaning: Applied while engine is running, and used for short term power restora-
tion. Requires a special on-line cleaning manifold.
7. Water and Detergent Requirements.
A. Water quality and liquid detergent for crank/soak compressor cleaning must meet require-
ments specified in Appendix A4 and Appendix A5, Volume I of this manual.
B. The liquid detergents listed below may be used for performing water-wash procedures. Fol-
low liquid detergent manufacturer’s instructions for recommended detergent/water dilution
ratios. Ensure that detergents used, including those listed, meet requirements specified by
packager.
• B & B 3100 (Crank/Soak cleaning only)
• ARDROX 6322
• RMC Turbine/Engine cleaner (Rivenaes)
• Rochem FYREWASH
C. In freezing weather, mix one of the antifreeze agents listed below with cleaning solution.
Refer to Appendix A5 for recommended solution mixtures and additional information.
• Isopropyl alcohol
• Monopropylene Glycol
Change 4 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4014 00
8. Crank/Soak Cleaning.
A. Before initiating crank/soak cleaning sequence, comply with the following requirements:
WARNING
• The enclosure area shall be ventilated. The engine shall be shut
down and cooled prior to crank/soak cleaning. All drains shall
be open.
• Concentrated B & B 3100 solvent, acetone, and isopropyl alco-

hol are flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin, eye, and respiratory protection is required. Avoid
repeated or prolonged contact. Use with good ventilation.
CAUTION
Be certain that checklists have been established for packager-

furnished equipment. Consult the packager’s manual for mandatory
pre-start procedures, especially making sure that the packager-
furnished lube supply sub-system is activated and operational prior
to any motoring sequence. Failure to comply may result in part
damage.
(1) If crank/soak cleaning is not preceded by an extended shutdown period, perform a nor-
mal shutdown (including 5 minutes at core idle for cooling). Refer to Chapter 8,
Volume I of this manual for engine shutdown procedures.
(2) Allow gas turbine to cool so that outside surfaces are less than 200°F (93°C).
WARNING
If natural gas is used to drive the starter, additional safety precau-
tions are required. These include safety measures for combustible
gases and venting of starter exhaust to a safe location.
NOTE
While motoring the engine with the starter, ensure that a minimum
lube pressure of 6 psig (41 kPa) is maintained.
(3) To expedite cooling, motoring starter is permissible. Dry motoring procedures are con-
tained in to Chapter 8, Volume I of this manual. Limit starter duty cycles to those
defined in Chapter 5, Volume I.
4 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4014 00
B. Perform crank/soak cleaning cycle as follows:
(1) Motor HP rotor to 2,000 rpm and allow speed to stabilize. Low pressure (LP) rotor speed
should be 200-300 rpm. Allow LP rotor speed to stabilize before initiating water flow.
CAUTION
In below freezing conditions, antifreeze agents shall be added to the

water. The use of non-isopropyl alcohol, ethylene glycol, and addi-
tives containing chlorine, sodium, or potassium are not permitted
since they may attack titanium and other metals in the engine.
NOTE
• Total solids in the wash and rinse waters shall be no more than 100
ppm. The ph factor shall be between 6.5 and 8.5 at 77°F (25°C).
Potable water will normally meet these requirements. Water-wash
solution should be at room temperature and a flow rate of approxi-
mately 20 gpm (76 liters/minute).
• Residual waste following water-wash with solvent should be dis-

posed of in accordance with local environmental regulations for
the specific geographic location. Users should contact the solvent
supplier for details relative to the solvent used.
• Packager-supplied control system will open the VIGVs and will

close the VBVs.
(2) Inject 20 gallons (76 liters) of water-wash solution through crank/soak water-wash mani-
fold while motoring HP rotor at approximately 2,000 rpm and LP rotor at 200-300 rpm.
(3) After completion of wash solution injection, variable inlet guide vanes (VIGVs), variable
stator vanes (VSVs), and variable bypass valve (VBVs) should be fully closed. Allow
rotors to coast to a stop and the solution to soak for 10 minutes.
Change 4 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4014 00
NOTE
• For systems with driven equipment having large rotational inertia,

it may not be practical to allow the rotors to coast to a stop. The
soak will be a rolling soak.
• During wash cycle, approximately 10 percent of the water and

cleaning solution will leak through the engine casings and open-
ings to the exterior of the engine.
C. Complete two rinse cycles as follows:
(1) Open inlet drain, bleed air collector drain, exhaust collector drains, and module drains to
remove any wash solution and rinse water after washing is complete.
(2) Use a minimum of 25 gallons (95 liters) of 160 to 180°F (71 to 82°C) water, while
motoring HP rotor at approximately 2,000 rpm and LP rotor at 200-300 rpm.
NOTE
Rinsing performed using unheated water will require more water to

achieve the same rinsing effectiveness as heated water.
(3) After rinsing, shut off water supply.
(4) Regulate pneumatic starter air supply for normal operation.
(5) Open low pressure compressor (LPC) variable bleed valves.
D. As an option, operator may inspect gas turbine to determine if cleaning process was adequate
as follows:
(1) After completion of the rinse cycles, allow rotors to coast to a complete stop.
(2) Borescope inspect LPC and high pressure compressor (HPC) rotors per WP 4015 00,
Volume II of this manual, paying particular attention to stator/blade airfoils.
(3) If excessive contaminants are still present, rewash as required.
E. Make a normal engine start and allow engine to run at synchronous idle for 2-3 minutes to
dry engine.
6 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4014 00
9. On-Line Cleaning.
CAUTION
Antifreeze mixtures for on-line water-wash and rinse should be used
when ambient temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or less. Formation of
ice may result in major engine damage.
A. Prepare on-line wash solution with water and detergent per packager’s manual.
B. Limit total amount of on-line wash solution and rinse water to 100 gal/day (378.5 liters/day)
maximum.
C. Refer to packager’s manual for specific amount of wash solution and frequency of on-line
wash.

8 Blank Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
WP 4015 00
5 WORK PACKAGE
BORESCOPE INSPECTION


1 - 92 ...... 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Borescope Inspection General Information ................................................................................ 4

Combustion Chamber and Fuel Nozzle Borescope Inspection................................................... 30
Drive Motor, 2C14764G05/G06, and Adapter, 1C8208, Installation ......................................... 5
Drive Motor, 2C14764G05/G06, and Adapter, 1C8208, Removal............................................. 7
Fiber Light Borescope Set........................................................................................................... 8
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Borescope Inspection........................................................... 19
High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Nozzle Borescope Inspection...................................................... 53
High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Rotor Borescope Inspection........................................................ 61
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Borescope Inspection ............................................................ 13
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Borescope Inspection ................................................................... 81
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for borescope inspection.
B. Gain access to gas turbine borescope ports inside high pressure compressor (HPC) air mani-
fold by removing tubes per SWP 1913 02.
Title Number
Igniter Plug Replacement WP 1516 00
Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Pressure (P48) Probe Replacement WP 1712 00
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Stages 0-3 Stator Vanes WP 2213 00
Replacement

Spline Adapter, Manual or Front Drive Pad 1C8208G02
Borescope Set 2C6388G06
Flex Borescope Guide Tube 2C6948P06
Drive Motor, Electric (115 VAC 50/60 and 2C14764G05
400 Hz, 28 VDC)
Drive Motor, Electric (220 VAC 50 Hz and 2C14764G06
28 VDC)
Fiberscope 856A1321
Back-Lighted Conformation Tool MSE-64
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Anti-Seize Compound Milk-of-Magnesia
(Unflavored)

Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
6. Borescope Inspection General Information.
WARNING

inoperable. If possible, lock out system so it cannot be rotated.
• Gas turbine shall be allowed to cool to a surface temperature

below 120°F (48.9°C) before performing borescope inspection.
• Ensure that all personnel are clear of gas turbine inlet before
rotating rotors.
CAUTION
• To prevent foreign objects from entering the gas turbine, keep
borescope ports covered when they are not being used. Open one
port at a time.
• Do not use borescope continuously for more than 2 hours at a

time. Cool light bundle to room temperature before reuse.
A. Verify gas turbine will be inoperable during inspection.
B. Shut off main fuel inlet valve per packager's manual.
C. Allow gas turbine to cool to surface temperature below 120°F (48.9°C) prior to borescope
inspection.
D. Deactivate fire extinguishing system per packager's manual.
E. Enter enclosure access per packager's manual. Enclosure door must remain open.
F. Use borescope, 2C6388, for inspection of gas turbine. Do not use borescope continuously for
more than 2 hours at a time. Cool light bundle to room temperature before reuse.
NOTE
Drive motor, 2C14764G05, operates on 115 VAC or 28 VDC. Drive

motor, 2C14764G06, operates on 220 VAC or 28 VDC.
G. Use spline adapter, 1C8208, and drive motor, 2C14764G05/G06, to rotate high pressure
rotors during borescope inspection of rotors. Install adapter and motor per paragraph 7. A
manual ratchet may be used instead of the drive motor.
H. For rotation of low pressure rotors, refer to packager's manual.
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
7. Drive Motor, 2C14764G05/G06, and Adapter, 1C8208, Installation.
NOTE
• The gas turbine inspection drive motor permits one operator to

control the rotation of the gas turbine high pressure rotors for pur-
pose of inspection. No other personnel are required. The inspec-
tion drive motor will allow the gas turbine high pressure rotors to
be rotated in either direction at a very slow, variable speed. The
drive motor will not rotate the low pressure rotors.
• The drive motor may be installed at alternate locations as

required. Spline adapter, 1C8208, is required for all drive motors.
Spline adapter, 1C8208, can be used at various accessory loca-
tions.
• The gas turbine can be rotated by hand using a 1/2-inch-drive

wrench in the borescope drive pad.
A. Remove nuts and washers that secure drive pad cover onto transfer gearbox (figure 1).
Remove cover from gearbox and discard preformed packing. Retain hardware for
reinstallation.
1
NOTE
This drive pad may be utilized as an accessory drive. If so, the acces-
sory must be removed for access to the pad. Refer to the packager's
manual for removal/installation instructions.
B. Install adapter plate onto gearbox drive pad (figure 1). Secure with nuts provided with
adapter plate. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
C. Install drive shaft onto drive motor and tighten setscrew.
D. Insert drive shaft through hole in center of adapter plate and into spur gear. Ensure drive shaft
splines mesh with spur gear splines.
E. Secure drive motor to adapter plate with bolts and washers supplied with drive motor. Tighten
F. Connect drive motor cord to control unit J3 motor connector.
G. Connect remote control cord to control unit J2 remote connector.
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 1. Drive Motor and Adapter Installation
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
WARNING
Improperly grounded electrical equipment can cause severe shock

or death. Equipment shall be properly grounded before use.
H. Connect three-prong power cord to control unit J1 power connector. Plug three-prong con-
nector into power source.
I. Operate drive motor during borescope as follows:
(1) Move control unit power switch to ON position.
(2) Select direction of rotor rotation for particular borescope inspection.
(3) Move switch on remote control to forward or reverse as required. Adjust motor speed on
control unit to achieve desired rotor rotation speed. Operator may perform borescope
inspection as planned, and may vary speed and direction of rotation as required.
CAUTION
Before reversing direction of rotation, bring rotor to a complete stop.

Failure to stop the rotor before reversing rotation may result in
severe damage to the drive motor mechanism.
(4) To reverse direction of rotation, move directional selector to neutral position which
allows gas turbine to free wheel. Wait until rotor completely stops; then move directional
selector to opposite direction.
8. Drive Motor, 2C14764G05/G06, and Adapter, 1C8208, Removal.
WARNING
Improperly grounded electrical equipment can cause severe shock

or death. Equipment shall be properly grounded before use.
A. Switch control unit off and disconnect power cord from power source and control unit.
B. Disconnect remote control and drive motor from control unit.
C. Remove drive motor from adapter plate by removing drive motor bolts and washers
(figure 1). Loosen setscrew on drive shaft and remove drive shaft from drive motor.
D. Remove nuts that secure adapter plate onto transfer gearbox. Remove adapter plate from
gearbox.
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
NOTE
If drive pad is used for driving an accessory, install the accessory per
the packager's manual.
E. Install preformed packing, J221P134, and drive pad cover (figure 1) onto transfer gearbox
and secure with nuts and washers removed during drive motor installation. Tighten nuts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
9. Fiber Light Borescope Set.
A. Description. The fiber light borescope set (borescope), 2C6388, uses fixed focus, rigid lens
optics. The light necessary to view the inside of an engine travels from the light source to the
probe through a flexible fiber light cable (flexible cable). The borescope system usually con-
tains the following parts (figures 2 and 3):
3
2
(1) Type 1 Probe (Probe 1). Probe 1 is a high-magnification rigid variable focus probe and is
used to find and identify most damage in the gas flow path. Probe 1 has:
– A 1:1 magnification ratio at 7.0 inches (177.8 mm)
– A 90 degree angle of vision (AOV)
– A 35 degree field of view (FOV)
– Variable focus
– An immersion length of 20.0 inches (508 mm)
(2) Type 2 Probe (Probe 2). Probe 2 can view objects from 0.375 inch (9.53 mm) to infinity
and is used to do general inspections of the engine. See figure 3. Probe 2 has:
– A 1:1 magnification ratio at 2.0 inches (50.8 mm)
– An 80 degree angle of vision (AOV)
– A 60 degree field of view (FOV)
– Fixed focus rigid probe
– An immersion length of 20.0 inches (508 mm)
(3) For inspections less than 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) away from probe, magnification adapter
permits variable focus. For objects more than 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) away from probe,
magnification decreases.
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 2. Borescope Set
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 3. Borescope Probes
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
(4) Magnification Adapter. The magnification adapter has variable focus with 2:1 magnifica-
tion ratio at 2.00 inches (50.8 mm). This permits probe 2 to have more magnification.
The magnification adapter is not recommended for use with probe 1 due to loss of light
intensity. Probe 2 will have brightest image when used with magnification adapter. See
figure 2.
(5) Camera Adapter (Optional). Camera adapter permits inspector to take pictures through
borescope probe when a camera is attached.
(6) Television (Video) Adapter (Optional). Video adapter permits inspector to take video
images or display images on a large screen. It is necessary to use a television/video cam-
era with adapter.
(7) Light Projector (Fiberlight Projector). The fiberlight projector supplies the light source
through flexible cable and probe. Two light sources are available. The 150 watt lamp is
used to do visual inspections of objects near the end of probe. The 300 watt, high-inten-
sity lamp is used for photography, as well as visual inspections of combustion chamber,
HPC inlet areas, etc.
(8) Flexible Fiber Light Cable (Cable). The usual cable is 10.0 feet (3.0 meters) long. An
optional cable that is 8.0 feet (2.4 meters) long is also available.
(9) Eyepiece Adapter (Optional). The eyepiece adapter is used to help prevent eye strain
when borescope is used on engine. It also makes borescope procedure more comfortable
for the user. The eyepiece adapter makes viewing easier by limiting the amount of light
permitted to enter around inspector's eye.
B. Description. The following are optional tools used with the borescope set:
(1) MSE-64 Back-Lighted Conformation Tool. The back-lighted conformation tool is used
to measure optical resolution of borescope system. This is accomplished by directing
light from borescope probe to the back of the back-lighted conformation tool and then
comparing the resolution to the information on a resolution chart. It is necessary to use
the high-intensity light source with a Gemini 300 lamp and a cable that is 10.0 feet
(3 meters) long to do the test.
(2) 856A1321 Fiberscope (Flexible -I-pe). The flexible fiber optic system has an articulated
distal tip. The light for viewing is conducted from the projector to the probe through an
integrally attached fiber light bundle. The distal end can be angulated over a range of
240 degrees of arc vertically at the bending point. The fiberscope is to be used with the
2C6948 guide tube when borescope inspecting the high pressure turbine (HPT) shrouds.
(3) 2C6948 Guide Tube. The guide tube is to be used with the flexible type fiberscope when
borescope inspecting the HPT shrouds.
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
C. Borescope Set Assembly and Use.
WARNING
• Improperly grounded electrical equipment can cause severe

shock or death. Equipment shall be properly grounded before
use.
• To maintain explosion protection, do not operate borescope if

lamp module pressure is not within specified limits.
CAUTION
• Do not do a borescope inspection if the temperature inside the
engine is above 150°F (65.6°C).
• If the engine starter is used to motor the engine, the engine hot
section inspections shall be done in less than 20 minutes after the
motoring cycles are completed. Local temperature rise due to
engine temperature soak-back may damage the borescope.
(1) Select which probe to use. Use type 1 probe for high magnification and type 2 probe for
general inspections. Use fiberscope for HPT stage 1 nozzle inspection.
(2) Connect one end of cable to probe and other end to light source.
CAUTION
Before you connect the light source to a power source, be sure that
the on-off switch is in the OFF position. Ensure the light source and
the power supply are correctly grounded.
(3) Check that light source power switch is in OFF position. Connect electrical cable from
light source to a grounded power source.
(4) If necessary, attach magnification adapter to probe eyepiece. If you use probe 1, focus
probe before you attach magnification adapter.
(5) If film records are necessary, attach recording equipment as follows:
(a) If photographs are to be taken, attach camera adapter to a 35mm camera. Attach
camera and adapter to eyepiece on probe.
(b) If a movie/video is to be taken, attach television adapter to television/video camera.

Attach adapter and camera to eyepiece on the probe.
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
(6) If it is difficult to look through probe when probe is in port, attach 60 or 90 degree angle
adapter to probe eyepiece.
(7) Adjust light intensity through probe as follows:
(a) Move power switch on light source to ON position.
NOTE
The photo arc light circuit has a thermal delay cutout that prevents the
light source from being turned on if it is too hot.
(b) After inserting probe in engine borescope port, adjust light intensity to get correct
illumination.
10. Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Borescope Inspection.
CAUTION

port at a time.

NOTE
Purchaser must provide equipment for rotation of the LPC rotor for
borescope inspection of the LPC. Refer to packager's manual for
procedure.
A. Remove borescope plugs S4-1 through S4-4 from variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) and LPC.
See figure 4.
B. Rotate rotor and use borescope probe to view rotor blades. Identify first blade to left of two
locking lugs as blade number 1 for stage being viewed.
C. Borescope inspect LPC blades and vanes per table 1 and figure 5.
5
4
D. Record condition and report discrepancies for disposition and corrective action.
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 4. LPC Borescope Ports
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 5. LPC Rotor Blade Inspection
Change 5 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Table 1. LPC Borescope Inspection

1. Stages 0 through 3 Rotor Blades for:
a. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blades*
b. Nicks, dents, Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blades*
scratches, and
pits in root area
c. Nicks, dents, Any number, Not repairable Replace blades*
and scratches in 0.005 inch (0.13 mm)
leading or deep, 1/8 inch
trailing edges, (3.2 mm) in diameter
and contour for dents, and 1/2 inch
surfaces, except (12.7 mm) long for
root area scratches
d. Tip curl Both corners on each Not repairable Replace blades*
blade tip, not more than
1/4 inch (6.35 mm)
across blade tip, lead-
ing or trailing edge
e. Pits/erosion Any number, Not repairable Replace blades*
except root area 0.005 inch (0. 13 mm)
deep, no limit on diam-
eter spacing
f. Tip discolora- Any amount, if there Not repairable Replace blades*
tion resulting are no cracks
from rub
2. Stage 4 Rotor Blades for:
a. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blades*
b. Nicks, dents, Any number of dents, Not repairable Replace blades*
on leading or deep, 1/8 inch
trailing edges (3.2 mm) in diameter.
Any number of
scratches, 0.005 inch
(0.13 mm) deep,
1/2 inch (12.7 mm)
long
16 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Table 1. LPC Borescope Inspection (Continued)

c. Nicks, dents, Any number, Not repairable Replace blades*
on contour deep, 1/2 inch
surfaces (12.7 mm) diameter or
length
d. Tip curl Both corners on each Not repairable Replace blades*
blade tip, not more than
0.100 inch (2.54 mm)
across blade tip, lead-
ing or trailing edge, if
there are no indica-
tions of having struck
adjacent vanes during
operation
e. Tip burrs Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blades*
f. Tip cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blades*
g. Tip tears Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blades*
h. Tip discolora- Any amount, if there Not repairable Replace blades*
tion resulting are no cracks
from rub
i. Tip material Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blades*
missing at
leading edge
and/or trailing
edge corners
3. Inner Shrouds for:
a. Cracks Two per 360 degree Not repairable Replace shroud*
ring or one per ring
half, 1/4 inch
(6.35 mm) long
b. Nicks and Any number, Not repairable Replace shroud*
scratches 0.03 inch (0.76 mm)
deep, with minimum
separation of 1/4 inch
(6.35 mm)
Change 5 17

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Table 1. LPC Borescope Inspection (Continued)

c. Dents Any number, Not repairable Replace shroud*
0.06 inch (1.52 mm)
deep, with smooth
contour
d. Missing Any amount – –
anodize
e. Bushing Any number, Not repairable Replace bushings per
protrusion into provided vane is not WP 2213 00
airstream wearing into bushing
and protrusion is less
than 0.060 inch
(1.52 mm)
f. Fretting on OD Any number, 0.065 Not repairable Replace shroud*
surface from inch (1.65 mm) deep
vane contact
4. Stages 0 through 4 Stator Vanes for:
a. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace vane*
b. Nicks and Any number, Not repairable Replace vane*
scratches 0.03 inch (0.76 mm)
deep, with minimum
separation of 1/4 inch
(6.35 mm)
c. Dents Any number, 0.06 inch Not repairable Replace vane*
(1.52 mm) deep, with
smooth contour
d. Leading or Any amount, Any amount, Blend vane per
trailing edge 0.03 inch (0.75 mm) 0.06 inch (1.50 mm) Chapter 11
damage deep deep
e. Nicks and Any number, Not repairable Replace vane*
scratches within 0.015 inch (0.38 mm)
1/2 inch deep, with minimum
(12.7 mm) of separation of 0.10 inch
leading or (2.54 mm)
trailing edge
* NOTE: May be repairable; consult GE for disposition of replaced parts.
18 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
E. Install borescope plugs S4-1 through S4-4 as follows:
(3) Install borescope plugs into S4-1 through S4-4 ports. See figure 4.
(4) Tighten VIGV borescope plugs S4-1 and S4-4 to 240-280 lb in. (27.1-31.6 N·m) of
(5) Tighten LPC case borescope plugs S4-2 and S4-3 to 240-280 lb in. (27.1-31.6 N·m) of
11. High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Borescope Inspection.
CAUTION

port at a time.

A. Zero index HPC rotor as follows:
(1) Gain access to borescope port S5-11 through the stage 11 bleed air manifold per
SWP 1913 02.
(2) Rotate rotor clockwise (forward looking aft) and use borescope probe to view stage 12
rotor blade platforms. Locate first blade to left of two locking lugs. See figure 6.
6
NOTE
The locking lugs are two blades apart. The rotor blades rotate CCW as
viewed through the borescope.
(3) Position this blade in line with leading edge of stage 12 stator vane (as viewed through
the borescope). Identify this blade as blade No. 1. The next blade to appear will be blade
No. 2. See figure 6.
(4) The HPC rotor is now zero-referenced for all stages of compressor and HPT rotor blades.
Inspection of each applicable stage must start with HPC rotor positioned back to zero
reference point at stage 12.
Change 5 19

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 6. HPC Rotor Zero Index
B. Gain access to borescope ports S5-7, S5-8, and S5-9 through the stages 7 and 8 bleed air
manifolds per SWP 1913 02.
C. Remove borescope plugs S5-0 through S5-6, S5-9, S5-10, S5-12, and S5-13 from HPC case.
See figure 7.
7
D. Borescope inspect HPC blades and vanes per table 2 and figures 8, 9, 10, and 11.
10
9
8
11
20 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 7. HPC Borescope Ports
Change 5 21

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 8. HPC Rotor Blade Tip Clang Inspection
Figure 9. HPC Rotor Blade Inspection
22 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 10. HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blade Midspan Shroud
Change 5 23

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 11. HPC Stages 1 and 3 Blade Inspection
Table 2. HPC Borescope Inspection

1. Stages 1 through 14 Rotor Blades for:
NOTE
• On gas turbines operating with SPRINTTM system, stage 1

blades shall be replaced after 16,000 hours of HPC SPRINTTM
operation or as defined in Chapter 12, table 12-1 of this
manual.
• Severe stalls may cause blade-to-case rubs which may induce

blade tip cracking that is hard to detect following the event.
a. Rubs on stage 2 -- -- Inspect blades for
cracks, tip discolora-
tion, burrs, and high
metal
24 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Table 2. HPC Borescope Inspection (Continued)

b. Cracks Not serviceable on Not repairable Replace blades
stages 1 through 11.
Any number, any
amount on stages 12
through 14, if cracks
are in radial direction
along tip of blade
c. Nicks and dents Any number, 0.15 inch Not repairable Replace blades
on center panel (3.8 mm) in diameter,
if indications do not
extend across blade,
are not within 0.20 inch
(5.1 mm) of leading
and trailing edges, and
do not make hole
d. Tip corners that Any amount, maxi- Not repairable Replace blades
are missing mum of six blades per
stage, if there is no
unserviceable damage
downstream. If dam-
age is found, borescope
inspect all downstream
blades
NOTE
Tip clang damage is a sign of a compressor hard stall. See

WP 4028 00 for additional requirements.
e. Tip clang marks Any number, any Not repairable Replace blades
amount, if there are no
cracks
f. Tip curl Any amount, if damage Not repairable Replace blades
does not engage with
stator parts during
operation
g. Tip discolora- None allowed on -- Blend to remove
tion stage 2 discoloration
Change 5 25

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00

h. Bent blades Any number, any Not repairable Replace blades
amount, if blades do
not engage with stator
parts during operation
i. Corrosion and Any amount -- Water-wash per
dirt WP 4014 00
j. Abrasive Any amount -- Water-wash per
deposits WP 4014 00
(usually found
on leading
edges)
k. Platform Any amount on stage 1 Not repairable Replace blades
shingling blades. Not service-
able on stages 2
through 14 blades
l. Platform Any amount -- --
bowing
m. Burrs and high Any amount permitted, -- Stage 2 only: blend to
metal on blade except stage 2 remove high metal or
tips from wear burrs. FPI for tip cracks
after blending
When rotor is exposed,

remove rub and burr
evidence on all stages
and inspect for tip
cracks on all rubbed
blades
n. Leading and Trailing Edges of Stages l through 9 Rotor Blades for:
(1) Tears, Any number of nicks Not repairable Replace blades
nicks, and and dents, 0.05 inch
dents (1.27 mm) deep, if
blade is not torn or
bent. Torn edges are
not serviceable
26 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00

o. Stage 1 Blade Only:
(1) Tears, Area A: Not repairable Replace blades
nicks, and Serviceable, if not
dents on more than 0.020 inch
leading and (0.5 mm) deep, and
trailing blade is not torn or
edges bent. Torn edges not
(figure 11) serviceable
Area B: Not repairable Replace blades
Serviceable, if not
(1.27 mm) deep, and
bent. Torn edges not
serviceable
p. Stage 3 Blade Only:
(1) Tears, Area A: Not repairable Replace blades
nicks, and Serviceable, if not
dents more than 0.010 inch
on leading (0.25 mm) deep, and
and trail- blade is not torn or
ing edges bent. Torn edges not
serviceable
Area B: Not repairable Replace blades
Serviceable, if not
(1.27 mm) deep, and
bent. Torn edges not
serviceable
Change 5 27

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00

q. Leading and Trailing Edges of Stages 10 through 14 Rotor Blades for:
dents (1.27 mm) deep, if
within blade is not torn or
0.30 inch bent. Any number of
(7.6 mm) nicks and dents,
of blade tip 0.120 inch (3.048 mm),
maximum of six blades
per stage
dents more (1.27 mm) deep, if
than blade is not torn or
0.30 inch bent. Torn edges are
(7.6 mm) not serviceable
away from
blade tip
r. Stage 1 Rotor Blades for:
(1) Circumfer- Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blades
ential gap
between
mid span
shrouds
(2) Shingling Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blades
of mid
span
shrouds
(3) Distortion Any amount -- --
of plat-
forms
(4) Cracks on Any number, any -- --
platforms amount
28 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00

(5) Distortion Any amount -- --
of plat-
forms
(6) Cracks on Any number, any -- --
platforms amount
s. Carboloy Wear Pad on Mid Span Shroud Interlock Surface of Stage 1 Rotor Blades for:
(1) Chipped 10 percent of pad may Not repairable Replace blades
pad be missing
(2) Cracked Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blades
pad
(3) Pad wear, Any amount, if remain- Not repairable Replace blades
smooth, or ing pad thickness is
stepped approximately
0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
(4) Missing Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blades
pad
2. Stages 1 and 2 Blade Retainers for:
a. Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace retainer
b. Missing tabs Not serviceable Not repairable Replace retainer
3. Rotor Spools and Disks for:
NOTE
Excessive amounts of missing rub coat can result in loss of stall
and performance margin.
a. Missing rub Any amount – –
coat
E. If damage is found, inspect adjacent stages to assess total damage. Record condition and
report discrepancies for disposition and corrective action.
F. Install borescope plugs S5-0 through S5-6, S5-9, S5-10, S5-12, and S5-13 as follows:
(1) Ensure borescope plug threads are clean prior to installation.
(2) Coat S5-0 through S5-6 borescope plug threads and mating surfaces with antiseize
compound.
Change 5 29

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
(3) Coat S5-9, S5-10, S5-12, and S5-13 borescope plug threads and mating surfaces with
antiseize compound.
(4) Install borescope plugs into S5-0 through S5-6, S5-9, S5-10, S5-12, and S5-13 ports.
See figure 7.
(5) Tighten borescope plugs S5-0 through S5-6 and S5-9 to 40-60 lb in. (4.5-6.8 N·m) of
torque and safety-wire or safety-cable.
(6) Tighten borescope plugs S5-10, S5-12, and S5-13 to 80-100 lb in. (9.0-11.3 N·m) of
torque and safety-wire or safety-cable.
12. Combustion Chamber and Fuel Nozzle Borescope Inspection.
CAUTION

port at a time.

A. Remove borescope plugs as follows (figure 12):
NOTE
There are six combustion chamber borescope ports. It is not necessary

to remove the UV sensors at borescope ports S6-2 and S6-5 during a
normal borescope inspection.
(1) Remove borescope plugs S6-1 and S6-4 from CRF.
(2) Remove igniter plugs (borescope ports S6-3 and S6-6) per WP 1516 00.
12
B. Borescope inspect combustion chamber and fuel nozzles per table 3 and figures 13, 14, 15,
and 16.
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
C. Record condition and report discrepancies for disposition and corrective action.
D. Install borescope plugs and igniter plug as follows (figure 12):
(1) Install igniter plugs per WP 1516 00.
30 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 12. Combustion Chamber and HPT Borescope Ports
Change 5 31

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 13. Combustion Chamber Inspection
32 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 14. Combustion Chamber Dome Assembly Inspection
Change 5 33

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 15. Inner/Outer Liner Cracks
Figure 16. Inner/Outer Liner Burns and Missing Material
34 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Table 3. Combustion Chamber and Fuel Nozzle Borescope Inspection

COMBUSTION CHAMBER
1. All Surfaces for (figure 13):
a. Discoloration Any amount -- --
b. Carbon accu- Any amount -- --
mulation
2. Dome Assembly (Dome Plate and Heat Shields) for (figure 14):
a. Distortion of Any amount -- --
heat shields
b. Axial or radial Any number that is not Not repairable Replace combustor
cooling hole connected assembly
cracks in dome
plate
c. Circumferen- Any number, 0.50 inch Not repairable Replace combustor
tial cracks in (12.7 mm) long; or assembly
dome plate five, 1.0 inch
(25.4 mm) long, with
2.0 inches (50.8 mm)
d. Circumferen- Two per heat shield, Not repairable Replace combustor
tial cracks in 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) assembly
heat shield face long
e. Radial cracks in Three per heat shield, Not repairable Replace combustor
heat shield face 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) assembly
long, if no more than
one is connected to any
other crack
f. Circumferen- Two per heat shield Not repairable Replace combustor
tial cracks in centerbody, 0.50 inch assembly
heat shield (12.7 mm) long, with
center body minimum separation of
fillet 1.0 inch (25.4 mm) if
cracks do not connect
to any crack on heat
shield face
Change 5 35

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Table 3. Combustion Chamber and Fuel Nozzle Borescope Inspection (Continued)

g. Missing, Any number, Not repairable Replace combustion
chipped, or 0.10 square inch, if chamber
spalled thermal combined total area on
barrier coating single heat shield is
(TBC) less than 1.00 square
inch
3. Inner/Outer Liner Panels (Convective Panel and Film Panels) for (figures 15 and 16):
a. Circumferen- Any number, Not repairable Replace combustion
tial cracks 1.0 inch (25.4 mm) chamber
long, with minimum
separation of 6.0 inches
(152.4 mm)
b. Axial cracks on Any number, Not repairable Replace combustion
convective 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) chamber
panel long
c. Axial cracks on Any number, Not repairable Replace combustion
film panels 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) chamber
long. Ten per liner that
extend all the way
across film panels, if
cracks do not extend
into convective panel
d. Connected Two, if cracks are Not repairable Replace combustion
cracks within limits for axial chamber
and circumferential
cracks
e. Burn Not serviceable Not repairable Replace combustion
through/miss- chamber
ing material on
convective
panel
f. Burn Six areas per film Not repairable Replace combustion
through/miss- panel, 0.40 by chamber
ing material on 0.40 inch (10.16 by
film panel 10.16 mm), with mini-
mum separation of
6.0 inches (152.4 mm)
36 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00

g. Missing over- Fourteen cracked out Not repairable Replace combustion
hang material areas per combustion chamber
chamber, 0.50 by
0.10 inch (12.7 by
2.54 mm), if not axially
aligned with cracked
out areas in adjacent
panels
h. Distortion Any amount within Not repairable Replace combustion
1/2 inch (12.7 mm) of chamber
original contour
i. Missing, If area is within Not repairable Replace combustion
chipped, or 1.0 inch (25.4 mm) axi- chamber
spalled TBC ally of end of heat
shield center-body,
allow up to 8 areas,
2.0 square inches
(50.8 sq mm) maxi-
mum, per area
4. Cowl for (figure 13):
a. Burns (fuel Three areas, 0.25 by Not repairable Replace combustion
nozzle 1.0 inch (6.35 by chamber
removed) 25.4 mm) on each fuel
nozzle
b. Cracks (fuel Any number, 0.25 inch Not repairable Replace combustion
nozzle (6.35 mm) long chamber
removed)
5. All Combustor Heatshields for:
a. Discoloration Any amount -- --
6. Heatshield Face for (figure 17):
a. Missing TBC Any amount -- --
b. Missing TBC Any amount Inspect again within --
and base coat 2000 hours
Change 5 37

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00

c. Hole through Any number, not to Inspect again within Replace combustor
face exceed 0.25 sq. in. 500 hours
(6.35 sq. mm) per
heatshield
7. Heatshield Wing for (figure 18):
a. Missing TBC Any amount -- --
b. Missing TBC Any amount Inspect again within --
and base coat 2000 hours
c. Loss of wing Less than 20% of pins Inspect again within --
wall surface exposed 1000 hours
with internal Less than 40% of pins Inspect again within --
pins visible exposed 500 hours
More than 40% of pins Not serviceable Replace combustor
exposed
8. Heatshield Face for (figure 19):
a. Fillet to collar Any amount -- --
crack
b. Fillet cracks Any amount, less than Inspect again within --
0.5 inch (12.7 mm) 1000 hours
c. Fillet cracks Any amount less than Inspect again within --
crossing face 50% of face width 300 hours
50% to 70% of face Inspect again within --
width 300 hours
More than 70% of face Not serviceable Replace combustor
width
d. Cracks centered Less than 50% of face Inspect again within --
on face width 500 hours. If no
growth, inspect at 1000
hour intervals
50% to 70% of face Inspect again within --
width 300 hours
More than 70% of face Not serviceable Replace combustor
width
38 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00

e. Cracks centered Not connected -- --
on face and in
fillet
Any amount, less than Inspect again within --
0.5 inch (12.7 mm) 1000 hours
Less than 50% of face Inspect again within
width 500 hours. If no
intervals
50% to 70% of face Inspect again within
width 300 hours
More than 70% of face Not repairable Replace combustor
width. Not serviceable
Connected -- --
Less than 50% of face Inspect again within
width 500 hours. If no
intervals
50% to 70% of face Inspect again within
width 300 hours
More than 70% of face Not repairable Replace combustor
width. Not serviceable
9. Heatshield Wing for (figure 20):
a. Wing surface Any amount -- --
cracks
b. Wing material Any amount if no Not repairable Replace combustor
missing cracks and if “X” is
less than 0.7 inch
(17.8 mm)
FUEL NOZZLES
1. All Surfaces (Shroud, Centerbody, and Swirler Vane) for (figure 21):
a. Discoloration Up to 0.13 inch Any amount Remove fuel nozzle
or carbon (3.3 mm) thick and clean/inspect to
deposits determine cause of
carbon
Change 5 39

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00

2. Swirler Vane for (figure 21):
a. Cracks Any number, 0.10 inch Not repairable Replace fuel nozzle
0.10 inch (2.54 mm)
3. Shroud for (figure 21):
a. Shroud 8 per shroud, 0.10 deep Not repairable Replace fuel nozzle
Oxidation by 0.40 inch long
(2.54 by 10.16 mm)
maximum
b. Shroud Cracks 8 per fuel nozzles, Not repairable Replace fuel nozzle
0.25 inch (6.35 mm)
long, with minimum
separation of 0.25 inch
(6.35 mm)
(5) Tighten CRF borescope plugs S6-1 and S6-4 to 350-400 lb in. (39.5-45.2 N·m) of torque
and safety-wire or safety-cable.
40 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 17. Heatshield Face (Sheet 1 of 3)
Change 5 41

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
42 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Change 5 43

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 18. Heatshield Wing (Sheet 1 of 4)
44 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Change 5 45

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
46 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Change 5 47

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 19. Heatshield Face Cracks (Sheet 1 of 2)
48 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 19. Heatshield Face Cracks (Sheet 2 of 2)
Change 5 49

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 20. Heatshield Wing Cracks (Sheet 1 of 2)
50 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 20. Heatshield Wing Cracks (Sheet 2 of 2)
Change 5 51

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 21. Fuel Nozzle Inspection
52 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
13. High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Nozzle Borescope Inspection.
CAUTION

port at a time.
NOTE

(1) Remove borescope plugs S6-1 and S6-4 from the CRF.
(3) Remove borescope plugs S7-1 and S7-2 from the HPT stator case.
B. Open VSV vanes per WP 1411 00.
C. Borescope inspect HPT stage 1 nozzle per table 4 and figure 22.
22
D. Borescope inspect HPT stage 2 nozzle per table 5 and figure 23.
23
E. Record condition and report discrepancies for disposition and corrective action.
F. Install borescope plugs and igniter plug as follows (figure 12):
(7) Tighten HPT borescope plugs S7-1 and S7-2 to 200-225 lb in. (22.6-25.4 N·m) of torque
and safety-wire plugs to bolts attaching heat shield cover plates.
Change 5 53

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 22. HPT Stage 1 Nozzle Inspection
54 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 23. HPT Stage 2 Nozzle Inspection
Change 5 55

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Table 4. HPT Stage 1 Nozzle Borescope Inspection

1. Leading Edge of Vanes for:
a. Cracks that Any number, 0.50 inch Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
connect nose (12.7 mm) long, with assembly
holes minimum separation of
0.25 inch (6.35 mm), if
no material is missing
b. Cracks that go Any number, if no Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
out from nose material is missing assembly
holes but do not
connect nose
holes
c. Burn through or Not serviceable Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
erosion/miss- assembly
ing material
d. Burns or Combined total area, Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
erosion 0.20 square inch assembly
(charred only, (1.3 square cm) per
no missing vane, maximum of four
material) vanes per 90 degree
arc. No missing metal
in inserts allowed. If
adjacent vanes have
damage, replace three
fuel nozzles that are
upstream from dam-
aged vanes
2. Concave Surface of Vanes for:
a. Radial cracks Any number, if no Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
out of gill holes material is missing assembly
b. Other cracks Any number, if no Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
(not in gill hole material is missing assembly
rows)
c. Burns and Any amount, if no Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
erosion material is missing or assembly
burned through
56 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Table 4. HPT Stage 1 Nozzle Borescope Inspection (Continued)

d. Cracks in fillet Any number, if no Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
area adjacent to material is missing assembly
inner and outer
platforms
3. Convex Surface of Vanes for:
a. Radial cracks Any number, if no Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
material is missing assembly
b. Axial cracks Any number, if no Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
material is missing assembly
c. Burns and Any amount, if no Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
burned through
d. Cracks in fillet Any number, if no Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
area adjacent to material is missing assembly
inner and outer
platforms
4. Trailing Edge of Vanes for:
a. Axial cracks Any number, if no Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
(concave material is missing assembly
surface only) or
originating
from slots
adjacent to
trailing edge
b. Buckling or Any amount -- --
bowing
Change 5 57

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00

c. Burn through, Any amount, if com- Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
tears, or bined total area of assembly
dents/missing missing material is less
material than 1.5 square inches
(9.7 square cm) per
vane and if combined
total area of material
missing from trailing
edge is less than
6.0 square inches
(38.7 square cm) per
assembly
5. All Areas of Vanes for:
NOTE
Craze cracking is defined as numerous superficial surface cracks

which have no visual width or depth.
a. Craze cracking Any amount -- --
b. Nicks, scores, Any number, any -- --
scratches, and amount
dents
c. Metal splatter Any amount -- --
6. Inner and Outer Platforms for:
a. Cracks in Any number, any -- --
parent metal amount
b. Nicks, scores, Any number, any -- --
scratches, and amount
dents on
platform
surface
c. Burns or Any amount, if no Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
burned through
d. Bulges or Not serviceable Not repairable Replace stage 1 nozzle
bowing assembly
58 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Table 5. HPT Stage 2 Nozzle Borescope Inspection

1. Vanes for:
a. Axial cracks in Any number, Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
trailing edge 0.090 inch (2.28 mm) assembly
that are more long; 2 per vane,
than 0.400 inch 0.50 inch (12.7 mm)
(10.16 mm) long; 1 per vane,
from the inner 0.75 inch (19.05 mm)
and the outer long, if cracks are
platforms 0.25 inch (6.35 mm)
apart and 0.400 inch
(10.16 mm) from inner
or outer platforms
b. Cracks in Any number, if cracks Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
trailing edge do not extend more assembly
that are less than 1.0 inch
than 0.40 inch (25.4 mm) in front of
(10.16 mm) aft edge
from inner and
outer platforms
c. Axial cracks in One per segment, Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
leading edge 0.30 inch (7.62 mm) assembly
that break the long. Cracks that are
surface layer parallel to outer plat-
form are not permitted
in Area C (figure 23)
d. Cracks in Two, 1.5 inches Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
concave (38.1 mm) long assembly
surfaces
e. Cracks in Two, 1.00 inch Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
convex surfaces (25.4 mm) long, if assembly
cracks are 0.50 inch
(12.7 mm) from outer
or inner platforms
Change 5 59

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00

NOTE
Craze cracking is defined as numerous superficial surface cracks

which have no visual width or depth.
f. Craze cracking Any amount -- --
g. Nicks, scores, Any number, 0.03 inch Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
scratches, or (0.76 mm) deep, assembly
dents 0.25 inch (6.35 mm)
long
h. Buckling of Any amount within Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
trailing edge 0.100 inch (2.54 mm) assembly
of original contour
i. Burns in convex One area, 1.0 square Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
and concave inch (6.5 square cm), if assembly
surfaces no material is burned
through
j. Burns or One area per vane, Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
spalling on 1.0 inch (25.4 mm) assembly
leading edge long radially, 0.25 inch
(charred only, (6.35 mm) wide, if no
no missing material is missing or
material) burned through
k. Material One area per vane, Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
missing from 0.150 inch (3.81 mm) assembly
trailing edge long, 0.150 inch
(3.81 mm) wide
2. Inner and Outer Platforms for:
a. Cracks between Any number, Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
vanes 0.150 inch (3.81 mm) assembly
long. Two per platform
segment, 0.600 inch
0.300 inch (7.62 mm)
60 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00

b. Nicks, scores, Any number, 0.03 inch Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
scratches, and (0.76 mm) deep assembly
dents
c. Cracks in outer Any number, 0.12 inch Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
platform (3.04 mm) long. Two assembly
trailing edge per platform segment,
0.40 inch (10.16 mm)
long
d. Spalling of Any amount -- --
TBC on outer
platform
14. High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Rotor Borescope Inspection.

CAUTION
port at a time.

NOTE
(1) Remove borescope plugs S6-1 and S6-4 from CRF.
(3) Remove borescope plugs S7-1 and S7-2 from HPT stator case.
B. Establish HPT rotor blade reference per paragraph 11.
C. Borescope inspect HPT shrouds per table 6 and figure 24. Use flexible fiberscope,
856A1321, and guide tube, 2C6948P06, at borescope ports S7-1 and S7-2.
Change 5 61

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
24
Figure 24. HPT Stages 1 and 2 Shroud Inspection
62 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Table 6. HPT Stages 1 and 2 Shrouds Borescope Inspection

1. Stage 1 Shrouds for:
a. Axial cracks Any number, Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
0.150 inch (3.81 mm) assembly
long. Four cracks per
segment, 1.00 inch
(25.4 mm) long. One
crack per segment all
the way across seg-
ment, with 0.125 inch
(3.18 mm) separation
between cracks
b. Circumferen- Any number, any Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
tial cracks amount, with minimum assembly
separation of
0.125 inch (3.18 mm)
c. Radial cracks in Three per segment, any Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
forward wall amount, with minimum assembly
separation of 0.50 inch
(12.7 mm)
d. Connected Two per segment, if Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
cracks cracks are within lim- assembly
its for axial and cir-
cumferential cracks
e. Material Maximum area of Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
missing in 0.100 inch (2.54 mm) assembly
circumferential can be missing
direction
2. Stage 2 Shrouds for:
a. Wear and Any amount, if damage Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
erosion does not go all the way assembly
through surface
Change 5 63

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Table 6. HPT Stages 1 and 2 Shrouds Borescope Inspection (Continued)

b. Axial cracks Any number, 0.20 inch Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
(5.08 mm) long. Four assembly
cracks per segment,
1.00 inch (25.4 mm)
long. One crack per
segment all the way
across segment, with
0.125 inch (3.18 mm)
separation between
cracks
c. Circumferen- Four per segment, Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
tial cracks 0.375 inch (9.53 mm) assembly
long, with minimum
separation of
0.125 inch (3.18 mm)
d. Connected Two per segment, if Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
cracks cracks are within assembly
limits for axial and
circumferential cracks
e. Material Combined total area, Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
missing from 0.100 inch (2.54 mm) assembly
circumferential in circumferential
or leading direction and
edges 0.750 inch (19.05 mm)
in axial direction, is
less than depth of seal
slot
f. Disengaged or Any amount. Disen- Not repairable Inspect LPT per
missing HPT gaged leaf seals may paragraph 15
stage 2 leaf extend into hot gas
seal flowpath. If seen or
missing, borescope
inspect LPT
64 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Table 6. HPT Stages 1 and 2 Shrouds Borescope Inspection (Continued)

g. Material Combined area is less Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
missing from than 0.10 x 0.25 inch assembly
leading edge or (2.5 x 6.4 mm), if depth
side edges of missing material
through leading edge or
past side edge seal slots
h. Side edge lip 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Not repairable Replace stage 2 nozzle
curl (noticeable step between adjacent assembly
step between side edges
shrouds)
D. Borescope inspect HPT stage 1 rotor blades per table 7 and figures 25 and 26.
E. Borescope inspect HPT stage 2 rotor blades per table 7 and figure 27.
F. Record condition and report discrepancies for disposition and corrective action.
25
G. Install borescope plugs and igniter plug as follows (figure 12):
(4) Install borescope plugs into S6-l and S6-4 ports.
(7) Tighten HPT borescope plugs S7-1 and S7-2 to 200-225 lb in. (22.6-25.4 N·m) of torque
and safety-wire.
27
26
Change 5 65

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 25. HPT Stage 1 Rotor Blade Inspection (Sheet 1 of 3)
66 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Change 5 67

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
68 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 26. HPT Stage 1 Rotor Blade TBC Inspection Areas
Change 5 69

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
70 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Change 5 71

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Table 7. HPT Rotor Blades Borescope Inspection

1. Stage 1 Rotor Blades:
NOTE
During inspection of blades, visual evidence of plugged cooling

holes is not positive. Evidence of plugged cooling holes is accept-
able if crack, erosion, and burn limits are serviceable.
a. All Areas for:
(1) Missing Any amount, if there Not repairable Replace blade
coating are no holes or cracks
in oxidized area
(2) Oxidation Any amount, if there Not repairable Replace blade
of parent are no holes or cracks
metal in oxidized area
(green or
black dis-
coloration)
(3) Plugged Any number, if cracks, Not repairable Replace blade
cooling erosion, and burns are
holes within limits
b. Leading Edges for:
(1) Axial and Any number, if cracks Not repairable Replace blade
radial do not extend back to
cracks in gill holes
area A
because of
impact
damage
(figure 25)
72 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Table 7. HPT Rotor Blades Borescope Inspection (Continued)

(2) Axial and Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
radial
cracks in
area A
related to
missing
parent
metal
due to
oxidation
(figure 25)
(3) Radial Any number, if cracks Not repairable Replace blade
cracks out do not connect two
of leading holes and do not turn in
edge holes axial direction
in area B
(figure 25)
(4) Axial Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
cracks in
area B
(figure 25)
(5) Nicks and Any number, if damage Not repairable Replace blade
dents in and cracks do not
area A extend past gill holes
(figure 25)
(6) Nicks and Any number, if damage Not repairable Replace blade
dents in does not extend past
area B gill holes and there are
(figure 25) no tears, cracks, or
missing material
coating or are no holes or cracks
base metal in oxidized area or
due to oxi- underlying area
dation in
area C
(figure 26)
Change 5 73

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00

(8) Missing One area per blade, Not repairable Replace blade
material smaller in diameter
(base than span between
metal) three leading edge
holes or 0.240 inch
(6.09 mm), if it is not
below fifth concave gill
hole from top, there are
no cracks, and internal
leading edge cross over
wall is intact, maxi-
mum of two blades per
stage
c. Tip caps for:
(1) Missing Not serviceable. No Not repairable Replace blade
material material missing or
burned through to first
radial passage
d. Trailing Edges for:
(1) Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
(2) Nicks in Any number, if there Not repairable Replace blade
area A are no tears or cracks
(figure 25)
(3) Dents in Any number, smaller in Not repairable Replace blade
area A diameter than span
(figure 25) between four trailing
edge holes or
0.120 inch (3.05 mm),
and depth is less than
distance between two
trailing edge holes or
0.040 inch (1.016 mm).
Dents shall not extend
into trailing edge hole
(4) Tears in Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
area A
(figure 25)
74 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00

(5) Coating or Any amount, if there Not repairable Replace blade
parent are no holes or cracks
metal miss- in oxidized area
ing due to
oxidation
e. Concave and Convex Surfaces for:
cracks at do not connect two
gill holes holes and do not turn in
and film axial direction. Cracks
holes from bottom holes
must be shorter than
distance between holes
cracks out do not extend into next
of tip film film hole (in direction
holes of platform) and do not
turn in axial direction
(3) Radial One crack permitted. Not repairable Replace blade
cracks Length must be less
other than than distance between
at gill or eight gill holes or
film holes 0.900 inch (22.86 mm).
Crack can extend to tip
of blade
(4) Nicks and Any number, if there Not repairable Replace blade
dents in are no tears, cracks, or
area A holes through material
(figure 25)
Change 5 75

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00

(5) Nicks and Any number, smaller in Not repairable Replace blade
dents in diameter than span
area B between two gill holes
(figure 25) on concave surface,
four trailing edge holes
on convex surface, or
0.120 inch (3.05 mm).
No tears, cracks, or
holes through material.
No damage allowed on
root radius
(6) Axial Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
cracks
coating in are no holes or cracks
areas D in oxidized area or
and E underlying area
(figure 26)
(8) Distortion, Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
burns, and
signs of
melting
76 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00

f. Tip Area (Above Tip Film Holes) for:
NOTE
It is possible that the tip film holes extend into blade tip area
(figure 25).
(1) Radial Any number on con- Not repairable Replace blade
cracks cave surface, if cracks
do not extend more
than one hole below tip
film holes. Any number
on convex surface, if
cracks do not extend
below second trailing
edge hole from top and
are not notched open
below first trailing
edge hole from top.
Three per blade that
extend to fourth trailing
edge hole from top, if
cracks are not notched
open below first trail-
ing edge hole from top
(2) Axial Any number, if cracks Not repairable Replace blade
cracks do not extend below tip
film holes
(3) Bent or Any amount, if damage Not repairable Replace blade
curled does not extend below
blade tips tip area
(4) Tears Any number, if they do Not repairable Replace blade
not extend below tip
area
(5) Missing Any amount, if damage Not repairable Replace blade
material, does not extend below
except at tip area and internal air
trailing passages are not visible
edge where material is
missing
Change 5 77

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00

(6) Missing Any amount, if damage Not repairable Replace blade
material at does not extend below
trailing first trailing edge hole
edge from top and internal
air passages are not
visible where material
is missing
g. Blade platform for:
(1) Oxida- Any amount, if there Not repairable Replace blades and
tion/corro- are no holes or cracks inspect LPT for
sion of in oxidized or corrosion
parent corroded areas
metal or
black dis-
coloration
2. Stage 2 Rotor Blades:
NOTE
There are tip notches on the concave side of four blades 90 degrees
apart on the stage 2 rotor. The tip notches are for reference only
and are not signs of erosion.
a. Concave and Convex Surfaces for:
(2) Tears and Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
missing
material
(3) Dents and Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
nicks
within
0.500 inch
(12.70
mm) of
platform
78 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00

(4) Dents and Any number, Not repairable Replace blade
nicks not 0.500 inch (12.70 mm)
within in diameter, if there are
0.500 inch no tears
(12.70
mm) of
platform
in oxidized area
b. Leading Edges for:
(1) Nicks and Any number, any -- --
dents amount
(2) Cracks in Any number, any Not repairable Replace blade
area A amount, if cracks are in
(figure 27) dent
(3) Cracks in Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
area B
(figure 27)
missing
material
in oxidized area
c. Trailing Edges for:
(2) Nicks and Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
dents
within
0.500 inch
(12.70
mm) of
platform
Change 5 79

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00

(3) Nicks and Any number, any -- --
dents not amount
within
0.500 inch
(12.70
mm) of
platform
missing
material
d. Tips for:
(1) Bent or Any amount -- --
curled
blade tips
(2) Tears and Any amount, if wall on Not repairable Replace blade
missing opposite side of blade
material is not damaged. One
area per blade,
0.300 inch (7.62 mm)
long, if damage is on
both sides of blade
(3) Radial Two per blade, one on Not repairable Replace blade
cracks each side of blade,
0.250 inch (6.35 mm)
long, if internal air pas-
sage cavity below tip
cavity shelf is not visi-
ble through cracks
(4) Axial Any number, Not repairable Replace blade
cracks 0.500 inch (12.70 mm)
long
e. Platforms for:
(1) Bowing Any amount, if plat- Not repairable Replace blade
form misalignment is
less than platform
thickness and there are
no cracks
80 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
15. Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Borescope Inspection.
CAUTION

port at a time.

NOTE
Purchaser must provide equipment for rotation of the LPT rotor for
borescope inspection of the LPT Refer to packager's manual for
procedure.
A. Remove borescope plugs S8-2 through S8-4 from the LPT case and turbine rear frame (TRF).
See figure 28.
28
Figure 28. LPT Borescope Ports
Change 5 81

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
B. Remove P48 probe (borescope port S8-1) per WP 1712 00.
C. Borescope inspect the LPT vanes and blades per table 8 and figures 29, 30, 31, and 32.
34
33
32
31
30
29
D. Record condition and report discrepancies for disposition and corrective action.
E. Install borescope plugs S8-2 through S8-4 as follows (figure 28):
(3) Install borescope plugs into S8-2 through S8-4 ports.
(4) Tighten LPT case borescope plugs S8-3 and S8-4 to 140-160 lb in. (15.8-18.1 N·m) of
(5) Tighten TRF borescope plug S8-2 to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque and
safety-wire.
F. Install P48 probe per WP 1712 00.
82 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 29. LPT Stages 2 through 4 Stator Vane Inspection
Change 5 83

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 30. LPT Rotor Blade Inspection
84 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 31. LPT Stage 1 Rotor Blade Inspection
Change 5 85

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 32. LPT Rotor Blade Shroud Circumferential Inspection
86 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Figure 33. HPT Leaf Seals Wrapped Around EGT Probe and Airfoils
Change 5 87

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Figure 34. LPT Stage 1 Blade Misalignment Inspection
88 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00
Table 8. LPT Rotor and Stator Borescope Inspection

1. Stage 1 Nozzle Vanes:
a. All Areas for:
(1) Cracks One per vane 0.25 inch Not repairable Replace LPT module
(6.35 mm) long, if
there are no cracks in
either adjacent vane
(one on each side)
(2) Nicks and Any number, any Not repairable Replace LPT module
dents amount, if there are no
tears
(3) Burns Any number of areas, Not repairable Replace LPT module
1.0 square inch
(6.5 square cm), if
burned vanes are sepa-
rated by at least two
vanes that are not
burned
(4) Tears One per vane, 0.50 inch Not repairable Replace LPT module
(12.7 mm) long, if
combined total area is
less than 0.5 square
inch (3.2 square cm)
per stage
(5) HPT leaf Not serviceable Any amount Remove probe to dis-
seals in engage leaf seal and
contact inspect probe. Disen-
with EGT gaged seal can stay in
probe engine
(figure 33)
(6) HPT leaf Any number -- --
seals
wrapped
around
airfoils
(figure 33)
Change 5 89

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00
Table 8. LPT Rotor and Stator Borescope Inspection (Continued)

CAUTION
The vane leading edge is the primary source of purge air to the
aft side of the stage 2 HPT disk rim. Any interference of this air-
flow could damage the stage 2 HPT.
2. Stages 2 through 4 Stator Vanes (figure 29):
a. All Areas for:
(1) Cracks One per vane, 0.25 inch Not repairable Replace LPT module
(6.4 mm) long, if there
are no cracks in either
adjacent vane (one on
each side)
(2) Nicks and Any number, any Not repairable Replace LPT module
dents amount, if there are no
tears
(3) Burns Any number of areas, Not repairable Replace LPT module
1.0 square inch
(6.5 square cm), if
burned vanes are sepa-
rated by at least one
vane that is not burned
b. Vane Fillet Radius for:
(1) Cracks One per vane, 0.50 inch Not repairable Replace LPT module
(12.7 mm) long, maxi-
mum of two vanes per
nozzle segment
3. Rotor Blades (figures 30, 31, and 32):
a. All Areas for:
(1) Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace LPT module
b. Leading and Trailing Edges for:
(1) Nicks Any number, Not repairable Replace LPT module
0.04 inch (1.02 mm)
deep
90 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4015 00

(2) Dents Any number, if there Not repairable Replace LPT module
(small) are no distortions (that
go out) on opposite
side of blade. Five,
with distortions less
than 0.05 inch
(1.27 mm) on opposite
side of blade
(3) Dents Two per blade, Not repairable Replace LPT module
(large) or 0.50 inch (12.7 mm)
missing from leading edge,
material 3.75 inches
(95.25 mm) from trail-
ing edge
(4) Cracks in Any number, Not repairable Replace LPT module
dented 3.75 inches
areas (95.25 mm) long. Not
serviceable in other
areas
(5) Cracks that Not serviceable Not repairable Replace LPT module
go out
from dents,
broken
areas, or
root fillet
c. Concave and Convex Surfaces for:
(1) Dents and Any number, 0.03 inch Not repairable Replace LPT module
nicks (0.76 mm) deep, if
there are no distortions
(that go out) on oppo-
site side of blade. Five
on each side of blade,
with distortions less
than 0.02 inch
(0.51 mm) on opposite
side of blade
Change 5 91

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4015 00

d. Top Surface Rotor Blade Platforms (not including blade root radius) for:
(1) Nicks and Any number, 0.02 inch Not repairable Replace LPT module
dents (0.51 mm) deep
e. Outer Forward Seal Tooth on Stage 1 Rotor Blades for (figure 31):
(1) Wear or Any amount, if not Not repairable Replace LPT module
erosion worn to platform
f. Seal Lips for:
(1) Material Any amount less than Not repairable Replace LPT module
that is 50 percent of initial
rubbed, material
turned, or
missing
g. Circumferential Mate Faces on Blade Shrouds for (figure 32):
(1) Wear Any amount, if there is Not repairable Replace LPT module
(irregular no related interlock
or jagged) wear
h. Blade Shroud Interlocks for (figure 32):
(1) Wear Not serviceable Not repairable Replace LPT module
(irregular
or jagged)
(2) Shingling Not serviceable Not repairable Replace LPT module
or unlatch-
ing
i. Blade Platforms for (Stage 1 Only) (figure 34):
(1) Misaligned Any amount, not to -- Replace blades
exceed 0.05 inch
(1.2 mm)
j. HPT leaf seals Not serviceable Any number Remove or dislodge
wrapped around leaf seal through bores-
airfoil cope port. Dislodged
(figure 33) leaf seal may stay in
engine. Inspect blades
92 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4016 00
0WP 4016 00
WORK PACKAGE
LUBE OIL SAMPLING


1-5 ...... 0
6 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Lube Oil Test............................................................................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4016 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for lube oil sampling and test analysis.
Title Number
Oil Analysis, Particle Count SAE ARP598
Oil Analysis, Acid ASTM D664-58
Oil Analysis, Viscosity ASTM D445-65
Oil Analysis, Color ASTM D1500
Oil Analysis, Water ASTM D1744
Lube and Scavenge Pump Chip Detector Inspection WP 4017 00
Lube and Scavenge Pump Screen Check WP 4020 00
Oil Analysis, SOAP NAVA1R 31-1-37
None required.
None required.
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4016 00
6. Lube Oil Test.
A. Obtain lube oil sample as follows:
WARNING
• Lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respi-

ratory tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid
• Wear insulated gloves to prevent injury when handling hot

parts.
CAUTION
Do not take oil sample from low drain point. Low drain point can
contain heavy sediments and provide incorrect indications.
(1) Shut down engine.
NOTE
All oil samples shall be taken from the same location.
(2) Obtain oil sample as follows:
(a) Obtain oil sample within 30 minutes after engine shutdown.
(b) Take oil sample from oil tank filler. Ensure oil extraction equipment and container
are clean and free of contaminates.
(c) If oil sample is obtained from a low drain point, such as the scavenge oil discharge
line, flow approximately l pint (0.5 liter) into a waste container and then, without
interrupting the flow, obtain oil sample.
B. Label the sample with the following information:
Sample Location ___________________________

Gas Turbine S/N ___________________________
Oil Type __________________________________
Date _____________________________________
Total Operating Hours _______________________
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4016 00
C. Deliver oil sample to laboratory for analysis. The oil sample shall be tested per table 1.
D. If limits of table 1 are exceeded, perform the following corrective action:
(1) Inspect lube and scavenge pump chip detectors and screens per WP 4017 00 and
WP 4020 00.
(2) Flush oil from lube and hydraulic systems as follows:
(a) Shut down engine and completely drain oil tank and as many service lines as
possible.
(b) Service oil tank with new lubricating oil. Always use oil from same manufacturer.
(c) Operate engine for 5 minutes.
(d) Shut down engine and drain oil tank and service lines.
(e) Service oil tank with new lubricating oil.
E. If spectrographic oil analysis program (SOAP) analysis indicates an increasing trend in wear,
monitor oil contamination through increased sampling intervals. If maximum limits are
reached, change out engine and flush oil system per step D(2).
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4016 00
Table 1. Lube Oil Sample Testing

Step Test for Procedure Limit
1. Total Acid Number (TAN) Test per ASTM D664-58 1.0
2. Viscosity (Kinematic) Test per ASTM D445-65 Maximum change at 100°F
(38°C) from new oil reading
+25% to -10%
3. Color Test per ASTM D1500 4
4. Particle Count Test per SAE ARP598 For Lube NAS 7 Class
For HYD NAS 6 Class
5. SOAP Analysis: Atomic Absorption Method
Element Normal On Watch Shutdown Procedure
Iron (Fe) 0-3 4-7 8+ NAVAIR
31-1-37
Silver (Ag) 0-1 2-4 5+
Aluminum (Al) 0-1 2-4 5+
Chromium (Cr) 0-4 5-7 8+
Copper (Cu) 0-5 6-10 11+
Magnesium (Mg) 0-1 2-4 5+
Nickel (Ni) 0-3 4-6 7+
Silicon (Si) 0-20 21-36 37+
Titanium (Ti) 0-3 4-6 7+
Molybdenum (Mo) 0-3 4-6 7+
Lead (Pb) 0-3 4-6 7+
Tin (Sn) 0-15 16-22 23+
SOAP Analysis: Atomic Emission Method
Element Normal On Watch Shutdown Procedure
Iron (Fe) 0-8 9-13 14+ NAVAIR
31-1-37
Silver (Ag) 0-3 4-6 7+
Aluminum (Al) 0-3 4-6 7+
Chromium (Cr) 0-6 7-9 10+
Copper (Cu) 0-12 13-19 20+
Magnesium (Mg) 0-6 7-9 10+
Nickel (Ni) 0-5 6-8 9+
Silicon (Si) 0-25 26-64 65+
Titanium (Ti) 0-5 6-8 9+
Molybdenum (Mo) 0-5 6-8 9+
Lead (Pb) 0-2 3-4 5+
Tin (Sn) 0-20 21-39 40+
6. Water Test per ASTM D1744 1,000 PPM
5/(6 Blank)
6 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4017 00
0WP 4017 00
WORK PACKAGE
LUBE AND SCAVENGE PUMP CHIP DETECTOR
CHECK
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PD GAS TURBINE MODELS - ALL


1-8 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Chip Detector Inspection ............................................................................................................ 3

Chip Detector Installation ........................................................................................................... 7
Chip Detector Removal............................................................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4017 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for inspection of the lube and scavenge pump chip
detectors.
Title Number
Troubleshooting Chapter 10
Magnetic Chip Detector Replacement WP 1910 00
Lube and Scavenge Pump Screen Check WP 4020 00
None required.
Dry Cleaning Solvent Fed Spec P-D-680,
Type II

Packing, Preformed M83248/1-009 AR
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4017 00
6. Chip Detector Removal.
A. Before removing the chip detectors, do the following:
(2) Shut off main fuel inlet valve per packager's manual.
(4) Enter enclosure access per packager's manual. Enclosure door must remain open.
(5) Shut off oil supply to gas turbine.
B. Remove chip detectors from locations shown in figure 1. Remove chip detector from housing
bayonet mount by pushing knurled ring inward and rotating counterclockwise (figure 2).
NOTE
Standard chip detector configuration is common scavenge, B-scav-

enge, and transfer gearbox (TGB) scavenge. Optional chip detectors
may be installed in C-scavenge, D-scavenge, and E-scavenge ports.
2
1
7. Chip Detector Inspection.
A. Visually inspect chip detectors for foreign material (figure 3). If any foreign material is
found, analyze, and perform corrective action as follows:
3
(1) Isolate source of foreign material by identifying area from which material was scav-
enged. Check lube and scavenge pump screens per WP 4020 00.
(2) Visually examine suspect material for identification of source. If material can be visually
identified as bearing material, such as roller, ball, and/or race fragments, component
replacement is the required corrective action. Bearing races, rollers, and balls are mag-
netic, therefore, separating out any magnetic materials will help identification. See
table 1.
(3) Main gas turbine bearing distress normally increases lube scavenge temperatures and gas
turbine vibration. Review gas turbine log sheets for significant changes in gas turbine
logged parameters.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4017 00
Figure 1. Chip Detector Locations
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4017 00
Figure 2. Chip Detector Components
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4017 00
Figure 3. Chip Detector Inspection
Table 1. Component Failure Corrective Action
Chip Detector Possible Cause Corrective Action

1. TGB a. TGB failure a. Replace TGB
b. Inlet gearbox failure b. Replace gas turbine
c. 1B or 2R bearing failure c. Replace gas turbine
d. 3R bearing failure d. Replace gas turbine
2. B-Sump 4R/4B bearing failure Replace gas turbine
3. C-Sump 5R bearing failure Replace gas turbine
4. D- and E-Sump 6R/7R bearing failure Replace LPT module
5. Common Scavenge — Inspect chip detectors/
screens for source
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4017 00
(4) If suspect material is found on TGB chip detector or in TGB screen, source must be fur-
ther identified. Remove lower drain plug and inspect TGB/A-sump area for any distress.
(5) If suspect material is identified as bolt or rivet fragments, replace component as indicated
by screen identity. Bearing cage rivets indicate a radial drive shaft failure.
(6) If suspect material is identified as pieces of preformed packing, gasket, safety wire, coke,
machining chip, or seal rub strip material, place gas turbine on watch, e.g., check and
clean chip detectors and scavenge pump screens daily and monitor lube system parame-
ters until problem is located or chip detectors and screens are clean for two consecutive
days, then resume normal inspection intervals.
(7) If more information is required, contact customer support manager for clarification.
B. If chip detector is suspect of malfunctioning, check continuity as follows:
(1) Remove electrical connector per WP 1910 00.
(2) Check for open continuity of pins to housing and all pins to each other.
(3) Check continuity across chip detector tip control surfaces. Continuity shall not exceed 10
ohms.
(4) If chip detector fails any of these checks, replace chip detector. Refer to Chapter 10, Vol-
ume I of this manual for electrical lead and chip detector wiring schematics and trouble-
shooting tables.
(5) Install electrical connector per WP 1910 00.
8. Chip Detector Installation.
WARNING
• Drycleaning solvent, P-D-680, type II, is flammable and toxic
to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin, eye, and respiratory
protection is required. Avoid repeated or prolonged contact.
(W-MIL-C13)

A. Clean chip detectors with dry cleaning solvent. Dry with shop air at 40 psig (276 kPa).
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4017 00
B. Inspect preformed packings (figure 2) for damage. If required, replace preformed packings.
WARNING

C. Lubricate preformed packings with lubricating oil.
D. Install chip detectors in chip detector housing by pushing knurled ring inward and rotating
clockwise. Check for proper seating by twisting knurled ring back and forth without pressing
inward.
E. Leak-check chip detectors as follows:
WARNING
A safety observer shall be stationed adjacent to the enclosure
access.
(1) Open fuel supply valve and make a gas turbine start.
(2) Ensure gas turbine will not be operated above idle. Put on protective ear and hand equip-
ment. Deactivate fire extinguishing system per packager's manual.
(3) Station a safety observer adjacent to the enclosure access.
(4) Enter enclosure. Check for leaks. Make corrections as required.
(5) Exit enclosure, close enclosure access, and activate fire extinguishing system per pack-
ager's manual.
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4020 00
0WP 4020 00
WORK PACKAGE
LUBE AND SCAVENGE PUMP SCREEN CHECK


1-8 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Lube and Scavenge Pump Inlet Screens Inspection.................................................................... 4

Lube and Scavenge Pump Inlet Screens Installation .................................................................. 7
Lube and Scavenge Pump Inlet Screens Removal ...................................................................... 4
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4020 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for inspection of the lube and scavenge pump inlet
screens.
Title Number
Lube and Scavenge Pump Chip Detector Inspection WP 4017 00
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4020 00
Plug:

Packing, Preformed NAS1595-5 7
Chip Detector:

Screens:

3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4020 00
6. Lube and Scavenge Pump Inlet Screens Removal.
WARNING
Gas turbine shall not be operating and shall be verified as inopera-

ble during inspection period. If possible, lock out system so it can-
not be rotated.
A. Before removing lube and scavenge pump inlet screens, perform following:
(4) Enter enclosure access per packager's manual. Enclosure door shall remain open.
(5) Shut off lube oil supply to gas turbine per packager's manual.
B. Remove lube and scavenge pump inlet screens (figure 1) as follows:

1
WARNING

(1) Remove drain plugs or chip detectors from transfer gearbox (TGB), accessory gearbox
(AGB), B-sump, C-sump, D-sump, and E-sump inlet screens. Remove and discard pre-
formed packings. Examine chip detectors per WP 4017 00. Drain residual oil into
approved waste container.
(2) Remove lube inlet screen and six lube scavenge inlet screens from lube and scavenge
pump, and identify by location using tags or vibropeen etch. Remove and discard pre-
formed packings.
7. Lube and Scavenge Pump Inlet Screens Inspection.
A. Visually inspect inlet screens for foreign material. If any foreign material is found, analyze as
follows and perform corrective action:
(1) Isolate source of foreign material by identifying area from which material was scav-
enged.
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4020 00
Figure 1. Lube and Scavenge Pump Screens Check
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4020 00
Table 1. Component Failure Corrective Action
Filter Screen Possible Cause Possible Corrective Action

A. TGB 1. TGB failure 1. Replace TGB
2. Inlet gearbox failure 2. Replace gas turbine
3. 1B or 2R bearing failure 3. Replace gas turbine
4. 3R bearing failure 4. Replace gas turbine
B. B-Sump 4R/4B bearing failure Replace gas turbine
C. C-Sump 5R bearing failure Replace gas turbine
D. D- and E-Sump 6R/7R bearing failure Replace LPT module
E. AGB Scavenge AGB failure Replace AGB (Note 1)
NOTE:
Some packager and GE supplied components use gas turbine lube oil and are scavenged through
the AGB. Material in the AGB could be indicative of failure of the gearbox mounted components
and not failure of the AGB itself.
(2) Visually examine suspect material for identification of source. If material can be visually
identified as bearing materials, such as roller, ball and/or race fragments, required cor-
rective action is component replacement. Bearing races, rollers, and balls are magnetic,
therefore, separating out any magnetic materials will help identification. Material prop-
erty analysis may be required. Main engine bearings cannot be replaced on-site. Main
engine bearings may be replaced at depot level. Main bearing failures require replace-
ment of gas turbine or module. See table 1 for possible corrective action details.
(3) Main gas turbine bearing distress usually increases lube scavenge temperatures and gas
turbine vibration, therefore, gas turbine log sheets should be reviewed for significant
changes in gas turbine logged parameters.
(4) If suspect material is found in TGB screen, source shall require further identification.
Inspect TGB/A-sump area for any distress.
(5) If suspect material is identified as bolt or rivet fragments, replace component as indicated
by screen identity.
(6) If suspect material is identified as pieces of preformed packing, gasket, safety wire, coke,
machining chip, or seal rub strip material, place gas turbine on watch, e.g., check and
clean scavenge pump screens daily and monitor lube system parameters until problem is
located or screens are clean for two successive days, then resume normal inspection
intervals.
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4020 00
8. Lube and Scavenge Pump Inlet Screens Installation.....
See figure 1.
WARNING
• Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory

tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or

A. Clean screens with isopropyl alcohol and soft bristle brush. Dry with shop air at 40 psig
(276 kPa) maximum pressure. Replace any damaged screens.
WARNING
B. Lubricate new packings, P/N M83248/1-912, with lubricating oil, and install onto TGB, B-,
and C-sump inlet screens. Install inlet screens into same ports from which they were removed
and tighten to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire inlet screens.
C. Lubricate new packings, P/N M83248/1-910, with lubricating oil, and install onto AGB and
E-sump inlet screens. Install inlet screens into same ports from which they were removed and
tighten to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire inlet screens.
D. Lubricate packing, P/N NAS1593-121, with lubricating oil, and install on lube inlet screen.
Install lube inlet screen into same port from which it was removed and tighten to 55-70 lb in.
(6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire lube inlet screen.
E. Lubricate new packings, P/N M83248/1-905 or P/N J221P905, if chip detectors are used,
with lubricating oil. Install packings onto drain plugs or chip detectors and install in AGB,
TGB, B-, C-, D-, and E-sump inlet screens. Tighten drain plugs or chip detectors to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
F. Turn on lube oil supply to gas turbine.
7
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4020 00
G. Leak-check main lube and scavenge pump inlet screens as follows:
WARNING

access.
(1) Open fuel supply valve and make a gas turbine start per packager's manual.
(2) Ensure gas turbine will not be operated above idle.
(3) Put on protective ear and hand equipment.
(5) Station safety observer adjacent to enclosure access.
WARNING
Inlet and exhaust areas of running engines are extremely danger-

ous. Stay clear and wear ear protection.
(6) Enter enclosure. Check for leaks in lube system, and correct leaks as required.
(7) Exit enclosure, close enclosure access, and activate fire extinguishing system per pack-
ager's manual.
(8) Shut down engine.
8
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4021 00
0WP 4021 00
WORK PACKAGE
VARIABLE GEOMETRY PUMP/HYDRAULIC CONTROL
UNIT FILTER CHECK


1-6 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
VG Pump/HCU Filter Inspection................................................................................................ 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4021 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for inspection of the variable geometry (VG)
pump/hydraulic control unit (HCU) filter.
Title Number
None required.
Corrosion Preventive Oil MIL-L-6085
Dry Cleaning Solvent Fed Spec P-D-680,
Type II
Element, Filter AC-B244F-2440
Packing, Preformed M83248/1-243
Packing, Preformed M83248/1-904
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4021 00
6. VG Pump/HCU Filter Inspection.
WARNING

not be rotated.
A. Before removing VG pump/HCU filter, perform the following:
(5) Shut off oil supply to gas turbine per packager's manual.
B. Remove VG pump/HCU filter as follows (figure 1):

1
WARNING

(1) Remove filter bowl drain plug. Drain fluid into a suitable container. Remove and discard
preformed packing.
(2) Using strap wrench, remove filter bowl.
(3) Remove and discard filter element.
(4) Visually inspect filter bowl for large particles.
(5) Remove and discard preformed packing from filter bowl.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4021 00
Figure 1. VG Pump/HCU Filter Inspection
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4021 00
C. Install VG pump/HCU filter as follows (figure 1):
WARNING
• Drycleaning solvent, P-D-680, type II, is flammable and toxic

to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin, eye, and respiratory
protection is required. Avoid repeated or prolonged contact.

(1) Clean filter bowl with dry cleaning solvent. Blow dry with compressed air.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-6085, is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes,

and respiratory tract. Skin, eye, and respiratory protection is
required.
(2) Lubricate preformed packings with corrosion preventive oil.
(3) Install preformed packing, P/N M83248/1-243, onto filter element.
(4) Push filter element, P/N AC-B244F-2440, into filter bowl.
(5) Install filter bowl onto filter head and hand-tighten until filter bowl bottoms. Tighten fil-
ter bowl to maximum of 50 lb ft. (67.8 N·m) of torque.
(6) Install preformed packing, P/N M83248/1-904, onto drain plug and install plug. Tighten
plug to 40-65 lb in. (4.6-7.3 N·m) of torque.
(7) Safety-wire drain plug to filter bowl and filter bowl to filter head.
(8) Turn on oil supply to gas turbine per packager's manual.
D. Leak-check VG pump/HCU filter as follows:
WARNING
access.
(1) Open fuel supply valve and make a gas turbine start per packager's manual.
(2) Ensure gas turbine will not be operated above idle.
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4021 00
(3) Put on protective ear and hand equipment.
(5) Station a safety observer adjacent to the enclosure access.
WARNING
Inlet and exhaust areas of running engines are extremely danger-

ous. Stay clear and wear ear protection.
(6) Enter enclosure. Check for leaks in lube system. Correct leaks as required.
(7) Exit enclosure, secure enclosure access, and activate fire extinguishing system per pack-
ager's manual.
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4022 00
0WP 4022 00
WORK PACKAGE
PNEUMATIC STARTER SERVICING


1-3 ...... 0
4 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Pneumatic Starter Servicing........................................................................................................ 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4022 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for servicing the pneumatic starter before installation.
Title Number
None required.

2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4022 00
6. Pneumatic Starter Servicing.
See figure 1.
NOTE
This procedure is to be accomplished before pneumatic starter is

installed.
A. Remove reducer from air supply port. Remove and discard preformed packing.
WARNING
B. Pour 12-15 fl oz (350-450 cc) of lubricating oil into air supply port.
C. Lubricate preformed packing, P/N J221P906, with lubricating oil and install onto reducer.
D. Install reducer into air supply port. Tighten reducer to 180-200 lb in. (20.4-22.6 N·m) of
torque.
1
Figure 1. Pneumatic Starter Servicing
3/(4 Blank)
4 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4023 00
0WP 4023 00
WORK PACKAGE
IGNITION SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL CHECK


1-3 ...... 0
4 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Ignition System Functional Check.............................................................................................. 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4023 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for a functional check of the ignition system.
Title Number
None required.
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4023 00
6. Ignition System Functional Check.
A. Before inspecting ignition system, perform following:
(2) Shut off electrical power to ignition system per packager's manual.
(3) To clear combustor of any residual fuel, motor gas turbine per packager's manual for
1 minute and allow gas turbine to coast down and stop.
WARNING
Ignition system shall be inoperative for at least 2 minutes before

disconnecting ignition leads. Ignition system could be charged
with lethal high voltage.
B. Disconnect number one ignition exciter input lead at exciter. Temporarily secure input lead
away from exciter.
C. Turn on electrical power to ignition system (No. 2 ignition exciter energized) per packager's
manual. An audible cracking should be heard when the No. 2 igniter plug fires.
D. Turn off electrical power to ignition system. Reconnect input lead to exciter and safety-wire
connector.
E. Repeat steps B., C., and D., disconnecting the No. 2 exciter.
F. If an audible noise or cracking is not heard on No. 1 and/or No. 2 igniters, check out system
to isolate problem, and take appropriate corrective action per Volume I, Chapter 10.
G. Exit enclosure, close enclosure access, turn on electrical power to ignition system, open main
fuel supply valve, and activate fire extinguishing system per packager's manual.
3/(4 Blank)
4 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4024 00
0WP 4024 00
WORK PACKAGE
VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL
CHECK


1-4 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Vibration Monitoring System Functional Check ........................................................................ 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4024 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for a functional check of the vibration monitoring
system.
Title Number
Accelerometer Replacement WP 1911 00

Megohmmeter Local Purchase
None required.
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4024 00
6. Vibration Monitoring System Functional Check.
WARNING

not be rotated.
A. Before vibration monitoring system functional check, do the following:
(4) Enter enclosure access per packager's manual. Enclosure door must remain open.
(5) Turn on power to purchaser control panel.
CAUTION
Use a small object and light taps when checking accelerometer.
Excessive, hard tapping may damage accelerometer.
B. Check accelerometer by tapping it lightly with a small object (screwdriver handle). Acceler-
ometer is good if control panel shows an indication of tapping.
NOTE
Control panel must have power turned on or indications will be

incorrect.
C. If accelerometer does not show an indication of tapping, inspect accelerometer for loose or
missing cable clamps, loose mount brackets, and/or loose electrical connections. Make cor-
rections as required and repeat step B.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4024 00
D. If accelerometer does not show an indication of tapping after completion of step C., perform
electrical test of accelerometer as follows:
NOTE
Electrical problems are evident by erratic or no output from the accel-

erometer and are indicative of shorted or broken coil windings, con-
taminated connector contacts, loose connector, or damaged leads at
the connector backshell.
(1) Using a megohmmeter, or equivalent, verify insulation resistance of accelerometer by

performing resistance check of each connector pin to backshell.
(2) Resistance shall be 100 megohms minimum at 100 Vdc at an ambient temperature of 60
to 90°F (15 to 32°C). If not, replace accelerometer per WP 1911 00.
E. If accelerometer fails electrical test or fails to operate, replace per WP 1911 00 and repeat
steps B., C., and D.
F. Exit enclosure, close enclosure access, open fuel supply valve, and activate fire extinguishing
system per packager's manual.
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4025 00
0WP 4025 00
WORK PACKAGE
OVERSPEED INSPECTION


1-4 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Overspeed Conditions Inspection ............................................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4025 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for overspeed inspection including disposition of the gas
turbine.
Title Number
Gas Turbine To/From Enclosure Removal/Installation WP 3010 00
Gas Turbine Inlet Inspection WP 4010 00
External Engine Cleaning WP 4011 00
None required.
None required.
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4025 00
6. Overspeed Conditions Inspection.
CAUTION
If a questionable condition exists, do not attempt to motor or operate

the engine until a thorough investigation of the condition has been
made. Do not repeat hot starts, compressor stalls, load-shedding, or
other problems that initiate emergency shutdowns or aborted opera-
tions without thorough investigation. Failure to do so can result in
undue stress on engine components that may result in damage and
ultimate failure.
NOTE
• The electronic control system low pressure rotor trip point is 4300
rpm, while the high pressure trip point is 10,711 rpm. During over-
speed events, the rotor speeds can exceed the control system trip
point.
• Following an overspeed trip, the control system transient data

shall be retrieved from the gas turbine electronic control system.
Do not reset the control or attempt another start before retrieving
the data and noting the maximum low pressure rotor and high
pressure rotor speeds during the overspeed event.
A. Following an emergency shutdown for overspeed, retrieve maximum obtained low pressure
rotor and high pressure rotor speeds from electronic control transient data. See appropriate
packager's manual for instructions.
B. Perform overspeed inspection per table 1 (low pressure rotor) and table 2 (high pressure
rotor).
C. Perform gas turbine control system check per appropriate packager's manual.
D. Perform inlet and exhaust inspection per WP 4010 00 and WP 4011 00 or packager's manual.
E. Borescope low pressure compressor (LPC) and low pressure turbine (LPT) or high pressure
compressor (HPC) and high pressure turbine (HPT) per WP 4015 00.
F. If LPC and LPT or HPC and HPT require teardown, remove gas turbine per WP 3010 00 and
return to an authorized depot for teardown and inspection.
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4025 00
Table 1. Low Pressure Rotor Overspeed Inspection and Corrective Action Requirements
Requirements
Control System Inlet and Exhaust LPC & LPT
Condition Check Inspection Teardown
≤4300 RPM X – –
>4300 and ≤4,600 X X –
RPM
>4600 RPM X – X
Table 2. High Pressure Rotor Overspeed Inspection and Corrective Action Requirements
Requirements
Control System Inlet and Exhaust HPC & HPT
Condition Check Inspection Borescope HPC Teardown
<11055 RPM X – – –
≥11055 and <11202 X X X –
RPM
≥11202 RPM X – – X
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4026 00
0WP 4026 00
WORK PACKAGE
OVERTEMPERATURE INSPECTION


1-7 ...... 0
8 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Overtemperature Conditions Inspection ..................................................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4026 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for overtemperature inspection.
Title Number
LM6000 System Descriptions Chapter 5
Variable Bleed Valve (VBV) System Check WP 1312 00
Gas Turbine in Enclosure Removal/Installation WP 3010 00
External Engine Inspection WP 4012 00
None required.
None required.
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4026 00
6. Overtemperature Conditions Inspection.
CAUTION
If a questionable condition exists, do not attempt to motor or operate

the engine until a thorough investigation of the condition has been
made. Do not repeat hot starts, compressor stalls, load-shedding, or
other problems that initiate emergency shutdowns or aborted opera-
tions without thorough investigation. Failure to do so can result in
undue stress on engine components that may result in damage and
ultimate failure.
A. Perform overtemperature inspection per table 1.
B. Perform sensor and fuel flow system inspection as follows:
(1) Check Po and Ps3 sensor systems. See appropriate packager's manual (SPAM) to con-
firm correct interface location and proper transducer calibration, and check for sensor
line leakage. Correct any abnormal conditions.
(2) Check functionality of XN25 sensors per Chapter 10, TS-28. Check functionality of T2
and T25 sensors per Chapter 10, TS-27.
(3) Check fuel flow calibration for high fuel flow condition. See appropriate packager's
manual.
(4) Confirm A-ring staging valves are closed on start, C-ring staging valves open, then close
transiently near core idle, and B-ring staging valves are always open during start. Refer
to Chapter 5, figure 5-4 for fuel system schematic. Check staging valves per Chapter 10,
TS-7.
C. Perform variable geometry inspection as follows (Chapter 10, TS-23):
(1) Check variable inlet guide vane (VIGV), variable bypass valve (VBV), variable stator
vane (VSV), and torque motor customer interface cables at electrical panel No. 1 for
security. Correct, as required, before restarting engine.
(2) Check electrical connectors, VIGV A, VBV A, and VSV A for security at hydraulic con-
trol unit (HCU). If installed, check VIGV B, VBV B, and VSV B connectors also. Cor-
rect, as required, before restarting engine.
3
GEK 105059 LM6000 PC
WP 4026 00
Table 1. Overtemperature Inspection and Corrective Action Requirements

T48 During Start-up (Note 2) T48 During Operation
Inspection 1301 to 1509°F 1301 to 1509°F 1510 to 1600°F 1683 to 1761 to 1683 to Reference
(Note 1) (705 to 820°C) (705 to 820°C) 1599°F (872°C) or 1760°F (917 1787°F (961 1760°F (917
For less than For more than (820 to more to 960°C) For to 975°C) For to 960°C) For
40 seconds 40 seconds 870°C) more than 5 less than more than
but less than 5 minutes 7 minutes or
7 minutes >1761°F
(961°C) for
more than
5 minutes
Engine X X X X X X X SPAM
Control
System
Check
(Note 3)
HPC Stages X X X WP 4015 00
1, 7, and 12
Borescope
Inspection
Combustor X X X X WP 4015 00
and HPT
Borescope
Inspection
LPT X X WP 4015 00
Borescope
Inspection
Sensor X X X X X step B.
Inspection
Fuel System X X X X X step B.
Inspection
Variable X X X X X step C.
Geometry
Inspection
Replace X X WP 3010 00
Engine
Note 1 • Record time and temperature in engine log book.
• If maintenance has been performed on the engine, inspect those areas for loose, disconnected, or
improperly inspected connections.
• Borescope engine first to determine engine serviceability.
Note 2 Ensure starter operation meets packager's requirement. Correct as required before restarting engine.
Note 3 • Check ECU for proper schedules and operation.
• If T48 indication system malfunction is found, correct malfunction, restart engine, and check if T48
remains within limits.
• If T48 remains within limits, additional inspections are not required.
• If T48 exceeds limits, shut down engine and perform additional inspections as indicated above.
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4026 00
(3) Ensure VSV position indicator (LVDT) indicated 0-42 percent during start. See appro-
priate packager's manual to verify correct schedule and proper functioning of engine
control unit (ECU). Perform the following and correct before restarting engine:
(a) Inspect VSV system mechanical components for damaged, loose, or missing hard-
ware per WP 4012 00.
WARNING

(b) Ensure electrical connectors at VSV actuators are secure.
(c) Ensure customer interface cables for VBV/VSV left and right LVDT, are secure at
electrical panel No. 2.
(d) Perform electrical system wiring check as follows and replace cables as required:
1 Ensure continuity of VSV LVDT electrical cable, left and right, from appropri-
ate actuator to electrical panel No. 2 per wiring schematics in Chapter 10.
2 Ensure continuity of VBV/VSV LVDT left and right customer interface electri-
cal cables from electrical panel No. 2 to ECU interface panel per wiring sche-
matics in Chapter 10.
3 Ensure continuity of VIGV, VBV, VSV, torque motor A/B, and, if installed,
VIGV, VBV, VSV, and torque motor B/C customer interface electrical cables
from electrical panel No. 1 to ECU interface panel per wiring schematics in
Chapter 10.
4 Ensure continuity of VSV portion of the VIGV, VBV, VSV, torque motor A/B,
and, if installed, VIGV, VBV, VSV, and torque motor B/C electrical cables from
electrical panel No. 1 to HCU per wiring schematics in Chapter 10.
5 Verify ohmic value of VSV torque motor A/B, and, if installed, torque motor
B/C, at HCU connectors No. 4 per troubleshooting tables and wiring schematics
in Chapter 10.
6 Verify ohmic value of VSV actuator LVDTs per troubleshooting tables and wir-
ing schematics in Chapter 10.
5
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4026 00
(e) If VSV LVDT indicator is still in error, perform VSV rig check per WP 1411 00.
(4) Ensure VBV LVDT indicated 83-100 percent during start. See appropriate packager's
manual to verify correct schedule and proper functioning of ECU. Perform the following
and correct before restarting engine:
(a) Inspect VBV system mechanical components for damaged, loose, or missing hard-
(b) Ensure electrical connectors at VBV actuators are secure.
(c) Perform electrical system wiring check as follows and replace cables as required:
1 Ensure continuity of VBV LVDT electrical cables, left and right, from appropri-
ate actuator to electrical panel No. 2 per wiring schematics in Chapter 10.
2 Verify ohmic value of the VBV torque motor A/B, and, if installed, torque motor
B/C, at the HCU connectors No. 3 per troubleshooting tables and wiring sche-
3 Verify ohmic value of VBV actuator LVDTs per Chapter 10, troubleshooting
tables and wiring schematics.
(d) If VBV position indicator is still in error, perform VBV rig check per WP 1312 00.
(5) Ensure VIGV LVDT indicated 27-29 percent during start. See appropriate packager's
manual to verify correct schedule and proper functioning of ECU. Perform the following
and correct before restarting engine:
(a) Inspect VIGV system mechanical components for damaged, loose, or missing hard-
(b) Ensure electrical connectors at VIGV actuators are secure.
(c) Ensure customer interface cables, XN2, VIGV LVDT, left and right, are secure at
electrical panel No. 1.
(d) Perform electrical system wiring check as follows and replace cables as required:
1 Ensure continuity of VIGV electrical cable, left and right, from appropriate actu-
ator to electrical panel No. 1 per wiring schematics in Chapter 10.
2 Ensure continuity of XN2, VIGV LVDT left and right customer interface electri-
cal cables from electrical panel No. 1 to ECU interface panel per wiring sche-
6
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4026 00
3 Verify ohmic value of the VIGV torque motor A/B, and, if installed, torque
motor B/C, at the HCU connectors No. 2 per troubleshooting tables and wiring
schematics in Chapter 10.
4 Verify ohmic value of VIGV actuator LVDTs per troubleshooting tables and
wiring schematics in Chapter 10.
(e) If VIGV position indicator is still in error, perform VIGV rig check per WP 1113 00.
7/(8 Blank)
8 Blank
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4027 00
4WP 4027 00
WORK PACKAGE
BEARING SUMP FLOW TESTS


1-7 ...... 4
8 Blank ...... 4
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Bearing Sump Flow Tests ........................................................................................................... 3
Change 4 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4027 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for air flow testing of the lubrication system.
None required.

Tester, Lube Jet Flow 2C6486G02
None required.
None required.
2 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4027 00
6. Bearing Sump Flow Tests.
WARNING
Do not deform hoses if lowering manifold lower section to gain
clearance for installation of manifold upper section. Failure to
comply may result in hose or fuel nozzle damage.
A. Before performing bearing sump flow tests, perform the following:
(1) Verify gas turbine will be inoperable during test.
(2) Shut off main fuel inlet valve per packager’s manual.
(3) Deactivate fire extinguishing system per packager’s manual. Enclosure door must remain
open.
(4) Shut off lube oil supply to gas turbine.
B. Ensure that correct size orifice for area to be flow tested is installed on lube flow tester,
2C6486. See table 1.
C. Connect lube flow tester, 2C6486, to a source of clean, dry compressed air and to connection
for area to be flow tested. See figures 1 and 2, and table 1.
WARNING
and fittings.
D. Flow test engine frames and gearboxes with clean, dry air at 75 to 85°F (23.9 to 29.4°C) at a
pressure of 40 psig (275.8 kPa). Compare measurements with limits specified in table 1.
Replace component, module, or engine, as required, if flow limits are exceeded.
2
1
Change 4 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4027 00
Table 1. Bearing Sump Flow Test Requirements
Connection Orifice Flow Limits

Area (See ) Size Min Max
A-sump Front frame aft 0.094 inch 24 psig 27 psig
face at 8:00 o’clock (2.39 mm) (165 kPa) (186 kPa)
position (ALF). -8 to
-4 reducer required
B-, C-sump Compressor rear 0.094 inch 23.5 psig 26.5 psig
frame forward of fuel (2.39 mm) (162.0 kPa) (182.7 kPa)
nozzles at 8:00
o’clock position
(ALF). -10 to -4
reducer required
D-, E-sump Aft end of lube tray. 0.094 inch 30.2 psig 33.2 psig
-8F to -4M reducer (2.39 mm) (208.2 kPa) (228.9 kPa)
required
-OR-
Turbine rear frame at 0.094 inch 30.2 psig 33.2 psig
5:00 o’clock position (2.39 mm) (208.2 kPa) (228.9 kPa)
(ALF). -8 to -4
reducer required
(sump purge air
fitting must be
removed)
AGB Gearbox front face. 0.094 inch 32 psig 35 psig
-6F to -4M reducer (2.39 mm) (221 kPa) (241 kPa)
required
TGB Right side of TGB 0.094 inch 28 psig 31 psig
(2.39 mm) (193 kPa) (214 kPa)
Radial drive shaft Front frame aft face 0.031 inch 15 psig 18 psig
at 6:00 o’clock (0.787 mm) (103 kPa) (124 kPa)
position (ALF)
Lube pump drive Pump spline lube 0.031 inch 15 psig 18 psig
spline fitting (0.787 mm) (103 kPa) (124 kPa)
Pneumatic starter Pneumatic starter oil 0.031 inch 15 psig 18 psig
in fitting (0.787 mm) (103 kPa) (124 kPa)
4 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4027 00
Figure 1. Engine Connections for Lube Flow Tester, 2C6486 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 4 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4027 00
Figure 1. Engine Connections for Lube Flow Tester, 2C6486 (Sheet 2 of 2)
6 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4027 00
Figure 2. Lube Jet Flow Tester, 2C6486

8 Blank Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4028 00
0WP 4028 00
WORK PACKAGE
VARIABLE STATOR VANE OFF-SCHEDULE
INSPECTION


1-4 ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Variable Stator Vane Off-Schedule Operation Inspection........................................................... 3
1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4028 00
1. Introduction.
Engines operated with compressor stators with misassembled, bent, or broken lever arms with
broken connector links, or with actuation rings with elongated lever arm pin holes will result in
an off-schedule vane condition. This condition requires special handling of compressor rotor
blades in the stages adjacent to the vane stage containing the discrepant lever arm or connector
link.
Title Number
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Rotor Blades Replacement WP 2413 00

Gage, Sight - VSV Actuation Arms 2C6962G05
Gage, Sight - VSV Actuation Arms 2C6966G07
Gage, Sight - VSV Stage 5 Actuation Arms 2C8016G02
None required.
None required.
2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4028 00
6. Variable Stator Vane Off-Schedule Operation Inspection.
A. Inspect variable stator vane (VSV) lever arms as follows:
(1) Using sight gage tools, determine amount of off-schedule. Use sight gage, 2C6962, for
lever arms assembled to connecting links at the 3:00 and 9:00 o'clock positions. Use
sight gages, 2C6966 and 2C8016, for lever arms assembled to actuation rings. See
figure 1.
(2) Locate the gage over vane tangs and around retaining nut and sleeve. The clear plexiglass
arm extends over the lever arm and has lines scribed at 0 degrees ± 2 degrees, and
± 4 degrees. The centerline at 0 degrees is scribed on both top and bottom. To properly
view through the gage, the centerlines must line up. The angle of bend is determined by
noting where the center of the pin or rivet is viewed among the scribed lines.
B. If an off-schedule condition is found, proceed as follows:
(1) Record affected stage and number of degrees of off-schedule condition.
(2) Complete corrective action requirements per table 1.

Table 1. VSV Off-Schedule Corrective Action
Condition Corrective Action

1. Off-schedule is 2 degrees or less No action required
2. Off-schedule is more than 2 degrees, but Replace defective VSV actuation
less than 4 degrees components
3. Off-schedule is 4 degrees or more, or has
broken connector link:
a. Inlet guide vanes Replace two downstream stages of HPC
rotor blades per WP 2413 00
b. Stage 1 vane Replace one upstream and two downstream
stages of HPC rotor blades per WP 2413 00
c. Stages 2 - 5 vanes Replace one upstream and one downstream
stages of HPC rotor blades per WP 2413 00
1
3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4028 00
Figure 1. Checking VSV Lever Arms for Circumferential Bending
4
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4029 00
2WP 4029 00
WORK PACKAGE
ACOUSTIC SIGNAL CONDITIONER CALIBRATION AND
CHECKOUT PROCEDURE


1-5 ...... 2
6 Blank ...... 2
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Acoustics Signal Conditioner Calibration and Checkout ........................................................... 3
Change 2 1
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4029 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for calibration and checkout for acoustics signal
conditioners using a TSU 109 Charge Generator. The charge generator outputs a sinusoidal
picoCoulomb (pC) charge, using magnitudes dialed on the potentiometer and frequency dialed
on the counter. The input magnitude is in peak levels (not peak-to-peak). All calibration check
values are in units to be set on the TSU 109, and the expected output is read at the control
monitor as peak-to-peak.
Title Number
Acoustic Sensor Replacement WP 1611 00

Generator, Charge Cable with Mating TSU 109
Vibrometer Lemo Connector
None required.
None required.
2 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4029 00
6. Acoustics Signal Conditioner Calibration and Checkout.
A. Check TSU 109 charge generator, figure 1, as follows:

1
(1) Ensure CHECK BAT/OPERATION toggle switch (1) in centered in OFF position.
(2) Check battery as follows:
(a) Push CHECK BAT/OPERATION toggle switch (1) up. If batteries are charged,
both +9V and -9V LED (3) will light.
(b) If LEDs (3) do not light, replace batteries.
(c) Return switch (1) to center (OFF) position.
NOTE
The off-engine cable would normally mate to the acoustic sensor.
(3) Install cable (2) with mating Vibrometer Lemo connector, between TSU 109 charge
generator and off-engine cable.
B. Operate TSU 109 charge generator as follows:
(1) Push CHECK BAT/OPERATION toggle switch (1) down to operate TSU 109 charge
generator.
(2) Set output power (O/P) switch (4) in SYM position and set output to 16 pC peak.
(3) Set frequency adjustment (5) at 600 Hz.
(4) Set multiplier switch (6) to nx1.
NOTE
There is a locking mechanism on the potentiometer which must be

moved counterclockwise to allow potentiometer to turn freely.
(5) Unlock potentiometer and turn knob (7) to adjust AMPLITUDE until digit in window
corresponds to first digit (tens) of set point charge value, table 1, and hundred scaled but-
ton of potentiometer to number corresponding to second digit (units) of set point charge
value. Lock potentiometer.
(6) Record signal conditioner output value. Peak-to-peak should equal 2.0 psia (13.8 kPa).
Change 2 3
GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4029 00
Figure 1. TSU 109 Charge Generator Operation
4 Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4029 00
Table 1. Acoustic Sensor Calibration Points
Recorded Signal
TSU 109 TSU 109 Expected Signal Recorded Signal Conditioner
Input Amplitude Equivalent Output Conditioner Conditioner Output
(pC peak) (psi peak-peak) Output (mA) Output (mA) (psi peak-peak)
[1]6 2 7.2
[3]2 4 10.4
[4]8 6 13.6
[6]4 8 16.8
[8]0 10 20.0
NOTE
• Information in bracket is the digit shown in amplitude window.
• The Vibrometer RSI signal conditioner should have been cali-

brated at the factory for a sensor with an output of 16 pC/psi peak
and a range of 0 to 10 psi peak-peak. This range has been used to
determine the expected milliAmp level in the table above.
• Typically, OEM's use 4-20 mA outputs to their control system. The

above expected mA output levels have been provided for your con-
venience. If there is a better way at the control system of determin-
ing the output level, feel free to use it.
(7) Repeat substeps (1) through (7) until all values in table 1 are checked. If values do not
meet expected signal conditioner output value of table 1, replace acoustic signal condi-
tioner, WP 1611 00.

6 Blank Change 2
LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4030 00
5
WP 4030 00
WORK PACKAGE
INDIVIDUAL FUEL NOZZLE FLOW TEST


1 - 17 ...... 5
18 Blank . . . . . . 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Fuel Nozzle Flow Test Analysis ................................................................................................. 17

Fuel Nozzle Flow Test With Fuel Hoses Installed ...................................................................... 3
Individual Fuel Nozzle Flow Retest Without Fuel Hose Connected to Nozzle .......................... 13
Change 5 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4030 00
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for testing individual installed fuel nozzles for blockage
by performing a flow test. During this test, the calibration data establishes the limit of the accept-
able supply pressure for each circuit and compensates for existing environmental conditions. If
the supply pressure is lower than the value established by the calibration value for that circuit, the
fuel nozzle opening has some blockage.
Title Number
Fuel System Replacement WP 1510 00
Dual Fuel System Replacement WP 1511 00

Test Stand, Flow - Fuel Nozzle 1C9439G03
Adapters, Test Stand - Flow Fuel Nozzle 1C9449G01
Adapters, Test Stand - Flow Fuel Nozzle 1C9449G02
None required.
None required.
2 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4030 00
6. Fuel Nozzle Flow Test With Fuel Hoses Installed.
NOTE
This procedure flow tests the fuel circuits with a minimum amount of
disassembly. If the tests indicate a supply pressure of 2 percent over
the average fuel nozzle pressure, there may be a leak in the fuel nozzle
or fuel hose. Test the individual nozzle per paragraph 7.
A. Position control valve (figure 1) on control panel to CLOSED position.
WARNING
Ensure regulators are counterclockwise (CCW), to prevent high

pressure air damage to equipment and personnel.
B. Turn pressure regulator valve knob CCW to ensure pressure transducers are not overpressur-
ized.
NOTE
If shop air is not available, then nitrogen (in tank with maximum pres-
sure of 3,000.0 psi [20,684.3 kPa]) can be used but requires use of an
extra regulator, 1C9439P48, provided in the tool's storage case.
Attach the regulator to the nitrogen tank and set the output pressure to
100.0 psi (689.5 kPa). Otherwise, use of the tool is the same as when
shop air is used.
C. Install supply hose (1, figure 2) between filter (2) and shop air or nitrogen. Install supply
hose (3) between filter and inlet connection on control panel (figure 1). Note maximum inlet
pressure is limited to 120.0 psi (827.4 kPa).
D. Connect power cable plug to 110 or 220 volt power supply and turn ON/OFF power switch to
ON position. Ensure that channels 1 and 2 are reading atmospheric pressure.
NOTE
Channels 1 and 2 should agree within 0.15 psi (1.0 kPa). Absolute
accuracy of pressure is not critical to this test but consistency is criti-
cal. If reading drifts with time, calibration or service of manometer
may be required.
E. Set manometer to channel 2 to read SYSTEM PRESSURE. Depress HOLD button when
channel 2 is being displayed.
F. Connect one end of outlet hose (4, figure 2) assembly to outlet connection nipple on control
panel.
2
1
Change 5 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4030 00
Figure 1. Test Stand, 1C9439, Setup for Fuel Nozzle Flow Test
G. Establish calibration (local conditions) limits for each circuit as follows:
(1) Create form to record calibration points and data points. See typical form (table 1).
(2) Determine part number of fuel nozzle to be tested. Using fuel nozzle part number, deter-
mine calibration nipple identification on (table 2). Select appropriate calibration nipple
from flow fuel nozzle test stand adapters, 1C9449, for circuit being evaluated.
(3) Connect outlet hose assembly (4, figure 2) to selected calibration nipple.
(4) Turn control valve (figure 1) to setting 0.022, 0.044, or 0.063 for sonic nozzle circuit
being calibrated (table 2).
(5) Ensure channel 2 or SYSTEM PRESSURE is displayed on manometer. If not, switch

manometer to channel 2.
(6) Adjust pressure regulator valve on control panel to change system pressure as read on
channel 2 of manometer to 19.0 psia (131 kPa). Ensure readout is steady-state reading.
(7) Change manometer to channel 1 by pressing SCAN button to change channel and press
HOLD button to hold channel. Record supply pressure for calibration fixture being
evaluated.
4 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4030 00
Figure 2. Test Stand Setup for Fuel Nozzle Flow Test
Change 5 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4030 00
Table 1. Sample Form for Fuel Nozzle Flow Test Calibration and Test Data Recording
Engine Fuel Nozzle Sonic Nozzle Calibration Tested

Serial Fuel Nozzle Serial Circuit Supply Supply
Number Part Number Number Tested Pressure Pressure Pass or Fail
6 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4030 00
Table 2. Flow Test Requirements
Fuel Nozzle Calibration Sonic Nipple Control

Model Part Number Cups Effect Area Nipple Circuit Valve Setting
PD GAS L38056P01/
CIRCUIT P02 AL
L38061P02 2 0.01287 1C9449P14 (A-RING) 0.063
PD GAS L38056P01/
CIRCUIT P02 AM
L38061P02 2 0.008505 1C9449P11 (B-RING) 0.063
PD GAS L38056P01/
CIRCUIT P02
L38061P02 2 0.00324 1C9449P07 AN (ELBO) 0.063
PD GAS L38057P01/
CIRCUIT P02 AL
L38062P02 3 0.01143 1C9449P13 (A-RING) 0.063
PD GAS L38057P01/
CIRCUIT P02 AM
L38062P02 3 0.01064 1C9449P17 (B-RING) 0.063
PD GAS L38057P01/
CIRCUIT P02 AN
L38062P02 3 0.01143 1C9449P13 (C-RING) 0.063
PD LIQ
CIRCUIT L38061P02 2 0.003057 1C9449P06 A 0.044
PD LIQ
CIRCUIT L38061P02 2 0.002621 1C9449P05 B 0.022
PD LIQ
CIRCUIT L38062P02 3 0.003057 1C9449P06 A 0.044
PD LIQ
CIRCUIT L38062P02 3 0.002621 1C9449P05 B 0.022
PD LIQ
CIRCUIT L38062P02 3 0.002621 1C9449P05 C 0.022
Change 5 7

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4030 00
WARNING
Pressure of 100 psig (689.5 kPa) exists in the supply lines. Relieve
pressure to prevent injury when disconnecting fittings.
(8) Turn control valve to CLOSED position, and close pressure regulator. Always relieve
pressure in system any time hose connection is changed.
(9) Disconnect outlet hose assembly (4, figure 2) from calibration nipple, 1C9449 (5).
(10) Repeat calibration steps (2) through (9) for other circuits being evaluated.
NOTE
It is recommended to flow test each fuel nozzle in the same ring circuit
before testing the next ring circuit.
H. Disconnect fuel hoses for all nozzles at B-ring manifold (3 places).
I. Test gas system circuits of fuel nozzles as follows:
NOTE
Three circuits on each fuel nozzle are labeled AN, AL, and AM
(figure 3 and figure 4).
(1) Connect end of outlet hose assembly (4, figure 2) not connected to control panel onto
nipple corresponding to sonic circuit being evaluated. See table 2.
(2) Turn control valve (figure 1) to setting 0.022, 0.044, or 0.063 for sonic nozzle position
being tested per table 2. Set manometer to channel 2 to display system pressure, and
increase pressure by adjusting pressure regulator valve slowly, until system pressure is
19.0 psia (131 kPa).
(3) Change to channel 1 on manometer and read SUPPLY PRESSURE for circuit by press-
ing SCAN button to change channel and then hold button to hold channel. Record chan-
nel 1 supply pressure.
8 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4030 00
3
Figure 3. Fuel Nozzle Flow Test With Fuel Hoses Installed
Change 5 9

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4030 00
NOTE
The calibration nipples are sized to correspond with a partially

blocked fuel nozzle (approximately 10 percent blockage). If supply
pressure obtained in the flow check is less than the calibration supply
pressure, then there is more than 10 percent blockage and nozzle
cleaning is required.
(4) Compare supply pressure for this circuit to supply pressure for all the fuel nozzles in the
set by plotting as shown in (figure 5). If supply pressure is lower than average fuel noz-
zle pressure in the set by 2 percent or more, then some blockage exists in the fuel nozzle
and the fuel nozzle should be replaced. If supply pressure is more than 2 percent greater
than average fuel nozzle pressure in the set, then there is a possible leak in the fuel noz-
zle or hose. Retest that nozzle, using paragraph 7, to determine if the leak is in the fuel
nozzle. If test per paragraph 7 shows normal pressure, then hose may have a leak and
should be pressure-tested or replaced. If fuel nozzle pressure remains greater by 2 per-
cent or more than the set average, then replace fuel nozzle and return removed nozzle for
overhaul.
(5) Disconnect outlet hose from nipple.
(6) Remove adapter, coupler, and nipple from fuel hose (figure 3).
(7) Repeat steps (1) through (4) for all fuel nozzles in circuit.
WARNING
Pressure of 100 psig exists in the supply lines. Relieve pressure to pre-
vent injury when disconnecting fittings.
J. Repeat steps H. and I. for A-ring and ELBO/C-ring nozzles.
K. Once all circuits have been evaluated, turn control valve (figure 1) to CLOSED position and
close pressure regulator valve.
L. Turn power switch to OFF and disconnect power cable cord and all hoses.
M. Store all loose items in storage container.
N. Reconnect fuel hose assemblies to ELBO manifold, A-manifold, and B-C-manifold per
WP 1510 00.
5
4
10 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4030 00
Figure 4. Fuel Nozzle Flow Test
Change 5 11

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4030 00
Figure 5. Sample Fuel Nozzle Flow Test Plot
12 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4030 00
7. Individual Fuel Nozzle Flow Retest Without Fuel Hose Connected to Nozzle.
A. Position control valve (figure 1) on control panel to CLOSED position.
WARNING
Ensure regulators are counterclockwise (CCW), to prevent high
pressure air damage to equipment and personnel.
B. Turn pressure regulator valve knob CCW to ensure pressure transducers are not overpressur-
ized.
NOTE
If shop air is not available, then nitrogen (in tank with maximum pres-
sure of 3,000.0 psi [20.684.3 kPa]) can be used but requires use of an
extra regulator, 1C9439P48, provided in the tool’s storage case.
Attach the regulator to the nitrogen tank and set the output pressure to
100.0 psi (689.5 kPa). Otherwise, use of the tool is the same as when
shop air is used.
C. Install supply hose (1, figure 2) between filter (2) and shop air or nitrogen. Install supply
hose (3) between filter and inlet connection on control panel (figure 1). Note maximum inlet
pressure is limited to 120.0 psi (827.4 kPa).
D. Connect power cable plug to 110 or 220 volt power supply and turn ON/OFF power switch to
ON position. Ensure that channels 1 and 2 are reading atmospheric pressure.
NOTE
Channels 1 and 2 should agree within 0.15 psi (1.0 kPa). Absolute
accuracy of pressure is not critical to this test but consistency is criti-
cal. If reading drifts with time, calibration or service of manometer
may be required.
E. Set manometer to channel 2 to read SYSTEM PRESSURE. Depress HOLD button when
channel 2 is being displayed.
F. Connect one end of outlet hose (4, figure 2) assembly to outlet connection nipple on control
panel.
G. Establish calibration (local conditions) limits for each circuit as follows:
(1) Create form to record calibration points and data points. See typical form (table 1).
Change 5 13

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4030 00
(2) Determine part number of fuel nozzle to be tested. Using fuel nozzle part number, deter-
mine calibration, nipple identification on table 2. Select appropriate calibration nipple
from flow fuel nozzle test stand adapters, 1C9449, for circuit being evaluated.
(3) Connect outlet hose assembly (4, figure 2) to selected calibration nipple.
(4) Turn control valve (figure 1) to setting 0.022, 0.044, or 0.063 for sonic nozzle circuit
being calibrated (table 2).
(5) Ensure channel 2 or SYSTEM PRESSURE is displayed on manometer. If not, switch

manometer to channel 2.
(6) Adjust pressure regulator valve on control panel to change system pressure as read on
channel 2 of manometer to 19.0 psia (131 kPa). Ensure readout is steady-state reading.
(7) Change manometer to channel 1 by pressing SCAN button to change channel and press
HOLD button to hold channel. Record supply pressure for calibration fixture being eval-
uated.
WARNING
(8) Turn control valve to CLOSED position, and close pressure regulator. Always relieve
pressure in system any time hose connection is changed.
(9) Disconnect outlet hose assembly (4, figure 2) from calibration nipple, 1C9449 (5).
(10) Repeat calibration steps (2) through (9) for other circuits being evaluated.
H. Remove fuel hoses, acoustic baffles, and fuel nozzle plugs from fuel nozzle to be flow tested
per (WP 1510 00 or WP 1511 00 for dual fuel systems.
I. On dual fuel systems, remove liquid fuel tubes from fuel nozzles per WP 1511 00.
14 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4030 00
J. Test gas system circuits of fuel nozzles as follows:
(1) Using gasket, 1C9449P03, and capscrews, MS16995-78, install adapter plate,
1C9449P02, onto fuel nozzle being evaluated. See figure 3.
NOTE
Adapter plate, 1C9449P02, has three nipples that correspond to the

three circuits on each fuel nozzle. They are labeled An, AL, and AM on
the plate.
(2) Connect end of outlet hose assembly (4, figure 2) not connected to control panel onto
nipple corresponding to sonic circuit being evaluated. See table 2.
19.0 psia (131 kPa).
NOTE
The calibration nipples are sized to correspond with a partially

blocked fuel nozzle (approximately 10 percent blockage). If supply
pressure obtained in the flow check is less than the calibration supply
pressure, then there is more than 10 percent blockage and nozzle
cleaning is required.
(5) To determine if there is blockage in circuit, compare supply pressure fro this circuit to
supply pressure determined for corresponding test stand adapter, step G. If supply pres-
sure is lower than calibration supply pressure, some blockage in fuel nozzle exists.
Replace fuel nozzle and return removed nozzle for overhaul. No blokage existes if sup-
ply pressure, when connected to fuel nozzle, is higher than supply pressure in corre-
sponding circuit in calibration block.
Change 5 15

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4030 00
(6) Repeat steps (1) through (5) for all circuits being evaluated.
WARNING
K. Once all circuits have been evaluated, turn control valve (figure 1) to CLOSED position and
L. Disconnect outlet hose assembly from nipple on adapter plate and remove adapter plate from
fuel nozzle.
M. On duel fuel systems, test liquid fuel system circuits of fuel nozzles as follows:
(1) Using adapters and nipples from test stand adapter, 1C9449, install adapters onto fuel
nozzle nipples. Tighten adapters to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.9 N·m). Attach nipples to
adapters figure 4.
NOTE
The 3-cup fuel nozzle has three nipples. They are labeled A, B, and C
per figure 4. The 2-cup fuel nozzles have two nipples. They are
labeled A and B per figure 4
(2) Connect end of outlet hose assembly not connected to control panel onto nipple corre-
sponding to sonic circuit being evaluated (4, figure 2). See table 2.
19.0 psig (131 kPa)
(5) To determine if there is blockage in circuit, compare supply pressure for this circuit to
supply pressure determined for corresponding test stand adapter, step G. If supply pres-
sure is lower then calibration supply pressure, some blockage in fuel nozzle exists.
Replace fuel nozzle and return removed nozzle for overhaul. No blockage exists if sup-
ply pressure, when connected to fuel nozzle, is higher than supply pressure in corre-
sponding circuit in calibration block.
(6) Repeat steps (1) through (5) for all circuits being evaluated.
16 Change 5

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4030 00
N. Once all circuits have been evaluated, turn control valve (figure 1) to CLOSED position and
O. Disconnect outlet hose assembly from nipple on adapter. Remove nipple and adapter from
fuel nozzle.
P. Turn power switch to OFF and disconnect power cable cord and all hoses.
Q. Store all loose items in storage container.
R. Install fuel hoses, acoustic baffles, and fuel nozzle plugs per WP1510 00 or WP 1511 00.
S. On dual fuel systems, install liquid fuel tubes to fuel nozzles per WP 1511 00.
8. Fuel Nozzle Flow Test Analysis.
A. Plot the supply pressure, obtained from step 6.I. or 7.J., results for individual fuel nozzles in a
given circuit (AN, AL, or AM). See (figure 5) for sample plot.
B. Calculate average supply pressure for circuit being plotted by dividing total of pressures
obtained by number of fuel nozzles tested. When calculating average, do not use values from
any low flowing or high flowing nozzles (outside of + 2 percent range).
C. Calculate 2 percent above and below average supply pressure calculated in step B., and plot
4 percent bandwidth.
D. Replace any fuel nozzle having supply pressure that falls outside 4 percent bandwidth calcu-
lated in step C., per WP 1510 00 or WP 1511 00.

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4031 00
4
WP 4031 00
WORK PACKAGE
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE CHECK


1-6 ...... 4
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Fuel System Pressure Check ....................................................................................................... 3
Change 4 1

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4031 00
1. Introduction.
This work package provides instructions for pressure-checking the fuel system.
Title Number
Fuel System Replacement WP 1510 00
Dual Fuel System Replacement WP 1511 00

Set, Closure 1C9450G01
Detector, Gas - Hand-Held Local Purchase

Seal, Manifold Hose L42604P01 or 30
L42604P02 ALT
2 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4031 00
6. Fuel System Pressure Check.
CAUTION
Minimize bending of hoses during this operation or damage may
result.
A. Remove 30 fuel hose assemblies and fuel nozzle seals from fuel nozzles per WP 1510 00 or
WP 1511 00.
NOTE
The blank-off plates have a gasket glued to them. Ensure gasket faces
fuel hose.
B. Install 30 blank-off plates, P02, from closure set, 1C9450, between fuel hose flanges and fuel
nozzles. See figure 1.
1
Figure 1. Installation of Closure Set, 1C9450
Change 4 3

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4031 00
NOTE
Capscrews and washers supplied with blank-off plates are installed

through hose flanges, blank-off plates, and into fuel nozzle tapped
holes.
C. Lightly coat capscrew threads and contact faces with thread lubricant.
CAUTION
• Excessive torque on one capscrew will result in fuel hose assem-
bly pad improperly seating onto fuel nozzle.
• Improper seating of fuel hose assembly will result in fuel

leakage.
• Do not exceed 15 lb in. (1.7 N·m) of torque during initial seating

of hose assembly plate onto fuel nozzle, or distortion may occur.
D. Using crisscross pattern, install four capscrews and washers to seat fuel hose assembly onto
fuel nozzle. Ensure capscrews are lightly tightened.
E. Final tighten capscrews securing fuel hose assembly and blank-off plate to fuel nozzle as
follows:
(1) Using crisscross pattern, tighten four capscrews to 100 lb in. (11.3 N·m) of torque.
(2) Using crisscross pattern, tighten four capscrews to 20 lb ft (27 N·m) of torque.
(3) Using crisscross pattern, tighten four capscrews to 33 lb ft (45 N·m) of torque.
(4) Verify final torque of 33 lb ft (45 N·m) has been applied to four capscrews.
F. Prepare package as follows:
(1) Ventilate package to eliminate any residual vapors.
(2) Ensure package ventilation fans are off. Check package detectors for presence of gas.
(3) Follow site safety requirements.
(4) Using hand-held gas detector, take a vapor reading at package door before entering. If
gas vapors are too strong, turn on vent fans to purge package.
(5) Post a person at package door.
4 Change 4

LM6000 PD GEK 105061
WP 4031 00
NOTE
If at any time system pressure drops below 350 psia (2,413 kPa),
repressurize to 500 psia (3,447 kPa).
G. Pressure-test fuel system as follows:
(1) Close vent valve between block valves.
WARNING
Fuel system is pressurized. Use care to prevent injury when dis-
connecting lines.
(2) Pressurize fuel system to 500 psia (3,447 kPa) by opening block valves. If necessary in
order to achieve pressure in manifold, open metering valves.
(3) Close block valves to trap pressure in system, and open vent valve.
(4) Monitor GP1, GP2I, GP2P, and GP2O manifold pressures for pressure decay.
(5) Using hand-held gas detector, check all joints up to staging valves.
H. After successful pressure-testing per above, check B-ring fittings and hoses. B-ring hose is
forward-most hose on fuel nozzle. Check entire length of hose, particularly where flex por-
tion meets rigid section. Tag any hose which is leaking for later replacement.
NOTE
Continuing pressure decay may indicate a leak in that portion of sys-

tem and requires close inspection of the portion of system that is fed by
staging valve that was opened.
I. Open staging valves and check appropriate hoses and fittings as they are opened. Refer to
table 1). Continue to monitor manifold pressure for 5 minutes. Note how much system pres-
sure drops immediately after opening valve. After initial drop, there should be no further
drop in system pressure.
J. After all hoses and fittings have been checked (and repaired/replaced as necessary), open
block valve nearest metering valves to vent system.
Change 4 5

GEK 105061 LM6000 PD
WP 4031 00
CAUTION
Minimize bending hoses during this operation or damage may result.
K. Remove blank-off plates, P02, and attach fuel hose assemblies to fuel nozzles using new seals
per WP 1510 00 or WP 1511 00.
Table 1. Flow Test Requirements
Staging Valve No. Ring Hose Check Fuel Nozzles GP1 Results
2 A Middle 2/3/4/5/6/7 - OK/Leak
4 A Middle 8/9/10/11/12/13 - OK/Leak
7 A Middle 14/15/16/17/18/19 - OK/Leak
9 A Middle 20/21/22/23/24/25 - OK/Leak
11 A Middle 26/27/28/29/30/1 - OK/Leak
1 C Aft 2/4/30 - OK/Leak
3 C Aft 6/8/10 - OK/Leak
5 C Aft 12/16/24 - OK/Leak
8 C Aft 18/20/22 - OK/Leak
10 C Aft 24/26/28 - OK/Leak
6 ELBO Aft All 2-cup (odd nos.) - OK/Leak
6 Change 4

Gas Turbines ICN NO. GEK 105061-19
LM6000
GAS TURBINE
INTERIM CHANGE NOTICE
The information contained in this document is GE proprietary information and is disclosed

in confidence. It is the property of GE and shall not be used, disclosed to others or repro-
duced without the express written consent of GE, including, but without limitation, it is not to
be used in the creation, manufacture, development, or derivation of any repairs, modifica-
tions, spare parts, design, or configuration changes or to obtain any government or regula-
tory approval to do so. If consent is given for reproduction in whole or in part, this notice
and the notice set forth on each page of this document shall appear in any such reproduc-
tion in whole or in part. The information contained in this document may also be controlled
by U.S. export control laws. Unauthorized export or re-export is prohibited.
COPYRIGHT 2003 General Electric Company, USA
PUBLICATION: GEK 105061 On-Site Operation and Maintenance

TITLE:
Manual for General Electric
LM6000 PD Series Gas Turbines
DATED: 1 September 1997 CHANGED: 30 May 2003
NATURE OF Update the Gas Turbine Inlet

CHANGE: Inspection table. ICN DATE: 2 February 2004
1. Amends Chapter 12, page 12-3, Table 12-1 to reformat table and to correct Inlet and Coupling
Inspection information and add GT Starter Oil Return Line Screen Inspection information.
2. Amends Chapter 12, page 12-4, Table 12-1 to reformat table and update notes.
3. Amends WP 4010 00, page 7, Table 1 to replace step 3., with updated FOD Sock inspection criteria
only.
4. Amends WP 4010 00, page 7, Table 1 to add step 3A., with updated FOD Screen inspection
criteria.
For CD-Rom: GEK 108803, record the ICN information in table located inside of case label.
RETAIN THIS ICN

FILE THIS PAGE IN FRONT OF TITLE PAGE. PAGE 1 OF 4

Cincinnati, Ohio 45215-6301
ICN NO. GEK 105061-19
1. Chapter 12, page 12-3, Table 12-1, is reformatted and amended as shown.
Table 12-1 Preventive Maintenance and Servicing Checks
Semiannually (Note 2) Procedure

Maintenance Item (Note 1) (and as otherwise noted) Reference
Borescope Inspection X & (Note 4) WP 4015 00
Inlet and Coupling Inspection X & (Note 3 & 4) WP 4010 00
Enclosure Inspection X & (Note 3 & 4) Packager’s Manual
External Engine Inspection X & (Note 3 & 4) WP 4012 00
Lube and Scavenge Pump Inlet Screen Inspec- X & (Note 4) WP 4020 00
tion
GT Starter Oil Return Line Screen Inspection X & (Note 4) Packager’s Manual
(If installed)
Lube Oil Test X & (Note 4) WP 4016 00
Chip Detector Check X & (Note 3 & 4) WP 4017 00
Variable Inlet Guide Vane Rig Check X & (Note 4) WP 1113 00
Variable Stator Vane Rig Check X & (Note 4) WP 1411 00
Variable Bypass Door Rig Check X & (Note 4) WP 1312 00
Variable-Geometry Pump (HCU) Filter Check X & (Note 4) WP 4021 00
Ignition System Functional Check X & (Note 4) WP 4023 00
Igniter Plug Inspection X & (Note 3 & 4) WP 4023 00
T48 Thermocouple Inspection X & (Note 3 & 4) WP 1711 00
P48 Inlet Probe Inspection X & (Note 3 & 4) WP 1712 00
Fuel Metering Valves - Functional Check X & (Note 4) Packager’s Manual
Fuel Shutoff/Bleed Valves - Functional Check X & (Note 4) Packager’s Manual
Fuel/Purge and Solenoid Valves System Check X & (Note 4) Packager’s Manual
Compressor Cleaning (Water-Wash) (Note 3 & 4) WP 4014 00
Vibration Monitoring System Check X & (Note 3 & 4) WP 4024 00
Exhaust and Coupling Inspection X & (Note 3 & 4) WP 4013 00
Stage 1 HPC blade replacement (systems with Every 16,000 hours of WP 2413 00
HPC SPRINT™ only) SPRINT™ operation
Stage 2, 3, and 4 HPC blade chord length At same time as stage 1 HPC WP 2413 00
checks (systems with HPC SPRINT™ only) blade replacement
Retain this ICN Page 2 of 4

Insert this page facing page 12-3
ICN NO. GEK 105061-19
2. Chapter 12, page 12-4, Table 12-1, is reformated and notes updated as shown.
Table 12-1 Preventive Maintenance and Servicing Checks (Continued)
Semiannually (Note 2) Procedure

Maintenance Item (Note 1) (and as otherwise noted) Reference
Stage 1 HPC blade replacement (systems with Every 16,000 hours of HP WP 2413 00
LPC+HPC SPRINT™ only) SPRINT™ operation or
25,000 hours of total
SPRINT™ operation,
whichever comes first
Stage 2, 3, and 4 HPC blade chord length At same time as stage 1 HPC WP 2413 00
checks (systems with LPC+HPC SPRINT™ blade replacement
only)
Stage 1 LPC blade inspection Every 25,000 hours of LP TBD
SPRINT™ operation
NOTES:
1. Inspections within the enclosure shall not be made with engine operating above idle speed.
2. Semiannual inspections shall be made with the engine shut down.
3. Inspections shall be made anytime maintenance is performed in the area or when the area is accessible.
4. Inspections shall be made as required per troubleshooting procedures.

Insert this page facing page 12-4
ICN NO. GEK 105061-19
3. WP 4010 00, page 7, Table 1, step 3., is amended as shown.
4. WP 4010 00, page 7, Table 1, adds step 3A., as shown.
Table 1 Gas Turbine Inlet Inspection (Continued)

3. Inlet FOD Sock for:
a. Tears and holes None allowed Any amount Replace sock per
packager’s manual
b. Build up of None allowed Any amount Clean
debris and
deposits
c. Coverage and No missing coverage Any amount Cover and secure sock
security of sock allowed across entire screen per
across entire No non-secure areas packager’s manual
screen allowed
3A. Inlet FOD Screen for:
a. Damage and – – Refer to packager's
corrosion manual for limits and
corrective action
b. Cracked, None allowed Any amount Replace screen per
broken, or packager’s manual
missing pieces
c. Coverage and No missing coverage Any amount Cover and secure
security of allowed screen across entire
screen across No non-secure areas inlet area per pack-
entire inlet area allowed ager’s manual

Insert this page facing page 7

GEK105061

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GEK105061

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GEK105061

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Industrial AeroDerivative

LM6000 Dry Low GEK 105061

0 ON-SITE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS GE PROPRIETARY

COPYRIGHT (2001) GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, USA

GE INDUSTRIAL AERODERIVATIVE GAS TURBINES

1 List of Effective Pages

Total number of pages in this volume is 368 consisting of the following:

Page No. Change No. Page No. Change No.

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table of Contents (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table of Contents (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table of Contents (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table of Contents (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table of Contents (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table of Contents (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table of Contents (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table of Contents (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table of Contents (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table of Contents (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table of Contents (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

List of Illustrations (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

List of Illustrations (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

List of Illustrations (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

List of Tables (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

1-4 Changes to Technical GE Aircraft Engines

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Figure 1-1 Publication Change Request

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table 1-1 Metric and SI Unit Conversion Factors

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table 1-2 Temperature Conversion Chart

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table 1-3 Conversion Table - Fractions to Decimals

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table 1-4 Abbreviations

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

Table 1-4 Abbreviations (Continued)

GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.

1-7.2 Fire Hazards 1-7.4 Heated/Chilled Part Hazards